8 PDF

FANUC Series 0+-PD
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-64554EN/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan. Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license
of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the
product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
B-64554EN/01 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines
equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to
control the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this
manual and relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING .......................................................s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING ................................................................s-4
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE .........................................................................s-6
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64554EN/01
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to
the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate.
The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave unexpectedly,
possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or
machine itself, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not need
to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself,
or injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the
MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other
special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other
than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
2 The OPERATOR’S MANUAL and programming manual supplied with a CNC
unit provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one machine
model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the manuals may not
actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of the
machine if in doubt.
s-2
CAUTION
3 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine-tool
builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions.
4 The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in
the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off.
Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to
delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of
deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform
programming, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear
movement between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully
confirmed before performing programming. Positioning involves rapid traverse. If
the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Function involving a rotation axis
When programming normal-direction (perpendicular) control, pay careful
attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in
the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force
causes the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted
securely. Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement
units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current
position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine which measurement
units are being used. Attempting to perform an operation with invalid data
specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
s-3
WARNING
5 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as
required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even
if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
CAUTION
1 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice
versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
2 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or
a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the
descriptions of the respective functions for details.
3 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip
is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will
be executed without performing a skip.
4 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position
return command is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is
temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to
operate your machine, read the supplied OPERATOR’S MANUAL carefully, such that you are fully
familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool
and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have
been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position
return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual
reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s-4
WARNING
3 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100,
applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may
damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
4 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable), the
speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
5 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing
injury to the user.
6 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece
coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control
of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
7 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination with the
MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine
operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change, and jog feed
commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
8 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result, the
servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function for
reasons such as an MDI panel problem. So, when the motors must be stopped,
use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to ensure security.
CAUTION
1 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting
the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of
parameters, and absolute/incremental command mode.
2 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled
using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the
machine in this case.
s-5
CAUTION
3 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry
run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
4 Cutter radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because cutter radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered
from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in cutter radius compensation
mode, pay particular attention to the tool path when automatic operation is
subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of the corresponding functions
for details.
5 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if
machining is resumed under the control of that program. Basically, do not
modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program while it is in use.
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must
retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external
power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “IV. MAINTENANCE - Method of replacing battery” in the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL for details of the battery replacement procedure.
s-6
WARNING
2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine
(CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this
work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, only those personnel
who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this
work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a
week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the Section “IV. MAINTENANCE - Method of replacing battery” in the
OPERATOR’S MANUAL for details of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the
cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous
s-7
B-64554EN/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ............................ s-3
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING...................................... s-4
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................... s-6
I. GENERAL
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3
1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL.......................................................... 5
1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA ...................................................... 5
II. PROGRAMMING
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 9
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS
FIGURE-INTERPOLATION ......................................................................... 10
1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION ............................................................................. 12
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT ................................................ 12
1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) ....................................................12
1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC -
Coordinate System .................................................................................................13
1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute and
Incremental Programming).....................................................................................15
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL
FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 16
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION ...... 16
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ................................................................... 17
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE...................................................... 19
2 CONTROLLED AXES ........................................................................... 20
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES ........................................................... 20
2.2 NAMES OF AXES ....................................................................................... 20
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM................................................................................ 20
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE.................................................................................... 21
3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ...................................... 22
3.1 G CODE LIST .............................................................................................. 23
4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS............................................................ 25
4.1 POSITIONING (G00) ................................................................................... 25
4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)................................................................ 26
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).................................................. 28
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ..................................................... 32
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33)............................................................................... 33
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64554EN/01
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) ............................................................................ 35

4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33) ............................................................. 36
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT .............................. 36
4.9 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP .................................................................................. 36
5 FEED FUNCTIONS ............................................................................... 40
5.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 40
5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ..................................................................................... 41
5.2.1 Rapid Traverse Rate by F Command .....................................................................41
5.2.2 F1-digit (Programmable Rapid Traverse Override) ...............................................42
5.3 CUTTING FEED .......................................................................................... 42
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL .............................................................. 43
5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64) ........................................................44
5.4.2 Automatic Corner Override....................................................................................45
5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62) ...................................................... 45
5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ........................................................... 47
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY
AXIS ............................................................................................................ 47
5.6 DWELL ........................................................................................................ 50
6 REFERENCE POSITION....................................................................... 52
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN............................................................. 52
7 COORDINATE SYSTEM ....................................................................... 56
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM............................................................ 56
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ...................................................... 58
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System................................................................58
7.2.2 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System ............................................................59
7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System ..............................................................60
7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1).......................................................61
7.2.5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting ...................................................................63
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................................................ 63
7.4 PLANE SELECTION.................................................................................... 65
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION ........................................... 66
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91)............... 66
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) ................................................. 66
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ............................................................ 69
9 PRESS FUNCTION ............................................................................... 71
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)............................................... 71
9.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made..........................................................................71
9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70) .................................................... 73
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION ................................................................................ 73
9.3.1 Circular Nibbling (G68) .........................................................................................75
9.3.2 Linear Nibbling (G69)............................................................................................79
9.3.3 Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling (G69) ..............................80
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION....................................................................... 82
9.4.1 G00 Command in Nibbling Mode..........................................................................82
9.4.2 G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode................................................83
9.4.3 Notes on Nibbling by M Function..........................................................................86
c-2
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION ............................................................... 86

10 S FUNCTION......................................................................................... 87
10.1 SPECIFYING THE S CODE WITH A BINARY CODE ................................. 87
11 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) ........................................................ 88
11.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................................................. 88
11.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT............................................................................. 89
11.3 TOOL OFFSET............................................................................................ 90
11.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS) ........................................... 90
11.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL ...................................................................... 90
11.5.1 Tool Number ..........................................................................................................91
11.5.2 Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the C Axis..........................92
11.5.3 Tool Compensation ................................................................................................92
11.5.4 Operational Notes...................................................................................................93
11.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................................................... 93
11.6.1 Tool Life Management Data ..................................................................................93
11.6.2 Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data ............................................93
11.6.3 Tool Life.................................................................................................................94
12 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................................ 95

12.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)..................................................... 95
12.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK...................................... 97
12.3 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) ........................................ 98
12.4 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER MODE ....... 100
13 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 101
13.1 PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................... 101
13.2 RELATED PARAMETERS......................................................................... 101
13.3 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE
PROGRAMS.............................................................................................. 102
14 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION........................................................... 103
14.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM SECTIONS....... 104
14.2 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION ................................................ 106
14.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99) ..................................................................... 112
15 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ................................... 116
15.1 PATTERN FUNCTION .............................................................................. 116
15.1.1 Base Point Command (G72).................................................................................117
15.1.2 Bolt Hole Circle (G26) .........................................................................................118
15.1.3 Line at Angle (G76) .............................................................................................120
15.1.4 Arc (G77) .............................................................................................................121
15.1.5 Grid (G78, G79) ...................................................................................................122
15.1.6 Share Proofs (G86)...............................................................................................125
15.1.7 Square (G87) ........................................................................................................127
15.1.8 Radius (G88) ........................................................................................................129
15.1.9 Cut at Angle (G89) ...............................................................................................130
15.1.10 Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function .............................................130
15.1.11 Notes on Pattern Functions...................................................................................133
15.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO ..................................................... 134
c-3
15.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ...................................................... 135

15.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION ...................................................................... 141
15.4.1 Storage of Macros ................................................................................................141
15.4.2 Macro Call............................................................................................................142
15.4.3 Nesting Call of Macros.........................................................................................143
15.4.4 Macro Storage Capacity .......................................................................................144
15.4.5 Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers 90 to 99)........................144
15.4.6 Deletion of Stored Macros ...................................................................................145
15.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION .................................................. 145
15.5.1 Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98) ......................................145
15.5.2 Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)..................................................148
15.5.3 Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece Machining ..................................149
15.5.4 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products ......................................150
15.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39) ................................................. 152
15.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND ........................................ 154
15.7.1 Linear Punch Command (G45) ............................................................................154
15.7.2 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)..........................................................157
15.7.3 Controlling the C–axis..........................................................................................158
15.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL ......................................................................... 159
16 COMPENSATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 160
16.1 SCALING (G50, G51) ................................................................................ 160
16.2 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or G150,G151,
G152)......................................................................................................... 166
16.3 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)............................... 170
16.4 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION....................................... 175
16.4.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................175
16.4.2 Tool Movement in Start-up ..................................................................................179
16.4.3 Tool Movement in Offset Mode...........................................................................184
16.4.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel...............................................................202
16.4.5 Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius Compensation............................208
16.4.6 Interference Check ...............................................................................................211
16.4.6.1 Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to occur ..................... 214
16.4.6.2 Interference check alarm function ................................................................... 215
16.4.6.3 Interference check avoidance function ............................................................ 216
16.4.7 Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI..................................................222
16.5 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION
VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ....... 223
16.6 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)..................................... 224
17 CUSTOM MACRO............................................................................... 231
17.1 VARIABLES............................................................................................... 231
17.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES ............................................................................... 236
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION .................................................. 256
17.4 READING PARAMETERS......................................................................... 262
17.5 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS..................................... 263
17.6 BRANCH AND REPETITION..................................................................... 264
17.6.1 Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement) ...........................................................264
17.6.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers ............................................264
17.6.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) ......................................................................265
17.6.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement)............................................................................266
c-4
17.7 MACRO CALL ........................................................................................... 268

17.7.1 Simple Call (G65) ................................................................................................269
17.7.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66) .............................................272
17.7.3 Macro Call Using a G Code .................................................................................273
17.7.4 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions)...................275
17.7.5 Macro Call Using an M Code...............................................................................275
17.7.6 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions) ................276
17.7.7 Subprogram Call Using an M Code .....................................................................277
17.7.8 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions).......278
17.7.9 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code.......................................................................278
17.7.10 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .........................................................279
17.8 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS ................................................... 281
17.9 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS ..................................... 283
17.10 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM MACROS ......... 283
17.11 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS.......................................................... 284
17.12 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................ 287
17.13 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................... 288
17.13.1 Specification Method ...........................................................................................289
17.13.2 Details of Functions..............................................................................................290
18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)................................ 296

18.1 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT ................................................. 296
18.2 TOOL DATA INPUT................................................................................... 298
19 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS................................................ 300
19.1 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G05.1) ......................................... 300
20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS............................................................ 311
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 311
20.1.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control..............................................311
20.1.2 Synchronous Establishment .................................................................................314
20.1.3 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching ....................................................315
20.1.4 Synchronous Error Check ....................................................................................316
20.1.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error Check.................................317
20.1.6 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................318
20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER ..................................................................... 320
20.2.1 Rotary Axis Roll-over ..........................................................................................320
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 321
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)............................................ 321
20.4.1 Simultaneously Controlled Axes..........................................................................322
20.4.2 Increment System .................................................................................................322
20.4.3 Maximum Programmable Dimension ..................................................................322
20.4.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..................................................................322
20.4.5 Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual Reference Point Return ...322
20.4.6 Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command (G90/G91) ..........................323
20.4.7 Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction.................................................323
20.4.8 Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible........................................................323
20.4.9 C–axis Command and its Operation.....................................................................323
20.4.10 Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis Command................................324
20.4.11 C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode....................................................................325
20.4.12 T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis Command .............................325
20.4.13 Compensating the Position of the C–axis.............................................................326
20.4.14 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each Tool Group ........................326
c-5
20.5 RAM-AXIS CONTROL............................................................................... 326

20.5.1 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern........................................................................326
20.5.2 Press Motion by RAM-axis Control.....................................................................327
20.5.3 RAM-axis Up Motion ..........................................................................................327
III. OPERATION
1 GENERAL ........................................................................................... 331
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION.............................................................................. 331
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..... 332
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 333
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 334
1.4.1 Check by Running the Machine ...........................................................................334
1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running the Machine .........336
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM ............................................................................. 336
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA.......................................................... 336
1.7 DISPLAY ................................................................................................... 339
1.7.1 Program Display...................................................................................................339
1.7.2 Current Position Display ......................................................................................340
1.7.3 Alarm Display ......................................................................................................341
1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display ..............................................................341
2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES .................................................................. 343

2.1 POWER ON/OFF....................................................................................... 343
2.1.1 Turning on the Power ...........................................................................................343
2.1.2 Power Disconnection............................................................................................344
2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS............................................................... 344
2.2.1 8.4" LCD/MDI .....................................................................................................345
2.2.2 10.4" LCD ............................................................................................................346
2.2.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ...........................................................................347
2.2.4 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)................................................................................347
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT........................................................... 349
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ........................................................ 350
2.4.1 General Screen Operations ...................................................................................350
2.4.2 Function Keys ......................................................................................................351
2.4.3 Soft Keys ..............................................................................................................352
2.4.4 Key Input and Input Buffer ..................................................................................359
2.4.5 Warning Messages ...............................................................................................360
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES ......................................................................... 360
3 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 362
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 362
3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) ...................................................................................... 363
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED .............................................................................. 364
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 365
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON ......................................................................... 368
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 372
3.6.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment .................................................372
3.6.2 Reference Position Return....................................................................................373
3.6.3 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder ..........................................................................374
3.6.4 Axis Synchronization Control ..............................................................................374
c-6
3.6.5 Axis Control by PMC...........................................................................................375
3.6.6 Note ......................................................................................................................375
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS
(SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 376
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 380
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION ............................................................................ 380
4.2 MDI OPERATION ...................................................................................... 382
4.3 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 385
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION ......................................................................... 387
4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................... 391
4.6 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION ........................................................ 393
4.7 MIRROR IMAGE........................................................................................ 399
5 TEST OPERATION ............................................................................. 401
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK ............................. 401
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................................................................ 402
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE................................................................ 403
5.4 DRY RUN .................................................................................................. 404
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK ........................................................................................ 405
5.6 PUNCH...................................................................................................... 406
5.7 MANUAL PUNCH ...................................................................................... 407
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS......................................................................... 408
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 408
6.2 OVERTRAVEL........................................................................................... 408
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK....................................................................... 409
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ................................................. 412
6.5 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS ................................ 414
6.5.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set ...........................................................415
6.5.1.1 Input data range check ..................................................................................... 415
6.5.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input .................................................................. 416
6.5.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key ............................................. 417
6.5.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program ................................................... 417
6.5.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data........................................................... 418
6.5.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process ........................ 418
6.5.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed ......................................418
6.5.2.1 Display of updated modal information ............................................................ 419
6.5.2.2 Start check signal............................................................................................. 419
6.5.2.3 Axis status display ........................................................................................... 420
6.5.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block ................................................ 420
6.5.2.5 Data range check ............................................................................................. 421
6.5.2.6 Maximum incremental value check ................................................................. 421
6.5.2.7 Warning display during a reset in program operation ..................................... 422
6.5.3 Setting Screen.......................................................................................................422
6.5.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen............................................... 423
6.5.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen ....................................................................... 424
6.5.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen .................................................. 426
6.6 SAFETY ZONE CHECK ............................................................................ 427
6.6.1 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type A) ........................428
6.6.2 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type B).........................429
6.6.3 Setting the Safety Zone ........................................................................................430
c-7
6.6.4 Setting the Tool Shape Area.................................................................................430

6.6.5 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone ..................................................................431
6.6.6 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ........................................................432
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS.................................. 434

7.1 ALARM DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 434
7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ..................................................................... 436
7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY................................................... 437
7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN ................................................... 438
8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ....................................................................... 440
8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD ........................................ 441
8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN ....................................................... 443
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program.....................................................................443
8.2.1.1 Inputting a program ......................................................................................... 443
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program....................................................................................... 444
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters....................................................................445
8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters ........................................................................................ 445
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters ..................................................................................... 445
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data...................................................................446
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data......................................................................................... 446
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data ...................................................................................... 447
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ...................................447
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data .......................................................... 447
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data ....................................................... 448
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data ..................................... 448
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables .............................449
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables ..................................................... 449
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables .................................................. 450
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ..........................451
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data.................................................... 451
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data................................................. 452
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data................................................452
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data .................................................................... 452
8.2.8 Inputting Outputting Tool Data............................................................................453
8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data............................................................................................ 453
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data ......................................................................................... 453
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data ............................................................................... 454
8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN.............................................. 454
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program ...........................................................................455
8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters....................................................................456
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data...................................................................457
8.3.4 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data..........................................458
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables ....................................459
8.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ..........................460
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data................................................460
8.3.8 File Format ...........................................................................................................461
8.4 MEMORY CARD SCREEN........................................................................ 461
8.4.1 Displaying the Memory Card Screen ...................................................................461
8.4.2 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................462
8.4.3 Inputting/Outputting a File...................................................................................463
8.5 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS.................................................. 465
8.5.1 FTP File Transfer Function ..................................................................................465
8.6 FLOPPY CASSETTE SCREEN................................................................. 469
c-8
8.6.1 Displaying the Floppy Cassette Screen ................................................................469
8.6.2 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................469
8.6.3 Inputting/Outputting a File...................................................................................470
8.7 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION .......................................................... 471
9 CREATING PROGRAMS .................................................................... 473
9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL.................................. 473
9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS ........................... 474
9.3 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION ...... 475
10 EDITING PROGRAMS ........................................................................ 480
10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE...................................................................... 480
10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD ................................ 481
10.2.1 Word Search .........................................................................................................482
10.2.2 Heading a Program...............................................................................................483
10.2.3 Inserting a Word...................................................................................................484
10.2.4 Altering a Word....................................................................................................485
10.2.5 Deleting a Word ...................................................................................................485
10.3 DELETING BLOCKS ................................................................................. 486
10.3.1 Deleting a Block...................................................................................................486
10.3.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks .....................................................................................486
10.4 PROGRAM SEARCH ................................................................................ 487
10.5 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .............................................................. 488
10.6 DELETING PROGRAMS........................................................................... 490
10.6.1 Deleting One Program..........................................................................................490
10.6.2 Deleting All Programs..........................................................................................490
10.7 COPYING/MOVING PROGRAMS............................................................. 491
10.7.1 Copying a Part of a Program ................................................................................491
10.7.2 Moving a Part of a Program .................................................................................494
10.7.3 Copying an Entire Program..................................................................................497
10.7.4 Moving an Entire Program ...................................................................................499
10.7.5 Copy Specifying a Program Number ...................................................................501
10.7.6 Copying/Moving to the Key-in Buffer.................................................................502
10.8 REPLACING .............................................................................................. 503
10.9 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS ............................................................. 503
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION .......................................................................... 504
10.11 COMPACT-TYPE MDI KEY INPUT........................................................... 505
11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT ............................................................... 508
11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE............................................................................. 508
11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device...................................................509
11.1.2 Selecting a From Cassette as a Device .................................................................512
11.2 DELETING A PROGRAM .......................................................................... 513
11.3 CHANGING PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES..................................................... 513
11.4 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM.............................................................. 514
11.5 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT........................................................... 514
12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA................................................... 516
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................... 526
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System .......................................526
12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System............................................527
c-9
12.1.3 Overall Position Display ......................................................................................529

12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ..................................................................530
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display .......................................................................................531
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count..................................................................533
12.1.7 Operating Monitor Display ..................................................................................534
12.2.1 Program Contents Display....................................................................................535
12.2.2 Editing a Program.................................................................................................536
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation .....................................................................538
12.2.4 Program List Screen .............................................................................................538
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen ..................................................................................539
12.2.6 Program Check Screen .........................................................................................540
12.2.7 Current Block Display Screen (Only for the 8.4-Inch Display Unit)...................541
12.2.8 Graphical Conversational Programming Screen ..................................................541
12.2.9 Background Editing..............................................................................................543
12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ........................................547
12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..................................................................549
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop .............................................................551
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time ..................................553
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value ................................555
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured ..................................555
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables.................................557
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel ........................................558
12.3.9 Displaying and Switching the Display Language ................................................561
12.3.10 Protection of Data at Eight Levels........................................................................562
12.3.10.1 Operation level setting..................................................................................... 562
12.3.10.2 Password modification..................................................................................... 564
12.3.10.3 Protection level setting .................................................................................... 565
12.3.11 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens ..........................567
12.3.11.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration screen ................. 567
12.3.11.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen .............. 569
12.3.11.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of press
operations......................................................................................................... 570
12.3.11.4 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen (for
drawing figures)............................................................................................... 572
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen for Multiple
Tools.....................................................................................................................574
12.3.12.1 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration screen for
multiple tools ................................................................................................... 574
12.3.12.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration screen for
multiple tools (for drawing figures)................................................................. 575
12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen ........................578
12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters.......................................................................582
12.4.2 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data ......................................584
12.4.3 Servo Setting ........................................................................................................587
12.4.4 Servo Tuning ........................................................................................................590
12.4.5 Color Setting Screen.............................................................................................591
12.4.6 Parameter Setting Support Screen ........................................................................593
12.4.6.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item .................................. 593
12.4.6.2 Displaying and setting the axis setting screen ................................................. 596
12.4.6.3 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen............................... 597
c-10
12.4.6.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen ....................................... 598
12.4.6.5 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen ............................................... 599
12.4.6.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen ............................................... 599
12.4.6.7 Displaying and setting the servo gain tuning screen........................................ 601
12.4.6.8 Displaying and setting the high-precision setting screen................................. 611
12.4.6.9 Displaying and setting the miscellaneous setting screen ................................. 613
12.4.6.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen ............................................... 613
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen ...............................................................................615
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen ...............................................................................622
12.4.9 Overview of the History Function........................................................................624
12.4.9.1 Operation history ............................................................................................. 624
12.4.9.2 Selecting operation history signals .................................................................. 629
12.4.9.3 Outputting all history data ............................................................................... 630
12.6 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER, SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND
STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR
INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION .................................................................. 633
12.6.1 Displaying the Program Number, and Sequence Number....................................633
12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation.634
12.7 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN
ERASURE FUNCTION .............................................................................. 636
13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION......................................................................... 638
13.1 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 639
13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE......................................................... 639
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ................................................. 640
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING........................................ 644
13.5 EXAMPLE.................................................................................................. 647
14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION.......................................................... 650
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY.................................................................................... 650
14.1.1 Limitations............................................................................................................653
IV. MAINTENANCE
1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 657
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED ..................... 658
1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS ..................................................... 659
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY ...................................................... 660
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for CNC Control Unit.............................................................660
1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) .........................................................................664
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders ........................................................665
1.3.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 665
1.3.3.2 Replacing batteries........................................................................................... 666
1.3.3.3 Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case ............................................ 666
1.3.3.4 Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier......................................... 667
APPENDIX
A PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 671
A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS........................................................... 671
A.2 DATA TYPE............................................................................................... 781
c-11
A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES......................................... 783

B PROGRAM CODE LIST ...................................................................... 784
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT ............................ 786
D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE......................................................... 791
E NOMOGRAPHS .................................................................................. 793
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER ........................................................................ 793
E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING .............................. 796
F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN
THE RESET STATE ............................................................................ 797
G CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE ................ 799
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE........................ 799
G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE ............................. 800
H ALARM LIST ....................................................................................... 806
I PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM
OPERATION/EDITING ........................................................................ 831
I.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING ..... 831
I.1.1 Usage Notes..........................................................................................................831
I.1.2 List of Functions of PC Tool................................................................................831
I.1.3 Explanation of Operations....................................................................................832
I.2 NAMING RULES ....................................................................................... 840
I.2.1 Naming Rules of Program File.............................................................................840
I.2.2 Naming Rules of Folder .......................................................................................841
I.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE....................................... 841
I.3.1 Usable Characters in Program File.......................................................................841
I.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE................................................................ 843
I.4.1 List of Error Message ...........................................................................................843
I.4.2 Note ......................................................................................................................844
J ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL............................................. 845

K DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC ............................................... 848
K.1 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 849
K.1.1 Differences in Specifications................................................................................849
K.1.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display .........................................................................849
K.2 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 850
K.3 SKIP FUNCTION ....................................................................................... 851
K.4 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 853
K.5 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................... 855
c-12
K.6 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................................. 856
K.7 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY.......................................................... 857
K.8 CUSTOM MACRO..................................................................................... 858
K.8.3 Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................860
K.9 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................... 860
K.10 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ....................................... 860
K.11 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL ...................................................... 861
K.12 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 862
K.13 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................ 867
K.14 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 867
K.15 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................... 868
K.16 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................... 872
K.17 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .............................................................. 873
K.18 STORED STROKE CHECK....................................................................... 874
K.19 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ............................................ 876
K.20 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN
ERASURE FUNCTION .............................................................................. 877
K.21 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 878
c-13
K.22 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON ......................................................................... 878

K.23 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 879
K.24 DATA SERVER FUNCTION ...................................................................... 881
K.25 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER .............................................................. 882
K.26 CUTTER COMPENSATION ...................................................................... 882
K.27 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE................................................................ 887
K.28 POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATIONS .................................... 887
K.29 CONSTANT CONTROL OF POSITIONING TIME..................................... 888
c-14
I. GENERAL
B-64554EN/01 GENERAL 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
This manual consists of the following parts:
About this manual

I. GENERAL
Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this
manual.
II. PROGRAMMING
Describes each function: Format used to program functions in the NC language, explanations, and
limitations.
III. OPERATION
Describes the manual operation and automatic operation of a machine, procedures for inputting and
outputting data, and procedures for editing a program.
IV. MAINTENANCE
Describes procedures for daily maintenance and replacing batteries.
APPENDIX
Lists parameters, valid data ranges, and alarms.
NOTE
1 This manual does not detail the parameters not mentioned in the text. For details
of those parameters, refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64310EN, B-64560EN).
Parameters are used to set functions and operating conditions of a CNC
machine tool, and frequently-used values in advance. Usually, the machine tool
builder factory-sets parameters so that the user can use the machine tool easily.
2 This manual describes not only basic functions but also optional functions. Look
up the options incorporated into your system in the manual written by the
machine tool builder.
Applicable models
This manual describes the model indicated in the table below.
In the text, the abbreviations indicated below may be used.
Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 0i -PD 0i -PD Series 0i -PD
Special symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
- IP
Indicates a combination of axes such as X_ Y_ Z_
In the underlined position following each address, a numeric value such as a coordinate value is placed
(used in PROGRAMMING.).
- ;
Indicates the end of a block. It actually corresponds to the ISO code LF or EIA code CR.
-3-
1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64554EN/01
Related manuals of Series 0i-PD

The following table lists the manuals related to Series 0i-PD. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).
Table 1 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC Series 0i-D / 0i Mate-D DESCRIPTIONS B-64302EN
FANUC Series 0i-D / 0i Mate-D CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64303EN
FANUC Series 0i-D / 0i Mate-D CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64303EN-1
FANUC Series 0i-PD CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64553EN
FANUC Series 0i-PD OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64554EN *
FANUC Series 0i-D / 0i Mate-D MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64305EN
FANUC Series 0i-D / 0i Mate-D PARAMETER MANUAL B-64310EN
FANUC Series 0i-PD PARAMETER MANUAL B-64560EN
Programming
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-2
Macro Compiler PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-5
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64393EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64403EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64414EN
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64443EN
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64453EN
Dual Check Safety
Dual Check Safety CONNECTION MANUAL B-64303EN-4
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series
Table 2 Related manuals

Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65302EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65322EN
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
B-65285EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR βi series B-65325EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER βi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series
B-65270EN
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series
FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series PARAMETER MANUAL
CNCs that are described in this manual can be connected to above servo motors.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series of servo motor is used. For
servo motor information, refer to the manuals for the servo motor that are actually connected.
-4-
B-64554EN/01 GENERAL 1.GENERAL
1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

CAUTION
1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but
on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system,
the CNC, the operator's panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe the function,
programming, and operation relating to all combinations. This manual generally
describes these from the stand-point of the CNC. So, for details on a particular
CNC machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder, which
should take precedence over this manual.
2 In the header field of each page of this manual, a chapter title is indicated so that
the reader can reference necessary information easily.
By finding a desired title first, the reader can reference necessary parts only.
3 This manual describes as many reasonable variations in equipment usage as
possible. It cannot address every combination of features, options and commands
that should not be attempted.
If a particular combination of operations is not described, it should not be attempted.
1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA

CAUTION
Machining programs, parameters, offset data, etc. are stored in the CNC unit
internal non-volatile memory. In general, these contents are not lost by the
switching ON/OFF of the power. However, it is possible that a state can occur
where precious data stored in the non-volatile memory has to be deleted,
because of deletions from a maloperation, or by a failure restoration. In order to
restore rapidly when this kind of mishap occurs, it is recommended that you
create a copy of the various kinds of data beforehand.
-5-
II. PROGRAMMING
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections:
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .....................10

1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION ..................................................................................................................12
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT .................................................................................12
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION ...................16
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY FUNCTION...................................16
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................17
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE ........................................................................................19
(1) Punching is performed after positioning

..............Punching function
Punching Punching Program command

G00 X_ Y_ T01 ;
X_ T02 ;
Tool T01 Tool T02
(2) Continuous, repetitive punching can be performed without halting the pressing process after
positioning
.............Nibbling function
Program command
M12 ;
G00 X_ Q_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
:
:
M13 ;
-9-
1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
(3) By giving commands for block, it is possible to perform at multiple positions in a given profile.
.............Pattern function
#1 to #n：The order of punching operation

#n
#(n−1)
d #3 Program command
#2 G76 I_ J_ K_ ;
#1
θ
+X
In case of line at angle (G76)
This CNC supports the eight different patterns that will be used most frequently.
1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-

INTERPOLATION
The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure (See Chapter,
“INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS”).
Explanation
The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called the interpolation.
- Tool movement along a straight line
Program
G01X_Y_T_;
X_;
Tool
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 1.1 (a) Tool movement along a straight line
- 10 -
- Tool movement along an arc
Program
G03X_Y_R_;
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc
The term interpolation refers to an operation in which the tool moves along a straight line or arc in the
way described above.
Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the
type of interpolation conducted in the control unit.
(a) Movement along straight line (b) Movement along arc
G01 Y_ ; G03X_ Y_ R_ ;
X_ Y_ ;
CNC
X axis
Tool
Interpolation movement
Y axis
a)Movement
along straight
line
b)Movement
along arc
Fig. 1.1 (c) Interpolation function
NOTE
Some machines move tables instead of tools but this manual assumes that tools
are moved against workpieces.
- 11 -
1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION

Movement of the tool at a specified speed for punching a workpiece is called the feed.
mm/min Tool
F
Workpiece
Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function
For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 150 mm/min (feed per minute), specify the following in the
program:
F150.0
The function of deciding the feed rate is called the feed function (See Chapter, “FEED FUNCTIONS”).
1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT
1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position)

A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of
absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. This position is called the reference
position.
Reference point
Distance between reference point

and workpiece holder is intrinsically
determined according to machines.
End locator
Workpiece holder
The distance between the

reference point and the end
locator is intrinsically
determined according to
machines.
Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Reference position
- 12 -
Explanation
The tool can be moved to the reference position in two ways:
1. Manual reference position return (See Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”)
Reference position return is performed by manual button operation.
2. Automatic reference position return (See Section, “REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”)
In general, manual reference position return is performed first after the power is turned on. In order
to move the tool to the reference position for tool change thereafter, the function of automatic
reference position return is used.
1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System

Specified by CNC - Coordinate System
Z
Z
Y Program Y
X X
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Tool
Command
Tool
Z
Y
Workpiece
X
Machine tool
Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system
Explanation
- Coordinate system
The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
(See Chapter, “ COORDINATE SYSTEM”)
1 Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on
this coordinate system are used.
2. Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool table. This can be achieved by
programming the distance from the current position of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate
system to be set.
- 13 -
230 Present tool position
300 Distance to the zero point of a coor-

Program dinate system to be set
origin
X
X
Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC
Concrete programming methods for setting coordinate systems specified by the CNC are explained in
Chapter, “COORDINATE SYSTEM”
The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when a workpiece is set on
the table.
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command program
generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a shape on
the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems
must be set at the same position.
Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position

When a workpiece is set on the table, these two coordinate systems lay as follows:
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command program
generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cut a workpiece into a shape on
the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the drawing, the two coordinate systems
must be set at the same position.
To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, when setting a workpiece to be machined to
general turret punch press, the workpiece is held by the workpiece holders after positioning it by applying
the end face of the workpiece to the end locator and workpiece holders mounted on the machine as
illustrated below.
Face B
Workpiece X
End locator Face A

Workpiece holder
図1.3.2 (c)
- 14 -
Generally, the distance between the reference point and the and locator as well as the distance between
the reference point and the workpiece holders are intrinsically determined according to machines, and
they are separated from each other by a fixed distance.
1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool

(Absolute and Incremental Programming)
Explanation
Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See
Section, “ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING”).
- Absolute command
The tool moves to a point at "the distance from zero point of the coordinate system" that is to the position
of the coordinate values.
Tool
B(10,30)
A
X
Command specifying movement G90 X10.0 Y30.0 ;

from point A to point B
Coordinates of point B
- Incremental command
Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position.
Tool
Y=-30
X=40 B
X
Command specifying movement G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 ;

from point A to point B
Distance and direction for movement

along each axis
- 15 -
1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING -

TOOL FUNCTION
When drilling, tapping, or the like, is performed, it is necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number
is assigned to each tool and the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool is selected.
03
04
02
05
Tool number
01
06
08
07
Turret
<When No.01 is assigned to a punching tool>

When the tool is stored at location 01 in the turret, the tool can be selected by specifying T01. This is
called the tool function (See Chapter, “TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)”).
1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY

FUNCTION
During machining, on–off operation of workpiece holder and clamper is performed.
For this purpose, on–off operations of workpiece holder and clamper should be controlled.
Workpiece
Clamper
Workpiece holder
The function of specifying the on–off operations of the components of the machine is called the
miscellaneous function. In general, the function is specified by and M code.
- 16 -
1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying
the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc.
In the program, specify the commands in the sequence of actual tool movements.
Block
Block
Tool movement
sequence
Block
Program Block
:
:
:
:
Block
Fig. 1.6 (a) Program configuration
A group of commands at each step of the sequence is called the block. The program consists of a group of
blocks for a series of machining. The number for discriminating each block is called the sequence number,
and the number for discriminating each program is called the program number (See Chapter,
“PROGRAM CONFIGURATION”).
Explanation
The block and the program have the following configurations.
- Block
1 block
Nxxxxx Gxx Xxxx.x Yxxx.x Mxx Sxx Txx ;
Sequence Preparatory Dimension word Auxiliary S Tool

number function function function function
End of block
Fig. 1.6 (b) Block configuration
A block starts with a sequence number to identify the block and ends with an end-of-block code.
This manual indicates the end-of-block code by; (LF in the ISO code and CR in the EIA code).
The contents of the dimension word depend on the preparatory function. In this manual, the portion of the
dimension word may be represent as IP_.
- 17 -
- Program
;
Oxxxxx ; Program number
Block
Block
Block
: :
: :
: :
M30 ; End of program
Fig. 1.6 (c) Program configuration
Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the beginning of the program,
and a program end code (M02 or M30) is specified at the end of the program.
- Main program and subprogram

When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a program, a program for the pattern is
created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the main
program. When a subprogram execution command appears during execution of the main program,
commands of the subprogram are executed. When execution of the subprogram is finished, the sequence
returns to the main program.
Main program
: Subprogram #1
:
M98P1001 O1001
:
:
:
M99
M98P1002
:
:
Subprogram #2
M98P1001 O1002
:
:
:
M99
Fig. 1.6 (d) Subprogram execution
- 18 -
1.7 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE

Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond
the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke.
Machine zero point
Motor
Limit
switch
Stroke area
Besides strokes defined with limit switches, the operator can define an area which the tool cannot enter
using a program or data in memory. This function is called stroke check (See Section, “STORED
STROKE CHECK”).
Motor
Limit
switch
Machine zero point
Specify these distances.
Tools cannot enter this area. The area is

specified by data in memory or a program.
- 19 -
2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
2 CONTROLLED AXES
Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections:
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES...............................................................................................20

2.2 NAMES OF AXES .............................................................................................................................20
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................20
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE........................................................................................................................21
2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES
Explanation
The number of controlled axes used with this NC system is as indicated below.
Series 0i-PD
Controlled paths 1 path
Total number of controlled axes Max. 7 axes
Feed axes Max. 7 axes
Simultaneously controlled axes Max. 4 axes
Axis control by PMC Max. 4 axes at a time
NOTE
1 The maximum number of controlled axes that can be used is limited depending
on the option configuration. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool
builder for details.
2 The number of simultaneously controllable axes for manual operation (jog feed,
manual reference position return, or manual rapid traverse) is 1 or 3 (1 when bit
0 (JAX) of parameter No. 1002 is set to 0 and 3 when it is set to 1).
2.2 NAMES OF AXES

Explanation
The move axes of machine tools are assigned names. These names are referred to as addresses or axis
names. Axis names are determined according to the machine tool. The naming rules comply with
standards such as the ISO standards.
NOTE
Axis names are predetermined according to the machine used. Refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
2.3 INCREMENT SYSTEM

Explanation
The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for
output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least
command increment is the least increment for moving the tool on the machine. Both increments are
represented in mm, inches, or deg.
- 20 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES
Two types of increment systems are available as indicated in Table 2.3 (a). For each axis, an increment
system can be set using a bit from bit 0 (ISA) of parameter No. 1013.
Table 2.3 (a) Increment system

Name of increment system Least input increment Least command increment
0.01 mm 0.01 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch 0.001 inch
0.01 deg 0.01 deg
0.001 mm 0.001 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
The least command increment is either metric or inch depending on the machine tool. Set metric or inch
to the bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 0100.
For selection between metric and inch for the least input increment, G code (G20 or G21) or a setting
parameter selects it.
Combined use of the inch system and the metric system is not allowed. There are functions that cannot be
used between axes with different unit systems (circular interpolation, cutter compensation, etc.). For the
increment system, see the machine tool builder's manual.
2.4 MAXIMUM STROKE

Explanation
The maximum stroke controlled by this CNC is shown in the table below:
Maximum stroke = Least command increment × 999999999 (99999999 for IS-A)
Commands that exceed the maximum stroke are not permitted.
Table 2.4 (a) Maximum strokes

Name of increment system Least input increment Maximum stroke
0.01 mm ±999999.99 mm
IS-A 0.001 inch ±99999.999 inch
0.01 deg ±999999.99 deg
0.001 mm ±999999.999 mm
IS-B 0.0001 inch ±99999.9999 inch
0.001 deg ±999999.999 deg
NOTE
The actual stroke depends on the machine tool.
- 21 -
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION)

A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaning
One-shot G code The G code is effective only in the block in which it is specified.
Modal G code The G code is effective until another G code of the same group is specified.
(Example)
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01 X_ ;
Y_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00 Y_ ;
:
Explanation
1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power-up or reset, the modal G
codes are placed in the states described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as indicated in Table3.1 (a).
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by bit 7 (G23) of parameter No. 3402. However,
G22 and G23 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402.
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting bit 3 (G91) of parameter No. 3402.
(6) In the machining center system, the user can select G17, G18, or G19 by setting bits 1 (G18)
and 2 (G19) of parameter No. 3401.
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G codes.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code that has no corresponding
option is specified, alarm PS0010 occurs.
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code belongs to a different group. If
multiple G codes that belong to the same group are specified in the same block, only the last G code
specified is valid.
5. G codes are indicated by group.
6. There are two G code systems in the FANUC Series 0i-PD (Table3.1 (a)). Select a G code system
using bit 6 (GSB) of parameter No. 3401.
- 22 -
3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION)
3.1 G CODE LIST

Table3.1 (a) G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B
G00 G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 Dwell
G05.1 G05.1 AI advanced preview control (*1)
G05.4 G05.4 High-speed HRV current control on/off
00
G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G17 G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 G20 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 Input in mm
G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G26 G26 Bolt hole circle
G28 G50 Automatic reference point return
G32 G32 Automatic safety zone setting
00
G33 G33 Skip function
G38 G38 Bending compensation X
G39 G39 Bending compensation X
G40 G40 Tool radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 07 Tool radius compensation : left
G42 G42 Tool radius compensation : right
G40.1(G150) G40.1(G150) Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1(G151) G41.1(G151) 18 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1(G152) G42.1(G152) Normal direction control on : right
G45 G45 Linear punching
G46 G46 00 Circular punching (CW)
G47 G47 Circular punching (CCW)
G50 G34 Scaling cancel
11
G51 G35 Scaling
G52 G93 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override
G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G95 00 Macro call
G66 G96 Macro modal call
12
G67 G97 Macro modal call cancel
- 23 -
3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION
(G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
G code system
Group Function
A B
G68 G68 Circular nibbling
G69 G69 Linear nibbling
G70 G70 Positioning & press off
G72 G72 Standard point command
G73 G75 Multi–piece machining command X
G74 G76 00 Multi–piece machining command Y
G75 G27 Automatic repositioning
G76 G28 Line at angle
G77 G29 Arc
G78 G36 GridⅠ
G79 G37 GridⅡ
G84 G84 Coordinate system rotation start
16
G85 G85 Coordinate system rotation cancel
G86 G66 Share proof
G87 G67 Square
00
G88 G78 Radius
G89 G79 Cut at angle
G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system
00
G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G98 G98 Coordinate system setting (Multi–piece machining)
*1: In punching mode, AI Advanced Preview Control I function cannot be used.
- 24 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS
Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the
tool with respect to the workpiece or table).
Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
4.1 POSITIONING (G00).........................................................................................................................25

4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)...................................................................................................26
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03).....................................................................................28
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)........................................................................................32
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33) ....................................................................................................................33
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) .................................................................................................................35
4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33) .................................................................................................36
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT ..............................................................36
4.9 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP.......................................................................................................................36
4.1 POSITIONING (G00)

The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an
incremental programming at a rapid traverse rate.
In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end point is programmed.
In the incremental programming the distance the tool moves is programmed.
Format
G00 IP_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an
incremental programming, the distance the tool moves.
Explanation
Either of the following tool paths can be selected according to bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401.
• Nonlinear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis separately. The tool path is normally
straight.
• Linear interpolation type positioning
The tool is positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more than the rapid
traverse rate for each axis.
Linear interpolation type positioning Start position
End position
Non linear interpolation type positioning
The rapid traverse rate in G00 command is set to the parameter No. 1420 for each axis independently by
the machine tool builder. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a
predetermined speed at the start of a block and is decelerated at the end of a block. Execution proceeds to
the next block after confirming the in-position.
- 25 -
4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
"In-position " means that the feed motor is within the specified range.
This range is determined by the machine tool builder by setting to parameter No. 1826.
When G00X_Y_T ; is specified in a machine having a turret axis (T–axis), the X and Y axes move to the
specified positions at rapid traverse rate and also the T–axis moves at the predetermined rapid traverse
rate in such a way as to select a specified tool number.
In a machine provided with a die angle index (C–axis), if “G00X_Y_ ; ” is specified, the X, Y, and C axes
move simultaneously at the predetermined rapid traverse rate.
Refer to “C axis control” for the details.
Since this control system treats the turret punch press as a controlled system, the tool moves to the
commanded position as fast as possible for punching as the basic principle.
Accordingly, the tool is positioned at rapid traverse, punching is done after axis movement in the G00
mode, in principle.
Refer to “Punch function” for details.
CAUTION
For T– or C–axis command blocks, nonlinear interpolation positioning is
performed, even if linear interpolation positioning is specified.
And, for block including G28 or G53 command, nonlinear interpolation
positioning is performed.
Please pay attention for the interference between tool and workpiece.
4.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)

Tools can move along a line.
Format
G01 IP_ F_ ;
IP_ : For an absolute programming, the coordinates of an end point, and for an incremental
programming, the distance the tool moves.
F_ : Speed of tool feed (Feedrate)
Explanation
A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F.
The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified for each
block.
The feedrate commanded by the F code is measured along the tool path. If the F code is not commanded,
the feedrate is regarded as zero.
The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows.
- 26 -
G01 αα ββ γγ ζζ Ff ;
α
Feed rate of α axis direction : Fα = ×f
L
β
Feed rate of β axis direction : Fβ = ×f
L
γ
Feed rate of γ axis direction : Fγ = ×f
L
ζ
Feed rate of ζ axis direction : Fζ = ×f
L
L = α 2 + β 2 +γ 2 +ζ 2
The feedrate of the rotary axis is commanded in the unit of deg/min (the unit is decimal point position).
When the straight line axis α (such as X, Y, or Z) and the rotating axis β (such as A, B, or C) are linearly
interpolated, the feedrate is that in which the tangential feedrate in the α and β Cartesian coordinate
system is commanded by F (mm/min).
β-axis feedrate is obtained ; at first, the time required for distribution is calculated by using the above
formula, then the β-axis feedrate unit is changed to deg/min.
A calculation example is as follows.

G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ;
This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input.
The time required for distribution is calculated as follows:
20 2 + 40 2
0.14907(mm)
300
The feedrate for the C axis is
40
268.3 deg/ min
0.14907
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the feedrate is calculated the same way as in 2 axes control.
Limitations
• Punching (1–cycle pressing) is not performed in G01 mode. However, when bit 7 (CPF) of
parameter No.16001 is set to 1, punching can be performed on the end point in G01 mode.
• T code can’t be specified in G01 mode. If specified, an alarm (PS 4600) occurs.
However, when T code is specified independently and bit 0 (NMG) of parameter No.16181 is set, an
alarm does not occur.
Example
- Linear interpolation
(G91) G01X200.0Y100.0F200.0;
Y axis
100.0 (End point)
X axis
0 (Start point) 200.0
- 27 -
- Feedrate for the rotary axis

G91G01C-90.0 F300.0 ;Feed rate of 300deg/min
(Start point)
90°
(End point)
Feedrate is 300 deg/min
4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

The command below will move a tool along a circular arc.
Format
Arc in the XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the ZpXp plane
G02 I_ K_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ F_ ;
G03 R_
Command Description
G17 Specification of arc on XpYp plane
G18 Specification of arc on ZpXp plane
G19 Specification of arc on YpZp plane
G02 Circular Interpolation : Clockwise direction (CW)
G03 Circular Interpolation : Counterclockwise direction (CCW)
Xp_ Command values of X axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
Yp_ Command values of Y axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
Zp_ Command values of Z axis or its parallel axis (set by parameter No. 1022)
I_ Xp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
J_ Yp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
K_ Zp axis distance from the start point to the center of an arc with sign
R_ Arc radius (with sign, radius value for lathe cutting)
F_ Feedrate along the arc
Explanation
- Direction of the circular interpolation
"Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are
defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive-to-negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis or
Xp axis, respectively) in the Cartesian coordinate system. See the figure below (Fig. 4.3 (a)).
- 28 -
Y X Z
G03 G03 G03
G02 G02 G02

X Z Y
G17 G18 G19
Fig. 4.3 (a)
- Distance moved on an arc

The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is expressed as an absolute or
incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the distance of the end point
which is viewed from the start point of the arc is specified with sign.
- Distance from the start point to the center of arc

The arc center is specified by addresses I, J, and K for the Xp, Yp, and Zp axes, respectively. The
numerical value following I, J, or K, however, is a vector component in which the arc center is seen from
the start point, and is always specified as an incremental value irrespective of G90 and G91, as shown
below (Fig. 4.3 (b)).
I, J, and K must be signed according to the direction.
End point (x,y) End point (z,x) End point (y,z)
y x z
x Start z Start y Start
i k j
point point point
j i k
Center Center Center
Fig. 4.3 (b)

I0, J0, and K0 can be omitted.
When Xp, Yp , and Zp are omitted (the end point is the same as the start point) and the center is specified
with I, J, and K, a 360° arc (circle) is specified.
G02I; Command for a circle
If the difference between the radius at the start point and that at the end point exceeds the value in a
parameter (No.3410), an alarm (PS0020) occurs.
- Arc radius
The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the
radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K.
In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° are considered. When an arc
exceeding 180° is commanded, the radius must be specified with a negative value. If Xp, Yp, and Zp are
all omitted, if the end point is located at the same position as the start point and when R is used, an arc of
0° is programmed
G02R_ ; (The cutter does not move.)
- 29 -
For arc <1> (less than 180°)

G91 G02 XP60.0 YP55.0 R50.0 F300.0 ;
For arc <2> (greater than 180°)
G91 G02 XP60.0 YP55.0 R-50.0 F300.0 ;
<2>
r=50mm
End point
<1>
Start point
r=50mm
Y
- Feedrate
The feedrate in circular interpolation is equal to the feedrate specified by the F code, and the feedrate
along the arc (the tangential feedrate of the arc) is controlled to be the specified feedrate.
The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is ±2% or less. However, this
feedrate is measured along the arc after the tool radius compensation is applied
Limitation
- Simultaneously specifying R with I, J, and K
If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence
and the other are ignored.
- Specifying an axis that is not contained in the specified plane

If an axis not comprising the specified plane is commanded, an alarm PS0021 occurs.
For example, if the X-axis and a U-axis parallel to the X-axis are specified when the XY plane is
specified
- Specifying a semicircle with R

When an arc having a center angle approaching 180° is specified, the calculated center coordinates may
contain an error. In such a case, specify the center of the arc with I, J, and K.
- Difference in the radius between the start and end points

If the difference in the radius between the start and end points of the arc exceeds the value specified in
parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is generated.
When an end point does not lie on the arc, a spiral results, as shown below.
- 30 -
End point
γe
γ(t) ( γ e − γ s) θ(t )
γ (t) = γ s +
θ θ
θ(t)
Start point
γs Center
Radius
Start point
γs
γe End point
Center θ
θ
The arc radius changes linearly with the center angle θ(t). Spiral interpolation is performed using a
circular command that specifies one arc radius for the start point and another arc radius for the end point.
To use spiral interpolation, set a large value in parameter No. 3410, used to specify the limit on the arc
radius error.
- Punching operation
Punching (1–cycle pressing) is not performed in G02 and G03 mode. However, when bit 7 (CPF) of
parameter No.16001 is set to 1, punching can be performed on the end point in G02 or G03 mode.
- T code
If T command is specified in G02 and G03 mode, however, when T code is specified independently and
bit 0 (NMG) of parameter No. 16181 is set, an alarm (PS 4600) doesn’t occur.
Example
Y axis
100
50
60
60
40
X axis
0
90 120 140 200
The above tool path can be programmed as follows;

(1) In absolute programming
G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ;
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0 F300. ;
G02 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0 ;
or
G92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ;
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0I-60.0 F300. ;
G02 X120.0 Y60.0I-50.0 ;
- 31 -
(2) In incremental programming

G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 R60.0 F300. ;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 R50.0 ;
or
G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 I-60.0 F300. ;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 I-50.0 ;
4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)

Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move
synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands.
Format
Arc in the XpYp plane
G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the ZpXp plane
G02 K_ I_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
Arc in the YpZp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 R_
α, β : Any one axis where circular interpolation is not applied.
Up to two other axes can be specified.
Explanation
A tangential velocity of an arc in a specified plane or a tangential velocity about the linear axis can be
specified as the feedrate, depending on the setting of bit 5 (HTG) of parameter No.1403.
An F command specifies a feedrate along a circular arc, when HTG is specified to 0. Therefore, the
feedrate of the linear axis is as follows:
Length of linear axis
F×
Length of circular arc
Determine the feedrate so the linear axis feedrate does not exceed any of the various limit values.
Z
Tool path
X Y
The feedrate along the circumference of two circular interpolated axes is the
specified feedrate.
If HTG is set to 1, specify a feedrate along the tool path about the linear axis. Therefore, the tangential
velocity of the arc is expressed as follows:
- 32 -
Length of arc
F×
2 2
(Length of arc) + (Length of linear axis)
The velocity along the linear axis is expressed as follows:
F×
2 2
(Length of arc) + (Length of linear axis)
Tool path
X Y
The feedrate along the tool path is specified.
Limitation
• Tool radius compensation is applied only for a circular arc.
• T-axis command cannot be specified in a block in which a helical interpolation is commanded.
4.5 SKIP FUNCTION (G33)

Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G33 command, like G01.
If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from
the machine. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
Format
G33 IP ;
G33 : One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified)
Explanation
The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom macro because they are
stored in the custom macro system variable #100151 to #100157, as follows. FS0i-PC compatible system
variables (#5061 to #5067) may also be used.
#100151 (#5061) : First axis coordinate value
#100152 (#5062) : Second axis coordinate value
:
#100157 (#5067) : 7th axis coordinate value
- 33 -
CAUTION
Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration
(however, these become available by setting bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200
to 1.), allowing for an error in the position of the tool when a skip signal is input.
NOTE
If G33 command is issued while tool radius compensation is applied, an alarm
PS0035 is displayed. Cancel the tool radius compensation with the G40
command before the G33 command is specified.
Example
- The next block to G33 is an incremental programming
G33 G91 X100.0 F100;
Y50.0;
Skip signal is input here 50.0
Y
100.0
Actual motion
X
Motion without skip signal
Fig. 4.5 (a) The next block is an incremental programming
- The next block to G33 is an absolute programming for 1 axis

G33 G90 X200.0 F100; Y100.0
Y100.0;
Skip signal is input here
X200.0
Actual motion
Fig. 4.5 (b) The next block is an absolute programming for 1 axis
- 34 -
- The next block to G33 is an absolute programming for 2 axes

G33 G90 X200.0 F100;
X300.0 Y100.0;
Y
Skip signal is input here

100
(300,100)
Actual motion
X
100 200 300
Fig. 4.5 (c) The next block is an absolute programming for 2 axes
4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33)

In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G33, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom
macro variable when a skip signal (4-point or 8-point ; 8-point when a high-speed skip signal is used) is
turned on. In the block where Q1 to Q4 are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals
(four or eight signals, or eight signals when high-speed skip signals are used) are input.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip
programs being executed.
For the usage of this function, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Format
Move command
G33 IP_ F_ P_ ;
IP_ : End point
F_ : Feedrate
P_ : P1 to P4
Dwell
G04X(P)_ (Q_ );
X(P)_ : Dwell time
Q_ : Q1 to Q4
Explanation
Multi-step skip is caused by specifying P1, P2, P3, or P4 in a G33 block. For an explanation of selecting
(P1, P2, P3, or P4), refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Specifying Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4 in G04 (dwell command) enables dwell skip in a similar way to specifying
G33. A skip may occur even if Q is not specified. For an explanation of selecting (Q1, Q2, Q3, or Q4),
refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Correspondence to skip signals

Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to specify whether the 4-point or 8-point skip signal is used
(when a high-speed skip signal is used). Specification is not limited to one-to-one correspondence. It is
possible to specify that one skip signal correspond to two or more Pn's or Qn's (n=1, 2, 3, 4). Also, bits 0
(DS1) and 7 (DS8) parameter No.6206 can be used to specify dwell.
- 35 -
CAUTION
Dwell is not skipped when Qn is not specified and bits 0 (DS1) and 7 (DS8)
parameter No.6206 are not set.
4.7 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33)

The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not via the
PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 - 2 msec at the NC side (not considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high
precision measurement.
For details, refer to the appropriate manual supplied from the machine tool builder.
Format
G33 IP ;
G33; One-shot G code (If is effective only in the block in which it is specified)
4.8 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE IMPROVEMENT

Overview
The macro variables #100151 to #100157 (#5061 to #5067) for reading the skip position when executing
the skip command (G33) is improved.
By setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 1, it is possible to read the skip position in the
workpiece coordinate system at the time a skip is made even if the workpiece coordinate system
setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed.
By setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 0, it is possible to read the skip position that reflects the
workpiece coordinate system at the time it is read, as usual, if the workpiece coordinate system
setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed.
Macro variable
The following are the macro variables that can read the position at the time a skip is made even if the
workpiece coordinate system setting/selection command is executed after the skip command is executed,
by setting bit 7 (SKM) of parameter No. 6007 to 1.
System variable System variable

Attribute Description
number name
#5061 to #5067 [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 7).
#100151 to #100157 The numbers to the left can also be used.
#5421 to #5427 [#_SKPDTC[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system, detection unit)
#100701 to #100707 The numbers to the left can also be used.
4.9 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP

Overview
Executing the move command following G33P99 (or G33P98) while overriding the torque limit*1 on the
servo motor enables cutting feed in to be performed in the same way as in linear interpolation (G01). If,
- 36 -
during the movement with this command, the torque of the servo motor reaches the torque limit value
(torque limit on the servo motor multiplied by the override) due to pressing or other causes or a skip
signal (including a high-speed skip signal) is input, any remaining move commands will be canceled, and
the next block is executed. (The operation of canceling any remaining move commands and executing the
next block is called a skip operation in the remainder of this document.)
It is possible to override the torque limit on the servo motor with the following command methods:
• Execute the torque limit override command in the PMC window.
Execute the torque limit command in the PMC window in advance. If the torque limit override command
is not set in advance, alarm PS0035 is issued. If the command falls outside the range, alarm PS0036 is
issued.
*1 : The torque limit on the servo motor is automatically set to a value conforming to the motor type
setting.
Format
G33 P98 α_ F_
G33 P99 α_ F_
G33 : Skip command (one-shot G code)

P98 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value.
P99 : Performs a skip operation if the torque of the servo motor reaches the limit value or if
a skip signal is input.
α : Axis address on any one axis
F : Feedrate
- Conditions for performing a skip operation

Command
Condition
G33P98 G33P99
The torque limit value is reached. A skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed.
A skip signal is input. No skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed.
- Operation during a torque limit skip

(Example)
N1 G33 P99 Y400.0 F100.0 ;
N2 G01 X300.0 F500.0 ;
X
A : Machine stop position
300.0 B : Current position of the CNC when the
torque limit is reached
N2 C : N1 command end point position
200.0
Error amount
100.0
N1 A B C
100.0 200.0 300.0 400.0 Y
- 37 -
A torque limit skip presses a specified axis against a previously prepared part or other item while the
torque limit command is being executed on the servo motor, and then performs a skip operation when the
servo motor reaches the torque limit value. A skip operation is performed with the fact that the torque
limit value as detected in the servo motor is reached. It is, therefore, not necessary to input a skip signal
using a separate sensor or other device unlike with normal skip functions.
(1) At point A, the machine comes in contact with the object under measurement and stops. At this time,
because the torque limit value is not reached, no skip operation is performed, move commands are
continuously output, and the current position of the CNC is updated.
(2) Because move commands are output but the machine remains stopped, there occurs a difference
(error amount) between the current position of the CNC and the machine position, and torque is
applied to the servo motor.
(3) When the torque limit value is reached, a skip operation is performed at machine stop position, point
A, and the N2 command is executed. Assuming that the current position of the CNC when the torque
limit is reached is point B, the error amount during the torque limit skip is (A - B).
- Torque limit command

If, with the torque limit skip command, no torque limit command is issued from the PMC window, alarm
PS0035 is issued.
When no toque limit command is issued, the torque limit override value is either 0% or 100%.
A torque limit is to be specified as in the program example below.
(Program example)
O0012
:
Mxx (Specify a torque limit from the PMC via the window)
:
G33 P99 X200. F100.(Torque limit skip command)
:
G01 X100. F500.(Move command with the torque limit being still effective)
:
Myy (Cancel the torque limit from the PMC)
:
M30
- Positional deviation limit during the torque limit command

While the torque limit skip command is being executed, the positional deviation limit check with the
settings of parameters Nos. 1828 and 1829 is not performed. Instead, the positional deviation limit check
with the settings of parameter No. 6287 is performed. If the positional deviation exceeds the limit, alarm
SV0004 is issued and an instantaneous stop occurs.
- Custom macro variables

When the torque limit skip command is executed, the custom macro system variables #5061 to #5067 or
#100151 to #100157 (skip signal position) store the coordinate position assumed at the end of the skip. In
reality, there is a deviation due to the delay of the servo system between the machine position and the
current position of the CNC when a skip operation is executed. This deviation can be determined from the
positional deviation of the servo. By setting bit 2 (TSE) of parameter No. 6201, it is possible to select
whether or not the skip signal position to be stored in system variables should be compensated for with
the error (positional deviation) of the servo system.
- 38 -
Position during a skip operation
Current position of the CNC
Machine position Error
Coordinate origin Stop point
Position compensated for by

reflecting the delay
Position not reflecting the delay
NOTE
1 Specify only a single axis with the torque limit skip command. If no axis is
specified or an attempt is made to specify more than one, alarm PS0369 is
issued.
2 Do not issue the torque limit skip command in G41 or G42 mode. Otherwise,
alarm PS0035 is issued.
3 A torque limit arrival signal is output regardless of the torque limit skip command.
4 Do not issue the torque limit skip command for an axis being synchronized with
synchronous control.
5 Do not specify the torque limit skip command in a continuous block.
6 The higher the movement speed, the larger the error between the position at
which the machine stops and the position at which a skip is actually detected.
Also, the error increases as the speed is varied during movement. Do not vary
the speed with override and so on.
- 39 -
5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
5 FEED FUNCTIONS
Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
5.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................................40

5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE ...........................................................................................................................41
5.3 CUTTING FEED ................................................................................................................................42
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL ..................................................................................................43
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS ......................47
5.6 DWELL...............................................................................................................................................50
5.1 OVERVIEW
The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available:
- Feed functions
1. Rapid traverse
When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate set in
the CNC (parameter No. 1420).
2. Cutting feed
The tool moves at a programmed cutting feedrate.
- Override
Override can be applied to a rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate using the switch on the machine
operator's panel.
- Automatic acceleration/deceleration
To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied when the tool starts and
ends its movement (Fig. 5.1 (a)).
Rapid traverse rate
FR FR : Rapid traverse
rate
TR : Deceleration time
constant for rapid
traverse rate
0 Time
TR TR
Feedrate
FC : Feedrate
FC
TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant for a
cutting feedrate
0 Time
TC TC
Fig. 5.1 (a) Automatic acceleration/deceleration (example)
- 40 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS
- Tool path in a cutting feed

When the movement direction changes between a specified block and the next block during cutting feed,
the tool path may be rounded because of the relationship between the time constant and feedrate (Fig. 5.1
(b)).
Y
Programmed path
Actual tool path
0
X
Fig. 5.1 (b) Example of tool path between two blocks
In circular interpolation, a radial error occurs (Fig. 5.1 (c)).
Y Δr : Error
Programmed path
Actual tool path
0 X
Fig. 5.1 (c) Example of radial error in circular interpolation
The rounded-corner path shown in Fig. 5.1 (b) and the error shown in Fig. 5.1 (c) depend on the feedrate.
So, the feedrate needs to be controlled for the tool to move as programmed.
5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE

Format
G00 IP_ ;
G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse)
IP_ : Dimension word for the end point
Explanation
The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse and punching is performed. In rapid
traverse, the next block is executed after the specified feedrate becomes 0 and the servo motor reaches a
certain range set by the machine tool builder (in-position check).
A rapid traverse rate is set for each axis by parameter No. 1420, so no rapid traverse feedrate need be
programmed.
The following overrides can be applied to a rapid traverse rate with the switch on the machine operator's
panel: 25, 50, 75, 100 %
5.2.1 Rapid Traverse Rate by F Command

Each axis rapid traverse rate of rapid traverse command (G00) are set independently to parameter by
machine tool builders.
Whereas, by setting bit 0 (G0F) of parameter No. 16050 to 1, the rapid traverse rate of X and Y axes to
rapid traverse command (G00) can be designated by F code. Refer to the manual issued by a machine tool
builder for this function.
- 41 -
There are following specifications notices for this function.
(1) The feedrate specified by F code is the each axis rapid traverse rate of X and Y axes.
(2) 4-step rapid traverse override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate designated by F code, using
signals (ROV2, ROV1) from the machine side.
(3) When axial move of rapid traverse (G00) is specified in the DNC, memory and MDI modes, the
rapid traverse rate may not specified by F code or when the speed command is 0, an alarm (PS 0011)
occurs.
(4) In circular nibbling (G68), linear nibbling (G69) and nibbling by M function, the speed to nibbling
pitch after the first punch point corresponds to the rapid traverse rate preset by the parameter (No.
1420).
(5) F1-digit function for programmable rapid traverse override is ineffective.
(6) When the rapid traverse rate designated by F code exceeds the speed preset by a parameter (set by a
machine tool builder), it is clamped to the speed preset by the parameter (No. 1420).
5.2.2 F1-digit (Programmable Rapid Traverse Override)

By specifying one-digit number from 1 to 4 following address F, and override can be applied to the rapid
traverse rate in automatic operation.
F1-digit command Rapid traverse override

F1 100%
F2 75%
F3 50%
F4 25%
An override can be applied to the rapid traverse rate by the switch on the machine operator’s panel as well
as by F1-digit command in automatic operation.
Either rapid traverse override being set by the switch or the F1-digit command, whichever lower,
becomes effective.
NOTE
F1-digit (Programmable rapid traverse override) cannot be used together with
the Rapid traverse rate by F command.
5.3 CUTTING FEED

Overview
Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with
numbers after the F code.
In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block is
minimized.
The feed of FANUC Series 0i-PD is performed at feed per minute always.
Format
Feed per minute
F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min)
- 42 -
Explanation
- Direction of the cutting feedrate
Cutting feed is controlled so that the tangential feedrate is always set at a specified feedrate.
Y Y
Start
End point point
F F
Start
point Center End
X X
Linear interpolation Circular interpolation
Fig. 5.3 (a) Tangential feedrate (F)
- Feed per minute

An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied to feed per minute with the switch on the
machine operator's panel. For detailed information, see the appropriate manual of the machine tool
builder.
Feed amount per minute

(mm/min or inch/min)
Tool
ワーク
Fig. 5.3 (b) Feed per minute
CAUTION
Cutting feed is invalid for the turret axis (T–axis) and C–axis.
T–axis and C–axis commands, therefore, cannot be specified in linear
interpolation (G01) mode and circular interpolation (G02, G03) mode. However,
when bit 5 (CIP) of parameter No.16360 is set to 1, C–axis can be specified.
Reference
See Appendix D for range of feedrate command value.
5.4 CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL

Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a).
- 43 -
Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control

Function name G code Validity of G code Description
The tool is decelerated at the end point of a
This function is valid for
Exact stop G09 block, then an in-position check is made.
specified blocks only.
Then the next block is executed.
Once specified, this The tool is decelerated at the end point of a
Exact stop mode G61 function is valid until G62, block, then an in-position check is made.
G63, or G64 is specified. Then the next block is executed.
Once specified, this
The tool is not decelerated at the end point
Cutting mode G64 function is valid until G61,
of a block, but the next block is executed.
G62, or G63 is specified.
When the tool moves along an inner corner
Automatic Once specified, this during tool radius compensation, override is
override for G62 function is valid until G61, applied to the cutting feedrate to suppress
Automatic inner corners G63, or G64 is specified. the amount of cutting per unit of time so
corner that a good surface finish can be produced.
override This function is valid in
Internal circular
the tool radius The internal circular cutting feedrate is
cutting feedrate -
compensation mode, changed.
change
regardless of the G code.
NOTE
1 The purpose of in-position check is to check that the servo motor has reached
within a specified range (specified with a parameter by the machine tool builder).
In-position check is not performed when bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set
to 1.
2 Inner corner angle θ: 2° < θ ≤ α ≤ 178°
(α is a set value)
Workpiece
θ
Tool
Format
Exact stop G09 IP_ ;
Exact stop mode G61 ;
Cutting mode G64 ;
Automatic corner override G62 ;
5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64)

Explanation
The inter-block paths followed by the tool in the exact stop mode, and cutting mode are different (Fig.
5.4.1 (a)).
Y
(2) In-position check
Tool path in the exact stop mode

(1)
Tool path in the cutting mode
0 X
- 44 -
Fig. 5.4.1 (a) Example of tool paths from block (1) to block (2)
CAUTION
The cutting mode (G64 mode) is set at power-on or system clear.
5.4.2 Automatic Corner Override

When tool radius compensation is performed, the movement of the tool is automatically decelerated at an
inner corner and internal circular area. This reduces the load on the tool and produces a smoothly
machined surface.
5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62)

Explanation
- Override condition
When G62 is specified, and the tool path with tool radius compensation applied forms an inner corner, the
feedrate is automatically overridden at both ends of the corner.
There are four types of inner corners (Fig. 5.4.2 (a)).
2°≤θ≤θp≤178° in Fig. 5.4.2 (a) is a value set with parameter No. 1711. When θ is approximately equal to
θp, the inner corner is determined with an error of 0.001° or less.
: Tool
1. Straight line-straight line 2. Straight line-arc
: Programmed path
: Tool center path
θ θ
3. Arc-straight line 4. Arc-arc
θ
θ
Fig. 5.4.2 (a) Inner corner
- Override range
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner
corner. The distances Ls and Le, where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the tool
center path to the corner (Fig. 5.4.2 (b), Fig. 5.4.2 (c), Fig. 5.4.2 (d)). Ls and Le are set with parameters
Nos. 1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Le Ls
a b
Tool center path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b.
Fig. 5.4.2 (b) Override Range (Straight Line to Straight Line)

- 45 -
When a programmed path consists of two arcs, the feedrate is overridden if the start and end points are in
the same quadrant or in adjacent quadrants (Fig. 5.4.2 (c)).
Programmed path
Tool center path
The feedrate is overridden from point a to b.

Fig. 5.4.2 (c) Override Range (Arc to Arc)
Regarding program (2) of an arc, the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to
point d (Fig. 5.4.2 (d)).
Programmed path
d a
Le Ls Le Ls
c b
(2)
Tool center path

Tool
Fig. 5.4.2 (d) Override Range (Straight Line to Arc, Arc to Straight Line)
- Override value
An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run.
In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows:
F = (automatic override for inner corners) × (feedrate override)
Limitation
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Override for inner corners is disabled during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
- Start-up/G41, G42
Override for inner corners is disabled if the corner is preceded by a start-up block or followed by a block
including G41 or G42.
- Offset
Override for inner corners is not performed if the offset is zero.
- 46 -
5.4.2.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change

For internally offset circular cutting, the feedrate on a programmed path is set to a specified feedrate (F)
by specifying the circular cutting feedrate with respect to F, as indicated below (Fig. 5.4.2 (e)). This
function is valid in the tool radius compensation mode, regardless of the G62 code.
Rc
F=
Rp
Rc : Tool center path radius
Rp : Programmed radius
It is also valid for the dry run and the one-digit F code feed command.
Programmed
Rc Tool center
Rp path
Fig. 5.4.2 (e) Internal circular cutting feedrate change
If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc/Rp 0; the tool stops. A minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is to be
specified with parameter No. 1710. When Rc/Rp≤MDR, the feedrate of the tool is (F×MDR).
If parameter No. 1710 is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is at 100%.
CAUTION
When internal circular cutting must be performed together with override for inner
corners, the feedrate of the tool is as follows:
Rc
F× × (override for the inner corners) × (feedrate override)
Rp
5.5 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR

A ROTARY AXIS
Overview
For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, a circle with the radius specified with
parameter No. 1465 (which is referred to as an imaginary circle) is considered, and the feedrate of the
rotary axis is set to the feedrate on its circumference.
Explanation
- Cutting feedrate
Conventional method
Usually, the feedrate of a rotary axis is set to the rotation feedrate (deg/mm).
ΔX
Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) FX = F × ( mm / min )
L
- 47 -
ΔC
Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) FC = F × ( deg / min )
L
Synthetic movement distance L = ΔX 2 + ΔY 2 + ΔZ 2 + ΔC 2 ( mm )
L
Movement time T= (min )
F
Feedrate instruction on imaginary circle of a rotary axis

For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, the feedrate of the rotary axis is set to
the movement feedrate on an imaginary circle with the radius specified with parameter No. 1465.
By setting the imaginary radius to 0, the rotary axis can be excluded from feedrate calculation.
Y Rotary axis feedrate
Program example
N1G91G01X10.F10.
N2C10.
C N2
Imaginary N1 X
radius
Imaginary circle
ΔX
Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) FX = F × ( mm / min )
L′
ΔC
Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis) FC = F × ( deg / min )
L′
⎛ π × lC × ΔC ⎞
2
Synthetic movement distance L ′ = ΔX + ΔY + ΔZ + ⎜

2 2
⎟2
( mm )
⎝ 180 ⎠
L ′
Movement time T ′ = (min )
F
lC : imaginary radius(parameter No.1465)
For the feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis, due to the difference in how to determine
the movement distance, if a particularly small value is set for the imaginary radius, the movement on the
axis will be fast. Pay careful attention to the input to the parameter.
The cutting feedrate is clamped on the basis of the maximum cutting feedrate parameter for each axis
No.1430 and the feedrate of the actual axis (data before this function is converted). It is, therefore,
possible to specify a command with a feedrate greater than the setting of the maximum cutting feedrate by
setting a large value as the imaginary radius parameter No. 1465. By setting a small value as an imaginary
radius, the cutting feedrate is clamped at the feedrate less than the setting of the maximum cutting
feedrate.
The feedrate instruction on imaginary circle for a rotary axis is also effective to a dry run.
- AI Advanced Preview Control

AI advanced preview control is performed on the movement feedrate on an imaginary circle. The
movement feedrate may, therefore, not be the feedrate for the calculation in the feedrate instruction on
imaginary circle for a rotary axis if the feedrate is changed with the feedrate control of AI advanced
preview control. The feedrate during AI advanced preview control is clamped with parameter No.1432. If
parameter No. 8465 is not 0, it is also clamped with parameter No. 8465.
- 48 -
- 0mm in imaginary radius

When an imaginary radius is assumed 0mm, synthesized distance is as follows because the movement
distance of a rotary axis becomes 0mm.
L ′ = ΔX 2 + ΔY 2 + ΔZ 2
A movement feedrate of a linear axis can be instruction feedrate F by excluding feedrate element of a
rotary axis.
Moreover, it moves at the maximum cutting feedrate in case of this setting and instruction only in a rotary
axis.
Examples
When the following block is instructed on IS-B,
G91 G01 C10. F10. ;
The calculation is as follows, when 10.000(10mm) is set in an imaginary radius(parameter No.1465).

⎛ π × 10 ( mm ) × 10 ( deg ) ⎞
2
⎛ π × l C × ΔB ⎞
2
′
L = ⎜ ⎟ = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = 1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
⎝ 180 ⎠ ⎝ 180 ⎠
10 ( deg )
FC = 10 (mm / min ) × = 57.2957795 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( deg / min )
1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
L ′ 1.7453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
T′ = = = 0.17453292 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( min ) = 10.4719755 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( sec )
F 10 ( mm / min )
Therefore, the movement time becomes about 10.472(sec), and the rotation feedrate becomes about
57.296(deg/min). The feedrate on 10.000mm in an imaginary radius becomes 10.000mm/min at
instruction feedrate in Fig. 5.5 (a).
The calculation is as follows, when 36.000(36mm) is set in an imaginary radius(parameter No.1465).
⎛ π × 36 ( mm ) × 10 ( deg ) ⎞
2
⎛ π × l C × ΔB ⎞
2
L′ = ⎜ ⎟ = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = 6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( mm )
⎝ 180 ⎠ ⎝ 180 ⎠
10 ( deg )
FC = 10 (mm / min ) × = 15.9154943 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( deg / min )
6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅( mm )
L ′ 6.28318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( mm )
T′ = = = 0.628318530 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( min ) = 37.6991118 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ( sec )
F 10 ( mm / min )
Therefore, the movement time becomes about 37.700(sec), and the rotation feedrate becomes about
15.915(deg/min). The feedrate on 36.000mm in an imaginary radius becomes 10.000mm/min at
instruction feedrate in Fig. 5.5 (a).
Rotation feedrate when

Instruction feedrate
10mm setting.:(1)
F=10mm/min
Rotation feedrate when

36mm setting.:(2)
10mm
36mm
- 49 -
Fig. 5.5 (a)
Limitation
This function corresponds only the linear interpolation(G01).
However, it doesn't correspond to the following functions.
• Normal direction control
• Axis control by PMC
NOTE
1 When the bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 and the bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter
No. 1408 are 1, this function becomes effective.
2 The bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and an imaginary radius (parameter
No.1465) of this function can be rewriting by the programmable parameter
input(G10).
3 It moves at the maximum cutting feedrate when this function effectively and sets
0 in an imaginary radius (parameter No.1465) and it instructs only a rotary axis.
4 Note setting bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and an imaginary radius
(parameter No.1465) enough. Especially, a movement of axis quickens
compared with this function unused when small value is set to an imaginary
radius.
5 In this function, the same value as the parameter value (No.1408, No.1465) of a
master axis is used with a slave axis, when it uses axis synchronous control.
5.6 DWELL
Format
G04 X_; or G04 P_;
X_ : Specify a time (decimal point permitted)
P_ : Specify a time (decimal point not permitted)
Explanation
By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delayed by the specified time. (Dwell per
second)
Table 5.6 (a) Command value range of the dwell time (Command by X)
Increment system Command value range Dwell time unit
IS-A 0.01 to 999999.99
s
IS-B 0.001 to 99999.999
Table 5.6 (b) Command value range of the dwell time (Command by P)
Increment system Command value range Dwell time unit
IS-A 1 to 99999999 0.01 s
IS-B 1 to 99999999 0.001 s
In the case of dwell per second, the specification unit for dwell time specified with P can be fixed at 0.001
second by setting bit 7 (DWT) of parameter No. 1015 to 1.
- 50 -
NOTE
1 When X, or P is specified without a decimal point, the specification unit depends
on the increment system of the X-axis, and it does not depend on inch/metric
input.
2 When P is specified, bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 exercises no influence.
While dwell is being executed, “1” is set for diagnosis display No. 0002.
Specify dwell also to make an exact check in the cutting mode (G64 mode).
If the specification of P and X is omitted, an exact stop occurs.
Diagnosis display
2 Dwell execution status
While dwell is being executed, “1” is displayed.
- 51 -
6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
6 REFERENCE POSITION
A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate
system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position.
Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POSITION", consists of the following sections:
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN..................................................................................................52
6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Overview
- Reference position
The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the
reference position return function.
When setting a workpiece to be machined to general turret punch press, the workpiece is held by the
workpiece holders after positioning it by applying the end face of the workpiece to the end locator and
workpiece holders mounted on the machine as illustrated below.
Workpiece
Face B
Y
Face A
End locator Workpiece holder
Fase B
Apply face B to the end locator.
End locator Workpiece
Apply face A to workpiece holder.
Workpiece Face A Workpiece holder
- 52 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION
Generally, the distance between the reference position and the end locator as well as the distance between
the reference position and the workpiece holders are intrinsically determined according to machines, and
they are separated from each other by a fixed distance.
Reference position
Distance between reference position

and workpiece holder is intrinsically
determined according to machines.
End locator
Workpiece holder
The distance between the reference

positionand the end locator is
intrinsically determined according to
machines.
For example, if the start point is at the reference position and the point located at the left lower side of the
workpiece is presumed as the zero point of the workpiece coordinate system. The tool position at the start
point can be taught to NC as a position in the workpiece coordinate system by giving the following
command at the initial stage of programming.
G92X xR Y yR;
where, xR : Distance from end locator to reference position along X-axis

yR : Distance from workpiece holder to reference position along Y-axis
- Reference position return

Tools are automatically moved to the reference position. When reference position return is completed, the
lamp for indicating the completion of return goes on.
Setting bit 0 (SZR) of parameter No.16205 allows specifying whether to pass through the intermediate
point or not when the axis is returned to reference position.
Automatic reference position return A→R
R (Reference position)
A (Start position for reference position return)
- 53 -
6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
Automatic reference position return A→Intermediate position→R
R (Reference position)
Intermediate
A (Start position for reference position
Format
- Return to the reference position without passing through the intermediate
point
G28_; Reference position return
- Return to the reference position via the intermediate point

G28 IP_; Reference position return
IP : Specify the intermediate position in the absolute coordinate system.
(absolute/incremental programming)
Explanation
- Return to the reference position without passing through the intermediate
point (G28)
Reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the tool radius compensation, should be
cancelled before executing this command.
(Example)
G28 M30 ;
- Return to the reference position via the intermediate point

Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the tool radius compensation, should be
cancelled before executing this command.
(Example)
G28 X100.0 Y150.0 ;
Limitation
- Status the machine lock being turned on
The lamp for indicating the completion of reference position return does not go on when the machine lock
is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference position
- First return to the reference position after the power has been turned on
(without an absolute position detector)
When the G28 command is specified when manual return to the reference position has not been
performed after the power has been turned on, the movement from the intermediate point is the same as in
manual return to the reference position.
- 54 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION
In this case, the tool moves in the direction for reference position return specified in parameter ZMIx (bit
5 of No. 1006).
- Lighting the lamp when the programmed position does not coincide with the
reference position
When the machine tool system is an inch system with metric input, the reference position return lamp
may also light up even if the programmed position is shifted from the reference position by 1μ. This is
because the least input increment of the machine tool system is smaller than its least command increment.
Reference item
- Manual reference position return
See III–3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN.
- 55 -
7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
7 COORDINATE SYSTEM
By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is
represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes.
When two program axes, the X-axis and Y-axis are used, coordinates are specified as follows:
X_Y_
This command is referred to as a dimension word.
• Tool position specified by X40.0Y50.0
Tool
Y
50.0
40.0
Coordinates are specified in one of following three coordinate systems:

(1) Machine coordinate system
(2) Workpiece coordinate system
(3) Local coordinate system
The number of the axes of a coordinate system varies from one machine to another. So, in this manual, a
dimension word is represented as IP_.
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM

The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the
machine zero point. A machine tool builder sets a machine zero point for each machine.
A coordinate system with a machine zero point set as its origin is referred to as a machine coordinate
system.
A machine coordinate system is set by performing manual reference position return after power-on (see
Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN”). A machine coordinate system, once set,
remains unchanged until the power is turned off.
The reference position is not always the origin of the machine coordinate system.
(See "Reference - Setting a machine coordinate system" described later.)
Format
(G90)G53 IP _ P1;
IP_ : Absolute command dimension word
P1 : Enables the high-speed G53 function.
- 56 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM
Explanation
- Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53)
When a command is specified the position on a machine coordinate system, the tool moves to the position
by rapid traverse. G53, which is used to select a machine coordinate system, is a one-shot G code; that is,
it is valid only in the block in which it is specified on a machine coordinate system. Specify an absolute
command for G53. When an incremental command is specified, the G53 command is ignored. When the
tool is to be moved to a machine-specific position such as a tool change position, program the movement
in a machine coordinate system based on G53.
- High-speed G53 function

This function enables the inter-rapid traverse block overlap function between machine coordinate
selection command (G53) and positioning (rapid traverse) command (G00) blocks, thus making it
possible to execute the next rapid traverse command (G00) without decelerating to a stop at the end of the
machine coordinate selection command (G53). Therefore, high-speed positioning is available even when
the machine coordinate selection command (G53) is used.
Specifying P1 in a G53 block enables the high-speed G53 function.
Limitation
- Cancel of the compensation function
When the G53 command is specified, cancel the compensation functions such as the tool radius
compensation beforehand.
- G53 command immediately after power supply turning on

The Reference point by the manual Reference point return or G28 command should return once after
turning on the power supply because it should set the machine coordinate system before it instructs in
G53.
However, the operation is unnecessary for the machine with the absolute-position detector.
- Specification in the same block

Commands G50/G51 (Scaling), and G84/G85 (Rotation) cannot be specified in the same block where the
G53 command is specified.
Note
NOTE
G53 is a G code for disabling buffering.
Reference
- Setting a machine coordinate system
When manual reference position return is performed after power-on, a machine coordinate system is set
so that the reference position is at the coordinate values of (α, β) set using parameter No.1240.
Machine coordinate system
Machine zero point
Reference position
- 57 -
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

Overview
A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A
workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate
system).
A machining program sets a workpiece coordinate system (selecting a workpiece coordinate system).
A set workpiece coordinate system can be changed by shifting its origin (changing a workpiece
coordinate system).
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System

A workpiece coordinate system can be set using one of three methods:
(1) Method using a workpiece coordinate system setting G code
A workpiece coordinate system is set by specifying a value in the program after a workpiece
coordinate system setting G code.
(2) Automatic setting
If bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set
when manual reference position return is performed. (See Section, “MANUAL REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN”.)
This function is, however, disabled when the workpiece coordinate system option is being used.
(3) Method using a workpiece coordinate system selection G code
Six workpiece coordinate systems can be set beforehand using the MDI unit. Program commands
G54 to G59 can be used to select the workpiece axis to be used. (See Subsection, “Displaying and
Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value”.)
When using an absolute command, establish the workpiece coordinate system in any of the above ways.
Format
- Setting a workpiece coordinate system
(G90) G92 IP_
Explanation
A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool center, is at specified
coordinates.
Cutter compensation is cancelled temporarily with G92.
- 58 -
Example
Setting the coordinate system by the
G92 X25.2 Y23.0 ; command
Y Meet the programming start

point with a center of the tool
and command G92 at the start
of program.
23.0
25.2
0 X
7.2.2 Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System

The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below. (For information about
the methods of setting, see Subsection, “Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System”.)
(1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is set by a workpiece coordinate system setting G code or by
automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, absolute commands indicate positions in the
workpiece coordinate system.
(2) Choosing from six workpiece coordinate systems set using the MDI unit
By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be
selected.
G54 : Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 : Workpiece coordinate system 2
Workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 are established after reference position return after the power is
turned on. When the power is turned on, G54 coordinate system is selected.
When bit 2 (G92) of parameter No. 1202 is set to 1, executing the workpiece coordinate system setting
G92 code command results in the issue of an alarm PS0010. This is designed to prevent the user from
confusing coordinate systems.
Example
G90 G55 G00 X40.0 Y100.0 ;
Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55)
100.0 In this example, positioning is made to

positions (X=40.0, Y=100.0) in workpiece
coordinate system 2.
X
40.0
Fig. 7.2.2 (a)
- 59 -
7.2.3 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System

The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external
workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value.
Three methods are available to change an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin
offset value.
(1) Inputting from the MDI unit (see Subsection, “Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Value”.)
(2) Programming (using a programmable data input G code or a workpiece coordinate system setting G
code)
(3) Using the external data input function
An external workpiece origin offset value can be changed by input signal to CNC. Refer to machine
tool builder's manual for details.
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate system 1 coordinate system 2 coordinate system 3 coordinate system 4
(G54) (G55) (G56) (G57)
ZOFS2 ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS1
Workpiece coordinate
ZOFS5 system 5 (G58)
EXOFS
Machine zero point ZOFS6 Workpiece coordinate

system 6 (G59)
EXOFS : External workpiece origin offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece origin offset value
Fig. 7.2.3 (a) Changing an external workpiece origin offset value or workpiece origin offset value
Format
- Changing by inputting programmable data
G10 L2 Pp IP_;
p=0 : External workpiece origin offset value
p=1 to 6 : Workpiece origin offset value correspond to workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6
IP_ : For an absolute command, workpiece origin offset for each axis.
For an incremental command, value to be added to the set workpiece origin offset for
each axis (the result of addition becomes the new workpiece origin offset).
- Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system

G92 IP_ ;
Explanation
- Changing by inputting programmable data
By specifying a programmable data input G code, the workpiece origin offset value can be changed for
each workpiece coordinate system.
- Changing by setting a workpiece coordinate system

By specifying a workpiece coordinate system setting G code, the workpiece coordinate system (selected
with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpiece coordinate system so that the current tool
position matches the specified coordinates (IP_).
Then, the amount of coordinate system shift is added to all the workpiece origin offset values. This means
that all the workpiece coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount.
- 60 -
CAUTION
When a coordinate system is set with workpiece coordinate system setting G92
code command after an external workpiece origin offset value is set, the
coordinate system is not affected by the external workpiece origin offset value.
When G92X100.0Y80.0; is specified, for example, the coordinate system having
its current tool reference position at X = 100.0 and Y = 80.0 is set.
Example
Y Y’
G54 workpiece coordinate system
If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool is positioned

160 100 Tool position at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiece coordinate system 1
(X' - Y') shifted by vector A is created.
60 A X’ New workpiece coordinate system

100
X Original workpiece coordinate system

100 200
7.2.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)

The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by
manual intervention to the pre-shift workpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displaced from the
machine zero point by a workpiece origin offset value.
There are two methods for using the workpiece coordinate system preset function. One method uses a
programmed command. The other uses MDI operations on the absolute position display screen, relative
position display screen, and overall position display screen (see Subsection, “Workpiece Coordinate
System Preset”).
Format
G92.1 IP 0 ;
IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece coordinate system preset
operation. Axes that are not specified are not subject to the preset operation.
Explanation
When manual reference position return operation is performed in the reset state, a workpiece coordinate
system is shifted by the workpiece origin offset value from the machine coordinate system zero point.
Suppose that the manual reference position return operation is performed when a workpiece coordinate
system is selected with G54. In this case, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically set which has its
origin displaced from the machine zero point by the G54 workpiece origin offset value; the distance from
the origin of the workpiece coordinate system to the reference position represents the current position in
the workpiece coordinate system.
- 61 -
G54 workpiece coordinate system
Workpiece origin
G54 workpiece
origin offset value
Reference position
Machine zero point

Manual reference position return
If an absolute position detector is provided, the workpiece coordinate system automatically set at
power-up has its origin displaced from the machine zero point by the G54 workpiece origin offset value.
The machine position at the time of power-up is read from the absolute position detector and the current
position in the workpiece coordinate system is set by subtracting the G54 workpiece origin offset value
from this machine position. The workpiece coordinate system set by these operations is shifted from the
machine coordinate system using the commands and operations listed below.
(a) Move command executed in the machine lock state
(b) Movement by handle interruption
(c) Operation using the mirror image function
(d) Shifting the workpiece coordinate system by setting the local coordinate system or workpiece
coordinate system
In the case of (b) above, the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the amount of handle interruption.
G54 workpiece Po
coordinate system before
handle interruption Amount of
movement during
WZo handle interruption
Workpiece origin
G54 workpiece
offset value coordinate system after
handle interruption
Pn
Machine zero point
WZn-
In the operation above, a workpiece coordinate system once shifted can be preset using G code (G92.1)
specification or MDI operation to a workpiece coordinate system displaced by a workpiece origin offset
value from the machine zero point.
Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 specifies whether to preset relative coordinates (RELATIVE) as well
as absolute coordinates.
When no workpiece coordinate system option (G54 to G59) is selected, the workpiece coordinate system
is preset to the coordinate system with its origin placed at the reference position.
Limitation
- Tool radius compensation
When using the workpiece coordinate system preset function, cancel compensation modes: Tool radius
compensation. If the function is executed without canceling these modes, compensation vectors are
cancelled.
- Prohibited modes
Do not use the workpiece coordinate system preset function when the scaling, coordinate system rotation
is set.
- 62 -
7.2.5 Automatic Coordinate System Setting

When bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 for automatic coordinate system setting is 1, a coordinate
system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is performed.
Once α and β are set with parameter No. 1250, a workpiece coordinate system is set upon reference
position return so that the base point on the tool holder or the tip of the basic tool is positioned at X = α
and Y = β.
This processing occurs as if the following are specified at the reference position:
G92XαYβ;
This function cannot be used, however, when the workpiece coordinate system is applied.
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be
set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system.
Format
G52 IP_; Setting the local coordinate system
:
G52 IP 0 ; Canceling of the local coordinate system
IP_ : Origin of the local coordinate system
Explanation
By specifying G52 IP_;, a local coordinate system can be set in all the workpiece coordinate systems
(G54 to G59). The origin of each local coordinate system is set at the position specified by IP_ in the
Once a local coordinate system is established, the coordinates in the local coordinate system are used in
an axis shift command. The local coordinate system can be changed by specifying the G52 command with
the origin of a new local coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system.
To cancel the local coordinate system or specify the coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate system,
match the origin of the local coordinate system with that of the workpiece coordinate system.
- 63 -
IP_ (Local coordinate system)
(G54: Workpiece coordinate system 1)
G55 IP_ (Local coordinate system)

G56
G57
G58 (G59: Workpiece coordinate
system 6)
(Machine coordinate system)
Machine coordinate system zero point
Reference position
Fig. 7.3 (a) Setting the local coordinate system
CAUTION
1 When ZCL (bit 2 of parameter No.1201) is set to 1 and an axis returns to the
reference position by the manual reference position return function, the origin of
the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the workpiece coordinate
system. The same is true when the following command is issued:
G52α0;
α: Axis which returns to the reference position
2 The local coordinate system setting does not change the workpiece and machine
coordinate systems.
3 Whether the local coordinate system is canceled at reset depends on the
parameter setting. The local coordinate system is canceled when either bit 6
(CLR) of parameter No.3402 or bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.1202 is set to 1
4 When a workpiece coordinate system is set with the G92 command, the local
coordinate system is canceled. However, the local coordinate system of an axis
for which no coordinate system is specified in a G92 block remains unchanged.
5 G52 cancels the offset temporarily in tool radius compensation.
6 The incremental programming after the G52 block is not regarded as the
incremental distance from the current tool position. This programming is
regarded the incremental distance from origin of the local coordinate system
specified.
However, When the bit 0 (LIP) of parameter No. 16201 is set to 1, the
incremental programming after the G52 block is regarded as the incremental
distance from the current tool position.
- 64 -
7.4 PLANE SELECTION

Select the planes for circular interpolation, tool radius compensation, and coordinate system rotation.
The following table lists G-codes and the planes selected by them.
Explanation
Table 7.4 (a) Plane selected by G code
G code Selected plane Xp Yp Zp
G17 Xp Yp plane
X-axis or an axis Y-axis or an axis Z-axis or an axis
G18 Zp Xp plane
parallel to it parallel to it parallel to it
G19 Yp Zp plane
Xp, Yp, Zp are determined by the axis address appeared in the block in which G17, G18 or G19 is
commanded.
When an axis address is omitted in G17, G18 or G19 block, it is assumed that the addresses of basic three
axes are omitted.
Parameter No. 1022 is used to specify that an optional axis be parallel to the each axis of the X-, Y-, and
Z-axes as the basic three axes.
The plane is unchanged in the block in which G17, G18 or G19 is not commanded.
The movement instruction is irrelevant to the plane selection.
When the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, G17 (XY plane), G18 (ZX plane), or G19 (YZ plane) is
selected by bits 1 (G18) and 2 (G19) of parameter No. 3402).
Example
Plane selection when the X-axis is parallel with the U-axis.
G17 X_Y_ ; XY plane,
G17 U_Y_ ; UY plane
G18 X_Z_ ; ZX plane
X_Y_ ; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane)
G17 ; XY plane
G18 ; ZX plane
G17 U_ ; UY plane
G18Y_ ; ZX plane, Y axis moves regardless without any relation to the plane.
- 65 -
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections:
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) ..............................................66

8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21).....................................................................................66
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ..............................................................................................69
8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90,

G91)
There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute programming, and the incremental
programming. In the absolute programming, coordinate value of the end position is programmed. The
incremental programming is used to program the amount of a tool movement.
G90 and G91 are used to programming absolute or incremental programming, respectively.
Format
Absolute programming G90 IP_ ;
Incremental programming G91 IP_ ;
Example
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; Absolute programming
G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; Incremental programming
Y End point
70.0
30.0 Start point
X
40.0 100.0
8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21)

Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code.
Format
G20 ; Inch input
G21 ; Metric input
This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the
beginning of the program. After the G code for inch/metric conversion is specified, the unit of input data
is switched to the least inch or metric input increment of increment system (see Section, “INCREMENT
- 66 -
8.COORDINATE VALUE AND
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING DIMENSION
SYSTEM”). The unit of data input for degrees remains unchanged. The unit systems for the following
values are changed after inch/metric conversion:
• Feedrate commanded by F code
• Positional command
• Workpiece origin offset value
• Tool compensation value
• Unit of scale for manual pulse generator
• Movement distance in incremental feed
• Some parameters
When the power is turned on, the G code is the same as that held before the power was turned off.
WARNING
G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program.
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are
different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error
is not accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using settings (see Subsection,
“Displaying and Entering Setting Data”).
3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of
parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric conversion at
the reference position (machine coordinate system origin).
Performing inch/metric conversion in the reference position (parameter No.

1240 is not 0)
Conventionally, inch/metric conversion must be performed at the machine coordinate system origin.
However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed
in the reference position (parameter No. 1240).
If an attempt is made to perform inch/metric conversion when an axis with this function enabled is not in
the reference position, alarm PS5362, “CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS” is issued to cancel the
attempt.
Before trying to perform inch/metric conversion, be sure to set the axis of interest to the reference
position, using the G28 command, for example.
In addition, if the workpiece coordinate system has been shifted from the machine coordinate system,
using the following commands or operations, bit 1 (CIM) of parameter No. 11222 can be used to select
whether to issue alarm PS1298 or to clear the offset.
• Move command issued with the machine locked
• Move command issued using a handle interrupt
• Mirror image-based operation
• Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece
coordinate system setting (G92)
Switching conditions
Performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires satisfying all
of the following conditions. Failing to satisfy any of the conditions results in alarm PS1298, “ILLEGAL
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION” being issued
• Positioning or linear interpolation
• Tool radius compensation cancel
• Normal direction control cancel
- 67 -
• Scaling cancel
• Macro modal call cancel
• Coordinate system rotation mode off
In addition, performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires
the following options.
• Inch/metric conversion
• Workpiece coordinate system
Restrictions
When performing the following operations, make sure that the axis of interest is in the reference position
(machine coordinate system origin).
• Inch/metric conversion based on bit 2 (INI) of setting parameter No. 0
• Inch/metric conversion based on programmable parameter input (G10)
• Inch/metric conversion based on custom macro variable No. 3005
Performing inch/metric conversion in positions other than the reference

position
Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric conversion to be performed even in
positions other than the reference position.
In addition, if the workpiece coordinate system has been shifted from the machine coordinate system,
using the following commands or operations, bit 1 (CIM) of parameter No. 11222 can be used to select
whether to issue alarm PS1298 or to clear the offset.
• Move command issued with the machine locked
• Move command issued using a handle interrupt
• Mirror image-based operation
• Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece
coordinate system setting (G92)
If an axis is under any of the following controls, however, no automatic coordinate system conversion
based on this function can be carried out for the axis.
• Axis control by PMC
• Axis synchronous control (for slave axes when the master axis is a PMC axis)
Switching conditions
Performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires satisfying all
of the following conditions. Failing to satisfy any of the conditions results in alarm PS1298 being issued.
• Positioning or linear interpolation
• Tool radius compensation cancel
• Normal direction control cancel
• Scaling cancel
• Macro modal call cancel
• Coordinate system rotation mode off
In addition, performing inch/metric conversion in any position other than the reference position requires
the following options.
• Inch/metric conversion
• Workpiece coordinate system
• Workpiece coordinate system preset
- 68 -
8.COORDINATE VALUE AND
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING DIMENSION
Restrictions
When performing the following operations, make sure that the axis of interest is in the reference position
(machine coordinate system origin).
• Inch/metric conversion based on bit 2 (INI) of setting parameter No. 0
• Inch/metric conversion based on programmable parameter input (G10)
• Inch/metric conversion based on custom macro variable No. 3005
8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING

Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a
distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses:
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, Q, R, F
Explanation
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be
specified in millimeters inch, or deg. When standard decimal notation is used, such a value is considered
to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal notation by
using the bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401.Values can be specified both with and without decimal point
in a single program.
Example
Pocket calculator type decimal Standard type decimal point
Program command
point programming programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm
Command value without decimal point Unit :mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm)
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm
Command value with decimal point Unit :mm Unit :mm
CAUTION
When specifying a dimension word for a command G code in a block, be sure to
place the dimension word after the command G code.
NOTE
1 A specified value less than the minimum unit is treated as described below.
Example 1)
When a value is specified directly at an address (in the case of 1/1000mm
IS-B)
X1.2345 ; Treated as X1.235
X-1.2345 ; Treated as X-1.234
Example 2)
When a value is assigned to a macro variable (in the case of 1/1000mm IS-B)
#100=1.2345;
X#100 ; Treated as X1.235
#100=-1.2345;
X#100 ; Treated as X-1.234
- 69 -
NOTE
2 When more than eight digits are specified, an alarm occurs. If a value is entered
with a decimal point, the number of digits is also checked after the value is
converted to an integer according to the least input increment.
Examples:
X1.23456789;
Alarm PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGIT” occurs because more than eight digits
are specified.
X123456.7;
If the least input increment is 0.001 mm, the value is converted to integer
123456700. Because the integer has more than eight digits, an alarm
occurs.
- 70 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 9.PRESS FUNCTION
9 PRESS FUNCTION
Chapter 9, "PRESS FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING) ..................................................................................71

9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70).........................................................................................73
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION ....................................................................................................................73
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION .........................................................................................................82
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION..................................................................................................86
9.1 PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)

This control sends a signal “Start press and punch” to the machine after moving a tool to the position
commanded in a predetermined block.
When the machine receives this signal, it starts pressing. As a result, punching is made on a workpiece by
the selected tool. After punching, the press motion stops, and a signal returns to the NC to indicate that
“punch has finished”.
Thus, NC proceeds to the execution of the next block. In this manner, punching on a workpiece by press
motion is executed by data transfer between the NC and the machine, and it is necessary to know the
blocks to be punched, in advance.
This description is made from the viewpoints of the NC side. Since details may differ depending upon the
machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual without fail.
NOTE
This section covers one-cycle punch only. For nibbling (punching by sequential
repeated press motion), refer to “9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION”.
9.1.1 Block in which Punching is Made

Punching is made in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis is positioned at rapid traverse, in principle. In
other words, punching is not done in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis
is not positioned at rapid traverse. Blocks where punching is done are as follows:
(1) Block where X-axis or Y-axis is positioned in the positioning mode (G00)
CAUTION
If the same position as the present tool position is commanded by address X or
Y, positioning is not done, but punching is executed. (This is regarded as the
positioning command with movement amount 0)
G00G91X0; . . . Punching is made.
This applies to such a case that punching is done at the same position using a
different tool.
- 71 -
9.PRESS FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
Tool 01 profile
Tool 02 profile
N711G00G90X50.0Y30.0T02; . . . Punching is done using tool 02

N712X50.0Y30.0T01; . . . Punching is made using tool 01
The punch profile at (50, 30) position is as shown below.
No punching is made in case of N712T01;, N712T01C50.01;
CAUTION
Punching is not done in T single block where the X-axis or Y-axis moves for tool
offset.
(2) Block where pattern function G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87 or G89 was commanded
Punching is made after positioning to respective points on a pattern.
Punching is not done in the following cases, even if the block corresponds to (1) or (2).
(a) MDI mode is selected.
(b) M code is commanded.
(c) Blocks inserted between M code of workpiece clamp and M code of workpiece unclamp which
are employed for repositioning of workpiece.
(d) Block where positioning & punch off (G70) was commanded.
CAUTION
Punching is not done even in G00 mode if the block is irrespective of positioning
such as coordinate system setting (G92), local coordinate system setting (G52),
standard point command (G72), dwell (G04), etc.
- 72 -
9.2 POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70)

Punching is made in a block where the X-axis or Y-axis if positioned at rapid traverse, in principle.
Command the following code, if it is not desired to punch a workpiece after positioning a tool to the
commanded position at rapid traverse.
G70X__Y__;
CAUTION
1 G70 is an one–shot G code.
2 Rapid traverse is made in a G70 block even if in G01, G02 or G03 mode.
9.3 NIBBLING FUNCTION

Nibbling means sequential repeated punching without stopping press motion.
Assume Tt be the time required for one-cycle press motion. The remaining time obtained by subtracting
punching time Tp from Tt (or, Ti = Tt – Tp) is the time allowable for positioning.
Flywheel
Position of tool
Upper dead
Crank mechanism point
workpiece
Lower dead
Tool for point
punching Tp Ti
Position Tt
Tt : One cycle in press motion
Time Tp : Processing time of press motion
Ti : Positioning time for the workpiece
Fig.9.3
The maximum distance (maximum pitch) which can be positioned in time Ti is limited by various
conditions, such as machine, servo motor, and others as well as time Ti.
In this NC, the maximum nibbling pitch determined by these conditions is preset as a parameter. On the
other hand, the nibbling pitch is commanded by a program. If the commanded pitch exceeds the
maximum pitch preset by the parameter, an alarm is produced.
Since this pitch can be specified directly, programming can be done, while taking the scallop into
consideration.
- 73 -
Scallop s
p
d
The relation between pitch p and scallop s is as shown below in case of linear
nibbling
p=2 d s − s2
where d: Tool diameter
The following functions are prepared for nibbling.

Function Description
Punching at constant intervals #n
(distance) along the Circular arc for d
#2
r
Circular nibbling (G68) a specified angle. p #1
Δθ
θ
G68 I r J θ K Δθ P d Q p
Punching at constant intervals d
(distance) along the straight line for l
#n
Linear nibbling (G69) a specified distance. p
θ
G69 I l J θ P d Q p #1 #2
M## ← M code of nibbling mode（Set value of parameter No.16183）

‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥ The route and the pitch are specified according to these
Nibbling by M function
‥‥‥‥‥ command
M$$ ← M code of nibbling mode cancel
（Set value of parameter No.16184）
- 74 -
9.3.1 Circular Nibbling (G68)

Circular nibbling (G68) specifies punching at constant pitch (distance) on the circular arc with a start
point specified by G72 or the current tool position as the center of the circle.
Format
r : Radius of arc (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

Unit of data : Input unit (inch/mm)
-Should be specified by positive number.
θ : Angle formed between the first punch point and the + X axis
(Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : minimum unit of data (deg)
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
Δθ : Incremental angle from the first punch point to the least punch point
(Valid data range : −999999999～999999999)
-Counterclockwise nibbling is made when this angle is commanded by a positive
number.
d : Tool diameter value (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-Nibbling is made outside the arc when this value is positive, inside the arc when this
value is negative, and on the circumference when this value is 0.
-Actual tool path is the arc having radius r+d/2.
p :Pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an arc length.
Nibbling is made at pitch p using a tool having diameter d, starting with the point which forms angle θ
with reference to the X-axis on the circumference having radius r, with the preset tool position or the
position specified by G72 being set as the circle center, to the point which forms angle θ + Δθ with
reference to the X-axis.
When θ>0, Δθ>0, and d>0 #1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#3
r #2
p
Δθ #1
Center of circle θ d
(Pattern base point) +X
- 75 -
Example 1
N1111 G90 G00 X50. Y97. Coordinates are expressed by IS-B

N1112 G72 X50. Y100. #1 to #9：Order of punch motion in
N1113 G68 I4. J−60. K90. P−1. Q0.8 N1113
：Path of tool
1.000
4.000
#9:(53.031,101.750)
#8:(53.314,101.125)
#7:(53.470,100.457)
N1112
+X
(50.000,100.000)
−60° 90° #6:(53.493,99.771)
#5:(53.381,99.094)
#4:(53.139,98.452)
N1111:(50.000,97.000)
#3:(52.777,97.869)
#2:(52.308,97.369)
0.800 → Actual pitch=0.785

#1:(51.750,96.969)
- 76 -
CAUTION
1 G68 is an one-shot G code.
2 The base point of G68 is the center of arc.
3 Pitch specification
The pitch is specified by the arc length.
The pitch is defined as the divided length of the arc having radius r specified in
address I. The pitch does not mean the arc length between the centers of
adjacent punch points, i.e., the divided length of the arc having a radius of r + d/2
(d: tool diameter).
This reason is shown below.
：Path of tool
These faces are required as

product profiles.
The commanded arc faces are required as a final product, irrespective of

whether the tool moves along outside of the arc (right upper part) or inside of the
arc (right lower part).
Accordingly, it is desirable that the pitch along the specified arc is equal to the
commanded pitch, when taking the scallop into consideration.
- 77 -
4 Pitch compensation
In punching using the command pitch (p), it is generated a remainder that does
not come up to 1 pitch. When the remainder is the pitch moving the last
punching point, only the last pitch is different from the other pitch. That is why
the pitch automatically corrected by the method of below figure is used as an
actual pitch to keep a constant pitch from first to last. As a result, an actual pitch
becomes the maximum below the instruction pitch and constant an interval.
Calculating method of actual pitch
#(n−1) #2
#n #1
Arc length
r
p (command pitch)
Δθ ↓
p’ (real pitch)
(1) The command pitch (p) is defined as a temporary pitch.

(2) When the number of punching point without first punching point is defined
as a, the number of punching point a is calculated by the following
expression. (In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral
number. However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool
does not arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the
decimal point is rounded up.)
Δθ
2π × r ×
a=
Arc length
= 360 = 2π × r × Δθ
p p 360 × p
(after the decimal point rounded up.)
(3) And when the actual pitch is defined as p', pitch p' is the pitch to punch
evenly by the number of punching point a rounded up. Therefore, pitch p is
calculated by the following expression.
Arc length 2π × r × Δθ
p′ = =
a 360 × a
5 If radius is 0, or if the pitch is 0 or more than a specified value, alarm (PS 4523)
is produced.
- 78 -
9.3.2 Linear Nibbling (G69)

Linear nibbling (G69) specifies punching at constant pitch (distance) on the straight line which forms an
specified angle with a start point specified by G72 or the current tool position as the start point.
Format
G69 I l J θ P d Q p
l : Length of straight line (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If a negative number is commanded, the angle between the straight line and the +X axis
becomes θ + 180 deg.
θ : Angle formed between straight line and the + X axis
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
-The clockwise direction is commanded by a negative number.
d : Tool diameter value (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-When this value is positive, nibbling is made leftwards as viewed from the start point to
the end point of the straight line.
-When this value is negative, nibbling is made rightwards as viewed from the start point to
the end point of the straight line.
-When this value is 0, nibbling is made along the straight line.
p : Pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an straight line length.
By the above command, nibbling is made at pitch p using a tool having diameter d along a straight line of
length which forms angle θ with reference to the X-axis, starting with the present tool position or the
position specified by G72 as the start point.
When l>0, θ>0, and d>0

#n
#(n−1)
l
p #2 #3
#1
θ
d +X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n：Order of punch motion
- 79 -
Example 2
N1212 G72 X80. Y60. #1 to #8：Order of punch motion in
N1213 G69 I10. J135. P−2. Q1.5 N1213
： Path of tool
#8:(73.636,67.778)
#7:(74.646,66.768)
#6:(75.656,65.758)
10.000
#5:(76.666,64.748) 1.500
→ Actual pitch = 1.429
#4:(77.677,63.738)
#3:(78.687,62.727)
#2:(79.697,61.717) N1211
(84.000,62.000)
#1:(80.707,60.707)
+X
N1212:(80.000,60.000) 2.000
135°
CAUTION
1 G69 is a one-shot G code.
2 The base point of G69 is the start point.
3 The pitch compensation is the same as in circular nibbling (G68); except that the
circumferential length of an arc in G68 is changed to the linear length (For
details, refer to Note 4 in 9.3.1)
4 If pitch is 0 or more than specified, alarm (PS 4524) is produced.
9.3.3 Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling (G69)

CAUTION
1 The maximum pitches in G68 and G69 are set by parameters No. 16186.
2 If T code is commanded in G68 or G69 block, nibbling is started after the X and
Y axes have moved to the first punch point and also a tool has been selected.
3 M code is not commandable in G68 and G69 blocks.
4 For the rapid traverse to the first punch point, the rapid traverse override is
effective when it is specified by the rapid traverse override switch on the
machine operator’s panel or by F1-digit specification. For the pitch movement up
to the final point, the rapid traverse override is ineffective and fixed to 100%.
5 If G68 or G69 is commanded using the single block operation, nibbling is made
up to the last punch point, and then, stopped.
- 80 -
6 If feed hold is applied halfway during the movement to the first punch point, the
X and Y axes stop at once. These axes also stop immediately when the feed
hold is applied halfway during the pitch movement from the first point to the last
point. However, this can be changed by bit 2 (NSP) of parameter No. 16181 in
such a way that the X and Y axes stop after pitch movement.
7 In a block just after G68 or G69, the tool does not move by the incremental
amount from the tool position when nibbling ends, but moves from the
programmed end point of the arc or straight line by the incremental amount.
N1311 G90 G72 X60. Y50. #1 to #10：Order of punch motion

N1312 G68 I70. J0 K90. P20. Q15. ：Path of tool
N1313 G91 G00 X−60. Y−10.
End punch point
Tool does not move by the incremental #9:(60.0,130.0)
amount from end punch point. #8
(0.0,120.0)
(60.0,120.0)
(−60.0,−10.0)
End point in N1313 Program end
#10:(0.0,110.0) #2
(60.0,50.0) #1
Pattern base point
Fig.9.3.3 (a) Incremental programming Immediately after circular nibbling (G68)
N1311 G90 G72 X0. Y30. #1～#10 ：Order of punch motion

N1312 G69 I60. J0 P20. Q8. ：Path of tool
N1313 G91 G00 X30. Y-30.
End punch point

#9:(60.0,40.0)
#1 #2 #8 #9
Tool does not move by the
incremental amount from
end punch point.
(60.0,30.0)
Program end
End point in N1313
#10:(90.0,0.0)
Fig.9.3.3 (b) Incremental programming Immediately after linear nibbling (G69)
8 Since radius, straight line length in G68 and G69 are not modal data, they must be
commanded correctly in every block.
9 It is possible in certain machines that nibbling is not performed by G68 or G69
command, but one-cycle punching is executed at respective positioning points.
- 81 -
9.4 NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION

In addition to the circular or linear nibbling according to the G68 or G69 command, this control can
perform nibbling by M function. In other words, it can execute nibbling in the blocks from a block with
the M code of nibbling mode to a block with the M code of nibbling mode cancel as shown below.
M## M code of nibbling mode (Set value of parameter No.16183)

‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥ (1) Nibbling is done in these blocks. (nibbling mode)
‥‥‥‥‥‥
‥‥‥‥‥‥
M$$ M code of nibbling mode cancel (Set value of parameter No.16184)
In this manual, the M code of nibbling mode is described as M12, while the M code of the nibbling mode
cancel is described as M13. However, since these M codes may be different from those specified above in
certain machine tool builders, you are requested to read these M codes correspondingly according to the
manual prepared by these machine tool builders. Don’t use this nibbling by M function in a different way
other than specified in this manual, since there are certain restriction about its use.
WARNING
Each of the M codes for nibbling mode and nibbling mode cancel must be
commanded in a single block.
9.4.1 G00 Command in Nibbling Mode

Example 3
N100G00G90Xx1Yy1 ;
N110M12;
N120Xx2Yy2 T ;
N130Xx3Yy3 ;
N140Xx4Yy4 ;
N150Xx5Yy5 ;
N160Xx6Yy6 ;
N170Xx7Yy7 ;
N180M13;
(1) The first punch point of nibbling is commanded in the block next to M12. A T code can also be
commanded in this block concurrently.
The first punch point (x2, y2) of nibbling is previously commanded in N120 block, and nibbling
is started when the positioning to (x2, y2) has been completed and the motion corresponding to
the T code has been finished.
The movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis in this block are not restricted by the maximum
positioning distances (parameter Nos. 16188, 16184) of the X-axis and Y-axis in the nibbling mode.
(2) In the blocks after the first punch point of nibbling has been commanded, the positioning command
is given to correspond to the pitches by G68 and G69 commands.
If the movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis in these blocks exceed the parameter set values
(parameter No. 16188), alarm (PS 4521) results.
- 82 -
In N130 to N170 blocks, the positioning corresponding to the nibbling pitch is commanded. If
the movement amounts along X-axis x3-x2, x4-x3, x5-x4, x6-x5, x7-x6 or the movement amounts
of Y-axis y3-y2, y4-y3, y5-y4, y6-y5, y7-y6 exceed the parameter set values in each block, alarm
(PS 4521) is issued.
(3) M13 is commanded in the block next to the block where the last punch point of nibbling was
commanded.
The last punch point (x7, y7) of nibbling is commanded in the N170 block and M13 is
commanded in the next block, i.e. in block N180. Punching is done at (xn, yn) and nibbling
terminates.
The G00 command in the nibbling mode is given to execute the positioning to the commanded position,
and the movement amounts along X-axis and Y-axis should not exceed the parameter set values (No.
16188), except for the command to the first punch point of nibbling.
9.4.2 G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode

Linear nibbling can be done by commanding G01 in the nibbling mode, while circular nibbling can be
done by commanding G02 and G03 in the nibbling mode.
The tool diameter cannot be offset by G01, G02, G03 commands. Accordingly, these commands are used
together with cutter compensation commands (G40, G41, G42) when nibbling is done by offsetting a
continuous straight line or circular arc leftwards or rightwards by the tool diameter.
(1) Straight line
G01 X x Yy Qp
x,y : Specified in the same way as an ordinary G01.

-This pitch is specified as an straight line length.
(2) Circular arc
G02 Ii Jj
Xx Yy Qp
G03 Rr
x,y,i,j,r : Specified in the same way as an ordinary G02 or G03.

-This pitch is specified as an arc length.
- 83 -
Example 4

N1432 M12 #1 ：Punching in N1433
N1433 G41 X120. Y120. D01 #2 to #6 ：Order of punch motion in N1434
N1434 G01 X125. Y130. Q3. #7 to #9 ：Order of punch motion in N1435
N1435 X130. Y130. #10 to #19：Order of punch motion in N1436
N1436 G03 X150. Y130. I10. #20 to #25：Order of punch motion in N1437
N1437 G01 X155. Y140. #26 to #34：Order of punch motion in N1438
N1438 X160. Y120. p ：Actual pitch
N1439 M13 ：Path of tool
N1440 G40 G00 X160. Y110.
p=2.363
#25 #26
Cutter compensation = 2.000 (154.106,142.683) (156.455,142.425)
Commanded pitch = 3.000
p=2.730
p=2.745 #9
(132.000,132.000) p=2.827
#6 #7
#20
(123.764,132.000) (148.000,130.472) (155,140)
p=2.000 p=0.472 N1437
N1435 #10 #19 (150,130)
(130,130)
N1438
#2
(125,130)
p=2.483
N1434
#1 (120,120) p=2.793 N1436 (160,120)

(118.211,120.894) #34
(161.940,120.485)
N1433 N1440
N1431:(120,110) N1440:(160,110)
Fig.9.4.2
The G40, G41, and G42 codes function as follows.

For details, refer to the section 16.4 “DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION”.
G code Function
G40 Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Leftward offset for moving direction of tool
G42 Rightward offset for moving direction of tool
Assume that the tool radius (2.0) is preset to offset No. 01.
(1) The first punch point of nibbling and either G41 or G42 to offset the tool leftwards or rightwards as
viewed from the moving direction of the tool are commanded in the block next to M12 block. The
first punch point is commanded by G00.
The first punch point (120.0, 120.0) of nibbling is commanded and also G41 is commanded
in the N1433 block.
Accordingly, positioning is done at rapid traverse to the point (118.211, 120.894) being
offset leftwards to the commanded position by the tool diameter being preset to offset No. 01.
Nibbling is started when the positioning has been completed.
- 84 -
(2) The straight line is commanded by G01, the circular arc is commanded by G02, G03, and the pitch is
commanded by Q, starting with the block next to the block where the first punch point was
commanded.
Since pitch Q is a modal data, it is no longer needed to designate pitch Q after pitch Q was
designated once.
The axis movement to pitch Q is done at rapid traverse.
The straight line and circular arc along which nibbling is done are commanded in N1434 to
N1438 blocks. The straight line and circular arc obtained by offsetting the commanded
straight line and circular arc leftwards by the tool diameter being preset to offset No. 01, are
divided by pitch Q.
The axis movement to pitch is done at rapid traverse.
(3) M13 is commanded in the block next to the block where the end point of nibbling was commanded.
The end point (160.0, 120.0) of nibbling is commanded in N1438 block, and M13 is
commanded in the N280 block next to the N1439 block. Nibbling is completed after
punching was done at point (161.940, 120.485) being offset leftwards by the tool diameter at
end point (160.0, 120.0).
For G01, G02, and G03 in the nibbling mode, the straight line and circular arc are divided by the pitch
commanded by address Q, and the movement to respective pitches is done at rapid traverse. If the pitch
commanded by address Q exceeds the parameter set value No. 16186: for mm input, No. 16187: for inch
input, alarm (PS 4523) is issued.
Now, the difference of the motion will be described when the program shown in example 4 is presumed
to have been programmed as shown in example 5.
Example 5
N1431 G90 G00 X120. Y110.
N1432 G41 X120. Y120. D01
N1433 M12
N1434 G01 X125. Y130. Q3.
…………………………
…………………………
…………………………
In the program shown in example 4, nibbling is started after the positioning has been completed to
(118.211, 120.894). In case of the program shown in example 5, on the other hand, one-cycle punching
only is done after the positioning has been completed to point (118.211, 120.894), and nibbling is started
after the axis movement by pitch Q along the straight line in N1434 block.
- 85 -
9.4.3 Notes on Nibbling by M Function

CAUTION
1 The following commands only are executable in nibbling mode.
(i) X, Y positioning command by G00
Provided that the T code and F1-digit command can be included in the same
block where the X, Y positioning is made by G00 to the first punch point of
nibbling.
(ii) G26 (bolt hole circle), G76 (line at angle), G77 (arc), G78, G79 (grid), G86
(share proofs), G87 (square), G88 (radius), G89 (cut at angle)
The movement amounts along the X-axis and Y-axis to respective
positioning points should not exceed the parameter set value (No. 16188),
except when the first positioning point is equivalent to the first punch point of
nibbling.
(iii) G01, G02, G03, G41 and G42 commands in the range described in 9.4.2.
2 The positioning distance commandable by the X-Y positioning command by G00
is not composite distance Δx + Δy obtained by the movement amounts along
2 2
X-axis and Y-axis.

If the absolute value of the movement amount along either X-axis or Y-axis
exceeds the parameter set value (No. 16188), alarm (PS 4521) is issued.
This provision also applies to G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87, G88 and
G89, correspondingly.
3 In the Example 4, offset was made by the tool diameter by G41 or G42 to G01,
G02 and G03. In that case, the offset straight line or circular arc is divided by the
pitch commanded by address Q.
Be careful since the above division differs form such a case that a commanded
circular arc is divided by a commanded pitch, like in G68 (circular nibbling).
9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION

Section 9.1 “PUNCH FUNCTIONS (1-CYCLE PRESSING)” explained the blocks, in which punching is
made after positioning. In certain cases, no punching is made, but tapping and other mechanical motion
may be executed in these blocks.
Example
M80;
G00X Y T ;
X Y ;
…………………………
………………………… Tapping is made instead of punching.
…………………………
X Y ;
M81
Since this function depends upon the machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
- 86 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 10.S FUNCTION
10 S FUNCTION
Chapter 10, "S FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
10.1 SPECIFYING THE S CODE WITH A BINARY CODE ..................................................................87
10.1 SPECIFYING THE S CODE WITH A BINARY CODE

S code can be specified by address S followed by a binary code. A block can contain only one S code.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for details such as the number of
digits in an S code or the execution order when a move command and an S code command are in the same
block.
- 87 -
11.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
11 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)

Chapter 11, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections:
11.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION ......................................................................................................88

11.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT.................................................................................................................89
11.3 TOOL OFFSET...................................................................................................................................90
11.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS)............................................................................90
11.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL..........................................................................................................90
11.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION......................................................................................93
11.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION

By specifying an up to 8–digit numerical value following address T, tools can be selected on the machine.
One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool builder’s manual for the number of
digits commandable with address T and the correspondence between the T codes and machine operations.
When a move command and a T code are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one
of the following two ways:
(1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and T function commands.

(2) Executing T function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either (1) or (2) depends on the machine tool builder’s specifications. Refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
The T command must be given without fail to the block before a block where punching is first made by
press motion in one program or to the same block where punching is first made by press motion.
If the T command is not given to these blocks, the press start signal which instructs “Punch by press
motion”, is not sent to the machine, and machining does not proceed to the next block.
Example
O1000G92……………;
N1G00G90X Y ;
……………
……………
Punching should be made in N1 block.

However, since no T command is given to a block before N1 block or N1 block, no punching is made,
and machining does not proceed to the next block.
- 88 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 11.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)
CAUTION
1 The correspondence between commandable T codes and tools depends upon
machine tool builders.
The commandable T codes are set in tool registering screen before shipment
from factory. If a commanded T code was not registered, alarm (PS 4602) is
produced.
2 No T code is commandable in the following blocks.
(i) G10 (Offset value setting)
(ii) G22 (Stored stroke limit function on)
(iii) G23 (Stored stroke limit function off)
(iv) G92 (Coordinate system setting)
(v) G52 (Local coordinate system setting)
(vi) G72 (Standard point command)
(vii) G75 (Automatic repositioning)
(viii)G98 (Base point command for multi-piece machining)
(ix) G73, G74 (Multi-piece machining command)
3 If DNC operation or memory operation is made in the T command neglect status, the T
command is ignored, and the operation is made as if the T command were not given.
The press start signal is not sent to the machine side in a block to be punched, and
processing does not proceed to the next block. If a program is checked by marking to a
workpiece by using a marking tool, for example, select the marking punch tool by a T
command in the MDI mode in advance, and perform the DNC operation or memory
operation without reset operation in the T command neglect status. Now, punching is
made using the tool selected in the MDI mode.
4 The T command must be given without fail to the block before a block where
punching is first made by press motion in one program or to the same block
where punching is first made by press motion.
If the T command is not given to these blocks, the press start signal which
instructs “Punch by press motion”, is not sent to the machine, and machining
does not proceed to the next block.
5 The press start signal can be sent by setting bit 5 (TCF) of parameter No. 16003 even if
no T command is given to a block before the block where the punching is made or the
block in which punching is made. In this case, the integrated value of the number of
punch times may differ from actual number of punch times about respective tools.
11.2 T COMMAND NEGLECT

This function ignores the T command. Whether the T command is ignored or not is generally selected by
a switch on the machine operator’s panel.
If the T command is ignored, it is treated, as if no T code command were present on a program.
Accordingly, it is not checked that whether the T code be commandable or not.
CAUTION
The ignorance of T command is judged when the command is read from an I/O
device or memory into buffer register. Accordingly, the selection of the T
command ignorance switch is not effective for the block that has been read into
the buffer register.
NOTE
By setting bit 5 (TNM) of parameter No. 16260, it is checked that whether the T code be
commandable or not, only in the machine lock status.
- 89 -
11.3 TOOL OFFSET

Tool offset is applicable to respective T codes in the X-axis and Y-axis directions.
Since use of this tool offset function depends upon machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool
builder’s manual.
CAUTION
1 Tool offset compensation applies to tools numbered from 1 to 9999.
2 Tool offset values are set in the tool registering screen in the unit of the least
command increment for each X axis and Y axis before shipment of the machine
from the machine tool builder’s factory.
3 If data are inputted by inch in a millimeter system machine, or if data are inputted
by millimeter in an inch system machine, a tool offset error is produced within the
sum of a half of the least input increment and half of the least command
increment. This error is not accumulated.
11.4 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS)

The CNC uses set parameters to control the turret which is indexed for a tool to be used. A specified T
code is output, and at the same time, the turret is positioned at the location which was specified for the
tool on the tool registration screen. Up to 136 tools can be registered on the screen. A T code consisting
of one to four digits is used for controlling the turret. This control substantially reduces the time required
to change tools because changing the tool, which was conventionally performed in the machine tool, is
done by positioning the turret using the CNC. For detailed information, refer to the manual prepared by
the machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 The T-axis can be controlled when TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is 1.
2 When T axis control is valid, the T axis should be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
3 Setting the following parameters of T axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 0i-PC, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No.1006=1
Rotary axis (A type)
Bit 1 (ROSx) of parameter No.1006=0
Bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008=1 The rotary axis roll-over is valid.
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 The axis rotates in the direction in which the
distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the
amount of the shift per one rotation
11.5 MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL

In general, the tool holder of a punch holds one tool (die). To select a tool the tool holder is first moved to
the position at which the tool is changed using the T command (cartridge indexing). Then, at that position,
the tool holder is set on the punch holder.
In the case of the multiple-tool system, only the dies in the tool holder are changed because the tool
holder keeps different types of dies (See Fig.11.5 (a)). The multiple-tool system enables the tool holder to
change dies very quickly. Also, many dies can be used to widen the range of machining applications.
For details, refer to the manuals issued by machine tool builder.
- 90 -
Tool
Tool holder
Turret
Rotation of the turret
Subtool Multiple-tool holder
Rotation of the multiple-tool holder
Fig.11.5 (a) Multiple–tool system
11.5.1 Tool Number

The pot numbers of a multiple-tool system are specified with T codes consisting of three or four digits, as
follows:
T ○○△△
Tool number of the multiple-tool system

Pot number (for specifying a tool holder)
The T codes used for controlling the indexing of the turret (tool holder) in a CNC are two-digit pot
numbers from 00 to 99, including those for a multiple-tool system as shown above.
The T codes consisting of three or four digits are used to control a multiple-tool system. The first two
digits are the pot numbers of the multiple-tool system and the last two digits are the tool numbers in the
multiple-tool system.
- 91 -
NOTE
1 Tool numbers for controlling the turret setting in a CNC system are registered in
tool registering screen. The number of tools is less than or equal to the number
of the tools to be controlled.
2 Assign tool numbers for controlling a turret which is not that for a multiple-tool
system as T codes consisting of one or two digits.
3 Assign tool numbers of a multiple-tool system on the tool registration screen for
multiple tools.
11.5.2 Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the C

Axis
The tools of a multiple-tool system are selected by turning the C axis. A tool is selected by placing it at
the tool reference position. This position is parallel to the Y axis and on the center line of the tool holder
of a multiple-tool system.
For each tool in a multiple-tool system, the angle the tool makes with the tool reference position is set in
tool registering screen for. When the T code of a multiple-tool system is issued, the CNC system sends an
internal command to the C axis, indicating the angle with the tool reference position corresponding to the
selected tool. The CNC system places the selected tool in the tool reference position.
Y Subtool reference position
Center of the subtool

X
Center of the tool holder
T1101 ＋
Direction
of rotation
T1104 T1102 Angular displacement controlled

by indexing for the subtool
－
reference position
T1101 ＝ 0.00°
T1103 T1102 ＝ 90.00°
T1103 ＝ 180.00°
T1104 ＝ 270.00°
Multiple-tool holder：T11
Fig.11.5 (b) Subtool reference position and angular displacement controlled by indexing
CAUTION
When the angular displacement for the tool reference position is set to 0, the tool that is
selected when the tool holder has been indexed is used.
11.5.3 Tool Compensation

When a multiple-tool system is used, the centers of the dies in the multiple-tool system are not at the
center of the tool holder. Therefore, tool compensation is necessary. Tool compensation for tools in a
multiple-tool system works in the direction of the Y axis only. Specify the distance between the center of
- 92 -
the tool holder and each of the tools when the tool is located in the tool reference position in tool
registering screen. The distance is the compensation value in the direction of the Y axis.
Y Punching position
（programmed position）
Subtool reference position
X
Turret
Subtool：T1101
Y–axis compensation
Multiple-tool holder：T11
Fig.11.5 (c) Tool position compensation
11.5.4 Operational Notes

CAUTION
1 Do not issue any C axis command when multiple-tool control is selected.
2 For indexing a multiple-tool system, T codes consisting of at least three digits
must be used. For using regular tools, T codes consisting of one or two digits
must be used.
3 When using multiple-tool control, set bit 5 (CRM) of parameter No. 16362 to 0.
11.6 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (frequency of use) for each group being
specified.
11.6.1 Tool Life Management Data

Tool life management data consists of number of punches and tool life value.
Explanation
- Number of punches
The number of punches count is incremented by 1 for each tool used punching.
11.6.2 Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data

In a program, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC unit, and registered tool life
management data can be changed.
- 93 -
Format
G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode setting
N_P7R_ ; tool life management data setting
:
:
G11 ; Tool data entry mode cancel
N_ : Tool data No.

P7 : Tool life data setting
R_ : Tool data setting value
Explanation
- Types
For tool life management, the type used varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the
appropriate manual of each machine tool builder.
11.6.3 Tool Life

The life of a tool is specified by a usage frequency (count).
- 94 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 12.AUXILIARY FUNCTION
12 AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Overview
There are two types of auxiliary functions; auxiliary function (M code) for specifying program end and so
on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code).
When a move command and auxiliary function are specified in the same block, the commands are
executed in one of the following two ways:
(1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and auxiliary function commands.
(2) Executing auxiliary function commands upon completion of move command execution.
The selection of either sequence depends on the machine tool builder's specification. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
Chapter 12, "AUXILIARY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
12.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION) .....................................................................................95

12.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK .....................................................................97
12.3 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) ..........................................................................98
12.4 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER MODE......................................100
12.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION)

When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine.
The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions.
Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. Depending on the setting of bit 7 (M3B) of
parameter No. 3404, up to three M codes can be specified.
Which M code corresponds to which machine function is determined by the machine tool builder.
The machine processes all operations specified by M codes except following:
• Subprogram call and end of subprogram (M98/M99)
• External subprogram call (M198 or parameter No.6030)
• M codes to call subprogram (parameter No.6044 to 6046, and No.6071 to 6079)
• M codes to call custom macro program (parameter No.6047 to 6049, and No.6080 to 6089)
Refer to the machine tool builder's instruction manual for details.
Explanation
The following M codes have special meanings.
- M02, M30 (End of program)

This indicates the end of the main program.
Automatic operation is stopped and the CNC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
After a block specifying the end of the program is executed, control returns to the start of the program.
Bits 5 (M02) and 4 (M30) of parameter No. 3404 can be used to disable M02, M30 from returning control
to the start of the program.
- M00 (Program stop)

Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped,
all existing modal information remains unchanged. The automatic operation can be restarted by actuating
the cycle operation. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
- M01 (Optional stop)

Similarly to M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is
only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operator's panel has been pressed.
- 95 -
12.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
- M98 (Calling of subprogram)

This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the Section 14.3,
“SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)” for details.
- M99 (End of subprogram)

This code indicates the end of a subprogram.
M99 execution returns control to the main program. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the
Section 14.3, “SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)” for details.
- M08, M09（Forming mode and forming mode cancel）

If punching (excluding nibbling) is executed in a block between M08; and M09; it is executed when the
preset time by parameter (No. 16032) has passed after completion of positioning, and machining proceeds
to the next block when the preset time by parameter (No. 16033) has passed after receiving the punch
finish signal from the machine side. (Other M codes may be used for these functions depending upon the
machine tool builders.)
- M10, M11（Workpiece clamp and workpiece unclamp）

The movement amounts of the X and Y axes are not added to the absolute coordinate value in a block
between by M10; and M11;. No punching is executed, even if punching is specified in the block.
They are used to reposition a workpiece. (Other M codes may be used for these functions, depending
upon machine tool builders.)
- M12, M13（Nibbling mode and nibbling mode cancel）

Nibbling is executable in a block between M12; and M13;. (Other M codes may be used for these
functions depending upon machine tool builders)
WARNING
M08, M09, M10, M11, M12 and M13 must be commanded without any other
commands in a block.
- 96 -
CAUTION
1 No punching is made in a block where an M code is commanded. But punching
may be made by some machine tool builder.
2 No M code is commandable in the following blocks.
(i) G10 (Offset amount setting, Programmable parameter input)
(ii) G22 (Stored stroke limit function ON)
(iii) G23 (Stored stroke limit function OFF)
(iv) G26 (Bolt hole circle)
(v) G76 (Line at angle)
(vi) G77 (Arc)
(vii) G78, G79 (Grid)
(viii) G68 (Circular nibbling)
(ix) G69 (Linear nibbling)
(x) G72 (Base point command)
(xi) G75 (Automatic repositioning)
(xii) G86 (Share proofs)
(xiii) G87 (Square)
(xiv) G88 (Radius)
(xv) G89 (Cut at angle)
(xvi) G98 (Base point command of Multi-piece machining)
(xvii) G73, G74 (Multi-piece machining command)
(xviii) G52 (Local coordinate system setting)
NOTE
1 If there is a block following M00, M01, M02, or M30, it is not read into the buffer
storage. Similarly, ten M codes which cause the block following them not to enter
the buffer storage are available by parameter setting (Nos. 3411 to 3421). As for
these M codes, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
2 For M98 code and M99 code, their code signals and strobe signals are not
output to the machine.
12.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK

Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. By setting bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 to
1, however, up to three M codes can be specified simultaneously in one block.
Up to three M codes specified in one block are output to the machine at the same time. So, when
compared with a case where a single M code is specified in one block, a reduced machining cycle time
can be achieved.
Explanation
CNC allows up to three M codes to be specified in one block. However, some M codes cannot be
specified at the same time due to mechanical operation restrictions. For detailed information about the
mechanical operation restrictions on simultaneous specification of multiple M codes in one block, refer to
the manual of each machine tool builder.
M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with another M code.
Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 cannot be specified together with
other M codes; each of those M codes must be specified in a single block.
Such M codes include these which direct the CNC to perform internal operations in addition to sending
the M codes themselves to the machine. To be specified, such M codes are M codes for calling program
numbers 9001 to 9009 and M codes for disabling advance reading (buffering) of subsequent blocks.
- 97 -
Meanwhile, multiple of M codes that direct the CNC only to send the M codes themselves (without
performing internal operations) can be specified in a single block.
However, it is possible to specify multiple M codes that are sent to the machine in the same block unless
they direct the CNC to perform internal operations. (Since the processing method depends on the machine,
refer to the manual of the machine tool builder.)
Example
One M command in a single block Multiple M commands in a single block
M40; M40M50M60;
M50; G28G91X0Y0Z0;
M60; :
G28G91X0Y0Z0; :
: :
: :
: :
12.3 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES)

Overview
If a value with a maximum of eight digits is specified after address B, the code signal and strobe signal
are transferred for calculation of the rotation axis. The code signal is retained until the next B code is
specified.
Only one B code can be specified for each block. When the maximum number of digits are specified by
parameter No.3033, an alarm is issued if the number of digits of a command exceeds the specified
number.
In addition, the address used for specifying the second auxiliary function can be changed to an address
other than address B (address A, C, U, V, or W) by setting parameter No.3460.
However, the address used for the second auxiliary function cannot also be used as the address of the
controlled axis. For details, refer to the manual available from the machine tool builder.
Explanation
- Range of specification
-99999999 to 99999999
- Output value
The value specified after the address of the second auxiliary function is output on the code signals B00 to
B31. Note the following about a output value.
1. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is disabled

(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 0)
When the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value is output
on the code signals as is, regardless of the desktop calculator decimal point setting (bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No.3401).
Example:
Specified value Output value
B10 10
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, alarm PS0007, “ILLEGAL
USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
When the second auxiliary function is specified with a negative value, alarm PS0006, “ILLEGAL
USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.
- 98 -
2. When a command with a decimal point or a negative command is enabled
(When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No.3450 is set to 1)
When the desktop calculator decimal point setting is not specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No.3401 is set to 0), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified
value is output on the code signals as is.
Example:
B10 10
When desktop calculator decimal point input is specified (when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No.3401 is
set to 1), if the second auxiliary function with no decimal point is specified, the specified value
multiplied by a magnification is output on the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 12.3
(a).)
Example:
B10 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, the specified value multiplied
by a magnification is output to the code signals. (Magnifications are shown in Table 12.3 (a).)
Example:
B10. 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The
magnification is 1000.)
B0.123 1230 (When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and parameter AUX
is set to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
The magnification is determined as shown below according to the setting unit of the reference axis
(specified by parameter No.1031) and bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No.3405.
Table 12.3 (a) Magnifications for an output value when the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is
specified for desktop calculator decimal point input
Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter
Setting unit
No.3405 = 0 No.3405 = 1
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 100×
Metric input system
Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 1000×
Reference axis: IS-A 100× 1000×
Inch input system
Reference axis: IS-B 1000× 10000×
CAUTION
If a decimal fraction remains after multiplying the specified value with a decimal
point by a magnitude in Table 12.3 (a), the fraction is truncated.
Example:
B0.12345 1234
(When inch input is used, the reference axis is IS-B, and parameter AUX is set
to 1. The magnification is 10000.)
- 99 -
NOTE
If the number of digits of the specified value exceeds the allowable number of
digits (set by parameter No. 3033), alarm PS0003, “TOO MANY DIGIT” is
issued.
When the specified value is multiplied by a magnitude in Table 12.3 (a), the
allowable number of digits must be set for the resultant value.
Limitation
Addresses used for the second auxiliary functions (addresses specified with B or parameter No. 3460)
cannot be used as the addresses used for controlled axis names.
12.4 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH AND LASER

MODE
The punch mode and laser mode can be switched by specifying M codes in parameters. An M code is
specified in the first block for punching and for laser machining in a machining program. This will
improve processing precision in the interpolation mode of the laser mode.
In the laser mode, punching is not performed even in blocks where positioning is done by rapid traverse
along the X and Y axes. Manual punching, however, is possible. Note that pattern commands such as G26
and nibbling commands such as G68 cannot be specified. (These commands cause alarm (PS4630).)
（Example）
G92X1000. Y800. ;
M40 ;
G72X200. Y200. ; Punch mode
G26I50. J0K10. T101;
M41;
G90G00X100. Y100. ;
G01X300. F300;
Y300. ; Laser mode
X100. ;
Y100. ;
M40 ;
G28M30 ;
WARNING
1 The punch mode and laser mode can be switched only when bit 0 (ALA) of
parameter No. 16242 is set to 1.
Set the M code to the parameter (No. 16244, 16245).
2 The punch mode is entered immediately after the power is turned on or the
system is reset. (Laser mode is entered when bit 5 (RLM) of parameter No.
16240 is set.)
3 The M codes for switching the punch and laser modes must be specified in a
single block.
4 In punch mode, AI Advanced Preview Control function cannot be used.
- 100 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
13 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Chapter 13, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections:
13.1 PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES..............................................................................................................101

13.2 RELATED PARAMETERS .............................................................................................................101
13.3 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS ...............102
13.1 PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES

The following attributes can be set for programs:
• Change protection level/output protection level
- Change protection level/output protection level

With the 8-level data protection function, change and output protection can be provided for a specified
program.
For details of the 8-level data protection function, see the description of the “Protection of data at eight
levels” function.
13.2 RELATED PARAMETERS

This subsection lists the meanings of parameters related to program numbers and the folders and
programs to be manipulated or executed.
Parameter No. Bit No. Description

0 (NE8) Disables or enables editing of programs O8000 to O8999.
3202
4 (NE9) Disables or enables editing of programs O9000 to O9999.
3210/3211 - Password/keyword for protecting programs in the nine thousands
In the subprogram call function, address P in the M198 block specifies a
3404 2 (SBP)
file/program number.
6001 5 (TCS) Calls or does not call a custom macro by T code.
Start G code used to call custom macros, Start program number of
6038 to 6040 - custom macros called by G code, and Number of G codes used to call
custom macros
Start M code used to call subprograms, Start program number of
6044 to 6046 - subprograms called by M code, and Number of M codes used to call
subprograms
Start M code used to call custom macros, Start program number of
6047 to 6049 - custom macros called by M code, and Number of M codes used to call
custom macros
6050 to 6059 - G code for calling a custom macro with program No. 9010 to 9019
6071 to 6079 - M code for calling a subprogram with program No. 9001 to 9009
6080 to 6089 - M code for calling a custom macro with program No. 9020 to 9029
6090/6091 - ASCII code for calling a subprogram with program No. 9004/9005
Target program number and sequence number for sequence number
8341/8343 -
comparison and stop
- 101 -
13.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
13.3 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF

REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS
The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registerable
programs.
Part program storage size Number of registerable programs 0i-PD

512Kbyte 400 ○
2Mbyte 400 ☆
○: Standard package (1) ☆: Optional
NOTE
Program O0001 1 The program storage size means the maximum
O0001 ; size of a program if the program is the one and
First page
N1 G01 ; only program registered.
(Area in use) 2 If more than one program is registered, the
total size of registerable programs reduces for
N100 … ; the following reason.
Second page
The Series 0i-PD manages programs in page
(Area in use) units. The unit of program storage is managed
also in page units. When a program is created,
M30 ; Last page
as many pages as necessary to store the
(Area in use) program are secured, and the program is
(Unused area)
stored on these pages. Generally, the last
program storage page has an unused area (left
figure). This unused area cannot be used to
Unusable for any other store any other program. For the sake of
program
program management, it is regarded as an
area in use.
Example of creating program O0001
The Series 0i-PC uses a similar way of
management, but the unit of pages in it differs
from that in the Series 0i-PD. So, if more than
one program is registered in the Series 0i-PD,
the total program size of registerable programs
differs from that in the Series 0i-PC.
- 102 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 14.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
14 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION
Overview
- Main program and subprogram
There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to
the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the subprogram. When a command specifying a return to the main program is
encountered in a subprogram, control is returned to the main program.
Main program Subprogram

Instruction 1 Instruction 1’
Instruction 2 Instruction 2’
Follow the direction of the

subprogram
Instruction n
Instruction n+1
Return to the main program

Fig. 14 (a) Main program and Subprogram
The CNC memory can hold up to 400 main programs and subprograms (63 as standard). A main program
can be selected from the stored main programs to operate the machine. See Chapter III-9, “CREATING
PROGRAMS” and Chapter III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS” for the methods of registering and selecting
programs.
- Program components
A program consists of the following components:
Table 14 (a) Program components

Components Descriptions
Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Program code end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
- 103 -
14.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
Program section (COMMENT) Comment section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Fig. 14 (b) Program configuration
- Program section configuration

A program section consists of several blocks. A program section starts with a program number or file
name and ends with a program end code.
Program section configuration Program section
Program number O0001 ;

Block 1 N1 G91 G00 X120.0 Y80.0 ;
Block 2 N2 G00 X00. T02 ;
: :
Block n Nn M2 ;
Program end M30 ;
A block contains information necessary for machining, such as a move command or coolant on/off
command. Specifying a slash (/) at the start of a block disables the execution of some blocks (see
"optional block skip" in II-14.2).
14.1 PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN PROGRAM

SECTIONS
This section describes program components other than program sections. See Section II-14.2,
“PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION” for a program section.
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
(COMMENT) Comment section

Program section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Explanation
- Program code start
The program code start indicates the start of a file that contains NC programs.
- 104 -
The mark is not required when programs are entered using ordinary personal computers. The mark is not
displayed on the screen. However, if the file is output, the mark is automatically output at the start of the
file.
Table 14.1 (a) Code of a program code start

Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual
Program code start % ER %
- Leader section
Data entered before the programs in a file constitutes a leader section.
When machining is started, the label skip state is usually set by turning on the power or resetting the
system. In the label skip state, all information is ignored until the first end-of-block code is read. When a
file is read into the CNC unit from an I/O device, leader sections are skipped by the label skip function.
A leader section generally contains information such as a file header. When a leader section is skipped,
even a TV parity check is not made. So a leader section can contain any codes except the EOB code.
- Program start
The program start code is to be entered immediately after a leader section, that is, immediately before a
program section.
This code indicates the start of a program, and is always required to disable the label skip function.
With ordinary personal computers, this code can be entered by pressing the return key.
Table 14.1 (b) Code of a program start

Program start LF CR ;
NOTE
If one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code for label skip operation
must not appear before a second or subsequent program number.
- Comment section
Any information enclosed by the control-out and control-in codes is regarded as a comment.
The user can enter a header, comments, directions to the operator, etc. in a comment section.
Table 14.1 (c) Codes of a control-in and a control-out

Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual Meaning
Control-out ( 2-4-5 ( Start of comment section
Control-in ) 2-4-7 ) End of comment section
When a program is read into memory for memory operation, comment sections, if any, are not ignored
but are also read into memory. Note, however, that codes other than those listed in the code table in
Appendix B are ignored, and thus are not read into memory.
When data in memory is output on external I/O device (See Chapter III-8, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”),
the comment sections are also output.
When a program is displayed on the screen, its comment sections are also displayed. However, those
codes that were ignored when read into memory are not output or displayed.
During memory operation or DNC operation, all comment sections are ignored.
The TV check function can be used for a comment section by setting bit 1 (CTV) of parameter No. 0100.
- 105 -
CAUTION
If a long comment section appears in the middle of a program section, a move
along an axis may be suspended for a long time because of such a comment
section. So a comment section should be placed where movement suspension
may occur or no movement is involved.
NOTE
1 If only a control-in code is read with no matching control-out code, the read
control-in code is ignored.
2 The following codes cannot be used in the comment section:
- EOB
- % (ER for EIA)
- Program code end

A program code end is to be placed at the end of a file containing NC programs.
If programs are entered using the automatic programming system, the mark need not be entered.
The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output, the mark is automatically output
at the end of the file.
If an attempt is made to execute % when M02 or M30 is not placed at the end of the program, the alarm
PS5010, “END OF RECORD” is occurred.
Table 14.1 (d) Code of a program code end

Program code end % ER %
14.2 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION

This section describes elements of a program section. See Section, “PROGRAM COMPONENTS
OTHER THAN PROGRAM SECTIONS” for program components other than program sections.
Program number
% TITLE ;
O0001 ;
N1 ... ;
Sequence number
Program section (COMMENT)
M30 ;
% Program end
- Program number
A program number consisting of address O followed by a four-digit number is assigned to each program
at the beginning registered in memory to identify the program. When the 8-digit number function is
selected, the program number consists of eight digits.
In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can be used instead of O.
When no program number is specified at the start of a program, the sequence number (N....) at the start of
the program is regarded as its program number. If a five-digit sequence number is used, the lower four
digits are registered as a program number. If the lower four digits are all 0, the program number registered
- 106 -
immediately before added to 1 is registered as a program number. Note, however, that N0 cannot be used
for a program number.
If there is no program number or sequence number at the start of a program, a program number must be
specified using the MDI panel when the program is stored in memory (See Section III-8.2,
“INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN” or Section III-9.1, “CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE
MDI UNIT”)
NOTE
Program numbers 8000 to 9999 may be used by machine tool builders, and the
user may not be able to use these numbers.
- Sequence number and block

A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called a block. One block is separated
from another with an EOB of end of block code.
Table 14.2 (a) EOB code

End of block (EOB) LF CR ;
At the head of a block, a sequence number consisting of address N followed by a number not longer than
five digits (1 to 99999) can be placed. Sequence numbers can be specified in a random order, and any
numbers can be skipped. Sequence numbers may be specified for all blocks or only for desired blocks of
the program. In general, however, it is convenient to assign sequence numbers in ascending order in phase
with the machining steps (for example, when a new tool is used by tool replacement, and machining
proceeds to a new surface with table indexing.)
N300X200.0Z300.0 ; A sequence number is underlined.

Fig. 14.2 (b) Sequence number and block (example)
NOTE
N0 must not be used for the reason of file compatibility with other CNC systems.
Program number 0 cannot be used. So 0 must not be used for a sequence
number regarded as a program number.
- TV check (Vertical parity check)

A parity check is made for each block of input data. If the number of characters in one block (starting
with the code immediately after an EOB and ending with the next EOB) is odd, an alarm PS0002, “TV
ERROR” is output.
No TV check is made only for those parts that are skipped by the label skip function. Bit 1 (CTV) of
parameter No. 0100 is used to specify whether comments enclosed in parentheses are counted as
characters during TV check. The TV check function can be enabled or disabled by setting on the MDI
panel (See Subsection III-12.3.2, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”).
- Block configuration (word and address)

A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an address followed by a number some digits
long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign (-) may be prefixed to a number.)
For an address, one of the letters (A to Z) is used ; an address defines the meaning of a number that
follows the address.
Word = Address + number (Example : X-1000)
Table 14.2 (b) indicates the usable addresses and their meanings.
The same address may have different meanings, depending on the preparatory function specification.
- 107 -
Table 14.2 (b) Major functions and addresses

Function Address Meaning
Program number O(*) Program number
Sequence number N Sequence number
Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.)
X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C Coordinate axis move command
Dimension word I, J, K Coordinate of the arc center
R Arc radius
Feed function F Rate of feed per minute
S function S S code
Tool function T Tool number
M On/off control on the machine tool
Auxiliary function
B Table indexing, etc.
Program number designation P Subprogram number
Number of repetitions P, L Number of subprogram repetitions
Parameters for pattern function and Nibbling
Parameter P, Q, K
function
Offset number D Offset number
Dwell P, X Dwell time
Macro function A,B,U,V,W Macro number
NOTE
(*) In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program
number.
N_ G_ X_ Y_ F_ S_ T_ M_ ;
Sequence number Preparatory Dimension word Feed-function S function Tool function Auxiliary function
function
Fig. 14.2 (c) 1 block (example)
- 108 -
- Major addresses and ranges of command values

Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses are shown below. Note that these
figures represent limits on the CNC side, which are totally different from limits on the machine tool side.
For example, the CNC allows a tool to traverse up to about 100 m (in millimeter input) along the X axis.
However, an actual stroke along the X axis may be limited to 2 m for a specific machine tool.
Similarly, the CNC may be able to control a cutting feedrate of up to 240 m/min, but the machine tool
may not allow more than 3 m/min. When developing a program, the user should carefully read the
manuals of the machine tool as well as this manual to be familiar with the restrictions on programming.
Table 14.2 (c) Major addresses and ranges of command values

Function Address Input in mm Input in inch
Program number O (*1) 1 to 9999 1 to 9999
Sequence number N 1 to 99999 1 to 99999
Preparatory function G 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
Increment system ±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 inch *2
X,Y,Z,U,V,
Dimension IS-A ±999999.99 deg. ±999999.99 deg.
W,A,B,C,I,J,
word Increment system ±999999.999 mm ±99999.9999 inch *2
K,R
IS-B ±999999.999 deg. ±999999.999 deg.
Increment system
0.01 to 999000.00mm/min 0.001 to 96000.000inch/min
Feed per IS-A
F
minute Increment system
0.001 to 999000.000mm/min 0.0001 to 9600.0000inch/min
IS-B
(*3)
S function S 0 to 99999 0 to 99999
Tool function T (*3) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
M (*3) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Auxiliary function
B (*3) 0 to 99999999 0 to 99999999
Offset number D 0 to 32 0 to 32
Increment system
X, 0 to 999999.99 sec 0 to 999999.99 sec
IS-A
Dwell U (T series
Increment system
only) 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec
IS-B
Dwell P 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Designation of a program number P 1 to 9999 1 to 9999
L 1 to 99999999 1 to 99999999
Number of subprogram repetitions
P 0 to 9999 0 to 9999
Angle of Increment system
±999999.99 deg. ±999999.99 deg.
pattern IS-A
J, P, K
function / Increment system
±999999.999 deg. ±999999.999 deg.
nibbling IS-B
Number of punch points of pattern
K, P 1 to 9999 1 to 9999
function
*1 In ISO code, the colon ( : ) can also be used as the address of a program number.
*2 For inch input/millimeter machines, the maximum specifiable range of dimension words is as
follows:
Increment system Maximum specifiable range
IS-A ±39370.078 inch
IS-B ±39370.0787 inch
*4 The maximum value of addresses M, T, and B is 99999999, and, the maximum value of address S is
99999.
Note that, however, values longer than the permissible number of digits set in parameter No. 3030 to
3033 cannot be specified. The values and uses for some codes are limited by parameter setting. (For
example, some M codes are not buffered.) For details, refer to the parameter manual.
- 109 -
- Optional block skip

When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block
skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the information (/n to the end of the
block (EOB)) contained in the block for which /n corresponding to signal BDTn is specified is ignored.
Example 1)
/2 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ;
Example 2)
//3 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ; → Incorrect
/1 /3 N123 X100.0 Y200.0 ; → Correct
Input signal and program code

Input signal Start code to be ignored
BDT1 / or /1(NOTE)
BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9
NOTE
1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more optional block skips
are specified for one block, number 1 for /1 cannot be omitted.
2 Depending on the machine tool, all optional block skip signals (1 to 9) may not
be usable. Refer to manuals of the machine tool builder to find which switches
are usable.
The following shows the relationship between the timing at which optional block skip signals BDT1 to
BDT9 are set to 1 and the range of information to be ignored.
1. When the signal BDTn is set to 1 before the CNC starts reading a block that contains /n, the block is
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200. ;N234 . . . .
This range of information is ignored.
2. When the signal BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is not
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .
This range of information is not ignored.
- 110 -
3. When the signal BDTn is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block that contains /n, the block is
ignored.
BDTn "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200.; N234 . . . .
4. Two or more optional block skips can be specified in one block. When the signal corresponding to
any of the specified skips is set to 1, the block is ignored.
BDT3 "1"
"0"
Read by CNC → . . . ; /1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .
NOTE
1 This function is not used when a program is registered in memory. A block
containing / is registered in memory regardless of the statuses of optional block
skip signals. When a program in memory is also output regardless of the
statuses of optional block skip signals.
In addition, the optional block skip function is enabled during a search for a
sequence number.
2 Position of a slash
A block skip slash (/) must be specified at the beginning of a block. Note that if a
slash is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to immediately before
the EOB code is ignored.
3 TV and TH check
When the optional block skip signal is set to 1, TH and TV checks are made for
the skipped portions in the same way as when the optional block skip signal is
set to 0.
- Program end
The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the following codes at the end of the program:
Table 14.2 (d) Code of a program end

Code Meaning usage
M02
For main program
M03
M99 For subprogram
If one of the program end codes is executed in program execution, the CNC terminates the execution of
the program, and the reset state is set. When the subprogram end code is executed, control returns to the
program that called the subprogram.
CAUTION
A block containing an optional block skip code such as /M02 ; , /M30 ; , or /M99 ;
is not regarded as the end of a program. (see "Optional block skip".)
- 111 -
14.3 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)

If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be
stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify the program.
A subprogram can be called from the main program.
A called subprogram can also call another subprogram.
Format
- Subprogram configuration
One subprogram
Oxxxx ; Subprogram number or subprogram file name (or the colon (:) optionally
: in the case of ISO)
M99; Program end
M99 need not constitute a separate block as indicated below.
Example) X100.0Y100.0M99;
- Subprogram call
- When a subprogram with a 4-digit or shorter program number is called
M98 Pxxxx xxxx ;
Subprogram number
Number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly
or
M98 Pxxxx Lxxxxxxxx ;
Number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly

Subprogram number
NOTE
1 When calling a subprogram of a 4-digit or shorter subprogram number
repeatedly (P8 digit), make the subprogram number 4 digits by prefixing it with
“0” if the subprogram number is shorter than 4 digits.
Example)
P100100: Call subprogram No. 100 ten times.
P50001: Call subprogram No. 1 five times.
2 If the number of times the subprogram is called repeatedly is omitted, the
subprogram is called just once.
In this case, it is not necessary to adjust the subprogram number length to 4
digits as described in Item 1 above.
3 When calling a subprogram repeatedly (P8 digit), do not specify address L in the
same block.
Explanation
When the main program calls a subprogram, it is regarded as a one-level subprogram call. Thus,
subprogram calls can be nested up to ten levels as shown below.
- 112 -
Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram

O0001 ; O0010 ; O0020 ; O0090 ; O0100 ;
M98P0010 ; M98P0020 ; M98P0030 ; M98P0100 ;
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

(One-level nesting) (Two-level nesting) (Nine-level nesting) (Ten-level nesting)
A single call command can repeatedly call a subprogram up to 99999999 times. For compatibility with
automatic programming systems, in the first block, Nxxxx can be used instead of a subprogram number
that follows O (or :). A sequence number after N is registered as a subprogram number.
NOTE
1 The M98 and M99 code signal and strobe signal are not output to the machine
tool.
2 If the subprogram number specified by address P cannot be found, an alarm
PS0078, “SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND” is output.
Example
M98 P51002 ;
This command specifies "Call the subprogram (number 1002) five times in
succession." A subprogram call command (M98P_) can be specified in the same
block as a move command.
X1000.0 M98 P1200 ;

This example calls the subprogram (number 1200) after an X movement.
Execution sequence of subprograms called from a main program

1 2 3
N0010 . . . ; O1010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ; N1020 . . . ;
N0030 M98 P21010 ; N1030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ; N1040 . . . ;
N0050 M98 P1010 ; N1050 . . . ;
N0060 . . . ; N1060 . . . M99 ;
A subprogram can call another subprogram in the same way as a main program
calls a subprogram.
Special usage
- Specifying the sequence number for the return destination in the main
program
If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is terminated, control does not return to the
block after the calling block, but returns to the block with the sequence number specified by P. When P0
is specified, however, P is ignored. In addition, when the main program is operating in a mode other than
memory operation mode, P is ignored.
This method consumes a much longer time than the normal return method to return to the main program.
- 113 -

N0010 . . . ; O0010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ; N1020 . . . ;
N0030 M98 P1010 ; N1030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ; N1040 . . . ;
N0050 . . . ; N1050 . . . ;
N0060 . . . ; N1060 . . . M99 P0060 ;
- Using M99 in the main program

If M99 is executed in a main program, control returns to the start of the main program. For example, M99
can be executed by placing /M99 ; at an appropriate location of the main program and setting the optional
block skip function to off when executing the main program. When M99 is executed, control returns to
the start of the main program, then execution is repeated starting at the head of the main program.
Execution is repeated while the optional block skip function is set to off.
If the optional block skip function is set to on, the /M99 ; block is skipped ; control is passed to the next
block for continued execution.
If/M99Pn ; is specified, control returns not to the start of the main program, but to sequence number n. In
this case, a longer time is required to return to sequence number n.
N0010 . . . ;
N0020 . . . ;
N0030 . . . ;
N0040 . . . ;
Optional block skip N0050 . . . ;
/ N0060 . . . M99 P0030 ; Optional block skip
OFF
N0070 . . . ; ON
N0080 M02 ;
- Using a subprogram only

A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with
the MDI.
(See Section III-10.4, “PROGRAM SEARCH” for information about search operation.)
In this case, if a block containing M99 is executed, control returns to the start of the subprogram for
repeated execution. If a block containing M99Pn is executed, control returns to the block with sequence
number n in the subprogram for repeated execution. To terminate this program, a block containing /M02 ;
or /M30 ; must be placed at an appropriate location, and the optional block switch must be set to off ; this
switch is to be set to on first.
N1010 . . . ;
N1020 . . . ;
N1030 . . . ;
/ N1040 . . . M02 ;
N1050 M99 P1020 ; Optional block skip ON
- Subprogram call with sequence number

Setting bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 to 1 can call a specified sequence number in the subprogram
for execution.
In a subprogram call command, specify the letter Q followed by a sequence number to be called after the
letter P for specifying a program number.
M98 Pxxxx Qxxxxx ;
Sequence number
Program number
This command causes program execution to start at the called sequence number in the subprogram. If a
repetition count is specified, program execution is repeated from the specified sequence number.
- 114 -
Main program Sub program
N0010…; O1010…;
N0020…; N1020…;
N0030 M98 P1010 Q1030 ; N1030…;
N0040…; N1040…;
N0050…; N1050…;
N0060…; N1060…M99 ;
This function enables a sequence number in the same program to be called for execution as shown below.
This method, however, requests the programmer to be aware of an allowable call nesting level. If an
attempt is made to exceed the allowable nesting level, alarm PS0077, “TOO MANY SUB,MACRO
NESTING” is issued.
O0001 ;
N0010…;
N0020 M98 (P0001) Q0050 ;
N0030…;
N0040…;
N0050…;
N0060…;
N0070…M99;
For a call within the same program, specification of Pxxxx in a block can be omitted when the block
includes M98.
This function is usable only for subprogram calls by M98; it is unusable for non-M98 calls, such as macro
calls or external subprogram calls based on M198.
NOTE
If bit 0 (SQC) of parameter No. 6005 is ”0”, and an M98 Pxxxx Qxxxxx command
is specified, alarm PS0009, "IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS", is issued.
- 115 -
15. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
15 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

Chapter 15, "FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING", consists of the following sections:
15.1 PATTERN FUNCTION....................................................................................................................116

15.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO ......................................................................................134
15.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) .........................................................................................135
15.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION ..........................................................................................................141
15.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION....................................................................................145
15.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39) .....................................................................................152
15.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND.........................................................................154
15.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL.............................................................................................................159
15.1 PATTERN FUNCTION

The pattern function means a function to punch multiple positions conforming to a certain format by
one-block command including G function. This pattern function requires only one block command
instead of several-block commands, and thus, its program is simplified.
This control system prepares the following patterns as the standard functions, which are used most
frequently.
Table15.1 Pattern functions

G code G code
Pattern function Patterns
system A system B
G26 G26 Bolt hole circle #1
-Punching specified times at constant pitch r θ
(angle) on the circle. #2 #n
G26 I r J θ K n
G76 G28 Line at angle

#n
-Punching specified times at constant pitch #2
(distance) on the straight line. #1
d
θ
G76 I d J θ K n
G77 G29 Arc #n

-Punching specified times at constant pitch #2
(angle) on the circular arc. r
Δθ #1
θ
G77 I r J θ P Δθ K n
G78 G36 Grid

ny #n
G79 G37 -Punching specified times in grid points
having specified interval. dy #1
G78 I dx J dy P nx K ny dx nx
G79 I dx J dy P nx K ny
- 116 -
15.FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING
G code G code
Pattern function Patterns
system A system B
G86 G66 Share proofs
-Punching straight l
#1 #n
G86 I l J θ P w1 Q w2 w2 θ
w1
G87 G67 Square

-Punching a rectangle ly #n
w2
G87 I lx J ly P w1 Q w2
#1 lx w1
G88 G78 Radius #n

-Punching specified times at constant pitch d
#2
r
(distance) along the circular arc that have p #1
Δθ
specified angle. θ
G89 G79 Cut at angle d
-Punching specified times at constant pitch l
#n
(distance) along the straight line that have p
specified distance. θ
#1 #2
NOTE
G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, G86, G87, G88 and G89 are one-shot G codes.
In pattern function, the following two motions are repeatedly done to

punch at respective positions.
Motion 1 ... Positioning of X, Y axes (rapid traverse)
Motion 2 ... Punch by press motion
Motion 2
（Punching operation）
Motion 1 Repetition
（Movement of the
X and Y axes）
15.1.1 Base Point Command (G72)

Of the pattern function, the center point of the bolt hole circle (G26), arc (G77) and radius (G88), and also
the start point of line at angle (G76), grid (G78, G79), share proofs (G86), Square (G87) and cut at angle
(G89) are called base point of pattern.
The present position of the tool when the pattern function was commanded, i.e. the tool position in the
block just before the pattern function command, is the base point of pattern. If it is desired to set another
position as the pattern base point, the base point of pattern is assignable by the following command.
G72X x Y y ;
- 117 -
The (x, y) point in the work coordinate system is the pattern base point in absolute (G90) programming,
while the point distant from the present position by (x, y) is the reference point in incremental (G91)
programming.
G72 specifies the pattern base point, and the tool does not move.
Example
Movement of tool in program 1

Movement of tool in program 2
(150,150)
(210,150)
Program 1 Program 2
（Not use G72）（Use G72）
G90 G00 X50. Y50. G90 G00 X50. Y50.
G90 G00 X150.Y150. G72 X150.Y150.
(50,50) （pattern base point）（pattern base point）
G26 I60. J0 K4 G26 I60. J0 K4
CAUTION
1 None of T code, M code, and F code is commandable in G72 block.
2 G72 is one-shot G code.
15.1.2 Bolt Hole Circle (G26)

Bolt Hole Circle (G26) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (angle) on the circular
arc with the pattern base point being set as the circle center.
Format
G26 I r J θ K n
θ : Angle between the first punch point and +X axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B,
−359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Least input increment (deg)
-The counterclockwise direction is commanded as positive. While, clockwise direction is commanded as
negative.
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : ±1 to ±9999)

-Counterclockwise punching is made by a positive number, while clockwise punching is made by a negative
number.
This G26 punches n pieces of equally divided points on the circumference, starting with the point which
forms angle θ with the reference to X axis on the circumference having radius r with the pattern base
point being set as the circle center.
- 118 -
When θ>0 and n>0 #2
#3
#1
#4 θ #n
+X
Center of Circle
(Pattern base point)
#(n−3) #(n−1)
#(n−2) #1 to #n：Order of punch motion
Example
- When θ<0, n>0, and punching in the pattern base point

N212 G00 X100. Y80. #1 to #8 ：Order of punch motion in N213
N213 G26 I30. J−60. K8 ：Path of tool
(107.765,108.978)
(85.000,105.981)
#4
#5
(125.981,95.000)
#3
(71.022,87.765)
#6
(100.000,80.000)
N211
+X
N212
(60.000,80.000) #2
−60° 45°
(128.978,72.235)
#7 30.000
(74.019,65.000)
#8 #1
(115.000,54.019)
(92.235,51.022)
If it is desired to punch the center of the circle, omit G72 of block N521.
NOTE
1 If the radius is 0 or the number of punch points is 0, an alarm (No. 4502) is
issued.
2 T and C commands are possible in same block of G26.
- 119 -
15.1.3 Line at Angle (G76)

Line at angle (G76) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (distance) on the straight
line with the pattern base point as the start point.
Format
G76 I d J θ K n
d : Punch point interval (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-If this value is commanded with positive, punching is made in the θ direction.
-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ + 180° direction.
θ : Angle which is formed between the +X axis and the line connecting the start point and punch points (Valid
data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Least input increment (deg)
-Counterclockwise direction is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise direction is commanded by a negative number.
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)

By the above command, punching is made at n pieces of points which lie every intervals of d along the
straight line which forms angle θwith reference to the X axis, starting with the pattern base point as the
start point.
When d>0 and θ>0 #n
#(n−1)
d #3
#2
#1
θ
+X
Start point
（pattern base point） #1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
- 120 -
Example
- When d>0, θ>0, and not punching in the pattern base point

N313 G76 I30. J30. K6 ：Path of tool
#6
(205.885,100.000)
#5
(179.904,85.000)
#4
(153.923,70.000)
(30.000,50.000) #3
(127.942,55.000)
#2
30.000
N311 (101.962,40.000)
#1 (75.981,25.000)
30°
+X
N312:(50.000,10.000)
NOTE
If the number of punch points is 0, alarm (PS4503) is produced.
15.1.4 Arc (G77)

Arc (G77) specifies punching the specified times at the constant pitch (angle) on the circular arc with the
pattern base point as the circle center.
Format
G77 I r J θ P Δθ K n
θ : Angle formed between the first punch point and the +X axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is
IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
Unit of data : Minimum unit of data (deg)
-Counterclockwise punching is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise punching is commanded by a negative number.
Δθ : Angle formed between adjacent punch points axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B,
−359999 to 359999)
n : Number of punch points (Valid data range : 1 to 9999

By the above command, punching is made at n pieces of points every incremental Δθ angle, starting with
the point which forms θ angle with reference to the X-axis on the circumference of radius r, with the
pattern base point being set as the circle center.
- 121 -
When θ>0 and Δθ>0

#3
#(n−2) #2
#(n−1) #1
r
#n
Δθ
+X
Center
#1 to #n：Order of punch motion
Example
- When θ>0, Δθ<0 and not punching in the pattern base point

N413 G77 I40. J135. P−22.5 K6 ：Path of tool
(60.000,140.000)
(44.693,136.955) (75.307,136.955)
#3
N411 #2
(31.716,128.284) #4 (88.284,128.284)
(10.000,130.000)
#1 #5
40.000 −22.5° #6
135° (96.955,115.307)
+X
N412:(60.000,100.000)
NOTE
If the radius is 0 or the number of punch points is 0, alarm (PS 4504) is produced.
15.1.5 Grid (G78, G79)

Grid (G78, G79) specifies punching the specified times in the grid points having specified interval with
the pattern base point as the start point.
G78 commands punching in the X-axis direction, while G79 commands punching in the Y-axis direction.
- 122 -
Format
dx : Punch point intervals in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-This is commanded by a positive number when the first punch point in the X-axis direction is located in the
+X direction as viewed from the start point.
-This is commanded by a negative number when the first punch point in the X-axis direction is located in
the -X direction as viewed from the start point.
dy : Punch point intervals in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-This is commanded by a positive number when the first punch point in the Y-axis direction is located in the
+Y direction as viewed from the start point.
-This is commanded by a negative number when the first punch point in the Y-axis direction is located in
the -Y direction as viewed from the start point.
nx : Number of punch points in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)
-The start point is not included in the number.
ny : Number of punch points in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 9999)
-The start point is not included in the number.
By the above command, punching is made at matrix points consisting of nx pieces at intervals of dx in the
X-axis direction and ny pieces at intervals of dy in the Y-axis direction, starting with the pattern base
point being set as the start point.
When G78 Amount of number of punch point n：(nx+1)×(ny+1) −1

#1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
+Y ：Path of tool
#n #(n−1)
ny
#(nx+1)
dy
#1 #(nx−1) #nx
+X
Start point
dx nx
- 123 -
When G79 Amount of number of punch point n：(nx+1)×(ny+1) −1

#1 to #n ：Order of punch motion
+Y ：Path of tool
#ny #(ny+1)
#(ny−1)
ny
#1 #(n−1)
dy
#n
+X
Start point
dx nx
Example
- When dx<0, dy<0 and punching in the pattern base point

N512 X100. Y120. #1 to #14：Order of punch motion in N513
N513 G78 I−20. J−15. P4 K2 ：Path of tool
20 N511
(120,130)
#4 #3 #2 #1 N512
(20,120) (40,120) (60,120) (80,120) (100,120)

15
#5 #6 #7 #8 #9
(20,105) (40,105) (60,105) (80,105) (100,105)
#14 #13 #12 #11 #10
+Y (20,90) (40,90) (60,90) (80,90) (100,90)
+X
NOTE
If the number of punch points is 0 in the X-axis or Y-axis direction, alarm (PS
4505) is produced.
- 124 -
15.1.6 Share Proofs (G86)

Share proofs (G86) specifies punching for the specified distance along straight line starting with the
pattern base point by using specified tool that figure is rectangle.
For this command, the CNC calculates the pitch automatically as follows to stack adjacent punch areas
before punching in this pitch for the specified distance. Then, the product is stamped out .
Format
G86 I l J θ P w1 Q w2
l : Length of punching (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ+180° direction.
θ : The angle for the X-axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
-The counterclockwise direction corresponds to positive.
-The clockwise direction corresponds to negative.
w1 : Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool advances
(Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)
-For positive and negative, punch the left and right sides in the forward direction, respectively.
w2 : Tool width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advancess
(Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)
-Both w1 and w2 must be designated when either positive or negative.
- For a square tool with w1 = w2, w2 may be omitted.
With the pattern base point as a start point, this function allows to punch length ⏐l⏐ in the direction of
angle θ for the X-axis, using a rectangular tool with w1 as the width and w2 as the length.
When l>0, θ>0, and w1>0
#n
#(n−1)
w1
#2 θ
w2 #1
+X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
- 125 -
Example
- When l<0, θ>0, w1<0, and w2<0

N612 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #7 : Order of punch motion in N613
N613 G86 I−60. J30. P−10. Q−5. : Path of tool
N612:(80.000,100.000)
30°
10.000 +X
5.000
60.000
#1:(76.920,95.335)
#2:(69.703,91.168)
N611
#3:(62.486,87.002) (110.000,90.000)
#4:(55.269,82.335)
#5:(48.052,78.668)
#6:(40.835,74.502)
#7:(33.619,70.335)
- Method of calculating actual pitch

The CNC calculates the pitch automatically as follows:
Method of calculating actual pitch

a
#1 #2 #(n−1) #n
⏐l⏐−⏐w1⏐
⏐l⏐
(1) 95% of w1 (0.95×w1) is defined as a temporary pitch.
(2) When the number of punching point without first punching point is a, the
number of punching point (a) is shown the following expression.
( In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral number.
However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool does not
arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the decimal
point is rounded up. )
l − w1
a= (after the decimal point rounded up.)
0.95 × w1
(3) And the pitch to punch evenly by the number of punching point a rounded
up is defined as an actual pitch p. Therefore, pitch p is calculated by the
following expression.
l − w1
p=
a
- 126 -
- Relationship between length of punching l (specified by I code) and tool with

w1 (specified by P code)
Length l must be; l ≧ 1.5 w1. If this limitation is not satisfied, the alarm (PS4506) “ILLEGAL
COMMAND IN SHARE PROOFS” is issued. However, When bit 0 (AIP) of parameter No. 16202 is set
to 1, length l must be; l ≧ w1.
15.1.7 Square (G87)

Square (G87) specifies punching a rectangle with the pattern base point as the start point by using
specified tool that figure is rectangle.
For this command, the CNC calculates the pitch automatically as well as Share proofs (G86) to stack
adjacent punch areas before punching in this pitch along the edge of the specified rectangle. Then, the
product is stamped out .
Format
G87 I lx J ly P w1 Q w2
lx : Length of punching in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-For positive and negative, the length shall be in the +X and –X directions, respectively.
ly : Length of punching in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
-For positive and negative, the length shall be in the +Y and –Y directions, respectively.
w1 : With of the tool in the X-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)
w2 : With of the tool in the Y-axis direction (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)
- For a square tool with w1 = w2, w2 may be omitted.
With the Pattern base point as a starting point, it allows to punch a rectangle with length ⏐lx⏐ in the
X-axis direction and length ⏐ly⏐ in the Y-axis direction, using a tool with w1 as the width and w2 as the
length. The punching operation is performed from the longitudinal direction (i.e.: direction with large
length between ⏐lx⏐ and ⏐ly⏐). If ⏐lx⏐ = ⏐lx⏐, punching operation will be performed in the X-axis
direction.
When lx>0, ly>0, ⏐lx⏐≧⏐ly⏐ #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
ly
#(n−1)
#n
w2
#1 #2
Start point
+Y
(Pattern base point) w1 lx
+X
- 127 -
Example
- When lx<0, ly<0, and ⏐lx⏐<⏐ly⏐

N712 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #18: Order of punch motion in N713
N713 G87 I−50. J−60. P15. Q10. : Path of tool
N712:(80.000,100.000)
50.000
15.000 N711
#17 #18
(120.000,110.000)
#1
95.000 #16 10.000
#2
86.667
#15
78.333 #3
#14
#4
70.000 #13 60.000
#5
61.667
#12
53.333 #6
#11
#7
45.000 #10
+Y #9 #8
+X 37.500 49.167 60.833 72.500
- 128 -
15.1.8 Radius (G88)

Radius (G88) specifies punching at the constant pitch (distance) along the circular arc with the specified
angle and the pattern base point as the circle center.
Format

θ : Angle of the first punch point for the X-axis

-Counterclockwise is commanded by a positive number.
-Clockwise is commanded by a negative number.
Δθ : Incremental angle from the first punch point to the last punch point
(Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
d : Tool diameter (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-It allows to punch the circle outside, the circle inside, and the circumference, when positive, negative, and
0, respectively.
-Actual tool path is on the circular arc having the radius, r+d/2.

-Designate the circular length, respectively.
The punching operation is performed at pitch P between a point having angle θfor the X-axis on the
circumference (diameter r) and a point having angle θ + Δθ for the X-axis with the pattern base point as a
center according to the above, using a tool with diameter d.
When θ＞0, Δθ＞0, d＞0 #1 to #n : Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#3
r #2
p
#1
Δθ
Center θ d
(Pattern base point) +X
Radius (G88) is the same as with circular nibbling (G68) except that there is no pitch limit value by
parameter setting (No. 468 and 469), and it stops at each punch point for a single block. Therefore, also
refer to the Circular Nibbling (G68) paragraph given under 9.3.1.
- 129 -
15.1.9 Cut at Angle (G89)

Cut at angle (G89) specifies punching at the constant pitch (distance) along the straight line starting with
the pattern base point as a starting point.
Format
l : Straight line length (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-If this value is commanded with negative, punching is made in the θ+180° direction.
θ : The angle for the X-axis (Valid data range : When the increment system is IS-B, −359999 to 359999)
-The counterclockwise direction corresponds to positive.
-The clockwise direction corresponds to negative.

-For positive and negative, punch the left and right sides in the forward direction, respectively.
-Perform punching operation on the straight line at 0.

-Designate the straight line length, respectively.
This function allows to punch a straight line with length l having angle θ to X-axis with the current tool
position or the position designated by G72 as a starting point, at pitch P, using a tool with diameter d.
When l>0, θ>0 and d>0

#n
#(n−1)
l
p #2 #3
#1
θ
d +X
Start point
(Pattern base point) #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
Cut at angle (G89) is the same as with straight line nibbling (G69) except that there is no pitch limit value
by parameter setting (No. 468 and 469) and it stops at each punching point for a single block; therefore,
refer to 9.3.2 “Straight Line Nibbling (G69)” as well.
15.1.10 Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function

If an incremental command is given in a block just after the pattern function, the tool may not move by
the incremental amount from the end point of the pattern function. In case of bolt hole circle (G26), share
proofs (G86), square (G87), radius (G88) and cut at angle (G89).
The amount of movement attained by an incremental command just after the bolt hole circle is the
commanded incremental amount from the center of the bolt hole circle.
In case of bolt hole circle (G26) and square (G87), the incremental amount is from the base point of
pattern, namely, center and start point respectively.
- 130 -
In case of share proofs (G86), radius (G88) and cut at angle (G89), the incremental amount is from the
end point of the program. The incremental amount is all started with the end point of the pattern function
in line at angle (G76), arc (G77), and grid (G78, G79).
N3111 G90 G72 X100. Y100. #1 to #9 ：Order of punch motion

N3112 G26 I70. J45. K8 ：Path of tool
N3113 G91 G00 X80. Y50.
#2
End point in N3113
#9:(180.0,150.0)
#3 (250.0,150.0)
#1
(80.0,50.0)
Tool does not move by the
incremental amount from end
#4
point of pattern function
(100.0,100.0)
#8:(170.0,100.0)
Pattern base point
End point of the pattern function
#7
#5 #6
Fig.15.1.10 (a) Incremental command just after bolt hole circle (G26)
N3121 G90 G72 X50. Y50. #1 to #5: Order of punch motion

N3122 G86 I100. J0 P30. Q15. : Path of tool
N3123 G91 G00 X50. Y40.
(185.0,97.5)
Tool does not move by the incremental
amount from end point of pattern function
End point in N3123
End point of pattern function #5:(200.0,90.0)
(135.0,57.5)
#1 #2 #3 #4
(50.0,40.0)
(50.0,50.0) (150.0,50.0)
Pattern base point End point of program
Fig.15.1.10 (b) Incremental command just after share proofs (G86)
- 131 -
N3125 G90 G72 X60. Y50. #1 to #10 : Order of punch motion

N3126 G88 I70. J0 K90. P20. Q15. : Path of tool
N3127 G91 G00 X−60. Y−10.
End point of pattern function
Tool does not move by the incremental #9:(60.0,130.0)
amount from end point of pattern function
#8
(0.0,120.0)
(60.0,120.0)
(−60.0,−10.0)
End point of
N3127 の終点 program
#10:(0.0,110.0) #2
#1
(60.0,50.0)
Pattern base point
Fig.15.1.10 (c) Incremental command just after radius (G88)
When the block execution of the bolt hole circle (G26) has been finished, the tool is located at the end
point, in practice.
However, a programmer shall make a program assuming that the tool be located at the base point, i.e., the
center of the pattern.
Thus, programming is simplified in machining, like the following example.
Example
- Concentric bolt hole circles
N3115 G90 G72 X100. Y100.

#6
N3116 G26 I40. J−90. K4 #5
N3117 G26 I70. J45. K4 #3
#1 to #8：Order of punch motion

：Path of tool (100.0,100.0)
#2 #4
40.0 70.0
It is not required to command
G90 G72 X100. Y100. ;
#1
between N3116 and N3117.
#7 #8
- 132 -
- Machining when the centers are given as an incremental sizes

N564G00G90X48.5Y50.0 ; #1 to #15：Order of punch motion
N565G26I20.0J45.0K4 ; ：Path of tool
N566G91X52.3 ;
N567G26I20.0J45.0K4 ;
N568X52.3 ;
N569G26I20.0J45.0K4 ;
#3 #2 #8 #7 #13 #12
#1 (48.5,50.0) #6 (100.8,50.0) #11 (153.1,50.0)
#4 #5 #9 #10 #14 #15
It is not required to command

base point command (G72)
between N567 and N569.
15.1.11 Notes on Pattern Functions

CAUTION
1 Don’t command M code in a block where the pattern function is commanded.
2 If a T code is commanded in a block where the pattern function is commanded,
the X, Y axes are positioned to the first punch point and also a tool is selected
concurrently.
After positioning and tool selection, punching is made at the first punch point.
3 Even when the pattern function is commanded in G01, G02 or G03 mode, the X,
Y axes are positioned at rapid traverse. However, since T code cannot be
commanded in G01, G02, or G03 mode, such a command is not executable, in
general.
4 If a pattern function is executed using the single block operation, the single block
stop is made after punching has been finished at respective punch points.
5 If the pattern function is commanded in MDI mode, punching is not executed, but
positioning only is made. Some machines may execute punching.
6 Since radius, number of punch points, and other parameters in the pattern
function are not modal data, they must be commanded correctly in each block.
7 Operation for the C-axis can be specified in a block in which the pattern function
is specified.
- 133 -
15.2 MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO

When it is desired to repeatedly use a pattern with the same figure among the pattern functions, this
function can store it in memory with a given number and access it as needed. Programs other than those
using the pattern functions can be stored in memory and can be called.
(1) Memory
When a one-digit numeral from 1 to 5 subsequent to address A is given before the G code of the
pattern function, the pattern function according to the G-code is stored in the memory.
(Example) A2G76I300J3000K5;
(2) Call
By giving a one-digit numeral from 1 to 5 subsequent to address B, it is possible to call the pattern
function stored previously with address A.
(Example) B2;
(3) Example
When bolt hole circles with the same figure having a center in (100, 100), (200, 100), (250, 180),
and (150, 180) are present:
････････
N01G72X100.Y100.; Base point command
N02A2G26I40.J0K4; Bolt hole circle command
N04B2; Equal to the block which commanded A2
････････
(150,180) (250,180)
・・
・・
(100,100) (200,100)
CAUTION
1 Do not give the same number because the pattern function differs. At this time,
the previous memory is erased.
2 Only a block with up to 192 characters can be stored in memory.
- 134 -
15.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75)

By changing the hold position of a workpiece by the workpiece holders, a workpiece having a size larger
than the stroke in X–axis direction of the machine can be machined.
If it is desired to punch a workpiece at the workpiece holder position when the workpiece was set to the
machine, the hold position of the workpiece must be changed.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.15.3 (a) Workpiece holder
Repositioning of a workpiece is generally done according to the following procedure, assuming that the
workpiece is positioned at a location where the repositioning of the workpiece is executable.
(1) The claw of the workpiece holder is opened, and also the clamper depresses the workpiece
concurrently to fix the workpiece as a general procedure, so that the workpiece is not deviated from
the table.
Clamper
Y
Workpiece Workpiece holder
Fig.15.3 (b) Workpiece clamp
- 135 -
(2) The workpiece holder moves in the Y–axis direction and separates from the workpiece.
Clamper
Y
Fig.15.3 (c) Retreat of workpiece holder
(3) The workpiece holder moves in the X–axis direction to relocate the hold position.
Y Workpiece
Workpiece holder
Fig.15.3 (d) Movement of workpiece holder
(4) The workpiece holder moves in the Y–axis direction to return to the position where it can hold the
workpiece.
clamper
Y
Fig.15.3 (e) Advancement of workpiece holder
- 136 -
(5) The claw of the workpiece holder is closed to hold the workpiece, and the clamper lifts and separates
from the workpiece concurrently.
Clamper
Y
Fig.15.3 (f) Workpiece unclamp
A series of the above operation can be done by one–block command including G function.
G75 X x
The above command is executed by being divided into the following 5 blocks.
<1> M10 ;
<2> G70G91Y yR ;
<3> G70G91X －x ;
<4> G70G91Y －yR ;
<5> M11 ;
Blocks <1>- <5>correspond to operation steps (1) – (5), respectively.
A relief or a return mount yR in the Y-axis direction is preset by parameter (No. 16209).
By G75 command, the X and Y axes move.

The movement of the Y-axis is just cancelled by its relief and return. If it is assumed that the movement
of the X-axis is the movement of a tool in the same manner as in ordinary block, for the X-axis command
hereafter, X-axis command value must be subtracted by the value displaced by G75 or a coordinate
system must be set by a G92 command with the tool at the position where the G75 was commanded in the
block next to G75.
y
(200.0,100.0)
This position becomes
100.0 (100,100) after executing
G75block.
In other words, the work
coordinate system shifts by
100.0 in the X-axis
x direction.
Workpiece holder
Fig.15.3 (g) The work coordinate system after executing automatic repositioning
- 137 -
The movement of the X-axis for repositioning changes the workpiece holder position. The tool position
remains unchanged in the work coordinate system, in practice. Accordingly, internal processing is made
in this control system so that the coordinate value of the tool is not changed by the axis movement
performed by repositioning.
Thus, it is not necessary to take the repositioning of a workpiece into consideration in programming.
Now, the following description covers such a case that several workpieces are sequentially machined
according to a program including the repositioning command.
y
Workpiece Reference point
End locator
Workpiece holder
200.0
1000.0
Fig.15.3 (h) The work position before executing automatic repositioning
Refer to the above figure as an example. The reference point is assumed as the start point of the tool.
Assume that the distance between the reference point and the end locator is 1000 mm, and the left
workpiece holder is mounted at a place distant from the end locator by 200 mm.
In order to machine the next workpiece by the same program after machining one workpiece, the start
point of the tool must also be the reference point to the next workpiece. Accordingly, programming must
be made to set the end point to the reference point.
G92X1000.0Y . . . ;
..........
..........
..........
..........
G75X300.0 ;
..........
..........
.........
G28M30 ;
“The end point is the reference point.” means that the position of the end point is just the same as the start
point on the machine tool, and the workpiece holder position is the start point, i.e., the position distant
from the end locator by 200 mm. However, the left lower point of the workpiece, i.e., the zero point of the
work coordinate system, does not meet the end locator position, but it is distant from the end locator by
300 mm in the –X direction.
- 138 -
y
Workpiece Reference point
End
locator
Workpiece holder
300.0 200.0
1000.0
Fig.15.3 (i) The work position after executing automatic repositioning
When a new workpiece is set by attaching it to the end locator after removing the workpiece, the zero
point of the work coordinate system must be positioned at the end locator.
Accordingly, the coordinate system must be set by G92 command at the start of the program without fail.
CAUTION
1 Neither T code nor M code should be commanded in G75 block.
2 The repositioning amount of the workpiece holder is specified by a numerical
value following address X in G75 command. If repositioning is made in the +X
direction of the work coordinate system, specify it by a positive numerical value.
3 Other M codes may be used for M10 and M11 depending upon machine tool
builders.
4 Programming is made, assuming that the workpiece is fixed and a tool moves
along the workpiece. However, the workpiece moves, while the tool is fixed
generally. Accordingly, the movement direction of the workpiece, or, the
movement direction of the workpiece holder, is contrary to the movement
direction of the tool.
This means that, when the workpiece holder moves in the +X and +Y directions
of the work coordinate system, the tool must be regarded to move in the –X and
–Y direction respectively. Accordingly, the command in <2>, <3>, <4> blocks is
opposite to movement direction in the work coordinate system of the workpiece
holder.
- 139 -
CAUTION
5 In G75 command, the relief quantity of the workpiece holder from the workpiece
is equal to the return quantity of the workpiece holder to the workpiece in the
absolute value of its movement amount.
However, if a workpiece is uneven, the workpiece holder depresses the
workpiece, causing the workpiece to be deviated, assuming that the workpiece
holder returns by the relief quantity as it is. For such a work, change the relief
quantity and return quantity by the following programming.
M10;
G91Y y1 ;
X –x ;
Y –y2 ; y1 differs from y2.
M11;
Even in the above command, internal processing is made in NC so that the tool
position remains unchanged in the work coordinate system, irrespective of the
movement of the X and Y axes.
Accordingly, it is not necessary for programming to take this movement into
consideration in the subsequent commands. However, since the workpiece
cannot be held if such a command is given again, it is necessary to take these
circumstances into consideration when performing repositioning again.
6 It is not recommended for cycle time and machining accuracy to repeatedly
execute repositioning by a program.
7 The single block stop is made after five sequential motion, if G75 is executed by
a single block operation.
- 140 -
15.4 U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION

The macro function enables commands consisting of several blocks to be stored in the NC memory as a
single macro and to be called when necessary.
15.4.1 Storage of Macros

To store several blocks as a macro, attach numerals of 2 digits (01 to 89) following address work U
before commanding several blocks to be stored and attach the same numerals following address word V
after them, then the several blocks sandwiched in between U and V are stored.
We call the numerals of 2 digits following U or V “macro number”. If the macro number is any of 01 to
59, then blocks sandwiched in between U and V are stored with their execution. If the macro number is
any of 60 to 89, only storage of blocks is performed without their execution.
Example
;
G92X1830.0Y1270.0 ;
………………
………………
U02 ;
G90X100.0Y500.0T32;
G72X150.0Y700.0;
G87I100.0J300.0P10.0;
N100M00 ; Storing while command executing
G72X500.0Y300.0T26;
A03G26I100.0J0K4;
G72X800.0Y300.0;
B03;
V02;
………………
………………
U70 ;
G90X200.0Y100.0T20;
G79I8.0J10.0P3K10; Storing without command executing
G90X1000.0Y50.0T31;
G76I25.0J60.0K6 ;
V70 ;
………………
………………
In the blocks to be sandwiched in between U and V, all commands other than ones for storage of macros
according to other macro numbers (see below Example (limitation)) may be specified. But controller
resetting commands, such as M02, M30, etc., can not be specified. In addition, the part for custom macros
cannot be specified. Address words U and V must be specified in independent blocks except for the
sequence number (a numeric string of 5 digits following N).
Details of macro numbers 90 to 99 will be described later.
- 141 -
Example (limitation)
………………
………………
U10 ;
G90X10000Y50000T32 ;
G72X15000Y70000 ;
G87I10000J30000P1000 ;
N100M00 ;
U20 ;
G72X50000Y30000T26 ;
A03G26I10000J0K4 ;
G72X80000Y30000 ;
B03 ;
V20 ;
G90X20000Y10000T20 ;
V10 ;
As shown in the above example, another macro cannot be stored while a certain macro is being stored.
15.4.2 Macro Call

Several blocks stored previously as a single macro can be called by specifying numerals of 2 digits
attached following address word W.
Example
………
………
U05 ;
G90X100.0Y500.0T32 ;
G72X150.0Y700.0 ;
G87I100.0J300.0P10.0 ;
M00 ;
V05 ;
………
………
G93G90X500.0Y0 ;
W05 ;
………
Address word W must be specified in a independent block except for the sequence number. But as
regards the commands G73 and G74 for the multi-piece machining function, W can be specified together
with their G codes.
- 142 -
15.4.3 Nesting Call of Macros

A certain macro can call another macro and then further the latter macro can call any other macro.
Example
U05; ( ): Signifies a block number
………; (1)
………; (2)
V05;
U20;
………; (3)
W05;
………; (4)
V20;
U70;
………; (5)
W20; These are not executed during storage because the macro number is 70.
………; (6)
V70;
W70;
The execution sequence of this example is as follows:
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Depth 1
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Depth 2
(1) (2)
Depth 3
W5 W5
W20
U5-V5 U20-V20 W70
Fig.15.4.3 (a) The order of executing macro
- 143 -
15.4.4 Macro Storage Capacity

The storage capacity for U/V/W macro function is limited to 50kbyte. And storage method of U/V/W
macro function is the same as a usual program
Effective use of the storage area for storing macros is guaranteed since previously stored macros are erased if
they are changed to new macros with the same macro numbers as before when they are out of use.
Example
N100U10 ;
〔G90X10000Y5000T20;
N101A01G26I4000J9000K10;
G91X10000;
N102B01;〕
N105V10;
………
Program codes in brackets 〔〕 are stored in memory.
15.4.5 Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers 90 to

99)
With macro numbers 90 to 99, several macros can be stored and called as a single macro, though the item
15.4.1 “Storage of macros” describes that another macro cannot be stored while a certain macro is being
stored. Macro numbers 90 to 99, however, only define several macros as a single macro, but they cannot
store any executable commands by themselves.
Example
U90;
U01;
………
………
V01;
U10;
………
………
V10;
U15;
………
………
V15;
G90X10000Y20000T15; ← This block is not stored.
U02; (such a use is no good)
………
………
V02;
V90;
………
………
W90; ← This command is equivalent to the following set of several commands.
W01 ;
W10 ; =W900
W15 ;
W02 ;
- 144 -
15.4.6 Deletion of Stored Macros

Macros stored therefore are all deleted in the following cases:
(1) Reset (including reset due to M02, M30, etc.)

(2) Controller power off
When the system is reset, the stored macros can be prevented from deletion by setting of bit 0 (UVC) of
parameter No. 16200.
15.5 MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION

The multi-piece machining function enables several sheets of product with the same punching shape to be
produced from a single sheet of material at a time by simple commands.
This function allows so called “trial machining” that performs punching only on a sheet of product from
the machining command tape for “multi-piece machining” by a simple setup method, therefore the
machining command tape can be easily checked before full machining.
15.5.1 Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98)
Cutting margin
(3) (4) (9)
Workpiece
(2) (5) (8)
(1) (6) (7)
Catching margin
Base point of multi-piece machining
X
Fig.15.5.1 (a) Multi-piece machining
Parts (2) to (9) as shown above have the same punching shape as part (1).
Machining commands to punch on a sheet of material must be specified on the product part at the lower
left (1). The point at the lower left of the set of multi-products (point B shown in Fig.15.5.1 (a); called as
“Base point of multi-piece machining” hereafter) must be specified prior to the machining commands to
punch on a product part by G98 as absolute co-ordinates under the system of co-ordinates specified using
G92 command. In the G98 command, the X-axial and Y-axial lengths of one product and the numbers of
products in the directions of X-axis and Y-axis must be specified.
- 145 -
Format
G98Xxb Yyb Ilx Jly Pnx Kny;
xb : X–axis coordinate value of the base point of multi–piece machining
yb : Y–axis coordinate value of the base point of multi–piece machining
lx : X axial length of one product part (a positive number)
ly : Y axial length of one product part (a positive number)
nx : The number of products in the X axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to
9999)
ny : The number of products in the Y axial direction (Note) (Command range is 0 to
9999)
NOTE
Product part (1) is not counted.
After command of G98, specify machining commands on the lower left product part ((1) in Fig.15.5.1
(a)) using the macro function (specify the machining commands between address word U and V).
In the multi-piece machining function, if a set of machining commands corresponding to a single tool is
executed continuously on the all product parts, the tool change count is decreased so that the time
required for full machining on a material sheet can be considerably decreased. The following illustrates
this.
(3) (4) (9)
Workpiece
(2) (5) (8)
(1) (6) (7)
Fig.15.5.1 (b) Processing example
Let the following four types of tools be used to punch products for one sheet, as shown in Fig.15.5.1 (c).
T31
T11
T22
T33
Fig.15.5.1 (c) Tools be used to punch products for processing example (Fig.15.5.1 (b))
- 146 -
Method 1
In this method, the machining commands to punch on one product part are stored as a single macro.
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
……………
………T22 ;
……………
……………
………T33 ;
……………
……………
………T11 ;
……………
……………
V01 ;
This method will run the risk of taking longer time for machining on a sheet of material because tool
change is performed in the order, T31 → T22 → T33 → T11, while the respective product parts from 1 to
6 are machined if macro number 01 is called by the multi-piece machining command. (Tool change
counts: 4×6=24)
Method 2
In this method, each set of machining commands to punch with a single tool is stored as a single macro.
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
……………
V01 ;
U02 ;
………T22 ;
……………
……………
V02 ;
U03 ;
………T33 ;
……………
……………
V03 ;
U04 ;
………T11 ;
……………
……………
V04 ;
If macro numbers 01, 02, 03 and 04 are called sequentially by the multi-piece machining command in this
case, machining proceeds as follows.
1) Tool T31 performs full machining on all product parts.
2) Then, T22 performs full machining on all product parts.
- 147 -
Thus, its tool change is completed by only four steps so that tool change time is considerably decreased
compared with method 1.
CAUTION
1 The G98 coordinate system is canceled by the G92 command.
2 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set, the G98 coordinate system is
canceled by a reset.
3 When the UV macro contains the G91 command, the tool moves according to
the incremental value from the current position rather than the incremental
position based on the G98 coordinate system.
15.5.2 Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)

Specify any of the following commands, and then multi-piece machining is performed by calling
machining commands stored using the macro function.
Format
G73(G74) Wwn Qq ;
wn : A macro number
q: Machining start area specification
G73 goes on punching in the X axial direction, whereas G74 goes on punching in the Y axial direction in
grid parts-line.
G73 W_ Q1 ; G73 W_ Q2 ; G73 W_ Q3 ; G73 W_ Q4 ;
G74 W_ Q1 ; G74 W_ Q2 ; G74 W_ Q3 ; G74 W_ Q4 ;
Fig.15.5.2 (a) Multi-piece machining
In the example shown in Fig.15.5.1 (b) to start machining from area (1) and to punch in the X axial
direction, specify the following commands
for the respective methods:
Method 1:G73W01Q1;
Method 2:G73W01Q1;
G73W02Q1;
G73W03Q1;
G73W04Q1;
- 148 -
Let the number of tool required to machine products for one sheet be n, and method 2 requires n times of
commands G73/G74 to be specified. In such a case, several macro numbers can be represented by a single
macro number if machining start area (specified by Q) and machining direction (G73/G74) are both the
same with respect to the corresponding tools. Macro numbers to be provided for this purpose are 90 to 99.
(These are called multiple macro storage numbers hereafter.) To store macro numbers 01, 02 and 04 as a
single macro number 90 in the example shown in Fig.15.5.1 (b), specify as follows.
U90 ;
U01 ;
………T31 ;
……………
V01 ;
U02 ;
………T22 ;
……………
V02 ;
U04 ;
………T11 ;
……………
V04 ;
V90 ;
In this case, the command of “G73 W90 Q1” becomes identical with the following series of commands.
G73W01Q1 ;
G73W02Q1 ;
G73W04Q1 ;
Though multi-piece machining commands (G73/G74) are generally used to punch products of the same
shape arranged at intervals of grid, they can be also performed to punch exclusively in the X or Y axial
direction. In such a case, specify the number of products in the X or Y axial direction (to be specified by
address word P or K) in G98 to 0.
15.5.3 Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece Machining

When products are machined using a NC tape for multi-piece machining, any desired machining method
can be selected.
- Select with parameter

When bit 3 of parameter No.16201 is set to 0, parameter No.16206 can set the method for multi-piece
machining.
Machining process when multiple

Parameter No.16206
workpieces are taken
0 Multi–piece machining is not used
1 Trial punching for multi–piece machining
2 Machining on the reset of material punched
3 Full machining for multi–piece machining
- 149 -
- Select with signal

Multi–piece machining setting signal MLP1, MLP2<Gn231.0,.1> can set the method for multi-piece
machining.
Multi–piece machining
Machining process when multiple
setting signal
workpieces are taken
MLP1 MLP2
0 0 Multi–piece machining is not used
1 0 Trial punching for multi–piece machining
0 1 Machining on the reset of material punched
1 1 Full machining for multi–piece machining
If trial punching is selected, only the lower-left product part of material ((1) in Fig.15.5.1 (a) and (b)). As
a result, macros except 60 to 89 are executed while storing, and blocks specified in G73/G74 are all
ignored.
Machining on the reset of material punched for trial signifies that after punching on only the lower-left
product part of material, the remaining product parts of material are machined entirely. For this purpose,
no machining is performed during the storage of macros, and the machining on the lower-left product part
is skipped when commands of G73/G74 are executed.
For full machining on a material, no machining is performed during the storage of macros, but machining
over the entire product parts is performed by G73/G74. Set to “0” if NC tape for the multi-piece
machining is not used.
15.5.4 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products

Specifying the position from which machining multiple products restarts with address P in a block in
which the G73 or G74 command for machining multiple products is specified enables machining multiple
products to restart from the specified position.
Format
G73(G74) W_ Q_ P_ ;
W_ : UV macro number or subprogram number
Q_ : Machining sequence
P_ : Position from which machining restarts (Valid setting: 1 ≦ P ≦total number of
products to be machined (Max. 99999999))
- Example
Please specify a restart point by a P–code. Fig.15.5.4 (a) shows an example that restarting operation at
point (6). In this case, specify P6.
(9) (10) (11) (12)
(8) (7) (6) (5)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
G73 W_ Q1 P6 ;P6 ;
Fig.15.5.4 (a) Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products
- 150 -
CAUTION
When restarting machining multiple products is specified, the reference position
specified by the G98 command for setting the reference position used in
machining multiple products must be used. Do not change the reference
position.
NOTE
1 A restart command is invalid for trial machining.
2 When machining multiple products is restarted, specify the position from which
machining restarts using address P so that the number of products includes the
number of products to be used for the trial, though they are not machined.
3 If a setting specified with address P is not within the range from 1 to the total
number of products inclusive, alarm (PS 4544) is issued.
- 151 -
15.6 BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39)

The hole position gap accompanied bending is compensated and the drilling is performed.
Format
Bending compensation for X axis direction
G38 Ix1 Jx2 Kx3 Px4 Qx5 R_ ;
Bending compensation for Y axis direction
G39 Iy1 Jy2 Ky3 Py4 Qy5 R_ ;
x1 to x5 : Bending position of X axis direction (Input unit)
y1 to y5 : Bending position of X axis direction (Input unit)
R: The compensation amount attendant on a single bending is specified. (Input
unit)
The reference point is specified by setting the local coordinate system.
G52X - - - Y - - - ;
In a block after a bending command is sent, it is judged to which area automatically designated the
command value of the move command belongs, thus allowing compensation in accordance with the
bending frequency.
When bending compensation cancel is required.
(1) Specify the cancel of bending compensation.

G38R0 ; ··· (Cancel of X axis direction)
G39R0 ; ··· (Cancel of Y axis direction)
(2) Specify M02, M30.
It is possible to cancel even in the reset state according to reset, clear, and emergency stop.
(Example) When the bending compensation of only X axis direction is performed.

G52X10.0Y10.0
G38 I 100.0 J 250.0 K 450.0 P 650.0 Q 1000.0 R-0.5
G90 X175.0 Y0.0 ;
X350.0 ;
X550.0 ;
- 152 -
z Bending position
100.0 250.0
x 450.0
650.0
1000.0
Command position Workpiece
Compensation position
(X,Y) = (10.0,10.0) (174.5,10.0) (349.0,10.0) (548.5,10.0)
Standard Compensation Compensation Compensation
point amount -0.5 amount -1.0 amount -1.5
Bending
200.0
150.0
100.0
200.0
350.0
Program:
G52X100.Y0 ; Specifications of standard point
G38I180.J260.K420.R-1. ; Bending compensation command
G90X-50. ; Absolute coordinate (X50.)
X270. ; Absolute coordinate (X269.)
X300. ; Absolute coordinate (X298.)
M02 ; Cancel of bending compensation execution
In the above example, when the negative direction from the standard point, for example, X50. direction
(X-50. since the coordinates system is offset in the program in the coordinates form the origin) is
designated, bending compensation is not performed. At this time, it is regarded as area 1, that is, an area
with no compensation by bending. As described above, when the number of bending is less than 4, it is
possible to omit what is not required among X1-X5 and Y1-Y5 representing the distance from the
standard point which indicates the area boundary.
CAUTION
In one block to which a pattern command, for example, is given during bending
compensation, it is regarded as a move within the area, and no command over
the area can be given.
- 153 -
15.7 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND
15.7.1 Linear Punch Command (G45)

Using linear punching command (G45) allows that workpiece is punched out along strait line from the
pattern base point to the specified end point with the specified rectangle tool.
Format
G45 X x Y y P w1 Q w2 R r D Δd
( x , y ) : End point (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)
In G90 mode, please specify the position of the end point.
In G91 mode, please specify the amount of movement to the end point.
W1 : Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range :
1 to 999999999)
W2 : Tool width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range : 1 to
999999999)
-When this code is omitted, the CNC regards that W2 is same as W1.
r : Direction of tool offset with respect to the direction in which the tool advances (Valid data range :
−1, 0, 1)
Unit of data : None
-Should be specified by positive number for offset to the left of the direction in which the tool
advances.
-Should be specified by negative number for offset to the right of the direction in which the
tool advances.
-Should specify R0 to punch out on programmed line (no offset). When R-code is omitted, the
CNC regard that R0 is specified.
Δd : Microjoint width (Compensation value) (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

-Should be specified by positive number for compensation in such a way that the resultant
workpiece dimensions increase.
-Should be specified by negative number for compensation in such a way that the resultant
workpiece dimensions decrease.
-Should specify D0 to punch out with no compensation. When D-code is omitted, the CNC
regard that D0 is specified.
Using above command allows workpiece is punched out along a straight line from the pattern base point
as a start point to the end point (x, y) with a tool having dimensions (w1, w2). Moreover, specifying
microjoint width Δd effects compensation at the punch start and end points.
- 154 -
For r>0 and Δd>0 (x, y)
#n Δd
#(n−1)
w1
#2
w2 #1
+Y Δd
Start point
#1 to #n: Order of punch motion
+X
・Calculating method of actual pitch

Pitch is calculated automatically as follows:
Calculating method of actual pitch

a
#1 #2 #(n−1) #n
p
l−w1
(1) When the length of punching is defined as l, length l is shown by the

following express.
l= (x − x of base po int )2 + (y − y of base po int )2 + Δd × 2

(In G90 mode)
l = x + y + Δd × 2
2 2
(In G91 mode)
(2) 95% of w1 (0.95×w1) is defined as a temporary pitch.
(3) When the number of punching point without first punching point is a, the
number of punching point (a) is shown the following expression.
( In the point, the number of punching point a must be integral number.
However, when the number after the decimal point is cut off, tool does not
arrive at the terminal punching point. So the number after the decimal point
is rounded up. )
l − w1
a= (after the decimal point rounded up.)
0.95 × w1
(4) And the pitch to punch evenly by the number of punching point a rounded up
is defined as an actual pitch p. Therefore, pitch p is calculated by the
following expression.
l − w1
p=
a
- 155 -
Example
・When r<0 and Δd<0

N1012 G72 X80. Y70. #1 to #5: Order of punch motion in N1013
N1013 G45 X40. Y100. P10. Q5. R−1 D−2. : Path of tool
(40.000,100.000)
2.000
#5:(47.100,97.800)
#4:(54.300,92.400)
#3:(61.500,87.000)
10.000
#2:(68.700,81.600)
#1:(75.900,76.200)
5.000
2.000
N1012:(80.000,70.000)
N1011:(65.000,65.000)
NOTE
1 When the amount of movement is 0 or is smaller than 1.5 times of dx value
during G45 block, the alarm (PS4500) is issued.
2 When the Tool width measured in parallel with the direction in which the tool
advances (W1) is not specified, the alarm (PS4510) is issued. Moreover, Tool
width measured vertically to the direction in which the tool advances (W2) is not
specified, the CNC regards the tool shape as regular square.
- 156 -
15.7.2 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)

Using circular punching commands (G46, G47) allows that workpiece is punched out on a circle with a
radius of r between the pattern base point and the specified end point in constant pitches.
By using G46 command, the tool moves along the arc clockwise. And, by using G47 command, the tool
moves along the arc counterclockwise.
Format
G46 X x Y y R r P d Q p
G47 X x Y y R r P d Q p
( x , y ) : End point (Valid data range : −999999999 to 999999999)

In G90 mode, please specified the position of the end point.
In G91 mode, please specified the amount of movement to the end point.
r : Radius of arc (Valid data range : ±1 to ±999999999)

-Should be specified by positive number to assign the arc with an angle of 180°or less.
-Should be specified by negative number to assign the arc with an angle of 180°or larger.
-R0 cannot be specified.

-Should be specified by positive number to punch outside the arc.
-Should be specified by negative number to punch inside the arc.
-Should specify P0 to punch on the arc.
p : Nibbling pitch (Valid data range : 1 to 999999999)

-This pitch is specified as an arc length by positive number.
Using above command allows workpieces are punched out on a circle with a radius of r in pitches of q,
using a tool with a diameter of d.
When r>0, d>0 #1 to #n: Order of punch motion
#(n−1)
#n
#2 r
#1 p (x, y)
Center of circle
d Start point
Moreover, when the distance between the start point and the end point is larger than a circular arc
diameter (2r), workpiece is punched out with a start point on a circle with a radius of r. In this case ,
therefore, the tool cannot arrive in the end point specified.
- 157 -
Example
・When r<0 and d<0

N1112 G72 X80. Y100. #1 to #9 : Order of punch motion in N1113
N1113 G47 X45. Y55. R−30. P−10. Q15. : Path of tool
#3:(55.969,108.228) #2:(67.236,105.108)
#4:(44.517,105.885)
15.000
#5:(35.382,98.591) →(Actual pitch = 14.159)
N1112:(80.000,100.000)
#6:(30.562,87.942) #1:(75.852,97.207)
10.000
Center of circle
(55.116,83.243)
N1111:(95.000,90.000)
30.000
#7:(31.110,76.264)
#9:(46.685,59.707)
#8:(36.907,66.113)
(45.000,55.000)
NOTE
1 When the start and end points of an arc are the same in a G46 or G47
command, if either the radius of the arc is zero or the interval exceeds the
circumference, alarm (PS4511) is issued.
2 If address R and address Q are not specified, alarm (PS4511) is issued.
15.7.3 Controlling the C–axis

When any of the tools which can be rotated around the C-axis are specified in parameters No. 16370 to
No. 16389 are selected in a block containing a G45, G46, or G47 command or a preceding block, the
C-axis is automatically controlled in the following way in the block containing the G45, G46, or G47
command.
When a G45 command is specified, the C-axis is controlled at the first punch position so that the C-axis is
oriented to the angle formed by the X-axis and the line connecting the start and end points.
When a G46 or G47 command is specified, the C-axis is controlled at each punch position so that one
side of the tool is oriented to the center of the arc.
- 158 -
15.8 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL

The M–codes which is set by parameters (No. 16610 to 16614) are commanded, the crack between work
coordinate system and machine coordinate system of Y–axis repositioning motion is canceled.
(Example 1)
Y1525 M30 ;
Y–axis moves including the crack of repositioning.
(Example 2)
Y1525 ;
M30 ;
The work coordinate system is preset to the machine coordinate system to cancel the crack of
repositioning by M30.
Limitation
The cancel M–code must be different from another special meaning M–code.
But M02 and M30 are possible.
- 159 -
16.COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
16 COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Chapter 16, "COMPENSATION FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
16.1 SCALING (G50, G51) ......................................................................................................................160

16.2 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or G150,G151,G152) .........................166
16.3 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42).................................................................170
16.4 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION ........................................................................175
16.5 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VALUES,
AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ........................................................223
16.6 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85) .......................................................................224
16.1 SCALING (G50, G51)

Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
Two types of scaling are available, one in which the same magnification rate is applied to each axis and
the other in which different magnification rates are applied to different axes.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program.
Unless specified in the program, the magnification rate specified in the parameter is applied.
Y
P4
P3
P4’ P3’
P0
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
0 X
P0 : Scaling center
P1 to P4 : Programmed figure
P1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure
Fig. 16.1 (a) Scaling
Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
(When bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 = 0)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate
Scaling is effective. value of scaling
(Scaling mode) P_ : Scaling magnification
G50 ; Scaling cancel
- 160 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 16.COMPENSATION FUNCTION
Scaling up or down along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image)
(When bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 = 1)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_I_J_K_; Scaling start IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate
Scaling is effective. value of scaling
(Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y,
and Z axes) respectively
G50 ; Scaling cancel
CAUTION
1 Specify G51 in a separate block.
2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50 to cancel the scaling mode.
NOTE
1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input mode (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 = 1) does not cause the units of the magnification rates P, I, J, and K
to change.
2 Setting the least input increment equal to 10 times the least command increment
(bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 = 1) does not cause the units of the
magnification rates P, I, J, and K to change.
3 An attempt to specify 0 as a magnification rate causes alarm PS0142, “ILLEGAL
SCALE RATE” to occur in a G51 block.
Explanation
- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set bit 0 (SCL) of parameter No. 5401 to 1.
- Minimum unit of scaling magnification

Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.
- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block
are assumed those of an absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the
scaling center.
CAUTION
With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute
(G90 mode) position command.
If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position
assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute
position command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates
specified in the G51 block, after that block.
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification

Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 to 0.
If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter No. 5411 is used.
Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm PS0007,
“ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” will occur.
- 161 -
A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm
PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” will occur.
The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.
- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)

Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a
mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center.
Set bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image).
Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter No.
1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J, and K
are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the magnification set with parameter No. 5421
is used.
A value other than 0 must be set to parameter No. 5421.
Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K).
Magnification can be set within the range of ±0.00001 to ±9999.99999.
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis
Y axis c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
o : Scaling center
Programmed figure
d
Scaled figure
c
o
X axis
a
b
Fig. 16.1 (b) Scaling of each axis
CAUTION
Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be
executed in the order indicated below:
<1> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification)
<2> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the
CNC
- Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an
ellipse.
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000;
(A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a magnification of 1 is applied to the
Y-component.)
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
Above commands are equivalent to the following command:
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;
G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)
- 162 -
Scaled shape
X
(0,0) (100.0) (200.0)
Fig. 16.1 (c) Scaling for circular interpolation1
Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted
into a vector in the center direction of each axis.
If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as
that in which I and J are specified.
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first,
followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well.
To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them,
specify them in the reverse order.
Example
Main program
O1
G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (×3 in the X direction and ×2 in the Y direction)
M98 P1000 ;
G17 G84 X35.0 Y20.0 R30. ;
M98 P1000 ;
G85 ;
G50 ;
M30 ;
Subprogram
O1000 ;
G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ;
G01 X50.0 ;
G01 Y30.0 ;
G01 X20.0 ;
G01 Y10.0 ;
M99 ;
- 163 -
Y
Rotation center
of coordinate
system before
scaling
Rotation center of
coordinate system
after scaling
Original program
Shape after X
coordinate system
Scaling center rotation Scaled shape
Fig. 16.1 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation
Limitation
- Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to tool radius compensation values (Fig. 16.1 (e)).
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
Cutter compensation values are not scaled.
Fig. 16.1 (e) Scaling during tool compensation
- 164 -
CAUTION
1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without
specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling
magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective.
2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G28, etc.) or
coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92, etc.), cancel the scaling mode.
3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and
disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the
block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool
movement by tool compensation. See the description of tool compensation.
4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled.
Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in
unexpected movement.
NOTE
1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the
following results:
(1) Circular command ......................................... Direction of rotation is reversed.
(2) Tool radius compensation ............................. Offset direction is reversed.
(3) Coordinate system rotation ........................... Rotation angle is reversed.
Example
Sample program of a scaling in each axis
O1;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I750 J250; (× 0.75 in the X direction, × 0.25 in the Y direction)
G00 G90 X60.0 Y50.0;
G01 X120.0 F100;
G01 Y90;
G01 X60;
G01 Y50;
G50;
M30;
Y axis
90
Programmed figure
80
(60,50) Scaled figure
30
20
10
Scaling center
X axis
75
100
20 95 120
Fig. 16.1 (f) Program example of scaling in each axis
- 165 -
16.2 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or

G150,G151,G152)
Overview
When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction
control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 16.2
(a)).
Normal direction
Programmed tool path
Center of the arc
Fig. 16.2 (a) Sample Movement of the tool
Format
G41.1 (G151) ; Normal direction control, left
G42.1 (G152) ; Normal direction control, right
G40.1 (G150) ; Cancel normal direction control
The normal direction control, left (G41.1) command is used when the workpiece is on the
right side of the tool as viewed while you are looking into the tool’s way.
Once either G41.1 or G42.1 is issued, normal direction control is enabled (normal
direction control mode).
Issuing G40.1 cancels the normal direction control mode.
Explanation
- Angle of the C axis
When viewed from the center of rotation around the C-axis, the angular displacement about the C-axis is
determined as shown in Fig. 16.2 (b). The positive side of the X-axis is assumed to be 0, the positive side
of the Y-axis is 90°, the negative side of the X-axis is 180°, and the negative side of the Y-axis is 270°.
- 166 -
+Y
90°
180° 0° +X
Center of rotation 270°
Fig. 16.2 (b) Angle of the C axis
- Normal direction control of the C axis

When the cancel mode is switched to the normal direction control mode, the C-axis becomes
perpendicular to the tool path at the beginning of the block containing G41.1 or G42.1.
In the interface between blocks in the normal direction control mode, a command to move the tool is
automatically inserted so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path at the beginning of each
block. The tool is first oriented so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool path specified by the
move command, then it is moved along the X- and Y axes.
In the tool compensation mode, the tool is oriented so that the C-axis becomes perpendicular to the tool
path created after compensation.
In single-block operation, the tool is not stopped between a command for rotation of the tool and a
command for movement along the X- and Y-axes. A single-block stop always occurs after the tool is
moved along the X- and Y-axes.
S：Single block stop point

C-axis direction
S

The C-axis is controlled
to become perpendicular
to the tool path at the
beginning of the block
S
S
Fig. 16.2 (c) Point at which a single-block stop occurs in the normal direction control mode
Before circular interpolation is started, the C-axis is rotated so that the C-axis becomes normal to the arc
at the start point. During circular interpolation, the tool is controlled so that the C-axis is always
perpendicular to the tool path determined by circular interpolation.
- 167 -
The tool is controlled so

that the C-axis is always
normal to the tool path
determined by circular
interpolation.
Center of the arc
Fig. 16.2 (d) Normal direction control of the circular interpolation
NOTE
During normal direction control, the C axis always rotates through an angle less
than 180 deg. I.e., it rotates in whichever direction provides the shorter route.
- C axis feedrate
Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed at the feedrate set in parameter
5481. If dry run mode is on at that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along
the X-and Y-axes in rapid traverse (G00) mode, the rapid traverse feedrate is applied.
The feedrate of the C axis during circular interpolation is defined by the following formula.
Amount of movement of the C axis (deg)
F× (deg/min)
Length of arc (mm or inch)
F : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) specified by the corresponding block of the arc

Amount of movement of the C axis : The difference in angles at the beginning and the end of the block.
NOTE
If the feedrate of the C axis exceeds the maximum cutting speed of the C axis
specified to parameter No. 1430, the feedrate of each of the other axes is
clamped to keep the feedrate of the C axis below the maximum cutting speed of
the C axis.
- Normal direction control axis

A C-axis to which normal-direction control is applied can be assigned to any axis with parameter No.
5480.
- Angle for which figure insertion is ignored

When the rotation angle to be inserted, calculated by normal-direction control, is smaller than the value
set with parameter No. 5482, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted for the axis to which
normal-direction control is applied. This ignored rotation angle is added to the next rotation angle to be
inserted, the total angle being subject to the same check at the next block.
If an angle of 360 degrees or more is specified, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted.
If an angle of 180 degrees or more is specified in a block other than that for circular interpolation with a
C-axis rotation angle of 180 degrees or more, the corresponding rotation block is not inserted.
- 168 -
- Movement for which arc insertion is ignored

Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with the same normal direction as that
of the preceding block.
• Linear movement
When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value, machining for block N2 is performed
using the same direction as that for block N1.
Tool center path
N2
N3
N1
Distance
• Circular movement
When the diameter of block N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value, machining for block N2
is performed using the same normal direction as that for block N1. And control as compensation
along the circular arc is not performed.
Tool center path
N2
N3
Diameter
N1
NOTE
1 Do not specify any command to the C axis during normal direction control. Any
command specified at this time is ignored.
2 Before processing starts, it is necessary to correlate the workpiece coordinate of
the C axis with the actual position of the C axis on the machine using the
coordinate system setting (G92) or the like.
3 Helical cutting cannot be specified in the normal direction control mode.
4 Normal direction control cannot be performed by the G53 move command.
5 The C-axis must be a rotation axis.
- T and C commands during normal–line direction control

(1) During normal–line direction control, the T command results in an alarm (PS4606) except when the
TANDC parameter (bit 7 of parameter No. 16263) is 1, in which case a single–tool command is
valid.
(2) During normal–line direction control, the C command is ignored. A C–axis offset command is also
ignored if a C–axis index tool is specified.
(3) A C–axis offset command specified before a normal–line direction control mode is entered remains
valid after the normal–line direction control mode is entered.
(4) Usually, a check is made on T commands during normal–line direction control. If a T command is
already specified when a normal–line direction control mode is entered, a check is not made on the T
command. Normal–line direction control is carried out no matter what tool type is specified.
Under normal direction control, a punch press shears a sheet while holding the sheet and moving the tool
with interpolation. The cutting of an arc should be programmed as follows: Linear positioning is
- 169 -
performed with the C–axis set in the direction normal to the tangential direction at the start point of the
arc; The sheet is held by the PF signal; A C–axis normal–direction movement is made with circular
interpolation. The program should be created so that an arc and a straight line are connected by a tangent
even in the normal direction control mode.
(Example)
G92 X1525 Y1525;
G90;
T201;
G70 X500 Y200; Positioning for creating a tangent at the start point of the arc
G41.1; (G70: Positioning and press off command)
G00 X500 Y500; Positioning to the arc start point with the C–axis set in the
G03 X421.14 Y459.171–50F5000; direction normal to the direction of the arc tangent
G40.1;
16.3 OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)

When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 16.3 (a)).
To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates an offset vector with a length equal
to the radius of the tool (start-up). The offset vector is perpendicular to the tool path. The tail of the vector
is on the workpiece side and the head positions to the center of the tool.
If a linear interpolation or circular interpolation command is specified after start-up, the tool path can be
shifted by the length of the offset vector during machining.
To return the tool to the start point at the end of machining, cancel the tool compensation mode.
Cutter
compensation
cancel
Start-up
Fig. 16.3 (a) Outline of tool compensation
- 170 -
Format
- Start up (tool compensation start)
G00(or G01)G41(or G42) IP_D_;
G41 : Tool compensation left (Group 07)
G42 : Tool compensation right (Group 07)
IP_ : Command for axis movement
D_ : Code for specifying as the tool compensation value (1 to 32) (D code)
- Tool compensation cancel (offset mode cancel)

G40 IP_;
G40 : Tool compensation cancel (Group 07)
(Offset mode cancel)
IP_ : Command for axis movement
- Selection of the offset plane

Offset plane Command for plane selection IP_
XpYp G17 ; Xp_Yp_
ZpXp G18 ; Xp_Zp_
YpZp G19 ; Yp_Zp_
Explanation
- Offset cancel mode
At the beginning when power is applied the control is in the cancel mode. In the cancel mode, the vector
is always 0, and the tool center path coincides with the programmed path.
- Start-up
When a tool compensation command (G41 or G42, D code other than 0) is specified in the offset cancel
mode, the CNC enters the offset mode.
Moving the tool with this command is called start-up.
Specify positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) for start-up.
If circular interpolation (G02, G03) is specified, alarm PS0034 occurs.
For the start-up and subsequent blocks, the CNC prereads as many blocks as the number of preread
blocks set in the parameter No. 19625.
- Offset mode
In the offset mode, compensation is accomplished by positioning (G00), linear interpolation (G01), or
circular interpolation (G02, G03).
If three or more blocks that move the tool cannot be read in offset mode, the tool may make either an
excessive or insufficient cut.
If the offset plane is switched in the offset mode, alarm PS0037 occurs and the tool is stopped.
- Offset mode cancel

In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the
CNC enters the offset cancel mode, and the action of this block is called the offset cancel.
1. G40 has been commanded.
2. 0 has been commanded as the offset number for tool compensation (D code).
When performing offset cancel, circular arc commands (G02 and G03) are not available. If these
commands are specified, an PS0034 is generated and the tool stops. In the offset cancel, the control
executes the instructions in that block and the block in the tool compensation buffer.
In the meantime, in the case of a single block mode, after reading one block, the control executes it and
stops. By pushing the cycle start button once more, one block is executed without reading the next block.
- 171 -
Then the control is in the cancel mode, and normally, the block to be executed next will be stored in the
buffer register and the next block is not read into the buffer for tool compensation.
Start up
(G41/G42)
Offset cancel mode Offset mode
Offset mode cancel
(G40/D0)
Fig. 16.3 (b) Changing the offset mode
- Change of the tool compensation value

In general, the tool compensation value shall be changed in the cancel mode, when changing tools. If the
tool compensation value is changed in offset mode, the vector at the end point of the block is calculated
for the new tool compensation value.
Calculated from the cutter Calculated from the cutter
compensation value in the block N6 compensation value in the block N7
N7
N6 N8
Programmed path
Fig. 16.3 (c) Changing the tool compensation value
- Positive/negative tool compensation value and tool center path

If the compensation value is negative (–), distribution is made for a figure in which G41's and G42's are
all replaced with each other on the program. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside
of the workpiece, it will pass around the inside, and vice versa.
Fig. 16.3 (d) shows one example.
Generally, the compensation value is programmed to be positive (+).
When a tool path is programmed as in <1>, if the compensation value is made negative (–), the tool center
moves as in <2>, and vice versa. Consequently, the same program permits cutting both male and female
shapes, and any gap between them can be adjusted by the selection of the compensation value.
Applicable if start-up and cancel is A type. (See the descriptions about the start-up of tool compensation.)
<1> <2>
Tool center path
Programmed path
Fig. 16.3 (d) Tool center paths when positive and negative tool
compensation values are specified
- 172 -
- Tool compensation value setting

Assign a tool compensation values to the D codes on the MDI panel.
NOTE
The tool compensation value for which the D code corresponds to 0 always
means 0.
It is not possible to set the tool compensation value corresponding to D0.
- Valid compensation value range

The valid range of values that can be set as a compensation value is either of the following, depending on
the bit 0 (OFA) of parameter No. 5042.
Valid compensation range (metric input)

OFA Range
1 ±9999.99 mm
0 ±9999.999 mm
Valid compensation range (inch input)

OFA Range
1 ±999.999 inch
0 ±999.9999 inch
The compensation value corresponding to offset No. 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set the
compensation value corresponding to offset No. 0.
- Offset vector
The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the tool compensation value assigned by D
code. It is calculated inside the control unit, and its direction is up-dated in accordance with the progress
of the tool in each block.
The offset vector is deleted by reset.
- Specifying a tool compensation value

Specify a tool compensation value with a number assigned to it. The number consists of 1 to 32 after
address D (D code).
The D code is valid until another D code is specified.
- Plane selection and vector

Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and G19, (G codes for plane
selection). This plane is called the offset plane.
Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is not in the specified plane. The
programmed values are used as they are.
In simultaneous 3 axes control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.
The offset plane is changed during the offset cancel mode. If it is performed during the offset mode, an
PS0037 is displayed and the machine is stopped.
- 173 -
Example
250R
N5
C1(700,1300)
P4(500,1150) P5(900,1150)
C3 (-150,1150) C2 (1550,1150)
650R 650R
N4 N6
N3 N7
P2 P3(450,900) P6(950,900) P7
(250,900) (1150,900)
N8
N2
P9(700,650)
P1 P8
(250,550) (1150,550)
N10 N9
Y axis
N1
N11
X axis Unit : mm
Start point
G17 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;............................. Specifies absolute coordinates.

The tool is positioned at the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
N1 G90 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0 ; .... Starts tool compensation (start-up).
The tool is shifted to the left of the programmed path by the
distance specified in D07.
In other words the tool path is shifted by the radius of the
tool (offset mode) because D07 is set to 15 beforehand (the
radius of the tool is 15 mm).
N2 G01 Y900.0 F150 ;................................ Specifies machining from P1 to P2.
N3 X450.0 ;................................................. Specifies machining from P2 to P3.
N4 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 R650.0 ; ............. Specifies machining from P3 to P4.
N5 G02 X900.0 R-250.0 ;........................... Specifies machining from P4 to P5.
N6 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 R650.0 ; ............... Specifies machining from P5 to P6.
N7 G01 X1150.0 ;....................................... Specifies machining from P6 to P7.
N8 Y550.0 ;................................................. Specifies machining from P7 to P8.
N9 X700.0 Y650.0 ;.................................... Specifies machining from P8 to P9.
N10 X250.0 Y550.0 ;.................................... Specifies machining from P9 to P1.
N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0 ; .................................. Cancels the offset mode.
The tool is returned to the start point (X0, Y0, Z0).
- 174 -
16.4 DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION
16.4.1 Overview
The following explanation focuses on the tool compensation.
- Inner side and outer side

When an angle of intersection of the tool paths specified with move commands for two blocks on the
workpiece side is over 180°, it is referred to as "inner side." When the angle is between 0° and 180°, it is
referred to as "outer side."
Inner side Outer side
Programmed path
Workpiece α
Workpiece α
Programmed path
180°≤a 0°≤α<180°
- Outer corner connection method

If the tool moves around an outer corner in tool compensation mode, it is possible to specify whether to
connect compensation vectors with linear interpolation or with circular interpolation, using bit 2 (CCC) of
parameter No. 19607.
<1> Linear connection type [Bit <2> Circular connection type

2 (CCC) of parameter No. [Bit 2 (CCC) of
19607 = 0] parameter No. 19607 = 1]
Vectors are connected with linear Vectors are connected with circular
interpolation. interpolation.
- Cancel mode
The tool compensation enters the cancel mode under the following conditions. (The system may not enter
the cancel mode depending on the machine tool.)
<1> Immediately after the power is turned on
<2> When the key on the MDI panel is pushed
<3> After a program is forced to end by executing M02 or M30
<4> After the tool compensation cancel command (G40) is exercised
- 175 -
In the cancel mode, the compensation vector is set to zero, and the path of the center of tool coincides
with the programmed path. A program must end in cancel mode. If it ends in the tool compensation mode,
the tool cannot be positioned at the end point, and the tool stops at a location the compensation vector
length away from the end point.
NOTE
The operation to be performed when a reset operation is performed during tool
compensation differs depending on bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402.
- If CLR is 0
The system enters the reset state. G41/G42 are retained as the modal code
of group 07, but to perform tool compensation, an offset number (D code)
must be specified again.
- If CLR is 1
The system enters the clear state. The modal code of group 07 is G40, and to
perform tool compensation again, G41/G42 and an offset number (D code)
must be specified.
- Start-up
When a block which satisfies all the following conditions is executed in cancel mode, the CNC enters the
tool compensation mode. Control during this operation is called start-up.
<1> G41 or G42 is contained in the block, or has been specified to place the CNC in the tool
compensation mode.
<2> 0 < compensation number of tool compensation ≤ maximum compensation number
<3> Positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01) mode
<4> A compensation plane axis command with a travel distance of 0 (except start-up type C) is specified.
If start-up is specified in circular interpolation (G02, G03) mode, PS0034 will occur.
In a start-up block, workpiece coordinate system switching (G54 to G59) cannot be specified.
As a start-up operation, one of the three types A, B, and C can be selected by setting bit 0 (SUP) of
parameter No. 5003 and bit 1 (SUV) of parameter No. 5003 appropriately. The operation to be performed
if the tool moves around an inner side is of single type only.
Table 16.4.1 (a) Start-up/cancel operation

SUV SUP Type Operation
0 0 Type A A compensation vector is output, which is vertical to the block
subsequent to the start-up block and the block preceding the cancel
block.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
0 1 Type B A compensation vector is output, which is vertical to the start-up

block and the cancel block. An intersection vector is also output.
Intersection
Tool center path
Programmed path
G41
N2
N1
- 176 -

1 0 Type C When the start-up block and the cancel block are blocks without tool
1 movement, the tool moves by the tool radius compensation value in
the direction vertical to the block subsequent to the start-up block
and the block preceding the cancel block.
Intersection
Tool center path
Programmed N3 Programmed path

path
G41 N2
N1
For a block with tool movement, the tool follows the SUP setting: If it
is 0, type A is assumed and if 1, type B is assumed.
- Reading input commands in tool compensation mode

In tool compensation mode, input commands are read from usually three blocks and up to eight blocks
depending on the setting of parameter No. 19625 to perform intersection calculation or an interference
check, described later, regardless of whether the blocks are with or without tool movement, until a cancel
command is received.
To perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two blocks with tool movement. To
perform an interference check, it is necessary to read at least three blocks with tool movement.
As the setting of parameter No. 19625, that is, the number of blocks to read, increases, it is possible to
predict overcutting (interference) for up to more subsequent commands. Increases in blocks to read and
analyze, however, cause reading and analysis to take more time.
- Ending (canceling) tool compensation

In tool compensation mode, tool compensation is canceled if a block that satisfies at least either one of the
following conditions is executed:
<1> G40 is specified.
<2> D00 is specified as the compensation number of tool compensation.
If tool compensation cancel is to be performed, it must not be by a circular command (G02, G03).
Otherwise, an alarm will occur.
For a cancel operation, one of three types, A, B, and C, can be selected by appropriately setting bit 0
(SUP) of parameter No. 5003 and bit 1 (SUV) of parameter No. 5003. The operation to be performed if
the tool turns around the inside is of a single type.
- 177 -
- Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000

When bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000 is set to 1, a single block stop can be performed in a block
created internally for tool compensation.
Use this parameter to check a program including tool compensation.
Stop point in a block created internally
N1 Single block stop point

S
N1
N2
N2
N1 Cutter center path
Programmed path
NOTE
When an M code (auxiliary function), S code, T code (tool function), or B code
(second auxiliary function) is specified in the N1 block in the figure above, FIN is
not accepted if the tool stops at the stop point in a block created internally
(excluding the single block stop point).
- Meaning of symbols
The following symbols are used in subsequent figures:
• S indicates a position at which a single block is executed once.
• SS indicates a position at which a single block is executed twice.
• SSS indicates a position at which a single block is executed three times.
• L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line.
• C indicates that the tool moves along an arc.
• r indicates the tool radius compensation value.
• An intersection is a position at which the programmed paths of two blocks intersect with each other
after they are shifted by r.
• indicates the center of the tool.
- 178 -
16.4.2 Tool Movement in Start-up

When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below (start-up):
Explanation
- Tool movement around an inner side of a corner (180°≤ α)
Linear→Linear
α
Workpiece
Programmed path
r
G42
S L Tool center path

L
Start point
Linear→Circular
α
Work-
G42 r piece
S
C
L
Start point Tool center path Programmed path
- 179 -
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an obtuse angle (90°≤ α<180°)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear Start point
G42
α Workpiece
L Programmed path
r

Type
A Linear→Circular
Start point
G42
α
r Work
Work-
piece
piece
S
C
Tool center path Programmed path

Linear→Linear
(Linear connection type) Start point
G42
α
Workpiece
L
Programmed path
r
r
L
S Tool center path
Intersection L
Type
Linear→Circular
B (Linear connection type)
Start point
G42
α
r Work-
r piece
S
C
L L
Intersection
- 180 -

(Circular
connection type) G42
α Workpiece
L
Programmed path
r
r
C S L Tool center path
Type
B Linear→Circular Start point
(Circular
α
r Workpiece
r
C S
C
- 181 -
- Cases in which the start-up block is a block with tool movement and the tool
moves around the outside at an acute angle (α<90°)
Tool path in start-up has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
G42
L Workpiece
α
Programmed path
r

Type
A Linear→Circular Start point
G42
L
α
r Work-
piece
S C
Tool center path

Programmed path
Linear→Linear
(Linear connection type) Start point
L
G42
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
S L L Tool center path

Type
Linear→Circular
B (Linear connection type) Start point
L
G42
r α
L
r
L
Work-
S L C piece
Tool center path
Programmed path
- 182 -

(Circular L
connection type)
G42 Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C

Type
B Linear→Circular Start point
(Circular L
connection type)
G42
r α
r Work-
C piece
S C
Tool center path

Programmed path
- Tool movement around the outside linear → linear at an acute angle less than
1 degree (α<1°)
S Tool center path
L
r L
Programmed path
(G41)
G41 Less than 1 deg Start point
- A block without tool movement specified at start-up

For type A and B
If the command is specified at start-up, the offset vector is not created. The tool does not operate in a
start-up block.
SS
N7
S
N6 N8
r
Tool center path
G40 … ;
N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N9
N7 G41 X0 ;
N8 Y-100.0 ;
N9 Y-100.0 X100.0 ;
Programmed path
- 183 -
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical to the block with tool movement
subsequent to the start-up block.
Without tool
movement
L
α
S Programmed path
L
Tool center path
S
Intersection
16.4.3 Tool Movement in Offset Mode

In offset mode, compensation is performed even for positioning commands, not to speak of linear and
circular interpolations. To perform intersection calculation, it is necessary to read at least two blocks with
tool movement. If, therefore, two or more blocks with tool movement cannot be read in offset mode
because blocks without tool movement, such as auxiliary function independent commands and dwell, are
specified in succession, excessive or insufficient cutting may occur because intersection calculation fails.
Assuming the number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined by parameter No. 19625, to
be N and the number of commands in those N blocks without tool movement that have been read to be M,
the condition under which intersection calculation is possible is (N - 2) ≥ M. For example, if the
maximum number of blocks to read in offset mode is 5, intersection calculation is possible even if up to
three blocks without tool movement are specified.
NOTE
The condition necessary for an interference check, described later, differs from
this condition. For details, see the explanation of the interference check.
If a G or M code in which buffering is suppressed is specified, no subsequent commands can be read

before that block is executed, regardless of the setting of parameter No. 19625. Excessive or insufficient
cutting may, therefore, occur because of an intersection calculation failure.
- 184 -
- Tool movement around the inside of a corner (180°≤ α)

Linear→Linear
α Workpiece
Programmed path

Intersection
L
Linear→Circular
α
Work-
piece
Intersection
S C
L
Circular→Linear
α Workpiece
Programmed path
L
S Tool center path
C Intersection
Circular→Circular α
Work-
Intersection piece
S
C C
Tool center Programmed path

path
- 185 -
- Tool movement around the inside (α<1°) with an abnormally long vector,
linear → linear
Intersection
r Tool center path
Programmed path
r
r
S
Intersection
Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, the reader should infer in the same
procedure.
- 186 -
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an obtuse angle (90°≤α<180°)

Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type)
α Workpiece
L Programmed path
S
Intersection L Tool center path
Linear→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
Work-
L r
piece
S L C
Intersection
Circular→Linear
(Linear connection type)
α Workpiece
r Programmed path
C
L
Intersection S L Tool center path
6
Circular→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
α
Programmed path
r Work-
r piece
C
Tool center L
path S L
Intersection C
- 187 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
α Workpiece
L
r Programmed path
r
C L
S Tool center path
Linear→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
r
Work-
L r
piece
C
S C
Circular→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
α Workpiece
Programmed path
r
r
C
C L
S Tool center path
Circular→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
α
Programmed path
r Work-
r piece
C
Tool center path
C
S C
- 188 -
- Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle (α<90°)

Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type) L
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
Linear→Circular
(Linear
connection type) L
r α
L
Work-
r piece
L
S L
C Programmed path
Tool center path
Circular→Linear
(Linear
connection type)
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L
Circular→Circular
(Linear
connection type)
r α
L
Work-
r piece
L
S L C
- 189 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type) L
Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C
Linear→Circular
(Circular
connection type) L
r α
r Work-
piece
C
S
C
Programmed path
Tool center path
Circular→Linear
(Circular
connection type)
Workpiece
r α
Programmed path
r
C
Circular→Circular
(Circular
connection type)
r α
Work-
r piece
C
S
C
- 190 -
- When it is exceptional
End point for the arc is not on the arc
If the end of a line leading to an arc is not on the arc, the system assumes that the tool compensation has
been executed with respect to an imaginary circle that has the same center as the arc and passes the
specified end point. Based on this assumption, the system creates a vector and carries out compensation.
The same description applies to tool movement between two circular paths.
End the arc Work-

piece
Imaginary circle
Programmed path
r r
Tool center path
r C L
L
Center of the arc L S
There is no inner intersection

If the tool radius compensation value is sufficiently small, the two circular tool center paths made after
compensation intersect at a position (P). Intersection P may not occur if an excessively large value is
specified for tool radius compensation. When this is predicted, PS0033 occurs at the end of the previous
block and the tool is stopped.
For example, tool center paths along arcs A and B intersect at P when a sufficiently small value is
specified for tool radius compensation. If an excessively large value is specified, this intersection does not
occur.
Alarm occurs and the tool stops
When the tool radius
compensation value is large
When the tool radius compensation

value is small
Center of the arc B Center of the arc A

Programmed path
r r
Arc A P Arc B
- 191 -
- When the center of the arc is identical with the start point or the end point
If the center of the arc is identical with the start point or end point, PS0041 is displayed, and the tool will
stop at the start point of the preceding block of the arc.
(G41)
N5 G91 G01 X50.0 ;
Tool center path N6 X50.0 ;
N7 G02 X100.0 I0 J0 ;
Alarm is displayed and the
N8 G01 Y-100.0 ;
tool stops
N5 N6 N7
Programmed path
N8
- Change in the offset direction in the offset mode

The offset direction is decided by G codes (G41 and G42) for tool radius compensation and the sign of
the compensation value as follows.
Sign of compensation
+ –
G code
G41 Left side offset Right side offset
G42 Right side offset Left side offset
The offset direction can be changed in the offset mode. If the offset direction is changed in a block, a
vector is generated at the intersection of the tool center path of that block and the tool center path of a
preceding block.
However, the change is not available in the start-up block and the block following it.
- 192 -
- Tool center path with an intersection

Linear→Linear
Workpiece S
G42 L
Intersection
r
Programmed path r
L G41
Tool center path Workpiece
Linear→Circular
r
Workpiece
G41
G42
Programmed path
r
Workpiece
Intersection
Tool center path L S
Circular→Linear
Workpiece
G42
Programmed path
r
Tool center path
C L
S
Intersection r
G41
Workpiece
Circular→Circular
C
Workpiece
G42
r
Programmed path
r
G41
Tool center path Workpiece

S
Intersection
- 193 -
- Tool center path without an intersection

When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 and G42, if intersection with the
offset path is not required, the vector normal to block B is created at the start point of block B.
Linear→Linear
S L
Workpiece r
Programmed path G42 (G42)
G41
A B
L Workpiece
r
Tool center path

L S
G42
Programmed path
G41
r
Tool center path

L S
Linear→Circular Intersection
S
L
L
Tool center path A

(G41) G42 B
(G41) r
Programmed path
Circular→Circular
C
An arc whose end position

r
is not on the arc
C
G41
Programmed path (G42)
(G42)
r r
C L S L
Center Center
Tool center path
- 194 -
- The length of tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation. However, when G41 and G42 are
changed, or when a G40 was commanded with address I, J, and K this situation can occur.
The tool compensation is not performed with more than one circle circumference: an arc is formed from
P1 to P2 as shown. Depending on the circumstances, an alarm may be displayed due to the "Interference
Check" described later. To execute a circle with more than one circumference, the circle must be
specified in segments.
N5 N7
P1 P2
(G42)
N5 G01 G91 X500.0 Y-700.0 ;
N6
N6 G41 G02 J-500.0 ;
N7 G42 G01 X500.0 Y700.0 ;
- Tool compensation G code in the offset mode

The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction in the previous block,
irrespective of machining inner or outer side, by commanding the tool compensation G code (G41, G42)
in the offset mode, independently. If this code is specified in a circular command, correct circular motion
will not be obtained.
When the direction of offset is expected to be changed by the command of tool compensation G code
(G41, G42), see "Change in the offset direction in the offset mode".
Linear→Linear
A block specified by G42

G42 mode
r L
L
Tool center path S Intersection
Circular→Linear
A block specified by G42
r
G42 mode L
C
S Intersection
Programmed path
- 195 -
- Command canceling the offset vector temporarily

During offset mode, if G92 (workpiece coordinate system setting) or G52 (local coordinate system
setting) is commanded, the offset vector is temporarily cancelled and thereafter offset mode is
automatically restored.
In this case, without movement of offset cancel, the tool moves directly from the intersecting point to the
commanded point where offset vector is canceled.
Also when restored to offset mode, the tool moves directly to the intersecting point.
S S
L L
L L
Tool center path

N6 S
N5 N8
Programmed path N7
G92 block
(G41)
N5 G01 X700.0 Y300.0 ;
N6 X600.0 Y-300.0 ;
N7 G92 X200.0 Y100.0 ;
N8 G01 X800.0 Y400.0 ;
Before specifying G28 (reference position return), and G53 (machine coordinate system selection)
commands, cancel offset mode, using G40. If an attempt is made to specify any of the commands in offset
mode, the offset vector temporarily disappears.
- If I, J, and K are specified in a G00/G01 mode block

At the start of tool compensation or in that mode, by specifying I, J, and K in a positioning mode (G00) or
linear interpolation mode (G01) block, it is possible to set the compensation vector at the end point of that
block in the direction vertical to that specified by I, J, and K. This makes it possible to change the
compensation direction intentionally.
IJ type vector (XY plane)

The following explains the compensation vector (IJ type vector) to be created on the XY compensation
plane (G17 mode). (The same explanation applies to the KI type vector on the G18 plane and the JK type
vector on the G19 plane.) It is assumed that the compensation vector (IJ type vector) is the vector with a
size equal to the compensation value and vertical to the direction specified by I and J, without performing
intersection calculation on the programmed path. I and J can be specified both at the start of tool
compensation and in that mode. If they are specified at the start of compensation, any start-up type set in
the appropriate parameter will be invalid, and an IJ type vector is assumed.
Offset vector direction

In G41 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an imaginary tool movement direction, and
an offset vector is created vertical to that direction and on the left side.
Compensation vector
I, J, K
In G42 mode, the direction specified by I, J, and K is assumed an imaginary tool movement direction, and
an offset vector is created vertical to that direction and on the right side.
- 196 -
I, J, K
Compensation vector
Example
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with
tool movement)
N50
N40
(G40) N30
N10 G91 G41 X100.0 Y100.0 N20 N60
I1 D1 ;
N20 G04 X1000 ; D1 Tool center path
N30 G01 F1000 ; N10
N40 S300 ;
N50 M50 ; Programmed path
N60 X150. ;
Note) In N10, a vector is

specified with a size of D1
in the direction vertical to
the X axis, using I1.
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation

(without tool movement)
(G40)
N30
N10 G41 I1 D1 ;
N20 G91 X100. Y100. ; Tool nose radius
N30 X150. ; center path
N20
Note) In N10, a vector is Programmed path
specified with a size
of D1 in the direction
N10
vertical to the X axis,
using I1. D1
- 197 -
If I and J are specified at the start of compensation (with

tool movement)
(G17 G41 G91 D1)

N10 G00 X150. J50. ;
N20 G02 I50. ; (I,J)
N30 G00 X-150. ; <2>
Note) In N10, a vector is specified N10

with a size of D1 in the N20
N30 <1>
direction vertical to the Y axis,
using J50. <2>
<1> IJ type vector

<2> Vector determined with
intersection calculation
Tool center path
Programmed path
Path determined with

intersection calculation
If I and J are specified in a block without tool movement in

compensation mode
N30
N40 Tool center
S S path
Start-up/cancel type C
N20
N50
N10 G41 D1 G01 F1000 ; (I, J)
N20 G91 X100. Y100. ;
N30 I10. ; Programmed path
N40 X150. ;
N50 G40 ;
N10
D1
Limitation
If an IJ type vector is specified, tool interference may occur due to that vector alone, depending on the
direction. If this occurs, no interference alarm will occur, or no interference avoidance will be performed.
Overcutting may, therefore, result.
Overcutting
(I, J)
Start-up/cancel
Type C N40
N30
Programmed
N10 G42 D1 F1000 ; path N20
N20 G91 X100. ;
N30 X100. Y-100. I10. ; N10 N50
N40 X100. Y-100. ;
N50 G40 ;
Tool center path
- 198 -
- A block without tool movement

The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the tool will not move even if tool
compensation is effected.
M05 ; : M code output
S21 ; : S code output
G04 X10.0 ; : Dwell
G22 X100000 ; : Machining area setting
G10 L11 P01 R10.0 ; : Tool compensation value setting/changing
(G17) Z200.0 ; : Move command not included in the offset plane.
G90 ;, O10 ;, N20 ; : G, O, and N codes only
G91 X0 ; : Move distance is zero.
- A block without tool movement specified in offset mode

Unless the number of blocks without movement consecutively specified is more than N-2 blocks (where
N is the number of blocks to read in offset mode (parameter No. 19625)) in offset mode, the vector and
the tool center path will be as usual. This block is executed at the single block stop point.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 N8
N7 G04 X10.0 ; Programmed path
N8 X100.0 ;
N6
L
Tool center path
SS
L Block N7 is executed here.
In offset mode, the number of blocks without movement consecutively specified must not exceed N-2
(where N is the number of blocks to read in offset mode (parameter No. 19625). If commanded, a vector
whose length is equal to the offset value is produced in a normal direction to tool motion in earlier block,
so overcutting may result.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7,N8 N9
N7 S21 ; Programmed path
N8 G04 X10.0 ;
N9 X100.0 ;
(No. of blocks to read in N6
offset mode = 3) L Tool center path
SSS
L Blocks N7 and N8 are executed here.
- If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified

If an M/G code that suppresses buffering is specified in offset mode, it is no longer possible to read and
analyze subsequent blocks regardless of the number of blocks to read in offset mode, which is determined
by parameter No. 19625. Then, intersection calculation and a interference check, described later, are no
longer possible. If this occurs, overcutting may occur because a vertical vector is output in the
immediately preceding block.
- 199 -
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is not specified
(G42) N6
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ; Programmed path
N6 X40.0 ;
:
: N5
L
Tool center path
S
L Intersection
If an M code (M50) that suppresses buffering is specified
(G42) N6 N7
Programmed path
N5 G91 G01 X40.0 Y40.0 ;
N6 M50 ;
N7 X40.0 ;
: N5
: L
Tool center path
SS
L Block N6 is executed here.
- Workpiece coordinate system or local coordinate system command in the

offset mode
If the local coordinate system (G52) or workpiece coordinate system (G92) is specified in the tool
compensation (G41 or G42) mode, G52 or G92 is assumed to be a buffering masked G code. The
subsequent blocks are not executed until the G52 or G92 block is executed.
- Corner movement
When two or more offset vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one
vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement.
If these vectors almost coincide with each other (the distance of corner movement between the vectors is
judged short due to the setting of parameter No. 5010), corner movement is not performed. In this case,
the vector to the single block stop point takes precedence and remains, while other vectors are ignored.
This makes it possible to ignore the very small movements arising from performing tool compensation,
thereby preventing velocity changes due to interruption of buffering.
This vector is ignored, if ΔVX

ΔVX ≤ ΔVlimit and
ΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit
ΔVY
r S
r The vector to the single block

stop point remains even if
N1
N1 ΔVX ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY ≤ Vlimit.
Tool center path
N2
Programmed path
ΔVlimit is determined with the setting of parameter (No. 5010).
- 200 -
If the vectors are not judged to almost coincide (therefore, are not erased), movement to turn around the
corner is performed. The corner movement that precedes the single block stop point belongs to the
previous block, while the corner movement that succeeds the single block stop point belongs to the latter
block.
This move belongs to block N6, thus, the feedrate is equal
to that in block N6.
S
This move belongs to block N7, thus, the
feedrate is equal to that in block N7.
N6 N7
However, if the path of the next block is semicircular or more, the above function is not performed.
The reason for this is as follows:
P2 P3 P4 P5
N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ;
N6 G02 J-600.0 ;
N7 G01 X150.0 Y-200.0 ; P1 P6
N8 G40 X150.0 Y-200.0 ;
N5 N7
N4 N8
Programmed path N6
Tool center path
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:

P1 → P2 → P3 → (Circle) → P4 → P5 → P6
But if the distance between P2 and P3 is negligible, the point P3 is ignored. Therefore, the tool path is as
follows:
P2 → P 4
Namely, circle cutting by the block N6 is ignored.
- Interruption of manual operation

For manual operation during the offset mode, see Section III-3.5 "Manual Absolute ON."
- 201 -
16.4.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel

Explanation
- If the cancel block is a block with tool movement, and the tool moves around
the inside (180° ≤ α)
Linear→Linear
Workpiece α
Programmed path
r
G40

L
Circular→Linear
α
Work-
piece r
G40
S
C
L
Programmed path Tool center path
- 202 -
the outside at an obtuse angle (90° ≤ α < 180°)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear
G40
Workpiece α
Programmed path L

Type
A Circular→Linear
G40
α
L
Work-
piece r
S
C
Linear→Linear
(Linear
Workpiece α
L
Programmed path
r
Tool center path Intersection L

S
Type
B Circular→Linear
(Linear
α
Work- r
piece r
S
C Inter- L
section
L
- 203 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
Workpiece α
L
Programmed path
r
C S
Tool center path
Type
B Circular→Linear
(Circular
α
Work- r
piece r
C S
C
- 204 -
the outside at an acute angle (α<90°)
Tool path has two types A and B, and they are selected by bit 0 (SUP) of parameter No. 5003.
Linear→Linear
G40
Workpiece L α
Programmed path G42

r

Type
A Circular→Linear
G40
L α
Work- r
piece G42
C S
Tool center path

Programmed path
Linear→Linear
(Linear
connection type) L
Workpiece G40
α r
L
Programmed path
r S
L
Tool center path L L
Type
B
Circular→Linear
(Linear L
connection type)
α r
L
S
Work- r
piece
L
C L
Tool center path

Programmed path
- 205 -
Linear→Linear
(Circular
connection type) L
S
Workpiece G40
α r
Programmed path
r C
Tool center path L

Type
B
Circular→Linear
(Circular L
connection type) S
α r
C
Work- r
piece
C S
Tool center path

Programmed path
the outside at an acute angle of 1 degree or less in a linear → linear manner
(α≤1°)
S Tool center path
L
r L
(G42) Programmed path
1° or less
G40
- A block without tool movement specified together with offset cancel

For types A and B
In the block preceding the cancel block, a vector is created with a size equal to the tool radius
compensation value in the vertical direction. The tool does not operate in the cancel block. The
remaining vectors are canceled with the next move command.
N6 G91 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 N8
N7 G40 ;
N8 X130.0 ;
N6
L
Programmed path SS
L
Tool center path
- 206 -
For type C
The tool shifts by the compensation value in the direction vertical to the block preceding the cancel
block.
Programmed path
Tool center path

S
G40 (without
movement)
L
L
S
- Block containing G40 and I_J_K_

The previous block contains G41 or G42
If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_ are specified, the system assumes
that the path is programmed as a path from the end point determined by the former block to a vector
determined by (I,J), (I,K), or (J,K). The direction of compensation in the former block is inherited.
N1 (G42 mode) ; In the N1 block, the tool nose radius center moves
towards P.
N2 G40 Xa Yb I_ J_ ; In the N2 block, the tool nose radius moves towards E.
E(a, b)
(I, J)
G40
N2
P Tool center path
r S N1
r
(G42) Programamed path
Workpiece
In this case, note that the CNC obtains an intersection of the tool path irrespective of whether inner or
outer side machining is specified.
E
G40
P
Tool center path
S
r
Programmed path
(G42)
r
(I, J)
When an intersection is not obtainable, the tool comes to the normal position to the previous block at the
end of the previous block.
- 207 -
P G40 Tool center path

S
r
(G42) Programmed path
(I, J)
r
- Length of the tool center path larger than the circumference of a circle
In the Example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more than once. It moves along the arc
from P1 to P2. The interference check function described below may raise an alarm.
To make the tool trace a circle more than once, program two or more arcs.
P1
Tool center path
P2
Programmed path N7
N5
(I, J) N6
(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X100.0 ;
N6 G02 J-60.0 ;
N7 G40 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 I-10.0 J-10.0 ;
16.4.5 Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius Compensation

Explanation
- Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
Since the tool compensation forces the tool center path to move in the reverse of the programmed
direction, overcutting will result. In this case an alarm is displayed and the CNC stops at the start of the
block.
An alarm is displayed and
Tool center path the operation stops
Programmed path
Workpiece
Overcutting if the operation would not stop

Fig. 16.4.5 (a) Machining a groove smaller than the diameter of the tool
- 208 -
- Machining a step smaller than the tool radius

For a figure in which a workpiece step is specified with an arc, the tool center path will be as shown in
Fig. 16.4.5 (b). If the step is smaller than the tool radius, the tool center path usually compensated as
shown in Fig. 16.4.5 (c) may be in the direction opposite to the programmed path. In this case, the first
vector is ignored, and the tool moves linearly to the second vector position. The single block operation is
stopped at this point. If the machining is not in the single block mode, the cycle operation is continued.
If the step is of linear, no alarm will be generated and cut correctly. However uncut part will remain.
Single block stop point
S
Tool center path
Programmed path
Workpiece Arc center
Fig. 16.4.5 (b) Machining a step larger than the tool radius
Single block stop point
Linear movement S Tool center path
Path to be taken if the Programmed path

vector is not ignored
The first vector is ignored
Arc center
Workpiece Arc
An overcutting will result if the first vector is not ignored.

However, tool moves linearly.
Fig. 16.4.5 (c) Machining a step smaller than the tool radius
- Starting compensation and cutting along the Z-axis

It is usually used such a method that the tool is moved along the Z axis after the tool compensation
(normally XY plane) is effected at some distance from the workpiece at the start of the machining. In the
case above, if it is desired to divide the motion along the Z axis into rapid traverse and cutting feed,
follow the procedure below.
Let us consider the program in the Fig. 16.4.5 (d), assuming the number of blocks to read in tool
compensation mode (parameter No. 19625) to be 3.
- 209 -
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;

N3 G01 Z-300.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation Workpiece
N6
N3:Move command in Z axis (one block)
N1
Fig. 16.4.5 (d)
In the program example in the Fig. 16.4.5 (d), when executing block N1, blocks N3 and N6 are also
entered into the buffer storage, and by the relationship among them the correct compensation is
performed as in the Fig. 16.4.5 (d).
Then, suppose that the block N3 (move command in Z axis) is divided into N3 and N5 in the Fig. 16.4.5
(e).
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ;
N3 G01 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation
Workpiece
N6
N3, N5:Move command for the Z axis (two blocks)
N1
Fig. 16.4.5 (e)
At this time, because the number of blocks to read is 3, blocks up to N5 can be read at the start of N1
compensation, but block N6 cannot be read. As a result, compensation is performed only on the basis of
the information in block N1, and a vertical vector is created at the end of the compensation start block.
Usually, therefore, overcutting will result as shown in the Fig. 16.4.5 (e).
In such a case, it is possible to prevent overcutting by specifying a command with the exactly the same
direction as the advance direction immediately before movement along the Z axis beforehand, after the
tool is moved along the Z axis using the above rule.
- 210 -
N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y400.0 D1 ;

N2 Y100.0 ;
N3 Z-250.0 ;
N5 G01 Z-50.0 F100 ;
N6 Y1000.0 F200 ;
After compensation N6
Workpiece
N3, N5 : Move command for the Z axis (2 blocks)
N2
N1
Fig. 16.4.5 (f)
As the block with sequence N2 has the move command in the same direction as that of the block with
sequence N6, the correct compensation is performed.
Alternatively, it is possible to prevent overcutting in the same way by specifying an IJ type vector with
the same direction as the advance direction in the start-up block, as in N1 G91 G00 G41 X500. Y500. I0
J1 D1;, after the tool has moved along the Z axis.
16.4.6 Interference Check

Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check function checks for tool overcutting in
advance. However, all interference cannot be checked by this function. The interference check is
performed even if overcutting does not occur.
Explanation
- Condition under which an interference check is possible
To perform an interference check, it is necessary to read at least three blocks with tool movement. If,
therefore, three or more blocks with tool movement cannot be read in offset mode because blocks without
tool movement, such as independent auxiliary function and dwell, are specified in succession, excessive
or insufficient cutting may occur because an interference check fails. Assuming the number of blocks to
read in offset mode, which is determined by parameter No. 19625, to be N and the number of commands
in those N blocks without tool movement that have been read to be M, the condition under which an
interference check is possible is
(N - 3) ≥ M.
For example, if the maximum number of blocks to read in offset mode is 8, an interference check is
possible even if up to five blocks without tool movement are specified. In this case, three adjacent blocks
can be checked for interference, but any subsequent interference that may occur cannot be detected.
- Interference check method

Two interference check methods are available, direction check and circular angle check. Bit 1 (CNC) of
parameter No. 5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008 are used to specify whether to enable these
methods.
- 211 -
Parameter CNV Parameter CNC Operation

An interference check is enabled, and a direction check and a circular
0 0
angle check can be performed.
An interference check is enabled, and only a circular angle check is
0 1
performed.
1 – An interference check is disabled.
NOTE
There are no settings for performing a direction check only.
- Interference reference <1> (direction check)

Assuming the number of blocks to read during tool compensation to be N, a check is first performed on
the compensation vector group calculated in (block 1 - block 2) to be output this time and the
compensation vector group calculated in (block N-1 - block N); if they intersect, they are judged to
interfere. If no interference is found, a check is performed sequentially in the direction toward the
compensation vector group to be output this time, as follows:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-2 - block N-1)

(Block 1 - block 2) and (block N-3 - block N-2)
:
:
(Block 1 - block 2) and (block 2 - block 3)
Even if multiple number of compensation vector groups are generated, a check is performed on all pairs.
The judgment method is as follows: For a check on the compensation vector group in (block 1 - block 2)
and those in (block N-1 - block N), the direction vector from the specified (end point of block 1) to the
(end point of block N-1) is compared with the direction vector from the (point resulting from adding the
compensation vector to be checked to the end of block 1) to the (point resulting from adding the
compensation vector to be checked to the end of block N-1), and if the direction is 90o or greater or 270o
or less, they are judged to intersect and interfere. This is called a direction check.
Example of interference standard <1>

(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 7 end-point vector)
The direction differs by
180°.
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 2 Block 7
Block 1 Block 8
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
- 212 -
Example of interference standard <1>
(If the block 1 end-point vector intersects with the block 2 end-point vector)
Programmed path
Tool center path
Block 1
The directions of
these two paths are
different (180°).
Block 2
- Interference reference <2> (circular angle check)

In a check on three adjacent blocks, that is, a check on the compensation vector group calculated on
(block 1 - block 2) and the compensation vector group calculated on (block 2 - block 3), if block 2 is
circular, a check is performed on the circular angle between the start and end points of the programmed
path and the circular angle of the start and end point of the post-compensation path, in addition to
direction check <1>. If the difference is 180o or greater, the blocks are judged to interfere. This is called a
circular angle check.
Example of <2> (if block 2 is circular and the start point of the post-compensation arc coincide with the
end point)
Block 3
Block 1
Programmed path
Block 2
- 213 -
- When interference is assumed although actual interference does not occur

<1> Depression which is smaller than the tool radius compensation value
Programmed
path Tool center path
Stopped
A C
B
There is no actual interference, but since the direction programmed in block B is opposite to that of
the path after the tool compensation, the tool stops and an alarm is displayed.
<2> Groove which is smaller than the tool radius compensation value
Programmed
path Tool center path
Stopped
A
B C
Like <1>, an alarm is displayed because of the interference as the direction is reverse in block B.
16.4.6.1 Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to

occur
The operation to be performed if an interference check judges that an interference (due to overcutting)
occurs can be either of the following two, depending on the setting of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No.
19607.
Parameter CAV Function Operation

Interference check alarm An alarm stop occurs before the execution of the block in
0
function which overcutting (interference) occurs.
Interference check avoidance The tool path is changed so that overcutting (interference)
1
function does not occur, and processing continues.
- 214 -
16.4.6.2 Interference check alarm function

- Interference other than those between adjacent three blocks
If the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 7 are judged to interfere as shown in
the Fig. 16.4.6.2 (a), an alarm will occur before the execution of block 1 so that the tool stops. In this case,
the vectors will not be erased.
Stopped
Tool center path

Block 1
Block 8
Programmed path
Block 2 Block 7
Block 3
Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
Fig. 16.4.6.2 (a)
- Interference between adjacent three blocks

If an interference is judged to occur between adjacent three blocks, the interfering vector, as well as any
vectors existing inside of it, is erased, and a path is created to connect the remaining vectors. In the
Example shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.2 (b), V2 and V5 interfere, so that V2 and V5 are erased, so are V3 and
V4, which are inside of them, and V1 is connected to V6. The operation during this time is linear
interpolation.
V6
V1
V2
V5
V4
V3
Tool center path
Programmed path
Fig. 16.4.6.2 (b)
If, after vector erasure, the last single vector still interferes, or if there is only one vector at the beginning
and it interferes, an alarm will occur immediately after the start of the previous block (end point for a
single block) and the tool stops. In the Example shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.2 (c), V2 and V3 interfere, but,
even after erasure, an alarm will occur because the final vectors V1 and V4 interfere.
- 215 -
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
V4 V1
V3 V2
Fig. 16.4.6.2 (c)
16.4.6.3 Interference check avoidance function

Overview
If a command is specified which satisfies the condition under which the interference check alarm function
generates an interference alarm, this function suppresses the generation of the interference alarm, but
causes a new compensation vector to be calculated as a path for avoiding interference, thereby continuing
machining. For the path for avoiding interference, insufficient cutting occurs in comparison with the
programmed path. In addition, depending on the specified figure, no path for avoiding interference can be
determined or the path for avoiding interference may be judged dangerous. In such a case, an alarm stop
will occur. For this reason, it is not always possible to avoid interference for all commands.
- Interference avoidance method

Let us consider a case in which an interference occurs between the compensation vector between (block 1
- block 2) and the compensation vector between (block N-1 - block N). The direction vector from the end
point of block 1 to the end point of block N-1 is called a gap vector. At this time, a post-compensation
intersection vector between (block 1 - gap vector) and a post-compensation intersection vector between
(gap vector - block N) is determined, and a path connecting them is created.
- 216 -
Post-compensation intersection vector Post-compensation intersection vector

between block 1 and gap vector between gap vector and block 8
Movement o f block 7
Post-compensation
path Gap vector
Block 1
Block 8
Block 2
Block 7
Programmed path
Block 3 Block 6
Block 4 Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 6 coincide with the end
point of block 1. Thus, after compensation, blocks 2 to 6 will be blocks without tool
movement.
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (a)
If the post-compensation intersection vector of (block 1 - gap vector) and the post-compensation
intersection vector of (gap vector - block N) further intersect, vector erasure is first performed in the same
way as in "Interference between adjacent three blocks". If the last vectors that remains still intersects, the
post-compensation intersection vector of (block 1 - block N) is re-calculated.
- 217 -
Post-compensation path
Re-calculation
Programmed path
Block 1 Block 8
Block 1 Block 8
Post-compensati
Post-compensation on intersection
Post-compensation vector between
intersection vector
intersection between block 1 and
between block 1
gap vector and block 8 block 8
and gap vector
Block 2 Gap vector
Block 7 Block 2 Block 7

Block 6

Block 5
In this case, the post-compensation end points of blocks 2 to 7

coincide with the end point of block 1. Thus, after compensation,
blocks 2 to 7 will be blocks without tool movement.
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (b)
If the tool radius compensation value is greater than the radius of the specified arc as shown in the Fig.
16.4.6.3 (c), and a command is specified which results in compensation with respect to the inside of the
arc, interference is avoided by performing intersection calculation with an arc command being assumed a
linear one. In this case, avoided vectors are connected with linear interpolation.
Post-compensation path
Programmed path
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (c)

- 218 -
- If no interference avoidance vector exists

If the parallel pocket shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.3 (d) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and
the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the post-compensation path of block 1 and the
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are parallel to each other, no
intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (d)
If the circular pocket shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.3 (e) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and
the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, because blocks 1 and 3 are circular, no
post-compensation intersection exists. In this case, an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and
the tool will stop, as in the previous example.
Stopped
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (e)
- 219 -
- If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference

If the acute-angle pocket shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.3 (f) is to be machined, the end-point vector of block 1
and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is made to calculate, as an
post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, the movement direction of the post-avoidance path
extremely differs from the previously specified direction. If the post-avoidance path extremely differs
from that of the original command (90° or greater or 270° or less), interference avoidance operation is
judged dangerous; an alarm will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Post-compensation intersection of
blocks 1 and 3
Tool center path Stopped
Programmed path
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (f)
If a pocket in which the bottom is wider than the top, such as that shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.3 (g), is to be
machined, the end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and
an attempt is made to calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the
post-compensation path of block 1 and the post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, the relation
between blocks 1 and 3 is judged an outer one, the post-avoidance path results in overcutting as compared
with the original command. In such a case, interference avoidance operation is judge dangerous; an alarm
will occur immediately before block 1 and the tool will stop.
Stopped
Tool center path
Programmed path
Block 1 Block 3
Block 2
Post-compensation intersection
of blocks 1 and 3
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (g)
- If further interference with an interference avoidance vector occurs

If the pocket shown in the Fig. 16.4.6.3 (h) is to be machined, if the number of blocks to read is 3, the
end-point vector of block 1 and the end-point vector of block 2 are judged to interfere, and an attempt is
made to calculate, as an interference avoidance vector, the intersection vector of the post-compensation
path of block 1 and the post-compensation path of block 3. In this case, however, the end-point vector of
block 3 that is to be calculated next further interferes with the previous interference avoidance vector.
- 220 -
If a further interference occurs to the interference avoidance vector once created and output, the
movement in the block will not be performed; an alarm will occur immediately before the block and the
tool will stop.
The intersection vectors of
blocks 3 and 4 further
Tool center path interfere.
Programmed path Sropped
Block 5
Block 4
Block 1
Block 3
Block 2
Fig. 16.4.6.3 (h)
NOTE
1 For "If it is judged dangerous to avoid interference" and "If further interference
with an interference avoidance vector occurs", by setting bit 6 (NAA) of
parameter No. 19607 appropriately, it is possible to suppress an alarm to
continue machining. For "If no interference avoidance vector exists", however, it
is not possible to avoid an alarm regardless of the setting of this parameter.
2 If a single block stop occurs during interference avoidance operation, and an
operation is performed which differs from the original movement, such as
manual intervention, MDI intervention, tool radius compensation value change,
intersection calculation is performed with a new path. If such an operation is
performed, therefore, an interference may occur again although interference
avoidance has been performed once.
- 221 -
16.4.7 Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI

Explanation
- MDI operation
During MDI operation, that is, if a program command is specified in MDI mode in the reset state to make
a cycle start, intersection calculation is performed for compensation in the same way as in memory
operation/DNC operation. Compensation is performed in the same way if a subprogram is called from
program memory due to MDI operation.
Subprogram in program memory

MDI command
G90 G00 X0 Y0 ;
O9000 ;
M98 P9000 ;
N1 G41 G17 G91 G01 X10. Y10. D1 ;
M02 ;
N2 Y15. ;
N3 X15. ;
N4 Y-15. ;
N5 X-15. ;
N6 G40 X-10. Y-10. ;
M99 ;
N3
N2 N4
N1
N5
N6
- 222 -
- MDI intervention
If MDI intervention is performed, that is, if a single block stop is performed to enter the automatic
operation stop state in the middle of memory operation, DNC operation, and the like, and a program
command is specified in MDI mode to make a cycle start, tool compensation does not perform
intersection calculation, retaining the last compensation vector before the intervention.
MEM mode MDI intervention
(G41) G91 X30. ;

N2 G91 X10. Y30. ; X20. Y20. ;
N3 X10. Y-30. ; X20. Y-20. ;
N4 X40. ;
Last compensation vector
MDI intervention Retained compensation vector
N2 N3
N4
Program command
16.5 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF

COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING VALUES
FROM THE PROGRAM (G10)
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI panel or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified
after address D in a program.
The value is used for tool compensation.
Explanation
- Tool compensation memory A
The compensation value for tool compensation (for D code) is to be set in the compensation memory
Setting example
Compensation number Compensation value
001 10.000
002 20.000
003 100.000
: :
- Unit and valid range of tool compensation values

A unit and valid range of tool offset values can be selected from the following by parameter setting:
- 223 -
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (metric input)

OFA Unit Valid range
1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
Unit and valid range of tool compensation values (inch input)

OFA Unit Valid range
1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
- Number of tool compensation data items

The number of tool compensation data is 32.
Format
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
P_ : Tool compensation number
R_ : Tool compensation value
By specifying G10, a tool compensation value can be set or modified.

When G10 is specified by absolute input (G90), the specified value is used as the new tool compensation
value.
When incremental input (G91) is used, a specified value added to the tool compensation value currently
set is used as the new tool compensation value.
NOTE
1 Address R follows the increment system for tool offset values.
2 If L is omitted for compatibility with the conventional CNC format, or L1 is
specified, the same operation as when L11 is specified is performed.
16.6 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)

A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a
program using a rotation command when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the
programmed position on the machine. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical shapes
in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the program
can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of rotation
X
0
Fig. 16.6 (a) Coordinate system rotation
- 224 -
Format
⎧G17 ⎫
⎪ ⎪ Start rotation of a coordinate system.
⎨G18 ⎬ G84 α_β_ R_ ;
⎪G19 ⎪
⎩ ⎭
: Coordinate system rotation mode
: (The coordinate system is rotated.)
G85 ; Coordinate system rotation cancel command
G17 (G18 or G19) : Select the plane in which contains the figure to be rotated.
α_β_ : Absolute programming for two of the X_, Y_, and Z_ axes that correspond to the
current plane selected by a command (G17, G18, or G19). The command
specifies the coordinates of the center of rotation for the values specified
subsequent to G84
R_ : Angular displacement with a positive value indicates counter clockwise rotation.
Bit 0 (RIN) of parameter No. 5400 selects whether the specified angular
displacement is always considered an absolute value or is considered an
absolute or incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or G91).
Least input increment : 0.001 deg
Valid data range : -360,000 to 360,000
Angle of rotation R (incremental value)

Center of Angle of rotation (absolute value)
rotation
(α, β)
X
Fig. 16.6 (b) Coordinate system rotation
NOTE
When a decimal fraction is used to specify angular displacement (R_), the 1's
digit corresponds to degree units.
Explanation
- G code for selecting a plane: G17,G18 or G19
The G code for selecting a plane (G17,G18,or G19) can be specified before the block containing the G
code for coordinate system rotation (G84). G17, G18 or G19 must not be designated in the mode of
coordinate system rotation.
- Incremental programming in coordinate system rotation mode

The center of rotation for an incremental programming programmed after G84 but before an absolute
programming is the tool position when G84 was programmed (Fig. 16.6 (c)).
- Center of rotation
When α_β_ is not programmed, the tool position when G84 was programmed is assumed as the center of
rotation.
- 225 -
- Angular displacement
When R_ is not specified, the value specified in parameter No. 5410 is assumed as the angular
displacement.
To specify angular displacement (R_) in 0.00001 degrees (one hundred-thousandth), set bit 0 (FRD) of
parameter No. 11630 to 1. In this case, angular displacement R is specified within the range of -36000000
to 36000000.
- Coordinate system rotation cancel command

The G code used to cancel coordinate system rotation (G85) may be specified in a block in which another
command is specified.
- Tool compensation
Tool radius compensation, and other compensation operations are executed after the coordinate system is
rotated.
Limitation
- Commands related to reference position return and the coordinate system
In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30,
etc.) and those for changing the coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92, etc.) must not be specified. If any
of these G codes is necessary, specify it only after canceling coordinate system rotation mode.
- Incremental programming
The first move command after the coordinate system rotation cancel command (G85) must be specified
with absolute values. If an incremental move command is specified, correct movement will not be
performed.
- Note on the specification of one axis in coordinate system rotation

With the parameter below, a move position in the case where one axis is specified in the absolute mode
can selected. If two axes are specified, a movement is made to the same position, regardless of the setting
of the parameter.
Bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600

If one axis is specified in the absolute mode when the coordinate system rotation mode is set:
0: The specified position is first calculated in the coordinate system before rotation then the
coordinate system is rotated.
1: The coordinate system is first rotated then a movement is made to the specified position in the
rotated coordinate system. (FS0i-PC compatible specification)
This parameter changes the handling of coordinates on axes not specified, so that a position to be
reached by movement changes.
(Example)
G90 G0 X0 Y0
G01 X10. Y10. F6000
G84 X0 Y0 R45.... ...... Specifies coordinate system rotation.
Y14.142....................... Specifies one axis ....(1)
G85
When bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600= 0:

The specified position is calculated in the coordinate system (XY) before rotation then the
coordinate system is rotated. So, with the specification of (1), the position on the unspecified X
axis is X10, and the specified position is (X10,Y14.142). Next, a movement is made to the
move position (X-2.929,Y17.071) obtained by 45° rotation.
- 226 -
Y
Move position
: X-2.929,Y17.071
Specified position
: X10,Y14.142
●
Coordinates before
Tool path
45° coordinate system rotation is
specified
: X10,Y10
When bit 5 (AX1) of parameter No. 11600= 1:

With the specification of (1), coordinates (X10,Y10) before coordinate system rotation are
converted to coordinates (X'14.142,Y'0) in the coordinate system (X'Y') obtained by 45°
rotation. Next, a movement is made to the specified position (X'14.142,Y'14.142), that is, the
move position (X0,Y20).
Specified position
: X'14.142,Y'14.142
Y Move position
: X0,Y20
X'
Tool path
Coordinates before coordinate
system rotation is specified
Y' : X10,Y10
● Conversion
Coordinates in rotated coordinate
system
45° : X'14.142,Y'0
X
- 227 -
Explanation
- Absolute/Incremental position commands
N1 G92 X-500.0 Y-500.0 G69 G17 ;
N2 G84 X700.0 Y300.0 R60.0 ;
N3 G90 G01 X0 Y0 F200 ;
(G91X500.0Y500.0)
N4 G91 X1000.0 ;
N5 G02 Y1000.0 R1000.0 ;
N6 G03 X-1000.0 I-500.0 J-500.0 ;
N7 G01 Y-1000.0 ;
N8 G85 G90 X-500.0 Y-500.0 M02 ;
Tool path when the incremental

command is designated in the N3
block (in parenthesis) Originally programmed tool path
Center of rotation
(700.0,300.0)
(0,0)
60º
(-500.0,-500.0)
Tool path after rotation
Fig. 16.6 (c) Absolute/incremental programming during coordinate system rotation
- Tool compensation and coordinate system rotation

It is possible to specify G84 and G85 in cutter compensation mode.
The rotation plane must coincide with the plane of cutter compensation.
N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ;

N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 F1000 D01 ;
N3 G84 R-30000 ;
N4 G91 X2000 ;
N5 G03 Y1000 R1000 J500 ;
N6 G01 X-2000 ;
N7 Y-1000 ;
N8 G85 G40 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ; Programmed shape before
coordinate system rotation
Programmed shape
after coordinate
system rotation
30°
(0, 0)
Tool path
Fig. 16.6 (d) Tool compensation and coordinate system rotation
- 228 -
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If a coordinate system rotation command is executed in the scaling mode (G51 mode), the coordinate
value (a, b) of the rotation center will also be scaled, but not the rotation angle (R). When a move
command is issued, the scaling is applied first and then the coordinates are rotated.
A coordinate system rotation command (G84) should not be issued in tool compensation mode (G41,
G42) on scaling mode (G51). The coordinate system rotation command should always be specified prior
to setting the tool compensation mode.
1. When the system is not in tool compensation mode, specify the commands in the following order :
G51 ; Scaling mode start
G84 ; Coordinate system rotation mode start
:
G85 ; Coordinate system rotation mode cancel
G50 ; Scaling mode cancel
2. When the system is in tool compensation, specify the commands in the following order (Fig. 16.6
(e)) :
(tool compensation cancel)
G51 ; Scaling mode start
G84 ; Coordinate system rotation start
:
G41 ; Tool compensation mode start
:
G92 X0 Y0 ;
G51 X300.0 Y150.0 P500 ;
G84 X200.0 Y100.0 R45.0 ;
G01 X400.0 Y100.0 ;
Y100.0 ;
X-200.0 ;
Y-100.0 ;
X200.0 ;
When scaling and coordinate

system rotation are applied
When only coordinate system
Y rotation is applied
When only scaling is

applied
200.0
Cutting program
100.0
X
0 200.0 400.0
Fig. 16.6 (e) Scaling and coordinate system rotation in tool compensation mode
- 229 -
- Repetitive commands for coordinate system rotation

It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall subprogram by changing the angle.
Sample program for when parameter RIN (No. 5400#0) is set to 1.
The specified angular displancement is treated as an absolute or
incremental value depending on the specified G code (G90 or G91).
G92 X0 Y0 G85 G17;

G01 F200 H01 ;
M98 P2100 ;
M98 P072200 ;
G00 G90 X0 Y0 M30 ;
O 2200 G84 X0 Y0 G91 R45.0 ;

G90 M98 P2100 ;
M99 ;
O 2100 G90 G01 G42 X0 Y-10.0 ;

X4.142 ;
X7.071 Y-7.071 ;
G40 ;
M99 ;
Programmed path
(0, 0)
When offset is
applied
(0, -10.0)
Subprogram
Fig. 16.6 (f) Coordinate system rotation command
- 230 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 17.CUSTOM MACRO
17 CUSTOM MACRO
Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows
use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of
general programs such as pocketing and user-defined canned cycles.
A machining program can call a custom macro with a simple command, just like a subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
: 02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ;
G65 P9010 R50.0 L2 ; :
: :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Chapter 17, "CUSTOM MACRO", consists of the following sections:
17.1 VARIABLES ..................................................................................................................................231

17.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES..................................................................................................................236
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION..................................................................................256
17.4 READING PARAMETERS ...........................................................................................................262
17.5 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS ....................................................................263
17.6 BRANCH AND REPETITION ......................................................................................................264
17.7 MACRO CALL...............................................................................................................................268
17.8 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS......................................................................................281
17.9 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS ......................................................................283
17.10 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM MACROS .........................................283
17.11 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS ..........................................................................................284
17.12 RESTRICTIONS ............................................................................................................................287
17.13 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO ...............................................................................288
17.1 VARIABLES
An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value;
examples are G100 X100.0.
With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or using a variable number. When a
variable number is used, the variable value can be changed by a program or using operations on the MDI
panel.
#1=#2+100 ;
G01 X#1 F300 ;
Explanation
- Variable representation
When specifying a variable, specify a number sign (#) followed by a variable number.
#i (i = 1, 2, 3, 4, .....)
[Example] #5
#109
- 231 -
17.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
#1005
A variable can also be represented as follows using <expression> described in the section about
arithmetic and logic operation commands.
#[<expression>]
[Example] #[#100]
#[#1001-1]
#[#6/2]
Variable #i shown in the following can be replaced with a variable of #[<expression>].
- Types of variables
Variables can be classified as local variables, common variables, and system variables according to the
variable number. Each of those variables has its own usage and characteristics. Read-only system
constants are also provided.
- Range of variable values

Local and common variables can have a value in the following ranges. If the result of calculation exceeds
the range, an alarm PS0111, “OVERFLOW :FLOATING” is issued.
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 0
Maximum value: approx. ±10308
Minimum value: approx. ±10-308
Numeric data handled by a custom macro conforms to the IEEE standard and is handled as a
double-precision real number. An error resulting from operation depends on the precision.
When bit 0 (F16) of parameter No.6008 = 1
Maximum value: approx. ±1047
Minimum value: approx. ±10-29
- Local variable (#1-#33)

A local variable is a variable that is used locally in a macro. That is, local variable #i used by a macro
called at a certain time is different from that used by a macro called at another time, regardless of whether
the two macros are the same. Therefore, for example, when macro A calls macro B during multiple calls
or the like, it is impossible for macro B to corrupt a local variable used by macro A by erroneously using
the variable.
A local variable is used to pass arguments. For information on correspondence between arguments and
addresses, see the section about macro calling commands. The initial state of a local variable to which no
arguments are passed is <null> and the user can freely use the variable. The attribute of a local variable is
READ/WRITE enabled.
- Common variable (#100-#199, #500-#999)

A common variable is shared among the main program, subprograms called by the main program, and
macros while a local variable is used locally in a macro. That is, #i used by a macro is the same as that used
by another macro. Therefore, a resultant common variable obtained by using a macro can be used by another
macro. The attribute of a common variable is basically READ/WRITE enabled. However, the common
variable can be protected (its attribute is set to READ only) by specifying its variable number using
parameters No.6031 and No.6032. A common variable can be freely used by the user even when its usage is
not defined by the system.
The 600 common variables #100 to #199 and #500 to #999 can be used. The variables #100 to #199 are
cleared during power-down, but the variables #500 to #999 are retained during power-down.
- Write protection of a common variable

Multiple common variables (#500 to #999) can be protected (their attributes are set to READ only) by
setting variable numbers in parameters No.6031 and No.6032. This protection is enabled for both
Input/All Clear by MDI on the macro screen and write operation by a macro program. If the NC program
specifies WRITE operation (used in the left side) for a common program in the set range, an alarm
PS0116, “WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE” is issued.
- 232 -
- System variable
A variable whose usage does not vary in the system. The attribute of a system variable is READ only,
WRITE only, or READ/WRITE enabled depending on the nature of a system variable.
- System constant
A system constant can be referenced as with a variable even though its value is fixed. The attribute of a
system constant is READ only.
- Omission of the decimal point

When a variable value is defined in a program, the decimal point can be omitted.
[Example] When #1 = 123; is defined, the actual value of variable #1 is 123.000.
- Referencing variables
The value following an address can be replaced with a variable. When programming as <address>#i or
<address>-#i, the variable value or the complement of it is used as the specified value of the address.
[Example] F#33 is the same as F1.5 when #33 = 1.5.
Z-#18 is the same as Z-20.0 when #18 = 20.0.
G#130 is the same as G3 when #130 = 3.0.
A variable cannot be referenced using address/, :, or O and N.
[Example] Programming such as O#27 or N#1 is not allowed.
n (n = 1 to 9) in the optional block skip /n cannot be a variable.
A variable number cannot be specified by a direct variable.
[Example] When replacing 5 in #5 with #30, specify #[#30] instead of ##30. No values
exceeding the maximum allowable value for each address can be specified.
[Example] When #140 = 12345.0, G#140 exceeds the maximum allowable value.
When a variable is used as address data, the variable is automatically rounded off
to the number of significant figures of each address or less.
[Example] For a machine with an increment system of 1/1000 mm (IS-B), when #1 = 12.3456,
G00 X#1; becomes G00 X12.346;.
If <expression>, described later, is used, the value following an address can be
replaced with <expression>.
<address>[<expression>] or <address>-[<expression>]
The program code shown above indicates the value of <expression> or the
complement of the value is used as an address value. Note that a constant with no
decimal point, enclosed in brackets ([ ]), is assumed to have a decimal point at the
end.
[Example] X[#24+#18*COS[#1]]
Z-[#18+#26]
- Undefined variable
When the value of a variable is not defined, such a variable is referred to as a "null" variable. Variables
#0 and #3100 are always null variables. They cannot be written to, but they can be read.
(a) Quotation
When an undefined variable is quoted, the address itself is also ignored.
Original command G90 X100 Y#1
Equivalent command when #1 = <null> G90 X100
Equivalent command when #1 = 0 G90 X100 Y0
(b) Definition/replacement, addition, multiplication

When a local variable or common variable is directly replaced with <null>, the result is <null>.
When a system variable is directly replaced with <null> or the result of calculation including <null>
is replaced, a variable value of 0 is assumed.
- 233 -
Original expression (local variable) #2=#1 #2=#1*5 #2=#1+#1

Replacement result (when #1 = <null>) <null> 0 0
Replacement result (when #1 = 0) 0 0 0
Original expression (common variable) #100=#1 #100=#1*5 #100=#1+#1

Replacement result
<null> 0 0
(when #1 = <null>)
Original expression (system variable) #2001=#1 #2001=#1*5 #2001=#1+#1

Replacement result (when #1 = <null>) 0 0 0
(c) Comparison
<null> differs from 0 only for EQ and NE.
<null> is equal to 0 for GE, GT, LE, and LT.
• When <null> is assigned to #1
Conditional
#1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0
expression
Not Not
Evaluation Established Established Established Established
established established
result (true) (true) (true) (true)
(false) (false)
• When 0 is assigned to #1
Conditional
#1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0
expression
Not Not Not Not
Evaluation Established Established
established established established established
result (true) (true)
(false) (false) (false) (false)
- Specifying a system variable (constant) by its name

A system variable (constant) is specified by its variable number, but it can also be specified by its
predetermined system variable (constant) name. A system variable (constant) name begins with an
underscore (_), followed by up to seven uppercase letters, numerals, or underscores. For axis-dependent
variables (such as coordinates) or variables having a lot of data of similar types (such as tool
compensation), subscript [n] (n: integer) can be used to specify values. In this case, n can be specified in
<expression> format (calculation format).
The command format must be specified in [#system-variable-name] format, as shown below.
[#_DATE]
[Example]
[#_DATE]=20040117 ; : 2004.01.17 is assigned to #3011 (year month date).
[#_TIME]=161705 ; : 16:17:05 is assigned to #3012 (time minute second).
#101=[#_ABSMT[1]] ; : #5021 (machine coordinate value of the 1st axis) is read off
and assigned to #101.
#102=[#_ABSKP[#500*2]] ; : #506x (skip position of [#500*2]th axis) is read off and
assigned to #102.
If a value other than an integer is specified for subscript n, a variable value is referenced, assuming that
the fractional portion is rounded off.
[Example]
[#_ABSIO[1.4999999]] : This value is assumed to be [#_ABSIO[1]], that is, #5001.
[#_ABSIO[1.5000000]] : This value is assumed to be [#_ABSIO[2]], that is, #5002.
- 234 -
NOTE
1 When the specified variable name is not registered, an alarm PS1098, “NO
VARIABLE NAME” is issued.
2 When a negative or other invalid subscript is specified, an alarm PS1099,
“ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ]” is issued.
- System constant #0, #3100-#3102 (Attribute: R)

Constants used as fixed values in the system can be used as system variables. Such constants are called
system constants. The system constants provided are shown below.
Constant number Constant name Description
#0, #3100 [#_EMPTY] Null
#3101 [#_PI] Circular constant π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] Base of natural logarithm e = 2.71828182845904523536
- Specifying a common variable by its name

Specifying a variable name set by the SETVN command described later allows reading from or writing to
a common variable.
The command must be specified in the form [#common-variable-name] such as [#VAR500].
[Example]
X[#POS1] Y[#POS2] ; : Specifying a position by the variable name
[#POS1] = #100+#101 ; : Executing a assignment statement by the variable name
#[100+[#ABS]] = 500 ; : Same as above (by a variable number)
#500 = [1000+[#POS2]*10] ; : Reading a variable by a variable name
- Setting and specifying the name of a common variable (SETVN)

For the 50 common variables, #500 to #549, a name of up to eight characters can be specified by using a
command as shown below:
SETVN n [VAR500, VAR501, VAR502,......] ;
“n” represents the starting number of a common variable for which the name is specified.
VAR500 is the variable name of variable n, VAR501 is the variable name of variable n+1, and VAR502
is the variable name of variable number n+2, and so on. Each string is delimited by a comma (,). All
codes that can be used as meaningful information in a program except control in, control out, [, ], EOB,
EOR, and : (colon in a program number) can be used. However, each name must begin with an
alphabetical character. Variable names are not cleared on switch-off.
Specifying a set variable name allows reading from or writing to the common variable. The command
must be specified in the form [#common-variable-name] such as [#VAR500].
[Example] SETVN 510[ TOOL_NO, WORK_NO, COUNTER1, COUNTER2 ];
The command above names the variables as follows.
Variable Name
#510 TOOL_NO
#511 WORK_NO
#512 COUNTER1
#513 COUNTER2
The names specified by the command can be used in a program. For example, when 10 is assigned to
#510, the expression [#TOOL_NO]=10; can be used instead #510=10;.
NOTE
If the same name was specified for different common variables, only the variable
which has the smaller variable number can be referenced with the specified
name.
- 235 -
17.2 SYSTEM VARIABLES

System variables can be used to read and write internal CNC data such as tool compensation values and
current position data. System variables are essential for automation and general-purpose program
development.
List of system variables and constants

n represents a subscript.
R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and indicate read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled,
respectively.
- Interface signals
System System
variable variable Attribute Description
number name
#1000-#1031 [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI000-UI031
NOTE) Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31).
#1032-#1035 [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (LONG), UI000-UI031/ UI100-UI131/
UI200-UI231/UI300-UI331
NOTE) Subscript n (0-3): 0 = UI000-UI031, 1 = UI100-UI131,
2 = UI200-231, 3 = UI300-UI331
#1100-#1131 [#_UO[n]] R/W Interface output signals (BIT), UO000-UO031
NOTE) Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31).
#1132-#1135 [#_UOL[n]] R/W Interface output signals (LONG), UO000-UO031/
UO100-UO131/UO200-UO231/UO300-UO331
NOTE) Subscript n (0-3): 0 = UO000-UO031, 1 = UO100-UO131,
2 = UO200-231, 3 = UO300-UO331
- Tool compensation value

Tool compensation memory A
System variable System
number variable name
#2001-#2032 [#_OFS[n]] R/W Tool compensation value
Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 32).
#10001-#10032 The numbers to the left can also be used.
Note) Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 32).
- Automatic operation or the like

number name
#3000 [#_ALM] W Macro alarm
#3001 [#_CLOCK1] R/W Clock 1 (ms)
#3002 [#_CLOCK2] R/W Clock 2 (hr)
#3003 [#_CNTL1] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single block stop.
Enable or disable the waiting of the auxiliary function
completion signal.
#3003 bit 0 [#_M_SBK] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single block stop.
#3003 bit 1 [#_M_FIN] R/W Enable or disable waiting for the auxiliary function completion
signal.
#3004 [#_CNTL2] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
Enable or disable feedrate override.
Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3004 bit 0 [#_M_FHD] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
#3004 bit 1 [#_M_OV] R/W Enable or disable feedrate override.
- 236 -

number name
#3004 bit 2 [#_M_EST] R/W Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3005 [#_SETDT] R/W Read/write setting data.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] W Stop with a message.
#3007 [#_MRIMG] R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting)
- Time
number name
#3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date
#3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second
- Number of parts
number name
#3901 [#_PRTSA] R/W Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] R/W Number of required parts
- Tool compensation memory

number name
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] R Tool compensation memory information
- Main program number

number name
#4000 [#_MAINO] R Main program number
- Modal information
number name
#4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (G code)
Note) Subscript n represents a G code group number.
#4102 [#_BUFB] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (B code)
#4107 [#_BUFD] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (D code)
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (F code)
#4111 [#_BUFH] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (H code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (S code)
- 237 -

number name
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last
minute (T code)
#4201-#4230 [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (G
code)
#4302 [#_ACTB] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (B
code)
#4307 [#_ACTD] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (D
code)
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (E
code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (F
code)
#4311 [#_ACTH] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (H
code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (M
code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being executed
(sequence number)
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being executed
(program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (S
code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being executed (T
code)
#4401-#4430 [#_INTG[n]] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (G code)
#4502 [#_INTB] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (B code)
#4507 [#_INTD] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (D code)
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4511 [#_INTH] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (H code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
- 238 -
- Position information
number name
#5001-#5007 [#_ABSIO[n]] R End point position of the previous block (workpiece
coordinate system)
#5021-#5027 [#_ABSMT[n]] R Specified current position (machine coordinate system)
#5041-#5047 [#_ABSOT[n]] R Specified current position (workpiece coordinate system)
#5061-#5067 [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
- Servo position deviation

number name
#5101-#5107 [#_SVERR[n]] R Servo positional deviation
- Manual handle interruption

number name
#5121-#5127 [#_MIRTP[n]] R Manual handle interruption
- Distance to go
number name
#5181-#5187 [#_DIST[n]] R Distance to go
- Workpiece origin offset value

number name
#5201-#5207 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
#5221-#5227 [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
- 239 -

number name
#100301-#100307 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
- Skip position (detection unit)

number name
#5421-#5427 [#_SKPDTC[n]] R Skip position (detection unit)
- Pattern function
System variable Attribu
System variable name Description
number te
#6251-#6257 [#_MPTREFP[n]] R Coordinate of pattern base point
(NOTE) Subscript n is number of axis (1 to 7).
#154001-#154007 Following number is enabled.
- Multi-piece machining function

number te
#6261-#6267 [#_MHSREFP[n]] R Coordinate of multi-piece machining
- Automatic repositioning
number te
#6270 [#_MATREP] R Repositioning value
- 240 -
- Local coordinate system

number te
#6271-#6277 [#_MLOCPOS[n]] R Origin of the local coordinate system
- System constant
System constant System
number constant name
#0, #3100 [#_EMPTY] R Null
#3101 [#_PI] R Circular constant π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] R Base of natural logarithm e = 2.71828182845904523536
Explanation
R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and represents read-only, write-only, and read/write enabled,
respectively.
- Interface signal #1000-#1031, #1032, #1033-#1035 (Attribute: R)

#1100-#1115, #1132, #1133-#1135 (Attribute: R/W)
[Input signal]
The status of interface input signals can be obtained by reading the value of system variables #1000 to
#1031.
Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal

#1000 [#_UI[0]] 1 UI000 (20)
#1001 [#_UI[1]] 1 UI001 (21)
#1002 [#_UI[2]] 1 UI002 (22)
#1003 [#_UI[3]] 1 UI003 (23)
#1004 [#_UI[4]] 1 UI004 (24)
#1005 [#_UI[5]] 1 UI005 (25)
#1006 [#_UI[6]] 1 UI006 (26)
#1007 [#_UI[7]] 1 UI007 (27)
#1008 [#_UI[8]] 1 UI008 (28)
9
#1009 [#_UI[9]] 1 UI009 (2 )
10
#1010 [#_UI[10]] 1 UI010 (2 )
#1011 [#_UI[11]] 1 UI011 (211)
#1012 [#_UI[12]] 1 UI012 (212)
#1013 [#_UI[13]] 1 UI013 (213)
#1014 [#_UI[14]] 1 UI014 (214)
#1015 [#_UI[15]] 1 UI015 (215)
#1016 [#_UI[16]] 1 UI016 (216)
#1017 [#_UI[17]] 1 UI017 (217)
#1018 [#_UI[18]] 1 UI018 (218)
#1019 [#_UI[19]] 1 UI019 (219)
#1020 [#_UI[20]] 1 UI020 (220)
#1021 [#_UI[21]] 1 UI021 (221)
#1022 [#_UI[22]] 1 UI022 (222)
#1023 [#_UI[23]] 1 UI023 (223)
#1024 [#_UI[24]] 1 UI024 (224)
#1025 [#_UI[25]] 1 UI025 (225)
#1026 [#_UI[26]] 1 UI026 (226)
- 241 -

#1027 [#_UI[27]] 1 UI027 (227)
#1028 [#_UI[28]] 1 UI028 (228)
#1029 [#_UI[29]] 1 UI029 (229)
#1030 [#_UI[30]] 1 UI030 (230)
#1031 [#_UI[31]] 1 UI031 (231)
Variable value Input signal

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
Since the read value is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, the unit system must be considered when a
macro is created.
The input signals at 32 points can be read at a time by reading from system variables #1032 to #1035.

#1032 [#_UIL[0]] 32 UI000-UI031
#1033 [#_UIL[1]] 32 UI100-UI131
#1034 [#_UIL[2]] 32 UI200-UI231
#1035 [#_UIL[3]] 32 UI300-UI331
30
#1032 = ∑ # [1000 + i] × 2 −#1031× 2
i =0
i 31
∑ {2 ×V }− 2
30
# [1032 + n] = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
When UIni = 0, Vi = 0.
n = 0-3
[Output signal]
Interface output signals can be sent by assigning values to system variables #1100 to #1131 for sending
interface signals.

#1100 [#_UO[0]] 1 UO000 (20)
#1101 [#_UO[1]] 1 UO001 (21)
#1102 [#_UO[2]] 1 UO002 (22)
#1103 [#_UO[3]] 1 UO003 (23)
#1104 [#_UO[4]] 1 UO004 (24)
#1105 [#_UO[5]] 1 UO005 (25)
#1106 [#_UO[6]] 1 UO006 (26)
#1107 [#_UO[7]] 1 UO007 (27)
#1108 [#_UO[8]] 1 UO008 (28)
#1109 [#_UO[9]] 1 UO009 (29)
#1110 [#_UO[10]] 1 UO010 (210)
#1111 [#_UO[11]] 1 UO011 (211)
#1112 [#_UO[12]] 1 UO012 (212)
#1113 [#_UO[13]] 1 UO013 (213)
#1114 [#_UO[14]] 1 UO014 (214)
#1115 [#_UO[15]] 1 UO015 (215)
#1116 [#_UO[16]] 1 UO016 (216)
#1117 [#_UO[17]] 1 UO017 (217)
#1118 [#_UO[18]] 1 UO018 (218)
- 242 -

#1119 [#_UO[19]] 1 UO019 (219)
#1120 [#_UO[20]] 1 UO020 (220)
#1121 [#_UO[21]] 1 UO021 (221)
#1122 [#_UO[22]] 1 UO022 (222)
#1123 [#_UO[23]] 1 UO023 (223)
#1124 [#_UO[24]] 1 UO024 (224)
#1125 [#_UO[25]] 1 UO025 (225)
#1126 [#_UO[26]] 1 UO026 (226)
#1127 [#_UO[27]] 1 UO027 (227)
#1128 [#_UO[28]] 1 UO028 (228)
#1129 [#_UO[29]] 1 UO029 (229)
#1130 [#_UO[30]] 1 UO030 (230)
#1131 [#_UO[31]] 1 UO031 (231)
Variable value Input signal

1.0 Contact closed
0.0 Contact opened
The output signals at 32 points can be written at a time by writing to system variables #1132 to #1135.
The signals can also be read.

#1132 [#_UOL[0]] 32 UO000-UO031
#1133 [#_UOL[1]] 32 UO100-UO131
#1134 [#_UOL[2]] 32 UO200-UO231
#1135 [#_UOL[3]] 32 UO300-UO331
30
#1132 = ∑ # [1000 + i] × 2 −#1131× 2
i =0
i 31
∑ {2 ×V }− 2
30
# [1132 + n] = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
n = 0-3
NOTE
1 When a value other than 1.0 or 0.0 is assigned to variables #1100 to #1131, it is
assumed as follows.
<null> is assumed to be 0.
A value other than <null> or 0 is assumed to be 1.
Where, a value less than 0.00000001 is undefined.
2 When any of UI016 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO016 to UO031, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are used, bit 0 (MIF)
of parameter No. 6001 must be set to 1.
- 243 -
Example
Structure of DI
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 1 0
Used for other Sign 10 10 10
purposes
Structure of DO
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Not used Used for other purposes Address
<1> The specified address D value is output to DO and signed BCD 3 digits are read into #100.
Macro calling instruction

G65 P9100 D (address);
A custom macro body is created as follows.

O9100 ;
#1132 = #1132 AND 496 OR#7 ; : Address output
G65 P9101 T60 ; : Timer macro. For details, refer to the example of clock (#3001).
#100 = BIN[#1032 AND 4095] ; : BCD 3 digits are read.
IF [#1012 EQ 0] GOTO 9100 ; : A sign is attached.
#100 = -#100
N9100 M99
<2> Eight types of specified address D values are output to DO and signed BCD 6 digits (3-digit integer
part + 3-digit fractional part) are read into #101.
Structure on the machine side

When DO 20 = 0: Data with 3 decimal places
When DO 20 = 1: Data with 3-digit integer part
When DO 23 to 21 = 000: No1 data when #1 = 0
:
Macro calling instruction

G65 P9111 D (data number);

O9111 ;
G65 P9100 D[#7*2+1] ; : Call the macro of <1> O9100
#101 = #100 ;
G65 P9100 D[#7*2] ;
#101 = #101 + #100/1000 ;
M99 ;
- 244 -
- Tool compensation value #2001-#2032, #10001-#10032 (Attribute: R/W)

The compensation values can be obtained by reading system variables #2001 to #2032 or #10001 to
#10032 for tool compensation. The compensation values can also be changed by assigning values to the
system variables.
<1> Tool compensation memory A

Compensation number Variable number Variable name
1 #2001 or #10001 [#_OFS[1]]
2 #2002 or #10002 [#_OFS[2]]
3 #2003 or #10003 [#_OFS[3]]
: : :
31 #2031 or #10031 [#_OFS[31]]
32 #2032 or #10032 [#_OFS[32]]
- Alarm #3000 (Attribute: W)

When an error is detected in a macro, an unit can enter the alarm state. In addition, an alarm message of
up to 60 characters with alphabet and numerals can be specified between a control-out and a control-in
after the expression. When an alarm message is not specified, a macro alarm is used instead.
Variable number Variable name Description

#3000 [#_ALM] Macro alarm
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No.6008 = 0

#3000 = n (ALARM MESSAGE); (n: 0-200)
On the screen, the alarm number obtained by adding the value of #3000 to 3000 and alarm message
appear after MC.
(Example) #3000 = 1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
→ "MC3001 ALARM MESSAGE" appears on the alarm screen.
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No.6008 = 1
#3000 = n (ALARM MESSAGE); (n: 0-4095)
On the screen, the alarm number of #3000 and alarm message appear after MC.
(Example) #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
→ "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE" appears on the alarm screen.
- Clock #3001, #3002 (Attribute: R/W)

The clock time can be obtained by reading system variables #3001 and #3002 for clocks. The time can be
preset by entering a value in the system variables.
Variable
Type Variable name Unit At power-on Count condition
number
Clock 1 #3001 [#_CLOCK1] 1 ms Reset to 0 Anytime
Clock 2 #3002 [#_CLOCK2] 1 hour Same as at power-down When the STL signal is on
The clock accuracy is 16 ms. Clock 1 returns to 0 after a lapse of 2147483648 ms. Clock 2 returns to 0
after a lapse of 9544.37176 hours.
- 245 -
[Example]
Timer
Macro calling command
G65 P9101 T (wait time) ms ;
A macro is created as follows.
O9101;
#3001 = 0; Initial setting
WHILE [#3001 LE #20] DO1: Wait for a specified time
END1 ;
M99 ;
- Controlling of single block stop and waiting for the auxiliary function
completion signal #3003 (Attribute: R/W)
Assigning the following values in system variable #3003 allows the specification of whether single block
stop is disabled in the following blocks or whether a wait for the completion signal (FIN) of the auxiliary
function (M, S, T, or B) before going to the next block is enabled. When a wait for completion signal is
disabled, the distribution end signal (DEN) is not sent. Be careful not to specify the next auxiliary
function without waiting for the completion signal.
Variable number and variable name Value Single block stop Auxiliary function completion signal
0 Enabled Waiting
#3003 1 Disabled Waiting
[#_CNTL1] 2 Enabled Not waiting
3 Disabled Not waiting
In addition, the following variable names can be used to enable or disable single block stop and a wait for
the auxiliary function completion signal, individually.
Variable name Value Single block stop Auxiliary function completion
0 Enabled -
[#_M_SBK]
1 Disabled -
0 - Waiting
[#_M_FIN]
1 - Not waiting
[Example]
Punch cycle at corners of rectangle (for incremental programming)
Macro calling command
G65 P9081 Xxx Yyy ;
O9081 ;
#3003 = 1 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ;
G00 X#24 ;
Disable single block stop.
G00 Y#25 ;
#24 corresponds to X and #25 to Y.
G00 X-#24 ;
#3003 = 0 ;
M99 ;
NOTE
#3003 is cleared by a reset.
- Enabling of feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop check #3004
(Attribute: R/W)
Assigning the following values in system variable #3004 allows the specification of whether feed hold
and feedrate override are enabled in the following blocks or whether exact stop in G61 mode or by G09
command is disabled.
- 246 -
Variable number and variable name Value Field hold Feedrate override Exact stop
0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
1 Disabled Enabled Enabled
2 Enabled Disabled Enabled
#3004 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled
[#_CNTL2] 4 Enabled Enabled Disabled
5 Disabled Enabled Disabled
6 Enabled Disabled Disabled
7 Disabled Disabled Disabled
In addition, the following variable names can be used to enable or disable feed hold, feedrate override,
and exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command, individually.
Variable number and variable name Value Feed hold Feedrate override Exact stop
0 Enabled - -
[#_M_FHD]
1 Disabled - -
0 - Enabled -
[#_M_OV]
1 - Disabled -
0 - - Enabled
[#_M_EST]
1 - - Disabled
NOTE
1 These system variables are provided to maintain compatibility with conventional
NC programs. It is not recommended to use control of feed hold and feedrate
override. In addition, it is recommended that functions provided by G09, G61,
and G64 is used to enable or disable exact stop.
2 When the feed hold button is pressed during execution of a block for which feed
hold is disabled:
<1> If the feed hold button is kept pressed, operation stops after execution of
the block. When single block stop is disabled, however, operation does not
stop.
<2> If the pressed feed hold button is released, the feed hold lamp lights, but
operation does not stop until the end of the first block that was enabled.
3 #3004 is cleared by a reset.
4 If exact stop is disabled by #3004, the original exact stop position between
cutting feed and positioning block is not affected. #3004 can temporarily disable
exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command between cutting feed and
cutting feed.
- Settings #3005 (Attribute: R/W)

Settings can be read and written.
Binary values are converted to decimals.
#3005
#15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8

Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC
#5 (SEQ) : Whether to automatically insert sequence numbers
#2 (INI) : Millimeter input or inch input
#1 (ISO) : Whether to use EIA or ISO as the output code
#0 (TVC) : Whether to make a TV check
- 247 -
- Stop with a message #3006 (Attribute: W)

When "#3006=1 (MESSAGE);" is commanded in the macro, the program executes blocks up to the
immediately previous one and then stops. When a message of up to 60 characters with alphabet and
numerals, which is enclosed by a control-in character and control-out character, is programmed in the
same block, the message is displayed on the external operator message screen.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] Stop with a message
- Status of a mirror image #3007 (Attribute: R)

The status of an mirror image (setting or DI) at that point in time can be obtained for each axis by reading
#3007.
#3007 [#_MRIMG] Status of a mirror image
When the status is indicated in binary, each bit corresponds with an axis as follows.
Bit 31 to 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nth axis - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For the 32 bits, 0 indicates that a mirror image is disabled and 1 indicates that a mirror image is enabled.
[Example] When #3007 is 3, a mirror image is enabled for the 1st and 2nd axes.
NOTE
1 When the mirror image function is set for the same axis by the mirror image
signal and setting, the signal value and setting value are ORed and then output.
2 When mirror image signals for axes other than the controlled axes are turned on,
they are not read into system variable #3007.
- Time #3011, #3012 (Attribute: R)

Year/month/date and hour/minute/second can be obtained by reading system variables #3011 and #3012.
This variable is read-only. To change year/month/date and hour/minute/second, use the timer screen.
[Example] Jan 20, 2011, PM 04:17:05

#3011 = 20110120
#3012 = 161705
- Total number of parts and the number of required parts #3901 and #3902
(Attribute: R/W)
The number of required parts and the number of machined parts can be displayed on the screen by using
the operation time and part number displaying function. When the (total) number of machined parts
reaches the number of required parts, a signal indicating the fact is sent to the machine (PMC side).
The system variables can be used to read or write the total number of parts and the number of required
parts.
#3901 [#_PRTSA] Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] Number of required parts
- Type of tool compensation memory #3980 (Attribute: R)

System variable #3980 can be used to read the type of compensation memory.
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] Types of tool compensation memory
0: Tool compensation memory A
- 248 -
NOTE
Only tool compensation memory A can be used by Series 0i-PD.
- Main program number #4000 (Attribute: R)

System variable #4000 can be used to read the main program number regardless of the level of a
subprogram.
#4000 [#_MAINO] Main program number
NOTE
1 The main program number indicates the number of the program that is first
started.
2 When an O number is specified by MDI during execution of the main program or
when the second O number is specified in DNC mode, the value of #4000
changes to the specified O number. In addition, when no programs are
registered or when no O numbers are specified in DNC mode, the value of
#4000 changes to 0.
- Modal information #4001-#4120, #4201-#4320, #4401-#4520 (Attribute: R)

The modal information specified before the previous block of the macro statement that reads system
variables #4001 to #4120 can be obtained in the block currently being looked ahead, by reading system
variables #4001 to #4120.
The modal information of the block currently being executed can be obtained by reading system variables
#4201 to #4320.
The modal information specified before the block interrupted by an interruption type custom macro by
reading system variables #4401 to #4520.
The unit used when it was specified is applied.
(Category: <1> Previous block, <2> Running block, <3> Interrupted block)
Category Variable number Variable name Description
<1> #4001 [#_BUFG[1]]
<2> #4201 [#_ACTG[1]] Modal information (G code: group 1)
<3> #4401 [#_INTG[1]]
<1> #4002 [#_BUFG[2]]
<3> #4402 [#_INTG[2]]
: : : :
<1> #4030 [#_BUFG[30]]
<3> #4430 [#_INTG[30]]
<1> #4102 [#_BUFB]
<2> #4302 [#_ACTB] Modal information (B code)
<3> #4502 [#_INTB]
<1> #4107 [#_BUFD]
<2> #4307 [#_ACTD] Modal information (D code)
<3> #4507 [#_INTD]
<1> #4108 [#_BUFE]
<2> #4308 [#_ACTE] Modal information (E code)
<3> #4508 [#_INTE]
<1> #4109 [#_BUFF]
<2> #4309 [#_ACTF] Modal information (F code)
<3> #4509 [#_INTF]
- 249 -
Category Variable number Variable name Description

<1> #4111 [#_BUFH]
<2> #4311 [#_ACTH] Modal information (H code)
<3> #4511 [#_INTH]
<1> #4113 [#_BUFM]
<2> #4313 [#_ACTM] Modal information (M code)
<3> #4513 [#_INTM]
<1> #4114 [#_BUFN]
<2> #4314 [#_ACTN] Modal information (sequence number N)
<3> #4514 [#_INTN]
<1> #4115 [#_BUFO]
<2> #4315 [#_ACTO] Modal information (sequence number O)
<3> #4515 [#_INTO]
<1> #4119 [#_BUFS]
<2> #4319 [#_ACTS] Modal information (S code)
<3> #4519 [#_INTS]
<1> #4120 [#_BUFT]
<2> #4320 [#_ACTT] Modal information (T code)
<3> #4520 [#_INTT]
NOTE
Previous block and running block
Since the CNC reads the block that is ahead of the block currently being
executed by the machining program, the block being retrieved by the CNC is
normally different from that currently being executed. The previous block
indicates the block that is ahead of the block being retrieved by the CNC, that is,
the block that is ahead of the program block in which #4001 to #4120 are
specified.
[Example] O1234 ;
N10 G00 X200. Y200. ;
N20 G01 X1000. Y1000. F10. ;
:
:
N50 G00 X500. Y500. ;
N60 #1 = #4001 ;
Assume that the CNC is currently executing N20. If the CNC retrieved and processed the blocks up to
N60 as shown above, the running block is N20 and the previous block is N50. Therefore, group 1 modal
information in the running block is G01 and group 1 modal information in the previous block is G00.
When N60 #1 = #4201, #1 = 1.
When N60 #1 = #4001, #1 = 0.
- Position information #5001-#5067, #100001-#100157 (Attribute: R)

The end position of the previous block, the specified current position (for the machine coordinate system
and workpiece coordinate system), and the skip signal position can be obtained by reading the values of
system variables #5001 to #5067 or #100001 to #100157.
- 250 -
Reading
Tool position
Variable Coordinate operation
Variable name Position information cutter
number system during
compensation
movement
#5001 [#_ABSIO[1]] 1st axis block end point position
#5002 [#_ABSIO[2]] 2nd axis block end point position
: : :
Workpiece
#5007 [#_ABSIO[7]] 7th axis block end point position
coordinate Not included Enabled
#100001 [#_ABSIO[1]] 1st axis block end point position
system
#100002 [#_ABSIO[2]] 2nd axis block end point position
: : :
#100007 [#_ABSIO[7]] 7th axis block end point position
#5021 [#_ABSMT[1]] 1st axis current position
#5022 [#_ABSMT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
Machine
#5027 [#_ABSMT[7]] 7th axis current position
coordinate Included Disabled
#100051 [#_ABSMT[1]] 1st axis current position
system
#100052 [#_ABSMT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
#100057 [#_ABSMT[7]] 7th axis current position
#5041 [#_ABSOT[1]] 1st axis current position
#5042 [#_ABSOT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
Workpiece
#5047 [#_ABSOT[7]] 7th axis current position
coordinate Included Disabled
#100101 [#_ABSOT[1]] 1st axis current position
system
#100102 [#_ABSOT[2]] 2nd axis current position
: : :
#100107 [#_ABSOT[7]] 7th axis current position
#5061 [#_ABSKP[1]] 1st axis skip position
#5062 [#_ABSKP[2]] 2nd axis skip position
: : :
Workpiece
#5067 [#_ABSKP[7]] 7th axis skip position
coordinate Included Enabled
#100151 [#_ABSKP[1]] 1st axis skip position
system
#100152 [#_ABSKP[2]] 2nd axis skip position
: : :
#100157 [#_ABSKP[7]] 7th axis skip position
NOTE
1 When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm
PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE” occurs.
2 The block end point position (ABSIO) of the skip (G33) is the position where the
skip signal is turned on. If the skip signal is not turned on, the position is the end
position of the block.
3 "Read operation during movement is disabled" means that the accurate reading
of values during movement is not guaranteed.
- 251 -
- Servo position deviation #5101-#5107, #100251-#100257 (Attribute: R)

The servo position deviation for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5101 to #5120 or
#100251 to #100300.
Variable Read operation
Variable name Position information
number during movement
#5101 [#_SVERR[1]] 1st axis servo position deviation
#5102 [#_SVERR[2]] 2nd axis servo position deviation
: : :
#5107 [#_SVERR[7]] 7th axis servo position deviation
Disabled
#100251 [#_SVERR[1]] 1st axis servo position deviation
#100252 [#_SVERR[2]] 2nd axis servo position deviation
: : :
#100257 [#_SVERR[7]] 7th axis servo position deviation
NOTE
When variables exceeding the number of control axes are specified, the alarm
- Manual handle interruption #5121-#5127, #100651-#100657 (Attribute: R)
The manual handle interruption for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5121 to #5127
or #100651 to #100657.
#5121 [#_MIRTP[1]] 1st axis manual handle interruption
#5122 [#_MIRTP[2]] 2nd axis manual handle interruption
: : :
#5127 [#_MIRTP[7]] 7th axis manual handle interruption
Disabled
#100651 [#_MIRTP[1]] 1st axis manual handle interruption
#100652 [#_MIRTP[2]] 2nd axis manual handle interruption
: : :
#100657 [#_MIRTP[7]] 7th axis manual handle interruption
NOTE
- Distance to go #5181-#5187, #100801-#100807 (Attribute: R)

The distance to go value for each axis can be obtained by reading system variables #5181 to #5187 or
#100801 to #100807.
#5181 [#_DIST[1]] 1st axis distance to go value
#5182 [#_DIST[2]] 2nd axis distance to go value
: : :
#5187 [#_DIST[7]] 7th axis distance to go value
Disabled
#100801 [#_DIST[1]] 1st axis distance to go value
#100802 [#_DIST[2]] 2nd axis distance to go value
: : :
#100807 [#_DIST[7]] 7th axis distance to go value
NOTE
- 252 -
- Workpiece origin offset value #5201-#5327, #100301-#100607 (Attribute: R/W)

The workpiece origin offset value can be obtained by reading system variables #5201 to #5327 or
#100301 to #100607. The offset value can also be changed by assigning values to the system variables.
Variable Workpiece
Variable name Controlled axis
number coordinate system
#5201 [#_WZCMN[1]] 1st axis external workpiece origin offset value External workpiece
#5202 [#_WZCMN[2]] 2nd axis external workpiece origin offset value origin offset value
: : : (applied to all
#5207 [#_WZCMN[7]] 7th axis external workpiece origin offset value coordinate systems)
#5221 [#_WZG54[1]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value
#5222 [#_WZG54[2]] 2nd axis workpiece origin offset value
G54
: : :
#5227 [#_WZG54[7]] 7th axis workpiece origin offset value
G55
: : :
G56
: : :
G57
: : :
G58
: : :
G59
: : :
Variable Workpiece
#100301 [#_WZCMN[1]] 1st axis external workpiece origin offset value External workpiece
#100302 [#_WZCMN[2]] 2nd axis external workpiece origin offset value origin offset value
: : : (applied to all
#100307 [#_WZCMN[7]] 7th axis external workpiece origin offset value coordinate systems)
G54
: : :
G55
: : :
#100451 [#_WZG56[1]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset
#100452 [#_WZG56[2]] 2nd axis workpiece origin offset
G56
: : :
#100457 [#_WZG56[7]] 7th axis workpiece origin offset
G57
: : :
- 253 -
Variable Workpiece
G58
: : :
G59
: : :
The following variables can also be used when bit 5 (D15) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0:
Axis Function Variable number
1st axis External workpiece origin offset value #2500
G54 workpiece origin offset value #2501
2nd axis External workpiece origin offset value #2600
3rd axis External workpiece origin offset value #2700
4th axis External workpiece origin offset value #2800
NOTE
2 The variables #2500 to #2806, #5201 to #5327, and #100301 to #100607 are
available when the workpiece coordinate system is applied.
- Skip position (detection unit) #5421-#5427, #100701-#100707 (Attribute: R)

The skip position with the detection unit can be obtained by reading system variables #5421 to #5427 or
#100701 to #100707. The values of these variables are integers, and values in the workpiece coordinate
system.
- 254 -

#5421 [#_SKPDTC[1]] 1st axis skip position (detection unit)
#5422 [#_SKPDTC[2]] 2nd axis skip position (detection unit)
: : :
#5427 [#_SKPDTC[7]] 7th axis skip position (detection unit)
Disabled
#100151 [#_SKPDTC[1]] 1st axis skip position (detection unit)
#100152 [#_SKPDTC[2]] 2nd axis skip position (detection unit)
: : :
#100157 [#_SKPDTC[7]] 7th axis skip position (detection unit)
NOTE
2 To specify these variables, set bit 2 (DSK) of parameter No. 6210 to 1. (If an
attempt is made to specify them when DSK is 0, alarm PS0115 is issued.)
- Switching between P-CODE variables and system variables (#10000 or later)

#8570 (Attribute: R/W)
This system variable allows read/write operations of P-CODE variables (#10000 to #89999) for the macro
executor function. For details on P-CODE variables, refer to the Macro Executor Programming Manual
(B-64303EN-2).
System variable #8570 can be used to make variables #10000 or later correspond to either P-CODE
variables or system variables.
#8570 setting Specified variable Corresponding variable
#10000 P-CODE variables (#10000)
#8570 = 1 : :
#89999 P-CODE variables (#89999)
#10000 System variables (#10000)
#8570 = 0 : :
#89999 System variables (#89999)
Example
#8570 = 0 ;
#10001 = 123 ; → Writing to system variable #10001 (tool compensation)
#8570 = 1 ;
#10001 = 456 ; → Writing to P-CODE variable #10001 (tool compensation)
NOTE
1 Variable #8570 can be used only when the macro executor function is enabled.
2 System variables (#10000 or later) always correspond to system variables
specified by their variable names even when #8570 is 1.
3 When an attempt is made to access a variable that cannot be used with
P-CODE variables (#10000 or later), an alarm PS0115, “VARIABLE NO. OUT
OF RANGE” occurs.
- Base point of pattern function #6251 to #6257, #154001 to #154007 (Attribute:

R)
The coordinate of base point of pattern function in executing block can be obtained by reading system
variables #6251 to #6257, and #154001 to #154007.
- 255 -

#6251 [#_MPTREFP[1]] Pattern base point on 1st axis
#6252 [#_MPTREFP[2]] Pattern base point on 2nd axis
: : :
#6257 [#_MPTREFP[7]] Pattern base point on 7th axis
#154001 [#_MPTREFP[1]] Pattern base point on 1st axis
#154002 [#_MPTREFP[2]] Pattern base point on 2nd axis
: : :
#154007 [#_MPTREFP[7]] Pattern base point on 7th axis
- Base point of multi-piece machining function #6261 to #6267, #154051 to

#154057 (Attribute: R)
The coordinate of base point of multi-piece machining function in executing block can be obtained by
reading system variables #6261 to #6267, and #154051 to #154057.
#6261 [#_MHSREFP[1]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 1st axis
#6262 [#_MHSREFP[2]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 2nd axis
: : :
#6267 [#_MHSREFP[7]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 7th axis
#154051 [#_MHSREFP[1]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 1st axis
#154052 [#_MHSREFP[2]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 2nd axis
: : :
#154057 [#_MHSREFP[7]] Base point of multi-piece machining on 7th axis
- Repositioning value #6270 (Attribute: R)

Repositioning value of automatic repositioning function in executing block can be obtained by reading
system variables #6270.
#6270 [#_MPATREP] Repositioning value
- Origin of local coordinate system #6271 to #6277, #154101 to #154107

(Attribute: R)
The offset from origin of the workpiece coordinate system to origin of local coordinate system can be
obtained by reading system variables #6271 to #6277 and #154101 to #154107.
#6271 [#_MLOCPOS[1]] Origin of local coordinate system on 1st axis
#6272 [#_MLOCPOS[2]] Origin of local coordinate system on 2nd axis
: : :
#6277 [#_MLOCPOS[7]] Origin of local coordinate system on 7th axis
#154101 [#_MLOCPOS[1]] Origin of local coordinate system on 1st axis
#154102 [#_MLOCPOS[2]] Origin of local coordinate system on 2nd axis
: : :
#154107 [#_MLOCPOS[7]] Origin of local coordinate system on 7th axis
17.3 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION

Various operations can be performed on variables. Program an arithmetic and logic operation in the same
way as for a general arithmetic expression.
#i=<expression>
- 256 -
<Expression>
The expression to the right of the arithmetic and logic operation contains constants and/or variables
combined by a function or operator. Variables #j and #k below can be replaced with a constant. If a
constant used in an expression has no decimal point, it is assumed to end with a decimal point.
Table 17.3 (a) Arithmetic and logic operation

Type of operation Operation Description
<1> Definition or #i=#j Definition or replacement of a variable
replacement
<2> Addition-type #i=#j+#k Addition
operations #i=#j-#k Subtraction
#i=#j OR #k Logical OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
#i=#j XOR #k Exclusive OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
<3> Multiplication-type #i=#j*#k Multiplication
operations #i=#j/#k Division
#i=#j AND #k Logical AND (bit by bit of 32 bits)
#i=#j MOD #k Remainder (A remainder is obtained after #j and #k are
rounded to their nearest whole numbers. When #j is a
negative value, #i is assumed to be a negative value.)
<4> Functions #i=SIN[#j] Sine (in degrees)
#i=COS[#j] Cosine (in degrees)
#i=TAN[#j] Tangent (in degrees)
#i=ASIN[#j] Arc sine
#i=ACOS[#j] Arc cosine
#i=ATAN[#j] Arc tangent (one argument), ATN can also be used.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also be used.
#i=ATAN[#j,#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also be used.
#i=SQRT[#j] Square root, SQR can also be used.
#i=ABS[#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j] Conversion from BCD to binary
#i=BCD[#j] Conversion from binary to BCD
#i=ROUND[#j] Rounding off, RND can also be used.
#i=FIX[#j] Rounding down to an integer
#i=FUP[#j] Rounding up to an integer
#i=LN[#j] Natural logarithm
#i=EXP[#j] Exponent using base e (2.718...)
#i=POW[#j,#k] Power (#j to the #kth power)
#i=ADP[#j] Addition of a decimal point
Explanation
- Angle units
The units of angles used with the SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN, and ATAN functions are degrees. For
example, 90 degrees and 30 minutes is represented as 90.5 degrees.
- ARCSIN #i = ASIN[#j];
• The solution ranges are as indicated below:
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0: 270° to 90°
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 1: -90° to 90°
• When #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
• A constant can be used instead of the #j variable.
- ARCCOS #i = ACOS[#j];
• The solution ranges from 180° to 0°.
- 257 -
• When #j is beyond the range of -1 to 1, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF

RANGE” is issued.
- ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]/[#k]; (two arguments)

• ATAN[#j,#k] is equivalent to ATAN[#j]/[#k].
• When point (#k,#j) on plane X-Y is given, this function returns the value of the arc tangent for the
angle made by the point.
• The solution ranges are as follows:
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 0: 0° to 360°
Example: When #1 = ATAN[-1]/[-1]; is specified, #1 is 225.0.
When the bit 0 (NAT) of parameter No. 6004 is set to 1: -180° to 180°
Example: When #1 = ATAN[-1]/[-1]; is specified, #1 is -135.0.
- ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]; (one argument)

• When ATAN is specified with one argument, this function returns the main value of arc tangent
(-90° ≤ ATAN[#j] ≤ 90°). In other word, this function returns the same value as ATAN in calculator
specifications.
• To use this function as the dividend of a division, be sure to enclose it with brackets ([]). If this
function is not enclosed, ATAN[#j]/[#k] is assumed.
Example:
#100 = [ATAN[1]]/10 ; : Divides ATAN with one argument by 10.
#100 = ATAN[1]/[10] ; : Executes ATAN with two arguments.
#100 = ATAN[1]/10 ; : Assumes ATAN with two arguments, but issues an alarm PS1131,
“MISSING OPEN BRACKET” because the X coordinate
specification is not enclosed with brackets ([]).
- Natural logarithm #i = LN[#j];

• When the antilogarithm (#j) is zero or smaller, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
- Exponential function #i = EXP[#j];

• When the result of the operation overflows, an alarm PS0119, “ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF
RANGE” is issued.
- ROUND function
• When the ROUND function is included in an arithmetic or logic operation command, IF statement,
or WHILE statement, the ROUND function rounds off at the first decimal place.
Example:
When #1=ROUND[#2]; is executed where #2 holds 1.2345, the value of variable #1 is
1.0.
• When the ROUND function is used in NC statement addresses, the ROUND function rounds off the
specified value according to the least input increment of the address.
Example:
Creation of a drilling program that cuts according to the values of variables #1 and #2,
then returns to the original position
Suppose that the increment system is 1/1000 mm, variable #1 holds 1.2345, and
variable #2 holds 2.3456. Then,
G00 G91 X-#1; Moves 1.235 mm in negative direction.
G01 X-#2 F300; Moves 2.346 mm in negative direction.
- 258 -
G00 X[#1+#2]; Since 1.2345 + 2.3456 = 3.5801 in positive direction, the travel
distance is 3.580, which does not return the tool to the original position.
This difference comes from whether addition is performed before or after rounding off.
G00X-[ROUND[#1]+ROUND[#2]]; must be specified to return the tool to the original
position.
- Add decimal point (ADP) function

• ADP[#n] (n = 1 to 33) can be executed to add a decimal point to an argument passed with no
decimal point, in the subprogram.
Example:
In the subprogram called with G65 P_X10;, the value of ADP[#24] is a value to which a
decimal point is added at its end (that is, 10.). Use this function when you do not want
to consider the increment system in the subprogram. When bit 4 (CVA) of parameter
No. 6007 is set to 1, however, the ADP function cannot be used because any
argument is converted to 0.01 the moment it is passed.
NOTE
For compatibility among programs, it is recommended that the ADP function be
not used, and decimal points be added in the argument specification for a macro
call.
- Rounding up and down to an integer (FUP and FIX)

With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than
the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer.
Conversely, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is less than the
absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding down to an integer. Be
particularly careful when handling negative numbers.
Example:
Suppose that #1=1.2 and #2=-1.2.
When #3=FUP[#1] is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#1] is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FUP[#2] is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#2] is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3.
- Abbreviations of arithmetic and logic operation commands

When a function is specified in a program, the first two characters of the function name can be used to
specify the function.
Example: ROUND → RO
FIX → FI
NOTE
POW cannot be abbreviated.
- Priority of operations
<1> Functions
<2> Operations such as multiplication and division (*, /, AND)
<3> Operations such as addition and subtraction (+, -, OR, XOR)
- 259 -
Example) #1=#2+#3*SIN[#4];
<1>
<2>
<1>, <2> and <3> indicate the order of
<3> operations.
- Bracket nesting
Brackets are used to change the order of operations. Brackets can be used to a depth of five levels
including the brackets used to enclose a function. When a depth of five levels is exceeded, an alarm
PS0118, “TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING” occurs.
Example) #1=SIN [ [ [#2+#3] *#4 +#5] *#6];
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
<1> to <5> indicate the order of operations.
Limitation
• Caution concerning decreased precision
When bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0
• Addition and subtraction
Note that when an absolute value is subtracted from another absolute value in addition or subtraction,
the relative error may become 10-15 or greater.
For example, assume that #1 and #2 have the following true values in the process of operation.
(The following values are examples in the process of operation and cannot actually be specified from
any program.)
#1=9876543210.987654321
#2=9876543210.987657777
You cannot obtain the following result with operation #2-#1:
#2-#1=0.000003456
This is because the precision of custom macro variables is 15 decimal digits. With this precision, the
values of #1 and #2 become:
#1=9876543210.987650000
#2=9876543210.987660000
(Precisely, the actual values are slightly different from the above values because they are internally
processed in binary.) Therefore, the result is:
#2-1=0.000010000
A large error occurs.
• Logical expressions
Be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, and LE
because they are processed basically in the same way as addition and subtraction. For example, if the
following statement is used to decide whether #1 is equal to #2 in the above example, a correct
decision may not be resulted because errors may occur:
IF [#1 EQ #2]
Evaluate the difference between #1 and #2 with:
IF [ABS [#1-#2]LT 0.1]
Then, assume that the values are equal when the difference does not exceed the allowable error
range.
• Trigonometric functions
- 260 -
The absolute error is guaranteed for trigonometric functions. However, the relative error is 10-15 or
greater. Carefully perform multiplication or division after executing a trigonometric function.
• FIX function
When using the FIX function for the result of an operation, be careful with the precision. For
example, when the following operations are performed, the value of #3 may not always be 2.
N10 #1=0.002;
N20 #2=#1*1000;
N30 #3=FIX[#2];
This is because an error may occur in operation N20 and the result may not be
#2=2.0000000000000000
but a value a little smaller than 2 such as the following:
#2=1.9999999999999997
To prevent this, specify N30 as follows:
N30 #3=FIX[#2+0.001];
Generally, specify the FIX function as follows:
FIX[expression] → FIX[expression ±ε]
(Specify +ε when the value of the expression is positive or -ε when it is negative, and 0.1, 0.01,
0.001, ... for ε as required.)
NOTE
The operation result of exponential function #i=EXP[#j]; overflows when #j
exceeds about 790.
When bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1

Errors may occur when operations are performed.
Table 17.3 (b) Errors involved in operations

Operation Average error Maximum error Type of error
a = b*c 1.55×10-10 4.66×10-10 Relative error(*1)
a=b/c 4.66×10-10 1.88×10-9 ε
a= b 1.24×10-9 3.73×10-9 a
a=b+c 2.33×10-10 5.32×10-10 (*2)
a=b–c ε ε
MIN
b c
a = SIN [ b ] 5.0×10-9 1.0×10-8 Absolute error(*3)

a = COS [ b ]
ε degrees
-6 -6
a = ATAN [ b ] / [ c ] 1.8×10 3.6×10
NOTE
1 The relative error depends on the result of the operation.
2 Smaller of the two types of errors is used.
3 The absolute error is constant, regardless of the result of the operation.
4 Function TAN performs SIN/COS.
5 Note that, in the case of natural logarithm #i=LN[#j]; and exponential function
#i=EXP[#j];, the relative error may become 10-8 or greater.
6 The operation result of exponential function #i=EXP[#j]; overflows when #j
exceeds about 110.
• The precision of variable values is about 8 decimal digits. When very large numbers are handled in
an addition or subtraction, the expected results may not be obtained.
Example:
When an attempt is made to assign the following values to variables #1 and #2:
- 261 -
#1=9876543210123.456
#2=9876543277777.777
the values of the variables become:
#1=9876543200000.000
#2=9876543300000.000
In this case, when #3=#2-#1; is calculated, #3=100000.000 results. (The actual result
of this calculation is slightly different because it is performed in binary.)
• Also be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and
LT.
Example:
IF[#1 EQ #2] is effected by errors in both #1 and #2, possibly resulting in an incorrect
decision.
Therefore, instead find the difference between the two variables with IF[ABS[#1-#2] LT
0.001].
Then, assume that the values of the two variables are equal when the difference does
not exceed an allowable limit (0.001 in this case).
• Also, be careful when rounding down a value.
Example:
When #2=#1*1000; is calculated where #1=0.002;, the resulting value of variable #2 is
not exactly 2 but 1.99999997.
Here, when #3=FIX[#2]; is specified, the resulting value of variable #3 is not 2.0 but
1.0.
In this case, round down the value after correcting the error so that the result is greater
than the expected number, or round it off as follows:
#3=FIX[#2+0.001]
#3=ROUND[#2]
- Brackets
Brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose an expression.
Note that parentheses ( ) are used for comments.
- Divisor
When a divisor of zero is specified in a division, an alarm PS0112, “ZERO DIVIDE” occurs.
17.4 READING PARAMETERS

Overview
By using the PRM function, it is possible to read parameters.
Format Remarks
#i = PRM[ #j, #k ] ; In the case of parameters other than axis type parameters
#i = PRM[ #j, #k ] / [ #l ] ; In the case of axis type parameters
Explanation
- Reading a parameter
#i=PRM[#j,#k]
#i=PRM[#j,#k]/[#l]
• For #j, enter a parameter number. If the number of a parameter that cannot be read, alarm PS0119,
"ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF RANGE", is issued.
• To read a bit type parameter, specify, for #k, the bit number of the bit type parameter in the range of
0 to 7. If a bit number is specified, data with the specified bit is read. If none is specified, data with
all bits is read. For parameters other than bit type parameters, the bit number is ignored.
- 262 -
• For #l, set the axis number of an axis type parameter in the range of 1 to 7. If an axis type parameter
is to be read but #l is not specified, alarm PS0119 is issued. For parameters other than axis type
parameters, #1 may be omitted together with '/'.
Example
1. Reading the value of the third axis of bit 0 (MIR) of bit axis type parameter No. 0012
If parameter No. 0012 (third axis) = 10010001
#2=12 ; Parameter number setting
#3=0 ; Bit number setting
#4=3 ; Axis number setting
If reading data with all bits
#1=PRM[#2]/[#4] ; #1=10010001
If reading data with a specified bit
#1=PRM[#2, #3]/[#4] ; #1=1
2. Reading the value of the fourth axis of axis type parameter No. 1322
#4=4 ; Axis number setting
#1=PRM[#2]/[#4] ;
3. Reading bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404

If parameter No. 0012 (third axis) = 01010000
#3=2 ; Bit number setting
If reading data with all bits
#1=PRM[#2] ; #1=1010000
If reading data with a specified bit
#1=PRM[#2,#3] ; #1=0
17.5 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS

The following blocks are referred to as macro statements:
• Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=)
• Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END)
• Blocks containing a macro call command (such as macro calls by G65, G66, G67, or other G codes,
or by M codes)
Any block other than a macro statement is referred to as an NC statement.
Explanation
- Differences from NC statements
• Even when single block mode is on, the machine does not stop. Note, however, that the machine
stops in the single block mode when bit 5 of parameter SBM No. 6000 is 1.
• Macro blocks are not regarded as blocks that involve no movement in the cutter compensation mode.
- NC statements that have the same property as macro statements

• NC statements that include a subprogram call command (such as subprogram calls by M98 or other
M codes, or by T codes) and not include other command addresses except an O, N, P, or L address
have the same property as macro statements.
• NC statements that include M99 and those do not include other command addresses except an O, N,
P, or L address have the same property as macro statements.
- 263 -
17.6 BRANCH AND REPETITION

In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three
types of branch and repetition operations are used:
Branch and repetitionGOTO (unconditional branch)

IF (conditional branch: if ..., then...)
WHILE (repetition while ...)
17.6.1 Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement)

A branch to sequence number n occurs. When a sequence number outside of the range 1 to 99999 is
specified, an alarm PS1128, “SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF RANGE” occurs. A sequence number can
also be specified using an expression.
GOTOn ; n: Sequence number (1 to 99999)
Example: GOTO 1;
GOTO #10;
WARNING
Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single
program. It is very dangerous to specify such blocks because the destination of a
branch from the GOTO statement is undefined.
NOTE
1 A backward branch takes more time as compared with a forward branch.
2 In the destination of GOTOn, that is, the block with sequence number n, the
sequence number must appear at the beginning of the block. If the sequence
number is not at the beginning of the block, a branch cannot be made.
17.6.2 GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers

When the GOTO statement is executed in a custom macro control command, a sequence number search is
made for sequence numbers stored at previous execution of the corresponding blocks at a high speed.
As a "sequence number stored at previous execution of the corresponding block", a unique sequence
number within the same program or the sequence number of a subprogram call with which the block was
executed is stored.
The storage type differs depending on the values of the following parameters.
(1) When bit 1 (MGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
• Fixed type: Up to 20 sequence numbers stored at execution of the corresponding blocks
from the start of operation
(2) When bit 4 (HGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
• Variable type: Up to 30 sequence numbers stored at execution of the corresponding blocks
before execution of the GOTO statement
• History type: Up to 10 sequence numbers stored by a sequence number search previously
made using the GOTO statement
The stored sequence numbers are canceled in the following cases:
• Immediately after power-on
• After a reset
• Operation after program registration or editing (including background editing and MDI program
editing)
- 264 -
WARNING
Do not specify multiple blocks with the same sequence number in a single
program.
It is very dangerous to specify the sequence number of the branch destination
before and after the GOTO statement and execute the GOTO statement
because the branch destination changes according to the values of the
parameters as shown below:
When bit 1 (MGO) or 4 (HGO) of parameter No. When both bits 1 (MGO) and 4 (HGO) of
6000 is set to 1 parameter No. 6000 are set to 0
: :
N10; A branch to N10;
N10 before
: : A branch to
the GOTO
GOTO10; statement GOTO10; N10 after the
: occurs. : GOTO
N10; N10; statement
occurs.
Even if bit 1 (MGO) or 4 (HGO) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1 and the GOTO
statement is executed, the branch to a block before GOTO statement may not
occur, when the destination sequence number is not contained in the data stored
at previous block execution. In this case, a branch to the sequence number in a
block following the GOTO statement occurs (the destination is the same as when
both bits are set to 0).
NOTE
When an external program is read and executed by DNC operation, the
executed sequence numbers are not stored.
When a program registered in memory is executed by a subprogram call, the
sequence numbers are stored.
CAUTION
According to the restrictions on the GOTO statement, no branch to a sequence
number within a DO-END loop cannot be made. If a program in which a branch
to a sequence number within a loop occurs is executed, operation may differ
depending on whether the GOTO statement using stored sequence numbers is
used.
17.6.3 Conditional Branch (IF Statement)

Specify a <conditional expression> after IF.
IF[<conditional expression>]GOTOn
If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a branch to sequence number n occurs. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, the next block is executed.
If the value of variable #1 is greater than 10, a branch to sequence number N2 occurs.
If the condition is IF [#1 GT 10] GOTO 2 ;
not satisfied
Processing If the condition is satisfied
N2 G00 G91 X10.0 ;

:
- 265 -
IF[<conditional expression>]THEN
If the specified <conditional expression> is satisfied (true), a macro statement specified after THEN is
executed.
Only a single macro statement is executed.
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same, 0 is assigned to #3.

IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN#3=0 ;
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same and those of #3 and #4 are also the same, 0 is assigned to #5.
IF[[#1 EQ #2] AND [#3 EQ #4]] THEN#5=0 ;
If the values of #1 and #2 are the same or those of #3 and #4 are the same, 0 is assigned to #5.
IF[[#1 EQ #2] OR [#3 EQ #4]] THEN#5=0 ;
Explanation
- <Conditional expression>
<Conditional expressions> are divided into <simple conditional expressions> and <complex conditional
expressions>. In a <simple conditional expression>, a relational operator described in Fig. 17.6.3 (a) is
specified between two variables or between a variable and constant to be compared. An <expression> can
be used instead of a variable. With a <complex conditional expression>, an AND (logical AND), OR
(logical OR), or XOR (exclusive OR) operation is performed for the results (true or false) of multiple
<simple conditional expressions>.
- Relational operators
Relational operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether
they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the equal sign (=) and
inequality sign (>, <) cannot be used as a relational operator.
Fig. 17.6.3 (a) Relational operators

Operator Meaning
EQ Equal to(=)
NE Not equal to(≠)
GT Greater than(>)
GE Greater than or equal to(≥)
LT Less than(<)
LE Less than or equal to(≤)
Sample program
The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
O9500;
#1=0;................................ Initial value of the variable to hold the sum
#2=1;................................ Initial value of the variable as an addend
N1 IF[#2 GT 10] GOTO 2; ... Branch to N2 when the addend is greater than 10
#1=#1+#2;........................ Calculation to find the sum
#2=#2+1;.......................... Next addend
GOTO 1; .......................... Branch to N1
N2 M30;............................... End of program
17.6.4 Repetition (WHILE Statement)

Specify a conditional expression after WHILE. While the specified condition is satisfied, the program
from DO to END is executed. If the specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to
the block after END.
- 266 -
WHILE [conditional expression] DO m ; (m=1,2,3)
If the If the Processing

condition condition
is not is satisfied
satisfied
END m ;
:
Explanation
While the specified condition is satisfied, the program from DO to END after WHILE is executed. If the
specified condition is not satisfied, program execution proceeds to the block after END. The same format
as for the IF statement applies. A number after DO and a number after END are identification numbers
for specifying the range of execution. The numbers 1, 2, and 3 can be used. When a number other than 1,
2, and 3 is used, an alarm PS0126, “ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER” occurs.
- Nesting
The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO-END loop can be used as many times as desired. Note,
however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), an alarm PS0124,
“MISSING END STATEMENT” occurs.
1. The identification numbers (1 3. DO loops can be nested to a
to 3) can be used as many maximum depth of three levels.
times as required.
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ; WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
:
Processing WHILE [ … ] DO 2 ;
:
END 1 ;
WHILE [ … ] DO 3 ;
:
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ; Processing
Processing END 3 ;
:
END 1 ;
END 2 ;
:
:
2. DO ranges cannot END 1 ;
overlap.
4. Control can be transferred
to the outside of a loop.
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
Processing WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
WHILE [ … ] DO 2 ; IF [ … ] GOTO n ;
:
END 1 ;
END 1 ;
Nn
Processing
5. Branches cannot be made to a
location within a loop.
END 2 ;
IF [ … ] GOTO n ;
:
WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;
:
Nn … ;
END 1 ;
Limitation
- Infinite loops
When DO m is specified without specifying the WHILE statement, an infinite loop ranging from DO to
END is produced.
- 267 -
- Processing time
When a branch to the sequence number specified in a GOTO statement occurs, the sequence number is
searched for. For this reason, processing in the reverse direction takes a longer time than processing in the
forward direction. Therefore, in the case of processing in the reverse direction, use the WHILE statement
for repetition to reduce processing time.
- Undefined variable
In a conditional expression that uses EQ or NE, a <null> and zero have different effects. In other types of
conditional expressions, a <null> is regarded as zero.
Sample program
The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10.
O0001;
#1=0;
#2=1;
WHILE[#2 LE 10]DO 1;
#1=#1+#2;
#2=#2+1;
END 1;
M30;
17.7 MACRO CALL

A macro program can be called using the following methods. The calling methods can roughly be divided
into two types: macro calls and subprogram calls.
A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way.
Macro call Simple call (G65)
Modal call (G66, G67)
Macro call using a G code
Macro call using an M code
Subprogram call Subprogram call using an M code
Subprogram call using a T code
Subprogram call using a specific code
Limitation
- Call nesting
Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels and subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of
up to ten levels; calls can be nested to a depth of up to 15 levels in total.
- Differences between macro calls and subprogram calls

Macro call (G65, G66, Ggg, or Mmm) differs from subprogram call (for example M98, Mmm, or Ttt) as
described below.
• With a macro call, an argument (data passed to a macro) can be specified. A subprogram call does
not have this capability.
• If a macro call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 G65 Pp), an alarm
PS0127, “DUPLICATE NC,MACRO STATEMENT” occurs.
• If a subprogram call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 M98 Pp), the
subprogram is called after the command is executed.
• In any macro call block, the machine does not stop in the single block mode.
- 268 -
If a subprogram call block contains another NC command (such as G01 X100.0 M98 Pp), the
machine stops in the single block mode.
• With a macro call, the level of local variables changes. With a subprogram call, the level of local
variables does not change. (See "Local variable levels" in Limitation of Subsection, “Simple Call
(G65)”.)
17.7.1 Simple Call (G65)

When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed
to the custom macro program.
G65 P p L l <argument- P : Number of the program to call
specification> ; l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data passed to the macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #3=#1+#2 ;
G65 P9010 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; IF [#3 GT 360] GOTO 9 ;
: G00 G91 X#3 ;
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Explanation
- Call
• After G65, specify at address P the program number of the custom macro to call.
• When a number of repetitions is required, specify a number from 1 to 999999999 after address L.
When L is omitted, 1 is assumed.
• By using argument specification, values are assigned to corresponding local variables.
- Argument specification
Two types of argument specification are available. Argument specification I uses letters other than G, L,
O, N, and P once each. Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and also uses I, J, and K up
to ten times. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to the letters used.
• Argument specification I
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
• Addresses G, L, N, O, and P cannot be used in arguments.

• Addresses that need not be specified can be omitted. Local variables corresponding to an omitted
address are set to null.
• Addresses do not need to be specified alphabetically. They conform to word address format.
I, J, and K need to be specified alphabetically, however.
Argument specification I is always used for I, J, and K by setting bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008
to 1
- 269 -
Example
- When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 0, I_J_K_ means that I = #4, J = #5,
and K = #6 while K_J_I_ means K = #6, J = #8, and I= #10 because argument
specification II is used.
- When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 1, K_J_I_ means that I = #4, J = #5,
and K = #6, which is the same as with I_J_K_, because argument specification I
is used.
• Argument specification II
Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument
specification II is used to pass values such as 3-dimensional coordinates as arguments.
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A #1 IK3 #12 J7 #23
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33
• Subscripts of I, J, and K for indicating the order of argument specification are not written in the
actual program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (IJK) of parameter No. 6008 is 1, argument II cannot be used.
Limitation
- Format
G65 must be specified before any argument.
- Mixture of argument specifications I and II

The CNC internally identifies argument specification I and argument specification II. If a mixture of
argument specification I and argument specification II is specified, the type of argument specification
specified later takes precedence.
[Example]
G65 A1.0 B2.0 I-3.0 I4.0 D5.0 P1000 ;
(Variables)
#1:1.0
#2:2.0
#3:
#4:-3.0
#5:
#6:
#7:4.0 5.0
When both the I4.0 and D5.0 arguments are commanded for variable #7 in this example, the latter, D5.0,
is valid.
- 270 -
- Position of the decimal point

The units used for argument data passed without a decimal point correspond to the least input increment
of each address.
CAUTION
The value of an argument passed without a decimal point may vary according to
the system configuration of the machine. It is good practice to use decimal points
in macro call arguments to maintain program compatibility.
When a value is specified with no decimal point, the number of decimal places is determined as follows.
Address For a non-axis address For an axis address
D, E, H, M, S, or T 0
Q or R α (NOTE 2)
A, C, I, J, K, X, Y, or Z α (NOTE 2) β (NOTE 3)
B, U, V(NOTE 1), or W 0 β (NOTE 3)
Second auxiliary function γ (NOTE 4)
Address Metric input Inch input

F (G94 mode) 0 2
NOTE
1 When V is used in a call using a specific code, the number of decimal places is
determined according to the setting for the reference axis.
2 α is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis
specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the table in NOTE 3.
3 β is determined according to the increment system for the corresponding axis
address as listed in the following table.
Increment
Linear axis (metric input) Linear axis (inch input) Rotation axis
system
IS-A 2 3 2
IS-B 3 4 3
When bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 is set to 1, the above values from which
1 is subtracted are used. When the increment system for an axis is IS-A,
however, the setting of bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 is not effective.
When calculator-type decimal notation for each axis is used (bit 0 (ADX) of
parameter No. 3455 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. When bit 7
(EAP) of parameter No. 3452 is set to 1, however, calculator-type decimal
notation is not effective and the number of decimal places is determined as listed
in the above table.
4 γ is determined according to the increment system for the reference axis (axis
specified with parameter No. 1031) as listed in the following table. (When bit 7
(BDX) of parameter No. 3450 is set to 1, γ is also determined in the same way.)
AUP(3450#0) = 1
Increment system for AUP (No.3450#0)
AUX (No.3405#0) = 0 AUX (No.3405#0) = 1
the reference axis =0
Metric Inch Metric Inch
IS-A 2 2 3
0
IS-B 3 3 4
5 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401
is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0.
- 271 -
- Call nesting
Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels including simple calls (G65) and modal calls
(G66). Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of up to 15 levels including macro calls.
A macro program can also be called during MDI operation in the same way.
- Local variable levels

• Local variables from level 0 to 5 are provided for nesting.
• The level of the main program is 0.
• Each time a macro is called (with G65, G66, Ggg, or Mmm), the local variable level is incremented
by one. The values of the local variables at the previous level are saved in the CNC.
• When M99 is executed in a macro program, control returns to the calling program. At that time, the
local variable level is decremented by one; the values of the local variables saved when the macro
was called are restored.
Main program Macro Macro Macro Macro Macro
(level 0) (level 1) (level 2) (level 3) (level 4) (level 5)
O0001 ; O0002 ; O0003 ; O0004 ; O0005 ; O0006
: : : : : :
#1=1 ; : : : : :
G65 P2 A2 ; G65 P3 A 3; G65 P4 A4 ; G65 P5 A5 ; G65 P6 A6 ; :
: : : : : :
: : : : : :
M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;
Local variables
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 4) (Level 5)
(level 0)
1 2 3 4 #1 5 #1 6
#1 #1 #1 #1
: : : : : : : : : : : :
: : : : : :
#33 #33 #33 #33 #33 #33
Common variables
#100-, #500- Variables that can be read from and written to by macros at different levels
17.7.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)

Once G66 is issued to specify a modal call a macro is called after a block specifying movement along
axes is executed. This continues until G67 is issued to cancel a modal call.
G66 P p L l <argument-specification> ; P : Number of the program to call
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data passed to the macro
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66 P9100 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; G00 Z-#1 ;
G00 G90 X100.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F300 ;
Y200.0 ; :
X150.0 Y300.0 ; :
G67 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanation
- Call
• After G66, specify at address P a program number subject to a modal call.
• When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address
L.
- 272 -
• As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro program is specified in arguments.
• In the G66 mode, a macro or subprogram can be called.
- Cancellation
When a G67 code is specified, modal macro calls are no longer performed in subsequent blocks.
- Call nesting
Macro calls can be nested to a depth of up to five levels including simple calls (G65) and modal calls
(G66). Subprogram calls can be nested to a depth of up to 15 levels including macro calls.
- Modal call nesting

For a single modal call (when G66 is specified only once), each time the move command is executed, the
specified macro is called. When nested modal macro calls are specified, the macro at the next higher level
is called each time the move command for a macro call is executed.
Macros are called in reverse order in which they are specified. Each time G67 is issued, the macros are
canceled one by one in reverse order in which they are specified.
[Example]
G66 P9100 ; O9100 ; O9200 ;
X10.0 ; (1-1) Z50.0 ; (2-1) X60.0 ; (3-1)
G66 P9200 ; M99 ; Y70.0 ; (3-2)
X15.0 ; (1-2) M99;
G67 ; Cancels P9200.
G67 ; Cancels P9100.
X-25.0 ; (1-3)
Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted)
(1-1) (1-2) (1-3)

(2-1) (3-1) (3-2)
(2-1) (2-1)
* No modal call is performed after (1-3) because the mode is not the macro call mode.
Limitation
• G66 and G67 blocks are specified in pairs in the same program. If a G67 code is specified not in the
G66 mode, an alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” occurs. Bit 0 (G67) of
parameter No. 6000 can be set to 1 to specify that the alarm does not occur in this case.
• In a G66 block, no macros can be called. Local variables (arguments) are set, however.
• G66 needs to be specified before any arguments.
• No macros can be called in a block which contains a code such as a auxiliary function that does not
involve movement along an axis.
• Local variables (arguments) can only be set in G66 blocks. Note that local variables are not set each
time a modal call is performed.
NOTE
If M99 is specified in a block in which a call is performed, it is executed after the
call is performed.
17.7.3 Macro Call Using a G Code

By setting a G code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be
called in the same way as for a simple call (G65).
- 273 -
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: :
G81 X10.0 Y20.0 Z-10.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Parameter No.6050=81
Explanation
By setting a G code number from -9999 to 9999 used to call a custom macro program (O9010 to O9019)
in the corresponding parameters Nos.6050 to 6059, the macro program can be called in the same way as
with G65.
When a negative G code is set, a modal call (G66 mode) is performed.

For example, when a parameter is set so that macro program O9010 can be called with G81, a
user-specific cycle created using a custom macro can be called without modifying the machining
program.
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers

Parameter number Program number
6050 O9010
6051 O9011
6052 O9012
6053 O9013
6054 O9014
6055 O9015
6056 O9016
6057 O9017
6058 O9018
6059 O9019
- Repetition
As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from 1 to 999999999 can be specified at address L.
As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and
argument specification II. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to
the addresses used.
Limitation
- Nesting of calls using G codes
• To call another program in a program called using a G code, only G65, M98, G66, or G66.1 can be
used normally.
• When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using an M code, T code, or specific
code can be performed in a program called using a G code.
- 274 -
17.7.4 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting G code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program
to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple G codes can be defined.
Explanation
As many custom macros as the number specified in parameter No. 6040 can be called using as many G
codes as the number specified in parameter No. 6040. The numeric value set in parameter No. 6038
indicates the starting G code number and the program number set in parameter No. 6039 indicates the
starting program number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6040.
When a negative G code is set in parameter No. 6038, modal calls are performed.
The number of repetitions and argument specification are set in the same way as with a macro call using a
G code.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6038 to 900, parameter No. 6039 to 1000, and parameter No. 6040 to
100.
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinations are defined as shown above. When parameter No.
6038 is changed to -900, custom macro calls (modal calls) for the same combinations are defined.
NOTE
1 The calls defined by this setting become all invalid in the following cases:
<1> A value outside the valid data range is set in one of the above parameters.
<2> (No. 6039 + No. 6040 - 1) > 9999
2 Simple and modal calls cannot be mixed in the specification.
3 If the G code set in parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059 to call the corresponding
macro program is within the G code range for calling programs using multiple G
codes, the macro program corresponding to the G code set in parameters Nos.
6050 to 6059 is called.
17.7.5 Macro Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macro program can be
called in the same way as with a simple call (G65).
O0001 ; O9020 ;
: :
M50 A1.0 B2.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Explanation
By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call custom macro program O9020 to O9029 in
the corresponding parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089, the macro program can be called in the same way as
with G65.
- 275 -

Parameter number Corresponding program number
6080 O9020
6081 O9021
6082 O9022
6083 O9023
6084 O9024
6085 O9025
6086 O9026
6087 O9027
6088 O9028
6089 O9029
Example) When parameter No. 6080 is set to 990, O9020 is called using M990.
- Repetition
As with a simple call, two types of argument specification are available: Argument specification I and
argument specification II. The type of argument specification is determined automatically according to
the addresses used.
Limitation
• An M code used to call a macro program must be specified at the start of a block.
• To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, G66, and M98 can be used
normally.
• When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using a G code can be performed in a
program called using an M code.
17.7.6 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting M code number used to call a macro program, the number of the starting program
to be called, and the number of definitions, macro calls using multiple M codes can be defined.
Explanation
As many custom macros as the number specified in parameter No. 6049 can be called using as many M
indicates the starting M code number and the program number set in parameter No. 6048 indicates the
starting program number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6049.
The number of repetitions and argument specification are set in the same way as with a macro call using a
M code.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6047 to 9000, parameter No. 6048 to 4000, and parameter No. 6049 to
100.
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinations are defined as shown above.
- 276 -
NOTE
<2> (No. 6048 + No. 6049 - 1) > 9999
2 If the M code set in parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 to call the corresponding
macro program is within the M code range for calling programs using multiple M
codes, the macro program corresponding to the M code set in parameters Nos.
6080 to 6089 is called.
17.7.7 Subprogram Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro program) in a parameter, the macro
program can be called in the same way as with a subprogram call (M98).
O0001 O9001
; ;
: :
M03 ; :
: :
Explanation
By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call subprogram O9001 to O9009 in the
corresponding parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079, the subprogram can be called in the same way as with M98.

Parameter number Program number
6071 O9001
6072 O9002
6073 O9003
6074 O9004
6075 O9005
6076 O9006
6077 O9007
6078 O9008
6079 O9009
- Repetition
Argument specification is not allowed.
- M code
An M code in a macro program that has been called is treated as an ordinary M code.
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, G66, and M98 can be used
normally.
program called using an M code.
- 277 -
17.7.8 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple

Definitions)
By setting the starting M code number used to call a subprogram, the number of the starting subprogram
to be called, and the number of definitions, subprogram calls using multiple M codes can be defined.
Explanation
As many subprograms as the number specified in parameter No. 6046 can be called using as many M
indicates the starting M code number and the numeric value set in parameter No. 6045 indicates the
starting subprogram number. To disable this type of call, set 0 in parameter No. 6046.
[Example]
Set parameter No. 6044 to 80000000, parameter No. 6045 to 30000000, and parameter
No. 6046 to 100.
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
Subprogram calls for 100 combinations are defined as shown above.
NOTE
<2> (No. 6045 + No. 6046 - 1) > 9999
2 If the M code, set in parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079, to call the corresponding
subprogram is within the range for M code multiple definitions of calling
subprograms, the subprogram corresponding to the M code set in parameters
Nos. 6071 to 6079 is called.
17.7.9 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code

By enabling subprograms to be called with a T code in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time
the T code is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9000 ;
: :
T23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 = 1
Explanation
- Call
By setting bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 to 1, subprogram O9000 can be called each time a T code is
specified in a machining program. A T code specified in a machining program is assigned to common
variable #149.
- Repetition
- 278 -
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using a T code, only G65, G66, and M98 can be used
normally.
program called using a T code.
17.7.10 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address

By enabling subprograms to be called with a specific address in a parameter, a subprogram can be called
each time the specific address is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9004 ;(#146=100.)

: :
B100. ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6090=66(B)
Explanation
- Call
By setting the code (ASCII code converted to decimal) corresponding to a specific address in parameter
No. 6090 or No. 6091, the custom macro program, O9004 or O9005, corresponding to each parameter can
be called when the specific address is specified in a machining program. The code value corresponding to
a specific address specified in a machining program is assigned to the common variables (#146, #147).
The table below indicates the addresses that can be set.
Address Parameter setting Address Parameter setting

A 65 P 80
B 66 Q 81
D 68 R 82
F 70 S 83
H 72 T 84
I 73 V 86
J 74 X 88
K 75 Y 89
L 76 Z 90
M 77
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program numbers and

between the parameter numbers and common variables
Parameter number Program number Common variable
6090 O9004 #146
6091 O9005 #147
- Repetition
- 279 -
Limitation
• To call another program in a program called using a specific code, only G65, G66, and M98 can be
used normally.
program called using a specific code.
Sample program
By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative usage time of each tool is
measured.
Conditions
• The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured.
No measurement is made for tools with numbers greater than T05.
• The following variables are used to store the tool numbers and measured times:
#501 Cumulative usage time of tool number 1

• Usage time starts being counted when the M03 command is specified and stops when M05 is
specified. System variable #3002 is used to measure the time during which the cycle start lamp is on.
The time during which the machine is stopped by feed hold and single block stop operation is not
counted, but the time used to change tools and pallets is included.
Operation check
- Parameter setting
Set 3 in parameter No.6071, and set 5 in parameter No.6072.
- Variable value setting

Set 0 in variables #501 to #505.
- 280 -
- Program that calls a macro program

O0001;
T01 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #501.
T02 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #502.
T03 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #503.
T04 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #504.
T05 M06;
M03;
:
M05;.................... Changes #505.
M30;
- Macro program (program called)

O9001(M03); ....................................... Macro to start counting
M01;
IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; ....................... No tool specified
IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; ....................... Out-of-range tool number
#3002=0; ....................................... Clears the timer.
N9 M03; ....................................... Starts tool action.
M99;
O9002(M05); ....................................... Macro to end counting

M01;
IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; ....................... No tool specified
IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; ....................... Out-of-range tool number
#[500+#4120]=#3002+#[500+#4120]; .. Calculates cumulative time.
N9 M05; ...................................................... Stops tool.

M99;
17.8 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS

For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is
referred to as buffering. For example, in the cutter compensation mode (G41 or G42), the CNC prereads
the NC statements in at least three blocks ahead to calculate intersections.
Macro statements for arithmetic expressions and conditional branches are processed as soon as they are
read into the buffer. Therefore, the timing of the macro statement execution is not always the specified
order.
At the blocks containing M00, M01, M02 or M30, blocks containing M-codes for which buffering is
suppressed by setting parameters Nos. 3411 to 3420, and 3421 to 3432, and blocks containing prevention
buffering G codes such as G33 or G53, the CNC stops to preread the NC statement after that. Then, the
- 281 -
stop of the macro statement execution is guaranteed until such M codes or G codes complete its
execution.
Explanation
- When the next block is not buffered (M codes that are not buffered, G33, etc.)
> N1 G31 X100.0 ; N1
N2 #100=1 NC statement
: execution
N2
Macro statement execution
> :Block being executed
Buffer
CAUTION
In case that you need to execute the macro statement after completing the block
just before the macro statement, specify M code or G code that is not buffered
just before the macro statement. Specially, in case of reading/writing the system
variables to control signals, coordinates, offset value, etc., it may different system
variable data by the timing of the NC statement execution. To avoid this
phenomenon, specify such M codes or G codes before the macro statement, if
necessary.
- Buffering the next block in other than cutter compensation mode (G41, G42)
> N1 X100.0 ; N1 N4
NC statement
execution
N2 #1=100 ;
N3 #2=200 ; N2 N3
N4 Y200.0 ; Macro statement
execution
Buffer N4
> : Block being executed

: Block read into the buffer
When N1 is being executed, the next NC statement (N4) is read into the buffer. The macro statements
(N2, N3) between N1 and N4 are processed during execution of N1.
- 282 -
- In cutter compensation mode (G41, G42)

> N1 G01 G41 X100.0 F100 Dd ;
N2 #1=100 ;
> : Block being executed
N3 Y100.0 ;
: Blocks read into the buffer
N4 #2=200 ;
N5 Y150.0 ;
N6 #3=300 ;
N7 X200.0 ;
N1 N3
NC statement
execution
N2 N4 N6
Macro statement
execution
N3 N5 N7
Buffer
When N1 is being executed, the NC statements in the next three blocks (up to N7) are read into the buffer.
The macro statements (N1, N4, N6) between N1 and N7 are processed during execution of N1.
Diagnosis data
Diagnosis 1493 Number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros
[Data type] 2-word
[Unit of data] Block
The number of macro statement blocks executed by custom and execution macros per
1024 ms is displayed.
This data provides an indication of the actual macro statement processing speed.
17.9 REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS

Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way
as subprograms. The storage capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom
macros and subprograms.
17.10 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM

MACROS
In addition to the codes used in ordinary programs, the following codes are used in custom macro
programs.
Explanation
- Codes
(1) When the ISO code is used or when bit 4 (ISO) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0
(The codes are represented in hexadecimal.)
Meaning Code Meaning Code
* 0AAh ? 03Fh
= 0BDh @ 0C0h
# 0A3h & 0A6h
[ 0DBh _ 05Fh
] 0DDh O 0CFh
- 283 -
(2) When the EIA code is used or when the ISO code is used with bit 4 (ISO) of parameter No. 6008 set
to 1
Meaning Code Meaning Code
* Code set in parameter No. 6010 ? Code set in parameter No. 6015
= Code set in parameter No. 6011 @ Code set in parameter No. 6016
# Code set in parameter No. 6012 & Code set in parameter No. 6017
[ Code set in parameter No. 6013 _ Code set in parameter No. 6018
] Code set in parameter No. 6014
For O, the same code as for O indicating a program number is used. Set a hole pattern for each of *, =, #,
[, ], ?, @, &, and _ in the ISO or EIA code in the corresponding parameters Nos. 6010 to 6018.
The code 00h cannot be used. The code indicating an alphabetic character can be used for the code
indicating a character listed above, but the code can be no longer used to indicate the original character.
- Reserved words
The following reserved words are used in custom macros:
AND, OR, XOR, MOD, EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE, LE,
SIN, COS, TAN, ASIN, ACOS, ATAN, ATN, SQRT, SQR, ABS, BIN, BCD, ROUND, RND, FIX,
FUP, LN, EXP, POW, ADP, IF, GOTO, WHILE, DO, END, BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, PCLOS,
SETVN, PRM
System variable (constant) names and registered common variable names are also used as reserved words.
17.11 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS

In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They
are referred to as external output commands.
• BPRNT
• DPRNT
• POPEN
• PCLOS
These commands are provided to output variable values and characters through the Reader/Puncher
interface.
Explanation
Specify these commands in the following order:
Open command: POPEN

Before specifying a sequence of data output commands, specify this command to establish a
connection to an external input/output device.
Data output command: BPRNT or DPRNT
Specify necessary data output.
Close command: PCLOS
When all data output commands have completed, specify PCLOS to release a connection to an
external input/output device.
- Open command POPEN

The POPEN command establishes a connection to an external input/output device. It must be specified
before a sequence of data output commands. The CNC outputs a DC2 control code.
- Data output command BPRNT

The BPRNT command outputs characters and variable values in binary.
- 284 -
BPRNT [ a #b [c] … ]
Number of significant decimal places Variable

Variable
Character
(i) Specified characters are converted to the codes according to the setting data (ISO) that is output at
that time.
Specifiable characters are as follows:
• Letters (A to Z)
• Numbers
• Special characters (*, /, +, -, ?, @, &, _)
NOTE
1 An asterisk (*) is output by a space code.
2 When using ?, @, &, and/or _, use the ISO code as the output code (setting data
(ISO) = 1).
(ii) All variables are stored with a decimal point. Specify a variable followed by the number of
significant decimal places enclosed in brackets. A variable value is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data,
including the decimal digits. It is output as binary data starting from the highest byte.
(iii) When specified data has been output, an EOB code is output according to the setting code (ISO).
(iv) <Null> variables are regarded as 0.
Example
BPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ]
Variable value
#100=0.40956
#101=-1638.4
#10=12.34
are output as follows:
C3 A0 A0 D8 00 00 01 9A 59 FF E7 00 00 4D 00 00 00 0C 0A
↓ ↓
C sp sp X0000019A YFFE70000 M0000000C LF
(**) (410) (-1638400) (12) (;)
- Data output command DPRNT

DPRNT [a #b [c d] … ]
Number of significant decimal places
Number of significant digits in the integer part
Variable
Character
The DPRNT command outputs characters and each digit in the value of a variable according to the code
set in the settings (ISO).
(i) For an explanation of the DPRNT command, see Items (i), (iii), and (iv) for the BPRNT command.
(ii) When outputting a variable, specify # followed by the variable number, then specify the number of
digits in the integer part and the number of decimal places enclosed in brackets.
For the value of a variable, as many codes as the specified number of digits are output according to
the settings one by one, starting with the highest digit. The decimal point is also output using the set
code.
- 285 -
Each variable must be a numeric value consisting of up to nine digits. When high-order digits are
zeros, these zeros are not output if bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 is 1. If parameter PRT is 0, a
space code is output each time a zero is encountered.
When the number of decimal places is not zero, digits in the decimal part are always output. If the
number of decimal places is zero, no decimal point is output.
When bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 is 0, a space code is output to indicate a positive number
instead of +; if parameter PRT is 1, no code is output.
Example
DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ]
Variable value
#2=128.47398
#5=-91.2
#30=123.456
are output as follows:
(1) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 0

D8 A0 A0 A0 B1 B2 B8 2E B4 B7 B4 59 2D A0 A0 A0 39 B1 2E B2 30 30 D4 A0 B2 33 0A
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
X sp sp sp 128.474 Y- sp sp sp 91.200 T sp 023 LF
(2) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 1

D8 B1 B2 B8 2E B4 B7 B4 59 2D 39 B1 2E B2 30 30 D4 A0 B2 33 0A
↓
X128.474 Y-91.200 T023 LF
- Close command PCLOS

The PCLOS command releases a connection to an external input/output device. Specify this command
when all data output commands have terminated. DC4 control code is output from the CNC.
- Required setting
Specify the specification number of an input/output device to be used for the I/O device specification
number.
According to the above settings, set data items (such as the baud rate) for the Reader/Puncher interface.
Never specify the output device FANUC Cassette or Floppy for output.
When specifying a DPRNT command to output data, specify whether leading zeros are output as spaces
(by setting bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6001 to 1 or 0).
To indicate the end of a line of data in ISO code, specify whether to use only an LF (bit 4 (CRO) of
parameter 6001 is 0) or an LF and CR bit 4 (CRO) of parameter 6001 is 1).
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to always specify the open command (POPEN), data output
command (BPRNT, DPRNT), and close command (PCLOS) together. Once an
open command is specified at the beginning of a program, it does not need to be
specified again except after a close command was specified.
2 Be sure to specify open commands and close commands in pairs. Specify the
close command at the end of the program. However, do not specify a close
command if no open command has been specified.
- 286 -
NOTE
3 When a reset operation is performed while commands are being output by a
data output command, output is stopped and subsequent data is erased.
Therefore, when a reset operation is performed by a code such as M30 at the
end of a program that performs data output, specify a close command at the end
of the program so that processing such as M30 is not performed until all data is
output.
17.12 RESTRICTIONS
- Sequence number search
A custom macro program cannot be searched for a sequence number.
- Single block
Even while a macro program is being executed, blocks can be stopped in the single block mode.
A block containing a macro call command (G66, Ggg, Mmm, or G67) does not stop even when the single
block mode is on.
Whether blocks containing arithmetic and logic operation commands and control commands are stopped
depends on the settings of bits 5 (SBM) and 7 (SBV) of parameter No. 6000 as shown in the following
table.
Bit 5 (SBM) of parameter No. 6000

0 1
Not stopped when the single block mode Can be stopped in the single block mode.
0
is on. (Variable #3003 cannot be used to
Bit 7 (SBV) of
Can be stopped in the single bock mode. disable single block stop. Single block
parameter No. 6000
1 (Variable #3003 can be used to enable or stop is always enabled.)
disable single block stop.)
Note that when a single block stop occurs at a macro statement in cutter compensation mode, the
statement is assumed to be a block that does not involve movement, and proper compensation cannot be
performed in some cases. (Strictly speaking, the block is regarded as specifying a movement with a travel
distance 0.)

A / appearing in the middle of an <expression> (enclosed in brackets [ ] on the right-hand side of an
arithmetic expression) is regarded as a division operator; it is not regarded as the specifier for an optional
block skip code.
- Operation in EDIT mode

By setting bit 0 (NE8) of parameter No.3202 and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 1, deletion and
editing are disabled for custom macro programs and subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999
and 9000 to 9999. This prevents registered custom macro programs and subprograms from being
destroyed by accident. When the entire memory is cleared, the contents of memory such as custom macro
programs are deleted.
- Reset
With a reset operation, local variables and common variables #100 to #199 are cleared to null values.
They can be prevented from clearing by setting bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No.6001 to 1. System variables
#100 to #199 are not cleared.
A reset operation clears any called states of custom macro programs and subprograms, and any DO states,
and returns control to the main program.
- 287 -
- Feed hold
When a feed hold is enabled during execution of a macro statement, the machine stops after execution of
the macro statement. The machine also stops when a reset or alarm occurs.
- DNC operation
The control commands (such as GOTO and WHILE-DO) cannot be executed during DNC operation.
However, this restriction is removed when a program registered in program memory is called during DNC
operation.
- Constant values that can be used in <expression>

+0.00000000001 to +999999999999
-999999999999 to -0.00000000001
The number of significant digits is 12 (decimal).
If this range is exceeded, an alarm PS0004, “INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS” occurs.
17.13 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT)
from the machine.
This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an interrupt command
in the following format:
Format
M96Pxxxx ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
Explanation
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of
an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which
vary from time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external
signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the
cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
:
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro
function.
- 288 -
M96 Pxxxx ;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) O xxxx ;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) **
M99 (Pxxxxx) ;
Nxxxxx ;
M97 ; Interrupt signal

(UINT) *
Fig 17.13 (a) Interruption type custom macro function
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an

interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. When the interrupt signal is
input during execution of the interrupt program or after M97 (UINT, marked with asterisks (*) or (**) in
Fig 17.13 (a)), it is ignored.
17.13.1 Specification Method

Explanation
- Interrupt conditions
A custom macro interrupt is available only during program execution. It is enabled under the following
conditions
• When memory operation, DNC operation, or MDI operation is selected
• When STL (start lamp) is on
• When a custom macro interrupt is not currently being processed
A macro interrupt cannot be performed during manual operation.
- Specification
Generally, the custom macro interrupt function is used by specifying M96 to enable the interrupt signal
(UINT) and M97 to disable the signal.
Once M96 is specified, a custom macro interrupt can be initiated by the input of the interrupt signal
(UINT) until M97 is specified or the CNC is reset. After M97 is specified or the CNC is reset, no custom
macro interrupts are initiated even when the interrupt signal (UINT) is input. The interrupt signal (UINT)
is ignored until another M96 command is specified.
- 289 -
M96 M97 M96
1
0
Interrupt signal
(UINT)
Effective interrupt
input signal
When UINT is kept on
The interrupt signal (UINT) becomes valid after M96 is specified. Even when the signal is input in M97
mode, it is ignored. When the signal input in M97 mode is kept on until M96 is specified, a custom macro
interrupt is initiated as soon as M96 is specified (only when the status-triggered scheme is employed);
when the edge-triggered scheme is employed, the custom macro interrupt is not initiated even when M96
is specified.
NOTE
For the status-triggered and edge-triggered schemes, see the Subsection
II-17.13.2, “Details of Functions”.
17.13.2 Details of Functions

Explanation
- Subprogram-type interrupt and macro-type interrupt
There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram-type interrupts and macro-type interrupts.
The interrupt type used is selected by bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003.
(a) Subprogram-type interrupt: When bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003 is set to 1

An interrupt program is called as a subprogram.
This means that the levels of local variables remain unchanged before and after the interrupt.
This interrupt is not included in the nesting level of subprogram calls.
(b) Macro-type interrupt: When bit 5 (MSB) of parameter No.6003 is set to 0
An interrupt program is called as a custom macro.
This means that the levels of local variables change before and after the interrupt.
The interrupt is not included in the nesting level of custom macro calls.
When a subprogram call or a custom macro call is performed within the interrupt program, this call
is included in the nesting level of subprogram calls or custom macro calls.
Arguments cannot be passed from the current program even when the custom macro interrupt is a
macro-type interrupt. The local variables immediately after interruption are all cleared to null.
- M codes for custom macro interrupt control

In general, custom macro interrupts are controlled by M96 and M97. However, these M codes, may
already being used for other purposes (such as an M function or macro M code call) by some machine
tool builders.
For this reason, bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No.6003 is provided to set M codes for custom macro interrupt
control.
When specifying this parameter to use the custom macro interrupt control M codes set by parameters, set
parameters Nos.6033 and 6034 as follows:
- 290 -
Set the M code to enable custom macro interrupts in parameters Nos.6033, and set the M code to disable
custom macro interrupts in parameter 6034.
When specifying that parameter-set M codes are not used, M96 and M97 are used as the custom macro
control M codes regardless of the settings of parameters Nos.6033 and 6034.
The M codes used for custom macro interrupt control are processed internally (they are not output to
external units). However, in terms of program compatibility, it is undesirable to use M codes other than
M96 and M97 to control custom macro interrupts.
- Custom macro interrupts and NC statements

When performing a custom macro interrupt, the user may want to interrupt the NC statement being
executed, or the user may not want to perform the interrupt until the execution of the current block is
completed. Bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No.6003)is used to select whether to perform interrupts even in the
middle of a block or to wait until the end of the block. The type of interrupt performed even in the middle
of a block is called type I and the type of interrupt performed at the end of the block is called type II.
CAUTION
For interrupt type I, operation after control is returned differs depending on
whether the interrupt program contains an NC statement.
When the program number block contains EOB (;), it is assumed to contain an
NC statement.
(Program containing an NC statement) (Program containing no NC statement)
O0013; O0013#101=#5041;
#101=#5041; #102=#5042;
#102=#5042; #103=#5043;
#103=#5043; M99;
M99;
Type I (when an interrupt is performed even in the middle of a block)

(i) When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input, any movement or dwell being performed is stopped
immediately and the interrupt program is executed.
(ii) If there are NC statements in the interrupt program, the command in the interrupted block is lost and
the NC statement in the interrupt program is executed. When control is returned to the interrupted
program, the program is restarted from the next block after the interrupted block.
(iii) If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control is returned to the interrupted program
by M99, then the program is restarted from the command in the interrupted block.
Interrupted by macro interrupt
Execution in progress
Normal program
CNC command restart;
Interrupt signal when there are no NC statements
(UINT) input in the interrupt program
Custom macro interrupt
Fig. 17.13 (b) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type I)
Type II (when an interrupt is performed at the end of the block)

(i) If the block being executed is not a block that consists of several cycle operations such as automatic
reference position return (G28), an interrupt is performed as follows:
- 291 -
When an interrupt signal (UINT) is input, macro statements in the interrupt program are executed
immediately unless an NC statement is encountered in the interrupt program. NC statements are not
executed until the current block is completed.
(ii) If the block being executed consists of several cycle operations, an interrupt is performed as follows:
When the last movement in the cycle operations is started, macro statements in the interrupt program
are executed unless an NC statement is encountered. NC statements are executed after all cycle
operations are completed.
Normal program
Interrupt signal (UINT) input
Custom macro interrupt NC statement in the

interrupt program
Fig. 17.13 (c) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type II)
NOTE
During execution of a program for cycle operations, interrupt type II is performed
regardless of whether bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003 is set to 0 or 1. Cycle
operations are available for the following functions:
<1> Automatic reference position return
<2> Tool radius ⋅ tool nose radius compensation (generating multiple blocks
using the specified block such as when the tool moves around the outside of
an acute angle)
<3> Canned cycle
<4> Automatic tool length measurement
<5> Optional chamfering/corner R
<6> Exponential interpolation
<7> Normal direction control
<8> Cutting point interpolation for cylindrical interpolation
- Conditions for enabling and disabling the custom macro interrupt signal
The interrupt signal becomes valid after execution starts of a block that contains M96 for enabling custom
macro interrupts. The signal becomes invalid when execution starts of a block that contains M97.
While an interrupt program is being executed, the interrupt signal becomes invalid. The signal become
valid when the execution of the block that immediately follows the interrupted block in the main program
is started after control returns from the interrupt program. In type I, if the interrupt program consists of
only macro statements, the interrupt signal becomes valid when execution of the interrupted block is
started after control returns from the interrupt program.
- Custom macro interrupt signal (UINT)

There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) input: The status-triggered scheme and
edge-triggered scheme. When the status-triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. When
the edge triggered scheme is used, the signal becomes valid on the rising edge when it switches from off
to on status.
One of the two schemes is selected with bit 3 (TSE) of parameter No.6003.
- 292 -
When the status-triggered scheme is selected by this parameter, a custom macro interrupt is generated if
the interrupt signal (UINT) is on at the time the signal becomes valid. By keeping the interrupt signal
(UINT) on, the interrupt program can be executed repeatedly.
When the edge-triggered scheme is selected, the interrupt signal (UINT) becomes valid only on its rising
edge. Therefore, the interrupt program is executed only momentarily (in cases when the program consists
of only macro statements). When the status-triggered scheme is inappropriate, or when a custom macro
interrupt is to be performed just once for the entire program (in this case, the interrupt signal may be kept
on), the edge-triggered scheme is useful.
Except for the specific applications mentioned above, use of either scheme results in the same effects. The
time from signal input until a custom macro interrupt is executed does not vary between the two schemes.
In the example shown in Fig. 17.13 (d), an interrupt is executed four times when the status-triggered
scheme is used; when the edge-triggered scheme is used, the interrupt is executed just once.
1
Interrupt signal (UINT) Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt

execution execution execution Interrupt
execution
Status-triggered scheme
Interrupt execution
Edge-triggered scheme
Fig. 17.13 (d) Custom macro interrupt signal
- Return from a custom macro interrupt

To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted program, specify M99. A sequence
number in the interrupted program can also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the program
is searched from the beginning for the specified sequence number. Control is returned to the first
sequence number found.
NOTE
When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or M, this block is
regarded as belonging to the previous block in the program. Therefore, a
single-block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the
following <1> and <2> are basically the same. (The difference is whether Gxx is
executed before M99 is recognized.)
<1> Gxx Xxxx ;
M99 ;
<2> Gxx Xxxx M99 ;
- Custom macro interrupt and modal information

A custom macro interrupt is different from a normal program call. It is initiated by an interrupt signal
(UINT) during program execution. In general, any modifications of modal information made by the
interrupt program should not affect the interrupted program.
- 293 -
For this reason, even when modal information is modified by the interrupt program, the modal
information before the interrupt is restored when control is returned to the interrupted program by M99.
When control is returned from the interrupt program to the interrupted program by M99 Pxxxxx, however,
modal information can again be controlled by the program. In this case, the new continuous information
modified by the interrupt program is passed to the interrupted program.
In this case, take the following action as required:

<1> The interrupt program provides modal information to be used after control is returned to the
interrupted program.
<2> After control is returned to the interrupted program, modal information is specified again as
necessary.
{ΔΔΔΔ
M96 Pxxxx ; {xxxx ;
Interrupt signal (UINT)
Modify modal information
(Without P specification)
Modal information remains
unchanged before and after M99 (Pxxxxx) ;
the interrupt.
(With P specification)
Nxxxxx ;
The new modal information modified by the interrupt program is present.
Fig. 17.13 (e) Custom macro interrupt and modal information
Modal information when control is returned by M99

The modal information present before the interrupt becomes valid. The new modal information modified
by the interrupt program is made invalid.
Modal information when control is returned by M99 Pxxxxx

The new modal information modified by the interrupt program remains valid even after control is
returned.
Modal information which was valid in the interrupted block

The old modal information which was valid in the interrupted block can be read using custom macro
system variables #4401 to #4520.
- 294 -
System variable Modal information which was valid when a custom macro interrupt was generated
#4401 G code (group 01)
: :
#4418 G code (group 18)
#4502 B code
#4507 D code
#4508 E code
#4509 F code
#4511 H code
#4513 M code
#4514 Sequence number
#4515 Program number
#4519 S code
#4520 T code
- System variables (position information values) for the interrupt program

Position information can be read as follows.
Macro variable Condition Position information value
#5001 or above Until the first NC statement appears Coordinates of point A
After an NC statement with no move command appears Coordinates of point A'
After an NC statement with a move command appears Coordinates of the end point of the
move command
#5021 or above Machine coordinates of point B'
#5041 or above Workpiece coordinates of point B'
Tool center path

Interrupt generated
B
A’
Offset vector
- Custom macro interrupt and custom macro modal call

When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program is called, the custom macro modal
call is canceled (G67). However, when G66 is specified in the interrupt program, the custom macro modal
call becomes valid. When control is returned from the interrupt program by M99, the modal call is
restored to the state it was in before the interrupt was generated. When control is returned by M99
Pxxxxx ;, the modal call in the interrupt program remains valid.
NOTE
Alarm PS1101, “ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT.” occurs in the following
cases:
<1> An interrupt is generated in the coordinate system rotation (G84) mode and
another G84 is specified in the interrupt program.
<2> An interrupt is generated in the scaling (G51) mode and another G51 is
specified in the interrupt program.
- 295 -
18. PROGRAMMABLE
PARAMETER INPUT (G10) PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT

(G10)
18.1 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT
Overview
The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is
used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are changed or the maximum cutting
feedrate or cutting time constants are changed to meet changing machining conditions.
Format
- Parameter entry mode
G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode setting
N_(Q_)R_ ; For parameters other than the axis type
N_P_(Q_)R_ ; For axis type parameters
:
:
G11 ; Parameter entry mode cancel
N_ : Parameter number
R_ : Parameter setting value (Leading zeros can be omitted.)
(Q_) : Bit number 0 to 7 (to be set when a bit type parameter is input)
(Enabled when bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No.3454 = 1.)
P_ : Axis number 1 to maximum controlled axis number (to be specified when an axis
type parameter is specified)
NOTE
G10L52 cannot be used to enter pitch error compensation data.
- Pitch error compensation data entry mode

G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode setting
N_R_ ; Pitch error compensation data entry
N_P_R_ ; For axis type parameters
:
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode cancel
N_ : Compensation position number for pitch errors compensation +10,000
R_ : Pitch error compensation data
NOTE
G10L50 cannot be used to enter parameter.
- 296 -
18.PROGRAMMABLE
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING PARAMETER INPUT (G10)
Explanation
- Setting value (R_)
Do not use a decimal point in the setting (R_) of a parameter or pitch error compensation data. To change
a bit type parameter if bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is 1, specify 0 or 1. If a value other than 0 and 1
is specified, alarm PS1144, "G10 FORMAT ERROR", is issued.
As the value of R, a custom macro variable can be used.
When a parameter of real type is used, set an integer value in (R_) according to the increment system of
the parameter.
- Bit number (Q_)

Bit number (Q_) is effective if bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is 1. To set a bit type parameter, set a
number in the range of 0 to 7.
A custom macro variable can be used as the value of Q.
- Axis number (P_)

As the axis number (P_), specify the order of a controlled axis to be displayed on the CNC display screen,
by using an axis type parameter.
For example, specify P2 for the control axis which is displayed second.
A custom macro variable can be used as the value of P.
WARNING
Do not fail to perform reference position return manually after changing the pitch
error compensation data or backlash compensation data. Without this, the
machine position can deviate from the correct position.
CAUTION
Compatibility with the Series 0i-PC:
This model has parameters that are not compatible with the Series 0i-PC. So,
before using this function, make a check according to the Parameter Manual
(B64310EN, B-64560EN) of this model.
NOTE
Other NC statements cannot be specified while in parameter input mode.
Example
1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 (when the bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is set to
0)
G10L52 ; Parameter entry mode
N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting
G11 ; Cancel parameter entry mode
2. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 (when the bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is set to
1)
N3404 Q2 R 1 ; SBP setting
3. Change the values for the Z-axis (3rd axis) and A-axis (4th axis) in axis type parameter No. 1322
(the coordinates of stored stroke limit 2 in the positive direction for each axis).
(When the increment systems for the 3rd and 4th axes are IS-B and millimeter machine,
respectively)
- 297 -
18. PROGRAMMABLE
PARAMETER INPUT (G10) PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01

N1322P3R4500 ; Change the value for the Z-axis to 4.500
N1322PP4R12000 ; Change the value for the A-axis to 12.000
4. Change compensation point numbers 10 and 20 of pitch error compensation.

G10L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
N10010R1 ; Change the compensation point number from 10 to 1
N10020R5 ; Change the compensation point number from 20 to 5
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode
18.2 TOOL DATA INPUT

Format
N_P_R_ ; Tool data entry
:
:
N_ : Tool data No. or multiple tool data No. +200

R_ : Tool data setting value
P_ : Kind of tool data
・When N code is specified as tool data

P01 : Tool data No. setting
P02 : Turret position for indexing turret setting
P03 : X–axis tool offset setting
P04 : Y–axis tool offset setting
P05 : Tool change No. setting
P06 : Punch count setting
P07 : Tool life setting
P08 : Tool figure setting for graphic operation
P09 : X dimension of a tool setting for graphic operation
P10 : Y dimension of a tool setting for graphic operation
P11 : Tool angle setting for graphic operation
・When N code is specified as multiple tool data

P01 : Sub-tool No. setting
P02 : Angle for indexing turret of multiple tool setting
P03 : Y–axis tool offset setting
P04 : Multiple tool figure setting for graphic operation
P05 : X dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P06 : Y dimension of a multiple tool setting for graphic operation
P07 : Multiple tool angle setting for graphic operation
- 298 -
18.PROGRAMMABLE
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING PARAMETER INPUT (G10)
Example
Change the value of tool number for the tool data No. 10.
G10L30 ; Tool data entry mode

N10P01R333 ; Modify tool number
- 299 -
19. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING
FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
19 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS

Chapter 19, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
19.1 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G05.1) ...........................................................................300
19.1 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G05.1)

Overview
AI advanced preview control is intended for high-speed, high-precision machining. The use of this
function suppresses the acceleration/deceleration delay that tends to increase as the feedrate becomes
faster, as well as the delay in the servo system, reducing the machining profile error.
On the Series 0i-PD, the AI advanced preview control can be used during laser mode only.
The following table shows the functions included in the AI advanced preview control function.
AI APC
Look-ahead block count 20
Look-ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation ○
Advanced feed forward ○
Acceleration setting for each axis ○
Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis ○
Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation ○
Speed control with the acceleration on each axis ○
Format
・AI advanced preview control
G05.1 Q_ ;
Q1 : AI advanced preview control mode on
Q0 : AI advanced preview control mode off
NOTE
1 Always specify G05.1 in an independent block.
2 The AI advanced preview control mode is also cleared by the reset operation.
- Setting an acceleration
A permissible acceleration for the linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis is set in parameter No.
1660. In the constant acceleration/deceleration state (C), acceleration/deceleration is performed with the
maximum tangential acceleration not exceeding the permissible acceleration of each axis specified in
parameter No. 1660.
- 300 -
19.HIGH-SPEED CUTTING
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS
Tangential feedrate
An optimum gradient is
automatically calculated from the
setting made in parameter No.
1660.
(A) (C) (A) (C) (A)
- Method of determining the tangent acceleration

Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangent acceleration/deceleration that does not
exceed the permissible acceleration set for each axis.
(Example)
X-axis permissible acceleration: 1000 mm/sec2
Y-axis permissible acceleration: 1200 mm/sec2
Program:
N1 G01 G91 X20. F6000 ; (Move on the X-axis.)
G04 X0.01 ;
N2 Y20. ; (Move on the Y-axis.)
G04 X0.01 ;
N3 X20. Y20. ; (Move in the XY direction (at 45 degrees).)
Since N3 performs interpolation for the X and Y axes in the 45-degree direction, the acceleration of the Y
axis is controlled according to the X axis to become 1000 mm/s2. Therefore, the combined acceleration
is 1414 mm/s2.
Tangent feedrate
1000mm/sec2 1200mm/sec2 1414mm/sec2

gradient gradient gradient
- Acceleration
Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the
block. When look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for multiple blocks,
acceleration can be performed across more than one block.
- 301 -
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead

acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Programmed speed
Time
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
- Deceleration
Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of
the block.
When look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for multiple blocks, deceleration
can be performed across more than one block.
Feedrate Speed control by look-ahead
Deceleration acceleration/deceleration before
start point interpolation
Programmed speed
Deceleration
start point
Time
- Deceleration based on a distance

If the total distance of the blocks read ahead becomes shorter than or equal to the deceleration distance
obtained from the current feedrate, deceleration starts.
If the total distance of the blocks read ahead during deceleration increases, acceleration is performed.
If the blocks of a small amount of travel are successively specified, deceleration and acceleration may be
performed alternately, making the feedrate inconsistent.
To avoid this, decrease the programmed feedrate.
- Automatic feedrate control function

During the AI advanced preview control mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by reading blocks
in advance.
The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the specified feedrate exceeds the
determined feedrate, acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation is performed to achieve the
determined feedrate.
<1> Feedrate changes on each axis at a corner and the permissible feedrate change that has been set
- 302 -
<2> Expected acceleration on each axis and the permissible acceleration that has been set
Specified tool path

The machining error is decreased
because of the deceleration by Tool path when AI advanced
difference in feedrate. preview control mode is not
used
Tool path when AI advanced
preview control mode is used
The machining error is decreased

because of the deceleration with
the acceleration.
- Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner

By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change
occurs on each axis at a corner, the feedrate is determined so that any feedrate difference exceeding the
permissible feedrate difference on that axis that has been set for parameter No. 1783 does not occur, and
deceleration is automatically performed.
- 303 -
(Example)
Program
N1 G01 G91 X100. F5000
N2 Y100.
N2
Y
N1
Tangent feedrate Tangent feedrate
Time The deceleration based Parameter No.1783

on the feedrate difference
is used. Time
X-axis feedrate X-axis feedrate

The feedrate difference
becomes small, and the
The tangent feedrate is feedrate on each axis
smooth, but the feedrate becomes smooth.
on each axis is not.
Parameter No.1783
Time Time
Y-axis feedrate Y-axis feedrate
Time Parameter No.1783 Time
When speed control based on the feedrate difference When speed control based on the feedrate difference is
is invalid valid
The method of deceleration based on the feedrate difference differs depending on the setting made for
parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500).
If "0" is set, the largest feedrate that does not exceed the permissible feedrate difference set for parameter
No. 1783 is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate.
In this case, the deceleration feedrate differs if the travel direction differs, even if the shape is the same.
- 304 -
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and the
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Decelerate the X/Y axis down to 250

Decelerate the X axis mm/min
down to 500 mm/min (The tangent direction feedrate is 354
mm/min.)
Y
In the left-side example in the figure above, the X axis is inverted at the corner from the position direction
to the negative direction, and deceleration is performed so that the feedrate difference becomes 500
mm/min. In other words, the feedrate is 250 mm/min both when the axis moves in the position direction
and when it moves in the negative direction. As a result, the tangent direction feedrate becomes 354
mm/min.
X-axis
feedrate
250mm/min 500mm/min Time
Y-axis
feedrate
250mm/min Time
If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined not only with the condition that
the permissible feedrate difference and permissible acceleration on each axis are not exceeded, but also
that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the travel direction if the shape is the same.
If 1 is set for this parameter, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference may be up
to 30% lower than that determined if 0 is set.
- 305 -
(Example)
If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1 and
permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes)
Decelerate the X/Y axis down to

250 mm/min
(The tangent direction feedrate is
Decelerate the X axis 354 mm/min.)
down to 354 mm/min
Y
- Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation

When high-speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation or helical interpolation, the actual tool
path has an error with respect to the programmed path. In circular interpolation, this error can be
approximated from the equation given below.
Y
Δr : Error
Specified path Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)

v : Feedrate (mm/s)
Actual path r : Arc radius (mm)
2
a : Acceleration (mm/s )
T1 : Time constant of
acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation at cutting (s)
r T2 : Time constant of servo motor (s)
0 X
1 2 v2 1
Δr = (T1 + T22 ) = (T12 + T22 ) ⋅ a ...................................................................................... (Equation 1)
2 r 2
In actual machining, the permissible error Δr is given as the machining accuracy. Therefore, the
permissible acceleration a (mm/sec2) is determined by equation 1.
When a specified feedrate causes the radial error from an arc having a programmed radius to exceed the
permissible error, speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation automatically clamps the
arc-cutting feedrate by using parameter settings.
Let the permissible acceleration calculated from the permissible acceleration set for each axis be A.
Then, maximum permissible feedrate v with programmed radius r is expressed as follows:
v= A⋅r ........................................................................................................................... (Equation 2)
If a specified feedrate exceeds feedrate v obtained from equation 2, the feedrate is clamped at feedrate v
automatically.
The permissible acceleration is specified in parameter No. 1735. If there is a difference in permissible
acceleration between two axes for circular interpolation, the lower acceleration is regarded as the
permissible acceleration.
If the radius of an arc is small, too small value can be calculated as deceleration v. In such a case, the
lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1732 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
- 306 -
- Speed control with the acceleration on each axis

When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the figure below, the
feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners are not very large. Thus, deceleration with the
feedrate differences is not effective. Consecutive small feedrate differences, however, cause a large
acceleration on each axis, as a whole.
In such a case, deceleration can be performed to reduce the impact on the machine and the machining
error caused by too large an acceleration. The deceleration feedrate is determined to be the feedrate that
does not cause the acceleration on each axis to exceed the permissible acceleration set for parameter No.
1737.
The deceleration feedrate is determined for each corner. The actual feedrate is the smaller of the
deceleration feedrate determined at the start point of the block and that determined at the end point.
Depending on the specified figure, a very low deceleration feedrate may be calculated. In such a case,
the lower feedrate limit can be set in parameter No. 1738 to prevent the feedrate from being decreased too
much.
In the following example, the acceleration (gradient of the broken line in the feedrate graph) at too large
at corners N2 to N4 and N6 to N8 and, therefore, deceleration is performed.
N8
N7 N9
N6
N5
Y
N1
X N4
N3
N2
X-axis
feedrate
Time Time
Y-axis
feedrate
Time Time
Tangent
feedrate
N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9
Time Time
When speed control with the acceleration is invalid When speed control with the acceleration is valid
The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of
parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500).
If "0" is set, the highest feedrate that does not cause the permissible acceleration set for parameter No.
1737 to be exceeded is assumed to be the deceleration feedrate. In this case, the deceleration feedrate
differs depending on the travel direction even if the shape is the same, as shown in the figure below.
- 307 -
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with small

line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0
Permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The feedrate is
higher in these
directions.
Time
If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that the permissible acceleration on
each axis is not exceeded but also the condition that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the
travel direction if the shape is the same.
If 1 is set for this parameter, the deceleration feedrate determined with the feedrate difference or
acceleration may be up to 30% lower than that determined if 0 is set.
(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with small

line blocks
Parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1,
radius = 10 mm, permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)
Tangent feedrate
F6000
The tangent
feedrate is
constant.
Time
NOTE
In circular interpolation, the tangent feedrate is constant regardless of the setting
of the parameter.
- Another example of determining the feedrate

If a specified feedrate exceeds the upper feedrate limit of AI advanced preview control (in parameter No.
8465), the feedrate is clamped at the upper feedrate. The upper feedrate limit is clamped at the
maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1432).
Limitations
- Conditions for temporarily canceling the AI advanced preview control mode
If any of the commands listed below is executed during AI advanced preview control mode, it is
temporarily canceled. Note that the AI advanced preview control mode resumes as soon as it becomes
available.
- 308 -
Function name G code

Positioning (rapid traverse) (NOTE) G00
When no move command is specified －
One-shot G code other than those shown at right (NOTE) G09
NOTE
If the first three conditions (1) to (3) below are all met, the mode is not canceled
even when the rapid traverse command is specified. If all the conditions (1) to
(5) are met, the mode is not canceled even when the G28 or G53 command is
specified.
(1) Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1. (Interpolation type positioning
is valid.)
(2) Parameter No. 1671 (maximum acceleration during rapid traverse) is set.
(3) Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No. 19501 is set to 1 (acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is valid for rapid traverse).
(4) Bit 4 (ZRL) of parameter No. 1015 is set to 1 (the G28 and G53 commands
are the interpolation type).
(5) Bit 1 (AMP) of parameter No. 11240 is set to 1 (acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation is valid for the G28 and G53 commands in the AI
advanced preview control mode).
- Parameter list
Positioning
Parameter Parameter No.
Positioning type (non-linear (0)/interpolation (1)) 1401#1 LRP
Acceleration/deceleration type (acceleration constant (0)/time constant (1)) 1603#4 PRT
Acceleration/deceleration type (after interpolation (0)/before interpolation (1)) 19501#5 FRP
Time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in rapid traverse 1620
Time constant of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
1621
rapid traverse
Maximum permissible acceleration of acceleration/deceleration after
1671
interpolation in rapid traverse
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Maximum permissible acceleration of acceleration/deceleration before
1660
interpolation
Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation

Acceleration/deceleration type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
1602#3 BS2, 1602#6 LS2
cutting feed
FL rate of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed 1763
Time constant of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed 1769
Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis

Permissible feedrate difference when determining the feedrate based on the
1783
feedrate difference at a corner
Method of determining the feedrate based on the feedrate difference or based
19500#6 FNW
on the acceleration
- 309 -
Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation

Lower-limit feedrate for the deceleration function with the acceleration in
1732
circular interpolation
Permissible acceleration for the deceleration function with the acceleration in
1735
Speed control with the acceleration on each axis

Permissible acceleration for the deceleration function with the acceleration 1737
Lower-limit feedrate for the deceleration function with the acceleration 1738
Method of determining the feedrate based on the feedrate difference or based
19500#6 FNW
on the acceleration
Others
Maximum cutting feedrate during the mode of acceleration/deceleration before
1432
interpolation
Upper-limit feedrate for AI advanced preview control 8465
Upper-limit feedrate for AI advanced preview control (when only the rotation
8466
axis is specified)
- 310 -
B-64554EN/01 PROGRAMMING 20.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS

Chapter 20, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL...............................................................................................311

20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER ........................................................................................................320
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL......................................................................................................................321
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING).............................................................................321
20.5 RAM-AXIS CONTROL ...................................................................................................................326
20.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Overview
When a movement is made along one axis by using two servo motors as in the case of a large gantry
machine, a command for one axis can drive the two motors by synchronizing one motor with the other.
Moreover, by using a feedback signal from each motor, a positional difference (synchronous error)
between the two motors is detected. When a synchronous error exceeding a set value occurs, a
synchronous error check can be made to issue an alarm and stop a movement along the axis.
An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is referred to as a master axis (M-axis), and an
axis along which a movement is made in synchronism with the master axis is referred to as a slave axis
(S-axis).
Z
A
(Slave axis)
X
(Master axis)
Fig. 20.1 (a) Example of machine with X and A being synchronous axes
The synchronous establishment function can be used for automatic compensation to eliminate a machine
coordinate error in cases such as emergency stop cancellation.
An external signal can be used to turn synchronization on and off.

20.1.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control
Explanation
- Master axis and slave axis for axis synchronous control
An axis used as the reference for axis synchronous control is referred to as a master axis (M-axis), and an
axis along which a movement is made in synchronism with the master axis is referred to as a slave axis
(S-axis).
- 311 -
20.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64554EN/01
By setting the axis number of a master axis in the parameter No. 8311 of the slave axis, the axis
configuration for axis synchronous control is determined.
- Synchronous operation and normal operation

Operation where axis synchronous control is turned on (enabled) to make a movement along the slave
axis in synchronism with the master axis is referred to as synchronous operation. Operation where axis
synchronous control is turned off (disabled) to make movements along the master axis and slave axis
independently of each other is referred to as normal operation.
(Example)
Automatic operation when the master axis is the X-axis and the slave axis is the A-axis
In synchronous operation, movements are made along the X-axis and A-axis according to the
programmed command Xxxxx for the master axis.
In normal operation, movements are made along the master axis and slave axis independently of
each other as in the case of normal CNC control. The programmed command Xxxxx makes a
movement along the X-axis. The programmed command Aaaaa makes a movement along the A-axis.
The programmed command Xxxxx Aaaaa makes movements along the X-axis and A-axis at the
same time.
The mode of operation can be switched between synchronous operation and normal operation by an input
signal, or synchronous operation can be performed at all times. Which mode to use can be set using bit 5
(SCA) of parameter No. 8304.
- Switching between synchronous operation and normal operation by using an

input signal
When bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 is set to 0 for the slave axis, the signals SYNCx for selecting
the axis for axis synchronous control / signals SYNCJx for selecting the manual feed axis for axis
synchronous control (with x representing a slave axis number) is used to switch between synchronous
operation and normal operation. When SYNCx/SYNCJx = 1, synchronous operation is selected. When
SYNCx/SYNCJx = 0, normal operation is selected.
During feed axis synchronization control, the output signal SYNOx is set to "1".
- Setting for using synchronous operation at all times

When bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis is set to 1, synchronous operation is
performed at all times, regardless of the setting of the signal SYNCx/SYNCJx.
- Synchronous control axis name

The name of a master axis and the name of a slave axis may be the same or may be different from each
other.
- Restrictions on using the same name for the master axis and slave axis
If the same axis name is assigned to the master axis and slave axis, manual operation only is allowed in
normal operation. Automatic operation cannot be performed.
- Setting of an axis name subscript

A subscript can be attached to an axis name like X1, X2, XM, and XS. If the same axis name is used for
multiple axes, and a unique subscript is assigned to each of those axes, the axes can be distinguished from
each other on the screen display, or which of those axes issued an alarm can be identified.
Set a subscript in parameter No. 3131.
- Setting of multiple slave axes

One master axis can have multiple slave axes.
(Example)
- 312 -
In the example below, movements along the X1-axis and X2-axis are made in synchronism with the
XM-axis.
Axis name Subscript
Axis name Controlled Master axis number
Parameter Parameter Operation
indication axis number Parameter No.8311
No. 1020 No. 3131
XM 1 88 77 0
Y 2 89 0 0
A movement is made in
X1 3 88 49 1 synchronism with the
XM-axis.
A movement is made in
X2 4 88 50 1 synchronism with the
XM-axis.
When one master axis has multiple slave axes, synchronous establishment, and synchronous error check
are performed for each slave axis independently.
- Combination with tandem control

Tandem control can be used with each of the master and slave axes. The same restriction on axis
arrangement as imposed in the case of normal tandem control is imposed. No particular restriction is
imposed on axis synchronous control.
- Axis selection on the screen display

On a screen such as the current position display screen, a slave axis is also displayed. The display of a
slave axis can be disabled by setting bit 0 (NDP) of parameter No. 3115 to 1 and setting bit 1 (NDA) of
parameter No. 3115 to 1.
- Axis selection in actual cutting feedrate display

By setting bit 2 (SAF) of parameter No. 8303 to 1 for a slave axis, the slave axis can be included in an
actual cutting feedrate display calculation during synchronous operation.
- Axis synchronous control with an absolute-position detector

When bit 7 (SMA) of parameter No. 8302 is set to 1 to attach an absolute-position detector, and bit 4
(APZ) of parameter No. 1815 for an axis placed in synchronous operation is turned off, APZ for the axis
(axes) placed together in synchronous operation is also turned off.
- Slave axis mirror image

By setting parameter No. 8312, a mirror image can be applied to a slave axis placed in synchronous
operation. When the mirror image function is enabled, the direction in which the absolute and relative
coordinates change is the same as for the machine coordinates.
At this time, synchronization establishment, synchronization error check, and correction mode cannot be
used.
The mirror image set by bit 0 (MIR) of parameter No. 0012 cannot be applied to the slave axis. Because
this mirror image differs from the mirror image set by parameter MIR, it does not affect mirror image
signals MIx or mirror image check signals MMIx.
- External machine coordinate system shift

Bit 7 (SYE) of parameter No. 8304 can be set to 1 for the slave axis to shift the slave axis by the same
amount as specified for the master axis when external machine coordinate system shift is specified by
external data input/output for the master axis in synchronous control.
- 313 -
20.1.2 Synchronous Establishment

Explanation
Upon power-up or after emergency stop cancellation, the machine positions on the master axis and slave
axis under axis synchronous control are not always the same. In such a case, the synchronous
establishment function matches the machine position on the master with that on the slave axis.
- Synchronous establishment based on machine coordinates

To perform synchronous establishment, enable synchronous establishment based on machine coordinates
by setting bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303 to 1. This method of synchronous establishment outputs the
machine coordinate difference between the master axis and slave axis as command pulses for the slave
axis to establish synchronization. A machine coordinate difference is output at a time as command pulses.
So, if the compensation value is large, the machine abruptly makes a large movement. Taking this into
consideration, set a maximum allowable compensation value to be used for synchronous establishment in
parameter No. 8325. As a maximum allowable compensation value, set a maximum allowable value by
which the machine may move abruptly. If a compensation value is larger than the value set in this
parameter, an alarm SV0001, “SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR” is issued, and synchronous establishment
is not performed. Moreover, when parameter No. 8325 is set to 0, synchronous establishment is not
performed.
The result of comparing the positional difference between the master axis and slave axis with a maximum
allowable compensation value for synchronous establishment can be checked using the synchronous
establishment enable state output signal SYNOF.
- First synchronous establishment after power-up

Two methods of performing the first synchronous establishment after power-up are available. One
method is based on manual reference position return operation, and the other is based on absolute position
detection.
Until this synchronous establishment is completed, a synchronous error check is also made.
- Synchronous establishment based on manual reference position return

operation
When manual reference position return operation is performed along axes under axis synchronous control,
the machine is placed at the reference position on the master axis and slave axis according to the same
sequence as for normal reference position return operation.
The sequence is the same as the grid method for one axis only. However, only the deceleration signal for
the master axis is used. When the deceleration signal is set to 0, the machine gradually stops along the
master axis and slave axis, then an FL feedrate is set. When the deceleration signal is set to 1, the machine
moves to a grid point along each of the master axis and slave axis, then stops.
- 314 -
NOTE
When the grid position difference between the master axis and slave axis is
large, a reference position shift can occur, depending on the timing of the *DEC
signal set to 1. In the example below, the shift along the slave axis is so large
that the position shifted one grid point from the actual reference position is
regarded as the reference position.
(Example) When the reference position on the slave axis is shifted one grid point
*DEC
Master axis feedrate
Master axis grid
Actual reference position
Slave axis feedrate
Slave axis grid
Actual reference position Stop at position shifted one grid point
In such a case, match the grid position according to Subsection 20.1.3,

"Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching."
- Synchronous establishment based on absolute position detection

When an absolute-position detector is used as the position detector, the machine positions on the master
axis and slave axis are found at power-up time for automatic establish synchronization.
- Synchronous establishment after emergency stop cancellation, etc.

Synchronous establishment is also performed when servo position control is turned on, for example, at
emergency stop cancellation, servo alarm cancellation, or servo-off cancellation time.
However, synchronous establishment is not performed at the time of axis removal cancellation. So,
synchronous establishment based on manual reference position return operation is required as in the case
of power-up time.
- One-direction synchronous establishment

The synchronous establishment can be performed by setting bit 0 (SSO) of parameter No. 8305 to 1 to
move the machine in one direction along the master axis and slave axis. The move direction depends on
the reference position setting based on bit 0 (SSA) of parameter No. 8304. When SSA = 0, for example,
the machine coordinate on the master axis or slave axis, whichever larger, is used as the reference point.
So, the machine moves in the + direction along the axes.
When bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No. 8305 is set to 1, normal synchronous establishment is performed
instead of one-direction synchronous establishment after an emergency stop.
20.1.3 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching

Explanation
Before axis synchronous control can be performed, the reference position on the master axis must be
matched with the reference position on the slave axis. With this function, the CNC automatically matches
the reference positions (grid positions) on the master axis and slave axis under axis synchronous control.
[Operation procedure]
The procedure below is usable when bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8303 is set to 1.
- 315 -
1. Set bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 to 1.

2. Turn off the power then turn on the power.
3. Set the REF mode (or JOG mode in the case of reference position setting without dogs) when
synchronous operation is ready, and make movements in the reference position return direction
along the master axis and slave axis.
4. The movements along the master axis and slave axis automatically stop, and a grid difference value
is set in parameter No. 8326. At this time, bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 is set to 0, and the
power-off request alarm PW0000 is issued.
5. Turn off the power then turn on the power again.
6. Perform normal reference position return operation.
NOTE
1 Parameter setting
When bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 is set, bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No.
1815 and parameter No. 8326 for the master axis and slave axis are set to 0.
When the operator sets parameter No. 8326 (MDI, G10L50), bit 0 (ATE) of
2 This function cannot be used together with the reference position shift function.
20.1.4 Synchronous Error Check

Explanation
A synchronous error value is monitored at all times. If an error exceeding a certain limit is detected, an
alarm is issued and the movement along the axis is stopped.
A synchronous error check based on machine coordinates and a synchronous error check based on a
positional deviation value are performed.
- Synchronous error check based on machine coordinates

The machine coordinate on the master axis is compared with that on the slave axis. When the error
between the machine coordinates exceeds the value set in parameter No. 8314, the alarm SV0005,
“SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN)” is issued, and the motor is stopped immediately.
A check can be made even in the emergency stop, servo off, and servo alarm states.
If a synchronous error check is made when the mode of operation is switched between synchronous
operation and normal operation with an input signal, an error check is made even in normal operation. So,
even if the axis synchronous control selection signal (SYNCx) or the axis synchronous control manual
feed selection signal (SYNCJx) is set to 0 by mistake during synchronous operation, damage to the
machine can be prevented.
The machine coordinates on the master axis and slave axis can be checked using the machine coordinate
match state output signal SYNMT.
- Synchronous error check based on a positional deviation value

The servo positional deviation value of the master axis and slave axis is monitored during axis
synchronous control. When the positional deviation value exceeds the limit value set in parameter No.
8323, the alarm DS0001, “SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV)” is issued, and the axis synchronous
control positional deviation error alarm signal SYNER is output.
The alarm DS0001 is issued to the master axis and slave axis.
When bit 4 (SYA) of parameter No. 8301 is set to 1, the positional deviation limit value of the master axis
and slave axis is checked even if a servo-off occurs during axis synchronous control.
- 316 -
20.1.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error Check

Explanation
To recover from an alarm issued as a result of synchronous error check, two methods are available. One
method uses the correction mode, and the other uses normal operation.
If the mode of operation is switched between synchronous operation and normal operation by using an
input signal, only the method using normal operation can be used.
If synchronous operation is used at all times, only the method using the correction mode can be used.
- Procedure for correcting a synchronous error by using the correction mode

Use this method if synchronous operation is used at all times without using an input signal (when bit 5
(SCA) of parameter No. 8304 is set to 1).
When the correction mode is used, synchronous error check can be temporarily disabled, and a movement
can be made along the master axis or slave axis to correct a synchronous error.
In the correction mode, synchronous error compensation and error check are not performed, so that an
alarm DS0003, “SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE” is issued as a warning.
1. Select the correction mode, and select an axis along which a movement is to be made by manual
master axis feed. Set bit 2 (ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 of the master axis or slave axis to 1 to set
the correction mode. Thus, by manual master axis feed, a movement can be made along the axis with
this parameter set to 1.
When this parameter is set to 1, the alarm DS0003, “SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE” is issued.
2. Reset the synchronous error excessive alarm.
In this state, error check is not performed. Be careful.
3. Select the manual mode (jog, incremental feed, or handle).
4. While checking the synchronous error value, make a movement along the master axis or slave axis
in the direction that reduces the error.
If one master axis has multiple slave axes, an attempt to reduce the synchronous error of one slave
axis by master axis movement may increase the synchronous error of another slave axis, thus
disabling a movement in any direction. In such a case, by setting bit 4 (MVB) of parameter No. 8304
to 1, a movement can be made in a direction that increases the synchronous error.
5. When the synchronous error is reduced to within the allowable value for suppressing the alarm, reset
the value of bit 2 (ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 to the original value to switch from the correction
mode to the normal synchronization mode.
Synchronous error check is restarted.
6. Reset the correction mode alarm.
- Method of recovery using normal operation

Use this method when switching between synchronous operation and normal operation by using an input
signal.
Use the procedure below for recovery from alarm SV0005.
1. Set SYNCx/SYNCJx (with x representing a slave axis number) to 0 to select normal operation.
2. Set a value greater than the current value in the parameter No. 8314 for specifying a maximum
allowable synchronous error, then reset the alarm.
3. Make a movement along the master axis or slave axis by using the manual handle so that the
machine coordinates of the master axis and slave axis match to a maximum possible extent.
4. Return the value of parameter No. 8314 for specifying a maximum allowable synchronous error to
the original value.
- 317 -
20.1.6 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm

Explanation
If a movement made along the master axis differs from a movement made along the slave axis during axis
synchronous control, the machine can be damaged. To prevent such damage, the torque command
difference between the two axes is observed. If the difference is abnormal, a servo alarm SV0420,
“SYNC TORQUE EXCESS” can be issued.
Position gain Master axis
+ torque command
Feedrate
Kp
control
Master axis
position -
command
Master axis
position feedback
+ Torque Compare absolute

command
diff value with threshold
Alarm detection
Position gain -
+
Kp Feedrate
control
Slave axis Slave axis torque
- command
position
command
Slave axis
position feedback
Fig. 20.1.6 (a) System configuration
[Method of use]
Specify the threshold parameter No. 2031 according to the procedure below.
1. Set 0 in parameter No. 2031, and disable the torque difference alarm detection function.
2. To check the absolute value of the torque difference between the synchronous axes, set the
parameters below. Set the same value for the two axes placed under axis synchronous control.
Parameter No. 2115 = 0
Parameter No. 2151 = 434
3. Display the diagnostic screen by pressing the function key then the [DGNOS] soft key.
Diagnose No. 0353 indicates the absolute value of the torque difference between the two axes.
4. Read the absolute torque difference value presented when normal operation is being performed. In
the threshold parameter No. 2031, set a value obtained by adding some margin to the read absolute
value.
The absolute torque difference value can be observed with the Servo Guide.
- Enabling/disabling of alarm detection

Alarm detection is enabled when the time set in parameter No. 8327 has elapsed after the servo ready
signal SA is set to 1. When the signal NSYNCA for disabling torque difference alarm detection for axis
synchronous control is set to 1, alarm detection is disabled.
SA 1
0
Alarm detection function Enabled

Disabled
Setting of parameter No. 8327
(512 msec when this parameter is not set)
Fig. 20.1.6 (b) Timing chart
- 318 -
When the servo ready signal SA is set to 0, torque difference alarm detection is disabled.
NOTE
The servo axis number combination of the master axis and slave axis
synchronized with each other must be such that an odd servo axis number is
assigned to the master axis and the next servo axis number is assigned to the
slave axis like (1,2) and (3,4).
CAUTION
1 When making a synchronous error check, ensure that the reference position on
the master axis and the reference position on the slave axis must be at the same
position.
2 In manual reference position return operation, the same operation is performed
along the master axis and slave axis until a deceleration operation starts. After a
deceleration operation starts, grid detection is performed for the master axis and
slave axis independently of each other.
3 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation are performed for the
master axis and slave axis independently of each other.
NOTE
1 During axis synchronous control, a movement based on automatic reference
position return (G28) or machine coordinate system selection (G53) command is
made as described below according to the setting of bit 7 (SRF) of parameter
No. 8304.
<1> When SRF = 0, the same movement as made along the master axis is
made along the slave axis.
<2> When SRF = 1, a movement is made along the slave axis to the specified
position independently of a movement made along the master axis to the
specified position.
2 A command not involving a movement along an axis such as the workpiece
coordinate system setting command (G92) and local coordinate system setting
command (G52) is set with the master axis according to the master axis
programming.
3 During synchronous operation, the axis-by-axis signals such as for external
deceleration, interlock, and machine lock are enabled for the master axis only.
During synchronous operation, those signals for the slave axis are ignored.
4 When switching the synchronization state in a program, be sure to specify M
codes (parameter No. 8337 and No. 8338) for turning synchronization on and
off. By switching between the input signals SYNCx <G138> and SYNCJx
<G140> from the PMC with the M codes, the synchronization state can be
switched in the program.
- 319 -
NOTE
5 When controlled axis removal is performed, the synchronization state is
cancelled. When performing controlled axis removal, perform removal for the
master axis and slave axis at the same time.
6 If a programmed command is specified for the slave axis during synchronous
operation, an alarm PS0213, “ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYNCHRO-MODE” is
issued. A programmed command can be specified for the slave axis when
switching between synchronous operation and normal operation is set to 0 (with
bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 set to 0) to select normal operation.
7 Axis synchronous control and PMC axis control cannot be used at the same
time.
20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER

The roll-over function prevents coordinates for the rotary axis from overflowing. The roll-over function is
enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1.
20.2.1 Rotary Axis Roll-over

Explanation
For an incremental programming, the tool moves the angle specified in the command. For an absolute
programming, the coordinates after the tool has moved are values set in parameter No. 1260, and rounded
by the angle corresponding to one rotation. The tool moves in the direction in which the final coordinates
are closest when bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0. Displayed values for relative coordinates
are also rounded by the angle corresponding to one rotation when bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No. 1008 is
set to 1.
Example
Assume that axis A is the rotary axis and that the amount of movement per rotation is 360.000 (parameter
No. 1260 = 360000). When the following program is executed using the roll-over function of the rotary
axis, the axis moves as shown below.
Absolute coordinate value after
Sequence number Actual movement value
G90 A0 ; movement end
N1 G90 A-150.0 ; N1 -150 210
N2 G90 A540.0 ; N2 -30 180
N3 G90 A-620.0 ; N3 -80 100
N4 G91 A380.0 ; N4 +380 120
N5 G91 A-840.0 ; N5 -840 0
Relative
coordinate value -720° -360° -0° 360°
Absolute -0° -0° -0° -0°
coordinate value
210° (Absolute)
N1
180°
N2
100°
N3
120°
N4
N5
- 320 -
20.3 TANDEM CONTROL

When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be
used for movement along a single axis. Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The sub-motor
is used only to produce torque. With this tandem control function, the torque produced can be doubled.
Main motor
Table
Ball screw
Sub motor
Fig. 20.3 (a) Example of operation
In general, the NC regards tandem control as being performed for one axis. However, for servo parameter
management and servo alarm monitoring, tandem control is regarded as being performed for two axes.
For details, refer to the relevant manual published by the machine tool builder.
20.4 C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING)

For predetermined dies (tools) on a turret, the angular position of the die can be changed with a command
from a DNC, a memory or MDI.
In the past, it was necessary to use many dies when the die shape is the same but the die arrangement is
different. Even in such a case, this new function makes it possible to conduct the operations only with one
die since the function can freely change the angular position of the die. Further, since chamfering of four
corners of a workpiece can be performed only with one die, the time required for die change is reduced,
resulting in shorter machining time.
Further, in pattern function for a circular geometry bolt hole circle, arc pattern, and arc nibbling function,
the C axis is automatically controlled so that one side of the die always faces the center of arc at each
punching position.
NOTE
1 The punch section and the die section of the die can be controlled by the same
motors or C axis synchronously controlled by the respective servo motors.
2 Set 67(C) in parameter No.1020 as the name of the axis to control the axis under
the C axis control.
3 The C axis should be set as a rotation axis. (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006
is set to 1)
4 Setting the following parameters of C axis allows the CNC to be compatible with
FANUC Series 0i-PC, as follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 The axis rotates in the direction in which the distance to
the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the amount of the
shift per one rotation
- 321 -
N3221 G90 G00 X110. Y160. C0. #1 to #4：Punching order in N3223

N3222 G72 X50. Y100. ：Operation of the tool
N3223 G26 I60. J90. K4 C45.
+Y
#1:(50.0,160.0)
N3221:(110.0,160.0)
C-axis = 45.0
C-axis = 0.0
C-axis moves along with

X-and Y-axes positioning
#2:(−10.0,100.0) N3222
(50.0,100.0)
C-axis = 135.0
+X
C-axis moves along with
#4:(110.0,100.0)
X-and Y-axes positioning
C-axis = 315.0
#3:(50.0,40.0)
C-axis = 225.0
Fig.20.4 (a) Example of bolt hole circle (G26) and C command
There may be some restrictions of functions depending on the machine tools as shown in the following.
Always refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
- Inhibition of simultaneous control of T and C axes in the manual mode.
- T axis can move only when C axis is at reference point (fixed position on the machine tool where the
C axis can reach by the C axis manual reference point return.)
20.4.1 Simultaneously Controlled Axes

X, Y and T or X, Y and C when automatic operation.
20.4.2 Increment System

Least input increment IS-A : 0.01 deg, IS-B : 0.001 deg
Least command increment IS-A : 0.01 deg, IS-B : 0.001 deg
20.4.3 Maximum Programmable Dimension

IS-A : ± 999999.99 deg
IS-B : ± 99999.999 deg
20.4.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration

Linear acceleration/deceleration is possible in manual and automatic rapid traverse rate.
20.4.5 Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual

Reference Point Return
Specifications are the same as X, Y and T axes.
- 322 -
20.4.6 Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command (G90/G91)

The C-axis command is always regarded as absolute regardless of designation of absolute command
(G90) and incremental command (G91).
20.4.7 Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction

When the C-axis command is designated, it is possible to automatically position the C axis from the
present position to the commanded position in the smaller angle rotating direction. When the rotation
angle is 180 deg, positioning occurs in the forward direction (CW or CCW according to the connections
on the machine side) .
20.4.8 Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible

C axis command can be specified in the following blocks:
(1) A block where no one shot G code exists.
However, a block with U, V, W or B command is excluded:
(Example)
X_Y_C_;
(2) G70 command

(Example)
G70X _ Y _ C _ ;
(3) Pattern function (Including nibbling function) G26, G45, G46, G47,G68, G69, G76, G77, G78, G79,
G86, G87, G88, G89
(Example)
G26I _ J _ K _ C _ ;
(4) G01, G02 or G03 command in nibbling mode

(Example)
M12 ;
G01X _ Y _ Q _ C _ ;
X_Y_C_;
:
M13;
No C-axis command is allowed in a block other than above.

If C axis command is specified in a block other than above, no alarm will be generated. However, if a
C-axis command (excluding the nibbling mode) is specified during the linear interpolation or the circular
interpolation mode, an alarm (PS4600) in generated.
20.4.9 C–axis Command and its Operation

In 20.4.8, the blocks which C-axis command can be performed were listed. However, unless the die (tool)
which allows C-axis control has been selected, C-axis commands cannot be made. Therefore, if the die
which does not allow C-axis control is selected, it is necessary to select a die which allows C-axis control
before the C-axis command block or to select a die which allows C-axis control to the same block as the
C-axis command with the T-command. In the following description of functions, the die (tool) which
allows C-axis control is assumed to be T15. Namely, it is assumed that the axis transfer of the C-axis is
possible only when die T15 has been selected. In the case of a machine which allows axis transfer of the
T-axis only when the C-axis is located at the reference point (fixed location on the machine which can be
reached by manual reference point return of C-axis).
- 323 -
(a) When there was T command

After the C-axis was positioned to the reference point, execution for the T-command is started.
Namely, after the C CR; (CR: setting value of parameter No. 1250, 1251) has been executed, the
program command of the block where there was T-command is executed.
(b) G28 command (automatic reference point return)

After the C-axis has been positioned to the reference point, the X- and Y-axis reference point return
is executed by the G28 command. The following shows the program examples of the C-axis
command and its operation details:
(1) Sample program 1

:
N200 X_ Y_ T21;
N210 X_ Y_ C_ ;
In N210 block, C-axis control cannot be conducted since T15 is not selected.
(2) Sample program 2

:
N200 X_ Y_ T01;
N210 X_ Y_ T15C_ ;
In N210 block, C-axis motion starts when positioning of the X, Y and T axes is over and
T-command completion signal FIN is returned. Press start signal PF is sent out when positioning
of the C axis is over.
When the N210 block is programmed as follows:
N210T15C – 1;
C axis starts to move when T-axis positioning is over and T-command completion signal FIN is
returned. Press start signal PF is not sent out after positioning is finished.
Namely,
(a) Signal PF is sent out when there is the X or Y command, and
(b) Signal PF is not sent out when there are no X and Y commands.
20.4.10 Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis Command

The C-axis command in blocks of G26 (Bolt Hole Circle), G76 (Line At Angle), G77 (Arc), G78/G97
(Grid), G86 (Shear Proof), G87 (Square), G68 (Nibbling Arc), G69 (Nibbling Lin), G88 (Radius) and
G89 (Cut At Angle) are described below. Of these, the movement specifications by G26, G77, G68 and
G88 concerning the circular geometry differ from those of the other functions.
(1) G45, G78, G79, G86, G87, G69, G89

:
:
N200 G72 X Y ;
N210 G76 I J K T15 C ;
In N210 block, T-axis positioning starts simultaneously when the X and Y axes start to move at the
first positioning point. When the positioning of the X, Y and T axes is finished and T-command
completion signal FIN is returned, positioning of the C axis starts.
- 324 -
After positioning of the C axis is over, press start signal PF is sent out, and punch operation is
performed at the first positioning point. Thereafter, the X and Y axes are sequentially positioned
following the commanded geometry without positioning of the C axis.
(2) G26, G46, G47, G77, G68, G88

:
:
N200 G72 X Y ;
N210 G26 I J θ K T15C cl ;
In N210 block, positioning to the first point is conducted in the same way as described in 19.3.10 (1).
Thereafter, X and Y axes are sequentially positioned following the commanded geometry while the
C axis positioning is conducted.
+Y
P1
θn
θ1
+X
Pn
Pn : n-th positioning point

θn : Angle of n-th positioning point with respects to +X axis
direction
Cn : C-axis position at n-th positioning point
Cn is calculated as follows:
Cn=C1+ (θn–θ1)
In case of G68, and alarm (PS 4522) occurs if the C-axis move value between adjacent positioning points
exceeds the parameter value (No. 16194).
20.4.11 C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode

For the C-axis commands between the M code for nibbling mode and the M code for nibbling mode
cancel, an alarm is indicated if the C-axis movement amount per block exceeds the value set with the
parameter (No. 16194).
20.4.12 T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis Command

The C-axis command is ignored when T command neglect signal TNG <Gn233.5> is on.
- 325 -
20.4.13 Compensating the Position of the C–axis

This function automatically compensates the position of the C-axis to orient each tool in the specified
direction. This simplifies mechanical adjustment such as adjusting the reference position when installing
tools. Up to 20 compensation settings are specified in parameters No. 16430 to No. 16449. Up to 20 tool
numbers are specified in parameters No. 16370 to No. 16389.
The C-axis is compensated when the tool moves around the C-axis after T commands have been
specified.
CAUTION
Tool numbers of tools must be specified with address T followed by up to four digits.
20.4.14 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each Tool

Group
This function compensates backlash along the C-axis for each tool group. Changing the backlash
compensation for each tool group enables higher-precision machining. Up to 20 compensation settings
are specified in parameters No. 16390 to No. 16409. Up to 20 tool numbers are specified in parameters
No. 16370 to No. 16389.
CAUTION
The tool numbers must be specified with address T followed by up to four digits.
20.5 RAM-AXIS CONTROL

The CNC controls press motion in the block for 1-cycle pressing by using RAM-axis control.
The CNC cannot move RAM-axis by program command. RAM-axis moves automatically at the end of
the block executing 1-cycle press by setting RAM-axis and the RAM-axis motion patterns.
20.5.1 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern

RAM-axis motion pattern should be set on the C language executor variable area. After Setting the
RAM-axis motion patterns, the CNC read specified the RAM-axis motion patterns when the punching is
commanded. Specifying the address by the application software allows writing the data into C language
executor variable area.
C language executor variable area

Application CNC
software
Write Read
Setting of Interpolation of
Ram Axis Ram Axis Motion
Motion Pattern
Ram Axis
Motion Pattern
Fig.20.5.1 (a) Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern
- 326 -
20.5.2 Press Motion by RAM-axis Control

RAM-axis moves automatically at the end of the block executing 1-cycle press by setting the RAM-axis
motion patterns.
RAM-axis
Position of 1-cycle press process

RAM-axis
The starting position
Press movement
of next block
Workpieces
Axis of X, Y
Next block
positioning
Table axis movement
図20.5.2 (a) Press motion by RAM-axis control
20.5.3 RAM-axis Up Motion

Using the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> allows setting RAM-axis in the RAM up position
specified.
After confirmed the RAM-axis up signal RAMUP<Gn238.0> = “1”, the CNC sets RAM-axis in the RAM
up position specified immediately.
The feedrate used for the RAM-axis up motion is set on the parameter No. 1420.
- 327 -
III. OPERATION
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 1.GENERAL
1 GENERAL
Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections:
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION..................................................................................................................331

1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...................................332
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...........................................................................................................333
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM .................................................................................................................334
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM ..................................................................................................................336
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA ...........................................................................................336
1.7 DISPLAY..........................................................................................................................................339
1.1 MANUAL OPERATION

Explanation
- Manual reference position return
The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position.
This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set.
Ordinarily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and
pushbuttons located on the operator's panel. (See Section III-3.1, “MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN”.)
Fig. 1.1 (a) Manual reference position return
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Chapter II-6, “REFERENCE
POSITION”.)
- 331 -
1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64554EN/01
- The tool movement by manual operation

Using machine operator's panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along
each axis.
Machine operator's panel
Manual pulse generator
Tool
Workpiece
Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operation
The tool can be moved in the following ways:

(i) Jog feed (See Section III-3.2, “JOG FEED (JOG)”.)
The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.
(ii) Incremental feed (See Section III-3.3, “INCREMENTAL FEED”.)
The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a button is pressed.
(iii) Manual handle feed (See Section III-3.4, “MANUAL HANDLE FEED”.)
By rotating the manual handle, the tool moves by the distance corresponding to the degree of handle
rotation.
1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC

OPERATION
Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It includes memory,
MDI and DNC operations. (See Chapter III-4, “AUTOMATIC OPERATION”.)
Program
G00X_Y_T_;
X_;
Tool
Workpiece
Y
X
Fig. 1.2 (a) Tool Movement by programming
- 332 -
Explanation
- Memory operation
After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the
program instructions. This operation is called memory operation.
CNC Machine
Memory
Fig. 1.2 (b) Memory operation
- MDI operation
After the program is entered, as a command group, from the MDI unit, the machine can be run according
to the program. This operation is called MDI operation.
CNC MDI unit Machine
Manual program
input
Fig. 1.2 (c) MDI operation
- DNC operation
In this mode of operation, the program is not registered in the CNC memory. It is read from the external
input/output devices instead. This is called DNC operation.
1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Explanation
- Program selection
Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two
or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program number. (See
Section III-10.4, “PROGRAM SEARCH”.)
Programs in memory
O1001
G92 Automatic
operation
Search for desired program

M30 by program number.
Fig. 1.3 (a) Program selection for automatic operation
- 333 -
- Start and stop

Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset
pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination
command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. When one process machining
is completed, automatic operation stops. (See Chapter III-4, “AUTOMATIC OPERATION”.)
Cycle start Start
Feed hold Stop Automatic

Reset operation
Stop caused
by program
Program stop
Program end
Fig. 1.3 (b) Start and stop for automatic operation
- Handle interruption
While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating
the manual handle. (See Section III-4.6, “MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION”.)
Tool position
during automatic
Z
Tool position after operation
handle interruption
Programmed
amount of
movement
Depth of cut
by handle
interruption
X
Fig. 1.3 (c) Handle interruption for automatic operation
1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed.
It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired.
This check can be accomplished by running the machine actually or viewing the position display change
(without running the machine) (See Chapter III-5, “TEST OPERATION”.).
1.4.1 Check by Running the Machine

Explanation
- Dry run
Remove the workpiece, check only movement of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using the dial on
the operator's panel. (See Section III-5.4, “DRY RUN”.)
- 334 -
Tool
Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Dry run
- Feedrate override
Check the program by changing the feedrate specified in the program. (See Section III-5.2, “FEEDRATE
OVERRIDE”.)
Feedrate specified by program :

100 mm/min. Tool
Feedrate after feed rate

override (20%) : 20 mm/min.
Workpiece
Fig. 1.4.1 (b) Feedrate override

- Single block
When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation then stops. By pressing the
cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner.
(See Section III-5.5, “SINGLE BLOCK”.)
Cycle Cycle
Cycle start start
start
Tool
Stop after Stop after

punching operation punching operation
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 1.4.1 (c) Single Block
- 335 -
1.4.2 How to View the Position Display Change without Running

the Machine
Explanation
- Machine Lock
MDI
X
Y
Tool Z
Workpiece
The tool remains stopped, and only the
positional displays of the axes change.
Fig. 1.4.2 (a) Machine Lock
- Auxiliary function lock

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock mode,
all auxiliary functions are disabled. (See Section III-5.1, “MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK”.)
1.5 EDITING A PROGRAM

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the MDI panel.
(See Chapter III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.)
This operation can be executed using the program edit function.
1.6 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key operation on the MDI
screen. (See Chapter III-12, “SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA”.)
Data setting
Data display
Screen Keys
MDI
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and setting data
- 336 -
Explanation
- Offset value
Compensation
Setting
Tool compensation number 1 12.3
Tool compensation number 2 20.0
Tool compensation number 3 ・・・
・・・・・・・・・・
Screen Keys Display
MDI
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (b) Displaying and Setting Offset Values
The tool has the tool dimension (diameter). When a workpiece is machined, the tool movement value
depends on the tool dimensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, CNC automatically generates tool routes that
permit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offset
value. (See Subsection III-12.3.1, “Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value”.)
1st tool path

Machined
shape
2nd tool path
Offset value of the 1st tool

Offset value of the 2nd tool
Fig. 1.6 (c) Offset value
- Displaying and setting operator's setting data

Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operation. This data causes machine
characteristics to change.
For example, the following data can be set:
• Inch/Metric switching
• Selection of I/O devices
• Mirror image cutting on/off
The above data is called setting data. (See Subsection III-12.3.2, “Displaying and Entering Setting Data”.)
- 337 -
Setting data
Setting Inch/Metric switching

Ì Ý
Selection of I/O device
Mirror image ON/OFF setting
:
:
Screen Keys Displaying :
MDI
CNC Memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic Movement of
Program operation the machine
Fig. 1.6 (d) Displaying and setting operator's setting data
- Displaying and setting parameters

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines.
For example, CNC can specify the following:
- Rapid traverse rate of each axis
- Whether increment system is based on metric system or inch system.
- How to set command multiply/detect multiply (CMR/DMR)
Data to make the above specification is called parameters. (See Subsection III-12.4.1, “Displaying and
Setting Parameters”.)
Parameters differ depending on machine tool.
Parameter
Rapid traverse rate
Setting
Position control
Reference position return
Backlash compensation data
Pitch error compensation data
Screen Keys Display
:
:
MDI :
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic
Program operation Movement of
the machine
Fig. 1.6 (e) Displaying and setting parameters
- 338 -
- Data protection key

A key called the data protection key can be defined. It is used to prevent part programs, offset values,
parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously. (See Chapter III-12,
“SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA”.)
Data Setting
Screen Keys
Data protection key
MDI
Registration / modification inhibition
Machine
operator's panel
Program
Offset value Data protection key
Parameters Signal
Setting data
CNC memory
Fig. 1.6 (f) Data protection key
1.7 DISPLAY
1.7.1 Program Display

The contents of the currently active program are displayed.
(See Subsection III-12.2.1, “Program Contents Display”.)
Running program number

Running sequence number
Contents of
program
The line currently being executed

is indicated by the cursor.
Fig. 1.7.1 (a)
The programs in the program memory are listed. (See Subsection III-12.2.4, “Program List Screen”.)
- 339 -
Fig. 1.7.1 (b)
1.7.2 Current Position Display

The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values.
Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remaining travel
distance.
(See Subsections III-12.1.1 to 12.1.3, “Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System”, “Position
Display in the Relative Coordinate System”, and “Overall Position Display”.)
Y
X
Workpiece X
coordinate system
Fig. 1.7.2 (a)
- 340 -
Fig. 1.7.2 (b)
1.7.3 Alarm Display

When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See
Section III-7.1, “ALARM DISPLA”.)
See APPENDIX H for the list of error codes and their meanings.
Fig. 1.7.3 (a)
1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display

The position display screen displays a run time, cycle time, and parts count. (See Subsection III-12.1.6,
“Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time”.)
- 341 -
Fig. 1.7.4 (a)
- 342 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES
As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels
are available.
For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.
Chapter 2, "OPERATIONAL DEVICES", consists of the following sections:
2.1 POWER ON/OFF..............................................................................................................................343

2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS..................................................................................................344
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT ............................................................................................349
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ...........................................................................................350
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES .............................................................................................................360
2.1 POWER ON/OFF
2.1.1 Turning on the Power

Procedure of turning on the power
Procedure
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal.
(For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.)
2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3 After the power is turned on, check that the position screen is displayed. An alarm screen is
displayed if an alarm occurs upon power-on.
Fig. 2.1.1 (a) Position screen (for machining center system)
4 Check that the fan motor is rotating.
- 343 -
2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64554EN/01
WARNING
Until the positional or alarm screen is displayed at the power on, do not touch a
key on the MDI unit. Some keys are used for the maintenance or special
operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation may be
caused.
2.1.2 Power Disconnection

Procedure of power disconnection
Procedure
1 Check that the LED indicating the cycle start is off on the operator's panel.
2 Check that all movable parts of the CNC machine tool is stopping.
3 If an external input/output device such as the Handy File is connected to the CNC, turn off the
external input/output device.
4 Continue to press the <POWER OFF> button for about 5 seconds.
5 Refer to the machine tool builder's manual for turning off the power to the machine.
2.2 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS

The setting and display units are shown in Subsections III-2.2.1 to III-2.2.4.
8.4" LCD/MDI .................................................................................................................................. III-2.2.1

10.4" LCD .................................................................................................................................. III-2.2.2
Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)........................................................................................................ III-2.2.3
Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)............................................................................................................. III-2.2.4
- 344 -
2.2.1 8.4" LCD/MDI
PCMCIA port Liquid crystal display

(LCD)
Soft keys
Fig. 2.2.1 (a) 8.4” LCD/MDI (vertical type)
PCMCIA port Soft keys Liquid crystal display (LCD)
Fig. 2.2.1 (b) 8.4” LCD/MDI (horizontal type)

- 345 -
2.2.2 10.4" LCD
Liquid crystal display

PCMCIA port Soft keys
(LCD)
Fig. 2.2.2 (a) 10.4” LCD

(Note) The touch panel display unit has no soft keys.
- 346 -
2.2.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)

HELP key RESET key Address keys/Numeric keys
Edit keys
Cancel (CAN) key
SHIFT key INPUT key
Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys
Fig. 2.2.3 (a) Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)
2.2.4 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)

Small MDI unit (ONG Key, horizontal type)
Address keys/Numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key
INPUT key
Function keys
SHIFT key
HELP key
Page change keys
RESET key
Edit keys
Cursor move keys
Fig. 2.2.4 (a) 8.4” Small MDI unit (ONG Key, horizontal type)
- 347 -
Small MDI unit (ONG Key, vertical type)
Soft keys
RESET key
Function keys
HELP key
Edit keys
Page change keys
Address keys/Numeric keys Cursor move keys
SHIFT key INPUT key
Fig. 2.2.4 (b) Small MDI unit (ONG Key, vertical type)
- 348 -
2.3 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT

Table 2.3 (a) Explanation of the MDI unit
No. Name Explanation
RESET key
1 Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
HELP key
Press this key to use the help function when uncertain about the operation
2
of an MDI key (help function).
The soft keys have various functions, according to the Applications. The soft key
3 Soft keys
functions are displayed on the display unit.
Address and numeric
keys
4 Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters.
...
SHIFT key Some keys have two characters on their key top. Pressing the <SHIFT> key
5 switches the characters. Special character ^ is displayed on the screen when a
character indicated at the top left corner on the key top can be entered.
When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the data is input to the key input
buffer, and it is displayed on the screen. To copy the data in the key input buffer
INPUT key
6 to the offset register, etc., press the key. This key is equivalent to the
[INPUT] key of the soft keys, and either can be pressed to produce the same
result.
Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer.
Example) When the key input buffer displays
CANCEL (CAN) key >N001X100Z_
7
and the cancel key is pressed, Z is canceled and
>N001X100_
is displayed.
Press these keys when editing the program.
: ALTER
Edit keys
8 : INSERT
: IDELETE
Function keys
Press theses keys to switch display screens for each function.
9
... See Section III-2.4.2, “Function Keys” for details of the function keys.
There are four different cursor move keys.

: This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forward
direction. The cursor is moved in short units in the forward direction.
Cursor keys
: This key is used to move the cursor to the left or in the reverse direction.
10 The cursor is moved in short units in the reverse direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in a downward or forward direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in the forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in an upward or reverse direction.
The cursor is moved in large units in the reverse direction.
- 349 -
No. Name Explanation

Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
(Page keys)
: This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the forward
11 direction.
: This key is used to changeover the page on the screen in the reverse
direction.
2.4 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS

The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key
(section select soft key) is pressed immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to
the selected function can be selected.
2.4.1 General Screen Operations

- Procedure
1 By pressing a function key on the MDI unit, the chapter selection soft keys that belong to the
function are displayed.
Example 1)
Operation selection key
Chapter selection soft keys Continuous menu key
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen of the chapter is displayed. If the
soft key of a desired chapter is not displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple chapters.
3 When the screen of a desired chapter is displayed, press the operation selection key to display
operations to be performed.
Example 2)
Return menu key Operation selection soft keys
4 Select a desired operation with the operation selection soft key.

Depending on the operation to be executed, an auxiliary menu of soft keys is displayed. Perform an
operation according to the indications on the auxiliary menu.
Example 3)
Auxiliary menu
- 350 -
5 To return to the display of chapter selection soft keys, press the return menu key.
A general screen display procedure is provided above.

The actual display procedure varies from one screen to another.
For details, see each description of operation.
- Button design change depending on soft key state

The soft keys assume one of the following states, depending on the selection target:
• Chapter selection soft keys
• Operation selection soft keys
• Auxiliary menu of operation selection soft keys
Depending on the state, the button images of the soft keys change.
From the button images, which state the soft keys are assuming can be known.
Example 1)
For the 8.4-inch LCD display unit
Chapter selection soft keys
Operation selection soft keys
Operation selection keys, auxiliary menu
Example 2)
For the 10.4-inch LCD display unit
Chapter selection soft keys
Operation selection soft keys
Operation selection keys, auxiliary menu
2.4.2 Function Keys

Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed. The following function keys are
provided on the MDI unit:
Press this key to display the position screen.
Press this key to display the program screen.
- 351 -
Press this key to display the offset/setting screen.
Press this key to display the system screen.
Press this key to display the message screen.
Press this key to display the graphics screen.
For the small MDI unit, press .
Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro screen or C Language Executor
screen).
For the small MDI unit, press .
Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro screen or C Language Executor
screen).
For the small MDI unit, there is no key that corresponds to this key.
2.4.3 Soft Keys

By pressing a soft key after a function key, the corresponding screen of the function can be displayed.
The chapter selection soft keys of each function are described below.
The horizontal four keys on the right-hand side are assigned to chapter selection soft keys. When multiple
pages are used for chapter selection soft keys, [+] is displayed on the continuous menu key (rightmost soft
key). Press the continuous menu key to switch between chapter selection soft keys.
NOTE
1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.
For the 10.4-inch LCD display unit, when pressing other than function key indicates positional
display on the left side of the screen, the left half of the soft keys are shown below.
- 352 -
or
As for the soft key [MONITOR], refer to Section III-12.1.7, “Operating Monitor Display”.
Refer to the next page for other soft keys.
Position display screen

The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MONI (OPRT) +
Page 2
Table 2.4.3 (a) Position display screen

No. Chapter menu Description
(1) ABS Selects the absolute coordinate display screen.
(ABSOLUTE)
(2) REL Selects the relative coordinate display screen.
(RELATIVE)
(3) ALL Selects the overall coordinate display screen.
(ALL)
(4) HNDL Selects the operation screen for manual handle operation.
(HANDLE)
(6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load meter.
(MONITOR)
* The items enclosed by parentheses on the second line under "Chapter menu" are displayed in the
10.4-inch display unit.
Program screen
described below.
In the MEM/RMT mode
- 353 -
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRM CHECK CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
DIR (OPRT) ＋
Page 2
In the MDI mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRM MDI CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
DIR (OPRT) ＋
Page 2
In the EDIT mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRM DIR C.A.P (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
In the JOG/HND/REF mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRM CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
DIR (OPRT) ＋
Page 2
Table 2.4.3 (b) Program

(1) PROGRM Selects the screen for displaying a list of part programs currently registered.
(PROGRAM)
(2) CHECK Selects the program check screen for displaying program and axis positions
and modal command values.
(Only for the 8.4-inch display unit)
(2) MDI Selects the screen for editing and displaying a program in the MDI mode. (Only
(MDI) in the MDI mode)
- 354 -

(3) CURRENT Selects the screen for displaying the modal command value and the command
value of the block currently being executed from command values. (Only for
the 8.4-inch display unit)
(4) NEXT Selects the screen for displaying the command value of the block currently
(NEXT BLOCK) being executed and the command value of the block to be executed next from
command values.
(4) C.A.P Selects the screen for figure conversational input.
(C.A.P)
(2) DIR Selects the screen for displaying a list of part programs currently registered.
(7) (DIR)
Offset/setting screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MACRO OPR (OPRT) ＋

Page 2
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
TOOL M.TOOL SAFETY (OPRT) ＋

Page 3
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
LANG. PROT. GUARD (OPRT) ＋

Page 4
Table 2.4.3 (c) Offset

(1) OFFSET Selects the screen for setting tool offset values.
(OFFSET)
(2) SETTING Selects the screen for setting the setting parameters.
(SETTING)
(3) WORK Selects the screen for setting a workpiece coordinate system offset.
(WORK)
(6) MACRO Selects the screen for setting macro variables.
(MACRO)
(8) OPR Selects the screen for operating some operation switches on the machine
(OPERAT PANEL) operator's panel as soft switches.
(11) TOOL Selects the screen for setting tool data
(TOOL REGIST)
- 355 -

(12) M.TOOL Selects the screen for setting multiple tool data
(MULTI TOOL)
(13) SAFETY Selects the screen for setting safety zones
(SAFETY ZONE)
(17) LANG. Selects the screen for setting a display language.
(LANGUAGE)
(18) PROT. Selects the screen for setting data protection.
(PROTECT)
(19) GUARD Selects the screen for setting wrong operation prevention.
(GUARD)
System screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT) ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
PITCH SV.SET (OPRT) ＋

Page 2
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
W.DGNS ALL IO OPEHIS ＋

Page 3
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
PMCMNT PMCLAD PMCCNF PM.MGR (OPRT) ＋

Page 4
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
COLOR MAINTE M-INFO (OPRT) ＋

Page 5
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
FSSB PRMSET (OPRT) ＋

Page 6
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)
EMBED PCMCIA ETHBRD FL-net (OPRT) ＋

Page 7
- 356 -
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
RMTDIAG (OPRT) ＋
Page 8
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)
ID-INF MEMORY (OPRT) ＋

Page 9
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
PROF.M PROF.S DNET M DNET S (OPRT) ＋

Page 10
Table 2.4.3 (d) System

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting parameters.
(PARAMETER)
(2) DGNOS Selects the screen for displaying CNC state.
(DIAGNOSIS)
(4) SYSTEM Selects the screen for displaying the current system status.
SYSTEM
(7) PITCH Selects the screen for setting pith error compensation.
(PITCH ERROR)
(8) SV.SET Selects the screen for setting the servo-related parameters.
(SERVO SETTING)
(11) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo positional deviation
(WAVE DIAG) values, torque values, machine signals, and so forth as graphs.
(12) ALL IO Selects the screen for inputting or outputting data.
(ALL IO)
(14) OPEHIS Selects the screen for displaying the history of operations performed by the
(OPERAT HISTRY) operator and issued alarms.
(16) PMCMNT Selects the screen related to PMC maintenance such as PMC signal state
(PMC MAINTE) monitoring and tracing, and PMC parameter display/editing.
(17) PMCLAD Selects the screen related to ladder display/editing.
(PMC LADDER)
(18) PMCCNF Displays the screen for displaying/editing data other than ladders that makes
(PMC CONFIG) up a sequence program and for setting the PMC function.
(19) PM.MGR Select the screen of Power Mate CNC Manager.
(P.MATE MGR)
(21) COLOR Selects the screen for setting colors to be used on the screen.
(COLOR)
(22) MAINTE Selects the screen for setting maintenance items to be managed periodically.
(PERIOD MAINTE)
(23) M-INFO Selects the screen for displaying information about maintenance performed.
(MAINTE INFO)
(27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the high-speed serial servo
(FSSB) bus (FSSB: Fanuc Serial Servo Bus).
(28) PRMSET Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for start-up and tuning.
(PARAMETER)
(31) EMBED Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet
(EMBED PORT) (embedded port).
- 357 -

(32) PCMCIA Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet
(PCMCIA LAN) (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(33) ETHBRD Selects the screen for making settings related to the fast Ethernet/fast data
(ETHNET BOARD) server.
(34) FL-net Selects the screen for making settings related to FL-net.
(FL-net)
(36) RMTDIAG Selects the screen for making settings related to remote diagnosis.
(REMOTE DIAG)
(41) ID-INF Selects the screen for displaying the contents of ID information.
(ID-INF)
(43) MEMORY Selects the screen for displaying the contents of memory.
(MEMORY)
(46) PROF.M Selects the screen for making settings related to the Profibus master function.
(PROFI MASTER)
(47) PROF.S Selects the screen for making settings related to the Profibus slaver function.
(PROFI SLAVE)
(48) DNET.M Selects the screen for making settings related to the DeviceNet master
(DevNet MASTER) function.
(49) DNET.S Selects the screen for making settings related to the DeviceNet slave function.
(DevNet SLAVE)
Message screen
described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ALARM MSG HISTRY MSGHIS ＋

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
EMB LOG PCM LOG BRD LOG ＋

Page 2
Table 2.4.3 (e) Message

(1) ALARM Selects the alarm message screen.
(ALARM)
(2) MSG Selects the operator message screen.
(MESSAGE)
(3) HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying the details of alarms issued so far.
(HISTORY)
(4) MSGHIS Selects the external operator message screen.
(MESSAGE HISTRY)
(6) EMB LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the embedded
(EMBED LOG) Ethernet (embedded port).
(7) PCM LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the embedded
(PCMCIA LOG) Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
- 358 -

(8) BRD LOG Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the fast
(BOARD LOG) Ethernet/fast data server.
Graphic screen
described below.
When the graphic display function is enabled:

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) +

Page 1
Table 2.4.3 (f) Graphic

(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting graphic parameters.
(PARAMETER)
(2) GRAPH Selects the screen for graphically displaying the tool path.
(GRAPH)
2.4.4 Key Input and Input Buffer

When an address and a numeric key are pressed, the character corresponding to that key is input once into
the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
In order to indicate that it is key input data, a ">" symbol is displayed immediately in front of it.
A "_" is displayed at the end of the key input data indicating the input position of the next character.
Key input buffer display
Fig. 2.4.4 (a) Key input buffer display
- Switching between upper and lower key characters

To input the upper character or symbol of the keys that have two characters inscribed on them, first press
the key and then the key in question.
When the key is pressed, "_" indicating the input position of the next character changes to "∧" and
the upper character can be input. This status is called the shift status.
When a character is input in shift status the shift status is canceled. Furthermore, if the key is
pressed in shift status, the shift status is canceled.
It is possible to input up to 128 characters at a time in the key input buffer.
Press the key to cancel a character or symbol input in the key input buffer.
- 359 -
(Example)
When the key input buffer displays
>N001X100Z_
and the cancel key is pressed, Z is canceled and
>N001X100_
is displayed.
2.4.5 Warning Messages
After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a data check is executed when
key or a soft key is pressed. In the case of incorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing
warning message will be displayed on the status display line.
Key input buffer display

Warning message display
State display
Soft key display
Fig. 2.4.5 (a) Warning message display
Table 2.4.5 (a) Warning Messages

Warning message Content
FORMAT ERROR The format is incorrect.
WRITE PROTECT Key input is invalid because of data protect key or the parameter is not write enabled.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The input value exceeds the permitted range.
TOO MANY DIGITS The input value exceeds the permitted number of digits.
WRONG MODE Parameter input is not possible in any mode other than MDI mode.
EDIT REJECTED It is not possible to edit in the current CNC status.
CANNOT USE I/O DEVICE Because other functions occupy I/O device, I/O device cannot be used.
2.5 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES

External I/O devices such as a memory card are available.
By using an external I/O device such as a memory card, the following data can be input or output:
1. Programs
2. Offset data
3. Parameters
4. Custom macro common variables
For how to input or output data and input data from or output it to a memory card, see Chapter III-8,
“DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”.
- Parameter setting
Before an external input/output device can be used, parameters must be set as follows.
- 360 -
CNC
Main board
Channel 1 Channel 2
JA56A JA36A
RS-232-C RS-232-C
RS232C RS232C
interface interface
I/O CHANNEL=0 I/O CHANNEL=2
or
I/O CHANNEL=1
This CNC has a total of two channels of RS232C interfaces. It also has memory card interface. The
input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel (interface) connected to that device in
setting parameter I/O CHANNEL.
The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an input/output device connected to
a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. (These settings are not required
for the memory card interface.)
For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are provided.
The following shows the interrelation between the RS232C interface parameters for the channels.
0020 I/O CHANNEL Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020)

or foreground input
↓
Set channels to be used 0101 Stop bit and other data
for data input/output.
I/O CHANNEL=0 0102 Number specified for the input/output device
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) (Channel 1)
0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1
=2 : Channel 2 0111 Stop bit and other data
=3 : Channel 3
:
(Channel 1)
: 0113 Baud rate
:
Input/output to and from the memory
card interface, etc. is also possible. 0121 Stop bit and other data
When IO4 is set
(Channel 2)
0123 Baud rate
0021 Foreground output
:
0022 Background input :
0023 :
Background input
I/O CHANNEL=9
The channel setting is the same as
No.0020.
- 361 -
3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
3 MANUAL OPERATION
MANUAL OPERATION are twelve kinds as follows :
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN .............................................................................362

3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) .............................................................................................................................363
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED ...................................................................................................................364
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.............................................................................................................365
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON.............................................................................................................368
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ....................................................................372
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL).......................376
3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

The tool is returned to the reference position as follows :
The tool is moved in the direction specified in bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No.1006 for each axis with the
reference position return switch on the machine operator's panel. The tool moves to the deceleration point
at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the reference position at the FL speed. The rapid traverse rate and
FL speed are specified in parameters Nos. 1424,1421, and 1425.
Four step rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse.
When the tool has returned to the reference position, the reference position return completion LED goes
on. The tool generally moves along only a single axis, but can move along three axes simultaneously
when specified so in bit 0 (JAX) of parameter No.1002.
Tool
Reference position
Deceleration point
Rapid traverse motion Decelerated motion

Rapid traverse rate FL speed
(rapid traverse
override is effective)
Fig. 3.1 (a) Manual reference position return
Procedure for manual reference position return

Procedure
1 Press the reference position return switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 To decrease the feedrate, press a rapid traverse override switch.
3 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and direction for
reference position return. Continue pressing the switch until the tool returns to the reference position.
The tool can be moved along three axes simultaneously when specified so in an appropriate
parameter setting. The tool moves to the deceleration point at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to
the reference position at the FL speed set in a parameter. When the tool has returned to the reference
position, the reference position return completion LED goes on.
4 Perform the same operations for other axes, if necessary.
The above is an example. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for the
actual operations.
- 362 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION
ZERO POSITION MIRRROR IMAGE

X Y Z C X2 Y2 Z2 X Y Z
PROGRAM M02/ MANU SPINDLE ATC

STOP M30 ABS ORI TAP READY NC? MC?
Fig. 3.1 (b)
Explanation
- Automatically setting the coordinate system
Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No.1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system. When ZPR is
set, the coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is
performed.
When α, β and γ are set in parameter 1250, the workpiece coordinate system is determined so that
reference point on the tool holder or the position of the tip of the reference tool is X= α, Y = β, Z = γ
when reference position return is performed. This has the same effect as specifying the following
command for reference position return:
G92XαYβZγ;
However, when the workpiece coordinate system is used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0), it is
not able to use.
Limitation
- Moving the tool again
Once the reference position return completion LED lights at the completion of reference position return,
the tool does not move unless the reference position return switch is turned off.
- Reference position return completion LED

The reference position return completion LED is extinguished by either of the following operations:
• Moving from the reference position.
• Entering an emergency stop state.
- The distance to return to reference position

For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to the reference position, refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3.2 JOG FEED (JOG)

In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel
continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction.
The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter No.1423.
The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
Pressing the rapid traverse switch moves the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate No. 1424 regardless of the
position of the jog feedrate override dial. This function is called the manual rapid traverse.
Manual operation is allowed for one axis at a time. 3 axes can be selected at a time by bit 0 (JAX) of
parameter No.1002.
- 363 -
While a switch is pressed, the tool

moves in the direction specified by
the switch.
Tool
X Workpiece
Fig. 3.2 (a) Jog Feed (JOG)
Procedure for JOG feed

Procedure
1 Press the jog switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and the direction where
the tool is to be moved. While the switch is pressed, the tool moves at the feedrate specified in the
parameter No. 1423. The tool stops when the switch is released.
3 The jog feedrate can be adjusted with the jog feedrate override dial.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch moves
the tool at the rapid traverse rate while the rapid traverse switch is pressed. Rapid traverse override
by the rapid traverse override switches is effective during rapid traverse.
actual operations.
Limitation
- Acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse
Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid traverse are
the same as G00 in programmed command.
- Change of modes
Changing the mode to the jog mode while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch does not
enable jog feed. To enable jog feed, enter the jog mode at first, then press a feed axis and direction
selection switch.
- Rapid traverse prior to reference position return

If reference position return is not performed after power-on, pushing rapid traverse button does not
actuate the rapid traverse but the remains at the JOG feedrate. This function can be disabled by setting bit
0 (RPD) of parameter No.1401.
3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED

In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine
operator's panel moves the tool one step along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum
distance the tool is moved is the least input increment. Each step can be 10, 100, or 1000 times the least
input increment.
With using bit 2 (HNT) of parameter No. 7103, each step can be additionally 10 times the lest input
increment.
- 364 -
The feedrate set in parameter No. 1423 is applied.
By using the manual feedrate override signal, the feedrate can be increased or decreased.
The tool can also be moved at the rapid traverse rate by using the manual rapid traverse selection signal,
independent of the manual feedrate override signal.
Each time a switch is

pressed, the tool moves
one step in the direction
specified by the switch.
Tool
X Workpiece
Fig. 3.3 (a) Incremental feed
Procedure for incremental feed

Procedure
1 Press the INC switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Select the distance to be moved for each step with the magnification dial.
3 Press the feed axis and direction selection switch corresponding to the axis and direction the tool is
to be moved. Each time a switch is pressed, the tool moves one step. The feedrate is the same as the
jog feedrate.
4 Pressing the rapid traverse switch while pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch moves
the tool at the rapid traverse rate.
Rapid traverse override by the rapid traverse override switch is effective during rapid traverse.
actual operations.
3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the
machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis
selection switches.
The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is rotated by one graduation is
equal to the least input increment. One of four types of magnifiers selected with the manual handle feed
move distance select signal can be applied. With bit 2 (HNT) of parameter No. 7103, the minimum
distance can be further 10 times greater.
The number of manual pulse generators is up to three. (Three axes can be moved at save time.)
- 365 -
Tool
X Workpiece
Manual pulse generator
Fig. 3.4 (a) Manual handle feed
Procedure for manual handle feed

Procedure
1 Press the handle switch, one of the mode selection switches.
2 Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed axis selection switch.
3 Select the magnification for the distance the tool is to be moved by pressing a handle feed
magnification switch. The minimum distance the tool is moved when the manual pulse generator is
rotated by one graduation is equal to the least input increment.
4 Move the tool along the selected axis by rotating the handle. Rotating the handle 360 degrees moves
the tool the distance equivalent to 100 graduations.
actual operations.
Explanation
- Availability of manual pulse generator in Jog mode (JHD)
When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, both jog feed and manual handle feed can be used in
JOG mode.
When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, both manual handle feed and incremental feed can be
used in HANDLE mode.
- When manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified
The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And amount of
pulses B will be output as pulses C.
A: Amount of pulses corresponds to value of

Rapid Traverse Rate.
B: Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC.
C: Amount of pulses the same as B.
B
Rapid
traverse
rate
A C
ｔ
Fig. 3.4 (b) Amount of pulses output by CNC in Manual Handle Feed
- 366 -
Amount of pulses B is calculated in 2 cases as following:
1) In case of parameter No.7117 = 0

The feedrate is clamped at the Rapid Traverse Rate and generated pulses exceeding the Rapid
Traverse Rate are ignored (B=0).
2) In case of parameter No.7117 > 0

The feedrate is clamped as the Rapid Traverse Rate, but the pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse
Rate is not ignored. Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC is calculated as following. (Although the
rotation of manual pulse generator is stopped, if there is pulses accumulated in CNC, it will be
output and the tool will move as long as amount of it.)
Magnification set by manual handle feed selection signals MP1 and MP2 is m, value of parameter
No.7117 is n.
n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117.

n ≥ m: Amount A+B, shown in Fig. 3.4 (c), which’s value is multiple of m and small than n. As a
result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected magnification.
A: Amount of pulses the same
as Rapid Traverse Rate.
A n B: Amount of pulses saved in
CNC.
B k : Integer number
ｍ
A＋B=k⋅m
Pulses over (k⋅m) will be ignored
Fig. 3.4 (c) Amount of pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse Rate (n ≥ m)
NOTE
Due to change of mode, clamping can be performed not as an integral multiple
of the selected magnification.
The distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual
pulse generator.
- Upper feedrate limit in manual handle feed

The upper feedrate limit depends on the input signal (maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal
HNDLF) from the PMC as follows:
• When HNDLF is set to 0, the feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.
1424).
• When HNDLF is set to 1, the feedrate is clamped to the feedrate set in parameter No. 1434.
- Movement direction of an axis to the rotation of MPG (HNGx)

Bit 0 (HNGx) of parameter No 7102 switches the direction of MPG in which the tool moves along an axis,
corresponding to the direction in which the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated.
This parameter is valid only for the following functions:

• Manual handle feed
• Manual handle interruption
- 367 -
Limitation
WARNING
Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as ×100 moves the
tool too fast. The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse feedrate.
NOTE
Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or lower.
If the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than five rotations per
second, the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer rotated
or the distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the manual
pulse generator.
3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON

The distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates under the manual absolute
on state. And, it is not added to the coordinates under the manual absolute off state.
On the Series 0i-PD, only the manual absolute on state is available.
Yaxis
Tool
P2 Manual operation
P1
O X axis
The coordinates values change by the
amount of manual operation.
Fig. 3.5 (a) Manual absolute ON
Y2
Y1
P2
P1
O2 X2
O1 X1
The coordinates do not change.
Fig. 3.5 (b) Manual absolute OFF
Explanation
The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates under the manual
absolute ON state, using a program example.
- 368 -
G01G90 X100.0Y100.0F010 ; <1>

X200.0Y150.0 ; <2>
X300.0Y200.0 ; <3>
Fig. 3.5 (c) Program example
The subsequent figures use the following notation:

Movement of the tool under the manual absolute ON
Movement of the tool under the manual absolute OFF
The coordinates after manual operation include the distance the tool is moved by the manual operation.
When the switch is off, therefore, subtract the distance the tool is moved by the manual operation.
- Manual operation after the end of block

Coordinates when block <1> has been executed after manual operation (X-axis +20.0, Y-axis +100.0) at
the end of movement of block <2>.
(220.0 , 250.0)
(120.0 , 200.0)
Manual
(200.0 , 150.0) absolute ON
Manual
absolute OFF
Manual
(100.0 , 100.0) operation
X
Fig. 3.5 (d) Manual operation after the end of block
- Manual operation after a feed hold

Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block <2> is being executed, manual operation
(Y-axis + 75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released.
Y
(300.0 , 275.0)
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0) (300.0 , 200.0)
Manual
absolute ON
(200.0 , 150.0) Manual
(150.0 , 125.0) absolute OFF
Feed hold stop point Manual
operation
X
Fig. 3.5 (e) Manual operation after a feed hold
- When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold

Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block <2> is being executed, manual operation
(Y-axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block <2> is read again.
- 369 -
Y
(300.0 , 275.0)
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0) (300.0 , 200.0)
Manual
absolute ON
(200.0 , 150.0) Manual
(150.0 , 125.0) absolute OFF
Feed hold stop point Manual
operation
X
Fig. 3.5 (f) When reset after a manual operation following a feed hold
- When a movement command in the next block is only one axis

When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns.
Program
N1 G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500 ;
N2 X200.0 ;
Y
N3 Y150.0 ;
(200.0 , 150.0)
N3
N2
(200.0 , 100.0)
Manual (100.0 , 100.0)
absolute ON
Manual
N1
absolute OFF
Manual
operation X
Fig. 3.5 (g) When a movement command in the next block is only one axis
- When the next move block is an incremental

When the following commands are incremental commands, operation is the same as the manual absolute
OFF.
- Manual operation during cutter radius compensation

• Manual absolute ON during cutter radius compensation
Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention with the
manual absolute ON during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter radius
compensation mode will be described. The vector created from the remaining part of the current
block and the beginning of the next block is shifted in parallel. A new vector is created based on the
next block, the block following the next block and the amount of manual movement. This also
applies when manual operation is performed during cornering.
• Manual operation performed in other than cornering

Assume that the feed hold was applied at point PH while moving from PA to PB of programmed path
PA, PB, and PC and that the tool was manually moved to PH'. The block end point PB moves to the
point PB' by the amount of manual movement, and vectors VB1 and VB2 at PB also move to VB1' and
VB2'. Vectors VC1 and VC2 between the next two blocks PB - PC and PC - PD are discarded and new
vectors VC1' and VC2' (VC2' = VC2 in this example) are produced from the relation between PB' - PC
and PC - PD. However, since VB2' is not a newly calculated vector, correct offset is not performed at
block PB' - PC. Offset is correctly performed after PC.
- 370 -
• Manual operation during cornering

This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are
vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new
vectors are calculated from VC1 and VC2. Then correct cutter radius compensation is performed for
the blocks following PC.
• Manual operation after single block stop

Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated by single block stop.
Vectors VB1 and VB2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation. Sub-sequent processing is the
same as case a described above. An MDI operation can also be intervened as well as manual
operation. The movement is the same as that by manual operation.
- 371 -
NOTE
Only manual absolute ON can be used by Series 0i-PD. Manual absolute on/off
operation cannot be switched.
3.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE

Overview
The interval of each reference marks of distance coded linear scale are variable. Accordingly, if the
interval is determined, the absolute position can be determined. The CNC measures the interval of
reference marks by axis moving of short distance and determines the absolute position. Consequently the
reference position can be established without moving to reference position.
Reference mark 1 Reference mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
10.02 10.04
20.02
20.00 20.00
Fig. 3.6 (a) Example of distance coded linear scale
This is an optional function.
3.6.1 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment

Procedure
(1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1".
(2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target axis.
(3) The axis is fed at a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter
No.1425 setting).
(4) When a reference mark is detected, the axis stops, then the axis is fed at a constant low speed again.
(5) Above (4) is executed repeatedly until two, three or four reference marks are detected. And absolute
position is determined and reference position establishment signal (ZRF1,ZRF2,ZRF3, …) turns to
"1". (A number of reference marks is determined by bit 2 (DC2x) and 1 (DC4x) of parameter
No.1802.)
- 372 -
The timing chart for this procedures is given below.

JOG
ZRN
+J1
Reference mark
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate FL rate FL rate
Fig. 3.6.1 (a) Timing chart for reference position establishment
- Procedure for establishing a reference position through automatic operation

If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before a reference position is not established,
steps (3) to (5) above are performed automatically.
After the reference position is established, the automatic reference position return is performed.
- Stopping the operation for establishing a reference position

The operation for establishing a reference position is stopped if any of the following operations is
performed in steps (3) to (5), described above.
• Reset
• Setting the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, -J1, +J2, -J2, etc.) to 0
If any of the following operations is performed during the operation of automatic reference position
return (G28) before a reference position is not established, the operation for establishing a reference
position stops:
• Reset
• Performing feed hold during movement from an intermediate position
If the operation for establishing a reference position is stopped by an operation other than a reset, the
operation for establishing a reference position must be reset and resumed.
3.6.2 Reference Position Return

(1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction
signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishment procedure is
executed.
(2) When the reference position is already established and the axis is moved by turning the feed axis
direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the axis is moved to the reference point
without executing the reference position establishment procedure.
(3) When the reference position is not established and the reference position return command (G28) is
executed, the reference position establishment procedure is executed. The next movement the axis
depends on the setting of bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No. 1818.
(4) When the reference position is already established and the reference position command (G28) is
executed, the movement of the axis depends on the setting of bit 1 (RF2) of parameter No.1818.
- 373 -
3.6.3 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder

In case of setting a rotary axis, if bit 3 (DCRx) of parameter No.1815 is set, the setting axis is regarded as
being equipped with a distance coded rotary encoder.
In case of distance coded rotary encoder, the marker interval may be different from parameter setting
value. (a-b section of the following figure) When the reference point return is executed through this
section, it is not able to establish the reference point. Therefore, in case of distance coded rotary encoder,
if the reference point return is started for B point from A point of below figure, the reference point is not
established yet at B point. The reference point return is re-started for C point. The reference point return
procedure is finished at C point.
C
B
20.02 20.02
b
9.96
20.02 9.98 19.66
9.94
A
a
9.64
20.00 20.00
20.00
• When the reference point return procedure is executed, the coordinate value are rounded in 0 to 360
degree, even if Machine coordinate values are linear axis type.
• In case of distance coded rotary encoder, only the measurement by three points or four points is
possible. (bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No.1802 is disregarded as 0.)
3.6.4 Axis Synchronization Control

Requirements when this function is used with axis synchronization control
axes
When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, the distance coded linear scale used for
the master axis and that used for the slave axis must have reference marks placed at identical intervals.
(Set identical values in parameters Nos. 1821 and 1882 for both the master and slave axes.)
This function does not work unless the use of this function is specified for both the master and slave axes
(bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815 is 1).
Also, in all parameters related to this function, except parameter No. 1883, 1884 (distance from the scale
zero point to reference position 1, 2), set identical values for both the master and slave axes.
If a parameter value for the master axis differs from the corresponding parameter value for the slave axis,
alarm SV1051, “ILLEGAL SYNCHRONOUS AXIS” is issued.
NOTE
When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes for which the
operation mode is switched between synchronization operation and normal
operation, this function is enabled only if the synchronization select signal
(SYNC1, SYNC2, ...) is 1. (During establishment of a reference position, the
synchronization select signal status must be maintained.)
Reference position establishment with axis synchronization control axes

With axis synchronization control axes, a reference position is established as follows. When a reference
mark for the master or slave axis is detected, a stop takes place temporarily. Then, a feed operation is
performed again at the reference position return FL feedrate. This sequence is repeated until a reference
- 374 -
mark is detected three or four times for both the master and slave axes. Then the absolute position is
calculated for both the master and slave axes, and the reference position establish signals ZRF1, ZRF2, ...
are set to 1.
After the reference position has been established by the above operation, a synchronization error is
corrected. (Checking for excessive synchronization error alarm 2 is made even during reference position
establishment.)
(Example of 3 points measurement system)
Scale end
Reference mark
Master axis
(1) (2) (3)

Start point End Point
Slave axis
(a) (b) (c)
In the above example, the following sequence is executed.

a. When the reference mark (1) of the master axis is detected, both master axis and slave axis stop.
b. Both the axes begin to move again at a reference position return FL feedrate.
c. When the reference mark (a) of the slave axis is detected, both axes stop again.
d. Both the axes begin to move again at FL feedrate.
e. Both axes repeat the operation until all point ((2) -> (b) ->(3) -> (c)) are detected.
f. When the slave axis detects the third reference mark (c), both the axes end the reference position
establishment.
NOTE
In case of this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, if the value
of parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884 for both the master and slave axes is 0, the
reference position is not established. Also, the reference position establish signals
ZRF1, ZRF2, ... are set to 0.
3.6.5 Axis Control by PMC

In PMC axis control, if the reference position return command (axis control command code 05H) is issued for
an axis having a distance coded linear scale, reference position return is performed according to the reference
position return sequence for the distance coded linear scale.
Specifically, the following operations take place:
Before reference position The reference position is established by detecting two, three or four reference marks.
establishment Movement to the reference position is not performed.
After reference position Positioning at the reference position is performed.
establishment
3.6.6 Note
(1) In the case of the actual interval of reference marks is different from parameter setting value, the
alarm DS1449, “REFERENCE MARKS ARE DIFFERENT FROM PARAMETER” occurs.
- 375 -
(2) This function is disabled if any of the following conditions is satisfied:

• Either parameter No.1821 (mark-1 interval) or parameter No.1882 (mark-2 interval) is set to 0.
• The setting of parameter No.1821 is greater than or equal to the setting of parameter No.1882.
• The difference between the settings made for parameters Nos. 1821 and 1882 is greater than or
equal to twice either setting.
• The absolute-position detection function is enabled. (Bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No.1815 is set
to 1.)
(3) A difference of parameters Nos.1821 and 1882 must be more than 4.

Example)
When the scale, which is that mark1 interval is 20.000mm and mark2 interval is 20.004mm, is
used on IS-B machine :
When the detection unit of 0.001mm is selected, parameter No.1821 and No.1882 must be set
"20000" and "20004", and the difference of them is "4".
To use such a scale, please adjust the detection unit by modification of parameters No.1820
(CMR) and Nos.2084/2085(flexible feed gear) to make the difference of parameters Nos.1821
and 1882 more than 4 as following examples.
(a) Set the detection unit=0.0001mm, and set No.1821=200000, No.1882=200040
(b) Set the detection unit=0.0005mm, and set No.1821=40000, No.1882=40008
NOTE
When the detection unit is changed, parameters relating to the detection unit
(such as the effective area and positional deviation limit) must also be changed
accordingly.
(4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or four reference marks are detected. If this
procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three or four reference
marks and the axis does not stop until over travel alarm occurs. Please care to start at the position
that has enough distance from scale end.
Scale end
Reference marks
Start point (Bad) Start point (Good)
(5) When the axis used this function, the following function can not be used.
• Absolute position detection (bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No.1815 = 1)
(6) If axial movement is made in the direction opposite to that of reference position return, the
movement is reversed to the direction of reference position return after three or four reference marks
have been detected. Steps (3) to (5) of the basic procedure for establishing a reference position are
carried out to establish the reference position.
3.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE

MARKS (SERIAL)
Overview
By using High-resolution serial output circuit for the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks
(serial), the CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by axis moving of short distance and
determines the absolute position.
- 376 -
This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit.
It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length.
Explanation
The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is combined the irregular reference marked
linear scale with the High-resolution serial output circuit, it can detect the accurate position.
Reference mark signal
10.02 10.04 10.06
0 20 40 60
The CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by axis moving of short distance and determines the
absolute position, because of the interval of each reference mark is different with regular interval.
It is not necessary that the axis is moved to the reference position for establishment of reference position.
This function enables high-speed high-precision detection by using High-resolution serial output circuit.
It is available that using maximum stroke 30 meters length.
- Connection
It is available under full closed system.
Full Closed System
CNC Servo
Amplifier Table
Separate High
Detector Resolution
Interface Serial Output Max. 30m
Unit Circuit C
Linear scale with distance-coded

reference marks (serial)
- Procedure for reference position establishment through manual operation

(1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1".
(2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,…) for a target axis.
(3) The axis is fed at a constant low speed (reference position return FL feedrate specified by parameter
No.1425 setting).
(4) When the absolute position of linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is detected,
the axis stops. Then the absolute position of CNC is calculated and reference position establishment
signal (ZRF1,ZRF2,ZRF3,…) turns to "1".
- 377 -
The timing chart for this procedures is given below.

JOG
ZRN
+J1
Reference mark
ZRF1
Feedrate
FL rate
- Procedure for reference position establishment through automatic operation

If an automatic reference position return (G28) is specified before a reference position is not established,
steps (3) to (4) above are performed automatically.
After the reference position is established, the automatic reference position return is performed by setting
of bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No. 1818.
- Stopping the operation for establishing a reference position

The operation for establishing a reference position is stopped if any of
the following operations is performed in steps (3) to (4), described above.
• Reset
• Setting the feed axis direction selection signal (+J1, -J1, +J2, -J2, etc.) to 0
• Setting the Servo off signals (SVF1, SVF2, etc.) to 1
If any of the following operations is performed during the operation of automatic reference position
return (G28) before a reference position is not established, the operation for establishing a reference
position stops:
• Reset
• Performing feed hold during movement from an intermediate position
• Setting the Servo off signals (SVF1, SVF2, etc.) to 1
If the operation for establishing a reference position is stopped by an operation other than a reset, the
operation for establishing a reference position must be reset and resumed.
- Establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position

By following operation, establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position is
performed.
Moving through manual Moving through automatic operation by automatic

operation in REF mode reference position return (G28)
The reference Establishing the reference Firstly, moving to the intermediate position, and
position is not position establishing the reference position.
established. Secondly, whether moving to the reference position or not
is performed by setting bit 0 (RFS) of parameter No.1818.
The reference Moving to the reference position Whether moving to the intermediate position and the
position is reference position or not is performed by setting bit 1
established. (RF2) of parameter No.1818.
- Feed axis synchronization control

In case of using the axis synchronization control, please confirm the following items.
• When this function is used with axis synchronization control axes, the linear scale with
distance-coded reference marks (serial) used for the master axis and that used for the slave axis must
have reference marks placed at identical intervals.
• The master axis scale and the slave axis scale should be installed in parallel direction. (The zero
positions should be faced the same direction.)
- 378 -
• To the parameters, which relate to this function (except No.1883, No.1884), the same value must be
set for the master axis and for the slave axis.
• The linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) should be applied for the master axis
and the slave axis.
If either of the master axis or the slave axis is not the linear scale with distance-coded reference
marks (serial), alarm DS0018, “SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC CTRL)” occurs when
reference position establishment is tried.
• During operating the establishment of reference position, the state of signal (SYNCn or SYNCJn)
for selecting synchronized axis should be kept.
Procedure for reference position establishment by axis synchronization control is as follows.

• Both of axes (master axis and slave axis) are fed on the reference position return FL feedrate until
distance coded scales of both axes detect the absolute position.
• Then absolute position of both axes are calculated and Reference Position Establishment Signals
(ZRF1,ZRF2,...) turn to "1".
CAUTION
1 When the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is used,
please set bit 3 (SDCx) of parameter No.1818 to 1.
2 On the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the axis does
not stop until three reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at
the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three reference marks and
the axis does not stop until over travel alarm occurs. Please care to start at the
position that has enough distance from scale end.
And if establishment of reference position is failed, the establishment is retried.
Then axis does not stop until still more three reference marks are detected. So
please set the maximum move amount (detection unit : parameter No.14010) not
to reach the scale end.
Scale end
Reference marks
Start point (Bad) Start point (Good)
- 379 -
4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation.
The chapter 4 explains the following types of AUTOMATIC OPERATION:
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION .................................................................................................................380

Operation by executing a program registered in CNC memory
4.2 MDI OPERATION ...........................................................................................................................382
Operation by executing a program entered from the MDI unit
4.3 DNC OPERATION...........................................................................................................................385
Function for executing a program while reading the program from an input device
connected to the RS232C interface or a memory card.
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION ..............................................................................................................387
Function for executing a program while reading the program from an input device
connected to the RS232C interface or a memory card according to a schedule.
4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198).................................................................................391
Function for calling and executing subprograms (files) registered in an external
input/output device during memory operation
4.6 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION..........................................................................................393
Function for performing manual feed during movement executed by automatic operation
4.7 MIRROR IMAGE.............................................................................................................................399
Function for enabling mirror-image movement along an axis during automatic operation
4.1 MEMORY OPERATION

Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these programs is selected and the cycle start
switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED
goes on.
When the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed during automatic operation,
automatic operation is stopped temporarily. When the cycle start switch is pressed again, automatic
operation is restarted.
When the key on the MDI unit is pressed, automatic operation terminates and the reset state is
entered.
The following procedure is given as an example. For actual operation, refer to the manual supplied by the
Memory operation
Procedure
1 Press the MEMORY mode selection switch.
2 Select a program from the registered programs. To do this, follow the steps below.
2-1 Press key to display the program screen.
2-2 Press address key.

2-3 Enter a program number using the numeric keys.
2-4 Press the [O SRH] soft key.
3 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel.
Automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes on. When automatic operation terminates,
the cycle start LED goes off.
4 To stop or cancel memory operation midway through, follow the steps below.
- 380 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION
a. Stopping memory operation
Press the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel. The feed hold LED goes on and the
cycle start LED goes off. The machine responds as follows:
(i) When the machine was moving, feed operation decelerates and stops.
(ii) When dwell was being performed, dwell is stopped.
(iii) When M, S, or T was being executed, the operation is stopped after M, S, or T is finished.
When the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed while the feed hold LED
is on, machine operation restarts.
b. Terminating memory operation
Press the key on the MDI unit.
Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops.
Explanation
- Memory operation
After memory operation is started, the following are executed:
(1) A one-block command is read from the specified program.
(2) The block command is decoded.
(3) The command execution is started.
(4) The command in the next block is read.
(5) Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate execution.
(6) Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block can be started. This is
because buffering has been executed.
(7) Hereafter, memory operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to (6).
- Stopping and terminating memory operation

Memory operation can be stopped using one of two methods: Specify a stop command, or press a key on
the machine operator's panel.
• The stop commands include M00 (program stop), M01 (optional stop), and M02 and M30 (program
end).
• There are two keys to stop memory operation: The feed hold key and reset key.
- Program stop (M00)

Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all
existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The memory operation can
be restarted by pressing the cycle start button. Operation may vary depending on the machine tool builder.
Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Optional stop (M01)

Similarly to M00, memory operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is
only effective when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operator's panel is set to ON. Operation may
vary depending on the machine tool builder. Refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
- Program end (M02, M30)

When M02 or M30 (specified at the end of the main program) is read, memory operation is terminated
and the reset state is entered.
In some machines, M30 returns control to the top of the program. For details, refer to the manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
- Feed hold
When Feed Hold button on the operator's panel is pressed during memory operation, the tool decelerates
to a stop at a time.
- 381 -
- Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using key on
the MDI unit or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool moving
status, the motion is slowed down then stops.

A block skip slash (/) must be specified at the beginning of a block.
Note that if a slash is placed elsewhere, the information from the slash to immediately before the EOB
code is ignored.
4.2 MDI OPERATION

In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 511 characters can be created in the same format as
normal programs and executed from the MDI unit.
MDI operation is used for simple test operations.
MDI Operation
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
2 Press the key to select the program screen. The following screen appears:
Fig. 4.2 (a) MDI program screen
At this time, program number “O0000” is inserted automatically.
3 Prepare a program to be executed by an operation similar to normal program editing. M99 specified
in the last block can return control to the beginning of the program after operation ends. Word
insertion, modification, deletion, word search, address search, and program search are available for
programs created in the MDI mode.
4 To entirely erase a program created in MDI mode, use one of the following methods:
a. Enter address key, then press the key.
- 382 -
b. Alternatively, press the key. In this case, set bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 to 1 in
advance.
5 To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program.
Push Cycle Start button on the operator's panel. By this action, the prepared program will start.
When the program end (M02, M30) or ER(%) is executed, the prepared program will be
automatically erased and the operation will end.
By command of M99, control returns to the head of the prepared program.
6 To stop or terminate MDI operation in midway through, follow the steps below.
a. Stopping MDI operation
Press the feed hold switch on the machine operator's panel. The feed hold LED goes on and the
cycle start LED goes off. The machine responds as follows:
(i) When the machine was moving, feed operation decelerates and stops.
(ii) When dwell was being performed, dwell is stopped.
(iii) When M, S, or T was being executed, the operation is stopped after M, S, or T is finished.
When the cycle start switch on the machine operator's panel is pressed, machine operation
restarts.
b. Terminating MDI operation
Press the key.
Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered.
When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops.
Explanation
The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation,
except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return control to the beginning of the program (M99
performs this function).
- Erasing the program

Programs prepared in the MDI mode will be erased in the following cases:
• In MDI operation, if M02, M30 or ER(%) is executed.
• When bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, and the last block of the program is executed in
single block operation
NOTE
In the two cases above, program erasure can be prevented by setting bit 6
(MKP) of parameter No. 3204 to 1.
• In MEM mode, if memory operation is performed.
• In EDIT mode, if any editing is performed.
• When the and keys are pressed.
• Upon reset when bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No.3203 is set to 1
NOTE
Upon reset when the parameter MCL = 0, the cursor moves to the end of the
program.
- Restart
If a program is not executed even once after the program is input, the program is executed from the
beginning, regardless of where the cursor is placed. However, a program is executed starting at the
beginning of the block where the cursor is place, if the program is stopped for a reason such as single
block operation after restart of an MDI operation then is restarted after an editing operation.
- 383 -
CAUTION
When an MDI program is restarted, the program is executed starting at the
beginning of the block where the cursor is placed, regardless of the cursor
position in the block.
(Example)
When the cursor is placed on G90
:
G91 X100.0 G90Y200.0 Z300.0 ;
:
The program is executed starting at the beginning (namely, G91) of this
block. So, the tool moves by 100.0 along the X-axis in the incremental
programming, and moves to 200.0 and 300.0 along the Y-axis and Z-axis,
respectively, in the absolute programming.
- Editing a program during MDI operation

A program can be edited during MDI operation. By setting bit 5 (MIE) of parameter No. 3203 to 1,
editing can be disabled. However, even when bit 5 (MIE) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, editing can be
enabled by resetting the operation.
- Absolute/incremental command
When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI
operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5
(ABS) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 0, and the absolute programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of
Bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401=1

Bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401=0 Bit 5 (ABS) of parameter Bit 5 (ABS) of parameter
No. 3401=0 No. 3401=1
Absolute mode operation with G90 Incremental mode operation at all Absolute mode operation at all
command, and incremental programming times, independent of G90/G91 times, independent of G90/G91
operation with G91 command command command
Limitation
- Program registration
Programs created in MDI mode cannot be registered.
- Number of characters in a program

A created program can consist of up to 511 characters including "O0000" automatically inserted.
- Subprogram nesting
The subprogram call command (M98) can be described in a program created in MDI mode. That is,
programs that are registered in memory through MDI operation can be called and executed. The level of
subprogram call nesting is the same as in MEM operation.
- Macro call
When the custom macro function is enabled, a macro program can be created and executed even in the
MDI mode. Moreover, a macro program can be called for execution.
- 384 -
NOTE
The GOTO statement, WHILE statement, and DO statement cannot be executed
in a program created in the MDI mode. An alarm PS0377, “ILLEGAL MODE
FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO” is issued.
When a program including those statements is to be executed, register the
program in the program memory then call the program for execution.
4.3 DNC OPERATION

By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform
machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read in via reader/puncher interface.
To use the DNC operation function, it is necessary to set the parameters related to the reader/punch
interface in advance.
The procedure described below is just an example. For actual operation, refer to the relevant manual of
DNC operation
Procedure
1 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator's panel to enter the RMT mode.
2 Select the program to be executed.
• Selecting a DNC operation file
Enter the number of the file to be subjected to DNC operation is performed on the memory card
(or floppy cassette) list screen with the keyboard and press soft key [DNC SET] (or [DNC
SET] for the 10.4-inch display unit) to select the file to be subjected to DNC operation. (The
selected file is marked with "D".)
• Releasing a DNC operation file
Press soft key [DNC CLR] (or [DNC CLR] for the 10.4-inch display unit) on the memory card
(or floppy cassette) list screen to release the DNC operation file. (The "D" mark for the file is
removed.)
3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the selected file. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to
the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
- 385 -
4 During DNC operation, executed programs are listed on the program check screen and program
screen.
Fig. 4.3 (a) PROGRAM screen
Fig. 4.3 (b) PROGRAM CHECK screen
NOTE
1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedule data. DNC
operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time.
2 A DNC operation file cannot be released during DNC operation.
3 To switch between devices when DNC settings are made, release the settings
and then make the settings again.
Explanation
During DNC operation, subprograms and macro programs stored in memory can be called.
- 386 -
Limitation
- M198 (command for calling a program from within an external input/output
unit)
In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198 is executed, alarm PS0210, “CAN NOT
COMMAND M198/M99” is issued.
- Custom macro
In DNC operation, custom macros can be specified, but no repeat instruction and branch instruction can
be programmed. If a repeat instruction or branch instruction is executed, alarm PS0123, “ILLEGAL
MODE FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO” is issued.
- M99
For returning from a subprogram or macro program to the calling program during DNC operation, the
specification of a return command (M99P...) with a sequence number specified is not allowed.
4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION

To perform schedule operation, select files (programs) registered in a memory card and specify the
sequence of execution and the repetition count of each program.
Schedule operation
Procedure
1 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator's panel to enter the RMT mode.
2 Select the program to be subjected to schedule operation.
• Selecting a schedule
Select the file to be subjected to schedule operation. After selecting the file, press soft key
[SCHDL] to display the schedule list screen.
Fig. 4.4 (a) Program list screen (10.4-inch)
[SCHDL]
Lists the settings of schedule data to edit the repetition count or the like (see the next page for
details).
- 387 -
• Setting and editing a schedule (for the 10.4-inch display unit)

Move the cursor to the FILE NUMBER field or FILE NAME field of the desired number, enter the
file number or file name with the keyboard, and press edit key to schedule the file.
Schedule operation is performed in ascending order of the number. When a schedule is set in this
procedure, the file execution repeat count is set to 1. The repeat count and the order of schedule
operation can be edited on this screen.
Fig. 4.4 (b) Schedule list screen (10.4-inch)
[FILE UP] Moves the file at the cursor position up one line and moves the replaced file down
one line.
[FILE DOWN] Moves the file at the cursor position down one line and moves the replaced file up
one line.
[DELETE] Deletes the file at the cursor position and moves the files below the cursor up one
line.
[INSERT] Moves the files below the cursor down one line.
[ALL DELETE] Deletes all records.
• Setting and editing a schedule (for the 8.4-inch display unit)

There are two schedule list screens for the 8.4-inch display unit: the file number screen for setting
file numbers and the file name screen for setting file names. On the schedule list screen, press
continuous menu key and press soft key [F-NAME] or [F-NO] to select one of the two screen.
(When the file number screen is displayed, soft key [F-NAME] appears. When the file name
screen is displayed, soft key [F-NO] appears.)
Move the cursor to the FILE NUMBER field or FILE NAME field of the desired number, enter the
file number or file name with the keyboard, and press edit key to schedule the file. Schedule
operation is performed in ascending order of the number. When a schedule is set in this procedure,
the file execution repeat count is set to 1. The repeat count and the order of schedule operation can
be edited on this screen.
- 388 -
Fig. 4.4 (c) File number screen (schedule list screen)(8.4-inch)
Fig. 4.4 (d) File name screen (schedule list screen) (8.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 4.4 (e) Soft key [F-NO] (8.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 4.4 (f) Soft key [F-NAME] (8.4-inch display unit)
[F-UP] Replaces the file at the cursor position with the file located one line above.
[F-DOWN] Replaces the file at the cursor position with the file located one line below.
[DELETE] Deletes the file at the cursor position and moves the files at the lower positions up one
line.
[INST] Moves the files at the cursor and lower positions down one line.
[ALLDEL] Deletes all records.
[F-NO] Displays the file number screen.
- 389 -
[F-NAME] Displays file name screen.
The files registered as schedule data are marked with "S" to the left of their file names on the
program list screen.
Fig. 4.4 (g) Program list screen (after setting schedule data) (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Press the cycle start switch to execute the selected files. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to
the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 Before setting schedule operation, release DNC operation files in the MDI mode.
DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time.
2 Before starting schedule operation, confirm that schedule data is set correctly on
the schedule list screen.
3 Schedule data cannot be changed or edited during schedule operation. Before
changing schedule data, make a reset to stop operation.
Restrictions
- Repetition count
The maximum repetition count during schedule operation is 9999. When a negative value is specified, an
endless loop (LOOP display) is assumed. The file for which 0 is set is skipped and processing proceeds to
the next file.
- Number of registered files

The maximum number of programs that can be registered as schedule setting data is 20.
- Selectable files
The files to be selected as schedule setting data must be registered in the same directory. (Files in the
different directories cannot be selected.)
- M code
Even if a code other than M02 and M30 in the execution program is executed, the current count on the
schedule execution status screen is not increased.
- 390 -
- Floppy disk folder display during execution of a file

During schedule operation, folders in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit.
- Intervention during automatic operation

Intervention in schedule operation cannot be performed during automatic operation.
4.5 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)

During memory operation, you can call and execute a subprogram registered in an external device (such
as a Memory Card, Handy File, or Data Server) connected to the CNC.
Format
M198 Pxxxxxxxx Lyyyyyyyy ;
↑ ↑
Pxxxxxxxx : Program number (or file number)
Lyyyyyyyy : Number of repetitive calls
• If calling with a file name

M198 <xxxx> Lyyyyyyyy ;
↑ ↑
xxxx : File name of an external subprogram
Lyyyyyyyy : Number of repetitive calls
When address L is omitted, the number of repetitive calls is assumed to be 1.

FS0i-PC compatible command format
(The following command format is valid only when a 4-digit program number is used.)
M198 Pxxxx yyyy ;
↑ ↑
xxxx : Number of repetitive calls
yyyy : Program number (or file number)
When the number of repetitive calls is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.
Explanation
M code M198 specifies an external subprogram call. You can also call an external subprogram using an
M code set in parameter No. 6030. (When an M code other than M198 is set as an M code for calling an
external subprogram, M198 is executed as a normal M code.)
Specify a program number (file number) registered in an external device at address P. If the specified
program number (file number) is not registered in the connected external device, an alarm PS1079,
“PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND” is issued. (When the memory card is used as external device, alarm
(SR1966) is issued.)
- 391 -
Example )
M198 P0123 L3;
This command specifies that the subprogram having external subprogram number
O0123 is to be called three times repeatedly.
The subprogram is called from the main program and executed as follows:
Main program Sub program
1 2 3
N0010 ... ; 0123 ... ;
N0020 ... ; N1020 ... ;
N0030 M198 P0123 L3 ; N1030 ... ;
N0040 ... ; N1040 ... ;
N0050 ; N0050 ... ;
N0060 ... ; N1060 ... M99 ;
- Program number call

You can also specify a subprogram call with its program number instead of the file number by the setting
of bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404.
NOTE
1 An external subprogram call can be specified during program operation in the
MEM mode or MDI mode. To make an external subprogram call in the MDI
mode, set bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630 to 1.
2 An external subprogram call is available for the following external devices:
External device name Program number call File number call
Handy File Available Available
FLOPPY CASSTTE Available Available
Memory Card Available Unavailable
Data Server Available Unavailable
3 To perform a subprogram call using a Memory Card as the external device, set
bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 138 to 1 and I/O channel (parameter No. 0020) to
4.
A program number call is always enabled regardless of the setting of bit 2 (SBP)
of parameter No. 3404.
4 To perform a file name call using a Handy File or floppy cassette as the external
device, set bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 to 1.
5 called using another external device subprogram call. (An alarm PS1080,
“DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL” is issued.)
Main program Sub program Sub program

(internal memory) (External device) (External device)
Can be called. Cannot be
called.
M198 M198 (Alarm)
- 392 -
NOTE
6 A subprogram registered in internal memory can be called from a subprogram
called using an external device subprogram call. From the called subprogram in
internal memory, another external device subprogram call cannot be performed.
(An alarm (PS1080) is issued.)
Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program
(internal memory) (External (internal (External
device) memory) device)
M198
M98 M198
Can be called. Cannot be called.
Can be called. (Alarm)
7 A call using the external device subprogram call function is counted as one level
of subprogram nesting.
8 In a multi-path system, an external device subprogram call cannot be performed
simultaneously from multiple paths.
When external subprogram calls using the Data Server that are available in
multi-path systems are used, however, external subprogram call commands
using the Data Server can be specified simultaneously from multiple paths.
4.6 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION

By rotating the manual pulse generator in the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC
operation, or memory operation) or in the memory editing mode, handle feed can be superimposed on
movement by automatic operation. A handle interruption axis is selected using the manual handle
interruption axis selection signals HSnIA to HSnIE.
The minimum unit of travel distance per scale division is the least input increment. One of four types of
magnifiers selected with manual handle feed selection signals MP1 and MP2 can be applied. With bit 3
(HIT) of parameter No. 7103, the minimum unit of travel distance can be further 10 times greater.
A handle feed magnifier is selected using the manual handle feed amount selection signal. (See Section
III-3.4, "MANUAL HANDLE FEED".)
Tool position
during automatic
Z
Tool position after operation
handle interruption
Programmed
amount of
movement
Depth of cut
by handle
interruption
X
Fig. 4.6 (a) Manual handle interruption
- 393 -
WARNING
The travel distance per scale division by manual handle interruption is the least
input increment as with manual handle feed. With a machine of metric input and
inch output, for example, the travel distance per 254 scale divisions is 0.01 inch.
With a machine of inch input and metric output, the travel distance per 100 scale
divisions is 0.254 mm.
Explanation
- Interruption operation
1 When the handle interruption axis selection signal for a handle interruption axis is set to 1 in the
automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or in the
memory editing mode, manual handle interruption can be performed by rotating the handle of the
manual pulse generator.
NOTE
Even when the feedrate override signal sets 0%, manual handle interruption can
be accepted.
2 For the method of selecting a manual handle interruption axis, refer to the relevant manual of the
3 The feedrate during manual handle interruption is the sum of feedrate used for automatic operation
and the feedrate used for movement by manual handle interruption. However, the feedrate during
manual handle interruption is controlled so that it does not exceed the maximum allowable cutting
feedrate for the axis.
Example
Suppose that the maximum allowable cutting feedrate for an axis is 5 m/min, and
that a movement is made in the + direction at 2 m/min along the axis. In this
case, manual handle interruption can be accepted even when the manual pulse
generator is rotated up to a speed equivalent to 3 m/min. Manual handle
interruption by rotation in one direction can be accepted even when the manual
pulse generator is rotated to a speed equivalent to 7 m/min.
If the manual pulse generator is rotated to a speed beyond the upper limits,
those pulses from the manual pulse generator that correspond to the excess are
lost, resulting in a mismatch between the scale mark of the manual pulse
generator and the actually interrupted travel distance.
4 For a magnifier for manual handle interruption, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool
builder.
5 If the travel direction is reversed as a result of manual handle interruption, backlash compensation is
performed. Pitch error compensation is performed for the position after interruption.
6 In manual handle interruption, only acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is enabled. By setting
bit 0 (MNJ) of parameter No. 1606 to 1, acceleration/deceleration for both of cutting feed and jog
feed can be applied to manual handle interruption.
- Manual handle interruption and coordinate system

1 The amount of manual handle interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate systems and the local
coordinate system. So, the machine moves, but the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate systems
and the local coordinate system remain unchanged.
Regardless of which coordinate system is selected, all workpiece coordinate systems and the local
coordinate system shift by the same amount.
- 394 -
• Absolute coordinates
→ Remain unchanged by handle interruption.
• Relative coordinates
→ Change by the amount of handle interruption.
• Machine coordinates
→ Change by the amount of handle interruption.
Programmed path
Path after
interruption
Shift by manual handle

interruption
(Workpiece coordinate system before

interruption)
(Workpiece coordinate system after

interruption)
2 Even when manual handle interruption is performed, the machine coordinate system remains
unchanged. The absolute command (G53) in the machine coordinate system is not affected by
manual handle interruption.
(G90G54****)
Programmed path
Path after
interruption
Shift by manual handle
interruption
(Workpiece coordinate system before

interruption)
(Workpiece coordinate system after
(G90G53****) interruption)
3 In automatic reference position return (G28), the end point (reference position) is not affected by
manual handle interruption. However, the midpoint is in the workpiece coordinate system, so that
the position shifted by the amount of interruption becomes the midpoint.
- Cancellation of the amount of interruption

Operation by which the workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual handle interruption from the
machine coordinate system is returned to the original workpiece coordinate system is referred to
cancellation of the amount of interruption.
When the amount of interruption is canceled, the workpiece coordinate system is shifted by the amount of
manual handle interruption, and the amount of interruption is reflected in the absolute coordinates.
- 395 -
Interruption shifts the workpiece coordinate system from the machine coordinate system.
Position before interruption
Workpiece
coordinate system
before interruption
Workpiece
origin offset
Interruption Position after
interruption
Workpiece
coordinate
system after
(Machine zero point) interruption
By cancellation, the workpiece coordinate system returns to the state present before handle interruption.
Workpiece
coordinate system
Workpiece after cancellation
Interruption amount
origin cancellation
offset Position after
cancellation
Workpiece
coordinate
system before
cancellation
(Machine zero point)
In the following cases, the amount of interruption is canceled:

• When a reset is made (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1)
• When emergency stop state is canceled (when bit 1 (RTH) of parameter No. 7103 is set to 1)
• When a manual reference position return operation is performed
(when G28 is specified before a reference position is established)
• When a reference position is set without dogs
• When the workpiece coordinate system is preset
NOTE
When the amount of interruption is cleared using soft keys, only the indication of
the amount of interruption becomes 0, and the workpiece coordinate system
remains unchanged.
- Clearing the amount of interruption by soft keys

Clearing of the amount of interruption means that the indication of the amount of interruption by manual
handle interruption is set to 0. The workpiece coordinate system does not change.
"Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis" is performed for the amount of manual handle interruption.
When bit 3 (HLC) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, soft key [INTRPT CANCEL], which is used for this
operation, appears. When HLC is set to 0, soft key [INTRPT CANCEL] does not appear.
To select "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", follow the procedure below.
1 Press function key on the MDI unit.

2 Press soft key [HANDLE].
- 396 -
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)].
4 To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", press soft key [CANCEL].
To prepare for "Clearing all axes" or "Clearing any axis", perform one of the following.
• Clearing all axes

Press soft key [CANCEL] and then press soft key [ALL-AX].
• Clearing any axis (there are the following two methods.)

- Enter the axis name and then press [INTRPTCANCEL].
- Press soft key [INTRPTCANCEL], enter the axis name, and press soft key [EXEC].
If an incorrect axis name is entered, a warning message stating "FORMAT ERROR" appears.
- Relation with other functions

The following table indicates the relation between other functions and the movement by handle
interruption.
Table 4.6 (a) Relation between other functions and the movement by handle interruption
Signals Relation
Machine lock is effective. When machine lock is on, no movement is made due to
Machine lock
handle interruption.
Interlock is effective. When interlock is on, no movement is made due to handle
Interlock
interruption.
Mirror image is not effective. Interrupt functions on the plus direction by plus direction
Mirror image
command, even if this signal turns on.
- Position display
The following table shows the relation between various position display data and the movement by
Table 4.6 (b) relation between various position display data and the movement by handle interruption
Signals Relation
Absolute coordinate value Handle interruption does not change absolute coordinates.
Relative coordinates are changed by the travel distance specified by handle
Relative coordinate value
interruption.
Machine coordinates are changed by the travel distance specified by handle
Machine coordinate value
interruption.
- Travel distance display

Press the function key , then press the chapter selection soft key [HNDL]. The move amount by the
handle interruption is displayed. The following 4 kinds of data are displayed concurrently.
- 397 -
Fig. 4.6 (b) Manual handle interruption screen
(a) INPUT UNIT:

Handle interruption move amount in input unit system
Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment.
(b) OUTPUT UNIT :
Handle interruption move amount in output unit system
Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least command
increment.
(c) RELATIVE:
Position in relative coordinate system
These values have no effect on the travel distance specified by handle interruption.
(d) DISTANCE TO GO:
The remaining travel distance in the current block has no effect on the travel distance specified by
The handle interruption move amount is cleared when the manual reference position return ends every
axis.
- Display for five-axis systems or better

Systems having five or more axes provide the same display as the overall position display.
Note
NOTE
1 In a manual operation mode such as the jog feed mode or manual handle feed
mode, handle interruption cannot be performed.
2 During a machine lock or interlock, handle interruption does not cause
movement.
3 Manual handle interruption is disabled for the axis in any of the following states.
- Follow-up state
- PMC axis control state
4 Manual handle interruption cannot be performed for the axis specified in the G00
mode.
- 398 -
4.7 MIRROR IMAGE

During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for movement along an axis. To use
this function, set the mirror image switch to ON on the machine operator's panel, or set the mirror image
setting to ON from the MDI unit.
Y Y-axis mirror image goes on.
Programmed tool
path
Tool path after the

mirror image
function is used
Tool
X
Fig. 4.7 (a) Mirror image
Procedure for mirror image

Procedure
1 Press the single block switch to stop automatic operation.
When the mirror image function is used from the beginning of operation, this step is omitted.
2 Press the mirror image switch for the target axis on the machine operator's panel.
Alternatively, turn on the mirror image setting by following the steps below:
2-1 Set the MDI mode.
2-2 Press the function key .
2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the setting screen.
Fig. 4.7 (b) Setting screen
2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1.
3 Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mode or MDI mode), then press the cycle start button
to start automatic operation.
- 399 -
Explanation
• The mirror image function can also be turned on and off by setting bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter
No.0012 to 1 or 0.
• For the mirror image switches, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Limitation
The direction of movement during machine coordinate system setting (G53), the direction of movement
during manual operation, the direction of movement from an intermediate point to the reference position
during automatic reference position return (G28) cannot be reversed.
- 400 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION
5 TEST OPERATION
The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as
specified by the created program.
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK...........................................................401

5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE .................................................................................................................402
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ....................................................................................................403
5.4 DRY RUN.........................................................................................................................................404
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK ..............................................................................................................................405
5.6 PUNCH ..........................................................................................................................................406
5.7 MANUAL PUNCH...........................................................................................................................407
5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK

To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock.
There are two types of machine lock: all-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along all axes,
and specified-axis machine lock, which stops the movement along specified axes only. In addition,
auxiliary function lock, which disables M, S, T, and B (2nd auxiliary function) commands, is available
for checking a program together with machine lock.
Display unit
X
Y
Tool
Z ・・・・・
Workpiece The tool does not move but the

position along each axis changes on
the display.
Fig. 5.1 (a) Machine lock
Machine lock and auxiliary function lock

Procedure
- Machine Lock
Press the machine lock switch on the operator's panel. The tool does not move but the position along each
axis changes on the display as if the tool were moving.
Some machines have a machine lock switch for each axis. On such machines, press the machine lock
switches for the axes along which the tool is to be stopped. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by
the machine tool builder for machine lock.
WARNING
The positional relationship between the workpiece coordinates and machine
coordinates may differ before and after automatic operation using machine lock.
In such a case, specify the workpiece coordinate system by using a coordinate
setting command or by performing manual reference position return.
- 401 -
5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
- Auxiliary function lock

Press the auxiliary function lock switch on the operator's panel. M, S, T, and B codes are disabled and not
executed. Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for auxiliary function
lock.
Limitation
- M, S, T, B command by only machine lock
M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machine lock state.
- Reference position return under machine lock

When a G28 command is issued in the machine lock state, the command is accepted but the tool does not
move to the reference position and the reference position return LED does not go on.
- M codes not locked by auxiliary function lock

The following M codes are executed even in the auxiliary function lock state:
- M00, M01, M02, M30
- M98, M99
- M198 (external subprogram call function)
- M codes for calling a subprogram (parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079, Nos. 6044 to 6046)
- M codes for calling a custom macro (parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089, Nos. 6047 to 6049)
5.2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE

A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.
This feature is used to check a program.
For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, setting the override dial to 50%
moves the tool at 50 mm/min.
Feedrate 100 mm/min

Tool
(Specified by programmed) Check the machining by
altering the feedrate from
Feedrate 50 mm/min after the value specified in the
feedrate override program.
Workpiece
Fig. 5.2 (a) Feedrate override
Feedrate override
Procedure
Set the feedrate override dial to the desired percentage (%) on the machine operator's panel, before or
during automatic operation.
On some machines, the same dial is used for the feedrate override dial and jog feedrate dial. Refer to the
appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for feedrate override.
- 402 -
Limitation
- Override range
The override that can be specified ranges from 0 to 254%. For individual machines, the range depends on
the specifications of the machine tool builder.
5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

An override of four steps (25%，50%，75%，100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate.
Tool Tool
Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse rate

10m/min 5m/min
Override
50%
Fig. 5.3 (a) Rapid traverse override
Rapid traverse override

Procedure
Select one of the four feedrates with the rapid traverse override switch during rapid traverse. Refer to the
appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for rapid traverse override.
Rapid traverse override Rapid traverse rate

switch on the machine Excluding
T, C axes
operator's panel T, C axes
100 100% 100%
75 75% 100%
50 50% 50%
25 25% 50%
When the bit (G0F) of parameter No. 16050 is set to 0, the number of one digit from 1 to 4 after F code
stated allows the rapid traverse rate in automatic operation is overridden.
One-digit F feed code Override by one-digit F feed code

F1 100%
F2 75%
F3 50%
F4 25%
Explanation
The following types of rapid traverse are available. Rapid traverse override can be applied for each of
them.
(1) Rapid traverse by G00
(2) Rapid traverse during using pattern function (G26, G76, G77, G78, or G79)
(3) Rapid traverse during positioning first press point in nibbling mode (G68, G69, or, nibbling by M
code).
(4) Rapid traverse by positioning and no press start (G70)
(5) Rapid traverse during using automatic repositioning (G75).
(6) Rapid traverse during using automatic Reference Position Return (G28).
- 403 -
For the T-axis and C-axis, the feedrate is 100% of the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override
switch is set to 100 or 75, and, the feedrate is 50% of the rapid traverse rate when the switch is set to 50
or 25. However, the override is always set to 100% when bit 1(OVE) of parameter No.16844 is set to 1.
CAUTION
1 For the manual rapid traverse and rapid traverse in manual reference point return, the
rapid traverse override function is ineffective.
2 The rapid traverse rates in manual and automatic operation modes are separately
settable for each axis.
3 For the rapid traverse attained to each pitch from the first punch point to the last punch
point in nibbling function, the rapid traverse override is ineffective, and it is always fixed
to 100%.
4 Since whether the rapid traverse override is effected or not is judged when data are
read from the reader/puncher interface or memory into buffer storage, the traverse rate
in the block being executed or the block already in the buffer storage remain unchanged
even when the rapid traverse override switch has been changed.
5 Rapid traverse rate by F code cannot be used together with rapid traverse override by
F1–digit command
5.4 DRY RUN

The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the
program. This function is used for checking the movement of the tool under the state that the workpiece is
removed from the table.
Tool
Fig. 5.4 (a) Dry run
Dry run
Procedure
Press the dry run switch on the machine operator's panel during automatic operation.
The tool moves at the feedrate specified in a parameter. The rapid traverse switch can also be used for
changing the feedrate.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for dry run.
Explanation
- Dry run feedrate
The dry run feedrate changes as shown in the Table 5.4 (a) according to the rapid traverse switch and
parameters.
- 404 -
Table 5.4 (a)
Rapid traverse Program command
switch Rapid traverse Cutting feed
ON Rapid traverse rate Dry run feedrate × Jvmax(*2)
OFF Dry run feedrate × JV, or rapid traverse rate (*1) Dry run feedrate × JV(*2)
Max. cutting feedrate.................................................................... Setting by parameter No.1430
Rapid traverse rate........................................................................ Setting by parameter No.1420
Dry run feedrate ........................................................................... Setting by parameter No.1410
(*1) Dry run feedrate × JV when bit 6 (RDR) of parameter No. 1401 is 1. Rapid traverse rate when
parameter RDR is 0.
JV Jog feedrate override
(*2) Clamped to the maximum cutting feedrate
Jvmax Maximum value of jog feedrate override
5.5 SINGLE BLOCK

Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the
single block mode, the tool stops after a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in
the single block mode by executing the program block by block.
Cycle Cycle
Cycle start start
start
Tool
Stop after Stop after

punching operation punching operation
Workpiece
Y
Fig. 5.5 (a) Single block
Single block
Procedure
1 Press the single block switch on the machine operator’s panel. The execution of the program is stopped
after the current block is executed.
2 Press the cycle start button to execute the next block. The tool stops after the block is executed.
Refer to the appropriate manual provided by the machine tool builder for single block execution.
- 405 -
Explanation
- Single block during a pattern function
G26 I10.0 J45.0 K8 ; #1, #2,…#8：The order of punching operation
#2
#3
#1
#4 θ #8
+X
Center of circle
#5 #7
#6
When single block stop has been made in #1, #2,

#3,･･･#7 the feed hold lamp lights.
When single block stop has been made in #8, the
feed hold lamp does not light.
5.6 PUNCH
Punch is ineffective･･･OFF ON･･･Punch is effective
PUNCH
Fig.5.6 Punch On/Off
Explanation
This function makes punch (including nibbling) ineffective in a block where punching is made by press
motion during the DNC or memory mode operation.
- 406 -
5.7 MANUAL PUNCH
Manual Punch
Fig.5.7 Manual punch
Explanation
When depressing this button, punching is made by press motion. When depressing this button again after
releasing it once, punching is made again.
Generally, when this button is depressed, while the punch ON/OFF switch in Section 5.6 is being set to
ON, punching executed, while if the switch is set to OFF, punching is not executed.
CAUTION
No punching is executed by depressing this button when the cycle start lamp is
lighting or during manual axis movement. Since effective conditions of this button
depend on the machine tool builders, refer to the machine tool builder’s manual.
- 407 -
6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64554EN/01
6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS
To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from
exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes
emergency stop, overtravel check, and stored stroke check.
Chapter 6, "SAFETY FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP .......................................................................................................................408

6.2 OVERTRAVEL ................................................................................................................................408
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK ............................................................................................................409
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE....................................................................................412
6.5 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS...................................................................414
6.6 SAFETY ZONE CHECK .................................................................................................................427
6.1 EMERGENCY STOP

If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel, the machine movement stops in a
moment.
Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Fig. 6.1 (a) Emergency stop
This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can
usually be unlocked by twisting it.
Explanation
EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.
Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.
6.2 OVERTRAVEL
When the tool reaches the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, it decelerates and stops because
of working the limit switch and an OVERTRAVEL alarm is displayed.
Deceleration
and stop Y
Tool
X
Stroke end Limit
switch
Fig. 6.2 (a) Overtravel
- 408 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Explanation
- Overtravel during automatic operation
When the tool touches a limit switch along an axis during automatic operation, the tool is decelerated and
stopped along all axes and an overtravel alarm is displayed.
- Overtravel during manual operation

In manual operation, the tool is decelerated and stopped only along the axis for which the tool has
touched a limit switch. The tool still moves along the other axes.
- Releasing overtravel
Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety direction by manual operation.
For details on operation, refer to the operator's manual of the machine tool builder.
Alarm
Table6.2 (a)
Alarm No. Message Description
The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
+ OVERTRAVEL
OT0506 When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during
( HARD )
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped during
automatic operation. During manual operation, only the feed of the axis
on which the alarm occurred is stopped.
6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK

Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2,
and stored stroke check 3.
Stored stroke check 3
Stored
stroke
check 2
Stored stroke check 1
: Forbidden area for the tool
Fig. 6.3 (a) Stroke check
The following shows the areas which the tool cannot enter for each stored stroke check.
• Stored stroke check 1: Outside
• Stored stroke check 2: Outside or inside (switchable)
- 409 -
• Stored stroke check 3: Inside

When the tool moves into the forbidden area, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and
stopped.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse
direction from which the tool came.
Explanation
- Stored stroke check 1
Parameters (Nos. 1320, 1321 or Nos. 1326, 1327) set boundary. Outside the area of the set limits is a
forbidden area. The machine tool builder usually sets this area as the maximum stroke.
When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse
direction from which the tool came.
At this time, a signal (overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC if bit 6 (OTS) of parameter No.
1301 is set to 1. In addition, when the tool enters the forbidden area during manual operation, the signal
(overtravel alarm signal) can be output to the PMC without generating the alarm by setting bit 1 (NAL) of
parameter No. 1300 to 1. With this parameter setting, the alarm is generated when the tool enters the
forbidden area during automatic operation.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are
handled as forbidden areas for stored stroke check 1.
2 The size of a forbidden area must be set carefully. If the size is set incorrectly,
the stroke becomes infinite.

Parameters Nos. 1322, 1323 or commands set these boundaries. Inside or outside the area of the limit can
be set as the forbidden area. Bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300 selects either inside or outside as the
forbidden area.
In case of program command a G22 command forbids the tool to enter the forbidden area, and a G23
command permits the tool to enter the forbidden area.
Each of G22; and G23; should be commanded independently of another commands in a block.
The command in the Fig. 6.3 (b) creates or changes the forbidden area:
G22 X_Y_I_J_;
(X, Y)
(I, J)
X>I, Y>J
Fig. 6.3 (b) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a program
When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the Fig. 6.3 (c) must be set.
A(X1, Y1)
B(X2, Y2)
X1>X2, Y1>Y2
Fig. 6.3 (c) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters
- 410 -
The values X1, Y1, X2, and Y2, which are set by parameters Nos. 1322 and 1323, must be specified by
the distance from the machine coordinate system (machine unit). The values X, Y, I, and J, which are set
by a G22 command, must be specified by the distance in the least input increment (input unit).
Values set by a program are then converted in the machine increment and the values are set as the
parameters.

Set the boundary with parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325. The area inside the boundary becomes the
forbidden area. The values X1, Y1, X2, and Y2 must be set as coordinates (machine unit) in the machine
coordinate system.
CAUTION
1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are
handled as movable areas for stored stroke check 2/3.
2 Even if the two points for specifying a forbidden area are erroneously set, the
rectangular parallelepiped having the points as vertices is assumed as a
boundary.
3 Since an axis without the reference position return function has no forbidden
areas, there are no alarms about forbidden areas for the axis.
- Forbidden area overlapping

Area can be set in piles.
Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Fig. 6.3 (d) Setting the forbidden area overlapping
Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke.
- Condition under which each check is enabled

Each check becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or
automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed.
After the power is turned on, if the reference position is in the forbidden area of each limit, an alarm is
generated immediately. (Only in G22 mode for stored stroke check 2).
- Releasing the alarms

If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward
direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the
system. When the alarm is canceled, the tool can be moved both backward and forward.
- 411 -
When bit 4 (OF1) of parameter No.1301 is 1, if the axis moves within the movable area after an alarm
occurs in stored stroke check 1, the OT alarm is cleared without a reset (automatic clearance function).
NOTE
In the following cases, the automatic clearance function is disabled. To clear an
alarm, make a reset.
1 An alarm is set to occur before the stored stroke limit is exceeded (bit 7 (BFA)
of parameter No. 1300 is 1).
2 Another over travel alarm (such as stored stroke check 2/3 and interference
check) occurs.
- Change from G23 to G22 in a forbidden area

When G23 is switched to G22 in the forbidden area, the following results.
<1> When the forbidden area is inside, an alarm is informed in the next move.
<2> When the forbidden area is outside, an alarm is informed immediately.
- Timing for displaying an alarm

In stored stroke check 1/2/3, parameter BFA (bit 7 of No. 1300) selects whether an alarm is displayed
immediately before the tool enters the forbidden area or immediately after the tool has entered the
forbidden area.
Alarm
Number Message Description
OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the positive direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) A movement in the negative direction exceeded stored stroke check 1.
6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE

During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position
of the end point from the current position of the machine and a specified amount of travel. If the tool is
found to enter the forbidden area defined by a stored stroke limit, the tool is stopped immediately upon
the start of movement for that block, and an alarm is displayed.
- 412 -
WARNING
Whether the coordinates of the end point, reached as a result of traversing the
distance specified in each block, are in a forbidden area is checked. In this case,
the path followed by a move command is not checked. However, if the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3, an alarm is
issued. (See the examples below.)
Example 1)
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke

check 1 or 2
End point
Start point
The tool is stopped at point a according to stored stroke

check 1 or 2.
check 1 or 2
End point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start

point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check
before moving to be performed before movement.
Example 2)
Forbidden area defined by stored stroke End point

check 2 or 3
Start point The tool is stopped at point a according to stored

stroke check 2 or 3.

check 2 or 3
End
point
Immediately upon movement commencing from the start

point, the tool is stopped to enable a stroke limit check
before moving to be performed before movement.
Explanation
When a stroke limit check before moving is performed, whether to check the movement performed by a
G33 (skip) block can be determined using (bit 2 (NPC) of parameter No. 1301).
- 413 -
Limitation
- Machine lock
If machine lock is applied at the start of movement, no stroke limit check made before movement is
performed.
- G23
When stored stroke check 2 is disabled (G23 mode), no check is made to determine whether the tool
enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 2.
- Manual intervention following a feed hold stop

When the execution of a block is restarted after manual intervention following a feed hold stop, no alarm
is issued even if the end point following a manual intervention is within a forbidden area.
- A block consisting of multiple operations

If a block consisting of multiple operations (such as a pattern function and automatic reference position
return) is executed, an alarm is issued at the start point of any operation whose end point falls within an
inhibited area.
- PMC axis control

No check is made for a movement based on PMC axis control.
Alarm
Table 6.4 (a) Alarm
The block end point was found in the + side stroke limit
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.
The block end point was found in the - side stroke limit
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) prohibition area during a stroke check before movement.
Modify the program.
6.5 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS

An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the machine can result in the workpiece and
/or tool being damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, it takes extra time to recover
from the mistake.
The operation confirmation functions described below are meant to prevent the operator from performing
any unintended operation (hereinafter referred to as an improper operation).
1 Functions that are used when data is set
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the valid setting range
• Incremental input operation confirmation
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key to prevent any improper absolute or
incremental input operation
• Confirmation of any operation of deleting the program or all data
• Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
2 Functions that are used when the program is executed
• Highlighting of updated modal information
• Display of the executed block status prior to the program execution
• Display of the axis status, such as the mirror image function enabled or the interlock function
enabled
• Check for starting from the middle of the program
- 414 -
• Data check to verify that the offset data is within the effective setting range
• Maximum incremental value check
6.5.1 Functions that are Used When Data is Set

The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when data is set.
• Input data range check
• Confirmation of incremental input
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
• Confirmation of the deletion of the program
• Confirmation of the deletion of all data
Set these functions on the operation confirmation function setting screen. For the input data range check,
set a valid input data range, e.g. the upper and lower limits, for each input screen. For the other functions,
specify whether to enable or disable them.
For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to manipulate them, and other
details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.5.1.1 Input data range check

This function allows an effective data range to be set and checks whether the input data is within the set
range.
Input data range check

Explanation
- Outline of the input data range check
This function allows an effective data range to be set for the data of each input screen listed later and
checks whether the input data is within the set range. If the input data is out of the effective data range,
the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed and the data is rejected.
For example, assume that the effective data range for a certain tool offset number is set to -200. to 200,
and that you are going to input 100.[INPUT]. Even if you inadvertently press the 0 key one more time,
resulting in 1000.[INPUT], the input of 1000. is not accepted.
The function detects a setting mistake and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Input screens for which this function is effective

• Tool compensation
• Workpiece origin offset
- Settings
To enable this function, set an effective data range for each input screen on the operation confirmation
function setting screen. For information about how to display the individual setting screens, how to set
data ranges, and other details, see the items that describe the setting of the data ranges.
If the set data range is invalid, no data input is accepted. Correct the data range setting, and then input
data.
- Disabling the function

The input data range check is disabled if you make any of the following settings on the operation
confirmation function setting screen.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number or workpiece coordinate system are
0.
- 415 -
• The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.
- Messages displayed during the input data range check

When the cursor moves into an input field of an input screen, one of the messages and warning messages
in the Table 6.5.1.1 (a) or Table 6.5.1.1 (b) is displayed. No message is displayed when the input data
range check is disabled.
When the set effective data range is valid

Table 6.5.1.1 (a) List of messages displayed 1
Input data status Message Color
The data in the input field is within the range. Input range xxx - xxx Black
The data in the input field is out of the range. Input range xxx - xxx Red
xxx: Upper and lower limit values
When the set effective data range is invalid

Table 6.5.1.1 (b) List of messages displayed 2
Range check status Message Color
Tool offset number overlap NG SETTING (OFFSET NUM OVERLAP) Red
Workpiece coordinate system overlap NG SETTING (WORK COORD VAL OVERLAP) Red
Invalid upper and lower limit values NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL) Red
The message "NG SETTING (U-LMT AND L-LMT ILLEGAL)" is displayed in the following cases:
• The upper and lower limit values are reversed.
• The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
• Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
- Range check for data changed by G10 or system variable

If the data changed by G10 or system variable is out of the effective data range, the alarm PS0334
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.
6.5.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input

This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using
the [+INPUT] soft key.
Confirmation of incremental input

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of incremental input
This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using
the [+INPUT] soft key in any of the input screens listed below. It lets you confirm whether you really
want to change data or not before making that change.
For example, when you set 5.[+INPUT] for 10., the message "15. INPUT OK?" is displayed.
The function prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations.
NOTE
This function cannot be used to input two or more values consecutively by
delimiting them by semicolons (;).

• Settings
- 416 -
• Parameter
• Pitch error compensation
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INCREMENTAL INPUT"
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of
the operation confirmation function.
6.5.1.3 Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key

This function prohibits the absolute input using the [INPUT] soft key.
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key

Explanation
- Outline of the prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
This function prohibits the absolute input by the [INPUT] soft key in the input screens listed later.
It prevents improper absolute or incremental input operations by requiring that the absolute input be made
using the MDI key and that the incremental input be made using the [+INPUT] soft key.

- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "DISABLED
SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting”
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.5.1.4 Confirmation of the deletion of the program

This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE PROGRAM ?" when you attempt to delete
the program.
Confirmation of the deletion of the program

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of the program
When you attempt to delete the program, this function displays the confirmation message "DELETE
PROGRAM ?" It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete the program or not before executing
the deletion.
The function prevents the program from being deleted due to an improper operation.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "PROGRAM DELETE" box
to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the
function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of the
operation confirmation function.
- 417 -
6.5.1.5 Confirmation of the deletion of all data

This function displays the confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?" when you attempt to delete all
data.
Confirmation of the deletion of all data

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the deletion of all data
When you attempt to delete all data on the input screen described later, this function displays the
confirmation message "DELETE ALL DATA?". It lets you confirm whether you really want to delete all
data or not before executing the deletion.
The function prevents all data from being deleted due to an improper operation.

- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "ALL DATA DELETE" box
6.5.1.6 Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process

This function displays the [CAN] and [EXEC] soft keys for confirmation when you attempt to update the
data of an input screen during the data setting process.
Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
When you input data in input screen during the data setting process, this function displays the [CAN] and
[EXEC] soft keys for confirmation. It lets you confirm whether you really want to update the data or not
before executing the update.
The function prevents set values from being lost due to an improper operation.
If you input data using the [+INPUT] soft key when the confirmation of incremental input is enabled, a
message is displayed to confirm the incremental input.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "INPUT IN SETTING" box
6.5.2 Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed

Overview
The following functions are provided to prevent improper operations when the program is executed.
• Display of updated modal information
• Start check signal
• Axis status display
- 418 -
• Confirmation of the start from a middle block

• Data range check
• Maximum incremental value check
• Warning indication during a reset in program operation
Enable or disable each of the functions on the wrong operation prevention function setting screen.
To enable or disable "Warning indication during a reset in program operation", set bit 0 (MDW) of
parameter No. 10334 instead of the wrong operation prevention function setting screen.
For information about how to display the setting screen, how to manipulate it, and other details, see the
item “Operation confirmation setting screen” that describes the operation procedures.
6.5.2.1 Display of updated modal information

This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the
modal information display for the current block.
Display of updated modal information

Explanation
- Outline of the display of updated modal information
This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the
modal information display for the current block.
For example, when an absolute command has been changed to an incremental command or when the
workpiece coordinate system has been initialized by RESET, the function displays the changed part of the
data in an easy-to-recognize manner, in order to prevent improper operations during the execution of the
program.
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "UPDATE MODAL
HIGHLIGHT DISPLAY" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the
setting screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting”
that describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.5.2.2 Start check signal

This function displays the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed
and puts the program to a temporary halt before the program is executed.
Start check signal

Explanation
- Outline of the start check signal
When a cycle start is made with the start check signal STCHK <G0408.0> set to 1, the function displays
the remaining amount of travel and modal information of the block to be executed and puts the program
to a temporary halt. Making the cycle start again resumes the execution of the program.
The function lets you check the status of the block before executing it, thus helping to prevent improper
operations at the time of execution.
Using this function in combination with the updated modal information display function described in the
preceding subsection makes it easier to check the status of the block to be executed.
- Settings
This function does not require any setting on the operation confirmation function setting screen.
- 419 -
6.5.2.3 Axis status display

This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the coordinate display screen.
Axis status display

Explanation
- Outline of the axis status display
This function displays the axis status to the left of the axis name in the display of the machine coordinates,
absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, and remaining travel amounts.
For example, when the mirror image function is enabled for the X1 axis, the absolute coordinates are
displayed as follows.
ABSOLUTE
M X1 10.000
Y1 10.000
C1 0.000
By displaying the axis status as shown above, the function prevents improper operations at the time of
execution.
- Axis status indication

The axis status is indicated as follows. These indications are listed in order of priority.
AXIS DETACH :D
INTERLOCK :I
MACHINE LOCK :L
SERVO OFF :S
AXIS MOVING :*
MIRROR IMAGE :M
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "AXIS STATUS DISPLAY"
box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set
the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that describes the setting of
the operation confirmation function.
6.5.2.4 Confirmation of the start from a middle block

This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the
cursor placed on a block in the middle of the program.
Confirmation of the start from a middle block

Explanation
- Outline of the confirmation of the start from a middle block
This function displays the confirmation message "START FROM MIDDLE OF PROG
(START/RESET)" when you attempt to execute a memory operation with the cursor placed on a block in
the middle of the program. It lets you confirm whether you really want to start execution from that block
or not before executing the program.
The function prevents you from inadvertently making a cycle start from a block in the middle of the
program.
- 420 -
- Settings
In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "START FROM MIDDLE
OF PROGRAM" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting
screen, how to set the function, and other details, see the item “Operation confirmation setting” that
describes the setting of the operation confirmation function.
6.5.2.5 Data range check

This function lets you set an effective data range and check whether the data to be used for execution is
within the set range.
Data range check

Explanation
- Outline of the data range check
This function lets you set an effective data range for each data item listed later and check whether the data
to be used for execution is within the set range. If the data is out of the effective range, the alarm PS0334
"OFFSET DATA OUT OF EFFECTIVE RANGE" is displayed.
The function detects data setting mistakes and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Data for which this function is effective

NOTE
To use this function, you need to set each effective data range correctly. For
information about how to set the data ranges, see the item “Effective value range
for each data”.
6.5.2.6 Maximum incremental value check

This function checks the maximum incremental value specified for each axis by the NC command.
Maximum incremental value check

Explanation
- Outline of the maximum incremental value check
When the maximum incremental value is specified by the NC command described later, make sure that
the absolute value of the travel distance by the incremental command does not exceed the specified value.
If the specified value is exceeded, the alarm PS0337 "EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL VALUE"
is displayed.
A maximum incremental value can be specified on a per-axis basis and remains effective until 0 is set or
the value is reset.
For example, when AI contour control is used, the function checks whether the amount of movement
between blocks is kept to the specified value or less. Through this process, it detects erroneous program
settings and prevents the program from running with invalid data.
- Format
The format of the NC command used to specify the maximum incremental value is as follows.
G91.1 IP_ ;
IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
(To cancel the maximum incremental value check, set 0.)
- 421 -
6.5.2.7 Warning display during a reset in program operation

When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 0, if a reset occurs during block execution in program
operation, modal information returns to the state before block execution.
This function display a warning to notifies the operator that modal information is not updated by
information of the interrupted block.
Warning display during a reset in program operation

Explanation
- Overview of warning display during a reset in program operation
If a reset occurs during program operation, a warning saying "MODAL DATA IS CHANGED BY
BLOCK STOP" is issued. To enable or disable the warning, set bit 0 (MDW) of parameter No. 10334.
- Warning occurrence condition

• When a reset occurs during program operation, if address G, F, H, D, T, S, M, or B (second auxiliary
function) was changed
- Warning clear condition

• When a reset is issued
• When the <CAN> key is pressed
- Warning displaying screen
NOTE
There is no function for acquiring or displaying a warning message in C
Language Executor. Accordingly, this warning cannot be displayed on a screen
created by the machine tool builder.
6.5.3 Setting Screen

This section describes how to display the operation confirmation function setting screen and how to set
the individual data items on this screen.
The operation confirmation function setting screen allows you to set the following items:
- 422 -
• Enabling or disabling each operation confirmation function

• Effective value range for the tool offset
• Effective value range for the workpiece origin offset
6.5.3.1 Operation confirmation function setting screen

This screen displays the enable/disable setting status of the following operation confirmation functions
and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the operation confirmation
function setting screen.)
• Confirmation of incremental input
• Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key
• Confirmation of the deletion of the program
• Confirmation of the deletion of all data
• Display of updated modal information
• Axis status display
• Confirmation of the start from a middle block
Displaying and setting the operation confirmation function setting screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key.
2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD]
soft key is displayed.
3 Press the [GUARD] soft key. The setting screen that was displayed last with relation to any
operation confirmation function is displayed (the operation confirmation function setting screen is
the first such screen that appears after the system is restarted).
4 If any screen other than the operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed, press the
[GUARD] soft key. The operation confirmation function setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 6.5.3.1 (a) Operation confirmation function setting screen
5 Move the cursor to the check box of the item you want to change the setting, by pressing the ,
, , and keys.
- 423 -
6 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

7 Press the soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0]. When you press the [ON:1] soft key, a check mark (✓)
appears in the corresponding check box, indicating that the function is enabled. When you press the
[OFF:0] soft key, the check mark disappears from the check box, indicating that the function is
disabled.
Explanation
- Items to be set
The Table 6.5.3.1 (a) shows what is displayed for each item to be set and the corresponding functions.
The items whose column of "Default" is marked by "○" is effective automatically after memory all clear.
Table 6.5.3.1 (a)
Displayed item Default Corresponding function
INCREMENTAL INPUT ○ Confirmation of incremental input
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (tool offset, Y-axis
TOOL OFFSET, WORK SHIFT tool offset (lathe system), and work shift (lathe system))
DISABLED SOFTKEY[INPUT] IN Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key (workpiece origin
WORK COORDINATES offset)
PROGRAM DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of the program
ALL DATA DELETE ○ Confirmation of the deletion of all data
INPUT IN SETTING Confirmation of a data update during the data setting process
UPDATE MODAL HIGHLIGHT ○ Display of updated modal information
DISPLAY
AXIS STATUS DISPLAY ○ Axis status display
START FROM MIDDLE OF ○ Confirmation of the start from a middle block
PROGRAM
6.5.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen

This screen displays the setting status of tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their
settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the tool offset range setting screen.)
Up to 20 pairs of numbers can be specified to identify tool offset number ranges, and an effective offset
value range can be defined for each of these 20 pairs.
Displaying and setting the tool offset range setting screen

Procedure
4 If any screen other than the tool offset range setting screen is displayed, press the [OFFSET] soft key.
The tool offset range setting screen is displayed.
- 424 -
Fig. 6.5.3.2 (a) Tool offset range setting screen

6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , ,
, and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key.

7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
• There is a tool offset number overlap.
• The values are not effective (e.g., more pairs of offset numbers than allowed are set).
• Either of the tool offset numbers is 0.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number are 0.
• The upper and lower offset limit values are identical.
Explanation
- What to set with tool offset memory A
With tool offset memory A, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table 6.5.3.2
(a).
Table 6.5.3.2 (a)
Displayed item What to set
FROM
RANGE Specify a tool offset number range.
TO
LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range in connection with a specified tool offset
-
UP-LIMIT number range.
In the case of this configuration, all the information needed to set an input data range cannot be displayed
in a single screen page. Set the information while switching pages using the [SWITCH] soft key. The
screen provides an indication that lets you know which part of the information is currently displayed.
- 425 -
- Example of setting an input data range

For example, suppose that the following values are set with offset memory A.
FROM : TO LOW-LIMIT : UP-LIMIT
1 : 20 0.000 : 100.000
In this case, the tool offset input screen accepts only offset values from 0.000 to 100.000 for offset
numbers 1 to 20.
If you attempt to input any other value, the warning message "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" is displayed.
6.5.3.3 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen

This screen displays the setting status of workpiece origin offset and external workpiece origin offset
effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the
workpiece origin offset range setting screen.)
Up to six pairs of values can be specified to identify workpiece coordinate ranges for the workpiece
origin offset, and an effective offset value range can be defined for each of the axes of these six pairs.
As for the external workpiece origin offset, an effective offset value range can be specified for each axis.
Displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset range setting screen
Procedure
4 If any screen other than the workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed, press the
[WORK] soft key. The workpiece origin offset range setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 6.5.3.3 (a) Workpiece origin offset range setting screen
- 426 -
6 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, or , ,
, and keys.
7 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then press the [INPUT] soft key.
If the set effective data range is invalid for any of the reasons listed below, the input data range check is
not performed normally and the input data is rejected.
• There is a workpiece coordinate overlap.
• The values are not effective (e.g., an invalid workpiece coordinate system is set).
• The upper limit value is set for the workpiece coordinate system when 0 is set for the lower limit
value.
Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases.
• Both the upper and lower limit values for the workpiece coordinate system are 0.
• The upper and lower limit values for each offset are identical.
Explanation
- What to set for the workpiece origin offset
For the workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the four items in the Table
6.5.3.3 (a).
Table 6.5.3.3 (a)

FROM
RANGE Specify a workpiece coordinate system range.
TO
AXIS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid offset value range in connection with a specified workpiece
NAME UP-LIMIT coordinate system range.
- What to set for the external workpiece origin offset

For the external workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the two items in the
Table 6.5.3.3 (b).
Table 6.5.3.3 (b)

AXIS LOW-LIMIT Specify a valid external workpiece origin offset value range on each axis.
NAME UP-LIMIT
6.6 SAFETY ZONE CHECK

This is the safety function to set the safety zone for protecting the workpiece holder that holds the
workpiece set on the carriage, and disable punching in that area or forbid the tool to approach there into.
- 427 -
Workpiece
Tool
Tool figure area(#0)

Safety zone (#1 to #4)
Workpiece holder
Carriage
Fig.6.6 (a) Outline
This function permits to set tool figure area (#0) and up to four safety zones (#1 - #4), as shown above.
Type A and type B of safety zone check are prepared.
6.6.1 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type

A)
The safety zone is settable in two types, punch forbidden area and approach forbidden area, that are set by
the parameter SZ1 to SZ4 (No. 16501#0 - #3) shown below.
(1) Punch forbidden area

When the tool figure area goes into the safety zone and the punching is commanded, an alarm
(DS4800 to DS4803) is given to disable punching. In the case of positioning & punching command
in the automatic operation mode, when the end point of positioning is in the punch forbidden area,
an alarm is given without moving the axis.
(Previous check)
In the case of move command without punching, the tool figure area can go into the punch forbidden
area, but manual punching is impossible after going into this area.
Tool figure area
Safety zone(#1)
Carriage
Fig.6.6 (b) Punch forbidden area (Type A)
2) Approach forbidden area

The tool figure area can not go into the safety zone. When the tool figure area approaches into the
safety zone by the move command, the axis is immediately stopped and an alarm (DS4810 to
DS4817, DS4830 to DS4837) is given. This is valid in either manual or automatic operation mode.
- 428 -
Tool figure area (#0)
Safety zone (#2)

※Axis stops, and alarm
is given.
Carriage
Fig.6.6 (c) Approach forbidden area (TypeA)
6.6.2 Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area (Type

B)
Overview
By setting bit 0 (SF0) of parameter No. 16500, the type B safety zone check can be selected. With type B,
no alarm is issued even if a tool enters a safety zone; after confirming the safety of the situation, the
operator can perform a punch operation, or can position the tool to the next punching position without
performing punching.
With type B, all safety zones are handled as punch forbidden areas.
- Punch forbidden area

If the tool enters a safety zone, the punch–forbidden area–entered signal WDD0 <Fn231.7>, used to
provide notification that the tool has entered a punch forbidden area, is set to 1 in the punch block. When
punching is to be performed in a punch–forbidden area, punch–enable signal WDC <Gn232.4> is set to 1
after the operator confirms that punching can be performed safely. After detecting the WDC signal, the
CNC sets the PF signal to 1.
When punching is not to be performed in a punch forbidden area, the press activation lock signal PFL
<Gn230.0> is set to 1. Upon detecting the PFL signal, the CNC moves on to execute the next block.
Block start
YES
Press activation lock signal (PFL) = “1” ?
NO
NO Punch forbidden area–entered signal
(WDDO) = “1”?
YES
NO
Punch enable signal (WDC) = “1”?
YES
YES
Press activation wait signal (PFW) = “1” ?
NO
Press activation signal (PF) = “1”
Block end
Fig.6.6 (d) Type B Punch forbidden area
- 429 -
CAUTION
1 If the tool enters a punch forbidden area during nibbling, the WDDO signal is set
to 1 one punching position before the tool enters punch forbidden area.
2 With type B, the setting of SZ1 to SZ4 (bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 16501) is
ignored.
6.6.3 Setting the Safety Zone

Set the machine coordinate value when the workpiece holder is positioned at the tool center (punching
position), in the parameters 16505 - 16516 in output units.
+Ywk +Ymcn
Punching position
X1bmcn X1amcn （ Machine zero point）
+Xmc
Safetyzone n
Y1wk Y1mcn
#1 #2 #3 #4
Origin of work X1bwk X1awk +Xwk

coordinate system
＃1 to ＃4：Safetyzone
Punching position(Machine zero point)：Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic
coordinate system setting is performed（parameter No.1250）
Fig.6.6 (e) Set the value of Safety zone
Regarding #1, the safety zone is specified at both ends (X1amcn, X1bmcn) for the X–axis direction by
parameter No.16505 to 16507, and at the forward end (Y1mcn) of the workpiece holder for the Y–axis
direction by parameter No.16507. Farther, width of workpiece holder along the X–axis is specified by
parameter No.16540.
The specifying method is the same as for #2, #3 and #4.
6.6.4 Setting the Tool Shape Area
Punch point
Punch point (Machine zero
(Machine zero point)
point) Tool width measured
along Y-axis direction
Tool width measured radius of circle tool

along X-axis direction
Fig.6.6 (f) The value of setting tool shape area
The specification of the area of tool figure sets the size in the X direction and Y direction of the tool by
the parameter (No.16517 to 16532 and No.16551 to 16558).
- 430 -
The setting unit is output unit.
12 kinds of or less tool figure can be set.
Moreover, setting bit 1 (RTZ) of parameter No.16540 to 1 allows to set area of the circle tool figure.
When setting area of the circle tool figure, the size in the X direction should be set to the radius of the
circle tool, and the size in the Y direction should be set to 0.
The tool shape area can be changed by using the programmable parameter input function (G10).
Therefore, when multiple tools are used, it is possible to specify the tool shape area meeting the tool No.
(Txx).
6.6.5 Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone

The detector on the machine automatically detects the positions of the
workpiece holders mounted on the carriage. Values representing the
detected positions are then set in the safety zone parameters.
Detector
Workpiece holder(#1 to #4)
Carriage
Fig.6.6 (g) AUTOMATIC SAFETY–ZONE SETTING
The signal for detecting the position of the workpiece holders turns on and off as workpiece holders #1 to
#4 pass the detector as shown in Fig.6.6 (g). The safety zone is determined from the signal. The position
on the X axis when the signal goes high is regarded as one end of a workpiece holder, and the position
when the signal goes low is regarded as the other end.
Workpiece holder detection command format
G32X x F f P p Q q ;
G32 is specified to detect the positions of workpiece holders. Before G32 can be specified, the workpiece
holder position detector must be activated.
Before detection is started, the X-axis move command must be specified following address X. Either the
positive or negative move direction is allowed. If a positive move command is specified, the position at
which detection starts must be in the negative side with respect to workpiece holder #1. Sufficient
distance must be kept between the position at which detection starts and workpiece holder #1 to enable
stability of speed before workpiece holder #1 is reached. Workpiece holders #1, #2, #3, and #4 are
detected in that order. If a negative move command is specified, the workpiece holders are detected in the
reverse order starting from #4. The other conditions are the same as those used for a positive move
command.
The feed rate during detection is specified with F, in the same way as for ordinary interpolation. The
position of a workpiece holder is obtained from the machine positions indicated by the rising and falling
edges of the workpiece holder detection signal. There is a difference between the indicated machine
position and actual machine position because of an error such as a lag in the servo system. This error must
be compensated with numeric values following addresses P and Q. The compensating value for the
position on the rising edge of the workpiece holder detection signal is set following address P, and the
compensating value for the position on the falling edge is set following address Q.
The lag in the servo system is obtained from the following equations:
- 431 -
△E=T1×F+T2×F (exponential function acceleration/deceleration)

△E=1/ 2T1×F+T2×F (linear acceleration/deceleration)
where,
△E : Lag in the servo system

T1 : Time constant for automatic acceleration/deceleration
T2 : Servo time constant
F: Feed rate
The sign of the compensating value is positive when compensation is made in the opposite direction to
the move direction specified by the detection command.
If address P/Q is omitted in the G32 block, the error between coordinates and actual machine position is
calculated by the CNC.
Actual machine position Detecting position
Workpiece holder position

detector signal
SAFZ<X004.1>
Workpiece holder
P Q
Fig.6.6 (h) Workpiece holder position detector signal SAFZ<X004.1> and compensation of detecting
position
6.6.6 Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone

After safety zone values are set automatically, they can be displayed on the safety zone screen as shown
below. With this screen, the user can check whether the set values are valid.
- 432 -
Screen
- Type A
Fig.6.6 (i) Safety Zone Setting Screen Type A (10.4-inch display unit)
- Type B
Fig.6.6 (j) Safety Zone Setting Screen Type B (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
The display items of type B are as follows:
W : Workpiece holder width
X : Workpiece holder central position relative to the tool center
Y : Workpiece holder tip position relative to the tool center
- 433 -
7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64554EN/01
7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTIONS
When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The
causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 60 previous alarms can be stored and
displayed on the screen (alarm history display).
The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm is displayed. In this case, the system
may be performing some processing. The state of the system can be checked using the self-diagnosis
function.
7.1 ALARM DISPLAY

Explanation
- Alarm screen
If an alarm occurs, the alarm screen (error code and number) appears to indicate the cause. Alarms are
classified by an error code and number.
Fig. 7.1 (a) Alarm screen (example for the 8.4-inch display unit)
- Display wrapping
If an alarm message does not fit one line, the display is wrapped and the rest of the message begin at the
start position on the next line.
- 434 -
7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
Fig. 7.1 (b) Display wrapping (example for the 8.4-inch display unit)
- Displaying an alarm screen

In some cases, no switching occurs to the alarm screen, and “ALM” is displayed on the bottom of the
current screen (for example, if bit 7 (NPA) of parameter No. 3111 = 1).
Fig. 7.1 (c) Parameter screen (example for the 8.4-inch display unit)
In this case, display the alarm screen by following the steps below.
1 Press the function key .
2 Press the soft key [ALARM].
3 You can change pages by using the page key.
- Releasing alarm
The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number, and associated message. To release
the alarm, generally correct the cause, then press the reset key.
- 435 -
- Error code and number

The type of an alarm is indicated by an error code and number.
Example: PS0010, SV0004, etc.
For details, see Appendix H, "ALARM LIST".
- Screen scrolling
If alarm information does not fit one screen, the page keys (PageDown and PageUp) can be used to scroll
the alarm information screen by screen.
- Line scrolling
If alarm information does not fit one screen, the cursor keys can be used to scroll the alarm
information alarm by alarm.
7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY

Up to 50 alarms issued by the CNC including the latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen.
The display procedure is explained below.
Alarm history display

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [HISTRY].
An alarm history is displayed.
The following information is displayed:
<1> Date and time of alarm issuance
<2> Alarm type
<3> Alarm number
<4> Alarm message (sometimes not displayed depending on the alarm)
<5> Page No.
3 You can change pages by using the page key.
Fig. 7.2 (a) Alarm history screen (example for the 8.4-inch display unit)
- 436 -
7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system
may be performing some processing. Diagnostic display can be used to check the system status.
Procedure for Diagnostic display

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [DGNOS].
3 The diagnosis screen has more than 1 pages. Select the screen by the following operation.
(1) Change the page by the page change key.
(2) Method by soft key
• Key input the number of the diagnosis data to be displayed.
• Press the soft key [NO.SRH].
Fig. 7.3 (a) Diagnostic display (example for the 8.4-inch display unit)
Diagnostic numbers 990 to 998 indicate Press condition. (See Table7.3 (a))
Table7.3 (a) Press condition

No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed
990 WAITING FOR SIGNAL PFW OFF Waiting for turning off press start wait signal PFW.
991 WAITING FOR 1–CYCLE *PE OFF Waiting for press stop to an one–cycle press
motion.
992 WAITING FOR 1–CYCLE *PFIN OFF Waiting for completion of punching to an one–cycle
press motion.
993 WAITING FOR NIBBLING *PE OFF Waiting for press stop to a nibbling motion.
994 WAITING FOR NIBBLING *NFIN OFF Waiting for completion of punching to a nibbling
motion.
995 WAITING FOR T COMMAND Press operation is not executable, because the
punch command was given before executing the T
command once after the cycle operation signal OP
has been turned from off to on.
996 MANUAL PRESS Manual press is executing.
997 WAITING FOR PF Waiting that absolute value of X and Y axis
- 437 -
No. Display Internal status when 1 is displayed

position deviation value becomes the value of
parameter No. 16010 and below.
998 REMAINING U/V MACRO STORAGE SIZE Remaining U/V macro storage size (Kbyte).
7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN
When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed
before the alarm screen appears.
To enable this function, set bit 4 (ADC) of parameter No. 11302 is set to 1.
Switching between screens when alarms are cleared

When all alarms are cleared on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears
again.
When the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of an alarm, the screen displayed
immediately before the alarm appears again.
When the alarm screen was displayed by pressing function key during occurrence of an alarm, the
screen displayed immediately before the alarm appears again.
(Example)
Occurrence of
an alarm
Clearing of
alarm
PROGRAM screen ALARM screen
NOTE
Even if alarms are cleared when the alarm screen is not displayed, the current
screen is not changed.
Switching between screens by the function key
When function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen
appears. Press function key to switch to the alarm screen for checking for alarms and then press
function key to return to the previous screen.
- 438 -
(Example)
Function key
Function key
PROGRAM screen ALARM screen
If function key is pressed when the alarm screen was displayed automatically due to occurrence of
an alarm, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears again.
Restrictions
• Switching to the custom screen is not performed.
• The screens to which the alarm screen can be switched are only the screen selected by the chapter
selection soft key.
- 439 -
8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64554EN/01
8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into
external I/O devices.
External I/O devices include memory cards that can be mounted to the memory card interface located on
the left side of the display unit, and personal computers and data servers that can be connected via
embedded Ethernet.
The following types of data in the Table 8 (a) can be input and output.
Table 8 (a)
Data type Default file name Reference item
Program ALL-PROG.TXT 8.2.1
Offset data TOOLOFST.TXT 8.2.3
Parameter CNC-PARA.TXT 8.2.2
Pitch error compensation data PITCH.TXT 8.2.4
Custom macro common variable MACRO.TXT 8.2.5
Workpiece coordinate system data EXT_WKZ.TXT 8.2.6
Operation history data OPRT_HIS.TXT 8.2.7
Tool data TOOLDATA.TXT 8.2.8
Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT
Periodic maintenance data (periodic maintenance: status screen) MAINTENA.TXT
System configuration data SYS-CONF.TXT
PMC signal protect DIDOENBL.TXT
Servo/spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT
Machine system name data (periodic maintenance: machine system
MAINTEMC.TXT
screen)
Servo waveform diagnosis WAVE-DGN.TXT
P code variable (macro executor) PCODE.TXT
The above types of data can be input and output on the screens for displaying and setting those types of
data.
If NC data such as programs and parameters is to be written to a memory card, and if a file with the same
name already exists, it is possible to select whether to overwrite the existing file or cancel writing with
appropriate operation.
This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308.
The external I/O device set in NC parameter No. 0020 is selected. See the Table 8 (b) below for details.
Table 8 (b)
Correspondence between settings and input/output units
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
- 440 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
WARNING
1 Always use ISO codes for input/output except when ASCII code data is to be
input.
ISO code input/output is enabled for memory cards and data servers by setting,
respectively, bit 0 (ISO) of parameter No. 0139 and bit 0 (ISO) of parameter No.
0908 to “1”.
2 ASCII data input/output is risky because ASCII data does not contain parity
information and therefore any data error cannot be detected.
CAUTION
1 This control unit supports the use of a Memory card as an input/output device.
The Flash ATA card is available:
See the order list for details of the supported Memory card types.
2 On a Memory card, only those files that are in the root directory can be accessed
for display, reading, and writing. Those in subdirectories cannot be used.
3 The time required to read or write each data item varies depending on the
Memory card type, the status of use, and other factors.
4 For flash ATA cards, only those recommended by FANUC are available.
5 When formatting a flash ATA card, use the quick formatting method, which
clears the file allocation table and the directory information on the root directory.
An unformatted flash ATA card needs to be formatted in FAT16 with a PC or the
like. (A FAT32-formatted ATA card cannot be recognized.)
NOTE
External I/O devices can handle file names of up to 12 characters each.
8.1 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD

Screen display
When an attempt is made to output NC data to a memory card, and if the specified file name or the default
file name is the same as an existing file name on the memory card, a confirmation message
"OVERWRITE?" appears. (Bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308 = 1)
- 441 -
Fig. 8.1 (a) Screen display example
Procedure
On the output screen for the desired function, perform the following operation.
1 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].
2 Press the soft key [EXEC]. If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card, the file is
output in this step.
3 If a file with the same name exists on the memory card, soft keys [REWRITE] and [CAN] appear.
Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled.
Example) Output from the parameter screen

2 Press the soft key [PARAMETER].
3 Enter the EDIT mode or state emergency stop.
5 For 8.4-inch display unit, press the continuous menu key .
6 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. The soft key display switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (b) to the one
in Fig. 8.1 (c).
7 If all parameters are to be output, press the soft key [ALL]. If only the parameters with nonzero
values are to be output, press the soft key [NON-0]. The soft key displays change from those
displayed in Fig. 8.1 (c) to those displayed in Fig. 8.1 (d).
8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. Because no file name is specified, the file is output with a file name of
CNC-PARA.TXT, but if a file with the same name exists on the memory card, the soft key display
switches from the one in Fig. 8.1 (d) to the one in Fig. 8.1 (e), with a confirmation message
appearing.
If a file with the same name does not exist on the memory card, the file is output directly.
9 Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten.
Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. If wishing to output the file after changing
the file name, specify a file name after step 6, and perform step 7 again.
Fig. 8.1 (b) Soft key display before [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (c) Soft key display after [F OUTPUT] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (d) Soft key display after [ALL] or [NON-0] is pressed
Fig. 8.1 (e) Soft key display after [EXEC] is pressed
CAUTION
If a file to be overwritten has the read-only attribute, the warning message
"OVER WRITE FAILED" appears to cancel output even when the soft key
[REWRITE] is pressed for that file.
If a memory card is pulled out or inserted while a message for confirming
overwriting is displayed, it is likely that the write operation may fail and, at worst,
files on the memory card may be broken.
- 442 -
8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN

This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation
screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, 3-dimensional error compensation, macro
variable, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history, and tool management.
Section 8.2, "INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN", consists of the following subsections:
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program..........................................................................................443

8.2.1.1 Inputting a program ....................................................................................................443
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program .................................................................................................444
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters.........................................................................................445
8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters ...................................................................................................445
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters ................................................................................................445
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data........................................................................................446
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data....................................................................................................446
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data .................................................................................................447
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ........................................................447
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data.....................................................................447
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data ..................................................................448
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data................................................448
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables...................................................449
8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables................................................................449
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables .............................................................450
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data ...............................................451
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data ..............................................................451
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data............................................................452
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data.....................................................................452
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data...............................................................................452
8.2.8 Inputting Outputting Tool Data .................................................................................................453
8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data.......................................................................................................453
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data....................................................................................................453
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data ..........................................................................................454
8.2.1 Inputting and Outputting a Program

8.2.1.1 Inputting a program
The following explains how to input a program from an external device to the memory of the CNC by
using the program editing screen or program folder screen.
Inputting a program
Procedure
1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen.
3 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears.
Press the soft key [F INPUT].
6 Type the name of the file that you want to input.
Press the soft key [F-NAME]. To specify the program number to input, type the program number
- 443 -
and press the soft key [O SET].

For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F-NAME] and an input
program number [O SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.1 (c).
7 Press the soft key [EXEC].
This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN].
The read program is registered in the program memory of the path currently selected.
Table 8.2.1.1 (c)

[F-NAME] [O SET] Input file name Input program Input program number
Continuous program
File for the program number All programs in the program
BLANK INPUT numbers starting at one
specified with [O SET] specified with [O SET]
specified with [O SET]
File name set with All programs in the file File name at the time the file
INPUT BLANK
[F-NAME] specified with [F-NAME] is saved
Continuous program
File name set with All programs in the file
INPUT INPUT numbers starting at one
[F-NAME] specified with [F-NAME]
8.2.1.2 Outputting a program

A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to an external device.
Outputting a program
Procedure
1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Press the function key to display the program editing screen or program folder screen.
5 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F OUTPUT] appears.
Press the soft key [F OUTPUT].
6 Type the program number to output and press the soft key [O SET]. To specify an output file name,
type the output file name and press the soft key [F-NAME].
If no output file name or output program number is specified here, the main program or the program
being subjected to background editing is output.
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F-NAME] and an output
program name [O SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.2.1.2 (a).
This starts outputting the program, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
To cancel the output, press the soft key [CAN].
Table 8.2.1.2 (a)

[F-NAME] [O SET] Output file name Output program
Main program or program number
Main program or program being subjected to
BLANK BLANK being subjected to background
background editing
editing
All programs in the program memory that are
BLANK -9999 ALL-PROG.TXT
displayed in the program list
BLANK INPUT Program number set with [O SET] Program in the NC that is set with [O SET]
- 444 -

INPUT BLANK File name set with [F-NAME]
background editing
INPUT -9999 File name set with [F-NAME]
INPUT INPUT File name set with [F-NAME] Program in the NC that is set with [O SET]
8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters

8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters
Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the
same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the existing parameter.
Inputting parameters
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SETTING] appears.
Press the soft key [SETTING].
4 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop.
5 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data.
Alarm SW0100 appears.
7 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
14 Press the soft key [SETTING].
17 Turn the power of the CNC on again.
8.2.2.2 Outputting parameters

All parameters are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device.
Outputting parameters
Procedure
- 445 -

3 Press the soft key [PARAMETER], then the parameter screen appears.
7 If all parameters are to be output, press the soft key [ALL]. If only the parameters with nonzero
values are to be output, press the soft key [NON-0].
8 Type the file name that you want to output.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
Explanation
- Suppressing output of parameters set to 0
When bit 1 (PRM) of parameter No. 0010 is set to 1, and soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the parameters in
the Table 8.2.2.2 (a) are not output:
Table 8.2.2.2 (a)

Other than axis type Axis type
Bit type Parameter for which all bits are set to 0. Parameter for an axis for which all bits are set to 0.
Value type Parameter whose value is 0. Parameter for an axis for which the value is 0.
8.2.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data
8.2.3.1 Inputting offset data

Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input format is the same
as for offset value output. When an offset value is loaded which has the same offset number as an offset
number already registered in the memory, the loaded offset data replaces existing data.
Inputting offset data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Press the soft key [OFFSET].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
- 446 -
8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data

All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device.
Outputting offset data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OFFSET] appears.
Press the soft key [OFFSET].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
Explanation
- Output format
Output format is as follows:
• Tool compensation memory A
%
G10 G90 P01 R_ Q_
G10 G90 P02 R_ Q_
...
G10 G90 P_ R_
%
P_ : Tool offset number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs)
R_ : Tool compensation data. Output with a decimal point in the input unit used at output.
8.2.4 Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data
8.2.4.1 Inputting pitch error compensation data

Pitch error compensation data are loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input
format is the same as the output format. When a pitch error compensation data is loaded which has the
corresponding data number as a pitch error compensation data already registered in the memory, the
loaded data replaces the existing data.
Inputting pitch error compensation data

Procedure
- 447 -
Alarm SW0100 appears.
7 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears.
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
8.2.4.2 Outputting pitch error compensation data

All pitch error compensation data are output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to
an external device.
Outputting pitch error compensation data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [PITCH ERROR] appears.
Press the soft key [PITCH ERROR].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.2.4.3 Input/output format of pitch error compensation data

Pitch error compensation data is input and output in the following input and output formats.
- 448 -
- Keywords
The following alphabets are used as keywords.
The numeric value following each keyword has the meaning listed below:
Table 8.2.4.3 (a)

Keyword Meaning of the following numeric value
N Pitch error compensation data number + 10000
Q Data identification (1 : Parameter data, 0 : Pitch error compensation data )
P Pitch error compensation data value
- Format
Pitch error compensation data is output in the following format:
N ***** Q0 P **** ;
The 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a pitch error compensation data number to which a value
of 10000 is added.
Q0 indicates pitch error compensation data
The numeric value following P indicates the value (integer value) of pitch error compensation data
between -7 and 7.
The semicolon (;) indicates the end of block (LF in the ISO code or CR in the EIA code).
Example
N10001Q0P5;
Pitch error compensation data number 1
Pitch error compensation data value 5
- Beginning and end of a record

A pitch error compensation data record begins with % and ends with %.
Example
% ; ................................................................Beginning of record
N10000Q0P1;
N10001Q0P3;
:
N11279Q0P0;
% ..................................................................End of record
When parameters and pitch error compensation data are integrated into one file, % is added to the
beginning and end of the file.
8.2.5 Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables

8.2.5.1 Inputting custom macro common variables
The value of a custom macro common variable is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external
device. The same format used to output custom macro common variables is used for input.
Inputting custom macro common variables

Procedure
- 449 -

3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears.
Press the soft key [MACRO].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
Explanation
- Common variables
The common variables (#500 to 999) can be input and output.
#100 to #199 can be input when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 1.
8.2.5.2 Outputting custom macro common variables

Custom macro common variables stored in the memory of the CNC can be output in a defined output
format to an external device.
Outputting custom macro common variables

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MACRO] appears.
Press the soft key [MACRO].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Explanation
- Output format
The output format is as follows:
The values of custom macro variables are output in a bit-image hexadecimal representation of
double-precision floating-point type data.
%
G10L85P100(0000000000000000)
G10L85P101(0000000000000000)
G10L85P102(FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF)
- 450 -
:
G10L85P500(4024000000000000)
G10L85P501(4021000000000000)
G10L85P502(0000000000000000)
・
SETVN500[ABC]
SETVN501[DEF]
SETVN502[GHI]
:
M02
%
P_ : Macro variable number

SETVN_ [ _ ] : Common variable name
NOTE
The conventional custom macro statement program format cannot be used for
output.
By setting bit 0 (MCO) of parameter No. 6019, it is possible to output macro variable numbers and
variable data values as comments after normally output data.
The output comments do not affect data input.
- Common variable
The common variables (#500 to #999) can be input and output.
#100 to #199 can be output when bit 3 (PV5) of parameter No. 6001 is set to 1.
8.2.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System

Data
8.2.6.1 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data
Coordinate system variable data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from an external device. The input
format is the same as the output format. When coordinate system variable data with a data number
corresponding to existing coordinate system variable data registered in the memory is loaded, the loaded
coordinate system variable data replaces the existing coordinate system variable data.
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears.
Press the soft key [WORK].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
- 451 -
8.2.6.2 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data

All coordinate system variable data is output in the output format from the memory of the CNC to an
external device.
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears.
Press the soft key [WORK].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower
right part of the screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.2.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data

Only output operation is permitted on operation history data.
The output data is in text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can
handle text files on the personal computer.
8.2.7.1 Outputting operation history data

All operation history data is output in the output format form the memory of the CNC to an external
device.
Outputting operation history data

Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] appears.
Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the
- 452 -
screen. When the write operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.2.8 Inputting Outputting Tool Data

8.2.8.1 Inputting tool data
Tool data is input from external I/O devices such as a memory card to the memory of the CNC.
Inputting tool data

Procedure
2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel.
4 Press the continuous menu key , and press the chapter selection soft key [TOOL].
5 Press the continuous menu key , and press soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or
[TOOL SHAPE].
7 Press the soft key [F INPUT].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the tool data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the
8.2.8.2 Outputting tool data

Tool data is output the memory of the CNC to external I/O devices such as a memory card.
Outputting tool data

Procedure
4 Press the continuous menu key , and press the chapter selection soft key [TOOL].
5 Press the continuous menu key , and press soft key [TOOL NUMBER], [PUNCH COUNT], or
[TOOL SHAPE].
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the tool data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
- 453 -
8.2.8.3 Output format of tool data

Output format of tool data is as follows.
%
N001 T M X Y S P C I J K B ;
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
N002 T M X Y S P C I J K B ; Tool data
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
N136 T M X Y S P C I J K B ;
N201 T A Y C I J K ;
(1) (2) (13) (5) (8) (9) (10) (11)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ; Tool data for multiple tools
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ;
N264 T A Y C I J K ;
%
Items (1) to (13) are as follows :

(1) Tool registration number
The tool numbers registered for multiple tools are output with N200 to N299.
(2) Tool number
(3) Turret position
(4) X–axis offset
(5) Y–axis offset
(6) Number of a tool to be substituted
(7) Number of punch operations
(8) Tool figure for graphic operation
(9) X dimension of a tool for graphic operation
(10) Y dimension of a tool for graphic operation
(11) Tool angle for graphic operation
(12) Tool life value
(13) Angle for indexing the turret for multiple tool
- Output file name

If the output file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLDATA.TXT” is assumed.
8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN

Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error
compensation data, macro variables, workpiece coordinate system data, operation history data, and tool
management data to an external I/O device.
CAUTION
While an external I/O device is being accessed, do not turn the power to the
CNC off or remove the device, or the device may be damaged.
- 454 -
NOTE
The ALL IO screen can be operated only if a memory card is selected as an
external I/O device. Use NC parameter No. 20 to select an external I/O device.
The following explains how to display the ALL IO screen:
Displaying the ALL IO screen

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times.
3 Press the soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.
The subsequent steps to select data from the ALL IO screen will be explained for each type of data.
Configuration of this section

Section 8.3, "INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN", consists of the following subsections:
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program ......................................................................................................455

8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters ..............................................................................................456
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data .............................................................................................457
8.3.4 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data ....................................................................458
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables...............................................................459
8.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data.....................................................460
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data ..........................................................................460
8.3.8 File Format and Error Messages .....................................................................................................461
8.3.1 Inputting/Outputting a Program

A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting a program
Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen.
4 Press the soft key [N INPUT].
5 Set the name of the file that you want to input.
Type a file name, and press the soft key [F NAME].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed.
See the Table 8.3.1 (a) for details.
6 Set the program number to be used after the input.
Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET].
If no program number is specified here, the program number in the file is adopted as is.
- 455 -
Table 8.3.1 (a)

File for the
Continuous program numbers
program number All programs in the program
BLANK INPUT starting at one specified with
specified with specified with [O SET]
[O SET]
[O SET]
File name set with All programs in the file Program number at the time the file
INPUT BLANK
[F-NAME] specified with [F-NAME] is saved
Continuous program numbers
INPUT INPUT starting at one specified with
[O SET]
Outputting a program
Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PROGRAM] on the ALL IO screen.
5 Set the program that you want to output.
Type a program number, and press the soft key [P SET].
If O-9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output.
6 Set the file name to be output.
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O-number” if a single program
number is specified; if O-9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be
“ALL-PROG.TXT”.
See the Table 8.3.1 (b) for details.
(For an explanation of foreground folders, see II-12.1.3, and for how to change foreground folders,
see III-11.6.)
When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
Table 8.3.1 (b)

Main program or program number Main program or program being subjected to
BLANK BLANK
being subjected to background editing background editing
background editing
8.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters

Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
- 456 -
Inputting parameters
Procedure
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100
appears.
5 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the parameter, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
Outputting parameters
Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-PARA.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the parameter, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
8.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data

Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting offset data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen.
- 457 -

If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the offset data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When
Outputting offset data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “TOOLOFST.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the offset data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen.
8.3.4 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data

Pitch error compensation data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting pitch error compensation data

Procedure
4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100
appears.
5 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the pitch error compensation data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of
the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears.
- 458 -
Outputting pitch error compensation data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [PITCH] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.3.5 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables

Custom macro common variables can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting custom macro common variables

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
Outputting custom macro common variables

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the custom macro common variables, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right
part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
- 459 -
8.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System

Data
Workpiece coordinates system data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting workpiece coordinate system data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen.
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts reading the workpiece coordinate system data, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part
Outputting workpiece coordinate system data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [WORK] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the workpiece coordinate system data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower
right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.3.7 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data

Operation history data can be output on the ALL IO screen.
Only output operation is permitted for operation history data.
The output data is of text format. So, to reference the output data you must use an application that can
handle text files on the personal computer.
Outputting operation history data

Procedure
1 Press the soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] on the ALL IO screen.
If the file name is omitted, default file name “OPRT_HIS.TXT” is assumed.
This starts outputting the operation history data, and “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the
- 460 -
screen. When the read operation ends, the “OUTPUT” indication disappears.
8.3.8 File Format

Explanation
- File format
All files that are read from and written to an external device are of text format. The format is described
below.
A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a input operation,
data between the first % and the next LF is skipped. Each block ends with an LF, not a semicolon (;).
• LF: 0A (hexadecimal) of ASCII code
• When a file containing lowercase letters, kana characters, and several special characters (such as $, \,
and !) is read, those letters and characters are ignored.
Example)
%
O0001(MEMORY CARD SAMPLE FILE)
G17 G49 G97
G92 X-11.3 Y2.33
:
:
M30
%
• ASCII codes are always used when data is input to or output from a memory card regardless of the
setting parameter (ISO/EIA).
• Bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 0100 can be used to specify whether the end of block code (EOB) is
output as "LF" only, or as "LF, CR, CR."
Limitation
- Memory card specification
Use memory cards that comply with PCMCIA Ver2.0 or JEIDA Ver4.1.
- Attribute memory
Memory cards that have no attribute memory or contain no device information in the attribute memory
cannot be used.
- Flash ROM card

Flash ROM cards can be used for input only.
8.4 MEMORY CARD SCREEN
8.4.1 Displaying the Memory Card Screen

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [DIR]. The program list screen appears.
(If the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key .)
4 Press the soft key [DEVICE CHANGE].
5 Press the soft key [MEMORY CARD], then the memory card screen appears.
- 461 -
Fig. 8.4.1 (a) Memory card screen
Display item
DNC OPE FILE
The file name to be subjected to DNC operation is displayed.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of registered files is displayed.
NO.
The file number is displayed.
FILE NAME
The file name is displayed.
COMMENT
The program comment is displayed.
SIZE(KBYTE)
The memory capacity the file takes is displayed.
UPDATE TIME
The update date of the file is displayed.
8.4.2 Displaying and Operating the File List

DIR +
For the 8.4-inch display unit, the displays can be changed between the comment and the size/date.
REFRESH
Display data can be updated.
- 462 -
F SRH
A file can be searched for. The file found is displayed at the beginning of the list.
1 Press the soft key [F SRH].

2 Enter the file number of a file to be searched for.
3 Press the soft key [F SET].
4 • To execute the search request, press the soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the search request, press the soft key [CAN].
F DEL
A file can be deleted.
<Using a file number to specify a file to be deleted>

1 Press the soft key [F DEL].
2 Enter the file number of a file to be deleted.
4 • To execute the delete request, press the soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the delete request, press the soft key [CAN].
<Using a file name to specify a file to be deleted>

2 Enter the name of a file to be deleted.
3 Press the soft key [F-NAME].
DEVICE CHANGE
A device can be selected on the program list screen.
1 Press the soft key [CHANGE DEVICE].

2 Press the soft key for a device to be changed.
DNC SET
A file to be subjected to DNC operation can be selected.
See Section 4.3, “DNC OPERATION” for details.
DNC CLEAR
The selection of a file to be subjected to DNC operation can be canceled.
SCHEDULE
The schedule list screen can be displayed.
See Section 4.4, “SCHEDULE OPERATION” for details.
8.4.3 Inputting/Outputting a File

A program can be input and output using the memory card screen.
Inputting a program (F INPUT)

4 Set the file number that you want to input.
Type a file number, and press the soft key [F SET].
- 463 -
See the table below for details.

Type a program number, and press the soft key [O SET].
[F SET] [O SET] Input file name Input program Input program number
Continuous program
File name for the file number All programs in the file Program number at the
INPUT BLANK
specified with [F SET] specified with [F SET] time the file is saved
Continuous program
File name for the file number All programs in the file
specified with [F SET] specified with [F SET]
Inputting a file (N INPUT)

Type a file name, and press the soft key [F-NAME].
Continuous program
File name set with All programs in the file Program number at the time
INPUT BLANK
[F-NAME] specified with [F-NAME] the file is saved
Continuous program
Outputting a file
If -9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output.
- 464 -
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O”“number” if a single program
number is specified; if -9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be “ALL-PROG.TXT”.

BLANK BLANK
background editing
8.5 EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS
8.5.1 FTP File Transfer Function

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.
Host file list display

A list of the files held on the host computer is displayed.
Procedure
2 Press the soft key [DIR]. The program list screen appears. (If the soft key does not appear, press the
continuous menu key .)
5 Press the soft key [EMB ETHER], and the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen
appears.
- 465 -
Fig. 8.5.1 (a) Embedded Ethernet host file list screen
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the
embedded Ethernet port.
The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list
screen:
(1) Check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. Make a selection
in "DEVICE SELECTION" on the Ethernet setting screen.
(2) A host computer can be selected from connection destinations 1, 2, and 3.
Make a selection according to soft key [HOST CHANGE] described later.
2 File names including 2-bytes characters cannot be displayed correctly.
6 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys
.
7 Press the soft key [REFRESH] to update the screen display.
8 Press the soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display the host file list (file names only) screen. Press the soft
key [DETAIL ON] to display the host file list (detail) screen.
9 When selecting a folder with cursor and pressing the MDI key , the selected folder is changed
to the new current folder.
Display item
AVAILABLE DEVICE
"EMBEDDED" or "PCMCIA" is displayed.
CONNECT HOST
The currently selected connection host number and host name are displayed.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of files registered in the work folder of the connected host is displayed. Up to 8 digits can be
displayed.
- 466 -
CURRENT FOLDER
The current folder name of the connected host is displayed.
If the folder-path is long compared with the display-item, characters: “…” and only the first and last ten
letters of the folder name are displayed.
FILE LIST
There is no distinction between file names and folder names.
Although the maximum number of displayed characters is 127, characters are displayed as far as they can
be displayed in one line.
Operation list
DETAIL ON, DETAIL OFF
The screen display can be switched between the display of file names only and the display of details.
REFRESH
Display data can be updated.
INPUT
A file can be input from the host computer to the part program storage memory of the CNC. This item is
displayed only when 9 is set as the I/O device number of the CNC.
OUTPUT
A file can be output from the part program storage memory of the CNC to the host computer. This item is
displayed only when 9 is set as the I/O device number of the CNC.
DELETE
A folder or file can be deleted from the host computer.
RENAME
A file or folder on the host computer can be renamed.
CREATE FOLDER
A folder can be created on the host computer.
HOST CHANGE
The connected host can be changed.
NC program input
A file (NC program) stored on the host computer can be input into the part program storage memory of
the CNC.
Procedure
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen.
5 Position the cursor on the file to input, and press [F GET] or type the file name to input.
Press the soft key [F SET].
If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “ALL-PROG.TXT” is assumed.
- 467 -
6 Type the program number, and press the soft key [O SET].
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an input file name [F NAME] and an input
program name [O SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.5.1 (a).
Table 8.5.1 (a)

Continuous program
File name set with All programs in the file Program number at the time
INPUT BLANK
[F-NAME] specified with [F-NAME] the file is saved
Continuous program
NC program output
A file (NC program) stored in the part program storage memory of the CNC can be output to the host
computer.
Procedure
1 Display the EMBEDDED ETHERNET HOST FILE LIST screen.
5 Type a program number of which you want to output, and press the soft key [O SET].
To specify an output file name, type a file name, and press the soft key [F-NAME].
For an explanation of the operations to be performed if an output file name [F NAME] and an output
program number [O SET] are omitted, see the Table 8.5.1 (b).
To cancel the output of the program, press the soft key [CAN].
Table 8.5.1 (b)

BLANK BLANK
background editing
- 468 -
8.6 FLOPPY CASSETTE SCREEN
8.6.1 Displaying the Floppy Cassette Screen

Procedure
2 Press the soft key [DIR]. The program list screen appears.
(If the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key .)
5 Press the soft key [FLOPPY], then the floppy cassette screen appears.
Fig. 8.6.1 (a) Floppy cassette screen
Display item
DNC OPE FILE
The file name to be subjected to DNC operation is displayed.
REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of registered files is displayed.
NO.
The file number is displayed.
FILE NAME
The file name is displayed.
8.6.2 Displaying and Operating the File List

F SRH
A file can be searched for. The file found is displayed at the beginning of the list.
- 469 -
1 Press the soft key [F SRH].

2 Enter the file number of a file to be searched for.
4 • To execute the search request, press the soft key [EXEC].
• To cancel the search request, press the soft key [CAN].
F DEL
A file can be deleted.
<Using a file number to specify a file to be deleted>

2 Enter the file number of a file to be deleted.
<Using a file name to specify a file to be deleted>

2 Enter the name of a file to be deleted.
3 Press the soft key [F-NAME].
DEVICE CHANGE
A device can be selected on the program list screen.
1 Press the soft key [CHANGE DEVICE].

2 Press the soft key for a device to be changed.
DNC SET
A file to be subjected to DNC operation can be selected.
DNC CLEAR
The selection of a file to be subjected to DNC operation can be canceled.
SCHEDULE
The schedule list screen can be displayed.
See Section 4.4, “SCHEDULE OPERATION” for details.
8.6.3 Inputting/Outputting a File

A program can be input and output using the floppy cassette screen.
Inputting a file
4 Set the file number that you want to input.
Type a file number, and press the soft key [F SET].
- 470 -
[F SET] [O SET] Input file name Input program Input program number
File for the program number Continuous program
All programs in the program
BLANK INPUT specified with numbers starting at one
[O SET] specified with [O SET]
File name for the file
All programs in the file Program number at the time
INPUT BLANK number specified with
specified with [F SET] the file is saved
[F SET]
File name for the file Continuous program
All programs in the file
INPUT INPUT number specified with numbers starting at one
specified with [F SET]
[F SET] specified with [O SET]
Outputting a file
If -9999 is typed, all programs in the memory are output.
When no file name is set, the output file name is assumed to be “O”“number” if a single program
number is specified; if -9999 is specified, the output file name is assumed to be “ALL-PROG.TXT”.

Main program or program number
BLANK BLANK being subjected to background
background editing
editing
background editing
8.7 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION

Overview
This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to
a memory card. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a personal computer.
- 471 -
Explanation
- Start/cancellation methods
The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds. The
function can be canceled by pressing key .
- Acquisition and output of screen data

When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the
function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is
being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen data can be output from
the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the status display.
- Screen data file names

Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below, starting with the
one created after the power is turned on.
"HDCPY000.BMP" (name of the first file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
"HDCPY001.BMP" (name of the second file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
:
"HDCPY999.BMP" (name of the 1000th file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
If, after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the screen hard copy function is executed, the file name
returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". If, however, a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the
capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
Limitation
- Screens whose hard copies cannot be made
Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.
- Foreground I/O devices

During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use.
- Canceling the hard copy function

If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data
that has been output is created.
- 472 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS
9 CREATING PROGRAMS
This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC.
This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and conversational programming with
graphic function.
Creation/registration
Program creation Creating programs using MDI panel ..................... See III-9.1
Automatic insertion of sequence numbers ............ See III-9.2
Conversational programming
with graphic function ............. See III-9.3
Program Registration from external input......................... See III-8.2.1

registration See III-8.3.1
Editing
Management
Output Execution
9.1 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL

Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editing functions described in III-10.
Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel
1 Enter the EDIT mode.

2 Press the key.
3 Press address key and enter the program number.
4 Press the key.

5 Create a program using the program editing functions described in III-10.
- 473 -
9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64554EN/01
Explanation
- Comments in a program
Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes.
Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ;
M08 (COOLANT ON) ;
• When the key is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and control-in code ")"
have been typed, the typed comments are registered.
• When the key is pressed midway through comments, to enter the rest of comments later, the
data typed before the key is pressed may not be correctly registered (not entered, modified, or
lost) because the data is subject to an entry check which is performed in normal editing.
• Control-out code "(" or Control-in code ")" cannot be registered by itself.
9.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS

Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI
keys in the EDIT mode.
Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter No. 3216.
Procedure for automatic insertion of sequence numbers

Procedure
1 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for "SEQUENCE NO." in setting data. (see III-12.3.2).
3 Press key to display the program screen.
4 Search for or register the number of a program to be edited and move the cursor to the EOB (;) of the
block after which automatic insertion of sequence numbers is started.
When a program number is registered and an EOB (;) is entered with the key, sequence
numbers are automatically inserted starting with 0. Change the initial value, if required, according to
step 10, then skip to step 7.
5 Press address key and enter the initial value of N.
6 Press key.
7 Enter each word of a block.
8 Press key.
9 Press key. The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically
inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2,
N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is specified.
- 474 -
Fig. 9.2 (a)
10 In the example above, if N12 is not necessary in the next block, pressing the key after N12 is
displayed deletes N12.
If wishing to insert N100, not N12, into the next block, type N100 immediately after N12 is
displayed, and press . This causes N100 to be registered and the initial value to be changed to
100.
9.3 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC

FUNCTION
NC programs can be created on a block-by-block basis, viewing the displayed G code menu screen and G
code details screen.
Procedure for Conversational Programming with Graphic Function

Procedure 1: Creating a program
2 Press function key . If no program is registered, the following screen is displayed.
- 475 -
Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen (with no program registered)
If a program is registered, the program currently selected is displayed.
Fig. 9.3 (b) Program screen (with a program registered)
3 Key in the program number of a program to be registered after keying in address O, then press
key. For example, when a program with program number 10 is to be registered, key in O10 , then
press key. This registers a new program O0010.
4 Press the [C.A.P] soft key. The following G code menu is displayed on the screen. (If the [C.A.P]
soft key is not displayed, hold down the rightmost continuous menu key or the leftmost return
menu key until the [C.A.P] soft key is displayed.)
- 476 -
Fig. 9.3 (c) G code menu screen
5 Key in the G code corresponding to a function to be programmed. When the positioning function is
desired, for example, the G code menu lists the function with the G code G00. So key in G00. If the
screen does not indicate a function to be programmed, press the page key to display the next G code
menu screen. Repeat this operation until a desired function appears. If a desired function is not a G
code, key in no data.
6 Press the soft key [BLOCK] to display a detailed screen for a keyed in G code. The figure below
shows an example of detailed screen for G00.
Fig. 9.3 (d) G code details screen (G00)
When no keys are pressed, the standard details screen is displayed.
- 477 -
Fig. 9.3 (e) G code details screen (standard details screen)
7 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen. If the address where the cursor
is placed on the program side is present on the figure side, the address on the figure side blinks.
8 Enter numeric data by pressing the numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key or key. This
completes the input of one data item.
9 By repeating steps 7 and 8 above, enter all data necessary for the G code keyed in step 5 above.
10 Press the key. This completes the registration of data of one block in program memory. On
the screen, the G code menu screen is displayed, allowing the user to enter data for another block.
Repeat the procedure starting with 5 as required.
11 After registering all programs, press the [PRGRM] soft key. The registered programs are converted
to the conversational format and displayed.
12 Press the key to return to the program head.
Procedure 2: Modifying a block

1 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen and press the [C.A.P] soft key.
Or, press the [C.A.P] soft key first to display the conversational screen, then press the or
page key until the block to be modified is displayed.

2 When data other than a G code is to be altered, just move the cursor to the data and key in a desired
value, then press the [INPUT] soft key or key.
3 When a G code is to be altered, press the menu return key and the soft key [G.MENU]. Then
the G code menu appears. Select a desired G code, then key in the value. For example, to specify a
cutting feed, since the G code menu indicates G01, key in G01. Then press the soft key [BLOCK].
The detailed screen of the G code is displayed, so enter the data.
4 After data is changed completely, press the key. This operation replaces an entire block of a
program.
- 478 -
Procedure 3: Inserting a block

1 On the conversational screen, display the block immediately before a new block is to be inserted, by
using the page keys. On the program screen, move the cursor with the page keys and cursor keys to
immediately before the point where a new block is to be inserted.
2 Press the soft key [G.MENU] to display the G code menu. Then enter new block data.
3 When input of one block of data is completed in step 2, press the key. This operation inserts a
block of data.
Procedure 4: Deleting a block

1 On the conversational screen, display the contents of a block to be deleted, then press the
key.
2 The contents of the block displayed are deleted from program memory. Then the contents of the next
block are displayed on the conversational screen.
- 479 -
10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64554EN/01
10 EDITING PROGRAMS
This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion,
modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program. This chapter
also describes program search, sequence number search, word search, and address search, which are
performed before editing the program.
Creation and
registration
Editing
1) Program search.................................................................See III-10.4.

Search for part 2) Sequence number search .................................................See III-10.5.
of program to be 3) Word search ...................................................................See III-10.2.1.
edited 4) Address search...............................................................See III-10.2.1.
1) Inserting, altering, and deleting a word ...........See III-10.2.3 to 10.2.5.

2) Deleting blocks ..................................................................See III-10.3.
Inserting, altering,
3) Deleting programs ........................................................... See III-10.6.
and deleting
4) Copying/moving programs ................................................See III-10.7.
programs
Management
Output Execution
10.1 EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE

When the 8-level data protection function is used, the edit disable attribute can be set for each program.
Programs with the edit disable attribute cannot be edited.
So, before a program can be edited, the edit disable attribute, if set for the program, needs to be removed.
NOTE
The 8-level data protection function is optional.
Procedure for removing the edit disable attribute

1 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press the soft key [DIR].
- 480 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS
4 Press the soft key [DIR+] to display a detailed program list.
(Each time the soft key [DIR+] is pressed, the program list display switches between detailed display
and normal display.)
5 Select a program whose edit disable attribute is to be removed.
Move the cursor with the cursor key or to a program whose edit disable attribute is to
be removed.
7 Press the soft key [CHANGEATTRIB] (or [ATTRIB] when an 8.4-inch display unit is used).
8 Press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE] (or the soft key [EDT ON] when an 8.4-inch display unit is
used).
9 Press the soft key [END].
CAUTION
1 After completing editing, set the edit disable attribute as necessary.
2 To set the edit disable attribute, follow the same procedure as for removing the
attribute.
In the step 7, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL].
10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD

This section outlines the procedure for inserting, altering, and deleting a word in a program registered in
memory.
Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word

1 Select EDIT mode.
3 Select a program to be edited.
If a program to be edited is selected, perform the operation 4.
If a program to be edited is not selected, search for the program number.
4 Move the cursor to the position to be edited, with one of the methods below.
• Scan method
• Word search method
• Address search method
For each method, refer to III-10.2.1.
5 Perform an operation such as altering, inserting, or deleting a word.
Explanation
- Concept of word and editing unit
A word is an address followed by a number. With a custom macro, the concept of word is ambiguous.
So the editing unit is considered here.
The editing unit is a unit subject to alteration or deletion in one operation. In one scan operation, the
cursor indicates the start of an editing unit.
An insertion is made after an editing unit.
Definition of editing unit
• Program portion from an address to immediately before the next address
• An address is an alphabet, IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO=, or ; (EOB).
According to this definition, a word is an editing unit.
The word "word," when used in the description of editing, means an editing unit according to the precise
definition.
- 481 -
WARNING
When a change, insertion, or deletion was performed on data of a program by
pausing machining with the single block stop, feed hold, or other operations
during execution of a program, be sure to return the cursor to the original position
before restarting the program. To execute the program with the cursor positioned
at another position, be sure to make a reset.
Otherwise, the program may not be executed as expected from the program
shown on the screen after machining restarts.
10.2.1 Word Search

A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text (scanning), by word search, or
by address search.
Procedure for scanning a program
1 Press the cursor key .

The cursor moves forward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word.
2 Press the cursor key .
The cursor moves backward word by word; the cursor is displayed at a selected word.
Example: Scanning X100.
Fig. 10.2.1 (a)
3 Holding down the cursor key or scans words continuously.
4 The first word of the next block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed.
5 The first word of the previous block is searched for when the cursor key is pressed.
6 Holding down the cursor key or moves the cursor to the head of a block continuously.
7 Pressing the page key displays the next page and searches for the first word of the page.
8 Pressing the page key displays the previous page and searches for the first word of the page.
9 Holding down the page key or displays one page after another.
- 482 -
Procedure for searching a word

Example of searching for S12
N01234 is being searched

for/scanned currently.
S12 is searched for.
Fig. 10.2.1 (b)
1 Press soft key [SEARCH].

2 Key in address S .
3 Key in 1 2 .
• S12 cannot be searched for if only S1 is keyed in.
• S09 cannot be searched for by keying in only S9.
To search for S09, be sure to key in S09.
4 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward.
5 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH].
Procedure for searching an address

Example of searching for M03
N01234 is being searched

for/scanned currently.
M03 is searched for.
Fig. 10.2.1 (c)
1 Pressing the [SEARCH] key

2 Key in address M .
3 Pressing soft key [↓ SEARCH] starts searching forward from the cursor position. Pressing [↑
SEARCH] starts searching backward.
4 To search for the same word successively, press [↓ SEARCH] or [↑ SEARCH].
10.2.2 Heading a Program

The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called heading the program pointer.
This section describes the four methods for heading the program pointer.
Procedure for heading a program

Method 1
1 Press key when the program screen is selected in EDIT mode. When the cursor has
returned to the start of the program, the contents of the program are displayed from its start on
the screen.
- 483 -
Method 2 Search for the program number.

1 When the program screen is selected in MEMORY or EDIT mode, enter a program number or
program name.
When entering a program number, press address key O then type the program number.
2 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
Method 3
1 Select the program screen or program check screen in MEMORY mode.
3 Press soft key [REWIND].
Method 4
1 Select the program screen in EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [LINE SEARCH].
4 Press soft key [TOP].
10.2.3 Inserting a Word

Procedure for inserting a word
1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the key.
Example of Inserting T15

1 Search for or scan X100.
X100.0 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.3 (a)
2 Key in T 1 5 .
3 Press the key.
T15 is inserted.
Fig. 10.2.3 (b)
- 484 -
10.2.4 Altering a Word

Procedure for altering a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be altered.
2 Key in an address to be inserted.
3 Key in data.
4 Press the key.
Example of changing T15 to M15

1 Search for or scan T15.
T15 is searched for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.4 (a)
2 Key in M 1 5 .
3 Press the key.
T15 is changed to M15.
Fig. 10.2.4 (b)
10.2.5 Deleting a Word

Procedure for deleting a word
1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
Example of deleting X100.0

1 Search for or scan X100.0.
X100.0 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.2.5 (a)
- 485 -
2 Press the key.
X100.0 is deleted.
Fig. 10.2.5 (b)
10.3 DELETING BLOCKS

A block or blocks can be deleted in a program.
10.3.1 Deleting a Block

The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the
word next to the deleted EOB.
Procedure for deleting a block

1 Search for or scan address N for a block to be deleted.
2 Press the key.
3 Press the editing key .
Example of deleting a block of N01234

1 Search for or scan N01234.
N01234 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.3.1 (a)
2 Press the key.
Block containing N01234

has been deleted.
Fig. 10.3.1 (b)
10.3.2 Deleting Multiple Blocks

The several blocks in the forward direction from the current word position up to the EOB of the farthest
of those blocks are deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB.
- 486 -
Procedure for deleting blocks

1 Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted.
2 Press the key as many times as the number of blocks that you want to delete.
Example of deleting blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks
ahead
1 Search for or scan N01234.
N01234 is searched
for/scanned.
Fig. 10.3.2 (a)
2 Press .

Blocks from N01234 to
the EOB of a block
which is two blocks
ahead are deleted.
Fig. 10.3.2 (b)
10.4 PROGRAM SEARCH

When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are four methods as
follows.
Procedure for program search

Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.
2 Press function key to display the program screen.
3 Enter a program number or program name. When entering a program number, press
address key then type the program number.
4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or
.
5 Upon completion of search operation, the program number searched for is displayed in
the upper-right corner of the screen
If the program is not found, alarm PS0071 occurs.
Method 2 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.

3 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH].
- 487 -
4 Then, press soft key [PREV PROGRM] or [NEXT PROGRM].

Pressing [PREV PROGRM] searches for the previous program on the folder, and pressing
[NEXT PROGRM] searches for the next program.
Method 3 This method searches for the program number (0001 to 0031) corresponding to a signal
on the machine tool side to start automatic operation. Refer to the relevant manual
prepared by the machine tool builder for detailed information on operation.
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Set the reset state.
• The reset state is the state where the LED for indicating that automatic operation is in
progress is off. (Refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.)
3 Set the program number selection signal on the machine tool side to a number from 01 to
31.
4 Press the cycle start button.
• When the signal on the machine tool side represents 00, program number search
operation is not performed.
• If the program corresponding to a signal on the machine tool side is not registered,
alarm DS0059 is raised.
Method 4 When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, search for an O number program by
specifying digits only.
1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode.
3 Enter the digits of a program number. Address key need not be pressed before the
digits.
4 Press soft key [PROGRM SEARCH]. Alternatively, press the cursor key or
Example
• When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1
Specify "1000" → Search for program O1000.
Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC.
• When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 0
Specify "1000" → Search for program 1000.
Specify "ABC" → Search for program ABC.
When bit 4 (PGS) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, it is not possible to search for a program
with any name consisting of digits only.
10.5 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a
program so that execution can be started or restarted at the block of the sequence number.
Example) Sequence number 02346 in a program (O0002) is searched for.
- 488 -
PROGRAM
O0001 ;
N01234 X100.0 Y100.0 ;
S12 ;
:
Selected program O0002 ;
This section is searched
N02345 X20.0 Y20.0 ;
starting at the beginning.
N02346 X10.0 Y10.0 ;
Target sequence (Search operation is
:
number is found. performed only within a
O0003 ;
program.)
:
Fig. 10.5 (a)
Procedure for sequence number search

Procedure
1 Select MEMORY mode.
2 Press function key .
3 If the program contains a sequence number to be searched for, perform the operations 4 to 7 below.
If the program does not contain a sequence number to be searched for, select the program number of
the program that contains the sequence number to be searched for.
4 Press address key .
5 Key in a sequence number to be searched for.
6 Press soft key [N SRH].
7 Upon completion of search operation, the sequence number searched for is displayed in the
upper-right corner of the screen.
If the specified sequence number is not found in the program currently selected, alarm PS0060
occurs.
Explanation
- Operation during Search
Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such
as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values.
So, in the first block where execution is to be started or restarted by using a sequence number search
command, be sure to enter required M, S, and T codes and coordinates. A block searched for by sequence
number search usually represents a point of shifting from one process to another. When a block in the
middle of a process must be searched for to restart execution at the block, specify M, S, and T codes, G
codes, coordinates, and so forth as required from the MDI after closely checking the machine tool and NC
states at that point.
- Checking during search

During search operation, the following checks are made:
• Optional block skip
Limitation
- Searching in sub-program
During sequence number search operation, M98Pxxxx (subprogram call) is not executed. So an alarm
PS0060 is raised if an attempt is made to search for a sequence number in a subprogram called by the
program currently selected.
- 489 -

O1234 O5678
: :
: N88888
M98 P5678 ; :
: M99 ;
: :
If an attempt is made to search for N8888 in the example above, an alarm occurs.
Fig. 10.5 (b)
10.6 DELETING PROGRAMS

Programs registered in memory can be deleted, either one program by one program or all at once.
10.6.1 Deleting One Program

A single program in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted.
Procedure for deleting one program

1 Select the EDIT mode.

4 Key in a desired program number.
5 Press the editing key . The program with the entered program number is deleted.
10.6.2 Deleting All Programs

All programs in the folder containing the program currently being edited can be deleted.
Procedure for deleting all programs

1 Select the EDIT mode.

4 Key in -9999.
5 Press editing key to delete all programs.
- 490 -
10.7 COPYING/MOVING PROGRAMS

An entire program or a part of a program can be copied or moved.
10.7.1 Copying a Part of a Program

A part of a program being displayed can be copied and pasted to another area.
Before copy After copy
Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy
A A
B B B
C C
Fig. 10.7.1 (a) Copying a part of a program
In Fig. 10.7.1 (a), program B of program number xxxx is copied and pasted into the program of program
number yyyy. The program of program number xxxx remains unchanged before and after the copy
operation.
Procedure for copying a part of a program

1. Move the cursor to a desired copy start position.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE]
2. Press soft key [SELECT].
3. When the cursor is moved, the range from the copy start position
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] to the current cursor position is selected and displayed in the
same color as the cursor color.
To cancel the selection, press soft key [CANCEL].
4. Press soft key [COPY]. The selected program range is stored in
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] the copy buffer.
If the size of the selected program range exceeds the capacity of
the copy buffer, the selection is terminated with the warning
message "EXCEED THE CAPACITY OF COPY BUFFER".
If soft key [COPY] is pressed with no program range selected,
the warning message "WORDS ARE NOT SELECTED" is
displayed and the copy buffer is cleared. If the program size of
the selected range exceeds the upper limit of the copy buffer, the
warning message "EXCEED THE CAPACITY OF COPY
BUFFER" is displayed. The selected range is not released.
5. Search for a paste target program.
6. Move the cursor to the desired paste position.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 7. Press soft key [PASTE] then press soft key [BUF-EX]. The
contents copied in step 4 are pasted after the cursor. If [BUF-EX]
is pressed when the copy buffer is empty, the warning message
[BUF-EX] [SPCPRG] [ ][ ][ ] "COPY BUFFER IS EMPTY" is displayed.
- 491 -
Example 1) A part of O0001 is copied to O0002.

1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired copy start
position. (<1>)
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 2. Press soft key [SELECT].
to the current cursor position is selected and displayed in the
same color as the cursor color. (<3>)
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE]
the copy buffer.
5. Search for O0002 then move the cursor to the position where the
contents copied from O0001 are to be inserted. (<5>)
6. Press soft key [PASTE] then press soft key [BUF-EX]. The
][ ]
contents copied from O0001 are pasted after the cursor. (<6>)
[BUF-EX] [SPCPRG] [ ][
<1> [SELECT] <3>
O0001 ; + O0001 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ; Move cursor. G00 X0 Y0 ;

G01 X100.0 F100 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
M30 ;
<5> <6>
O0002 ; O0002 ;
[PASTE]
N1 G92 X0 Y0; N1 G92 X0 Y0;
+
N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ; N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ;
N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ; N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ;
: Cursor & selection range : Paste range
For convenience of explanation, the cursor of <6> is placed at the same position as for <5>.
Actually, the cursor moves to the last word of pasted contents.
- 492 -
Example 2) A part of O0001 is copied to create O0003 newly.
1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired copy start
position. (<1>)
same color as the cursor color. (<3>)
the copy buffer.
5. Key in "O0003" then press editing key to create the new

program O0003. (<5>)
contents copied from O0001 are pasted. (<6>)
[BUF-EX] [SPCPRG] [ ][ ][ ]
<1> <3>
[SELECT]
O0001 ; + O0001 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ; Move cursor. G00 X0 Y0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ; Y-100.0 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
[PASTE]
<5> <6>
+
O0003 [BUF-EX] O0003 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
- 493 -
10.7.2 Moving a Part of a Program

A part of a program being displayed can be cut and pasted to another area.
Before move After move

A
A
B B
C
C
Fig. 10.7.2 (a) Moving a part of a program
In Fig. 10.7.2 (a), program B of program number xxxx is cut and pasted into the program of program
number yyyy.
Procedure for moving a part of a program

1. Move the cursor to a desired cut start position.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 2. Press soft key [SELECT].
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 3. When the cursor is moved, the range from the cut start position
4. Press soft key [CUT]. The selected program range is stored in the
copy buffer. At the same time, the selected program range is cut.
After the cutting, the cursor moves to before the cut range.
If soft key [CUT] is pressed with no program range selected, the
warning message "WORDS ARE NOT SELECTED" is
displayed and the copy buffer is cleared.
If the program size of the selected range exceeds the upper limit
of the copy buffer, the warning message "EXCEED THE
CAPACITY OF COPY BUFFER" is displayed. The selected
range is not released. In this case, no cut operation is performed.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 7. Press soft key [PASTE] then press soft key [BUF-EX]. The
program range cut in step 4 is pasted after the cursor. If
[BUF-EX] is pressed when the copy buffer is empty, the warning
[BUF-EX] [SPCPRG] [ ][ ][ ] message "COPY BUFFER IS EMPTY" is displayed.
- 494 -
Example 1) A part of O0001 is moved to O0002.
1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired cut start
position. (<1>)
3. When the cursor is moved, the range from the cut start position
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] same color as the cursor color. (<3>)
4. Press soft key [CUT]. The selected program range is cut. (<4>)
5. Search for O0002 then move the cursor to the position where the
contents cut from O0001 are to be inserted. (<5>)
contents cut from O0001 are pasted after the cursor. (<6>)
<1> [SELECT] <3> <4>

+
O0001 ; Move O0001 ; O0001 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ; [CUT]
cursor. Y-100.0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ; M30 ;
Y-100.0 ; Y-100.0 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
<5> <6>
[PASTE]
O0002 ; + O0002 ;
N1 G92 X0 Y0; [BUF-EX] N1 G92 X0 Y0;
N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ; N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ;
N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ; N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ;
- 495 -
Example 2) A part of O0001 is cut to create O0003 newly.

1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired cut start
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] position. (<1>)
[CANCEL] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] same color as the cursor color. (<3>)
4. Press soft key [CUT]. The selected program range is cut. (<4>)
5. Key in "O0003" then press editing key to create the new

program O0003. (<5>)
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [PASTE]
[CUT]
contents cut from O0001 are pasted. (<6>)
<1> <3> <4>

[SELECT]
+
O0001 ; Move O0001 ; O0001 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ; cursor. G00 X0 Y0 ; [CUT] Y-100.0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ; M30 ;
Y-100.0 ; Y-100.0 ;
M30 ; M30 ;
<5> [PASTE] <6>

+
O0003 [BUF-EX] O0003 G00 X0 Y0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
- 496 -
10.7.3 Copying an Entire Program

An entire program can be copied and pasted to another area.
Before copy After copy

A A A
Insertion
position
Fig. 10.7.3 (a)
In Fig. 10.7.3 (a), the program of program number xxxx is inserted into the program of program number
yyyy. The program of program number xxxx remains unchanged before and after the insertion.
Procedure for copying an entire program

1. Display a program to be copied.
2. Press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire program except its O
number is selected and displayed in the same color as the cursor
color.
3. Press soft key [COPY]. The entire program is stored in the copy
buffer.
If soft key [COPY] is pressed with no program range selected,
the warning message "WORDS ARE NOT SELECTED" is
BUFFER" is displayed. The selected range is not released.
contents copied in step 3 are pasted after the cursor. If [BUF-EX]
is pressed when the copy buffer is empty, the warning message
"COPY BUFFER IS EMPTY" is displayed.
- 497 -
Example) O0001 is copied and pasted to O0002.

1. Display O0001 then press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] program is selected and highlighted in the same color as the
cursor color. (<1>)
2. Press soft key [COPY].
3. Display O0002 then move the cursor to the desired O0001

insertion position. (<3>)
4. Press soft key [PASTE] then press soft key [BUF-EX]. O0001 is
pasted after the cursor. (<4>)
<1>
O0001 ;
G00 X0 Y0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
<3> <4>
O0002 ; O0002 ;
N1 G92 X0 Y0; [PASTE] N1 G92 X0 Y0;
N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ; + N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ;
N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ; [BUF-EX] N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ;
- 498 -
10.7.4 Moving an Entire Program

An entire program can be cut and pasted to another area.
Before move After move

A A A
Insertion
position
Fig. 10.7.4 (a)
In Fig. 10.7.4 (a), the program of program number xxxx is inserted into the program of program number
yyyy. The contents of the program of program number xxxx are deleted. However, the deleted program
remains as an empty program.
Procedure for moving an entire program

1. Display a program to be cut.
2. Press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire program except its O
number is selected and displayed in the same color as the cursor
color.
3. Press soft key [CUT]. The entire program is stored in the copy
buffer. At the same time, the contents of the program are cut.
If soft key [CUT] is pressed with no program range selected, the
BUFFER" is displayed. The selected range is not released. In
this case, no cut operation is performed.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] 5. Move the cursor to the desired paste position.
program cut in step 3 is pasted after the cursor. If [BUF-EX] is
pressed when the copy buffer is empty, the warning message
"COPY BUFFER IS EMPTY" is displayed.
- 499 -
Example) O0001 is cut and pasted to O0002.

1. Display O0001 then press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] program is selected and highlighted in the same color as the
cursor color. (<1>)
2. Press soft key [CUT].
3. Display O0002 then move the cursor to the desired O0001

insertion position. (<3>)
4. Press soft key [PASTE] then press soft key [BUF-EX]. O0001 is
pasted after the cursor. (<4>)
<1>
O0001 ; O0001
G00 X0 Y0 ; [CUT]
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
<3> <4>
O0002 ; O0002 ;
N1 G92 X0 Y0; [PASTE] N1 G92 X0 Y0;
N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ; + N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ;
N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ; [BUF-EX] N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ;
- 500 -
10.7.5 Copy Specifying a Program Number

An entire program can be copied to the current cursor position by specifying its program number.
With this function, an entire program can be copied easily.
Even when the size of a program exceeds the capacity of the copy buffer, the entire program can be
copied.
Procedure for copying a program by specifying its program number

1. Display a paste target program then move the cursor immediately
before the desired paste position.
2. Press soft key [PASTE] then key in the program number of a
program to be pasted. Next, press [SPCPRG]. The program of the
[BUF-EX] [SPCPRG] [ ][ ][ ] program number keyed in is pasted after the cursor. When
[SPCPRG] is pressed with no program number selected, the
warning message "PROGRAM IS NOT SPECIFIED" is
displayed.
Example) O0001 is copied and pasted to O0002.

1. Search for O0002 then move the cursor to the desired O0001
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] insertion position. (<1>)
2. Press soft key [PASTE] then key in "O0001". Next, press
[SPCPRG]. O0001 is pasted after the cursor. (<2>)
O0001 G00 X0 Y0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
Y-100.0 ;
M30 ;
<1> <2>
“O0001”
O0002 ; + O0002 ;
N1 G92 X0 Y0; [SPCPRG] N1 G92 X0 Y0;
N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ; N2 G91 G17 G00 Y4.0 ;
N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ; N3 G01 Y25.0 F120 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ; G00 X0 Y0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ; G01 X100.0 F100 ; Copied from
Y-100.0 ; O0001
M30 ;
N4 G03 X20.0 R20.0 ;
N5 G01 X25.0 ;
- 501 -
10.7.6 Copying/Moving to the Key-in Buffer

The copy/move destination of a selected word is changed from the copy buffer to the key-in buffer. With
this function, the user can perform editing while checking contents to be copied/moved.
Procedure: Copying to the key-in buffer

1. Set bit 2 of parameter No. 3205 to 1.
2. Display a desired program.
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE］
[SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] same color as the cursor color.
5. If soft key [COPY] is pressed with no range selected, the
displayed and the copy buffer is cleared. Press soft key [COPY]
[KEYIN] [COPYBUF][ ][ ][ ]
then press soft key [KEYIN]. The selected word range is input to
the key-in buffer.
NOTE
1 When performing a normal copy operation, press soft key [COPY] then press
[COPYBUF].
2 Up to 127 characters can be copied. If [KEYIN] is pressed when more than 127
characters are selected, the warning message "EXCEED THE CAPACITY OF
KEYIN BUFFER" is displayed.
Procedure: Moving to the key-in buffer

1. Set bit 2 of parameter No. 3205 to 1.
2. Display a desired program.
5. Press soft key [CUT] then press soft key [KEYIN]. The selected
word range is input to the key-in buffer.
[KEYIN] [COPYBUF][ ][ ][ ]
NOTE
1 When performing a normal move operation, press soft key [CUT] then press
[COPYBUF].
2 Up to 127 characters can be moved. If [KEYIN] is pressed when more than 127
characters are selected, the warning message "EXCEED THE CAPACITY OF
KEYIN BUFFER" is displayed.
- 502 -
10.8 REPLACING
A string in a program is replaced with a specified string.
Procedure for replacing

1. Enter the EDIT mode or MDI mode (MDI screen).
2. Press the function key .
3. Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
4. Press the continuous menu key until soft key [REP]
[ REP ][ ] [ ][ ][ ] appears.
5. Press the soft key [REP].
6. Key in the word to be replaced.
[BEFORE] [ ][ ]
] [ ][
7. Press the soft key [BEFORE].
8. Key in the replacing word.
9. Press the soft key [AFTER]. The word set by soft key
[BEFORE] is searched for and the cursor moves to the word.
[ ] [ AFTER] [ ] [ ][ ]
• If the word set by soft key [BEFORE] is not found, the
warning message "THE STRING IS NOT FOUND" is
displayed.
10. Press soft key [EX-SGL] or [ALL] to replace the string. To
move the cursor to the next string without replacing the string,
press [SKIP].
• If soft key [SKIP] is pressed, the word at the cursor position
[ ][ ] [ SKIP ] [EX-SGL] [ ALL ]
is not replaced and the next word is searched for. If no
word is found at the current cursor position and later, the
cursor moves to the end of the program and the warning
message "THE STRING IS NOT FOUND" is displayed.
[ ][ ] [ SKIP ] [EX-SGL] [ ALL ]
• If soft key [EX-SGL] is pressed, the word at the cursor
position is replaced. Then, a search in the forward
direction is made and the cursor moves. If no word is
found at the current cursor position and later, the cursor
[ ][ ] [ SKIP ] [EX-SGL] [ ALL ] moves to the end of the program and the warning message
"THE STRING IS NOT FOUND" is displayed.
• If soft key [ALL] is pressed, all words that are present at the
[ ][ ] [ SKIP ] [EX-SGL] [ ALL ] current cursor position and later are replaced.
11. To finish the replacement, press soft key .
10.9 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS

Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing
units.
Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form.
Comments can be entered in a program.
Refer to the III-9.1 for the comments of a program.
Explanation
- Editing unit
When editing a custom macro already entered, the user can move the cursor to each editing unit that starts
with any of the following characters and symbols:
- 503 -
(a) Address
(b) # located at the start of the left side of a substitution statement
(c) /, (,=, and ;
(d) First character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, POPEN, BPRNT, DPRNT and PCLOS
On the screen, a blank is placed before each of the above characters and symbols.
Example) Head positions where the cursor is placed
N001 X-#100 ;
#1 =123 ;
N002 /2 X[12/#3] ;
N003 X-SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]] ;
N004 X-#2 Z#1 ;
N005 #5 =1+2-#10 ;
IF[#1NE0] GOTO10 ;
WHILE[#2LE5] DO1 ;
#[200+#2] =#2*10 ;
#2 =#2+1 ;
END1 ;
- Abbreviations of custom macro word

When a custom macro word is altered or inserted, the first two characters or more can replace the entire
word.
Namely,
WHILE → WH GOTO → GO XOR → XO AND → AN SIN → SI ASIN → AS
COS → CO ACOS → AC TAN → TA ATAN → AT SQRT → SQ ABS → AB
BCD → BC BIN → BI FIX → FI FUP → FU ROUND → RO END → EN
POPEN → PO BPRNT → BP DPRNT → DP PCLOS → PC EXP → EX THEN → TH
Example) Keying in
WH [AB [#2 ] LE RO [#3 ] ] has the same effect as
WHILE [ABS [#2 ] LE ROUND [#3 ] ]
The program is also displayed in this way.
10.10 PASSWORD FUNCTION

The password function locks bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, which protects programs with program
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute, according to the
settings in two parameters, PASSWORD (parameter No. 3210) and KEYWD (parameter No. 3211). In
the locked state, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this case, the protection of programs with program
Nos. O9000 to O9999 and programs and folders having the edit/display disable attribute cannot be
released unless a correct keyword is set.
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs from the value set in the
parameter KEYWD. The values set in these parameters are not displayed. The locked state is released
when the value already set in the parameter PASSWD is also set in parameter KEYWD. When 0 is
displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD is not set.
Procedure for locking and unlocking

Locking
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter writing (III-12.3.1). At this time, alarm PS0100 is issued on the CNC.
3 Set parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD). At this time, the locked state is set.
4 Disable parameter writing.
5 Press the key to release the alarm state.
- 504 -
Unlocking
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Enable parameter writing (III-12.3.1). At this time, alarm SW0100 is issued on the CNC.
3 In parameter No. 3211 (KEYWD), set the same value as set in parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) for
locking. At this time, the locked state is released.
4 Set bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No.3202 to 0.
5 Disable parameter writing.
6 Press the key to release the alarm state.
7 Subprograms from program Nos. 9000 to 9999 can now be edited.
Explanation
- Setting parameter PASSWD
The locked state is set when a value is set in the parameter PASSWD. However, note that parameter
PASSWD can be set only when the locked state is not set (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD = KEYWD).
If an attempt is made to set parameter PASSWD in other cases, a warning is given to indicate that writing
is disabled. When the locked state is set (when PASSWD ≠ 0 and PASSWD ≠ KEYWD), parameter NE9
is automatically set to 1. If an attempt is made to set NE9 to 0, a warning is given to indicate that writing
is disabled.
- Changing parameter PASSWD

Parameter PASSWD can be changed when the locked state is released (when PASSWD = 0, or PASSWD
= KEYWD). After step 3 in the procedure for unlocking, a new value can be set in the parameter
PASSWD. From that time on, this new value must be set in parameter KEYWD to release the locked
state.
- Setting 0 in parameter PASSWD

When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, and the password function is
disabled. In other words, the password function can be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD
at all, or by setting 0 in parameter PASSWD after step 3 of the procedure for unlocking. To ensure that
the locked state is not entered, care must be taken not to set a value other than 0 in parameter PASSWD.
- Re-locking
After the locked state has been released, it can be set again by setting a different value in parameter
PASSWD, or by turning the power to the NC off then on again to reset parameter KEYWD.
CAUTION
Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0 and parameter
PASSWD cannot be changed until the locked state is released or the memory
all-clear operation is performed. Special care must be taken in setting parameter
PASSWD.
10.11 COMPACT-TYPE MDI KEY INPUT

Use of this function allows the user to enter characters such as "@", "(", and ")" by using soft keys when
the compact-type MDI unit is used.
Procedure of compact-type MDI key input

Procedure
1. Select the EDIT mode.
- 505 -
2. Press function key .

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press continuous menu key several times to display soft key
[CHA-EXT].
4. Press soft key [CHA-EXT].
5. As shown in Fig. 10.11 (a), characters such as "@" and "(" appear as soft keys.
Fig. 10.11 (a) Compact-type MDI key input
6. When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in
buffer.
Explanation
- Usable characters
The following characters can be entered using soft keys:
Table 10.11 (a) Characters that can be entered using soft keys
( ) ? * &
@ _ < > \
% $ ! ~ :
" ‘ AB/ab(*)
* This soft key causes the input mode of alphabetical characters to alternate between the uppercase
input mode and the lowercase input mode.
The character before the key-in buffer changes to "A" or "a" depending on the input mode.
- Setting that inputting < > \ % $ ! ~ : " ' AB/ab become effective
Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and lowercase input
modes by a soft key are enabled by setting 1 in bit 4 (SI1) of parameter No.13115.
- 506 -
<>\%$!~:"'
- Setting that inputting ( ) ? * & @ _ AB/ab become effective

Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and lowercase input
modes by a soft key are enabled by setting 1 in bit 5 (SI2) of parameter No.13115.
()?*&@_
- 507 -
11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64554EN/01
11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
Program management functions are classified into the following two types:
• Functions for devices
• Functions for programs
The functions for devices include selection and so on.

The functions for programs include main program selection, deletion, change of names and attributes,
program compaction, and so on.
Creation and registration
Editing
Management
Selecting a device ..............................See III-11.1.

Management of
devices
Deleting a program ............................ See III-11.2.

Program Changing program attributes.............. See III-11.3.
management Selecting a main program .................. See III-11.4.
Making a program compact................ See III-11.5.
Output Execution
11.1 SELECTING A DEVICE

When the fast data server function (option) is provided, a program storage device can be selected. This
section explains the selection procedure.
Procedure for selecting a device

3 Press the operation selection soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Hold down the continuous menu key until the soft key [DEVICECHANGE] (or [DEVICE]
when an 8.4-inch display unit is used) is displayed.
- 508 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
5 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE].
6 Press the soft key for the desired device.
11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device

Overview
By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device,
memory operation can be performed with the program in the program storage file selected as the main
program.
In addition, the content of a program storage file can be displayed on the program list screen or a program
in a program storage file can be edited on the program edit screen.
A program storage file can be created using a memory card program tool (A08B-9010-J700#ZZ11) on a
commercially available personal computer. To be used, the program storage file must be written to a
memory card formatted in FAT16 format.
(A program held in a program storage file is hereinafter referred to as a memory card program. Moreover,
a memory card storing a program storage file is referred to as a program storage memory card.)

6 Press the soft key [MEMCARD].
NOTE
A FAT16-formatted memory card containing the program storage file
FANUCPRG.BIN is recognized as a program storage memory card.
Procedure for removing a device

When a program storage memory card is replaced or a memory card is used for normal usage such as data
input/output, clear the recognition of the program storage memory card with removal operation.

6 Hold down the continuous menu key until the soft key [UMOUNT] is displayed.
7 Press the soft key [DETACH].
- 509 -
NOTE
1 The soft key [UMOUNT] is displayed after the device selected by the CNC is
recognized as a "program storage memory card" as the result of device change
operation.
2 This operation is enabled only in EDIT mode or MEM mode.
3 When the default folder is a folder in a program storage file stored on the
memory card, it is changed to "//CNC_MEM/" by a removal operation.
4 When the main program is a memory card program, the main program enters
the unselected state by a removal operation.
Explanation
- About operation
A memory card program can be selected as a main program to perform memory operation.
Memory operation has the following features:
• Subprogram call nesting is allowed.
• Macro program call nesting is allowed.
• In a custom macro, a control command using a GOTO statement/WHILE statement can be specified.
- Selection as a main program

As a main program to be automatically executed in the memory mode, a memory card program can be
selected.
However, information of having selected the memory card program as the main program is lost with the
power disconnection. (If the power disconnection and re-turning on is performed from the state of above
information, the selections are as follows.)
- The device selection is CNC_MEM.
- The main program selection is none.
- Sub program (call using M98)

- Macro program (call using G65/G66/M96)
The following subprogram/macro program is called:
• Sub program call (M98)
• Macro call (Simple macro call G65 / Modal call G66)
• Macro interrupt (M96)
- Sub program (call using M code/T code/particular address)

- Macro program (call using G code/M code)
The following subprogram/macro program calls a program from the CNC_MEM device (CNC program
storage memory):
• Subprogram call using M code/T code/particular addresses
• Macro call using G code/M code
NOTE
For a memory card program, subprogram call using M code/T code/particular
addresses or macro call using G code/M code can be specified. However, a
program on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory) is called.
- External program number search / External workpiece number search

A program on a program storage memory card can be searched for with the external program number
search function or external workpiece number search function.
- 510 -
- Main program search

The current main program is searched for. The found main program is displayed at the top of the list. The
cursor is placed on the main program.
1 Press the soft key [PROGRMSEARCH].

2 Press the soft key [MAIN SRCH].
NOTE
If a program on another device is set as the main program, executing a main
program search causes automatic switching to the device.
Limitation
For a memory card program, M198 cannot be specified. Moreover, no memory card program can be
called from a program on the CNC_MEM device (CNC program storage memory) by specifying M198.
When a setting is made to enable an external device subprogram call from a memory card (M198) or
DNC operation from a memory card (bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 0138 = 1), the content of program
storage file cannot be displayed during automatic operation.
When a program storage memory card is selected, the memory card cannot be used for the ordinary
purposes listed below. To use a memory card in such a case, perform a "removal" operation to cancel the
recognition of the program storage memory card.
• ALL I/O screen
Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output data to and from a memory card
• PMC data I/O screen
Display of the contents of a memory card, and input/output to and from a memory card
• Program directory screen
Input/output program data to and from a memory card
• External device subprogram call (M198) operation
Subprogram call (M198) with a memory card set as an external device
• DNC operation
DNC operation from a memory card
CAUTION
1 Do not remove the memory card when a program that specifies a write to the
memory card is being edited. The data can be destructed.
2 If an editing operation is completed, the results of editing are preserved even
when the power to the CNC is turned off.
3 When removing the memory card, be sure to perform a "removal" operation. If the
memory card is removed without performing a "removal" operation and an
attempt is made to access the memory card, the alarm (SR1964) or alarm
(IO1030) is issued.
If the card is removed inadvertently, insert the card again and perform a "removal"
operation.
When an alarm is issued, perform the following operation:
- When the alarm (SR1964) is issued
Reset the alarm after performing a "removal" operation.
- When the alarm (IO1030) is issued
The alarm can be reset only by turning off the power to the CNC.
- 511 -
CAUTION
4 There are cases in which when a memory card is replaced with another, the CNC
cannot detect the replacement. Thus, it is risky to replace a memory card without
performing a "removal" operation, and this should never be attempted.
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program

When “memory card program as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of
a program is below (Table 11.1.1 (a)):
Table 11.1.1 (a)

Item Usable
Creation of a program Unusable
Edition prohibition attribute Unusable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Usable
Deletion of a block Usable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Usable
Deletion of a program Unusable
Editing a custom macro Usable
Password function Unusable
Selecting a device Usable
Selecting a main program Usable
Making a program compact Unusable
Input/output of program Unusable
11.1.2 Selecting a From Cassette as a Device

The Handy File can be connected to the NC to display a list of programs in a floppy cassette.

1 Set the relevant parameters so that communication with the Handy File is enabled.
7 Press the soft key [FLOPPY].
Limitation
- Floppy disk directory display during schedule operation
During schedule operation, directories in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit.
- Operation of creation, edition, and management of a program

When “floppy cassette as a device” is selected, operation of creation, edition, and management of a
program is below (Table 11.1.2 (a)):
Table 11.1.2 (a)
Item Usable
Creation of a program Unusable
Edition prohibition attribute Unusable
Inserting, alteration, and deletion a Word Unusable
- 512 -
Item Usable
Deletion of a block Unusable
Program search Usable
Sequence number search Unusable
Deletion of a program Usable
Editing a custom macro Unusable
Password function Unusable
Selecting a device Usable
Selecting a main program Unusable
Making a program compact Unusable
Input/output of program Usable
11.2 DELETING A PROGRAM

This section explains the procedure for deleting a program.
Procedure for deleting a file

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Key in the program number of a program to be deleted.
(Press the address key O then key in a desired program number.)
5 Press the edit key .
When the 8-level data protection function is used, the cursor appears on the program list.
In this case, select a program not with step 4 above but with the cursor key or .
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot
sometimes be deleted.
2 The 8-level data protection function is optional.
11.3 CHANGING PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES

This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a program (edit disable, edit/display
disable, or protection of data at eight levels).
Procedure for selecting the attribute of a program

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Press the soft key [DIR+] to display a detailed program list. (Each time the soft key [DIR+] is
pressed, the program list display switches between detailed display and normal display.)
5 Select the program of which attribute is to be changed.
Move the cursor with the cursor key or to a program whose attribute is to be changed.
- 513 -
7 Press the soft key ['CHANGEATTRIB] (or [ATTRIB] when an 8.4-inch display unit is used).
8 Press the continuous menu key until the desired soft key (step 8 below) appears.
9 • To disable editing, press the soft key [EDIT DISABL] (or [EDT OFF] when an 8.4-inch display
unit is used).
• To enable editing, press the soft key [EDIT ENABLE] (or [EDT ON] when an 8.4-inch display
unit is used).
• To disable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP DISABL] (or [DSP OFF] when an
8.4-inch display unit is used).
• To enable editing and display, press the soft key [DISP ENABLE] (or [DSP ON] when an
8.4-inch display unit is used).
• To change the change protection level, type a change protection level, then press the soft key
[CHANGELEVEL] (or [CHG LEV] when an 8.4-inch display unit is used).
• To change the output protection level, type an output protection level, then press soft key [OUT
LEVEL] (or [OUT LEV] when an 8.4-inch display unit is used).
10 Press the soft key [END].
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a file cannot
sometimes be deleted.
2 Depending on the settings of the following parameters, the settable items vary:
• Program protection (parameter No. 3210 and No. 3211)
• Eight-level data protection (Optional function)
11.4 SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM

This section explains the procedure for selecting a main program.
Procedure for selecting a main program

1 Select EDIT mode.
4 Key in the program number of a program to be selected as a main program.
5 Press the soft key [O SEARCH].
A selection can also be made by pressing the cursor key .
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the main program
cannot sometimes be selected.
11.5 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT

This section explains the procedure for making a program compact.
Procedure for making a program compact

1 Select EDIT mode.
- 514 -

4 Key in the program number of a program to be made compact.
5 Press the soft key [PROGRMCNDENS] (or [CONDENS] when an 8.4-inch display unit is used).
When the 8-level data protection function is used, the cursor appears on the program list.
In this case, select a program not with step 4 above but with the cursor key or .
NOTE
1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, a program cannot
sometimes be made compact.
2 Only programs on the CNC_MEM device can be made compact.
- 515 -
12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64554EN/01
12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator
can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation.
This chapter describes how to display and set data for each function.
Chapter 12, "SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA", consists of the following sections:
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................................................................526

12.6 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER, SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS,
AND WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION ....633
12.7 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ......636
Explanation
- Screen transition chart
The screen transition for when each function key on the MDI unit is pressed is shown below. The
subsections referenced for each screen are also shown. See the appropriate subsection for details of each
screen and the setting procedure on the screen. See other chapters for screens not described in this
chapter.
See Chapter 7 for the screen that appears when function key is pressed. In general, function key
or is prepared by the machine tool builder and used for macros. Refer to the manual issued
by the machine tool builder for the screen that appears when function key or is pressed.
- Data protection key

The machine may have a data protection key to protect part programs, tool compensation values, setting
data, and custom macro variables. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for where the
data protection key is located and how to use it.
- 516 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch

display unit)
（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
ABSOLU RELATI ALL HANDLE (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
TE VE
(8.4") ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Position Position Position Manual
display in display in display in handle
the the the interruption
workpiece workpiece workpiece ⇒ See III-4.6
coordinate coordinate coordinate
system system system
⇒ See III-12.1.1 ⇒ See III-12.1.1 ⇒ See III-12.1.1
Actual Actual Actual

feedrate feedrate feedrate
display display display
Display of Display of Display of

run time run time run time
and parts and parts and parts
count count count
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
MONITO (OPRT) +
Page 2 (10.4")
R
(8.4") MONI (OPRT) +
Ø
Operating
monitor
display
⇒ See III-12.1.7
- 517 -

display unit)
In the MEM/RMT mode

（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
PROGRA NEXT (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
M
(8.4") PROGRM CHECK CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Editing Program Current block Next block
programs check screen display display
⇒See III-10 ⇒See III-12.2.6 screen screen
⇒See III-12.2.7 ⇒See III-12.2.5
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
DIR (OPRT) +
Page 2 (10.4")
(8.4") DIR (OPRT) +
Ø
Program list
screen
⇒See III-12.2.4
In the MDI mode

（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
PROGRA MDI NEXT (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
M
(8.4") PROGRM MDI CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Editing Program Current block Next block
programs screen for display display
⇒See III-10 MDI operation screen screen
⇒See III-12.2.3 ⇒See III-12.2.7 ⇒See III-12.2.5
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
DIR (OPRT) +
Page 2 (10.4")
(8.4") DIR (OPRT) +
Ø
Program list
screen
⇒See III-12.2.4
- 518 -
In the EDIT mode

（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
PROGRA DIR C.A.P (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
M
(8.4") PROGRM DIR C.A.P (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Editing Program list Graphical
programs screen conversational
⇒See III-10 ⇒See III-12.2.4 programming
screen
⇒See III-12.2.8
In the JOG/HND/REF mode

（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
PROGRA NEXT (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
M
(8.4") PROGRM CURRENT NEXT (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Editing Current block Next block
programs display display
⇒See III-10 screen screen
⇒See III-12.2.7 ⇒See III-12.2.5
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
DIR (OPRT) +
Page 2 (10.4")
(8.4") DIR (OPRT) +
Ø
Program list
screen
⇒See III-12.2.4
- 519 -

display unit)
（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
OFFSET SETTIN WORK (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
G
(8.4") OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Setting and Displaying Displaying
displaying the and entering and setting
tool offset setting data the workpiece
value ⇒See III-12.3.2 origin offset
⇒See III-12.3.1 value
⇒See III-12.3.5
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
MACRO OPERAT (OPRT) +

Page 2 (10.4")
PANEL
(8.4") MACRO OPR (OPRT) +
Ø Ø
Displaying Displaying
and setting and setting
custom macro the software
common operator’s
variables panel
⇒See III-12.3.7 ⇒See III-12.3.8
（11）（12）（13）（14）（15）
TOOL MULTI SAFETY (OPRT) +

Page 3 (10.4")
REGIST TOOL ZONE
(8.4") TOOL M.TOOL SAFETY (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Displaying Displaying
and setting and setting and setting
items on the items on the items on the
tool tool safety zone
registration registration setting screen
screens screen for ⇒See III-12.3.13
⇒See III-12.3.11 multiple tools

⇒See III-12.3.12
- 520 -
（16）（17）（18）（19）（20）
LANGUA PROTEC GUARD (OPRT) +

Page 4 (10.4")
GE T
(8.4") LANG. PROT. GUARD (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Protection of Wrong
and switching data at eight operation
the display levels prevention
language ⇒See III-12.3.10 functions
⇒See III-12.3.9 ⇒See III-6.5
- 521 -

display unit)
（1）（2）（3）（4）（5）
PARAME DIAGNO SYSTEM (OPRT) +

Page 1 (10.4")
TER SIS
(8.4") PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Displaying Checking by System
and setting diagnostic configuration
parameters display screen
⇒See III-12.4.1 ⇒See III-7.3 ⇒See III-12.4.8
（6）（7）（8）（9）（10）
PTICH SERVO (OPRT) +

Page 2 (10.4")
ERROR SETING
(8.4") PITCH SV.SET (OPRT) +
Ø Ø
Displaying Servo setting
and setting ⇒See III-12.4.3
pitch error
compensation
data
⇒See III-12.4.2
（11）（12）（13）（14）（15）
WAVE ALL IO OPERAT (OPRT) +

Page 3 (10.4")
DIAG HISTRY
(8.4") W.DGNS ALL IO OPEHIS (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Waveform Input/output Overview of
diagnosis on the the history
display ALL/IO function
⇒Maintenance screen ⇒See III-12.4.9
manual ⇒See III-8.3
B-64305EN
- 522 -
（16）（17）（18）（19）（20）
PMC PMC PMC P.MATE (OPRT) +

Page 4 (10.4")
MAINTE LADDER CONFIG MGR
(8.4") PMCMNT PMCLAD PMCCNF PM.MGR (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
PMC Ladder PMC Power Mate
diagnosis and diagram configuration CNC manager
maintenance monitor and data setting functions
screens editor screens screens ⇒Maintenance
⇒Maintenance ⇒Maintenance manual
manual manual B-64305EN
B-64305EN B-64305EN ⇒PMC Ladder
⇒PMC Ladder ⇒PMC Ladder Language
Language Language Programming
Programming Programming manual
manual manual B-64393EN
B-64393EN B-64393EN
（21）（22）（23）（24）（25）
COLOR PERIOD MAINTE (OPRT) +

Page 5 (10.4")
MAINTE INFO
(8.4") COLOR MAINTE M-INFO (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø
Color setting Periodic Maintenance
screen maintenance information
⇒See III-12.4.5 screen screen
⇒See III-12.4.7 ⇒Maintenance
manual
B-64305EN
（26）（27）（28）（29）（30）
FSSB PARAME (OPRT) +

Page 6 (10.4")
TER
(8.4") FSSB PRMSET (OPRT) +
Ø Ø
FSSB display Parameter
and setting setting
screen support
⇒Maintenance screen
manual ⇒See III-12.4.6
B-64305EN
- 523 -
（31）（32）（33）（34）（35）
EMBED PCMCIA ETHNET FL-net (OPRT) +

Page 7 (10.4")
PORT LAN BOARD
(8.4") EMBED PCMCIA ETHBRD FL-net (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
Embedded Embedded Ethernet FL-net
Ethernet Ethernet functions functions
functions functions ⇒Fast ⇒FL-net Board
⇒Maintenance ⇒Maintenance Ethernet/Fast connection
manual manual Data Server manual
B-64305EN B-64305EN operator’s manual B-64453EN
B-64414EN
（36）（37）（38）（39）（40）
REMOTE (OPRT) +
Page 8 (10.4")
DIAG
(8.4") RMTDIAG (OPRT) +
Ø
Machine
remote
diagnosis
⇒Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data
Server operator’s
manual
B-64414EN
⇒Machine remote
diagnosis package
operator’s manual
B-63734EN
（41）（42）（43）（44）（45）
ID-INF MEMORY (OPRT) +

Page 9 (10.4")
(8.4") ID-INF MEMORY (OPRT) +
Ø
Displaying the
memory
contents
⇒Maintenance
manual
B-64305EN
- 524 -
（46）（47）（48）（49）（50）
PROFI PROFI DevNet DevNet (OPRT) +

Page 10 (10.4")
MASTER SLAVE MASTER SLAVE
(8.4") PROF.M PROF.S DNET.M DNET.S (OPRT) +
Ø Ø Ø Ø
PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP DeviceNet DeviceNet
master slave master slave
functions functions functions functions
⇒PROFIBUS-DP ⇒PROFIBUS-DP ⇒DeviceNet Board ⇒DeviceNet Board
Board connection Board connection connection manual connection manual
manual manual B-64443EN B-64443EN
B-64403EN B-64403EN
- 525 -
12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following
subsections:
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System...............................................................526

12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System...................................................................527
12.1.3 Overall Position Display..............................................................................................................529
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset .........................................................................................530
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display ..............................................................................................................531
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count.........................................................................................533
12.1.7 Operating Monitor Display..........................................................................................................534
Press function key to display the current position of the tool.

The following three screens are used to display the current position of the tool:
• Current position display screen for the workpiece coordinate system.
• Current position display screen for the relative coordinate system.
• Current overall position display screen.
The above screens can also display the feedrate, run time, and the number of parts.
Function key can also be used to display the load on the servo motor (operating monitor display).
Function key can also be used to display the screen for displaying the distance moved by handle
interruption. See Section III-4.6, “MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION” for details on this screen.
On any of the position display screens, the status (such as D, I, L, S, *, or M) of an axis is indicated on
the left of the axis name to prevent wrong operations. See III-6.5.2.3, "Axis status display" in III-6.5,
"WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS" for details.
12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System

Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system. The current position changes
as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top of
the screen indicates that absolute coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate
Procedure
2 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE].
3 Press soft key [ABSOLUTE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
- 526 -
Fig. 12.1.1 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Presetting the workpiece coordinate system
A workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual intervention or other operations can be preset by MDI
operation to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a workpiece origin offset from the machine
zero point before shifting.
For the procedure, see Subsection III-12.1.4, "Workpiece Coordinate System Preset".
- Display including compensation values

Bit 7 (DAC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values include cutter
compensation.
12.1.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System

Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system based on the coordinates (see
Explanation) set by the operator. The current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is
used as the unit for numeric values.
The title at the top of the screen indicates that relative coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen with the relative coordinate
system
Procedure
2 Press soft key [RELATIVE].
3 Press soft key [RELATIVE] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
- 527 -
Fig. 12.1.2 (a) Current position (relative) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates.
Explanation
- Setting the relative coordinates
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be reset to 0 or preset to a specified
value as follows:
Resetting relative coordinates to 0

Procedure
- When all axes are reset to 0
2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative coordinate screen.
4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
5 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].

At this time, the current position of all axes represented in relative coordinates are reset to 0.
- When a specified axis is reset to 0

4 Press soft key [ORIGIN].
5 Input the axis name with keys (the axis name blinks) and press soft key [EXEC].
- 528 -
At this time, the current position of the specified axis represented in relative coordinates are reset to
0.
Presetting relative coordinates

Procedure
4 Input the axis name. At this time, the axis name blinks.
5 Input the coordinates, and press soft key [PRESET].
At this time, the current position of all axes represented in relative coordinates are set to specified
value.
- Display including compensation values

Bit and 5 (DRC) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to select whether the displayed values include cutter
compensation.
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system

Bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 can be used to specify whether the position indication values in the
absolute coordinate system are preset as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.
If parameter bit PPD is set to 0, by setting bit 5 (PWR) of parameter No. 11277 to 1, it is possible to
preset the relative coordinates at power-on in the machine coordinate system.
12.1.3 Overall Position Display

Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate
system, relative coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance.
The relative coordinates can also be set on this screen. See Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative
Coordinate System” for the procedure.
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen

Procedure
2 Press soft key [ALL].
3 Press soft key [ALL] again. The sixth and subsequent axes are displayed.
- 529 -
Fig. 12.1.3 (a) Current position (overall) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time:
• Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
• Current position in the workpiece coordinate system (absolute coordinate)
• Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine coordinate)
• Distance to go (distance to go)
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEMORY or MDI mode.
The distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed.
- Machine coordinate system

The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in the machine coordinate system.
However, the least input increment can be used by setting bit 0 (MCN) of parameter No. 3104.
- Resetting the relative coordinates

The total position display screen also supports the resetting of the relative coordinates to 0 or presetting of
them to specified values. See the procedure for resetting the relative coordinates described in See
Subsection, “Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System”.
12.1.4 Workpiece Coordinate System Preset

If a workpiece coordinate system has been shifted with manual intervention or any other operation, an
MDI operation can be performed to preset the system to a workpiece coordinate system that is offset by a
workpiece origin offset, from the machine zero point that has been set before the shifting.
A command (G92.1) can be programmed to preset a workpiece coordinate system. (See II-7.2.4.)
- 530 -
Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset

Procedure
- When all axes are preset
2 Press chapter selection key [ABSOLUTE] to display the absolute coordinate screen.
4 Press soft key [WRK-CD].
5 Press soft key [ALL AXIS].
- When a specified axis is preset

2 Press chapter selection key [ABSOLUTE] to display the absolute coordinate screen.
4 Press soft key [WRK-CD].
5 Enter the name of the axis ( , , ...) to be preset with keys.

At this time, the axis name blinks.
6 Enter 0 with corresponding numeric key and press soft key [EXEC].
Explanation
- Operation mode
This function can be executed when the reset state or automatic operation stop state is entered, regardless
of the operation mode.
- Presetting relative coordinates

As with absolute coordinates, bit 3 (PPD) of parameter No. 3104 is used to specify whether to preset
relative coordinates (RELATIVE).
12.1.5 Actual Feedrate Display

If bit 0 (DPF) of parameter No. 3105 is set to 1, the actual machine feed per minute (actual feedrate) or
per revolution can be indicated on the current position display screen (and the program check screen for
the 8.4-inch display unit).
Display procedure for the actual feedrate on the current position display screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. At the location indicated
by , an actual feedrate is displayed.
- 531 -
The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least
input increment) under the display of the current position.
Explanation
- Actual feedrate value
The actual rate is calculated by the following expression:
n n : Number of axes
Fact＝ ∑ (fi) 2
fi : Cutting feed rate in the tangential direction of each axis or rapid traverse rate
i =1 Fact : Actual feedrate displayed
The display unit:
mm/min (metric input).
inch/min (Inch input)
- Actual feedrate display of rotary axis

In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of deg/min but is displayed on the
screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/min, the
following is displayed: 50 mm/min (in metric input) or 0.50 inch/min (in inch input).
- Actual feedrate display on the other screen

For the 8.4-inch display unit, the actual feedrate is also displayed on the program check screen.
- Displaying the number of decimal places

For actual feedrate display, the number of decimal places is indicated as described below depending on
the setting of parameter No. 3135 and the input unit.
Table 12.1.5 (a) Displaying the number of decimal places

Parameter No.3135 Metric input INI(No.0#2)=0 Inch input INI(No.0#2)=1
0 With no decimal point Two digits to the right of the decimal point
1 One digit to the right of the decimal point Three digits to the right of the decimal point
2 Two digits to the right of the decimal point Four digits to the right of the decimal point
3 Three digits to the right of the decimal point Five digits to the right of the decimal point
- 532 -
12.1.6 Display of Run Time and Parts Count

The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed on the current position display
screens.
Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display
screen
Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. "PARTS COUNT", "RUN
TIME", and "CYCLE TIME" are displayed in the area enclosed by .
Explanation
- PART COUNT
Indicates the number of machined parts. The number is incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
- Incrementing the number of machined parts

Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is used to specify whether the number of machined parts is
incremented each time M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed, or only
each time an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is
removed.
- Display on the other screen

Details of the run time and the number of machined parts are displayed on the setting screen. See
III-12.3.4, “Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time”.
- 533 -
- Parameter setting
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens.
The number of machined parts and run time cannot be set on current position display screens. They can
be set by parameters Nos. 6711, 6751, and 6752 or on the setting screen.
12.1.7 Operating Monitor Display

The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed.
To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor

Procedure
2 Press continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [MONITOR].
Fig. 12.1.7 (a) Operating monitor (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled axes of the path can be displayed.
One screen displays load meters for up to five axes at a time. By pressing the soft key [MONITOR], load
meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed.
- Unit of graph
The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200% (only a value is displayed for load exceeding
200%).
- Load meter
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086.
- 534 -
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple.
Section 12.2, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following
subsections:
12.2.1 Program Contents Display...........................................................................................................535

12.2.2 Editing a Program........................................................................................................................536
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation ............................................................................................538
12.2.4 Program List Screen ....................................................................................................................538
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen .........................................................................................................539
12.2.6 Program Check Screen ................................................................................................................540
12.2.7 Current Block Display Screen (Only for the 8.4-Inch Display Unit) ..........................................541
12.2.8 Graphical Conversational Programming Screen .........................................................................541
12.2.9 Background Editing.....................................................................................................................543
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key . The screens include a
program editing screen, program list display screen, and screens for displaying the command states of the
program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program list screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected, and display the block that is
currently executed during program operation. In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program,
and display the block that is currently executed.
12.2.1 Program Contents Display

Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY mode.
Displaying the program being executed

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM].
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
- 535 -
Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (full screen display) (10.4-inch)
For the 10.4-inch display unit, if soft key [PROGRAM] is pressed again to switch screen display to full
screen display or small screen display.
In small screen display, position display and modal display are allowed at the same time.
In full screen display, much information about a program can be displayed at a time.
Fig.12.2.1 (b) Screen for displaying the program being executed (small screen display) (10.4-inch)
12.2.2 Editing a Program

A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
A program can be edited on a word-by-word basis.
For program creation and editing operation, see Chapter III-9, “CREATING PROGRAMS” and Chapter
III-10, “EDITING PROGRAMS”.
- 536 -
Displaying the program editing screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM].
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are performed
on a word-by-word basis.
Fig. 12.2.2 (a) Program editing screen (quarter screen display) (10.4-inch)
For the 10.4-inch display unit, if soft key [PROGRAM] is pressed again during editing to switch screen
display to full screen display or small screen display.
In small screen display, position display and modal display are allowed at the same time.
In full screen display, much information about a program can be displayed at a time.
Fig. 12.2.2 (b) Program editing screen (small screen display) (10.4-inch)
- 537 -
12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation

During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently
being executed mode is displayed.
For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”.
Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation

Procedure
1 Enter the MDI mode.
3 Press chapter selection soft key [MDI].
The program input from the MDI is displayed.
Fig. 12.2.3 (a) MDI operation program screen (10.4-inch)
In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, when bit 7 (MDL) of parameter No.3107 is set 1, the modal
information can be displayed in the screen.
12.2.4 Program List Screen

A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
The program list screen can be displayed in any mode.
For the program list screen, see Chapter III-11, “PROGRAM MANAGEMENT”.
Displaying the program folder screen

Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [LIST].
- 538 -
Fig. 12.2.4 (a) Program list screen (10.4-inch)
12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen

The block currently being executed and the block to be executed next are displayed in the MEM mode
and MDI model.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT].
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block currently being executed and the
next block are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.5 (a) Next block display screen (10.4-inch)
- 539 -
NOTE
1 If a reset is made during execution of a program, the display of the current block
and next block is cleared.
2 When the feed hold state (HOLD) is caused between the block and the block
during the program execution, the next block display is cleared.
12.2.6 Program Check Screen

The program currently being executed, the current position and modal information are displayed in the
MEM mode.
Procedure for displaying the program check screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK].
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool, and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.6 (a) Program check screen (8.4-inch)
Explanation
- Program display
Up to four blocks from the beginning of the block being executed in the program currently being
executed are displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display

Chapter selection soft key [RELATIVE] or [ABSOLUTE] can be pressed to switch between relative
coordinate system display and workpiece coordinate system display.
- Modal G codes
Up to 12 modal G codes are displayed.
- 540 -
- Display of the actual speed and SACT

The actual speed is displayed with mm/min or inch/min according to unit of input.
12.2.7 Current Block Display Screen (Only for the 8.4-Inch Display
Unit)
The block currently being executed and modal specification value are displayed in the MEM mode and
MDI mode.
Displaying the current block screen

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CURRENT].
The modal specification values, specification values, addresses, and G codes specified in the block
currently being executed are displayed.
Fig. 12.2.7 (a) Current block screen (8.4-inch)
12.2.8 Graphical Conversational Programming Screen

The G code menu and details on G codes are displayed in the EDIT mode.
A program can be created one block at a time while seeing the G code menu on the screen and the G code
detail screen.
For details on the conversational programming with the graphic function, see Section III-9.3,
"CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION ".
Displaying the graphic conversational programming screen

Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [C.A.P].
- 541 -
Fig. 12.2.8 (a) Graphical conversational programming screen (G code menu screen) (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.2.8 (b) Graphical conversational programming screen (G code detail screen) (10.4-inch)
The G code menu screen and G code detail screen are present on the graphical conversational
programming screen.
To display the G code detail screen, press soft key [BLOCK]. To display the G code menu screen, press
soft key [G. MENU].
G code menu screen

On the G code menu screen, select a G code to be specified from a list of G codes displayed.
G code detail screen

On the G code detail screen, enter the necessary values since the specification form for each G code is
displayed.
- 542 -
12.2.9 Background Editing

Editing of a program other than the main program is called background editing. In background editing,
a program can be edited during execution of another program and the same editing operations as normal
editing (foreground editing) can be performed. There are the editing mode and reference mode in
background editing. A program can be edited in the editing mode, but a program cannot be edited in the
reference mode. In the reference mode, a program being operated can be referenced.
Background editing can be performed in any mode.
Function
- Editable programs
The editable programs for each device are shown below.
Editable programs for each device

Device Editable program
CNC built-in memory Program in the selected path
MEMCARD All programs
Data server All programs
- Number of programs editable in the background

The number of programs editable in the background is only one for each path.
- Screen display
When background editing starts, the normal editing screen is switched to the background editing screen.
The program name and "BG: EDIT", which indicates that background editing is in progress, appear in the
program status line above the program.
When background editing is performed in the reference mode, "BG: READ ONLY" appears in the
program status line. The characters are displayed in green when the program is displayed in the color
mode.
Fig. 12.2.9 (a) Screen being edited in the background (editing mode) (10.4inch)
- 543 -
Fig. 12.2.9 (b) Screen being edited in the background (reference mode) (10.4inch)
- Editing status
The following items are displayed on the program status line and program editing area according to the
background editing status.
Displayed items in the program status line and editing area

Editing status Displayed items
(BG-EDIT)
No program selected
“NO PROGRAM” is displayed in the editing area.
No program selected (BG:READ ONLY)
Reference mode "NO PROGRAM" is displayed in the editing area.
Program selected program-name + (BG:EDIT)
Program selected program-name + (BG:READ ONLY)
Reference mode, Read only The contents of the program are displayed in green.
- Operation in the background editing

In the reference mode, a program being subject to background editing can be operated.
- Switching to full display or small display

For the 10.4-inch display unit, if soft key [PROGRAM] is pressed again during the background editing,
the screen size is switched to full display or small display.
In small screen display, position display or modal display can be selected concurrently with the program
being subject to background editing.
In full screen display, much information about the program being subject to background editing can be
displayed at a time.
- 544 -
Fig. 12.2.9 (c) Program screen (small screen) (10.4-inch)
Starting of background editing

Background editing can be started from the following screens.
PROGRAM
PROGRAM LIST
MDI PROGRAM
PROGRAM CHECK
CURRENT BLOCK
NEXT BLOCK
Procedure
Method 1 When background editing is performed in the editing mode
1 Display a screen on which background editing can be started.
3 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
4 Enter the number of the program to be opened in the editing mode into the key-in
buffer.
5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] ([EDIT] for the 8.4-inch display unit).
The program with the entered number is opened during background editing in the
editing mode. If the program with the entered number is not present, a new
program is created and the program is opened during background editing.
Method 2 When background editing is performed in the reference mode

2 Press soft key [PROGRAM].
4 Make sure that there is no character string in the key-in buffer and press soft key
[BG EDIT].
5 Enter the number of the program to be opened in the reference mode into the key-in
buffer.
- 545 -
6 Press soft key [REF EXEC] ([REF EXE] for the 8.4-inch display unit).
The program with the entered number is opened during background editing in the
reference mode. If the program with the entered number is not present, a warning
message “SPECIFIED PROGRAM NOT FOUND” appears
NOTE
1 A program in the place where the main program is present can be specified for
background editing (or a program in the CNC built-in memory if no main program
is present) can be specified for background editing. On the program list screen,
however, the program of the displayed device can be opened for background
editing. When editing a program not in the place where the main program is
present in the background, select the program on the program list screen.
2 When opening an O-number program for background editing, address O can be
omitted.
3 The mode selected at the start of background editing is kept until it is finished.
To switch between the editing mode and the reference mode, finish background
editing and then start background editing in the desired mode again.
4 Even when background editing is performed in the editing mode, if either of the
following programs is specified, the program is opened temporarily in the
reference mode.
- Program being operated
- Main program
5 The device for which a new program is created at the start of background editing
is only the CNC built-in memory. For the MEMCARD or data server device,
specify an existing program because no program is created.
Selecting a program subject to background editing with the cursor

When the device being displayed is the MEMCARD or data server device, the program name at the
cursor position can be stored in the key-in buffer to be opened for background editing.
Procedure
2 Press soft key [DIR].
(When [LIST] is not displayed, press continuous menu key .)
4 Change the device being displayed to the MEMCARD or data server.
For changing a device, see III-11.1.
5 Move the cursor to the program to be opened for the background editing.
6 Press soft key [BG EDIT].
7 Press [EDIT EXEC] ([EDIT EXE] for the 8.4-inch display unit) or [REF EXEC] ([REF EXE] for the
8.4-inch display unit) to start background editing.
Ending background editing

Procedure
2 Press soft key [PROGRAM] or [DIR].
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and press [BG-END].
- 546 -
Background editing is ended and this screen is switched to the screen in the program function last
displayed in the current CNC mode before background editing.
Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY “, consists of the following

subsections:
12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value ..............................................................547

12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data........................................................................................549
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop...................................................................................551
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time ........................................................553
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value......................................................555
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured........................................................555
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables ......................................................557
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel..............................................................558
12.3.9 Displaying and Switching the Display Language ......................................................................561
12.3.10 Protection of Data at Eight Levels .............................................................................................562
12.3.11 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screens................................................567
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen for Multiple Tools...................574
12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen..............................................578
Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and other data.
This section describes how to display or set the following data:
1. Tool Compensation Value
2. Settings
3. Sequence number comparison and stop
4. Run time and part count
5. Workpiece origin offset value
6. Custom macro common variables
7. Software operator’s panel
8. Display language switching
9. Protection of data at eight levels
10. Tool data
11. Safety zone
The software operator’s panel, and display language switching depend on the specifications of the
machine tool builder. See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
12.3.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value

Tool offset values are specified by D codes in a program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes
are displayed or set on the screen.
Procedure for setting and displaying the tool compensation value

Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [OFFSET] or press function key several times until the tool
compensation screen is displayed.
- 547 -
Fig. 12.3.1 (a) Tool compensation memory A (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed using page keys and cursor keys, or
enter the compensation number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press soft key
[NO.SRH].
4 To set a compensation value, enter a value and press soft key [INPUT].
To change the compensation value, enter a value to add to the current value (a negative value to
reduce the current value) and press soft key [+INPUT]. Or, enter a new value and press soft key
[INPUT].
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- Other setting method

An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool offset value. See Chapter III-8 in
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
- Tool compensation memory

The compensation value for tool compensation (for D code) is to be set in the compensation memory.
- Disabling entry of compensation values

The entry of compensation values may be disabled by setting bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290.
And then, the input of tool compensation values from the MDI can be inhibited for a specified range of
offset numbers. The first offset number for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter No.
3294. The number of offset numbers, starting from the specified first number, for which the input of a
value is inhibited is set in parameter No. 3295.
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
1) When compensation values are input consecutively from offset numbers for which the input of
values is enabled to offset numbers for which the input of values is inhibited, a warning is issued,
but the compensation values in the range of the offset numbers for which the input of values is
enabled are set.
2) When compensation values are input consecutively from offset numbers for which the input of
values is inhibited to offset numbers for which the input of values is enabled, a warning is issued and
the compensation values are not set.
- 548 -
12.3.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data

Data such as the TV check flag and output code is set on the setting data screen. On this screen, the
operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence
numbers in program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number comparison and stop function.
See III-9.2 for automatic insertion of sequence numbers.
See III-12.3.3 for the sequence number comparison and stop function. This subsection describes how to
set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data

Procedure
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.
Fig. 12.3.2 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 549 -
Fig. 12.3.2 (b) SETTING (MIRROR IMAGE) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys .
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
- OUTPUT CODE
Setting code when data is output through Reader/Puncher interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of Reader/Puncher interface.
0 : Channel 0 (RS232-C port 1)
4 : Memory card interface
5 : Data Server interface
9 : Embeded ethernet interface
- 550 -
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence number or not at program edit in the
EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
This data is not available.
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the sequence number comparison and
stop function and the number of the program to which the sequence number belongs
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axes.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING (TIMER) screen. See III-12.3.4,
“Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time” for this screen.
12.3.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop

If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation
enters single block mode after the block is executed.
Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop

Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.
- 551 -
Fig. 12.3.3 (a) SETTING (HANDY) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Enter in (PROGRAM NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP the number (1 to 9999) of the program
containing the sequence number with which operation stops.
6 Enter in (SEQUENCE NO.) for SEQUENCE STOP (with five or less digits) the sequence number
with which operation is stopped.
7 When the set program is selected and automatic operation is started, the operation makes a single
block stop at the block with the set sequence number.
Explanation
- Sequence number after the program is executed
After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the program, the sequence number
setting for sequence number compensation and stop becomes “-1”.
- Exceptional blocks
If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block in which all commands are those to be
processed within the CNC control unit, the execution does not stop at that block.
[Example] N1 #1=1 ;
N2 IF[#1 EQ 1]GOTO 08 ;
N3 GOTO 09 ;
N4 M98 P1000 ;
N5 M99 ;
In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the
program does not stop.
- When the same sequence number is found several times in the program
If the predetermined sequence number appears twice or more in a program, the execution of the program
stops after the block in which the predetermined sequence number is found for the first time is executed.
- Block to be repeated a specified number of times

If the predetermined sequence number is found in a block which is to be executed repeatedly, the
execution of the program stops after the block is executed specified times.
- 552 -
12.3.4 Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and Time
Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts required, and number of machined
parts can be displayed.
This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of machined parts and
the time during which the power is on, which can be set only by parameters).
This screen can also display the clock time. The time can be set on the screen.
Procedure for Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count and Time
Procedure
3 Press chapter selection soft key [SETTING].
4 Press page key or several times until the following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.4 (a) SETTING (TIMER) screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number
of parts to be machined.
6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press soft key
[INPUT].
Explanation
- PARTS TOTAL
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed. This value cannot be set on this screen. Set the value in parameter No. 6712.
- PARTS REQUIRED
It is used for setting the number of machined parts required.
When the “0” is set to it, there is no limitation to the number of parts.
Also, its setting can be made by the parameter No 6713.
- 553 -
- PARTS COUNT
This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed. The value can also be set by parameter No. 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches
the number of parts required. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- POWER ON
Displays the total time which the power is on. This value cannot be set on this screen but can be preset in
parameter No. 6750.
- RUN TIME
Indicates the total run time during automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time.
This value can be preset in parameter No. 6751 or No. 6752.
- CUTTING TIME
Displays the total time taken by cutting that involves cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and
circular interpolation (G02 or G03). This value can be preset in parameter No. 6753 or No. 6754.
- FREE PURPOSE
This value can be used, for example, as the total time during which coolant flows. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
- CYCLE TIME
Indicates the run time of one automatic operation, excluding the stop and feed hold time. This is
automatically preset to 0 when a cycle start is performed at reset state. It is preset to 0 even when power is
removed.
- DATA and TIME

Displays the current date and time. The date and time can be set on this screen.
- Usage
When the command of M02 or M30 is executed, the total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts are incremented by one. Therefore, create the program so that M02 or M30 is executed
every time the processing of one part is completed. Furthermore, if an M code set to the parameter No.
6710 is executed, counting is made in the similar manner. Also, it is possible to disable counting even if
M02 or M30 is executed (bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1). For details, see the manual
issued by machine tool builders.
Limitation
- Run time and part count settings
Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of “M” and “S” of run time is valid from 0 to 59.
Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts.
- Time settings
Neither negative value nor the value exceeding the value in the following table can be set.
Table 12.3.4 (a)
Item Maximum value Item Maximum value
Year 2096 Hour 23
Month 12 Minute 59
Day 31 Second 59
- 554 -
12.3.5 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value

Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) and external
workpiece origin offset.
The workpiece origin offset value and external workpiece origin offset value can be set on this screen.
Procedure for displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [WORK].
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists of two or more pages.
Display a desired page in either of the following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6:
workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59) and press operation selection soft key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is
specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and
pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the previous offset value.
7 When performing counter input, enter the axis name in the key-in buffer and press soft key [C
INPUT] to set the relative coordinates of the specified axis.
8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
9 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
12.3.6 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured

This function is used to compensate for the difference between the programmed workpiece coordinate
system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command values match the actual dimensions.
- 555 -
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed coordinate system with the actual
coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured

Procedure
Y y
Surface A
Programmed workpiece
origin α
Surface B
O'
X
New offset
x
O β
Origin
Previous offset
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown above, position the reference tool manually until it touches
surface A of the workpiece.
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance α between surface A and the programmed origin of the workpiece coordinate
system as shown above.
5 To display the WORK COORDINATES screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK].
Fig. 12.3.6 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch display unit)
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.

7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Y-axis in this example).
- 556 -
8 Enter the measured value (α) then press soft key [MEASUR].
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.
11 Enter the measured value of distance (β) to surface B as an X value as with steps 7 and 8.
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time.
- During program execution

This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.
12.3.7 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables

Displays common variables (#100 to #199, and #500 to #999) on the screen.
The values for variables can be set on this screen.
Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Procedure for displaying and setting custom macro common variables

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key , chapter selection soft key [MACRO], and soft key [(OPRT)] in
the stated order.
The following screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.7 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch display unit)
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page keys and/or and
cursor keys , , , and/or .
- 557 -
4 Enter data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key , , or , then press soft
key [INP.C.].
6 To set a blank in a variable, just press soft key [INPUT]. The value field for the variable becomes
blank.
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an indication below is provided.
When the significant number of digits is 12 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 0):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 -Overflow
When the significant number of digits is 8 (with bit 0 (F16) of parameter No. 6008 set to 1):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 99999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -99999999 -Overflow
12.3.8 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel

Operations on the MDI unit can substitute for the functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel.
This means that a mode selection, jog feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations
on the MDI unit, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on the machine operator’s panel.
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [OPR].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is
displayed.
- 558 -
Fig. 12.3.8 (a) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (without the manual handle feed function)
(10.4-inch display unit)
Fig. 12.3.8 (b) Page 1 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (with the manual handle feed function)
(10.4-inch display unit)
- 559 -
Fig. 12.3.8 (c) Page 2 of Software Operator’s Panel screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or .
5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the
desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the key together with an
arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 12.3.8 (d) MDI arrow keys
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator’s panel are shown below. Whether to use each group can be
chosen using parameter No. 7200. Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator’s panel.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification
Group4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid

When the LCD indicates other than the software operator’s panel screen, jog feed is not conducted even if
the arrow key is pushed.
- 560 -
- Jog feed and arrow keys

The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set with parameters Nos. 7210 to
7217.
- Feed magnification of incremental feed

The displayed item can be switched depending on whether the manual handle feed function is enabled.
When the function is enabled, the feed magnification during incremental feed is switched to the handle
magnification.
- General purpose switches

For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by machine tool builder.
12.3.9 Displaying and Switching the Display Language

The language used for display can be switched to another language.
A display language can be set using a parameter. However, by modifying the setting of the display
language on this screen, the display language can be switched without turning off then on the power.
Displaying and setting the display language

Procedure
3 Press soft key [LANGUAGE] to display the language screen.
Fig. 12.3.9 (a) LANGUAGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Press page key or , then press cursor keys , to move the cursor to a
desired display language.
5 Press operation soft key [APPLY]. The display language is switched to the selected language. The
language specified on this screen continues to be used if the power is turned off then back on.
- 561 -
Explanation
- Language switching
The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0.
- Selectable languages
The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows:
1. English
2. Japanese
3. German
4. French
5. Chinese (Traditional)
6. Chinese (Simplified)
7. Italian
8. Korean
9. Spanish
10. Dutch
11. Danish
12. Portuguese
13. Polish
14. Hungarian
15. Swedish
16. Czech
17. Russian
18. Turkish
19. Bulgarian
20. Rumanian
Among the languages listed above, English and other usable languages are displayed on the screen as a
list of switchable languages.
Limitation
- Language parameter modification on the parameter screen
Which language to use for display is specified with parameter No. 3281. This parameter can be modified
using the parameter screen as well. However, if a modification is made on the parameter screen, the new
setting is not reflected until “APPLY” operation is performed on the language screen or the power is
turned on again. If an invalid value is set in parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen, the screen is
displayed in English after the power is turned on again.
12.3.10 Protection of Data at Eight Levels

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels and one of eight protection levels for each type of CNC
and PMC data.
When an attempt is made to change CNC and PMC data or output it to an external unit, the operation
level is compared with the protection level to determine whether to allow the change or external output.
NOTE
The 8-level data protection function is optional.
12.3.10.1 Operation level setting

You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels.
- 562 -
Displaying and setting the operation level setting screen

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT] ([PROT.] for the
8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PROTECT].
The operation level setting screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.10.1 (a) Operation level setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Key in the password for an operation level to be set/modified, then press soft key [INPUT
PASSWD] ([INPUT]) for the 8.4-inch display unit).
5 To return the operation level to 0, 1, 2, or 3, press soft key [CANCEL PASSWD] ([CANCEL] for
the 8.4-inch display unit).
Explanation
- Operation level setting
To select operation level 0 to 3, use the corresponding memory protection key signal.
To select operation level 4 to 7, use the corresponding password.
Table 12.3.10.1 (a) Operation level setting

Operation level Setting Sample grouping
7 (high) Password -
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer and integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (level 1)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (level 4)
When operation level 4 to 7 is set, the operation level remains unchanged until the password is cleared.
(The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.)
Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance.
- 563 -
NOTE
When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each
entered character.
12.3.10.2 Password modification

The current operation level is displayed.
The password for each of operation levels 4 to 7 can be modified.
Displaying and setting the password modification screen

Procedure
4 Press soft key [PASSWORD] ([PASSWD] for the 8.4-inch display unit).
The PASSWORD CHANGE screen shown below is displayed.
Fig. 12.3.10.2 (a) PASSWORD CHANGE screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Key in an operation level whose password is to be modified, then press soft key [INPUT].
6 Key in the current password for the operation level whose password is to be modified, then press
soft key [INPUT].
7 Key in a new password, then press soft key [INPUT].
8 Key in the new password again for confirmation, then press soft key [INPUT].
9 Press soft key [PASSWDCHANGE] ([CHANGE] for the 8.4-inch display unit).
10 To clear the password, press soft key [PASSWDCLEAR] ([CLEAR] for the 8.4-inch display unit).
Explanation
Up to eight characters (only uppercase alphabetic characters and numeric characters) can be input.
- 564 -
NOTE
1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters
are available:
• Uppercase alphabetic characters
• Numeric characters
2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each
entered character.
3 Whether a password can be changed at the current operation level is
determined as follows:
• Password of an operation level higher than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
• Password of the current operation level
Can be changed.
• Password of an operation level lower than the current operation level
Can be changed (only to the initial password).
4 The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
12.3.10.3 Protection level setting

The current operation level is displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item are displayed.
The change protection level and output protection level of each data item can be changed.
Confirmation based on protection level setting

Procedure
4 Press soft key [DATA LEVEL] ([PRT LV] for the 8.4-inch display unit) to change the protection
level of CNC data or press soft key [PMC LEVEL] ([PMC LV] for the 8.4-inch display unit) to
change the protection level of PMC data.
The following protection level change screen is displayed.
- 565 -
Fig. 12.3.10.3 (a) Protection level change screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item.
6 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
When the protection level of a data item is higher than the current operation level, the protection level of
the data item cannot be changed.
The protection level of a data item cannot be changed to a protection level higher than the current
operation level.
For each of the following types of data, you can set a data protection level. There are the following two
types of data protection levels:
• Change protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is changed.
• Output protection level
Sets the protection level used when data is output to an external unit.
As a protection level, you can set a value of 0 (low) to 7 (high).
Table 12.3.10.3 (a) Protection level of each type of data

Initial protection level
Type of data
Change Output
Custom macro variable data <CUSTOM MACRO>
0 0
(including variable data dedicated to the macro executor)
Periodical maintenance data <PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE DATA> 0 0
Tool offset data <TOOL OFFSET DATA> 0 0
Clock data <TIME> 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data <WORK ZERO OFFSET> 0 0
Ethernet setting data <ETHER NET SETTING> 0 0
Parameter data <PARAMETER DATA> 4 0
Settings <SETTING DATA> 0 0
Pitch error compensation data <PITCH ERROR DATA> 4 0
Parameter data for Power Mate CNC manager function
0 0
<PARAMETER DATA FOR POWER MATE CNC MANAGER>
Part program editing operation <CHANGE PROGRAMS FOR EACH PARTS> 0 0
Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0
- 566 -
Table 12.3.10.3 (b) Protection level of PMC data

Initial protection level
Type of data
Change Output
Composition parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Setting (each path) 0 0
Sequence program 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
NOTE
1 For some types of data, the output function is not provided.
2 When the protection level of data is higher than the current operation level, the
protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a level higher than the current
operation level.
4 Settable types of data increase or decrease, depending on the option
configuration.
5 For details on the protection level of PMC data, refer to “PMC Programming
Manual (B-64393EN)”.
6 To change the protection level for each part program, do so on the PROGRAM
FOLDER screen rather than on the PROTECT LEVEL screen.
7 Part program editing includes program editing for the MDI mode.
8 Presetting absolute coordinates causes preset workpiece coordinate system
values to be protected.
12.3.11 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration

Screens
Items concerning tools, such as the number of a tool to be used in machining, the position at which the
turret is indexed for a tool, and tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on the tool
registration screens. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder for details, as the builder
sets these items first.
12.3.11.1 Displaying and setting items on the initial tool registration

screen
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen.
5 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys .
- 567 -
6 Type the number of the tool management data you wan to set or modify, and press soft key [INPUT].
To modify the data, type the data to increase or decrease, then press soft key [+INPUT].
Alternatively, type the data to modify, then press soft key [+INPUT].
Fig.12.3.11 (a) Initial Tool Registration Screen
Explanation
- Number of tools to be used
Specify the total number of tools to be used.
This data corresponds to parameter No. 16265.
- Number of tools for which the turret is indexed

Number of tools for which the turret is indexed (parameter No. 16266). When T-axis control is specified
(TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the total number of tools for which the turret is
indexed. The setting must not be greater than the number of tools to be used.
This data corresponds to parameter No. 16266.
- Number of a tool to be initially selected

Specify the number of the tool to be selected when reference position return is completed.
This data corresponds to parameter No. No. 16267.
- Number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation

When T-axis is set as a rotation axis and T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260,
is set to 1), specify the number of pulses sent to the turret per rotation.
This data corresponds to parameter No.1260.
- Number of punch operations

Specify the number of punch operations for the tool used.
Display and preset the total number of punch operation of all tool.
This data corresponds to parameter No.16269 or No.16270.
- 568 -
NOTE
If the memory protect signal KEY1<Gn046.3> is set to “1”, the number of punch
operations is writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0 (PWE) of
parameter No.8900 is set to 0).
12.3.11.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration

screen
Procedure
4 Press the [TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen the initial tool registration
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [TOOL NUMBER] soft key to display the tool number
registration screen.
6 Move the cursor to the tool number to be changed.
• Enter the registration number of the tool for which data is to be changed, then press the
[NO.SRH] soft key.
• Move the cursor to the tool number to be changed with the page keys and cursor
keys .
7 To move the cursor to the tool number to be changed, press the cursor keys .
8 Type the data you wan to set or modify, and press soft key [INPUT].
Fig.12.3.11 (b) Tool number registration screen 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
- 569 -
Fig.12.3.11 (c) Tool number registration screen 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
Tool registration number. This number is a serial number corresponding to the registered tool.
- Tool number
Specify the numbers of tools to be used.
- Turret position
When T-axis control is specified (TCL, bit 4 of parameter No. 16260, is set to 1), specify the positions at
which the turret is indexed for tools.
- Change tool Number

Specify the numbers of tools for exchange.
These numbers are limited to the tool numbers registered on the tool number registration screen
- X-axis offset
When the tool position compensation function is used (TOF, bit 2 of parameter No. 16263 is set to 1),
specify X-axis offset for tool positions.
- Y-axis offset
specify Y-axis offset for tool positions in the machine coordinate system.
12.3.11.3 Displaying and setting items on the screen for the number of
press operations
Procedure
- 570 -
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [PUNCH COUNT] soft key to display the screen for the
number of press operations.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
Fig.12.3.11 (d) Screen for the Number of Punch Operations(10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Punch count number

Display and preset the total number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration
screens.
- Tool life
Specify the maximum number of punch operation by each tool registered on the tool registration screens.
NOTE
If the memory protect signal KEY1<Gn046.3> is set to “1”, the punch count
number and the tool life are writable although parameter writing is disabled (bit 0
(PWE) of parameter No.8900 is set to 0).
- 571 -
12.3.11.4 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration

screen (for drawing figures)
Procedure
screen.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [TOOL SHAPE] soft key to display the screen for the
number of press operations.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
Fig.12.3.11 (e) Tool figure registration screen 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
- 572 -
Fig.12.3.11 (f) Tool figure registration screen 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
- Tool shape
Specify the tool shape for graphic operation.
The upper digit of the tool figure specifies the color of a line drawing and the lower digit specifies the
figure.
Upper digit Lower digit
0: Green 0: Asterisk
1: Red 1: Circle (line drawing)
2: Green 2: Quadrangle (line drawing)
3: Yellow 3: ellipse (line drawing)
4: Blue 4: Circle (filled–in drawing)
5: Pink 5: Quadrangle (filled–in drawing)
6: Sky blue 6: ellipse (filled–in drawing)
7: White
8: Gray
For details, refer toTable12.3.11 (a).
- Tool size (I)

Specify the tool size for graphic operation.
- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
- 573 -
Table12.3.11 (a) tool shape data
Shape I (Size) J(Size) K (Angle)
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
(Input unit：When the
increment system is IS-B)
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
K (Input unit：When the
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
I I ： 25.4mm(1inch)
Others 00
Fixed value
12.3.12 Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration Screen

for Multiple Tools
Items concerning multiple tools, such as the number of a sub-tool for multiple tools, the position at which
the turret is indexed for a sub-tool, and sub-tool position compensation, can be displayed or specified on
the tool registration screens for multiple tools. Refer to the manual prepared by the machine tool builder
for details, as the builder sets these items first.
12.3.12.1 Displaying and setting items on the tool number registration

screen for multiple tools
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [MULTI TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen the tool number
registration screen for multiple tools
[NO.SRH] soft key.
• Move the cursor to the registration number of the tool to be changed with the page keys
and cursor keys .

6 To move the cursor to the tool data to be changed, press the cursor keys .
- 574 -
Fig.12.3.12 (a) Tool Number Registration Screen for Multiple Tools (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
Sub-tool registration number for multiple tools. This number is a serial number corresponding to the
registered sub-tool.
- Sub-tool number
Specify sub-tool numbers used for controlling multiple tools.
- Angle
Specify angles used for indexing the turret for sub-tools.
- Y-axis offset
specify tool position compensation for sub-tools along the Y-axis in the machine coordinate system.
12.3.12.2 Displaying and setting items on the tool figure registration

screen for multiple tools (for drawing figures)
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MULTI TOOL] appears.
4 Press the [MULTI TOOL] soft key to display the initial tool registration screen for multiple tools.
5 Press the menu key . Then press the [MULTI SHAPE] soft key to display the tool figure
registration screen for multiple tools.
[NO.SRH] soft key.
keys .
- 575 -
7 To move the cursor to the tool data to be changed, press the cursor keys .
Fig.12.3.12 (b) Tool figure registration screen for multiple tools 1/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Fig.12.3.12 (c) Tool figure registration screen for multiple tools 2/2 (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Number
Sub-tool registration number for multiple tools. This number is a serial number corresponding to the
registered sub-tool.
- Tool shape
Specify the sub-tool shape for graphic operation.
- 576 -
The upper digit of the tool shape specifies the color of a line drawing and the lower digit specifies the
shape.
Upper digit Lower digit

0: Green 0: Asterisk
1: Red 1: Circle (line drawing)
2: Green 2: Quadrangle (line drawing)
3: Yellow 3: ellipse (line drawing)
4: Blue 4: Circle (filled–in drawing)
5: Pink 5: Quadrangle (filled–in drawing)
6: Sky blue 6: ellipse (filled–in drawing)
7: White
8: Gray
For details, refer to Table12.3.12 (a).
- Tool size (I)

Specify the sub-tool size for graphic operation.
- Tool size(J)
- Tool angle(K)
For details, refer to Table12.3.12 (a).
Table12.3.12 (a) Tool shape data
Shape I (Size) J(Size) K (Angle)
I
01
Circle I ： 0~999999.999
04
(Input unit：When the
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Square, 02 J
K ： 0~399.999
rectangle 05
I ： 0~999999.999
I J ： 0~999999.999
Elongated 03 J
K ： 0~399.999
hole 06
I I ： 25.4mm(1inch)
Others 00
Fixed value
- 577 -
12.3.13 Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting

Screen
The safety zone can be displayed and changed.
By setting SF0, bit 0 of parameter No. 16500, the layout of the safety zone setting screen can be changed
to type A or type B.
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A)
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the [SAFTY ZONE] soft key to display the safety zone setting screen.
5 The safety zone is displayed in the absolute coordinate system. By setting MDP, bit 0 of parameter
No. 16502, the zone can be displayed in the machine coordinate system.
6 Usually, setting data is not enabled on the safety zone setting screen. However, Setting bit 4 (SZI) of
parameter No.16502 allows setting data.
7 To move the cursor to the data of safety zone to be changed, press the page keys and the
cursor keys .
Fig.12.3.13 (a) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Absolute position display (10.4-inch display unit)
- 578 -
Fig.12.3.13 (b) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type A), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
1 The tool position that is selected by selection signals for tool area of safety zone
STZS0 - STZS3<Gn232.0 to .3>, is displayed.
2 Please set unnecessary safety zone to the tool coordinates used for reference
position return.
- At displaying in absolute coordinate :
Setting value = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting (parameter
No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
- At displaying in machine coordinate : Setting 0.
Explanation
- Safety zone #n (n: 1 to 4)
X1
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the positive X direction.
X2
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the minus X direction
Y
Specify the coordinate of safety zone along the Y direction
- Tool position
X
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the X-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set radius
of the tool area.
Y
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the Y-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set 0.
- Zone number
Specified the number of safety zone detected when automatic safety-zone setting by external signal.
- 579 -
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B)
Procedure
3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [SAFTY ZONE] appears.
4 Press the [SAFTY ZONE] soft key to display the safety zone setting screen.
5 The safety zone is displayed in the absolute coordinate system. By setting MDP, bit 0 of parameter
No. 16502, the zone can be displayed in the machine coordinate system.
6 Usually, setting data is not enabled on the safety zone setting screen. However, Setting bit 4 (SZI) of
parameter No.16502 allows setting data.
7 To move the cursor to the data of safety zone to be changed, press the page keys and the
cursor keys .
Fig.12.3.13 (c) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
- 580 -
Fig.12.3.13 (d) Safety Zone Setting Screen (Type B), Machine position display (10.4-inch display unit)
NOTE
1 The tool position that is selected by selection signals for tool area of safety zone
STZS0 - STZS3<Gn232.0 to .3>, is displayed.
2 Please set unnecessary safety zone to the tool coordinates used for reference
position return.
- At displaying in absolute coordinate :
W is set to 0.
Setting value for X, Y = Coordinate by automatic coordinate system setting
(parameter No.1250) － workpiece coordinate system offset amount
- At displaying in machine coordinate : Setting 0.
Explanation
- Safety zone (#1 - #4)
W
Specify the width of the safety zone along the X-axes.
X
Specify the center coordinate of the safety zone along the X-axes.
Y
Specify the coordinate of the safety zone along the Y-axes.
- Tool position
X
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the X-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set radius
of the tool area.
Y
Specify the dimensions of a tool along the Y-axes. If the circle tool area is set, please set 0.
- Zone number
Specified the number of safety zone detected when automatic safety-zone setting by external signal.
- 581 -

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.
This chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI unit. Parameters can also be set with external
input/output devices such as the memory card (see Chapter III-8, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”).
In addition, pitch error compensation data used for improving the precision in positioning with the ball
screw on the machine can be set or displayed by the operations under function key .
See Chapter III-7, “ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS” for the diagnosis screens
displayed by pressing function key .
Section 12.4, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY “, consists of the following

subsections:
12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters ............................................................................................582

12.4.2 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data............................................................584
12.4.3 Servo Setting..............................................................................................................................587
12.4.4 Servo Tuning..............................................................................................................................590
12.4.5 Color Setting Screen ..................................................................................................................591
12.4.6 Parameter Setting Support Screen..............................................................................................593
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen.....................................................................................................615
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen ....................................................................................................622
12.4.9 Overview of the History Function .............................................................................................624
12.4.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to determine the specifications and
functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of
parameters depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder.
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters

Procedure
1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure for enabling/disabling
parameter writing described below.
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter screen.
- 582 -
Fig. 12.4.1 (a) PARAMETER screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways:
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, and , and cursor
keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT]. The
parameter is set to the entered value and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing

Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting screen.
- 583 -
Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch display unit)
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100.
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and
press soft key [(OPRT)] , then press [OFF:0].
7 Press the key to release the alarm condition.
When an alarm PW0000 occurred, however, it is not released unless the power is turned off and
back on.
Explanation
- Setting parameters with external input/output devices
See Chapter, “DATA INPUT/OUTPUT” for setting parameters with external input/output devices such as
the memory card.
- Parameters that require turning off the power

Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on again after they are set. Setting
such parameters causes alarm PW0000. In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
- Parameter list
Refer to the Parameter Manual (B-64310EN, B-64560EN) for the parameter list.
- Setting data
Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list indicates "Setting entry is
acceptable". Setting 1 for PARAMETER WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the
setting screen.
12.4.2 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data

If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection
unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation point at the intervals specified for each axis.
The origin of compensation is the reference position to which the tool is returned.
- 584 -
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the
NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. If it is changed, the machine
accuracy is reduced. In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as the memory card (see Chapter III-8,
“DATA INPUT/OUTPUT”). Compensation data can also be written directly with the MDI unit.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set the pitch error compensation
value for each pitch error compensation point number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation point at the reference position.
Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)

Compensation number
Compensation number parameter for the
parameter for the reference 3
compensation point having
position (No. 3620) the largest value (No.
2 3622)
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference position
-1
Compensation magnification
parameter (No. 3623)
-2
Compensation number parameter for Compensation
the compensation point having the interval parameter
smallest value (No. 3621) (No. 3624)
Compensation
position number 31 3 3 3 3 3 3
Compensation
value to be set -3 +1 +1 +1 +2 -1 -3
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference position : Parameter No. 3620
(for each axis)
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the smallest value : Parameter No. 3621
(for each axis)
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the largest value : Parameter No. 3622
(for each axis)
• Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis) : Parameter No. 3623
• Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis) : Parameter No. 3624
• Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the rotary : Parameter No. 3625
axis type (for each axis)
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation

The bi-directional pitch error compensation function allows independent pitch error compensation in
different travel directions. (When the movement is reversed, compensation is automatically carried out as
in a backlash.)
To use this function, specify pitch error compensation for each travel direction, that is, separately for the
positive and negative directions of a movement.
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting bit 0 (BDPx) of parameter No. 3605 to 1),
specify the following parameters in addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end : Parameter No. 3621
(for travel in the positive direction, for each axis)
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end : Parameter No. 3622
(for travel in the negative direction, for each axis)
- 585 -
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to the : Parameter No. 3627
reference position from opposite to the reference position return direction
(for each axis)
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
Procedure
1 Set the following parameters:
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference : Parameter No. 3620
position (for each axis)
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the smallest : Parameter No. 3621
value (for each axis)
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the largest : Parameter No. 3622
value (for each axis)
• Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis) : Parameter No. 3623
• Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis) : Parameter No. 3624
• Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the : Parameter No. 3625
rotary axis type (for each axis)
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting bit 0 (BDPx) of parameter No. 3605 to
1), specify the following parameters in addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end : Parameter No. 3622
(for travel in the negative direction, for each axis)
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to : Parameter No. 3627
the reference position from opposite to the reference position return
direction (for each axis)
3 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [PITCH ERROR]. The
following screen is displayed:
Fig. 12.4.2 (a) PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 586 -
4 Move the cursor to the compensation point number to be set in either of the following ways:
• Enter the compensation point number and press the soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the compensation point number using the page keys, and , and
cursor keys, , , , and .

5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
If bit 5 (PAD) of parameter No. 11350 is 1, an axis name is displayed next to the compensation point
number set in parameter No. 3621 for determining the most negative pitch error compensation point
number.
If the bi-directional pitch error compensation function is enabled, "+ axis name" is displayed next to the
compensation point number set in parameter No. 3621 for setting the compensation point during
movement in the positive direction. And, "- axis name" is displayed next to the compensation point
number set in parameter No. 3626 for setting the compensation point during movement in the negative
direction.
NOTE
1 If the setting of the pitch error compensation parameter is not correct, the axis
name of that axis is not displayed.
2 For a rotation axis, an axis name is displayed next to the pitch error
compensation point number of the reference position set in parameter No. 3620.
12.4.3 Servo Setting

Enter the machine constants required for servo setting for calculation within the CNC to set the
corresponding CNC parameters automatically. Simple help on the item at the cursor position is
displayed.
Procedure for servo parameter setting

Procedure
1 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
2 Press function key , continuous menu key , and soft key [SERVO SETTING] ([SV.SET]
for the 8.4-inch display unit) in this order.
4 Press soft key [SERVO SETTING] to select the servo setting screen.
The following screen appears:
- 587 -
Fig. 12.4.3 (a) Servo parameter setting screen (10.4-inch)
4 Press soft key [AXIS] and select the axis to be set or changed.
5 Move the cursor to the data to be set or changed using the page keys and cursor keys.
6 Key in a setting and press soft key [INPUT] or MDI key [INPUT].
7 Set all items and press soft key [SET].
When data is set successfully, soft key [SET] is hidden. When data is changed, soft key [SET]
appears again.
Entering special data

The settings of DIRECTION SET and DIRECTION REVERSE are entered with soft keys.
Move the cursor to the item to be set and press the soft key of the data to be set.
When soft key [(OPRT)] is displayed, press [(OPRT)] to display the soft keys of the data to be set.
Fig. 12.4.3 (b) Servo setting screen (DIRECTION SET) (10.4-inch)
- 588 -
Fig. 12.4.3 (c) Servo setting screen (DIRECTION REVERSE) (10.4-inch)
NOTE
1 The DIRECTION SET item becomes blank " " if its corresponding parameter is
set to an undefined value.
2 It is also possible to input data with numeric keys and then press soft key
[INPUT] or MDI key [INPUT].
The soft keys to be displayed and their values are shown below.
- CW: 1, CCW: 0
- ON: 1, OFF: 0
Setting data
When all items are set and soft key [SET] is pressed, the CNC sets the CNC parameters to the calculated
results.
When a setting is illegal

If a CNC parameter falls outside the setting range as a result of CNC internal calculation based on each
setting, the cursor moves to the DETECTION UNIT item and a warning saying "ILLEGAL SETTING
DATA" is issued.
Enter an detection unit that can be set and press soft key [SET] again.
Setting a detection unit automatically

When the cursor is placed on the DETECTION UNIT item, soft key [AUTO] appears. The detection
unit can be set automatically by pressing soft key [AUTO].
The detection unit to be set automatically is calculated based on the settings of other items and the values
of the parameters fall within the setting ranges.
Fig. 12.4.3 (d) Soft keys for selection of a detection unit (10.4-inch)
- 589 -
NOTE
1 When the detection unit setting is 0, the detection unit is set to 1.0000 or 0.1000.
If bit 1 (ISC) of parameter No. 1013 is 1, the detection unit is 0.1000.
2 For an axis for which bit 3 (DIA, direct specification) of parameter No. 1006 is set
to 1, the detection unit is set to half the setting value (detection unit of a radius).
(Only for the T series)
Displaying the servo setting screen for inputting parameters

Press soft key [(OPRT)] and press continuous menu key to display soft key [CHANGE].
Press soft key [CHANGE] to display the servo setting screen for inputting parameters. At this time, the
screen for the axis to be set appears and the cursor moves to the first item.
Fig. 12.4.3 (e) Servo setting screen for inputting parameters (10.4-inch)
To display the servo setting screen for inputting machine constants again, press soft key [CHANGE] in
the same procedure. At this time, the servo setting screen for inputting machine constants is displayed
with the axis selected by the cursor on the servo setting screen for inputting parameters specified as the
target axis.
To prevent the servo setting screen for inputting machine constants from being displayed, set bit 2 (SVO)
of parameter No. 13117 to 1.
12.4.4 Servo Tuning

Data related to servo tuning is displayed and set.
Procedure for servo tuning

Procedure
1 Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2 Set bit 0 (SVS) of parameter No. 3111 to 1 to display servo setting and tuning screens.
3 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SERVO SETTING] ([SV.SET]
for the 8.4-inch display unit).
4 Press soft key [SERVO TUNE] ([SV.TUN] for the 8.4-inch display unit) to select the servo tuning
screen.
- 590 -
The following screen (Fig. 12.4.4 (a)) appears:
Fig. 12.4.4 (a) Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch display unit)
5 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified.
6 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT].
12.4.5 Color Setting Screen

Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen.
Displaying the color setting screen

Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display soft key [COLOR].
3 Press soft key [COLOR] to display the color setting screen.
- 591 -
Fig. 12.4.5 (a) Color setting screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Procedure for operating the color setting screen

- Modifying the color (color palette values)
1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The soft key display changes to the following operation soft keys:
2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palette values are to be modified.
The current color palette value set for each primary color is displayed.
3 Select a primary color whose setting is to be modified, with the corresponding operation soft key
[RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].
More than one primary color can be selected at the same time.
Each time operation soft key [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] is pressed, the operation soft key toggles
between selection and deselection.
(When operation soft keys [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] are not displayed, press the rightmost soft
key to display the operation soft keys.)
4 Select operation soft key [BRIGHT] or [DARK] to modify the brightness of the selected prime
color(s).
- Storing the color (color palette values)

The set color palette values can be stored.
1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
COLOR1 Standard color data parameters Nos. 6581 to 6595

COLOR2 Parameters Nos. 10421 to 10435
COLOR3 Parameters Nos. 10461 to 10475
2 Press operation soft key [MEMORY]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] stores the current color palette settings in the selected area.
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not store the current color palette
settings in the selected area.
- 592 -
- Calling the color (color palette values)

1 Press operation soft key [COLOR1], [COLOR2], or [COLOR3] to select a storage area where color
palette values are stored.
(When operation soft keys [COLOR1], [COLOR2], and [COLOR3] are not displayed, press the
rightmost soft key to display the operation soft keys.)
2 Press operation soft key [RECALL]. The operation soft key display switches to the following:
3 Pressing operation soft key [EXEC] calls the color palette values from the selected area to enable the
color to be modified. This operation is invalid if no color palette values are stored.
Pressing operation soft key [CAN] or the leftmost key does not call the color palette values from the
selected area.
NOTE
1 Immediately after the power is turned on, the settings of COLOR1 (parameters)
are used for display. If nothing is stored for COLOR1, the default colors are used
for display.
2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When
modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the
color setting screen.
12.4.6 Parameter Setting Support Screen

The parameter setting support screen is a screen for parameter setting and tuning designed to achieve the
following:
1 The minimum required parameters that must be set when the machine is started up are collectively
displayed to facilitate start-up of the machine.
2 The servo tuning screen, and machining parameter setting support screen are displayed for smooth
tuning.
The parameter setting support screen consists of a menu screen and several setting screens.
12.4.6.1 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item

The parameter setting support menu screen displays the following items:
[START UP]
• AXIS SETTING
• FSSB (AMP)
• FSSB (AXIS)
• SERVO SETTING
• SERVO PARAMETER
• SERVO GAIN TUNING
• HIGH-PRECISION
• MISCELLANY
[TUNING]
• SERVO TUNING
On the parameter setting support menu screen, one of the displayed items can be selected to display the
corresponding screen. From each setting screen, you can return to the menu screen by performing a soft
key operation.
- 593 -
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen

Procedure
1 Set the MDI mode.
2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for
"PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection III-12.4.1.
5 Press soft key [PARAMETER] ([PRMSET] for the 8.4-inch display unit) to display the menu screen
for parameter setting support.
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (a) Menu screen for parameter setting support (10.4-inch)
6 Move the cursor to a desired item by pressing cursor key or .

7 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the selected screen.
Returning to the menu screen

Procedure
1 Press soft key [SELECT] on the parameter setting support menu screen. The screen and soft keys
shown below are displayed. (The screen below is displayed when "AXIS SETTING" is selected.)
- 594 -
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (b) Axis setting screen (10.4-inch)
3 Press soft key [MENU].

The screen display returns to the parameter setting support menu screen.
4 Upon completion of parameter setting, switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to
"DISABLED".
NOTE
Some setting screens can also be displayed by a chapter selection soft key. If a
screen is selected using a chapter selection soft key, however, you cannot return
to the parameter setting support menu screen.
Explanation
- Items displayed with [START UP]
The items of [START UP] indicate the screens for setting the minimum required parameters for starting
up the machine.
Table 12.4.6.1 (a) Items displayed with [START UP]

Display item Description
Sets the CNC parameters of axes, spindles, coordinates, feedrates, and
AXIS SETTING
acceleration/deceleration.
FSSB (AMP) Displays the FSSB amplifier setting screen.
FSSB (AXIS) Displays the FSSB axis setting screen.
SERVO SETTING Displays the servo setting screen.
SERVO PARAMETER Sets the CNC parameters of servo current control, speed control, position control, and
backlash acceleration.
SERVO GAIN TUNING Adjusts the speed loop gain automatically.
HIGH-PRECISION Sets the CNC parameters of servo time constants and automatic
acceleration/deceleration.
MISCELLANY Sets the CNC parameters of axis path assignment, DI/DO, and serial spindles.
- 595 -
- Items displayed with [TUNING]

The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo, spindle, and high-speed high-precision machining
tuning.
Fig. 12.4.6.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING]

Display item Description
SERVO TUNING Servo tuning screen
NOTE
Some items may not be displayed, depending on the system configuration.
12.4.6.2 Displaying and setting the axis setting screen

This screen enables the CNC parameters related to axes, coordinates, feedrate, and
acceleration/deceleration to be displayed and set. The parameters displayed can be divided into four
groups:
(Basic) group :
The parameters related to basic settings are displayed.
(Coordinate) group :
The parameters related to coordinates are displayed.
(Feedrate) group :
The parameters related to feedrate are displayed.
(Acceleration/deceleration) group:
The parameters related to acceleration/deceleration are displayed.
The parameters can be initialized to the standard values (recommended by FANUC).
Display and setting

Procedure
1 Move the cursor to [AXIS SETTING] by pressing cursor key or on the parameter
setting support menu screen.
2 Press soft key [SELECT]. The screen display switches to the screen and soft keys shown below.
Fig. 12.4.6.2 (a) Parameter setting support screen (axis setting) (10.4-inch)
- 596 -
3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods
below.
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the desired parameter number by pressing page key or , and
cursor keys , , , and/or .

A brief description of the parameter where the cursor is placed is provided at the bottom of the
screen. However, no description is provided when the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit
parameters.
4 Input desired data then press the key on the MDI panel to set the parameter.
5 Press soft key [INIT]. The standard value (recommended by FANUC) for the item selected by the
cursor is displayed in the key input buffer. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state initializes the item
to the standard value.
6 Press soft key [GROUP INIT]([G_INIT] for the 8.4-inch display unit). A message asking whether to
set the group standard values is displayed on the screen. Pressing soft key [EXEC] in this state
inputs all of the standard values of the group.
NOTE
1 If the cursor is placed on a parameter that has no standard value assigned, no
standard value is input even when [INIT] is pressed.
2 When the cursor is placed on multiple bits for bit parameters, the multiple bits
can be input simultaneously. When [INIT] is pressed in this state, the key input
buffer displays the standard values for the bits where the cursor is placed. If a bit
has no standard value assigned, "*" is displayed for the bit, and no value is input
for the bit.
3 When [GROUP INIT]([G_INIT] for the 8.4-inch display unit) is pressed, those
parameters that have no standard values assigned are not initialized.
12.4.6.3 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen

From the parameter setting support screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details
of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB amplifier setting screen in
Subsection 1.4.4 in the Connection Manual (Function) (B-64303EN-1).
- 597 -
Fig. 12.4.6.3 (a) FSSB amplifier setting screen (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.4.6.3 (b) FSSB amplifier setting screen 2 (10.4-inch)
12.4.6.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen

From the parameter setting support screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of
the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting screen Subsection 1.4.4 in the
Connection Manual (Function) (B-64303EN-1).
- 598 -
Fig. 12.4.6.4 (a) FSSB axis setting screen (10.4-inch)
12.4.6.5 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen

From the parameter setting support screen, the servo setting screen can be displayed. For details of the
servo setting screen, see the description of the servo setting in Subsection III-12.4.4.
Fig. 12.4.6.5 (a) Servo setting screen (10.4-inch)
12.4.6.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen

Servo-related parameters can be displayed or changed.
The CNC parameters of servo current control, speed control, position control, and backlash acceleration
can be displayed or changed.
- 599 -
Displaying the servo parameter screen

The servo parameter screen can be displayed from the parameter setting support screen. For the display
procedure, see the parameter setting support screen (axis setting) described earlier.
Switching screen display

There are two types of screen display for the servo parameter screen.
1. Display for each axis
The items to be set are displayed for each axis.
2. Display for each item
Display is performed for each item to be set.
(Data of all axes is displayed for each item.)
Screen display is switched between display for each axis and display for each item each time soft key
[CHANGE] is pressed. To display soft key [CHANGE], follow the procedure below.
1. Display the servo parameter screen.
2. Press continuous menu key to display soft key [CHANGE].
Fig. 12.4.6.6 (a) Servo parameter screen (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.4.6.6 (b) Servo parameter screen (display for each axis) (10.4-inch)
- 600 -
Fig. 12.4.6.6 (c) Servo parameter screen (display for each item) (10.4-inch)
Setting the servo parameter screen

Procedure
1 On the setting screen, confirm PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON.
2 Press soft key [AXIS] several times to select the axis to be set.
3 Enter a value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT] or MDI key [INPUT].
The parameters can be initialized to their default values (FANUC recommended values). (For this
procedure, see this subsection or "Parameter setting support screen (axis setting)".)
12.4.6.7 Displaying and setting the servo gain tuning screen

On the servo gain tuning screen, it is possible to adjust the following parameters automatically so that
optimum velocity gain can be set easily according to the machine characteristics.
• Load inertia ratio (parameter No. 2021)
• Velocity gain multiplier during cutting (parameter No. 2107)
• Velocity gain multiplier during high speed HRV current control (parameter No. 2335)
Displaying and setting the servo gain tuning screen

The servo gain tuning screen can be displayed from the parameter setting support screen. For the
display procedure, see "Parameter setting support screen (axis setting)" described earlier.
There are two types of screen display for the servo gain tuning screen.
On the automatic tuning screen, servo software calculates the optimum servo loop gain of all axes or a
selected axis and automatically sets VELOCITY GAIN, CUT OVR, and H. SP HRV.
On the manual tuning screen, VELOCITY GAIN, CUT OVR, and H. SP HRV of the desired axis can be
set directly with MDI keys.
- 601 -
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (a) Servo gain tuning screen (automatic tuning screen) (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (b) Servo gain tuning screen (manual tuning screen) (10.4-inch)
Display item
VELOCITY GAIN
The value calculated by the CNC with the following expression on the basis of parameter No. 2021 is
displayed.
(Expression):
VELOCITY GAIN = (256 + No. 2021) / 256 × 100
CUT OVR
The setting of parameter No. 2107 is displayed.
H. SP HRV
The setting of parameter No. 2335 is displayed.
- 602 -
VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS

The automatic tuning status is displayed. The automatic tuning status is indicated by one of the
following four states: "tuning finished", which indicates that automatic tuning is completed, "tuning not
finished", which indicates that automatic tuning is not completed, "tuning in progress", which indicates
that automatic tuning is in progress, and "initial status error", which indicates that automatic tuning is not
completed successfully.
For the axis for which automatic tuning is completed, TUN. FINISH is displayed under VEL. GAIN TUN.
STATUS. For the axis for which automatic tuning is in progress, ON TUNING is displayed. For the
axis for which automatic tuning is not completed successfully, INIT. ERR is displayed. For the axis for
which automatic tuning is not completed, no message is displayed under VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS.
Even when automatic tuning of an axis is completed, however, if automatic tuning is performed again, the
previous message is cleared. Therefore, if automatic tuning is interrupted, the indication becomes blank.
CNC mode when the velocity gain is set

When setting the velocity gain on the servo gain tuning screen, set PARAMETER WRITE to 1 (enabled)
on the setting screen and set the CNC in the MDI mode.
If the velocity gain is set when PARAMETER WRITE is 0, a warning saying "WRITE PROTECT" is
issued. If the velocity gain is set in other than the MDI mode, a warning saying "WRONG MODE" is
issued.
Servo gain automatic tuning screen

On the automatic tuning screen, servo software calculates the optimum servo loop gain of all axes or a
selected axis and automatically sets VELOCITY GAIN, CUT OVR, and H. SP HRV. This process is
called automatic tuning.
When soft key [ALL AX] is pressed on the automatic tuning screen, the servo loop gain of all axes is
automatically set. When [SEL AX] is pressed, the servo loop gain of the axis selected by the cursor is
automatically set. These processes are called all axis tuning and selected axis tuning, respectively.
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (c) Servo gain automatic tuning screen (10.4-inch)
- 603 -
- All axis tuning

When [ALL AX] is pressed on the automatic tuning screen, the following soft keys are displayed and
SERVO GAIN TUNING (AUTO-TUN. ALL AXES) is indicated on the title bar of the screen.
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (d) Automatic tuning screen (all axis tuning) (10.4-inch)
- All axis batch tuning

When no axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [ALL AX TUNING] ([EXEC
ALL] for the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
When soft key [ALL AX TUNING] is pressed during all axis tuning, all axes are subjected to automatic
tuning one by one, beginning with the first axis. However, the targets of automatic tuning are only the
axes for which automatic tuning is not completed. For example, in the conditions shown in the above
figure, automatic tuning starts with the X-axis and, when the X-axis is completed, proceeds to the T-axis.
The Y-axis and C-axis are not subjected to automatic tuning.
The cursor keys are disabled during all axis batch tuning. Upon completion of automatic tuning of all
axes, the cursor returns to the first axis and the cursor keys are enabled.
If the screen is switched to another during all axis batch tuning, automatic tuning is canceled when
automatic tuning of the current axis is completed. To start automatic tuning again, display this screen
and press soft key [ALL AX TUNING].
NOTE
1 The axis for which TUN. FINISH or INIT. ERR is indicated under VEL. GAIN
TUN. STATUS is not subjected to automatic tuning.
2 If the screen is switched to another during all axis batch tuning, all axis batch
tuning is aborted.
- All axis step tuning

When no axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [ONE AX TUNING] ([ONE EX]
for the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
When soft key [ONE AX TUNING] is pressed, as in all axis batch tuning, the axes for which automatic
tuning is not completed are subjected to automatic tuning one by one, beginning with the first axis.
Each time an axis is subjected to automatic tuning, however, automatic tuning stops. At this time, the
cursor automatically moves to the next axis for which automatic tuning is not completed.
- 604 -
For example, in the conditions shown in the above figure, automatic tuning starts with the X-axis and,
when the X-axis is completed, the cursor moves to the T-axis; then automatic tuning stops. If soft key
[ONE AX TUNING] is pressed again at this time, the T-axis is subjected to automatic tuning.
The cursor keys are disabled when any axis is being subjected to automatic tuning and, if automatic
tuning is completed, the cursor keys are enabled. When automatic tuning of all axes is completed, the
cursor returns to the first axis.
NOTE
Even when the cursor positions at other than the first axis, automatic tuning
starts with the first axis.
- Aborting automatic tuning

When no axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [CANCEL] is displayed. When
soft key [CANCEL] is pressed, the servo gain tuning screen (automatic tuning screen) is displayed again
without automatic tuning being started.
- Clearing tuning completion

When no axis in a path is not being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [FINISH CLEAR] ([FIN.CL]
for the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
When [FINISH CLEAR] is pressed during all axis tuning, the VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS indication of
the axes in the tuning completion state is cleared to the incompletion state (blank) as shown in the right
half of the lower figure. However, the set VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, and H. SP HRV are not
cleared.
- 605 -
Cleared
NOTE
A clear operation in the tuning completion state does not clear the VEL. GAIN
TUN. STATUS indication of the axis in the INIT. ERR state.
To clear the INIT. ERR state, change the setting of VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR,
or H. SP HRV on the manual tuning screen.
- Select axis tuning

When soft key [SEL AX] is pressed on the automatic tuning screen, the following soft keys are displayed
and the SERVO GAIN TUNING (AUTO-TUN SEL AXES) is indicated on the title bar of the screen.
- 606 -
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (e) Automatic tuning screen (select axis tuning) (10.4-inch)
- Selected axis tuning

When no axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [TUNING START] ([START] for
the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
When soft key [TUNING START] is pressed during selected axis tuning, the axis selected by the cursor
is subjected to automatic tuning. At this time, automatic tuning is performed again regardless of the
tuning status of the selected axis. For example, in the state shown above, automatic tuning of the Y-axis
was finished, but automatic tuning is performed again.
The cursor keys are disabled during selected axis tuning. Upon completion of automatic tuning, the
cursor keys are enabled.
- Aborting automatic tuning

When no axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [CANCEL] is displayed. When
soft key [CANCEL] is pressed, the servo gain tuning screen (automatic tuning screen) is displayed again
without automatic tuning being started.
- Clearing the automatic tuning status

When no axis in a path is not being subjected to automatic tuning, soft key [FINISH CLEAR] ([FIN.CL]
for the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed. When [FINISH CLEAR] is pressed during selected axis
tuning, if the axis selected by the cursor is in the tuning completion state, the indication of VEL. GAIN
TUN. STATUS is cleared to the incompletion state (blank). However, the set VELOCITY GAIN, CUT
DVR, and H. SP HRV are not cleared.
- 607 -
Cleared
NOTE
A clear operation in the tuning completion state does not clear the VEL. GAIN
TUN. STATUS indication of the axis in the INIT. ERR state.
To clear the INIT. ERR state, change the setting of VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR,
or H. SP HRV on the manual tuning screen.
- Forcibly stopping automatic tuning

When one axis in a path is being subjected to automatic tuning, the following screen and soft key
[TUNING STOP] ([STOP] for the 8.4-inch display unit) is displayed.
- 608 -
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (f) All axes being tuned (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (g) Selected axis being tuned (10.4-inch)
When soft key [TUNING STOP] is pressed at this time, automatic tuning is forcibly stopped even during
automatic tuning. It is also possible to forcibly stop automatic tuning by pressing the RESET key or set
the CNC in the emergency stop state.
The VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, and H. SP HRV settings of the axis for which automatic tuning was
stopped midway are returned to the settings before automatic tuning. For all axis tuning, the
VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, and H. SP HRV settings of the axis for which automatic tuning was
completed remain at the values set during automatic tuning.
However, automatic tuning is stopped midway, so the indication of VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS becomes
blank (incompletion).
NOTE
Automatic tuning can be stopped regardless of the cursor position.
- 609 -
- Servo gain manual tuning screen

On the manual tuning screen, it is possible to directly enter a value in VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, and
H. SP HRV of an arbitrary axis with MDI keys. This operation is called manual tuning.
- Displaying the manual tuning screen

When soft key [MANUAL TUNING] ([MANUAL] for the 8.4-inch display unit) is pressed on the
automatic tuning screen, the manual tuning screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.6.7 (h) Servo gain tuning screen (manual tuning screen) (10.4-inch)
NOTE
If any axis is being subjected to automatic tuning, [MANUAL TUNING] is not
displayed on the automatic tuning screen. Accordingly, the manual tuning
screen cannot be displayed during automatic tuning.
- Setting parameters
Move the cursor to the desired item of the desired axis and enter a value directly with MDI keys.
When soft key [+INPUT], soft key [INPUT], or MDI key [INPUT] is pressed, the value is set.
Soft key [+ INPUT]

The value already set plus the value entered by MDI keys are set.
Example) When the current setting is 500 and the value entered by MDI keys is 50
The value to be entered is 550.
MDI key [INPUT], soft key [INPUT]

The value entered by the MDI key is set as is.
NOTE
During input with soft key [INPUT], if a value preceded by the + symbol such as
"+1" is input, a warning saying "FORMAT ERROR" is issued.
If a value falling outside the set range is input, the value is changed so as to fall
within the range.
- 610 -
- Automatic tuning state

TUN. FINISH is indicated under VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS for the axis that was subjected to automatic
tuning and INIT. ERR is indicated for the axis for which the initial status is illegal. If any of
VELOCITY GAIN, CUT OVR, and H.SP HRV of the axis that was subjected to automatic tuning or the
axis for which the initial status is illegal is set to a value, the VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS indication is
cleared to become blank (incompletion state).
- Switching to the automatic tuning screen

To return to the automatic tuning screen from the manual tuning screen, press soft key [AUTO TUNING]
([AUTO] for the 8.4-inch screen) on the manual tuning screen. The automatic tuning screen appears.
- Caution
Reset
If the RESET key is pressed or external reset signal ERS<Gn008.7> or reset & rewind signal
RRW<Gn008.6> is input during automatic tuning, automatic tuning is stopped.
VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS "INIT. ERR"

When INIT. ERR is indicated under VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS, automatic tuning cannot be performed
because the setting of VELOCITY GAIN is illegal.
Change the setting of VELOCITY GAIN.
Changing parameters
If the setting of VELOCITY GAIN, CUT OVR, or H.SP HRV of the axis being subjected to automatic
tuning is changed on the parameter screen or by an external application, automatic tuning is stopped. At
this time, automatic tuning is incomplete and VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS becomes blank.
Re-execution of automatic tuning

To re-execute automatic tuning of the axis for which TUN. FINISH or INIT. ERR is indicated in all axis
tuning, clear the indication of VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS.
If selected axis tuning is used, automatic tuning of an axis that was subjected to automatic tuning can be
re-executed without the indication of VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS being cleared.
MDI operation and automatic tuning

Do not perform automatic tuning during MDI operation. Otherwise, a warning saying "CNC
RUNNING" is issued.
Similarly, do not perform MDI operation during automatic tuning. Otherwise, an alarm DS2005 "NOW
GAIN TUNING" is issued.
Automatic tuning between paths

Automatic tuning cannot be performed on multiple paths at the same time. If an attempt is made to
perform automatic tuning on one path while automatic tuning is performed on another path, a warning
saying "NOW TUNING OTHER AXIS" is issued. At this time, automatic tuning of the path on which
automatic tuning is performed continues (not stopped).
Servo alarm
If the positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation limit, servo alarm SV0411 is issued. Set the
parameter No. 1828 (positional deviation limit during movement) again.
12.4.6.8 Displaying and setting the high-precision setting screen

The CNC parameters of servo time constants and automatic acceleration/deceleration can be displayed
and changed.
- 611 -
Displaying the high-precision setting screen

The servo parameter screen can be displayed from the parameter setting support screen. (For the display
procedure, see "Parameter setting support screen (axis setting)" earlier.)
Switching screen display

There are the following two display methods for high-precision setting.
1. Display for each axis
The items to be set are displayed for each axis.
2. Display for each item
Display is performed for each item to be set. (Data of all axes is displayed for each item.)
Fig. 12.4.6.8 (a) High-precision setting screen (display for each axis) (10.4-inch)
Fig. 12.4.6.8 (b) High-precision setting screen (display for each item) (10.4-inch)
Screen display is switched between display for each axis and display for each item each time soft key
[CHANGE] is pressed. (For the switching method, see "Parameter setting support screen (servo
parameter)" earlier.)
- 612 -
Setting the high-precision setting screen

For the setting procedure, see "Parameter setting support screen (servo parameter)" earlier.
12.4.6.9 Displaying and setting the miscellaneous setting screen

Allocation of axis paths and setting of DI/DO and serial spindles can be performed. It is also possible to
initialize parameters to the default settings (FANUC recommended values).
For the display and setting procedures, see "Parameter setting support screen (axis setting)" earlier.
Fig. 12.4.6.9 (a) Parameter setting support screen (miscellaneous) (10.4-inch)
12.4.6.10 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen

From the parameter setting support screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the
servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tuning screen in Subsection III-12.4.4.
Fig. 12.4.6.10 (a) Servo tuning screen (10.4-inch)
- 613 -
Explanation
- Parameters displayed for parameter setting support
Table 12.4.6.10 (a) Parameters displayed for parameter setting support (1)
Parameter
Menu Group Name Brief description
No.
AXIS BASIC 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes:
SETTING 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:Inch (inch machine)
1005#0 ZRNx When an automatic operation (other than G28) is executed before
reference position return:
0:Alarm is issued (PS0224) 1:No alarm is issued.
1005#1 DLZx Reference position return without dogs:
0:Disabled 1:Enabled
1006#0 ROTx Setting of linear axes or rotary axis:
0:Linear axis 1:Rotation axis
1006#3 DIAx Setting of the amount of travel:
0:Radius specification 1: Diameter specification
1006#5 ZMIx Reference position return direction:
0:Plus direction 1:Minus direction
1008#0 ROAx Rotation axis roll-over function:
0:Disabled 1:Enabled
1008#2 RRLx With the amount of travel per revolution, relative coordinates are:
0:Not rounded 1:Rounded
1013#1 ISCx Sets the least input increment and least command increment:
0:IS-B 1:IS-C
1020 Program name
1022 Sets each axis in the basic coordinate system.
1023 Servo axis number
1815#1 OPTx A separate pulse coder is:
0:Not used 1:Used
1815#4 APZx The correspondence between machine positions and
absolute-position detector positions is:
0:Not established 1:Established
1815#5 APCx The position detector used is:
0:Other than an absolute-position detector 1:Absolute-position
detector
1825 Servo loop gain
1826 In-position width
1828 Positional deviation limit during travel
1829 Positional deviation limit during stop
- 614 -
Table 12.4.6.10 (b) Parameters displayed for parameter setting support (2)
Parameter
Menu Group Name Brief description
No.
AXIS SPINDLE 3716#0 A/S (Not used)
SETTING 3717
COORDI- 1240 Machine coordinate of the first reference position
NATE
1241 Machine coordinate of the second reference position
1260 Amount of travel per revolution of a rotary axis
1320 Positive direction border coordinates of stored stroke check 1
1321 Negative direction border coordinates of stored stroke check 1
FEED 1401#6 RDR For a rapid traverse command, dry run is:
RATE 0:Disabled 1:Enabled
1410 Dry run feedrate
1420 Rapid traverse rate
1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate
1423 Jog feedrate
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate
1425 FL feedrate for reference position return
1428 Reference position return feedrate
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate
ACC./DEC 1610#0 CTL Acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed is:
. 0:Exponential acceleration/deceleration
1:Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1610#4 JGL Acceleration/deceleration for jog feed is:
0:Exponential acceleration/deceleration
1:Same as acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed (The settings
of bit 1 (CTBx) and bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610 are
followed.)
1620 Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration for rapid
traverse
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed
1623 FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for
cutting feed
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration for jog feed
1625 FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration for jog feed
MISCELLA MISC 981 Sets 0.
-NY 982 Sets 0.
3017 Output time of reset signal
3030 Allowable number of digits of an M code
3716#0 A/Ss (Not used)
3717
12.4.7 Periodic Maintenance Screen

Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit
and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting
down the life time, the life of the consumable can be counted down in the appropriate method set for the
consumable, and the remaining life time can be displayed.
With these screens, the user can easily manage consumables that require periodic replacement.
Explanation
There are four periodic maintenance screens: the status screen, the setting screen, the machine menu
screen, and the NC menu screen.
- 615 -
Status screen : Item names, remaining times, and count statuses are displayed, and item names
are set.
Setting screen : Life times, remaining times, and count types (count-down method) are set.
Machine menu screen : The names of consumables in the machine can be registered.
NC menu screen : The names of consumables in the NC are already registered.
Using periodic maintenance screens

<1> Referencing a periodic maintenance screen
Display the status screen. For the meanings of items on the status screen, see Item, “Status screen”.
<2> Adding the name of a new consumable item to a periodic maintenance screen or editing an existing
consumable item on the screen
The name of a consumable item can be added or edited on the machine menu screen. For details, see
Item, “Machine menu screen”.
<3> Adding or editing a life time, remaining time, and a method of counting down the remaining time for
a consumable on a periodic maintenance screen
A life time and remaining time can be added or edited on the setting screen. For details, see Item,
“Setting screen”.
<4> Newly displaying the item name and remaining time of a consumable on a periodic maintenance
screen.
1 Setting an item name
Select the item name of a consumable to be displayed from the machine menu screen or NC
menu screen, or enter the name using the MDI keys. For the procedure, see Item, “Item name”
in “Status screen”.
2 Setting a life time, remaining time, and count type
Select the life time, remaining time, and count type of a consumable to be displayed from the
setting screen. For the procedure, see Item, “Remaining time” in “Status screen”.
Procedure for displaying a periodic maintenance screen

2 Press the continuous menu key several times to display [PERIOD MAINTE].
3 Press soft key [PERIOD MAINTE] to display the periodic maintenance screen.
Status screen
When soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the item
names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables.
- 616 -
Fig. 12.4.7 (a) Status screen
- Item name
As the item name, set the name of a consumable to be managed by periodic maintenance. To set an item
name, select a name from the machine menu screen or NC menu screen, or directly enter the name using
the MDI keys.
Setting an item name from a menu screen

1 On the status screen, move the cursor to a target item name, press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft
key [ENTRY].
2 Press soft key [MACHINE] or [NC] to display the machine menu screen or NC menu screen.
3 Move the cursor to an existing item name on the menu screen, press soft key [(OPRT)], and press
soft key [SELECT] then [EXEC] successively.
4 The screen display returns to the status screen, and the item name selected on the menu screen is
added to the status screen.
Initially, there is no item name set on the machine menu screen, so item names must be registered in
advance. For the registration method, see the description of the procedure for registering item names on
the machine menu screen.
Setting an item name using the MDI keys

2 Type the alphanumeric characters to be input, then press soft key [INPUT].
3 The entered item name is registered on the status screen.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed instead of soft key [INPUT], the entered characters can be added to
an existing item name.
When typing 2-byte characters, type "*" before and after the character codes. The 2-byte character codes
must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
An item name to be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters
only; or it must be up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example: To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
>LCD*110E10F410CC114010B610FE*_
- 617 -
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte
characters is registered, the warning "DATA OUT OF RANGE" may be output.
Deleting an item name

To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press
soft key [EXEC].
When an item name is deleted, its life time, remaining time, and count type are deleted at the same time.
- Remaining time
As the remaining time, the period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down
operation is displayed.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached to the value (%) specified by
parameter No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Setting the remaining time

1 On the status screen, place the cursor on an item for which the remaining time is to be set (the item
name must have been set in advance).
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press soft key [CHANGE].
3 The screen display changes to the setting screen.
4 Set the life time, remaining time, and count type. For the setting method and other information, see
Item, “Setting screen”.
NOTE
On the status screen, the remaining time and life time cannot be set.
These items must be set on the setting screen.
- Count status
The count status is indicated on the left side of the item number as follows:
Indication Count status

Blank Counting stopped
@ Counting in progress
* Life expired
Setting screen
On the setting screen, the life time, remaining time, and count type of a managed consumable are set.
- 618 -
Fig. 12.4.7 (b) Setting screen
Display procedure
1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)].
2 Press soft key [CHANGE].
- Life time
Set the life time of a consumable.
Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life time, then press soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The
life time is then set, and the same value is set also as the remaining time.
At this time, "------" is indicated in the count type field.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the life time already set. The same
value as the added value is added also to the remaining time.
A value ranging from 0 to 65535 (in hours) can be set.
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name is not registered, the
warning "EDIT REJECTED" is issued.
2 If a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning "DATA IS OUT OF
RANGE" is issued.
3 If soft key [ERASE] or [TYPE] is pressed, the warning "EDIT REJECTED" is
issued.
- Remaining time
The period of time left until the time for replacement is reached by count down operation is indicated.
If the percentage of the remaining time to the life time has reached the value (%) specified by parameter
No. 8911, or smaller, the remaining time is displayed in red.
Even after the life time has expired, count down operation continues.
Move the cursor to the remaining time of a target registered number, type a remaining time, then press
soft key [INPUT] (or the key). The remaining time is then set.
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the entered value can be added to the remaining time already set.
A value ranging from 0 to (life time) can be set.
When soft key [ERASE] then soft key [EXEC] are pressed, the same value as the life time is set.
- 619 -
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT
OF RANGE” is issued.
3 If horizontal soft key [TYPE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is
issued.
- Count type
As the count type, select the way of counting.
Place the cursor on the count type of a target registration number, then press soft key [TYPE]. Count
types are displayed as soft keys as shown below. Select one of these soft keys, then press soft key
[EXEC].
Soft key Meaning Indication

[NO CNT] Counting is not performed (stopped) ——————
[ALL] Counting is performed at all times All times
[POWER ON] Counting is performed when power is on. When power is on
[RUN] Counting is performed when operation is in progress. When operation is in progress
[CUT] Counting is performed when cutting is being performed. When cutting is being performed
NOTE
1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not
registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
2 Soft keys [INPUT] and [+INPUT] have no effect.
3 When counting is performed at all times, a 24-hour error is generated in leap
year.
4 If soft key [ERASE] is pressed, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued.
Machine menu screen

On the machine menu screen, the names of consumables of the machine are registered. From this screen,
item names can be added to the status screen. For the method of addition to the status screen, see the
description of the status screen.
- 620 -
Fig. 12.4.7 (c) Machine menu screen
- Displaying the screen

1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE].
On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods:
• Registration from a program
• Registration using the MDI keys
- Registration from a program

By executing a program having the following format, an item name can be registered in the menu of the
machine:
Format
G10 L61 Px [n]
X… Registration number
n… Item name,
format: [alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters]
- Registration using the MDI keys

An item name can be registered on the menu screen of the machine by typing the item name in the format
shown below on the machine menu screen, then pressing soft key [INPUT] (or the key).
When soft key [+INPUT] is pressed, the typed characters can be added to an already registered item
name.
Format
Alphanumeric-characters*2-byte-characters*alphanumeric-characters
Two-byte character codes must conform to FANUC codes. (See Appendix, "FANUC 2-BYTE
CHARACTER CODE TABLE".)
When typing 2-byte characters, type an asterisk "*" before and after the character codes. An item name to
be registered must be up to 24 characters long if it consists of alphanumeric characters only; or it must be
up to 12 characters long if it consists of 2-byte characters only.
Example:
To register "LCD バックライト", enter the following:
Registration with a program
G10 L61 P1 [LCD＊110E10F410CC114010B610FE＊]
Registration with MDI keys
>LCD＊110E10F410CC114010B610FE＊_
NOTE
1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In
addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names.
2 When an item name consisting of both alphanumeric characters and 2-byte
characters is registered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” may be output.
3 When a blank item name is selected on the machine screen, the warning “EDIT
REJECTED” is issued.
- 621 -
To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press
soft key [EXEC].
NC menu screen
On the NC menu screen, the names of NC consumables are registered. From this screen, an item name
can be registered on the status screen. For the method of registration to the status screen, see the
description of the status screen.
Fig. 12.4.7 (d) NC menu screen
- Displaying the screen

1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [NC].
NOTE
On the NC menu screen, the registration, deletion, and I/O of item names cannot
be performed.
When a blank item name is selected, a blank is set.
12.4.8 System Configuration Screen

The system configuration screen provides information about the types of installed hardware and software.
Procedure for displaying the screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key to display a screen that shows parameters and other information.
2 Press soft key [SYSTEM]. The system configuration screen is displayed.
There are two types of system configuration screens: the hardware configuration screen and the software
configuration screen. The screen display can switch between these screens by using and .
When soft key [SERVO INFO] or [SPINDLE INFO] is pressed, information about the connected servo
system or spindles is displayed.
- 622 -
Fig. 12.4.8 (a) System configuration screen
Hardware configuration screen

This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC.
Fig. 12.4.8 (b) Hardware configuration screen
Software configuration screen

This screen shows the names and series/editions of the software used by the NC.
- 623 -
Fig. 12.4.8 (c) Software configuration screen
Servo information screen

When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo
motors and servo amplifiers) can be displayed on the NC.
Displaying the screen

1 When the system configuration screen is displayed, press soft key [SERVO INFO].
2 The servo information screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.4.8 (d) Servo information screen
12.4.9 Overview of the History Function

The history function records the operations performed by the operator, alarms that occurred, and external
operator messages and checks their history or outputs them as history data.
Conditions for recording history

a Display screen
A history of screens other than the operation history screen is recorded.
b Signal selection
Up to 60 I/O signals can be selected so that they can be recorded in history data.
c Parameter setting
With parameters, it is possible to separately set whether to record an MDI key operation history
and an external operator message history, add external alarms and messages, and record data
modification histories such as operation histories of parameters, tool offsets, workpiece offsets
(workpiece shift amounts), custom macro common variables, and I/O signals.
Data output
All history data stored can be output to external input/output devices. (See Subsection 12.4.15.5,
"Outputting all history data".)
NOTE
1 All history data remains even after the power is turned off.
Clearing memory also deletes these history data items.
2 Set the time and date correctly on the setting screen.
12.4.9.1 Operation history
- 624 -
This function displays a history of the operator's key operations and signal operations made when a
failure occurred or an alarm was issued, and also information about alarms.
The following data is recorded:
a Operation history
i MDI key operations made by the operator
ii I/O signal (X,Y,G,F) on/off switching
b Alarm history
i Alarms issued
ii Modal information in a block executed and coordinates observed when an alarm was issued
(Not displayed on the screen)
c Data modification history
i Modification of tool offset data
(When bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
ii Modification of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset data/workpiece shift (T
series)
(When bit 1 (HWO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
iii Modification of parameters
(When bit 2 (HPM) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
iv Modification of custom macro common variable data
(When bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1)
d External operator message history and macro message history
(When bit 6 (HOM) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 0)
e Time stamp (time and date)
With some exceptions, history data of the operation history and alarm history can be viewed on the
operation history screen. (The data modification history, external operator message history, and alarm
messages are not displayed.)
All recorded history data can be output to external input/output devices.
NOTE
Up to about 8000 items of history data can be recorded if the data includes
history data of MDI key operations only. However, because history data varies in
size, the maximum number of history data items that can be recorded is not
fixed.
Screen display
To display the operation history screen, set bit 4 (OPH) of parameter No. 3106 to 1.
Procedure
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] ([OPEHIS] for
3 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY], then press newly displayed soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. The
operation history screen is then displayed.
4 To display the previous page and next page of the operation history, use page keys and .
To display a part across two pages, use the cursor keys and . The screen display is
shifted by half page.
(With the 8.4-inch display devices, the screen display is shifted by one column.)
By pressing soft key [(OPRT)] on the operation history screen, it becomes possible to perform the
following soft key operations:
- 625 -
a [TOP] displays the starting page (the oldest data).

b [BOTTOM] displays the end page (the latest data).
c [NO.SRH] displays specified operation history data.
(Example) Specifying 50 then [NO.SRH] displays the 50th data.
Fig. 12.4.9.1 (a) Operation history screen
Displayed information
1 Serial number and display start history number/total number of history data items
A serial number is indicated on the left side of each recorded history data item. A smaller serial
number indicates an older data item.
In the upper right part of the screen, the display start history number and the total number of history
data items are indicated. The total number of history data items does not include history data items
not displayed on the screen.
2 Data
• MDI key
When bit 5 (HKE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, key operations are recorded.
A key operation is indicated following a path number (for example, "1_[LEFT F]", and
"2_[LEFT F]"). (When only one path is used, the path number is not indicated.)
P_ used in "P_[LEFT F]", for example, indicates a key operation made from the outside.
i Address keys and numeric keys
Characters such as A to Z, 0 to 9, ;, +, and - are indicated directly.
These characters are displayed in black.
ii Function menu keys, operation menu keys, and soft keys
These keys are enclosed in brackets [] (for example, "[LEFT F]", "[SOFT 1]" to "[SOFT
10]", and "[RIGHT F]"). These keys are displayed with green characters.
iii Function keys, page keys, cursor keys, and so on
These keys are enclosed in angle brackets <> (for example, "<POS>", "<SYSTEM>",
"<PAGE ↑>", "<CUR →>", "<RESET>", and "<INPUT>"). These keys are displayed
with green characters.
iv Power-on key
This key is displayed with white characters in the green background.
- 626 -
• I/O signals
When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation
history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit
basis with information about the signal address and a change in bit. These signals are displayed
with purple characters.
G000.2 ↓
Change from 0 to 1 is indicated by ↑.
Change from 1 to 0 is indicated by ↓.
Indicates a bit.
Indicates the address of a signal.
NOTE
1 When more than one bit at the same address changes at the same time, the
changes of these bits are treated as one history data item.
2 A signal fluctuation for less than 8 msec is not recorded as history data.
• Alarms
Alarm numbers and the issuance times are displayed on the operation history screen.
This alarm information is displayed with white characters in the red background.
Indicates the path number.
Indicates the alarm number.
For the servo axis type, indicates the servo axis name.
1_OT0506 (XA1)
2008/01/11 Indicates the date and time of issuance in two lines.
11:22:33
When a path name, axis name, or spindle name was changed after the issuance of an alarm, the
alarm is indicated with a newly assigned name.
• Time and date

The time and date of the following are displayed in two lines:
i The time and date of power-on. These are displayed with white characters in the green
background.
ii The time and date of power-off. These are displayed with green characters.
iii Date on which the date changed. This is displayed with black characters.
iv Date and time at regular intervals of the period set in parameter No. 3122. These are
displayed with black characters.
v Date and time when history data was erased. These are displayed with black characters.
NOTE
1 For item iv (recording time at regular intervals) above, if there is no operation to
be recorded within a certain period, the time is not recorded. For item iii (date
on which the date changed) above, however, it is assumed that there is a data
item to be recorded and item iv (recording time at regular intervals) above is also
recorded.
2 When the date and time in the CNC system are changed, the date and time at
which the change is made may be recorded as the date and time in iii or iv
above.
- 627 -
History data not displayed on the screen

In addition to history data of MDI keys, I/O signal status, alarms issued, external operator messages (not
displayed on the operation history screen), and time stamps, data described below can be recorded with
time. Such history data cannot be displayed on the screen but can be output to external input/output
devices. (See Subsection 12.4.15.5, "Outputting all history data".)
1 Detailed data at alarm issuance

If bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 0, 10 modal G codes, auxiliary function codes D, E, F,
H, M, N, O, S, and T, absolute coordinates, and machine coordinates in the block being executed
when an alarm was issued are recorded together with the alarm number and the time of alarm
issuance.
The group numbers of the 10 modal G codes to be recorded are set in parameter Nos. 12990 to
12999. If these parameters are not specified, modal G codes of groups 01 to 10 are recorded.
NOTE
To record as many items as possible instead of recording detailed data at alarm
issuance, set bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 to 1.
2 External alarm messages and macro alarm messages

If bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1, external alarm messages and macro alarm messages
can also be recorded as history data.
NOTE
To record also external alarm and macro alarm messages as history data, set bit
3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 to 1, and at the same time set bit 7 (HAL) of
parameter No. 3196 to 0.
3 Modification of tool offset data

If bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when tool offset data is modified, the number and
type of the tool offset are recorded as well as the tool offset data before modification, the tool offset
data after modification, and the time of modification.
4 Modification of workpiece offset/workpiece shift (T series) data

If bit 1 (HWO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when workpiece offset data is modified, the
number of the modified workpiece offset is recorded as well as the workpiece offset data before
modification, the workpiece offset data after modification, and the time of modification. Similar data
is recorded also when workpiece shift amounts (T series) are modified.
5 Modification of parameters
If bit 2 (HPM) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when a parameter is modified, the number and type
(axis type, spindle type, path type, or machine group type) of the parameter are recorded as well as
the parameter data before modification, the parameter data after modification, and the time of
modification.
NOTE
Modifications made at power-on and modifications of passwords and keys are not
recorded as history data.
6 Modification of custom macro common variables (#100 to #999)

If bit 3 (HMV) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1, when a custom macro common variable is
modified, the number of the common variable is recorded as well as the common variable value
before modification, the common variable value after modification, and the time of modification.
- 628 -
Erasing history data from the operation history screen
Procedure
1 Display the operation history screen.
3 Press soft key [ALL CLEAR].
4 Press soft key [EXEC]. Operation history data is erased.
12.4.9.2 Selecting operation history signals

I/O signals to be recorded as history data can be selected. Up to 60 signals can be set to select signals.
Setting data
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY].
4 Press soft key [SIGNAL SELECT] to display the operation history signal selection screen.
6 Move the cursor to a desired position by using cursor keys and .
7 Type a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press .

Example:
When G0004 is entered then is pressed:
The entered signal address, G0004, is set in ADDRESS, and initial value 00000000 is set in
SIGNAL.
8 Select the bits to be recorded in the history.
To change the status of all bits of the specified signal address, place the cursor in all bits so that the
bits are highlighted (for example, "00000000"), then press soft key [ON:1] or [OFF:0]. Then, the bits
are set to 11111111 or 00000000.
To change the status of only a certain bit, move the cursor to the bit by using cursor keys and
, and press [ON:1] or [OFF:0]. The selected bit is then set to 1 or 0.

9 Up to 60 addresses can be set to select signals. Addresses need not necessarily be set sequentially
starting from No. 1.
NOTE
1 While the operation history signal selection screen is being displayed, recording
of history data is not performed.
2 Only X, Y, G, and F can be set for I/O signals.
For data not set, "********" is displayed.
3 Even when an address is set, history data is not recorded if all bits are set to 0.
4 When the ON/OFF width of an input signal is less than 8 msec, recording of
history data is not performed. Also, there are some signals that are not recorded.
5 When many signals are selected, the processing speed may lower.
Clearing the selection of each signal

1 Display the operation history signal selection screen.
2 Move the cursor to the data to be cleared.
3 Press soft key [DELETE].
- 629 -
4 Press soft key [EXEC].
Clearing the selection of all signals

1 Display the operation history signal selection screen.
2 Press soft key [ALLDEL].
3 Press soft key [EXEC].
Fig. 12.4.9.2 (a) Operation history signal selection screen
Selection with parameters

If bit 4 (PHS) of parameter No. 3206 is 1, selection of input/output signals to be recorded as history data
can be made with parameters.
In this case, if a signal is selected or deselected on the operation history signal selection screen, the value
of the corresponding parameter is automatically changed. If the value of a parameter is changed on the
parameter screen, the display on the operation history signal selection screen is also changed.
The same applies to input operations. If operation history signal selection data is input on the operation
history signal selection screen, the value of the corresponding parameter is automatically changed. If a
parameter is input on the parameter screen, the display on the operation history signal selection screen is
also changed.
Only the first 20 of the 60 data items can be selected with parameters.
12.4.9.3 Outputting all history data

All history data (operation history data, alarm history data, and operator message history data) can be
output to external input/output devices.
It is impossible, however, to output history data individually.
Procedure
1 Make an output device ready for output.
2 Set the EDIT mode.
4 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [OPERAT HISTRY] ([OPEHIS] for
- 630 -
5 Press soft key [OPERAT HISTRY], then press newly displayed soft key [OPERAT HISTRY]. The
operation history screen is displayed.
7 Press soft key [F OUTPUT].
8 Enter a file name, and press soft key [EXEC].
When soft key [EXEC] is pressed without entering a file name, the output file name is assumed to be
OPRT_HIS.TXT.
Output format
History data is output as an ASCII file in the following format:
1 MDI keys
After "MDI", "path-number_", "key-data", and "input-time" are output in this order.
(Key data input at power-on is indicated as "Power on MDI".)
<Example>
MDI 01_A 12:23:34
MDI 02_<CAN> 12:23:34
MDI 02_[SOFT HF1] 12:23:35
MDI P_<RESET> 12:34:56
Power on MDI 01_<RESET> 12:34:56
2 I/O signals
After "DI/DO", "PMC-number_", "signal-address_bit-status", and "time-of-change" are output in
this order.
<Example>
DI/DO 1_F0002.2_on 12:34:56
DI/DO 1_ G0043.0_off G0043.1_off 12:35:00 (For multiple bits at the same address)
3 Alarms
After "Alarm", "path-number_", "type", "alarm-number", "G-code-modal-data",
"modal-data-other-than-G-code", "absolute-coordinate-value" and "machine-coordinate-value" for
each axis, and "date-and-time-of-alarm-issuance" are output in this order.
An asterisk "*" is output before the modal data that was specified in a block executed when the
alarm was issued.
<Example>
• Alarm 01_SR01973
*G0 G17 G90 G22 G94 G21 G40 G50 G67 G54 B0. D0. E0. *F100. H0. M10. *N123. O123
S0. T10. X ABS 197.999 MCN 197.999 Y ABS -199806.00 MCN -199806.00 C ABS 297.009
MCN 0.123 at 2007/09/01 19:03:28
• Alarm 02_ OT00506(Y)
*G0 G17 G90 G22 G94 G21 G40 G50 G67 G54 B0. *D12. E0. *F100. H0. M0. *N123. O123
S0. T0. X ABS 123.999 MCN 234.000 Y ABS -123.00 MCN -234.00 C ABS 1234.567 MCN
–1234.567 at 2007/09/01 12:34:56
• When additional information is not to be recorded when an alarm is issued (bit 7 (HAL) of
parameter No. 3196 is set to 1), only "path-number_", "alarm-number", and
"date-and-time-of-alarm-issuance" are output.
Alarm 01_OT00506(X) at 2007/09/01 22:08:32
Alarm 02_SW00100 at 2007/09/01 19:07:52
• When external alarm/macro alarm messages are to be recorded (bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No.
3196 is set to 0) and bit 3 (EAH) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1, the messages are also
output.
Alarm 01_MC00001 Message ATC ALARM
G0 G17 G90 G22 G94 G21 G40 G50 G67 G54 B0. D0. E0. F0. H0. M0. N0. O9999 S0. T0.
- 631 -
X ABS 10.000 MCN 0.000 Y ABS 123.000 MCN 0.000 C ABS 0.000 MCN 0.000 at
2007/09/01 10:06:43
4 External operator messages

After "EXT_Message", "message-number", "message", and "date-and-time-of-issuance" are output
in this order.
<Example>
EXT_Message 01234 OIL PRESSURE DECREASE at 2007/09/01 2:38:43
5 Modification of tool offset data

After "Tool Offset", "path-number_", "offset-number", "offset-data-before-modification",
"offset-data-after-modification", and "time-of-modification" are output in this order.
<Example>
Tool Offset 01_0032 12.340 → 12.569 at 11:39:42
6 Modification of workpiece offset/workpiece shift (T series) data

After "Work Offset", "path-number_", "type(axis-name)", "offset-number", "offset-data-before-
modification", "offset-data-after-modification", and "time-of-modification" are output in this order.
<Example>
Work Offset 01_G55(X) 15.000 → 0.007 at 09:23:03
Work Offset 01_EXT(Y) 0.000 → 300.003 at 09:22:50
7 Modification of parameters
After "Parameter", "type", "parameter-number", "parameter-before-modification", "parameter-after-
modification", and "time-of-modification" are output in this order.
The following types are provided:
Path type : L is added before the path number.
Axis type : A is added before the axis number.
Machine group type : Indicated as the machine type. T is added before the machine group number.
Others : No type is output.
<Example>
Parameter N03112 00000100 → 00001100 at 11:18:40
Parameter Path type N01410 L01 0.000 → 1000.000 at 18:58:48
Parameter Axis type N01423 A04(B) 0.000 → 10000.000 at 18:58:48
Parameter Machine type N06310 T01 0 → -32768 at 19:21:13
8 Modification of custom macro common variables (#100 to #999)

After "Macro variable", "path-number_", "#variable-number", "common-variable-value-before-
modification", "common-variable-value-after-modification", and "time-of-modification" are output
in this order.
Variable values are output in the data format M × (10**(-E)).
<Example>
• When #149 on the first path was modified from <empty> to 12.345
Macro variable 01_#149 Empty → 123450000*(10**-7) at 15:02:35
• When #549 on the second path was modified from -12.345 to 123456789012
Macro variable 02_#549 -123450000*(10**-7) →123456789*(10**3) at 15:03:27
9 Date and time

Power on at 2008/02/01 17:11:17 (Date and time of power-on)
Power off at 2008/02/01 17:49:17 (Date and time of power-off)
Date 2008/02/01 00:00:00 (Record indicating a change in date)
Time stamp at 2008/02/01 15:51:00 (Record at regular intervals)
Data delete at 2008/02/01 10:56:18 (Date and time when history data was deleted)
- 632 -
By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, alarm history, and operator messages can be
displayed.
For details, see Sections, “ALARM DISPLAY” and “ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY”.
For operator messages, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
12.6 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER, SEQUENCE

NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND WARNING MESSAGES
FOR DATA SETTING OR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION
The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on the screen
except when the power is turned on, a system alarm occurs.
If data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation and
displays a warning message.
This section describes the display of the program number, sequence number, and status, and warning
messages displayed for incorrect data setting or input/output operation.
12.6.1 Displaying the Program Number, and Sequence Number

The number of the program currently selected or currently executed and the current sequence number are
indicated in the upper right part as shown below.
Program number Sequence number
Fig. 12.6.1 (a) Program number and sequence number (10.4-inch display unit)
In the EDIT mode, the number of the program currently edited in the foreground is indicated.
- 633 -
12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or

Input/Output Operation
The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the
last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the system. If
data setting or the input/output operation is incorrect, the CNC does not accept the operation and a
warning message is displayed on the second line from the bottom of the screen. This prevents invalid data
setting and input/output errors.
Explanation
- Description of each display
(9) DATA IS OUT OF RANGE
(1)
(2) (3) (4) (6) (7) (8)
(5) :
(5) is displayed in the
area for (3) and (4).
Fig. 12.6.2 (a) Positions of status indications
(1) Current mode

MDI : Manual data input, MDI operation
MEM : Automatic operation (memory operation)
RMT : Automatic operation (DNC operation, or such like)
EDIT : Memory editing
HND : Manual handle feed
JOG : Jog feed
INC : Manual incremental feed
REF : Manual reference position return
**** : Modes other than the above.
(2) Automatic operation status

**** : Reset (When the power is turned on or the state in which program execution
has terminated and automatic operation has terminated.)
STOP : Automatic operation stop (The state in which one block has been executed and
automatic operation is stopped.)
HOLD : Feed hold (The state in which execution of one block has been interrupted and
automatic operation is stopped.)
STRT : Automatic operation start-up (The state in which the system operates
automatically)
(3) Axis moving status/dwell status

MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving.
DWL : Indicates the dwell state.
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
- 634 -
(4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed

FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting
for the complete signal from the PMC)
*** : Indicates a state other than the above.
(5) Emergency stop or reset status

--EMG-- : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.)
-RESET- : Indicates that the reset signal is being received.
(6) Alarm status

ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed display.)
BAT : Indicates that the voltage of the lithium battery (the backup battery of the CNC)
has decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
APC : Indicates that the voltage of the backup battery of the absolute pulse coder has
decreased. (Blinks in reversed display.)
FAN : Indicates that the rotation speed of the fan has decreased. (Blinks in reversed
display.)
Space Indicates a state other than the above.
NOTE
When the FAN in the αi servo amplifier or the αi spindle amplifier falls into the
warning state or the number of rotations of the FAN built into the stand-alone
type control unit decreases, FAN is displayed blinking.
Refer to "Chapter of αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE in MAINTENANCE
MANUAL(B-64305EN)" or "Chapter of SERVO WARNING INTERFACE in
CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) (B-64303EN-1)" for details and measures
concerning the warning state of FAN in the αi servo amplifier.
Refer to "Chapter of WARNING INTERFACE in MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B-64305EN)" or " Chapter of SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE in
CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) (B-64303EN-1)" for details and measures
concerning the warning state of FAN in the αi spindle amplifier.
When not corresponding to the above, it is thought that the number of rotations
of the FAN built into the stand-alone type control unit decreased.
Therefore, replace the FAN according to "Chapter of REPLACING A FAN UNIT
in MAINTENANCE MANUAL(B-64305EN)".
(7) Current time

hh : mm : ss - Hours, minutes, and seconds
(8) Program editing status and program operation status

INPUT : Indicates that data is being input.
OUTPUT : Indicates that data is being output.
SEARCH : Indicates that a search is being performed.
EDIT : Indicates that another editing operation is being performed
(insertion, modification, etc.)
LSK : Indicates that labels are skipped when data is input.
RSTR : Indicates that the program is being restarted
COMPARE : Indicates that a data comparison is being made.
Space : Indicates other states.
- 635 -
(9) Warning for data setting or input/output operation

When invalid data is entered (wrong format, value out of range, etc.), when input is disabled (wrong
mode, write disabled, etc.), or when input/output operation is incorrect (wrong mode, etc.), a
warning message is displayed. In this case, the CNC does not accept the setting or input/output
operation (retry the operation according to the message).
Example 1)
When a parameter is entered
Example 2)
When a parameter is entered
Example 3)
When a parameter is output to an external input/output device
12.7 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION
Overview
Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the
life of the LCD.
To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a
key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically
when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.
Screen erasure function

When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any
function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by
pressing any function key.
Automatic screen erasure function

When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen
is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.
- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function

If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC
screen is erased.
Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen
- 636 -
• Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0

• None of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• No alarm is issued.
- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function

If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed
again:
Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen
• One of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• An alarm is issued.
- Screen erasure by using the key + function key

When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a
function key.
Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated
[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte path
[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] 0 to 127
After a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123 passes without key operation, the NC screen is erased
automatically. Pressing a key causes the NC screen to reappear.
NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure. If 1 or a
larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen erasure is disabled.
- 637 -
13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION
Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
13.1 OPERATION ....................................................................................................................................639

13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE.............................................................................................639
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ....................................................................................640
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING .........................................................................644
13.5 EXAMPLE........................................................................................................................................647
When programming is completed, the graphic function can be used to check whether machining will be
performed as desired without operating the machine by drawing the programmed tool path and machining
profile on the graphic display screen. After checking the profile, perform machining.
The function has the following features to simplify locating an error in the machining program:
(i) Can draw a blank figure (workpiece).
(ii) Can draw the figure of a tool used at the position where punching is performed.
A circle, a rectangle, and a capsule can be used for drawing the tool figure. The figures of other tools
are drawn using asterisks.
(iii) Can draw a workpiece holder that holds a blank.

The operator can check whether punching is performed at the position of the workpiece holder. This
is used to ensure that the workpiece holder is not punched during machining.
(iv) Can draw a tool path.

The tool path is drawn using a dashed line for rapid traverse and a solid line for cutting feed.
(v) Can specify a drawing plane.

A drawing plane can be selected from four types. Drawing can be performed as if a blank is set in
the machine.
(vi) Checks the format of the program.

The format of the program, stored stroke limit 1, and the safety zone are checked during drawing.
- 638 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION
13.1 OPERATION
The following flowchart shows an example of drawing a programmed figure on the screen. Refer to the
flowchart if you forget the procedure.
Start
Machine ready for machining Manual reference position return is

completed.
Record the program. Register the program in the EDIT mode.
Register the tool figure on the tool

Register the tool figure.
registration screen.
(See III - 12.3.11, III - 12.3.12)
Specify the drawing Press the function key<GRAPH>

parameters. Then, specify the drawing range, blank
Specify the drawing length, and other necessary parameters.
parameters again if they
are incorrect.
Enter the memory mode, then press the
Execute drawing. soft key [DRAW].
Press the soft keys [(OPR)] and [START]
in that order.
Check the machining
Correct Correct
program?
Start actual machining.
Incorrect Change the screen

to a screen other
than the drawing
Correct the program. screen and press the
CYCLE START
Enter the EDIT button in the
mode and correct machine.
the program.
End
13.2 REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE

To draw a machining profile, register the dimensions of the tool on the tool figure registration screen.
(See III–12.3.11.4, III–12.3.12.2.)
- 639 -
13.3 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS

Specify the parameters for graphic drawing.
Explanation
Procedure
1 Press the function key . The graphic parameter setting screen appears. If it does not appear,
press the soft key [PARAMETER].
Screen
- 640 -
2 Move the cursor to the parameter to be changed by pressing the cursor keys.
3 Enter new data and press the key.
(a) Drawing plane

This parameter specifies a plane for drawing.
P=0 P=1 P=2 P=3
Y X X Y
Y Y X
X
(b) Drawing range (maximum and minimum values)

This parameter specifies the desired drawing range for each axis using the maximum and
minimum values. Specifying these values automatically determines the magnification for a
screen so that the drawing can be made using the whole drawing range. The center of the
drawing range matches that of the screen during drawing.
(c) Magnification
This parameter specifies the screen magnification. The magnification refers to the
magnification to the center of the screen.
Specifying the drawing range in (b) automatically determines the effective magnification. To
magnify part of a figure, specify another magnification based on the automatically specified
value.
(d) Coordinates based on the center of a screen

This parameter specifies the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system whose origin
matches the center of the screen.
Specifying the drawing range in (b) automatically determines the coordinates. To magnify part
of the figure, specify other coordinates based on the automatically specified coordinates.
- 641 -
(e) Drawing end block

To display part of the programmed figure, specify the sequence number of the end block. Once
the figure is drawn, the sequence number is automatically canceled.
(f) Automatic deletion

1 : Previously drawn figures are automatically deleted when automatic operation is started in
the reset state.
0 : Previously drawn figures are not automatically deleted.
(g) Drawing start position

When a coordinate system command, G92, is not specified in a drawing program, this
parameter specifies the drawing start position using the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system.
(h) Blank length

This parameter specifies the blank length along the X-axis and Y-axis.
Setting this parameter draws a blank figure when the drawing screen is selected or when the
drawing soft key [ERASE] is pressed.
The end of the blank figure in the drawing plane described in (a) is used as the origin of the
Screen
(i) Rapid traverse

1 : A tool path for rapid traverse is drawn as a dotted line.
0 : No tool path for a rapid traverse is drawn.
- 642 -
Screen
(j) Position of a workpiece holder

This parameter specifies the position of a workpiece holder in the workpiece coordinate system.
Workpiece
coordinate
system
(X , Y) = (0, 0)
X1
X2
(k) Length of a workpiece holder

This parameter specifies the horizontal length and vertical length of a workpiece holder.
X
Workpiece
coordinate
system Y
(X , Y) = (0, 0)
NOTE
When a safety zone check function is provided, data items (j) and (k) for the workpiece
holder cannot be specified. Specifying the safety zone displays the figure of the
workpiece holder (That is set for #1 to #4.).
- 643 -
13.4 GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING

Explanation
Drawing screen
Press [GRAPH] key after pressing key, the following graphic display screen appears.
Screen
Be selecting this screen, tool paths and holes figures are drawable for checking NC programs.
Software keys, status display for drawing, and ruler

(1) Soft keys are used for drawing.
[START]key : Drawing start key
[STOP]key : Drawing stop key
[ERASE]key : Graphic display erasing key
[SEQ]key : Continuous drawing mode key
[SBK] key: Single block drawing mode key
(2) Ruler
The ruler is displayed at the lower right part of the screen. The value below shows the
length to the line (Input unit).
Drawing operation
(1) Select either MEMORY mode.
(This is the preparation for automatic operation, such as heading of a program, etc.)
(2) Depress [ERASE] key.

Depress this key when the previous graphic display is not required.
After erasing graphic display, the work sheet figure and work holder mark are drawn as shown in the
left figure.
- 644 -
Screen
(3) Depress [SEQ] and [START] keys (continuous drawing).

Drawing is started and continued up to the end of the NC program.
(4) Depress [SBK] and [*SEQ] keys (Single block drawing).

Operation stops after drawing one block.
Drawing is done every block each time [START] key is depressed hereafter.
(5) Depress [STOP] key

The system enters the feed hold state.
Pressing the [STOP] key during continuous drawing changes the operation to single-block drawing,
causing the system to enter the feed hold state.
To perform continuous drawing again, press the [SEQ] key, then press the [START] key.
Relation between drawing mode and machining operation mode

The drawing mode means a condition which is not the drawing end condition (that is, drawing in progress
or single block drawing stop condition), while the machining operation mode means the drawing end
condition.
The relation between the drawing mode and the machining operation mode is illustrated below.
Machining operation mode
In case of (1) In case of (2)
When [START] key is depressed in the Drawing terminates and the

MEMORY mode on the drawing drawing mode is switched to the
(1) (2) machining operation mode in the
screen, the mode is swtiched to the
drawing mode, and then, drawing following cases.
is started. · Reset button or external reset
button was depressed.
· M02 or M30 was commanded on
Drawing mode an NC program.
Since drawing is done under such a condition as MACHINE LOCK, the modal information, absolute
coordinate value, etc. are updated.
- 645 -
When the mode is switched from the machining operation mode to the drawing mode, the following
information is stored.
1) Relative coordinate value (RELATIVE)

2) Work coordinate system value (ABSOLUTE)
3) Machine coordinate system value (MACHINE)
4) T code
5) Tool position offset
6) Repositioning coordinate
After drawing, the stored information is restored as before, and the mode is switched to the machining
operation mode after heading of the drawn program.
NOTE
1 The dwell (G04) is not executed.
2 M, S, T codes signals and the press start signal are not output to the machine.
NOTE
1 Output signals OP, STL, SPL, AL are sent to the machine tool even during
drawing in the same way as in normal machining operation.
2 Input signals ERS, *SP, *ESP, ST, etc. of the machine tool are effective even
during drawing. Don’t operate these switches, accordingly. (The single block
switch SBK is ineffective.)
3 If manual reference point return function is provided, the stored stroke limit 1 is
checked even during drawing. Thus, the machine tool position must coincide
with actual machining start position before drawing start.
4 The tool profile is drawn at the end point in a block where positioning is done
even in the punch off mode using M function or under the turned-on condition of
the punch off switch on the machine tool side.
5 If the tool profile code of the designated T code is 00, mark (*) is drawn.
6 Machining operation is not executed in the drawing mode. Drawing is not
attempted halfway during machining operation.
7 It is impossible to draw a helically interpolated figure.
- 646 -
13.5 EXAMPLE
Set drawing parameters for drawing the following NC program as follows.
650 mm
1100 mm
:O00002;(NC program)
G92X1270.Y1270.; G76I40.J90.K8T02 ; G72X800.Y400. ;

G90G00X15.Y15.T02; G72X1050.Y200. ; G77I150.J90.P-5.K18 ;
X1085.Y15. ; G76I40.J90.K8 ; G90X550.Y325.T04 ;
X1085.Y635. ; G90X375.Y80.T04 ; M24 ;
X15.Y635. ; X745.Y80.; G01X500.Y325.F3000 ;
G72X150.Y80.; X230.Y250.T05 ; X500.Y300. ;
G76I40.J0K4T03 ; G26I50.J45.K4T06 ; G03X550.Y250.I50. ;
G72X400.Y80. ; X230.Y400.T05 ; G01X750.Y250. ;
G76I40.J0K7; G26I50.J45.K4T06 ; G03X800.Y300.J50. ;
G72X770.Y80. ; G72X500.Y400. ; G01X800.Y350. ;
G76I40.J0K4 ; G77I150.J180.P-5.K18T04 ; G03X750.Y400.I-50. ;
G72X50.Y200. ; G76I15.J0K20 ; G01X550.Y400. ;
G03X500.Y350.J-50. ;
G01X500.Y325. ;
M25;
G00G90X1270.Y1270.M02 ;
- 647 -
Screen
- 648 -
Tool figure data

T02 : Rectangle, X dimension = 50 mm, Y dimension = 50 mm
T03 : Rectangle, X dimension = 50 mm, Y dimension = 20 mm
T04 : Circle, diameter = 15.5 mm
T05 : Circle, diameter = 30 mm
T06 : Circle, diameter = 5 mm
The following figures show the programmed figure.
Screen
- 649 -
14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION

Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY .......................................................................................................................650
14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY

Overview
This function is used to perform program editing and changing of various data using the keyboard
displayed on the LCD with a touch panel.
Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the upper left 1/4 area
Explanation
A CNC screen equivalent to that displayed on 8.4-inch display unit is displayed in the upper left area of
the screen, and the keyboard is displayed in the remaining area.
Fig. 14.1 (a) Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the upper left area
Operation
- Input key
The display "INPUT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the input key.
- Cancel key
The displays "BACK SPACE" and "CAN" on the virtual MDI keyboard are equivalent to the cancel key.
- Shift key
The display "SHIFT" ↑ on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the shift key.
Pressing the "SHIFT" key once places the system in the shift state, and pressing the "SHIFT" key again or
another key releases the system from the state.
Pressing a key in the shift state causes the character indicated in the upper left corner of the key to be
entered.
- 650 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION
- Simultaneous pressing of two keys

The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET"
keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows:
(1) Press the "SPCL" key. The "SPCL" key is held down, and places the system in SPCL mode.
(2) Press the keys to be pressed simultaneously, one at a time.
(3) Press the "INPUT" key. Of the keys pressed in SPCL mode, the last two are assumed to have been
pressed simultaneously. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL key, which has
been held down, returns to the normal state.
Example: "SPCL" → "CAN" → "RESET" → "INPUT"
NOTE
1 In SPCL mode, other keys are disabled until the "SPCL" or "INPUT" key is
pressed.
2 Pressing the "SPCL" key in "SPCL" mode causes all keys pressed in SPCL
mode to be disabled. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL
key, which has been held down, returns to the normal state.
Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the entire area

Explanation
A CNC screen equivalent to that displayed on 8.4-inch display unit is displayed in the entire area.
Function keys and the ON/OFF button for virtual keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Fig. 14.1 (b) Screen on which a CNC screen is displayed in the entire area
- 651 -
14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64554EN/01
Operation
- Function key page switching
Pressing "MENU" located near the lower right corner of the screen switches the screen to page 1, page 2,
page 3, and back to page 1 in this order.
Function keys on page 1
- Display of virtual keys

Pressing "KEY ON" located at the lower right corner of the screen displays virtual MDI keys. The
character string on the key top changes to "KEYOFF".
Pressing "KEYOFF" hides virtual MDI keys.
Fig. 14.1 (c) State in which virtual keys are ON
- Input key
The display "INPUT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the input key.
- Cancel key
The displays "BS" and "CAN" on the virtual MDI keyboard are equivalent to the cancel key.
- Shift key
The display "SHIFT" on the virtual MDI keyboard is equivalent to the shift key.
The characters on the key tops change to those that can be entered in the shift state.
- 652 -
B-64554EN/01 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION
Fig. 14.1 (d) Key tops in the shift state
- Simultaneous pressing of two keys

The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET"
keys to erase alarm PS100, is as follows:
(1) Press the "SPCL" key. The "SPCL" key is held down, and places the system in SPCL mode.
(2) Press the keys to be pressed simultaneously, one at a time.
(3) Press the "INPUT" key.
Example: "SPCL" → "CAN" → "RESET" → "INPUT"
NOTE
1 In SPCL mode, other keys are disabled until the "SPCL" or "INPUT" key is
pressed.
2 Pressing the "SPCL" key in "SPCL" mode causes all keys pressed in SPCL
mode to be disabled. The system is released from SPCL mode, and the SPCL
key, which has been held down, returns to the normal state.
14.1.1 Limitations
- Display of VGA windows on the C Language Executor
This function uses one VGA window, so that the number of VGA windows that can be used on the C
Language Executor is reduced by one.
- Display unit
Display unit on which this function can be used are 10.4 display unit with a touch panel.
- 653 -
IV. MAINTENANCE
B-64554EN/01 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC.
WARNING
Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may
perform maintenance work not described in this chapter.
Chapter 1, "ROUTINE MAINTENANCE", consists of the following sections:
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED .....................................................658

1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS.......................................................................................659
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY.........................................................................................660
- 657 -
1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64554EN/01
1.1 ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM OCCURRED

If an unexpected operation occurs or an alarm or warning is output when the CNC and machine are used,
the problem needs to be solved quickly. For this purpose, the status of the problem must be identified
correctly, and a proper action must be taken.
The procedure for taking an action for a problem is shown below.
Problem!
Dangerous? Dangerous
Danger to you and others Take action to avoid danger.
- Stop machine immediately.
- Refuge to safe place immediately.
Not dangerous Confirm and secure safety.

Check and identify problem. - Confirm current safety.
- Warning - Check machine and circumstances.
- Alarm - Turn off power to machine.
- Abnormal operation
- Wrong operation, etc.
Check status and how problem If recovery is impossible,

occurred.
- Time and place of problem immediately notify sales agent or
occurrence supplier of problem details for
- Operation procedure action.
Investigate cause and take action.

- Check and correct machining program and set data items.
- Review and modify operation procedure.
- Check and repair machine operation sections.
Recovery work
- Action by you or machine tool builder
- Check operation after recovery.
For details of investigation and action on problems arising from the CNC, refer to
"TROUBLESHOOTING" in the Maintenance Manual (B-64305EN) issued by FANUC.
- 658 -
1.2 BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS

With the CNC, various data items such as offset data and system parameters are stored in the SRAM of
the control unit and are protected by a backup battery. However, an accident can erase the data. By
storing the data at another location (outside the CNC), the data, when lost, can be restored.
So, when the machine is started up or data is updated, for example, the data should be backed up (stored
outside the CNC).
- Data backup operation

The data items listed below should be backed up. For the method of data output operation, see the chapter
of "DATA INPUT/OUTPUT" in this manual.
<1> Machining programs

→ See Subsection III-8.2.1, “Inputting and Outputting a Program”.
<2> System parameters
→ See Subsection III-8.2.2, “Inputting and Outputting Parameters”.
<3> Tool offset data
→ See Subsection III-8.2.3, “Inputting and Outputting Offset Data”.
<4> PMC data
→ See PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64393EN).
<5> Pitch error compensation data (when the pitch error compensation function is applied.)
→ See Subsection III-8.2.4, “Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data”.
<6> Custom macro variables (when the custom macro function is applied.)
→ See Subsection III-8.2.5, “Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables”.
<7> Workpiece coordinate system setting data (when the workpiece coordinate system function is
applied.)
→ See Subsection III-8.2.6, “Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates System Data”.
<8> Operation history data
→ See Subsection III-8.2.7, “Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data”.
<9> Tool management data (when the tool management function is applied.)
→ See Subsection III-8.2.8, “Inputting and Outputting Tool Management Data”.
It is recommended that recording media (such as floppy disks and memory cards) daily used with the
machine be used to store data. Stored data should be managed properly so that the data can be restored
quickly if a problem occurs.
- Data restoration work

In order to restore lost data to the state of the stored data, input the data backed up according to the
previous item into the CNC. For the method of data input operation, see the chapter of "DATA
INPUT/OUTPUT" in this manual.
WARNING
After inputting stored data, do not start an operation immediately. Instead, check
that the data is input correctly and that settings are made to meet a desired
operation.
If an operation is executed without making this check, the machine and
workpiece can be damaged and personal injury can occur due to an unexpected
machine movement. Use sufficient care.
- 659 -
CAUTION
Before recovery of the following data items, consult with the machine tool builder
of the machine used:
• System parameters
• PMC data
• Macro programs and custom macro variables
• Pitch error compensation values
NOTE
The method of recovery described in this section is intended just to restore the
state of the backed up data, and does not guarantee recovery of the state that
was present when the data was lost.
1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY

This chapter describes how to replace the control unit backup battery and absolute Pulsecoder battery.
This section consists of the following subsections:
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for CNC Control Unit........................................................................................660

1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC)....................................................................................................664
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders...................................................................................665
1.3.1 Replacing Battery for CNC Control Unit

Battery for memory backup
Such as Offset data and system parameters are stored in SRAM in the control unit. The power to the
SRAM is backed up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. Therefore, the
above data is not lost even if the main power is turned off.
When the battery voltage falls, alarm message "BAT" blinks on the LCD screen and the battery alarm
signal is output to the PMC. When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In
general, the battery can be replaced within one or two weeks of the alarm first being issued. This,
however, depends on the system configuration.
If the battery voltage subsequently drops further, backup of memory can no longer be provided. Turning
on the power to the control unit in this state causes system alarm to be issued because the contents of
memory are lost. Replace the battery, clear the entire memory, then reenter the data.
For this reason, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a
battery alarm is issued.
The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
• Lithium battery, incorporated into the CNC control unit.
• Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in an external battery case.
NOTE
A lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
When a lithium battery is used (LCD mounted type)

- Replacement procedure
Prepare a new battery unit (ordering code: A02B–0309–K102).
(1) Turn on the power to the CNC. After about 30 seconds, turn off the power.
(2) Extract the old battery unit from the lower right of the rear of the CNC unit. (Hold the latch of the
battery unit, and extract the unit upward while releasing the claw from the case.)
- 660 -
Extract the unit while holding this portion.
(3) Mount the new battery unit. (Push the battery unit in until the claw is latched into the case.) Ensure
that the latch is engaged securely.
Push the unit in until the claw is

latched into the case.
WARNING
Using other than the recommended battery may result in the battery exploding.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery (A02B-0309-K102).
- 661 -
CAUTION
Steps (1) to (3) should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the
control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise,
the contents of memory may be lost.
If steps (1) to (3) may not be completed within 30 minutes, save all contents of
the SRAM memory to the memory card beforehand. Thus, if the contents of the
SRAM memory are lost, the contents can be restored easily.
See Chapter 5, "INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA" or Appendix C, "BOOT
SYSTEM" of maintenance manual (B-64305EN) for explanations about how to
save the contents of the SRAM memory.
NOTE
When discarding a battery, observe the applicable ordinances or other rules of
your local government. In addition, cover the exposed pins with tape or other
insulation materials to prevent a short circuit before discarding the battery.
When a lithium battery is used (Stand-alone type)

- Replacement procedure
If a lithium battery is used, have A02B-0200-K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L-0031-0012) handy.
(1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off.
(2) Remove the battery from the top area of the CNC unit.
Disconnect the connector first. Then, remove the battery from the battery case. The connector is
not latched. Simply pulling the cable detaches the connector.
The battery case is provided in the top area of the face plate of the main board.
(3) Replace the battery, then connect the connector.
Battery case
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Connector
WARNING
The incorrect mounting of the battery may cause an explosion. Avoid using any
battery other than the one specified here (A02B-0200-K102).
- 662 -
CAUTION
Complete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes.
If the battery is left removed for a long time, the SRAM would lose the contents.
If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be completed within 30 minutes,
save the whole contents of the SRAM to a memory card. The contents of the
memory can be easily restored with the memory card in case the memory loses
the contents.
See Chapter 5, "INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA" or Appendix F,
"MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)" of maintenance manual
(B-64305EN) for explanations about how to save the contents of the SRAM
memory.
NOTE
When alkaline dray cells (size D) are used

- Replacing the battery
(1) Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
(2) Turn on the power of the control unit.
(3) Remove the battery case cover.
(4) Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(5) Replace the battery case cover.
CAUTION
To replace the battery when the power is off, follow the same procedure as that
for the replacement of a lithium battery, described above.
2 dry cells
Cover
Connection terminal
on the back 4 mounting
holes
Case
NOTE
- 663 -
1.3.2 Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC)

A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the PANEL i. This battery is factory-set in the PANEL i.
This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS data for one year.
When the battery voltage becomes low, the following message appears on the self test screen displayed at
turn-on, and the self test pauses.
CMOS Battery Failure
If this message appears, replace the battery as soon as possible (within one week). FANUC recommends
that the battery be replaced once per year regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.
- Replacing the battery

(1) To guard against the possible loss or destruction of BIOS parameters, write down the BIOS
parameter values.
(2) Obtain a new lithium battery (A02B-0200-K102).
(3) After power has been supplied for at least five seconds, turn off the power to PANEL i. Remove the
intelligent terminal from the panel so that replacement work can be done from the rear of the
intelligent terminal.
(4) Detach the connector of the lithium battery, and remove the battery from the battery holder.
(5) Attach the connector, and place the battery in the battery holder.
(6) Install PANEL i again.
(7) Turn on the power, and check that the BIOS parameters are maintained (BIOS setup is not activated
forcibly).
Between removing an old battery and inserting new battery, no more than five minutes must be allowed
to elapse.
NOTE
- 664 -
Connector
(BAT1)
Lithium battery
A02B-0200-K102
Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Lithium battery connection for PANEL i
1.3.3 Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders

1.3.3.1 Overview
• When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs,
with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of the CNC screen.
Alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) :
The indication "APC" blinks in reversed display.
Alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) :
The indication "ALM" blinks in reversed display.
• When alarm 307 (alarm indicating the voltage of the battery becomes low) occurs, replace the
battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two weeks,
however, this depends on the number of Pulsecoders used.
• When alarm 306 (battery zero alarm) occurs, Pulsecoders are reset to the initial state, in which
absolute positions are not held. Alarm 300 (reference position return request alarm) also occurs,
indicating that reference position return is required.
• In general, replace the batteries periodically within the service life listed below.
- A06B-6050-K061 or
D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) : Two years (for each six-axis configuration)
- A06B-6073-K001 : Two years (for each three-axis configuration)
- A06B-6114-K504 : One year (for each three-axis configuration)
- 665 -
NOTE
The above values indicate the estimated service life of batteries used with
FANUC absolute Pulsecoders. The actual battery service life depends on the
machine configuration based on, for example, detector types. For details, contact
1.3.3.2 Replacing batteries

To prevent absolute position information in absolute Pulsecoders from being lost, turn on the machine
power before replacing the battery. The replacement procedure is described below.
<1> Ensure that the power to the servo amplifier is turned on.
<2> Ensure that the machine is in the emergency stop state (the motor is inactive).
<3> Ensure that the DC link charge LED of the servo amplifier is off.
<4> Detach the old batteries and attach new ones.
The replacement of the batteries in a separate battery case and the replacement of the battery built into the
servo amplifier are described below in detail.
WARNING
• The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S
series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor.
Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries
are replaced, reference position return is not required if the replacement
completes within less than 10 minutes. Turn the power on and replace the
batteries if the replacement will take 10 minutes or more.
• To prevent electric shock, be careful not to touch metal parts in the power
magnetics cabinet when replacing the batteries.
• Because the servo amplifier uses a large-capacitance electrolytic capacitor
internally, the servo amplifier remains charged for a while even after the power is
turned off. Before touching the servo amplifier for maintenance or other
purposes, ensure your safety by measuring the residual voltage in the DC link
with a tester and confirming that the charge indication LED (red) is off.
• Be sure to replace the batteries with specified ones. Pay attention to the battery
polarity. If a wrong type of battery is used or a battery is installed with incorrect
polarity, the battery may overheat, blow out, or catch fire, or the absolute
position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
• Ensure that the battery connector is inserted in the correct position.
NOTE
1.3.3.3 Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case

Use the following procedure to replace the batteries in the battery case.
<1> Loosen the screws on the battery case and detach the cover.
<2> Replace the batteries in the case (pay attention to the polarity).
<3> Attach the cover to the battery case.
- 666 -
Battery case (with a cover)
A06B-6050-K060
Batteries
Four A06B-6050-K061 batteries or
D-size alkaline dry cells
CAUTION
• Four D-size alkaline dry cells (LR20) that are commercially available can be
used as batteries. A set of four A06B-6050-K061 batteries is optionally available
from FANUC.
• Replace all the four batteries with new ones. If old and new batteries are mixed,
the absolute position information in the absolute Pulsecoders may be lost.
1.3.3.4 Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier

Use the following procedure to replace the special lithium battery.
<1> Detach the battery cover.
<2> Replace the special lithium battery.
<3> Attach the battery cover.
CAUTION
• Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is
therefore recommended that you have a backup battery.
• When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector
CXA2A/CXA2B. Also, do not connect two or more batteries to the same BATL
(B3) line. These connections are dangerous because battery output voltages
may be short-circuited, causing the batteries to overheat.
• Install the battery in the servo amplifier in a direction that allows slack in the
cable. If the battery cable is under tension, a bad connection may occur.
• If the +6 V pin and 0 V pin are short-circuited, the battery may overheat, blow
out, or catch fire, or the absolute position information in the absolute
Pulsecoders may be lost.
• When inserting the connector, align it to the connector pins.
[Connecting the battery]

The battery for the βiSV4 and βiSV20 series amplifiers is mounted in the battery case on the underside of
each of the amplifiers.
The battery for the other βi series amplifiers and the αi series amplifiers is mounted at the front of each of
the amplifiers.
- 667 -
[αi series][βi series βi SV40, βi SV80] [βi series βi SV4, βi SV 20]
Insertion direction Cable side Insertion direction

Cable side
Red: +6 V Red: +6 V
Connector Black: 0 V Connector Black: 0 V
CX5X CX5X
Battery
+6 V Battery case +6 V
0V Battery 0V
Battery case
[Battery sets and outlines]

Battery case
Battery ordering Manufacturer
Applicable servo amplifier ordering drawing Outline
drawing number model number
number
BR-2/3AGCT4A αi series 60/90 mm width A06B-6114-K505
A06B-6114-K504
(Panasonic) αi series 150/300 mm width A06B-6114-K506
(Note)
βi series βi SV (two-axis model) A06B-6114-K505
BR-AGCF2W βi series βiSV4, βiSV20 A06B-6093-K002
A06B-6093-K001
(Panasonic) βi series βiSV40, βiSV80 A06B-6093-K002
NOTE
When an old type BR-CCF2TH battery is used, order a battery case that
accommodates battery A06B-6114-K504.
- 668 -
APPENDIX
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS
A PARAMETERS
This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual.
For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter
manual.
A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC

[Data type] Bit path
#0 TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 ISO Code used for data output

0: EIA code
1: ISO code
NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0139.
2 The I/O setting of a data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter
No. 0908.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PRM

#1 PRM Whether the parameter whose setting is 0 is output or not:

0: It is selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0].
1: It is not selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. The parameter whose setting is 0
is not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx

[Data type] Bit axis
#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis

0: Mirror image is off. (Normal)
1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)
- 671 -
A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Data type] Byte
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
Data server interface
Embedded Ethernet interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
To execute the DNC operation or M198 command with FOCAS2/Ethernet, set this
parameter to 6.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
6 Execution of the DNC operation or M198 command with FOCAS2/Ethernet
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 NCR CTV

[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed
1: Not performed
#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit
#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the
memory card are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
0980 Machine group number to which each path belongs
- 672 -
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Valid data range] 1
Set the machine group number to which each path belongs.
For the Series 0i-PD, be sure to set this parameter to 1.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0, a setting of 1 is assumed.
0981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs
NOTE

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] 1
Set the path to which each axis belongs.
For the Series 0i-PD, be sure to set this parameter to 1.
NOTE
1 When 0 is set for all axes, the parameter is automatically set
according to the number of controlled axes of each path.
2 When the setting falls outside the range, the axis is assumed to
belong to the first path.
0983 Path control type of each path
NOTE

Set the path control type of each path.
The following two path control types are available:
T series (lathe system) :0
M series (machining system) : 1
NOTE
In the Series 0i-PD, this parameter is automatically set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

- 673 -
NOTE
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis

0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 IDG XIK AZR JAX

#0 JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in jog feed, manual rapid traverse and manual
reference position return
0: 1 axis
1: 3 axes
#3 AZR When no reference position is set, the G28 command causes:

0: Reference position return using deceleration dogs (as during manual reference
position return) to be executed.
1: Alarm PS0304, "G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT ZERO RETURN" to be
displayed.
NOTE
When reference position return without dogs is specified, (when bit 1
(DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 1) the G28 command specified
before a reference position is set causes an alarm PS0304 to be
issued, regardless of the setting of AZR.
#4 XIK When bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 0, namely, when positioning is
performed using non-linear type positioning, if an interlock is applied to the machine
along one of axes in positioning,
0: The machine stops moving along the axis for which the interlock is applied and
continues to move along the other axes.
1: The machine stops moving along all the axes.
#7 IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of the bit 0 (IDGx) of
parameter No. 1012 to prevent the reference position from being set again is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, bit 0 (IDGx) of parameter No. 1012
is invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR

- 674 -
#7 IPR When a number with no decimal point is specified, in the metric input with increment
systems of IS-B, the least input increment of each axis is:
0: Not 10 times greater than the least command increment
1: 10 times greater than the least command increment
NOTE
When the increment system is IS-A, and bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 is set to 1 (pocket calculator type decimal point
programming), the least input increment cannot be 10 times greater
than the least command increment.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 EDMx EDPx ZRNx

#0 ZRNx If a move command other than G28 is specified by automatic operation when no
reference position return is performed yet after the power is turned on:
0: The alarm PS0224, "PERFORM REFERENCE POSITION RETURN." is issued.
1: Operation is performed without issuing an alarm.
NOTE
1 The state in which a reference position has not been established
refers to the following state:
- When an absolute position detector is not used and reference
position return has not been performed even once after power-up
- When an absolute position detector is used and the association of
the machine position with the position detected with the absolute
position detector has not been completed (See the description of
bit 4 (APZx) of parameter No. 1815.)
#4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#5 EDMx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the - direction for each axis is:
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx ROSx ROTx

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotary axis.

- 675 -
#1 ROSx Setting linear or rotary axis.

ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
0 1 Rotary axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by bits 0 (ROAx) and 2 (RRLx) of
parameter No. 1008.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No. 3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotary axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.
3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotary axis roll-over function and the index table
indexing function (M series)
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx

NOTE
#0 ROAx The rotary axis roll-over is

0: Invalid
1: Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotary axis (for which bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
#1 RABx In the absolute programming, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.
- 676 -
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
#2 RRLx Relative coordinates are

0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter No.
1260.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISAx

NOTE
#0 ISAx Increment system of each axis

Increment system Bit 0 (ISA)
IS-A 1
IS-B 0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1015 DWT

#7 DWT When time for dwell per second is specified by P, the increment system:
0: Depends on the increment system
1: Does not depend on the increment system (1 ms)
1020 Program axis name for each axis

[Valid data range] 65 to 67, 84 to 90
An axis name (parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from A, B, C, T, U, V, W,
X, Y, and Z.
(Tip) ASCII code

Axis name X Y Z U V W A B C T
Setting 88 89 90 85 86 87 65 66 67 84
- 677 -
NOTE
1 If the system supports the function for machining multiple
workpieces, addresses U, V, and W cannot be used for the names
of the axes controlled by the CNC.
2 If macro functions A, B, U, V, and W for a punch press are used,
addresses A, B, U, V, and W cannot be used for the names of the
axes controlled by the CNC.
3 When the second auxiliary function is provided (when bit 2 (BCD)
of parameter No. 8132 is 1), if the address (parameter No. 3460)
that specifies the second auxiliary function is used as an axis
name, the second auxiliary function is disabled.
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17:
Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane and G19: Yp-Zp plane), specify which of the basic three
axes (X, Y, and Z) is used for each control axis, or a parallel axis of which basic axis is
used for each control axis.
A basic axis (X, Y, or Z) can be specified only for one control axis.
Two or more control axes can be set as parallel axes for the same basic axis.
Setting Meaning
0 Rotary axis (Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis )
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
In general, the increment system of an axis set as a parallel axis are to be set in the same
way as for the basic three axes.
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Usually set to same number as the control axis number.
The control axis number is the order number that is used for setting the axis-type
parameters or axis-type machine signals
• For tandem controlled axes or electronic gear box (EGB) controlled axes, two axes
need to be specified as one pair. So, make a setting as described below.
Tandem axis:
For a master axis, set an odd (1, 3, 5, 7, ...) servo axis number. For a slave axis to be
paired, set a value obtained by adding 1 to the value set for the master axis.
- 678 -
1031 Reference axis

The unit of some parameters common to all axes such as those for dry run feedrate may
vary according to the increment system. An increment system can be selected by a
parameter on an axis-by-axis basis. So, the unit of those parameters is to match the
increment system of a reference axis. Set which axis to use as a reference axis.
Among the basic three axes, the axis with the finest increment system is generally
selected as a reference axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZCL ZPR

#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used
(when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). When the
workpiece coordinate system is used, the workpiece coordinate
system is established based on the workpiece origin offset
(parameters No. 1220 to 1226) during a manual reference position
return, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#2 ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed
0: The local coordinate system is not canceled.
1: The local coordinate system is canceled.
NOTE
ZCL is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is used (when
bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0). To use the local
coordinate system (G52), set bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to
0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1202 G92

- 679 -
#2 G92 When the workpiece coordinate system is used (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136
is 0), if the G code (M series: G92, T series: G50) for coordinate system setting is
specified:
0: G command is executed and no alarm is issued.
1: G command is not executed and an alarm PS0010, “IMPROPER G-CODE” is
issued.
1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system
NOTE

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
Set the coordinate values of the reference position in the machine coordinate system.
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system
1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.
Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is
1250
performed

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for performing
automatic coordinate system setting.
1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis
NOTE

- 680 -
[Unit of data] Degree
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B))
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999999.999)
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotary axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1300 BFA NAL OUT

#0 OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area
0: Inside
1: Outside
#1 NAL If the tool enters the inhibition area of stored stroke limit 1 during manual operation:
0: An alarm is issued and the tool is stopped.
1: An alarm is not issued, the stroke limit reach signal is output to the PMC, and the
tool is stopped.
NOTE
When the tool enters the inhibition area of stored stroke limit 1 due
to the move command issued during automatic operation, even if
this parameter is set to 1, an alarm is issued and the tool is
stopped. Even in this case, the stroke limit reach signal is output
to the PMC.
#7 BFA When the stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm is issued:

0: The tool stops after entering the prohibited area.
1: The tool stops before the prohibited area.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1301 OTS NPC

#2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in
G33 (skip) blocks is:
0: Checked
1: Not checked
#6 OTS When the overtravel alarm is issued:

0: The overtravel alarm signal is not output to the PMC.
1: The overtravel alarm signal is output to the PMC.
1320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis
- 681 -

Set the coordinate value of stored stroke check 1 on each axis in the + or - direction in the
machine coordinate system.
NOTE
The area outside the area set by parameters Nos. 1320 and 1321
is a prohibited area.
1322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the positive direction on each axis
1323 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the negative direction on each axis

NOTE
Whether the inside area or outside area is a prohibited area is set
using bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300.
1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis
1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis

NOTE
The area inside the area set by parameters Nos. 1324 and 1325 is
a prohibited area.
1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the positive direction on each axis
1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis

- 682 -
When the stored stroke check switch signal EXLM is set to 1, or the stored stroke check
switch signal for each axis direction +EXLx is set to 1, parameter No. 1326 and No. 1327
are used for stroke check instead of parameter No.1320 and No. 1321.
NOTE
1 The area outside the area set by parameter No. 1326 and No. 1327
is a prohibited area.
2 The EXLM signal is valid only when bit 2 (LMS) of parameter No.
1300 is set to 1.
3 The +EXLx signal is valid only when bit 0 (DLM) of parameter No.
1301 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 RF0 LRP RPD

#0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the
reference position return.
0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.)
1: Enabled
#1 LRP Positioning (G00)

0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves
along each axis independently at rapid traverse.
1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves in a straight
line.
#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,

0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV

#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is

0: Performed at feed per minute.
1: Performed at feed per rotation.
NOTE
1 Specify a feedrate in parameter No. 1423.
2 This bit must be set 0 with FANUC Series 0i-PD.
- 683 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1403 HTG

#5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation is:

0: Specified using the feedrate along the tangent to an arc
1: Specified using the feedrate along axes including a linear axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1404 FC0

#7 FC0 Specifies the behavior of the machine tool when a block (G01, G02, G03, etc.) containing
a feedrate command (F command) that is 0 is issued during automatic operation, as
follows:
0: An alarm PS0011, “FEED ZERO (COMMAND)” occurs.
1: An alarm PS0011 does not occur, and the block is executed.
NOTE
This parameter is set from 1 to 0, if a bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
3402 is 1, reset the CNC. Or if CLR is 0, turn off and on the CNC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1405 EDR

#5 EDR As the external deceleration rate for positioning of linear interpolation type:
0: The external deceleration rate for cutting feed is used.
1: The external deceleration rate in rapid traverse for the first axis of path 1 is used.
Let us use external deceleration 1 as an example.
When this parameter bit is set to 0, the value of parameter No. 1426 is used as the
external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.
When this parameter bit is set to 1, the value of axis 1 of parameter No. 1427 is used as
the external deceleration rate for external deceleration 1.
NOTE
Be sure to set "1" to bit 4 (EDPx) of parameter
No. 1005 and bit 5 (EDMx) of parameter No. 1005
if this parameter is set to 0 when positioning linear interpolation type
is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1408 RFDx

- 684 -
#0 RFDx Feedrate control on a rotary axis is exercised using:
0: Conventional method
1: Method that specifies a feedrate on the virtual circle of the rotary axis
1410 Dry run rate

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
Set the dry run rate at the 100% position on the jog feedrate specification dial. The unit of
data depends on the increment system of the reference axis.
1411 Cutting feedrate
NOTE

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
A cutting feedrate can be specified with this parameter for a machine which does not have
to change the cutting feedrate frequently during machining. This eliminates the need to
specify a cutting feedrate (F code) in the NC program.
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis

- 685 -

Specify a jog feedrate (feed per minute) under an override of 100%.
NOTE
This parameter is clamped to the axis-by-axis manual rapid traverse
rate (parameter No. 1424).
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each
axis.
NOTE
1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter No. 1420 (rapid traverse rate for
each axis) is assumed.
2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter
No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set in
this parameter.
1425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis

Set feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when the reference position return is performed
for each axis.
1427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis

Set the external deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each axis.
1428 Reference position return feedrate for each axis
- 686 -
This parameter sets a rapid traverse rate for reference position return operation using
deceleration dogs, or for reference position return operation before a reference position is
set.
This parameter is also used to set a feedrate for the rapid traverse command (G00) in
automatic operation before a reference position is set.
NOTE
1 To this feedrate setting 100%, a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or
100%) is applicable.
2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and
machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid traverse rate is
used.
3 As a manual rapid traverse rate before machine coordinate system
establishment by reference position return, the jog feedrate or manual rapid
traverse rate can be selected with bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return (G28) No. 1428 No. 1420
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No. 1428 No. 1420
Manual reference position return *1 No. 1428 No. 1428 *3
Manual rapid traverse No. 1423 *2 No. 1424
4 When parameter No. 1428 is set to 0, the following parameter-set
feedrates are applied.
Before coordinate After coordinate
system establishment system establishment
Automatic reference position return (G28) No. 1420 No. 1420
Automatic rapid traverse (G00) No. 1420 No. 1420
Manual reference position return *1 No. 1424 No. 1424 *3
Manual rapid traverse No. 1423 *2 No. 1424
No. 1420: Rapid traverse rate
No. 1423: Jog feedrate
No. 1424: Manual rapid traverse rate
*1 : By using bit 2 (JZR) of parameter No. 1401, the jog feedrate can be
used for manual reference position return at all times.
*2 : When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1, the setting of
parameter No. 1424 is used.
*3 : When rapid traverse is used for reference position return without dogs
or manual reference position return after reference position
establishment, regardless of the deceleration dog, the feedrate for
manual reference position return based on these functions is used (the
setting of bit 1 (DLF) of parameter No. 1404 is followed).
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis

- 687 -
Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis.
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

Set a maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation mode such as AI advanced preview control.
When the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode is not set, the maximum
cutting feedrate set in parameter No.1430 is used.
1434 Maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis

Set a maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis in case of maximum manual handle
feedrate switch signal HNDLF<Gn023.3>=”1”.
1441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in rapid traverse

Set external deceleration rate 2 for each axis in rapid traverse.
1444 External deceleration rate setting 3 for each axis in rapid traverse

Set external deceleration rate 3 for each axis in rapid traverse.
1465 Radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate is specified on the virtual circle of a rotary axis

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
- 688 -
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)
Set the radius of a virtual circle when a feedrate on the virtual circle of a rotary axis is
specified.
If 0 is set for a rotary axis, the axis is excluded from feedrate calculation.
If the input unit is the inch, enter a value in inches.
The data is then converted to a millimeter value and displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1601 NCI

#5 NCI An in-position check:

0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration delay
becomes 0) at deceleration time and that the machine position has reached a
specified position (the servo positional deviation is within the in-position width set
by parameter No. 1826).
1: Confirms only that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/deceleration
delay becomes 0) at deceleration time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1606 MNJx

#0 MNJx In manual handle interrupt:

0: Only cutting feed acceleration/deceleration is enabled, and jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is disabled.
1: Both cutting feed acceleration/deceleration and jog feed acceleration/deceleration
are applied.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1610 CTLx

#0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run during cutting feed

0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied.
Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped

1620
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
Specify a time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse.
- 689 -
[Example]
For linear acceleration/deceleration
Speed
Rapid traverse rate
(Parameter No. 1420)
T T
Time
T : Setting of parameter No. 1620
For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
Speed Rapid traverse rate

(Parameter No. 1420)
T2 T2 T2 T2
Time
T1 T1
T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620

T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621
(However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.)
Total acceleration (deceleration) time : T1 + T2
Time for linear portion : T1‐T2
Time for curve portion : T2 × 2
1622 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed, or
linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each axis. Which
type to use is selected with bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610. Except for special
applications, the same time constant must be set for all axes in this parameter. If the time
constants set for the axes differ from each other, proper straight lines and arcs cannot be
obtained.
1624 Time constant of acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.

[Unit of data] msec
Set the time constant used for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis.
- 690 -
Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner
1710
override

[Unit of data] %
Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for an inner circular cutting feedrate change by
automatic corner override.
In the case of circular cutting offset inward, the actual feedrate is determined by a
specified feedrate (F) as follows:
Rc
F× Rc: Radius of tool center path
Rp Rp: Programmed radius
Thus, the feedrate along the programmed path satisfies the specified value of F.
Programmed path
Rc
Tool center path
Rp
However, if Rc is too small when compared with Rp, Rc/Rp 0 results to stop the tool.
So, a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is set, and the feedrate of the tool is set to
F×(MDR) when Rc/Rp ≤ MDR.
When this parameter is 0, the minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) is 100%.
1711 Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner override

[Unit of data] deg
Set an inner determination angle for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
1712 Override value for inner corner override

[Unit of data] %
Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding.
1713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override

- 691 -
Set a start distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
1714 End distance (Ls) for inner corner override

Set an end distance for inner corner override in automatic corner overriding.
When θ ≤ θp, an inner corner is assumed. (Parameter No. 1711 is used to set θp.)
When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, an override is applied to the feedrate
in the range of Le in the previous block from the intersection of the corner and in the
range of Ls in the next block from the intersection of the corner.
Distances Le and Ls represent linear distances from the intersection of a corner to points
on the tool center path.
Le and Ls are set in parameters Nos. 1713 and 1714.
Programmed path
Tool center path
An override is applied to the range from point a to point b.
Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1732
interpolation

With the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation, an optimum
feedrate is automatically calculated so that acceleration produced by changing the move
direction in circular interpolation does not exceed the maximum allowable acceleration
rate specified in parameter No. 1735.
If the radius of an arc is very small, a calculated feedrate may become too low.
In such a case, the feedrate is prevented from decreasing below the value specified in this
parameter.
Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
1735
interpolation for each axis

- 692 -
[Unit of data] mm/sec2, inch/sec2, degree/sec2 (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D)
(When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system
is inch system, machine, 0.0 to +10000.0.)
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for the deceleration function based on
acceleration in circular interpolation.
Feedrate is controlled so that acceleration produced by changing the move direction in
circular interpolation does not exceed the value specified in this parameter.
For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, the deceleration function based on acceleration is
disabled.
If a different value is set in this parameter for each axis, a feedrate is determined from the
smaller of the acceleration rates specified for the two circular axes.
1783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate determination based on corner feedrate difference

If a feedrate component change for each axis exceeding the value set in this parameter
occurs at the joint of blocks, the feedrate determination function based on corner feedrate
difference finds a feedrate not exceeding the set value and performs deceleration by using
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Thus, a shock to the machine and
machining error at a corner can be reduced.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1802 DC2x DC4x

#1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks:
0: An absolute position is established by detecting three reference marks.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting four reference marks.
#2 DC2x Reference position establishment operation for a linear scale with reference marks is
performed as follows:
0: The setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.
1: An absolute position is established by detecting two reference marks.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 1, specify the direction of the scale
zero point by setting bit 4 (SCP) of parameter No. 1817.
2 When a rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is
used, this parameter is invalid. Even when this parameter is set to
1, the setting of bit 1 (DC4) of parameter No. 1802 is followed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCx APZx DCRx OPTx

- 693 -
NOTE
#1 OPTx Position detector

0: A separate Pulsecoder is not used.
1: A separate Pulsecoder is used.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 when using a linear scale with reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address zero point
(full-closed system).
#3 DCRx As a scale with absolute address reference marks:

0: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is not used.
1: A rotary encoder with absolute address reference marks is used.
NOTE
When using a rotary encoder with absolute address reference
marks, set also bit 2 (DCLx) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.
#4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position
detector is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after
the absolute position detector is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0, power must be
turned off and on, then manual reference position return must be performed. This
completes the positional correspondence between the machine position and the position
on the absolute position detector, and sets this parameter to 1 automatically.
#5 APCx Position detector

0: Other than absolute position detector
1: Absolute position detector (absolute Pulsecoder)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1817 TANx SCPx

NOTE
#4 SCPx For two-point measurement (when bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No. 1802 is set to 1), the
scale zero point direction is:
0: On the minus side. (The reference position is located in the plus direction when
viewed from the scale zero point.)
1: On the plus side. (The reference position is located in the minus direction when
viewed from the scale zero point.)
- 694 -
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid when bit 2 (DC2) of parameter No. 1802 is
set to 1.
2 If this parameter is set to an incorrect value, an incorrect coordinate
system is established. In such a case, reverse the setting then
perform reference position establishment operation again.
#6 TANx Tandem control

0: Not used
1: Used
NOTE
Set this parameter to both master axis and slave axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1818 SDC RF2x RFSx

#0 RFSx If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (ZRF
<Fn120>= “0”) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale
with absolute address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position after reference position establishment
operation.
1: No movement is made after reference position establishment operation, but the
operation is completed.
NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.
#1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (reference
position establishment signal ZRF = 0) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero
point or a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used:
0: A movement is made to the reference position.
1: No movement is made to the intermediate position and reference position, but the
operation is completed.
NOTE
This parameter disables movement based on the G28 command to
a reference position. So, use this parameter only in special cases.
#3 SDCx A linear scale with an absolute address zero point is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 695 -
NOTE
1 After setting parameter SDCx, be sure to turn the power off and
back on again. Note that the power-off alarm (PW0000) is not
issued.
2 For the full-closed system, set bit 1 (OPTx) of parameter No. 1815
to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1819 DATx

#2 DATx When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute
address reference marks is used, the automatic setting of parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884
at manual reference position return time is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
The automatic setting procedure is as follows:

<1> Set an appropriate value in parameters Nos. 1815, 1821, and 1882.
<2> Position the machine at the reference position by manual operation.
<3> Set this parameter to 1.
<4> Perform a manual reference position return operation. Upon completion of manual
reference position return operation, parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884 are set, and this
parameter is automatically set to 0.
1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

[Valid data range] See below :
Set a command multiplier indicating the ratio of the least command increment to the
detection unit for each axis.
Least command increment = detection unit × command multiplier
Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment
Least input increment and least command increment

Increment system
IS-A IS-B Unit
Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 mm
Millimeter input 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg
Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and the capacity of the
reference counter
- 696 -
Command pulse
+ DA To
×CMR Error counter
Converter
least velocity
command - control
increment
Position
Reference counter ×DMR detector
Detection Feedback
unit pulse
Set CMR and DMR so that the pulse weight of + input (command from the CNC) into the
error counter matches the pulse weight of -input (feedback from the position detector).
[Least command increment]/CMR = [Detection unit]
= [Feedback pulse unit]/DMR
[Least command increment]
Minimum unit of commands issued from the CNC to the machine
[Detection unit]
Minimum unit for machine position detection
The unit of feedback pulses varies, depending on the type of detector.

[Feedback pulse unit]=
[Amount of travel per rotation of the Pulsecoder]/
[Number of pulses per rotation of the Pulsecoder]
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for the reference position
return in the grid method.
[Size of the reference counter]=[Grid interval]/[Detection unit]
[Grid interval]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the Pulsecoder]
The setting of a command multiplier is as follows:

(1) When command multiplier is 1 to 1/27
Set value = 1 / command multiplier + 100
Valid data range : 101 to 127
(2) When command multiply is 0.5 to 48
Set value = 2 × command multiplier
Valid data range : 1 to 96
NOTE
If a feedrate exceeding the feedrate found by the expression below
is used, an incorrect travel amount may result or a servo alarm may
be issued. Be sure to use a feedrate not exceeding the feedrate
found by the following expression:
Fmax[mm/min] = 196602 × 104 × least command increment / CMR
1821 Reference counter size for each axis
NOTE

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] Detection unit
- 697 -
Set a reference counter size.

As a reference counter size, specify a grid interval for reference position return based on
the grid method.
When a value less than 0 is set, the specification of 10000 is assumed.
When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the interval of
mark 1.
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit during movement, a
servo alarm SV0411, “EXCESS ERROR (MOVING)” is generated, and operation is
stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some margin in this
parameter.
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
set for stopped state, a servo alarm SV0410, “EXCESS ERROR (STOP)” is generated,
and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
1838 Position deviation limit for each axis in moving during safety check
NOTE

Position deviation limit for each axis during moving for safety check of Dual Check
Safety function is specified.
If position deviation of a moving axis exceeds position deviation limit while Safety
Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), a servo alarm SV0475,
“EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV)” or SV1071, “EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:CNC)” is
generated and axes are stopped immediately like emergency stop state..
In Dual Check Safety function, positin deviation is always checked by CNC and Servo. In
case that Safety Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), the
servo alarm SV0475 or SV1071 is generated when each CPU finds out that the deviation
exceeds position deviation limit in moving state.
- 698 -
Position deviation limit of each axis in moving state during other than Dual Check Safety monitoring
1841
(for Dual Check Safety Function)
NOTE

[Data type] 2 word axis
Set the positioning deviation limit in moving state for each axis for Dual Check Safety
function, in case that Safety Check is not carried out (Safety Monitoring Request
“*VLDVx”=1).
In case that Safety Check is not carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =1),
servo alarm SV0475, “EXCESS ERROR(MOVE:SV)” or SV1071, “EXCESS
ERROR(MOVE:CNC)” is generated and operation is stopped immediately (as in
emergency stop), when each CPU finds out that the deviation exceeds position deviation
limit in moving state.
If the value of this parameter is “0”, the parameter No.1828 is used for the value of
deviation limit in moving state.
In case that Safety Check is carried out (Safety Monitoring Request “*VLDVx” =0), the
parameter No.1838 is used for the value of deviation limit in moving state.
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the machine moves in a direction opposite to the reference position return direction
after the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed.
1882 Interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks
NOTE

Set the interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with absolute address reference marks.
Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1883 marks) or distance 1 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)
NOTE
- 699 -

Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference
1884 marks) or distance 2 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address
zero point)
NOTE

When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the distance from
the scale zero point to reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884).
Distance from the zero point to the reference position of a linear scale
= No. 1884 × 1,000,000,000 + No. 1883
The scale zero point represents a point where mark 1 and mark 2 match. Usually, this
point is a virtual point that does not physically exist on the scale. (See the Fig. A.1 (a).)
If the reference position is placed in the + direction when viewed from the scale zero
point, set a positive value. If the reference position is placed in the - direction when
viewed from the scale zero point, set a negative value.
Reference position
Zero point of encoder Encoder end
Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2

Mark 1 = mark 2
……..
8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8
PRM.1821
PRM.1882
PRM.1884 × 1,000,000,000 + PRM.1883
Fig. A.1 (a)
- 700 -
[Example of parameter settings]
When an encoder as shown Fig. A.1 (b) is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine:
Scale zero point + direction Reference position - direction
A B
Mark 1 = mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
20.000 19.980 9.940 10.060 9.960 10.040 9.980 10.020
5.000 20.000mm
-[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000 20.020mm
Parameters
No.1821 (interval of mark 1) = 20000
No.1882 (interval of mark 2) = 20020
No.1883 (reference position) = position of point A + 5.000
= distance between A and B/(mark 2 − mark 1) × mark 1 + 5000
= 9960/(20020-20000) × 20000 + 5000
= 9965000
= -9965000 (the reference position is on the negative side)
Fig. A.1 (b)
[Setting parameter No. 1883]

When it is difficult to measure the distance from the scale zero point to the reference
position (parameter No. 1883), the method described below can be used to find the
distance.
<1> Set parameter No. 1815 to enable this function.

Set an appropriate value in parameter No. 1821 and No. 1882.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(As a result, the machine coordinate represents the distance from the scale zero point
to the current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameter No. 1883, set the machine coordinate of that time converted to the
detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
<5> If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.
When a linear scale with an absolute address zero point is used, set the distance from the
base point to the reference position in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884. The base point is a
point at a scale end as shown Fig. A.1 (c).
- 701 -
Base point Reference position
Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1
10.020 9.980 10.040 9.960 10.060 9.940
20.000
20.020
Fig. A.1 (c)
If the reference position is located in the positive direction when viewed from the base
point, set a positive value; if the reference position is located in the negative direction, set
a negative value. Set the value by following the steps explained below.
<1> Set bit 1 (OPT) of parameter No. 1815 , bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815, and bit
3 (SDC) of parameter No. 1818 to enable this function.
Set 0 in parameter No. 1240.
Set 0 in parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884.
<2> At an appropriate position, establish a reference position.
(Consequently, the machine coordinate value indicates the distance from the base
point to current position.)
<3> By jog feed or handle feed, place the machine at the accurate reference position.
<4> In parameters Nos. 1883 and 1884, set the machine coordinate of that time converted
to the detection unit (machine coordinate × CMR).
If necessary, set parameter No. 1240.
NOTE
1 Set parameter Nos. 1883 and 1884 so that the distance from the
scale zero point (for a linear scale with absolute address reference
marks) or the base point (for a linear scale with an absolute
address zero point) to the reference position is within the range
from -999,999,999,999 to +999,999,999,999. If a value beyond this
range is set, an alarm DS0016 or DS1448 is issued.
2 The scale area on the scale cannot be extended across the scale
zero point or base point. Make parameter settings not to cause the
scale area to extend beyond the scale zero point or base point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1902 ASE FMD

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is:

0: Automatic setting mode.
- 702 -
(When bit 0 (DFS) of parameter No. 14476 is 0:
If the relationship between the axis and the amplifier and the like are defined on the
FSSB setting screen, parameters No. 1023, No. 1905, Nos. 1936 and 1937, Nos.
14340 to 14357, and Nos. 14376 to 14391 are automatically set.)
If the relationship between the axis and the amplifier and the like are defined on the
FSSB setting screen, parameters No. 1023, No. 1905, Nos. 1910 to 1919, and Nos.
1936 and 1937 are automatically set.)
1: Manual setting 2 mode.
Manually set parameters No.1023, No.1905, Nos.1936 and 1937, Nos.14340 to
14357, and Nos.14376 to 14391.)
Manually set parameters No.1023, No.1905, Nos.1910 to 1919, and Nos. 1936 and
1937.)
#1 ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the bit 0 (FMD)
parameter No. 1902 is set to 0), automatic setting is:
0: Not completed.
1: Completed.
This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automatic setting.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1905 PM2x PM1x

NOTE
#6 PM1x The first separate detector interface unit is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 PM2x The second separate detector interface unit is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
NOTE
When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when
the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), this parameter is
automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting
screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting
(when the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), this parameter
must be set directly. When a separate detector interface unit is
used, a connector number must be set in the corresponding
parameter (No.1936 or No.1937).
1936 Connector number of the first separate detector interface unit
- 703 -
1937 Connector number of the second separate detector interface unit
NOTE
When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before

This parameter sets the connector number corresponding to the connector connected
when using the separator detector interface unit set by bits 6 and 7 of parameter No. 1905
minus 1. That is, set 0 to 7 for connector numbers 1 to 8, respectively. Set 0 for the
axis for which the separator detector interface unit is not used.
Use successive numbers for one separator detector interface unit. Do not omit a
intermediate number.
Example)
Connector Connector
number for the number for the
Controlled PM2x, PM1x
first separate second separate No.1936 No.1937
axis (No.1905#7, #6)
detector detector
interface unit interface unit
X 1 Not used 0 0 0, 1
Y Not used 2 0 1 1, 0
Z Not used 1 0 0 1, 0
A Not used Not used 0 0 0, 0
NOTE
When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), these parameters are
automatically set when input is performed with the FSSB setting
screen. When manual setting 2 mode is selected for FSSB setting
(when the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), these
parameters must be set directly.
Parameters Nos. 2000 to 2999 are for digital servo, The following parameters are not explained in this
manual. Refer to “FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series, FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series,
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series, FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS
series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN)”.
2031 Torque command difference threshold of torque difference alarm

If the absolute value of the torque command difference between two axes exceeds the
value set in this parameter, an alarm is issued.
Set the same value for two axes that are placed under axis synchronous control.
The servo axis numbers of the synchronized master axis and slave axis must be assigned
so that an odd number is assigned to the master axis and the next axis number is assigned
to the slave axis. Examples are (1,2) and (3,4).
- 704 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG
NOTE

#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:

0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014,
No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are
not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is
assigned to bit 0 of <X0000>. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019
are not set, the skip signal, and the PMC axis control skip signal
are assigned to <X0000>.
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE

[Data type] Word path
Set an X address to which the skip signal SKIPn is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually
usable X addresses are:
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>
3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned
NOTE

Set an address to which the deceleration signal *DECn for reference position return for
each axis is to be assigned.
- 705 -
NOTE
set to 1.
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>
3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal is assigned
NOTE

Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP is to be assigned.
Example 1. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 6
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal is
allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0006 ESKIP
Example 2. When parameter No. 3012 is set to 5 and parameter No. 3019 is set to 5
When bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and skip
signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0005 ESKIP
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
SKIP6
NOTE
set to 1.
<X0000 to X0127>, <X0200 to X0327>
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
- 706 -
NOTE
Up to 5 digits can be specified in the S code.
3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 must be set
to 1. In this case, the allowable number of digits set in this parameter includes the number
of decimal places.
If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the alarm PS0003, “TOO
MANY DIGIT” is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 DAC DRC PPD MCN

#0 MCN Machine position

0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is
displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.
1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when
input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.
#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set

0: Not preset
1: Preset
NOTE
If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative
position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
(1) Manual reference position return
(2) Coordinate system setting based on G92
(3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1
#5 DRC When relative positions are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
#7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed:

0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool
nose radius compensation are displayed.
1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose
radius compensation (programmed positions) are displayed.
- 707 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OPH

[Data type] Bit
#4 OPH The operation history screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 MDL

#7 MDL The modal state on the program(MDI) screen of the 8.4 inch screen is:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPM SVS

#0 SVS Servo setting screen and servo tuning screen

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
#5 OPM Operating monitor

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH OMH

[Data type] Bit
#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is:

0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
#3 EAH Messages of the external alarm/macro alarm in alarm or operation history:

0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 7 (HAL) of parameter No. 3196 is
set to 0.
- 708 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 HMC

[Data type] Bit
#0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history:

0: Cannot be erased.
1: Can be erased.
#6 MS0
#7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of characters and the number of messages to be
preserved in the external operator message history.
Parameter Maximum number of characters Number of messages

MS1=0 MS0=0 255 8
MS1=0 MS0=1 200 10
MS1=1 MS0=0 100 18
MS1=1 MS0=1 50 32
NOTE
1 Although up to 255 characters can be specified for each external
operator message, you can use the combination of bits 6 (MS0)
and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113 to limit the number of
characters and select the number of messages to be preserved in
the external operator message history.
2 The settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of parameter No. 3113
take effect the next time the power is turned on. The external
operator message history is erased at that time.
3 Even though you change the settings of bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1)
of parameter No. 3113, the alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE
OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again
before the new settings can take effect.
4 If text (such as single-byte katakana or kanji characters) is entered
in character code, the number of characters recorded in the
external operator message history may be smaller than the
maximum number of characters set by bits 6 (MS0) and 7 (MS1) of
parameter No. 3113.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx

#0 NDPx The current position is:

0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
#1 NDAx The current position and the amount of the movement to be made in absolute and relative
coordinates are:
0: Displayed.
1: Not displayed.
- 709 -
3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history

[Unit of data] min
When history data is recorded within a set time period, the time for each set time period is
recorded in the history data.
When 0 is set, the specification of a time period of 10 minutes is assumed.
3131 Subscript of axis name

In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation, synchronization control, and tandem
control, specify a subscript for each axis name.
Setting value Meaning
Each axis is set as an axis other than a parallel axis, synchronization control
0
axis, and tandem control axis.
1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.
[Example] When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as indicated below.

Setting value Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position display screen
0 X
1 X1
77 XM
83 XS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3195 EKE HDE HKE

[Data type] Common to the bit system
#5 HKE A key operation history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#6 HDE A DI/DO history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 EKE The contents of operation history and alarm history

0: cannot be deleted.
1: can be deleted.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3196 HAL HOM HMV HPM HWO HTO

[Data type] Bit
#0 HTO A modification history of tool offset data is:

- 710 -
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#1 HWO A modification history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset

data/workpiece shift (T series) is:
0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#2 HPM A modification history of parameters is:

0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#3 HMV A modification history of custom macro common variables is:

0: Not recorded.
1: Recorded.
#6 HOM The operation history is:

0: Recorded.
1: Not recorded.
#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinates, and
machine coordinates present at the issuance of the alarm) is:
0: Recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
1: Not recorded in the operation history and alarm history.
To record as many alarm history items as possible, rather than detailed alarm information,
set 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE

#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 OSR NE8

#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
- 711 -
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
#3 OSR Pressing the [O SEARCH] soft key without entering a program number with keys in a
program number search:
0: Searches for the next program number (order of registration).
1: Disables the search.
#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3203 MCL MER MZE

#5 MZE After MDI operation is started, program editing during operation is:
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#6 MER When the last block of a program has been executed at single block operation in the MDI
mode, the executed block is:
0: Not deleted
1: Deleted
NOTE
When MER is set to 0, the program is deleted if the end-of-record
mark (%) is read and executed. (The mark % is automatically
inserted at the end of a program.)
- 712 -
#7 MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset
0: Not deleted
1: Deleted
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3204 MKP

#6 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, the created MDI
program is:
0: Erased automatically.
1: Not erased automatically.
NOTE
If the bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is set to 1, executing the
last block provides a choice of whether to automatically erase a
created program.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3205 PNS TOK

[Data type] Bit
#2 TOK A WORD COPY or WORD MOVE on the program screen:

0: Is performed as usual.
1: Can also be performed on a record-by-record basis from a program to the key-in
buffer.
#3 PNS On the program screen, a search with the cursor keys is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 VRN

[Data type] Bit
#5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable names of common variables #500 to
#549 are:
0: Not displayed.
1: Displayed.
3210 Program protection (PSW)

[Data type] 2-word
- 713 -
This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000 to 9999. When a value
other than zero is set in this parameter and this value differs from the keyword set in
parameter No. 3211, bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000
to 9999 is automatically set to 1.
This disables the editing of program Nos. 9000 to 9999. Until the value set as the
password is set as a keyword, NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the password cannot be
modified.
NOTE
1 The state where password ≠ 0 and password ≠ keyword is referred
to as the locked state. When an attempt is made to modify the
password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning
message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed to indicate that the
password cannot be modified. When an attempt is made to modify
the password with G10 (programmable parameter input), alarm
PS0231, “ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52” is issued.
2 When the value of the password is not 0, the parameter screen
does not display the password. Care must be taken in setting a
password.
3211 Program protection key (KEY)

[Data type] 2-word
When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is set in this parameter,
the locked state is released and the user can now modify the password and the value set in
bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202.
NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power is
turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3280 NLC

[Data type] Bit
#0 NLC Dynamic display language switching is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
When dynamic display language switching is disabled, the language setting screen is not
displayed. In this case, change the setting of parameter No. 3281 on the parameter screen
then turn on the power again to switch the display language.
3281 Display language

[Data type] Byte
Select a display language from the following:
0 : English
- 714 -
1 : Japanese
2 : German
3 : French
4 : Chinese(traditional characters)
5 : Italian
6 : Korean
7 : Spanish
8 : Dutch
9 : Danish
10 : Portuguese
11 : Polish
12 : Hungarian
13 : Swedish
14 : Czech
15 : Chinese(simplified characters)
16 : Russian
17 : Turkish
18 : Bulgarian
19 : Rumanian
If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 ABS MAB DPI

#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#4 MAB Switching between the absolute and incremental programming in MDI operation
0: Performed by G90 or G91
1: Depending on the setting of bit 5 (ABS) of parameter No. 3401
NOTE
When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this parameter
is invalid.
#5 ABS Program command in MDI operation

0: Assumed as an incremental programming
1: Assumed as an absolute programming
NOTE
ABS is valid when bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1.
When G code system A of the lathe system is used, this parameter
is invalid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3402 G23 CLR G91 G19 G18 G01

- 715 -
#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)
#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 to 0.
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode

0 0 G17 mode (X-Y plane)
0 1 G18 mode (Z-X plane)
1 0 G19 mode (Y-Z plane)
#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute programming)
1: G91 mode (incremental programming)
#6 CLR key on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and
emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
#7 G23 When the power is turned on

0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3403 ADB

#6 ADB When the same address two or more times are specified in one block:
0: The address specified last is valid.
1: It is treated as a program error and the alarm PS5074, "ADDRESS DUPLICATION
ERROR" is issued.
- 716 -
NOTE
The following notes apply when this parameter is set to 1:
1 When two or more M codes are acceptable to one block, up to
three M codes can be specified in the same block. Specifying
more than three results in the alarm PS5074.
2 You can specify any number of G codes in the same block as
long as they belong to different groups. Specifying G codes
belonging to the same group causes the alarm PS5074. You
can however specify any number of G90 and G91 codes in the
same block as they cause no alarm.
3 The alarm is not caused by blocks which call a custom macro or
execution macro.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B M02 M30 SBP

#2 SBP In an external device subprogram call, the address P format is based on:
0: File number specification
1: Program number specification
NOTE
In memory card operation, the program number specification
format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#4 M30 When M30 is specified in a memory operation:

0: M30 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the ready signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M30 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
#5 M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation

0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched
for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind
operation is not performed, the program is executed, starting from the beginning.
1: M02 is sent to the machine, but the head of the program is not searched for. (The
head of the program is searched for by the reset and rewind signal.)
#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block

0: One
1: Up to three
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX

- 717 -
#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
Metric input IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
system IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
Inch input IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
system IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3406 C07 C06 C05 C04 C03 C02 C01
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3407 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10 C09 C08
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3408 C23 C22 C20 C19 C18 C17 C16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3409 C30 C29 C28 C27 C26 C25 C24

[Data type] Bit
C01 to C30 If bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, set a group of G codes to be placed in the
cleared state when the CNC is reset by the key of the MDI panel, the external reset
signal, the reset and rewind signal, or the emergency stop signal.
The table below indicates the correspondence between bits and G code groups
The setting of a bit has the following meaning:
0: Places the G code group in the cleared state.
1: Does not place G code group in the cleared state.
Parameter G code group

C01 01
C02 02
C03 03
: :
C30 30
3410 Tolerance of arc radius

(B))
When a circular interpolation command is executed, the tolerance for the radius between
the start point and the end point is set.
- 718 -
3411 M code preventing buffering 1

to to

[Data type] 2-word path
Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing directed by an M
code must be performed by the machine without buffering the following block, specify
the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they are not specified in
these parameters.
3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit)

When a specified M code is within the range specified with parameters Nos. 3421 and
3422, 3423 and 3424, 3425 and 3426, 3427 and 3428, 3429 and 3430, or 3431 and 3432,
buffering for the next block is not performed until the execution of the block is
completed.
NOTE
1 M00, M01, M02, and M30 are M codes that do not perform
buffering, regardless of parameter setting.
M98, M99, M codes for calling subprograms, and M codes for
calling custom macros are M codes that performs buffering,
regardless of parameter setting.
2 If the minimum value is greater than the maximum value, the
setting is invalid.
3 If there is only one data item, the minimum value must be equal to
the maximum value.
- 719 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3450 BDX AUP

#0 AUP The second auxiliary function specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format,
with a decimal point, or with a negative value is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
If the second auxiliary function is specified after setting this bit to 0, the following
operation results:
1. When a value is specified without a decimal point
A specified value is output onto the code signal without modification, regardless of
the setting of the calculator-type decimal point input format (with bit 0 (DPI) of
parameter No. 3401).
2. When a value is specified with a decimal point
The alarm PS0007, “ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT” is issued.
3. When a negative value is specified
The alarm PS0006, “ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN” is issued.
#7 BDX This parameter prevents the unit of the argument from depending on the setting of bit 2
(BCD) of parameter No. 8132 when a subprogram call by an ASCII code is performed
with the address (specified by parameter No. 3460) of the second auxiliary function.
0: When bit 0 (AUP) of parameter No. 3450 is 1, the unit of the argument depends on
the setting of bit 2 (BCD) of parameter No. 3450.
1: The same unit of the argument is used. The unit when bit 2 (BCD) of parameter
No. 8132 is 1 is specified.
[Example]
A setting is made so that address B is used to call O9004, and the program O1 below
is executed with parameter No. 3460 = 66.
O1 O9004
B2 #500 = #146
M30 M99
When the increment system is IS-B, and metric input is used, #500 assumes a value
indicated in the table below.
Bit 0 (DPI) of Bit 0 (AUP) of BDX=0

parameter parameter Without the second With the second auxiliary BDX=1
No. 3401 No. 3450 auxiliary function option function option
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
0
1 2.000 0.002 0.002
0 2.000 2.000 2.000
1
1 2.000 2.000 2.000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3452 EAP
#7 EAP When bit 0 (ADX) of parameter No. 3455 is set to 1, calculator-type decimal point input
at a macro calling argument address is:
0: Enabled.
- 720 -
1: Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3454 G1B

#4 G1B In programmable parameter input, specifying a change to a specific bit parameter is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (A bit number is specified with Q_.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3455 AXDx

#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,
the value is determined:
0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input)
1: In millimeters, inches, degrees, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)
NOTE
This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input
function for each axis.
For the same axis name, be sure to make the same setting.
3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

[Valid data range] 65to67, 85to87
Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address for specifying the
second auxiliary function. If an address used as an axis name is specified, the second
auxiliary function is disabled.
Name A B C U V W
Setting value 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3605 BDPx

- 721 -
NOTE
#0 BDPx Both-direction pitch error compensation is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
3620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position for the reference position for
each axis.
3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative
position for each axis.
3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis
NOTE

Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely positive position
for each axis.
This value must be larger than set value of parameter No. 3620.
3623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis
NOTE

- 722 -
Set the magnification for pitch error compensation for each axis.
If the magnification is set to 1, the same unit as the detection unit is used for the
compensation data.
If 0 is set, compensation is not performed.
3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis
NOTE
[Input type]
Parameter input
[Data type]
Real axis
[Unit of data]
mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data]
Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range]
See the description below.
The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equal spacing. The space
between two adjacent positions is set for each axis. The minimum interval between pitch
error compensation positions is limited and obtained from the following equation:
Minimum interval between pitch error compensation positions = maximum feedrate/7500
Unit : mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
[Example] When the maximum feedrate is 15000 mm/min, the minimum interval between pitch error
compensation positions is 2 mm.
3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type
NOTE

[Valid data range] See the description below.
If the pitch error compensation of rotation axis type is performed (bit 1 (ROSx) of
parameter No. 1006 is set to 0 and bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1), set the
travel distance per revolution. The travel distance per revolution does not have to be 360
degrees, and a cycle of pitch error compensation of rotation axis type can be set.
However, the travel distance per revolution, compensation interval, and number of
compensation points must satisfy the following condition:
(Travel distance per revolution)
= (Compensation interval) × (Number of compensation points)
The compensation at each compensation point must be set so that the total compensation
per revolution equals 0.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the travel distance per revolution becomes 360 degrees.
- 723 -
Number of the both-direction pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position (for
3626
movement in the negative direction)
NOTE

When using both-direction pitch error compensation, set the number of compensation
point at the farthest end in the negative direction for a movement in the negative
direction.
NOTE
1 For a movement in the positive direction, set the compensation point
number at the farthest end in the negative direction in parameter No.
3621.
2 A set of compensation data items for a single axis should not be set
to lie astride 1023 to 3000.
Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made
3627
from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return
NOTE

Set the absolute value of pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement
to the reference position is made from the negative direction if the direction of reference
position return (bit 5 (ZMI) of parameter No. 1006) is positive or from the positive
direction if the direction of reference position return is negative.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 SUV SUP

#0 SUP
#1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of tool radius compensation.
- 724 -

0 0 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or
A the block preceding the cancellation block is output.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
0 1 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block

B and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point
Tool center path
G41 N2 Programmed path
N1
1 0 Type When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation,
1 C the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction
perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation
block.
Intersection point Tool center path
Programmed path
N3
Shift
G41 N2
When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the
SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 ODI

#2 ODI The setting of a tool radius compensation value is corrected as:

0: Radius value
1: Diameter value
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5008 MCR

#4 MCR If G41/G42 (tool radius - tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the MDI mode,
an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS5257, “G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE”)
- 725 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFE OFD OFC OFA

NOTE
#0 OFA These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.
For metric input
OFA Unit Valid data range
1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
For inch input

OFA Unit Valid data range
1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400 SCR XSC

#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit:

0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401 SCLx

#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis:

0: Invalidated
1: Validated
5411 Scaling (G51) magnification

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] 1to999999999
- 726 -
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with
bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in
the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
range is 1 to 9999999.
5421 Scaling magnification for each axis

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400)
[Valid data range] -999999999 to -1, 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is
enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first spindle to the
third spindle (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling
magnification if scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.
5481
Feedrate of rotation of the normal direction controlled axis

[Unit of data] deg/min
This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal direction controlled
axis that is inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control.
5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a preceding block

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (B)
- 727 -
N2 For straight line

Tool center path When the travel distance of N2 in the figure
on the left does not exceed the setting, block
N3 N2 is machined with the tool being normal to
N1 block N1.
Travel
distance
Programmed path
N2 For arc
Tool center path When the arc diameter of N2 in the figure on
Programmed path the left does not exceed the setting, arc N2
is machined with the tool being normal to
N3 block N1. A normal direction axis is not
controlled to move in the normal direction
according to the arc movement.
N1
Diameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6000 SBM HGO MGO G67

#0 G67 If the macro modal call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro modal call
mode (G66/G66.1) is not set:
0: Alarm PS1100, “CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL” is issued.
1: The specification of G67 is ignored.
#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the
executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.
#4 HGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a branch to 30
sequence numbers just before the GOTO statement or to up to 10 sequence numbers
saved by a sequence number search previously made with a GOTO statement is:
0: Not made at high speed.
1: Made at high speed.
#5 SBM Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable
#3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom
macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single
blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of
parameter No. 6000.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF

- 728 -
#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:

0: Standard specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.)
1: Extended specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are
used.)
#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command

0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:

0: #500 to #999 are output.
1: #100 to #199 and #500 to 999 are output.
#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command

0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output
1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output
#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram)

0: Not called using a T code
1: Called using a T code
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #199 cleared by power-off are:

0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MSB MPR TSE MIN

NOTE
#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt

0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)
#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT

0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method
#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters Nos. 6033 and 6034
#5 MSB Interrupt program

0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)
- 729 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6004 NAT

#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are
specified as follows:
0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.
1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6005 SQC

#0 SQC In the subprogram call function, a subprogram sequence number call is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6007 CVA

#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:

0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.
[Example]
When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling
program is set as follows:
Command CVA=0 CVA=1
#24 0.01 0.01
ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01
NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 IJK GMP ISO MCA F16

#0 F16 The precision of operation is based on:

0: New specification.
1: FS0i-PC compatible specification.
#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows:
- 730 -
0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and
the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned to
variable #3000.)
1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A
value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)
[Example]
Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0:
The alarm screen displays "MC 3001 ALARM MESSAGE".
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1:
The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".
#4 ISO 0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patterns of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *,
=, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,
*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the
calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second
auxiliary function code, or particular code are:
0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary
function code, and NC address.)
1: Allowed.
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments:

0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined.
1: Argument specification I is always used.
Example
When K_J_I_ is specified:
• When this parameter is set to 0:
Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10
are specified.
• When this parameter is set to1:
Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are
specified regardless of the specification order.
(Argument specification II cannot be used.)
- 731 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0

*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.

=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.
]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6019 MCO

[Data type] Bit
#0 MCO When data is output, the decimal number value of the macro variable data is
0: Not output as a comment.
1: Output at the same time as a comment.
After the number, data, and the variable name of the macro variable are output when data
output operation is performed the variable number and the value of the macro variable
data in decimal number are output as a comment.
NOTE
1 Output data by this parameter is "Comment", and this is ignored at
the time of reading.
- 732 -
NOTE
2 Accuracy of the output data of the comment is up to 15 digits. The
range of output data are nine digits above decimal point and eight
digits below decimal point. "± OVER FLOW" is output instead of a
value when the total digits number is more than 16 and the digit
number above the decimal point is ten or more. When the number
of digits below the decimal point becomes nine digits or more, the
ninth place of the decimal point is rounded off and output.
Moreover, the seventh place or the eighth place of the decimal
point is rounded off and output when the total digits number is more
than 16 and the digit number above decimal point is nine or eight.
3 The output becomes "EMPTY" when displayed, the macro variable
data is "DATA EMPTY".
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.
6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)
6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

Among the common variables #500 to #999, the range of common variables specified by
this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write attempt
(on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect
common variables.
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

[Valid data range] 03 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters can be used when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is 1. M96 is used
as a valid M code and M97 is used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of
the state of this parameter.
6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro
- 733 -

6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code

6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in
parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered.
[Example] When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No. 6040 =
100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom macro
calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) (Value of parameter No. 6039 + value of parameter No. 6040 -
1) > 9999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059, the calls specified by
parameters Nos. 6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.
6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram

6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code

- 734 -
6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling.
[Example] When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter No.
6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
NOTE
parameter
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by
parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.
6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code

6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling.
- 735 -
[Example] When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter No.
6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows:
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
NOTE
parameter
1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls
specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made
preferentially.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010

[Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001
- 736 -

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to
9009.
NOTE
If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No.
6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist,
O9001 is called when M100 is specified.
6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020

Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The
simple call mode is set.
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No.
6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameters Nos. 6071 to 6079 used
to call subprograms and in a parameters Nos. 6080 to 6089 used
to call custom macros, a custom macro is called preferentially. For
example, if 300 is set in parameters Nos. 6071 and 6081, and
programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is called when
M300 is specified.
- 737 -
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
The settable addresses are indicated below.
Address Parameter setting value 30i/31i-PB

A 65 O
B 66 O
D 68 O
F 70 O
H 72 O
I 73 O
J 74 O
K 75 O
L 76 O
M 77 O
P 80 O
Q 81 O
R 82 O
S 83 O
T 84 O
V 86 O
X 88 O
Y 89 O
Z 90 O
NOTE
1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified.
2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SRE SLS HSS SK0 GSK

#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.
1: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 0.
#4 HSS 0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
- 738 -
#5 SLS 0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals
are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are
input.
NOTE
The skip signals (SKIP and SKIP2 to SKIP8) are valid regardless of
the setting of this parameter. They can also be disabled using bit 4
(IGX) of parameter No. 6201.
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal or high-speed measurement position arrival signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G33 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE IGX TSE SEB

#1 SEB When a skip signal goes on while the skip function is used, the accumulated pulses and
positional deviation due to acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal goes on are considered to obtain the position at which the signal is
input.
#2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G33 P98/99) is used, the skip position held in a
system variable (#5061 to #5080 (#100151 to #100182 when 21-axes-or-more-system is
used)) is:
0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the
servo system.
1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.
Position during skip operation
Current position of CNC
Machine position Error amount
Origin of the coordinate system Stop point
Position in consideration of delay
Position without consideration of delay
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
- 739 -
1: Disabled as skip signals.
#7 SPE For the skip function (G33), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled

Bit 4 (IGX) of Bit 0 (GSK) Bit 7 (SPE) of Skip Skip Multistage skip
Parameter parameter of parameter parameter signal signal signals
No. 6201 No. 6200 No .6201 SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

1S1 to 1S8 These parameters specify whether to enable or disable each high-speed skip signal when
the G33 skip command is issued.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The settings of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is disabled.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Parameter High-speed skip signals Parameter High-speed skip signals
1S1 HDI0 1S5 HDI4
1S2 HDI1 1S6 HDI5
1S3 HDI2 1S7 HDI6
1S4 HDI3 1S8 HDI7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1

- 740 -
1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8

Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G33, or G33P1 to G33P4)
and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip
function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Multi-step skip function

Command G33
Input G34P1 G33P2 G33P3 G33P4 G04
signal G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4
SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1, commands to be skipped can be
selected by setting the following parameter:
Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006.6>

Parameter Command skipped
When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G33P1,G04Q1
When bit 0 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04,G04Q1,G04Q2,G04Q3,G04Q4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN SFP

#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G33) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207.
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
- 741 -
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

[Unit of data] 2msec
The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time.
If G33P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
If G33P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of
time set in this parameter.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G33)

This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G33, G33 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G33 P2)

Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters
are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

- 742 -
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit
skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation
limit, the alarm SV0004, “EXCESS ERROR (G31)” is issued and an immediate stop
takes place.
6581 RGB value of color palette 1

to to
6595 RGB value of color palette 15

[Data type] 2-word
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette by specifying a 6-digit
number as described below.
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PCM

#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts

The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1)
when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with
M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even
when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed,
ignoring the M code.)
6711 Number of machined parts

- 743 -
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of
machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is
executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when bit 0 (PCM)
of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6712 Total number of machined parts

This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts

This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of
machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as
infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Unit of data] msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Unit of data] min
- 744 -
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither
stop nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6751
and 6752.
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

[Unit of data] msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6754.
6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting
feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameters Nos. 6753 and
6754.
- 745 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HCL JHD

#0 JHD Manual handle feed in JOG feed mode or incremental feed in the manual handle feed is:
0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#3 HCL The clearing of handle interruption amount display by soft key [CAN] operation is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx

#0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator
0: Same in direction
1: Reverse in direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7103 HIT HNT RTH

#1 RTH By a reset or emergency stop, the amount of manual handle interruption is:
0: Not canceled.
1: Canceled.
#2 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals) (MP1, MP2 <Gn019.4,
Gn019.5>), the travel distance magnification for incremental feed/manual handle feed is:
0: Same.
1: 10 times greater.
#3 HIT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle
feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals (MP1, MP2 <Gn019.4,
Gn019.5>), the travel distance magnification for manual handle interrupt is:
0: Same.
7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed

[Unit of data] Pulse
This parameter sets the number of pulses from the manual pulse generator that exceed the
rapid traverse rate and can be accumulated without being discarded if manual handle feed
faster than the rapid traverse rate is specified.
- 746 -
The amount of pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate can be saved by CNC as B. And
amount of pulses B will be exported as pulses C.
A：amount of pulses corresponds to value of Rapid Traverse Rate.
B：amount of pulses accumulated in CNC.

B
C：amount of pulses the same as B.
Rapid Traverse Rate

A C
t
Amount of pulses exported by CNC in Manual Handle Feed
Amount of pulses B is calculated in 2 cases as following:
In case of
1) Parameter No.7117 = 0
The feedrate is clamped at the Rapid Traverse Rate and generated pulses exceeding
the Rapid Traverse Rate are ignored (B=0)
In case of
2) Parameter No.7117 > 0
The feedrate is clamped as the Rapid Traverse Rate, but the pulses exceeding the
Rapid Traverse Rate is not ignored. Amount of pulses accumulated in CNC is
calculated as following. (Although stopping the rotation of manual pulse generator,
if there is pulses accumulated in CNC, it will be exported and the tool will move as
long as amount of it.)
Magnification set by MP1，MP2<Gn019.4,.5> is m, value of parameter No.7117 is

n.
n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117.

n ≥ m: Amount A+B, showed in figure, which’s value is multiple of m and small
than n. As a result, clamping is performed as an integral multiple of the selected
magnification.
A: amount of pulses the same as Rapid Traverse Rate.
n
A B: amount of pulses saved in CNC.
B k : integer number
m
A+B=k⋅m
pulses over (k⋅m) will be ignored
Amount of pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse Rate (n ≥ m)
- 747 -
NOTE
Due to change of mode, clamping can be performed not as an
integral multiple of the selected magnification.
The distance the tool moves may not match the graduations on the
manual pulse generator.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1

NOTE
#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select
on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
7210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”
7211 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”
7212 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”
7213 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”
- 748 -
7214 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI
unit when jog feed is performed.
Arrow keys on MDI panel
Setting value Feed axis and direction
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction 7 8 9
2 First axis, negative direction
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction 4 5 6
5 Third axis, positive direction
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction
1 2 3
8 Fourth axis, negative direction
[Example] Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the direction
specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. <8↑> to the positive
direction of the Z axis, <2↓> to the negative direction of the Z axis, <6→> to the positive
direction of the X axis <4←> to the negative direction of the X axis, <1 > to the
positive direction of the Y axis, <9 > to the negative direction of the Y axis
Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 RDE OVE MLE

#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK <Gn108> is valid for PMC-controlled axes
0: Valid
1: Invalid
The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depends on the setting of bit 1 of parameter
No. 8006.
#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
- 749 -
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter

Bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No.
No. 8001 = 0
Signals 8001 = 1
(same signals as those
(signals specific to the PMC)
used for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7 <G012> *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 <G151>
Override cancellation signal OVC <G006.4> EOVC <G150.5>
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2 <G014.0,1> EROV1,2 <G150.0,1>
Dry run signal DRN <G046.7> EDRN <G150.7>
Rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7> ERT <G150.6>
(The listed signal addresses when PMC signals are selected are for the A-group. Actual
addresses differ depending on the used group.)
#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 PF2 PF1 F10 RPD

#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes

0: Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC
#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control
The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
F10 IS-A IS-B
Millimeter input 0 10 1
(mm/min) 1 100 10
Inch input 0 0.1 0.01
(inch/min) 1 1 0.1
#4 PF1
#5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No.
Feedrate unit
8002 8002
0 0 1/1
0 1 1 / 10
1 0 1 / 100
1 1 1 / 1000
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NCI

- 750 -
#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 EDC

#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8006 EZR EFD MLS

#1 MLS When bit 0 (MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock
signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of
feedrate data is:
0: Unchanged (1 times).
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002
is invalid.
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is:
0: Invalid.
With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm PS0224, “ZERO RETURN NOT
FINISHED” is not issued.
1: Valid.
A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an
NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 EMRx

#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to
MI8 <G106.0 to .7> set to “1” or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1.
- 751 -
If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the
CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is
set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.
P8010 Description
1 Uses path 1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G153)
2 Uses path 1 DI/DO group B (G154 to G165)
3 Uses path 1 DI/DO group C (G166 to G177)
4 Uses path 1 DI/DO group D (G178 to G189)
NOTE
When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled
by the PMC.
Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8030
axis control

[Unit of data] msec
For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential acceleration/
deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1622 is used.
The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear
acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.
8130 Number of controlled axes
NOTE

[Valid data range] 1 to Maximum number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the number of axes for each path.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8131 AOV EDC HPG
- 752 -
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 HPG Manual handle feed is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#2 EDC External deceleration is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#3 AOV Automatic corner override is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 SCL BCD
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#2 BCD Second auxiliary function is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#5 SCL Scaling is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8134 NCT NBG NGR BAR IAP
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 IAP Conversational programming with graphic function is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
#1 BAR Stored stroke limits 2 and 3 are:

0: Used.
- 753 -
1: Not Used.
#3 NGR Graphic display is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#6 NBG Background editing is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NCV NMC NHI NPE
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NPE Stored pitch error compensation is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#1 NHI Manual handle interruption is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#5 NMC Custom macro is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#6 NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NOW NOP NWC NWZ
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
- 754 -
#1 NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#3 NOP Software operator's panel is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#4 NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8301 SYA

#4 SYA In the servo-off state in axis synchronous control, the limit of the difference between the
positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis is:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8302 SMA

NOTE
#7 SMA When an absolute position detector is attached, and bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815
for an axis in synchronous operation is set to 0, APZ of the pairing axis in synchronous
operation is:
0: Not set to OFF.
1: Set to OFF.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8303 SOFx SAFx ATSx ATEx

NOTE
#0 ATEx In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Set this parameter with a slave axis.
- 755 -
#1 ATSx In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid positioning is:
0: Not started
1: Started
NOTE
When starting automatic setting for grid positioning, set ATS to 1.
Upon the completion of setting, ATS is automatically set to 0.
#2 SAFx In axis synchronous control, a movement along a slave axis is:

0: Not added to actual feedrate display.
1: Added to actual feedrate display.
#7 SOFx In axis synchronous control, the synchronization establishment function based on

machine coordinates is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8304 SYEx SCAx MVBx ADJx SSAx

#0 SSAx When the one-direction synchronization establishment function under axis synchronous
control is used:
0: The axis with a larger machine coordinate is used as the reference.
1: The axis with a smaller machine coordinate is used as the reference.
NOTE
1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
2 Set this parameter (SSA) to the same value for both the master
and slave axes.
#2 ADJx In axis synchronous control, this parameter specifies an axis along which a movement is
made in the modification mode.
0: A movement is not made in the modification mode along the axis.
1: A movement is made in the modification mode along the axis.
When this parameter is set to 1, the modification mode is set.
Along an axis with this parameter set to 1, a movement is made by a move command for
the master axis.
Set this parameter for one of the master and slave axes.
When there are multiple slave axes for one master axis, set this parameter to 1 for an axis
with which a synchronization error excessive alarm is issued for recovery. If an alarm is
issued with multiple axes, modify this parameter after recovery of one axis to recover
another axis.
- 756 -
#4 MVBx In the modification mode, a move command in a direction that increases a
synchronization error is:
0: Ignored.
1: Valid.
When there are multiple slave axes for one master axis, an attempt to reduce the
synchronous error of a slave axis by a movement along the master axis can increase the
synchronization error of another slave axis. If this parameter is set to 0 in such a case, a
movement can be made in neither direction along the master axis. In this case, set bit 2
(ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 to make a movement along a slave axis to perform a
corrective operation.
#5 SCAx In axis synchronous control:

0: Synchronous operation is performed when the axis synchronous control manual feed
selection signal SYNCJ <G0140> or the axis synchronous control selection signal
SYNC <G0138> for slave axes is set to 1.
1: Synchronous operation is performed at all times.
#7 SYEx When external machine coordinate system shift is specified by external data input/output
for the master axis in synchronous control, the slave axis is:
0: Not shifted.
1: Shifted by the same amount as specified for the master axis.
Set this parameter for the slave axis.
This function is disabled during normal operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8305 SSE SSO

#0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#1 SSE After emergency stop, the uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous
control is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
8311 Axis number of master axis in axis synchronous control
NOTE

Select a master axis in axis synchronous control. In the parameter for the slave axis, set
the axis number of the master axis.
[Example 1] When one set of axis synchronous control is used:
When the master axis is the first axis (X-axis), and the slave axis is the third axis (Z-axis),
set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
- 757 -
Parameter No. 8311 X (first axis) =0

Parameter No. 8311 Y (second axis) = 0
Parameter No. 8311 Z (third axis) =1
Parameter No. 8311 A (fourth axis) = 0
[Example 2] When three sets of axis synchronous control is used:
When the master axes are the first axis, second axis, and third axis, and the slave axes are
the sixth axis, fifth axis, and fourth axis, set parameter No. 8311 as follows:
Parameter No. 8311 B (fifth axis) =2
Parameter No. 8311 C (sixth axis) =1
8312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in axis synchronous control

This parameter sets mirror image for the slave axis. When 100 or a more value is set with
this parameter, the mirror image function is applied to synchronous control. Set this
parameter to the slave axis.
[Example] For reverse synchronization with the master axis being the third axis and the slave axis
being the fourth axis, set parameter No. 8312 as follows:
NOTE
In synchronous operation with mirror image applied,
synchronization establishment, synchronization error checking, and
modification mode cannot be used.
8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check based on machine coordinates

(B))
This parameter sets a maximum allowable error in a synchronization error check based on
machine coordinates. When the error between the master and slave axes in machine
coordinates exceeds the value set in this parameter, the machine stops with the servo
alarm SV0005, “SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN)”.
NOTE
Set 0 in this parameter when a synchronization error check is not
made.
- 758 -
8323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous control

This parameter sets the maximum allowable difference between the master axis and slave
axis position deviations. When the absolute value of a positional deviation difference
exceeds the value set in this parameter in axis synchronous control, the alarm DS0001,
“SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV)” is issued.
Set this parameter with a slave axis. If 0 is specified in this parameter, no position
deviation difference check is made.
8325 Maximum compensation value in synchronization establishment based on machine coordinates

(B))
This parameter sets the maximum compensation value for synchronization. When a
compensation value exceeding the value set in this parameter is detected, the servo alarm
SV0001, “SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR” is issued, and the synchronization
establishment is not performed.
Specify a slave axis for this parameter. To enable this parameter, set the bit 7 (SOF) of
parameter No. 8303 to 1. When 0 is set in this parameter, synchronization establishment
is not performed.
8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis reference counters

The difference between the master axis reference counter and slave axis reference counter
(master axis and slave axis grid shift) is automatically set when automatic setting for grid
positioning is performed. Then, the difference is transferred together with an ordinary
grid shift value to the servo system when the power is turned on. This parameter is set
with a slave axis.
8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter sets a time from the servo preparation completion signal, SA <F000.6>,
being set to 1 until torque difference alarm detection is started in axis synchronous
control.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the specification of 512 msec is assumed.
- 759 -
8337 M code for turning off synchronization in axis synchronous control

This parameter specifies an M code for switching from synchronous operation to normal
operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.
8338 M code for turning on synchronization in axis synchronous control

This parameter specifies an M code for switching from normal operation to synchronous
operation.
The M code set in this parameter is not buffered.
8465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI advanced preview control

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit)
This parameter sets the maximum allowable feedrate for AI advanced preview control.
If a feedrate higher than the setting of this parameter is specified in the AI advanced
preview control mode, the feedrate is clamped to that set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, no clamping is performed.
When bit 7 (NOF) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1, the tool moves, assuming that the
feedrate set in this parameter is specified. If 0 is set in this parameter at this time, a
movement is made at the specified feedrate.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8900 PWE

[Data type] Bit
#0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of those parameters that cannot be
set by setting input is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
10461 RGB value of color palette 1 for text for color set 3
to to

[Data type] 2-word
Each of these parameters sets the RGB value of each color palette for text by specifying a
6-digit number as described below.
- 760 -
rrggbb: 6-digit number (rr: red data, gg: green data, bb: blue data)
The valid data range of each color is 0 to 15 (same as the tone levels on the color setting
screen). When a number equal to or greater than 16 is specified, the specification of 15 is
assumed.
[Example] When the tone level of a color is: red:1 green:2, blue:3, set 10203 in the parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 IMG CIM NIM

#0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command

(G20 or G21) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece
coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below:
0: An alarm PS1298, “ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC CONVERSION” is issued.
1: Clearing is performed.
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is 1 or bit 2 (IRF) of
parameter No. 14000 is 1 and clears the following items.:
• Issuance of a move command with the machine locked
• Movement by handle interrupt
• Operation with a mirror image
• Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system is set up
#2 IMG Inch/metric changeover is:

0: Performed with the G20/G21.
1: Not performed with the G20/G21.
NOTE
If bit 2 of parameter No. 11222 is 1 (inch/metric changeover with
G20/G21 is disabled), only bit 2 of parameter No. 0 can be used to
perform inch/metric changeover. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 0, the
metric system is used. If bit 2 of parameter No.0 = 1, the inch
system is used.
11307 Display sequence of the coordinates in current position display
NOTE

This parameter sets the display sequence of the coordinates of a position displayed on the
following screens:
10.4-inch display units
- 761 -
• Total position display screen

• Total position display on each screen
8.4-inch display unit
• Total position display screen
The display sequence of coordinates corresponds to the parameter setting as follows:
Display sequence of
coordinates 1 2 3 4
Setting
Relative Absolute Machine Remaining
0 coordinates coordinates coordinates travel distance
Relative Machine Absolute Remaining
Relative Remaining Absolute Machine
2 coordinates travel distance coordinates coordinates
Absolute Machine Relative Remaining
Absolute Remaining Relative Machine
Machine Remaining Relative Absolute
If the setting is beyond the valid data range, 0 is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11353 SEK

[Data type] Bit
#0 SEK When the power is turned on, or when the clear state is present, sequence numbers are:
0: Not maintained.
1: Maintained.
NOTE
During a subprogram call, the sequence number of the subprogram
is maintained.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 FRD

#0 FRD The minimum command unit of the rotation angles of coordinate rotation is:
0: 0.001 degree.
1: 0.00001 degree. (1/100,000)
12990 (1st) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued
12991 (2nd) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued
12992 (3rd) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued
12993 (4th) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued
- 762 -

[Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups
Set the number of a G code modal group to be recorded in the alarm history and operation
history when an alarm is issued.
* If a value beyond the valid data range is set, the status of group 01 to 10 is recorded.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14000 IRFx

#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and
metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm
(PS5362) is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled.
Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before
switching between the inch and metric unit.
NOTE
1 This function enables the inch/metric switching commands (G20
and G21) at the reference position. It does not enable the
switching of the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No.
0000).
2 Switching between inch and metric by setting the setting input unit
(bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000) is enabled only when the
machine coordinate of the first reference position is 0 (parameter
No. 1240 is 0) and presence on the first reference position is
assumed.
For a system in which the machine coordinate of the first reference
position is not 0, set this parameter to 1 and specify G20/G21 in the
first reference position to switch between inch and metric.
Maximum allowable travel distance when the reference position is established for a linear scale with an
14010
absolute address reference position

- 763 -

This parameter sets the maximum allowable travel distance at the FL rate when the
reference position is established for a linear scale with an absolute address reference
position. When the travel distance exceeds the setting of this parameter, the alarm
DS0017, “SERIAL DCL:REF-POS ESTABLISH ERR” is issued. When this parameter is
set to 0, the maximum allowable travel distance is not checked.
NOTE
To establish the reference position with axis synchronous control,
set the parameter for both master and slave axes.
14340 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB

to to
14357 ATR value corresponding to slave 18 on FSSB
NOTE

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7,64,-56,-96
Each of these parameters sets the value (ATR value) of the address translation table
corresponding to each of slave 1 to slave 18 on FSSB.
The slave is a generic term for servo amplifiers and separate detector interface units
connected via an FSSB optical cable to the CNC. Numbers 1 to 18 are assigned to slaves,
with younger numbers sequentially assigned to slaves closer to the CNC.
A 2-axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and a 3-axis amplifier consists of three slaves.
In each of these parameters, set a value as described below, depending on whether the
slave is an amplifier, separate detector, or nonexistent.
• When the slave is an amplifier:
Set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of parameter No. 1023 for the
axis to which the amplifier is assigned.
• When the slave is a separate detector interface unit:
Set 64 for the first separate detector interface unit (connected near the CNC), and set
-56 for the second separate detector interface unit (connected far from the CNC).
• When the slave is nonexistent:
Set -96.
NOTE
When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14340 to
14357 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting
screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), be sure to directly set
values in parameter Nos. 14340 to 14357.
- 764 -
Example of axis configuration and parameter settings

- Example
CNC
Slave ATR
Controll Program Servo number No.14340 Axis
ed axis axis name axis to 14357
number No.1020 No.1023
Single-axis
1 X 1 amplifier 1 0 X
2 Y 3 Two-axis 2 1 A
amplifier
3 Z 4 3 2 Y
4 A 2 Two-axis 4 3 Z
amplifier
5 B 5 5 4 B
M1 6 64 (M1)
M2 7 -56 (M2)
8 to 18 -96 (None)
CNC
Slave ATR
Controll Program Servo number No.14340 Axis
ed axis axis name axis to 14357
number No.1020 No.1023
Single-axis
1 X 1 amplifier 1 0 X
2 Y 3 Two-axis 2 2 Y
amplifier
3 Z 4 3 3 Z
4 A 2 Two-axis 4 1 A
amplifier
5 B 5 5 4 B
M1 6 64 (M1)
M2 7 -56 (M2)
8 to 18 -96 (None)
M1/M2: First/second separate detector interface units
14376 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the first separate detector interface unit
to to
14383 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the first separate detector interface unit
14384 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the second separate detector interface unit
to to
14391 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the third separate detector interface unit
- 765 -
NOTE

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 7, 32
Each of these parameters sets the value (ATR value) of the address translation table
corresponding to each connector on a separate detector interface unit.
In each of these parameters, set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the setting of
parameter No. 1023 for the axis connected to a connector on a separate detector interface
unit.
When there are axes for which settings are made to use a separate detector interface unit
(bit 6 (PM1x) of parameter No. 1905 is set to 1 or bit 7 (PM2x) of parameter No. 1905 is
set to 1, set 32 for connectors not used.
NOTE
When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14376 to
14391 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting
screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the
parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 1), be sure to directly set
values in parameter Nos. 14376 to 14391.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14476 DFS

[Data type] Bit
#0 DFS The FSSB enters:

0: The FS0i-D-specific mode.
1: The FS0i-C-compatible mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16001 CPF

#7 CPF At the end of the 01 group containing the G01, G02, or G03 code, the PF signal to start
pressing is:
0: Not set to “1”.
1: Set to “1”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16003 TCF

#5 TCF After the OP signal indicating that automatic operation is in progress is set from “0” to
“1”, the PF signal to start pressing is set to “1”:
- 766 -
0: Only when a T command is found.
This status is the same as the status in which the PFW signal to wait for the start of
pressing is set to “1”.
1: Even if no T commands are found.
16010 Upper limit of the position deviation at which PF is set to “1”

For each axis, parameter No. 16010 sets the upper limit of the positional deviation at
which the PF signal to start pressing is set to “1”. When the absolute value of the
positional deviation does not exceed this highest limit, PF is set to “1”.
Parameter No.16010 is validated when parameter PFE (No. 16001, #1) is set to 1.
NOTE
The parameter can only be set for the X, Y, and C axes.
16032 Time interval by which setting of PF to “1” follows positioning in the forming mode

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16032 sets the time interval by which setting the PF signal to start pressing
to “1” follows positioning in the forming mode (except for nibbling).
Time interval by which the start of the next block follows setting of *PFIN to
16033
“0” in the forming mode

[Unit of data] msec
Parameter No. 16033 sets the time interval by which the start of the next block follows
setting the contact of the *PFIN signal to complete punching for single–cycle pressing to
“0” in the forming mode.
Positionin Next block
Time set in
parameter
16032
PF
Time set in
parameter
16033
*PFIN
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16050 G0F
- 767 -
NOTE

#0 G0F For a rapid traverse command (G00), the X–axis or Y–axis rapid traverse feedrate is set to
the value:
0: Specified in the parameter.
1: Specified by the F code.
The maximum feedrate of the F command is limited to the rapid traverse feedrate in the
parameter. OADx(No.6131, #0) and ILG(No.6132, #0) are valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16181 NSP NMG

#0 NMG When the M code for canceling the nibbling mode (No. 16184) is specified, the G code in
the 01 group is:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed to G00 (rapid traverse).
#2 NSP When the *SP signal to halt automatic operation is set to “0” in nibbling, automatic
operation is:
0: Decelerated and halted immediately.
1: Halted after positioning for a nibbling pitch completes.
16183 M code for setting the nibbling mode

Parameter No.16183 sets the M code for setting the nibbling mode.
16184 M code for canceling the nibbling mode

Parameter 16183 sets the M code for canceling the nibbling mode.
Maximum pitch that can be specified with G01, G02, or G03 for nibbling
16186
by G68 or G69 or by an M code

[Unit of data] mm, inch（input unit）
[Valid data range] Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data
- 768 -
Parameter No. 16186 specifies the maximum pitch that can be specified with G01, G02,
or G03 for nibbling by G68 or G69 or by an M code.
16188 Maximum pitch of the G00 command for nibbling by the M code

[Unit of data] mm, inch（input unit）
Parameter No. 16188 specifies the maximum pitch of the G00 command for nibbling by
the M code.
16194 Maximum distance traveled along C–axis in nibbling

[Unit of data] degree（input unit）
The parameter sets the maximum distance traveled along the C–axis for the nibbling
mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16200 UVC
NOTE

#0 UVC In the reset status, the macro stored under a U or V macro number is:
0: Deleted.
1: Not deleted.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16202 AIP

#0 AIP Specifies the condition for the share–proof command (G86).

0: Alarm (PS4506) is issued when I < 1.5P.
1: Alarm (PS4506) is issued when I < P.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16205 SZR

- 769 -
#0 SZR Automatic reference position return (G28) commands:

0: The axis returns directly to the reference position without passing through any
intermediate points.
1: The axis returns to the reference position via the specified intermediate point.
16209 Clearance and amount of return for the Y axis in automatic repositioning

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data
Each of the parameters sets the clearance and amount of return for the Y–axis in
automatic repositioning (G75).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16240 RLM
NOTE

#5 RLM When the power is turned on or in the clear status, the machine is set in the:
0: Punch mode.
1: Laser mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16242 ALA
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 ALA Switching between the punch mode and laser mode is:
0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
16244 M code for setting the punch mode
16245 M code for setting te laser mode

- 770 -
Each of the parameters set the M code for setting the punch mode or laser mode.
The parameters are validated when parameter ALA (No. 16242, #0) is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16260 TNM TCL
NOTE

#4 TCL The T axis is:

0: Not controlled by the CNC machine.
1: Controlled the CNC machine.
NOTE
1 When this parameter is set to 1, the T axis should be set as a
rotation axis. (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 is set to 1)
2 When this parameter is set to 1, setting the following parameters
allows the CNC to be compatible with FANUC Series 0i-PD, as
follows:
Setting Meaning
Bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No.1008=0 The axis rotates in the direction in which
the distance to the target is shorter.
Bit 2 (RRLx) of parameter No.1008=1 Relative coordinates are rounded by the
amount of the shift per one rotation
#5 TNM When machine lock signal MLK and the TNG signal for ignoring a T command are on,
whether the number following address T is cataloged as a tool number is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
NOTE
Generally, the tool number is not checked when the TNG signal is
set to “1”.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16263 NDA TOF

#2 TOF The function for compensating the tool position is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
Specify a tool position compensation value on the tool input screen.
- 771 -
#7 NDA If a T command is specified in normal direction mode:

0: An alarm is issued (alarm PS 4606).
1: An alarm is not issued.
If a multi–tool command is specified, however, an alarm is issued.
16265 Total number of tools to be used

This parameter specifies the total number of tools to be used by the tool function. If
T–axis control is selected (TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 16260) is set to 1), the total
number should include the number of tools for which T–axis control (turret index) is not
executed. This parameter can be specified on the tool input screen. The tool numbers to
be used should be specified on the tool input screen.
16266 Number of tools for which T–axis control is executed

This parameter specifies the number of tools for which T–axis control (turret index) is
executed. The parameter can be specified on the tool input screen.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No.
16260) is set to 1.
16267 Reference–position tool number under T–axis control

This parameter specifies the tool number to be selected upon reference position return for
the T–axis. The parameter can be specified on the tool input screen.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when the TCL bit (bit 4 of parameter No.
16260) is set to 1.
16269 Punching count for all tools (low–order)
16270 Punching count for all tools (high–order)

These parameters preset the punching count for all tools to be used.
Parameter No. 16269 and No. 16270 can be preset on the tool input screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16360 CIP
- 772 -
NOTE

#5 CIP In G01, G02, and G03 modes, a C–axis command is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16362 CRM

#5 CRM According to a T command, the machine is:

0: Moved along the C–axis to the reference point.
1: Not moved along the C–axis to the reference point.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16363 G91

#0 G91 For C-axis control, a G91 command is:

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
16370 Number of tool 1 for which C–axis control can be executed
- 773 -

Each of the parameters set the number of a tool for which C–axis control can be executed.
C–axis control can be effective for the tool set to this parameter.
16390 C-axis backlash 1
- 774 -

Each of these parameters specifies a C–axis backlash for each tool for which C–axis
control can be executed (C1–axis backlash under C–axis synchronous control).
The parameter values correspond to the tool numbers specified in parameter Nos. 16370
to 16389, respectively.
NOTE
The parameters are valid when the CBR bit (bit 7 of parameter
16360) is set to 1. When these parameters are valid, the C–axis
backlash specified in parameter 1852 is invalid.
16430 C–axis position compensation 1
- 775 -

[Unit of data] degree (machine unit)
Each of these parameters specifies a C–axis position compensation value (C1–axis

backlash under C–axis synchronous control).
These compensated values correspond to the tool numbers set in parameter Nos. 16370 to
16389.
NOTE
The values validated when parameter MAI (No. 16360, #2) is set to
1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16500 SF0
NOTE

#0 SF0 The safety zone of type:

0: A is used.
1: B is used.
NOTE
When type B is used, punching is inhibited in punch mode and entry
is inhibited in laser mode.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16501 SZ4 SZ3 SZ2 SZ1

#0 to 3 SFj When a safety zone check is executed, in the #j (j=1 to 4) area,

0: An entry is inhibited.
1: Punching is inhibited.
- 776 -
NOTE
When type B of safety zone check is used, this parameter is
disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16502 SZI MDP

#0 MDP On the safety zone setting display,

0: The workpiece coordinate system is indicated.
1: The machine coordinate system is indicated.
#4 SZI Data set on the safety zone setting display is:

0: Invalidated.
1: Validated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16504 RTZ

#1 RTZ In the safety zone check, setting area of the circle tool figure is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
16505 Positive X coordinate for safety zone 1
16506 Negative X coordinate for safety zone 1
16507 Y coordinate for safety zone 1

- 777 -

[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
Each set of the parameters specify safety zone 1, 2, 3, or 4.
NOTE
1 Set four safety zones to be arranged sequentially in the order of #1,
#2, #3 and #4 from the origin to positive of the X–axis.
2 Zeros must be specified for zones which need not be specified.
16517 Size of tool area 1 in the X direction
16518 Size of tool area 1 in the Y direction

[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specify tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or
8.
- 778 -
Tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16551 to 16558.
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a
PMC machine.
16540 Width of workpiece holder 1 along the X–axis for automatic setting of a safety zone

[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
Each of the parameters specifies the width of a workpiece holder along the X–axis for the
automatic setting of a safety zone by an external signal.
The parameter values correspond to safety zones 1 to 4, specified in parameter Nos.
16505 to 16516, respectively.
NOTE
When automatic setting is executed, these parameters must be set.
16551 X dimension of tool area 9
16552 Y dimension of tool area 9

[Valid data range] 0 or Positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table
(B))
- 779 -
In the safety zone check, each set of the parameters specifies tool area 9, 10, 11, or 12.
Tool area 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,or 8 are specified by setting each set of the parameters among
Nos.16517 to 16532.
NOTE
A tool area is selected by signals SZTS0 to SZTS3 input from a PMC
machine.
16610 M code 1 for canceling the Y–axis crack

Set an M code for Y-axis crack cancel.

The cancel M–code must be specified in these parameters by different from M–code used
for another function. But M02 and M30 are possible.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
16844 OVE

#1 OVE Rapid traverse override is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled. (The override is fixed to 100% at all times.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19500 FNW

#6 FNW When the feedrate is determined according to the feedrate difference and acceleration in
AI advanced preview control:
0: The maximum feedrate at which the allowable feedrate difference and acceleration
for each axis are not exceeded is used.
1: A feedrate is determined to satisfy the condition that the allowable feedrate
difference and allowable acceleration rate of each axis are not exceeded, and also to
ensure that a constant deceleration rate is applied to the same figure regardless of the
direction of movement.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19501 FRP
- 780 -
#5 FRP linear-shaped rapid traverse in the AI advance preview control mode is:
0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Set a maximum allowable acceleration rate for each axis in parameter No. 1671.
When this parameter is set to 1, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is also

applied to rapid traverse if all conditions below are satisfied. At this time,
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is not applied.
• Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1: Linear interpolation type positioning
• A value other than 0 is set in parameter No. 1671 for an axis.
If all of these conditions are not satisfied, acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.
NOTE
To enable blinking display and signal output indicating the AI
advance preview control mode even when rapid traverse command
is specified, set bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 1612 to 1 in addition to
the above settings.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19607 CAV

#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred:

0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041).
(Interference check alarm function)
1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference
(overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)
For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No.
5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.
A.2 DATA TYPE

Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
0 or 1
Bit path
Bit axis
Byte
Byte machine group -128 to 127 Some parameters handle these types of
Byte path 0 to 255 data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Word
Word machine group -32768 to 32767 Some parameters handle these types of
Word path 0 to 65535 data as unsigned data.
Word axis
- 781 -
Data type Valid data range Remarks

2-word
2-word machine group Some parameters handle these types of
0 to ±999999999
2-word path data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
Real
Real machine group See the standard parameter
Real path setting tables.
Real axis
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, and bit axis types
consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with eight different
meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
machine groups are present, so that independent data can be set for each
machine group.
In the FANUC Series 0i-PD, the maximum number of machine group is 1.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of paths are
present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
In the FANUC Series 0i-PD, the maximum number of controlled path is 1.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of control
axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each control axis.
5 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The range
varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
- 782 -
A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES

This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the
real type, real machine group type, real path type, and real axis type. The data type and unit of data of
each parameter conform to the specifications of each function.
NOTE
1 Values are rounded up or down to the nearest multiples of the minimum data
unit.
2 A valid data range means data input limits, and may differ from values
representing actual performance.
3 For information on the ranges of commands to the CNC, refer to Appendix D,
"Range of Command Value."
(A) Length and angle parameters (type 1)

Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unit Valid data range
mm IS-A 0.01 -999999.99 to +999999.99
deg. IS-B 0.001 -999999.999 to +999999.999
IS-A 0.001 -99999.999 to +99999.999
inch
IS-B 0.0001 -99999.9999 to +99999.9999
(B) Length and angle parameters (type 2)

mm IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
deg. IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
(C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters

mm/min IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999000.00
degree/min IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999000.000
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +96000.000
inch/min
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +9600.0000
(D) Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters

mm/sec2 IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99
deg./sec2 IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999
IS-A 0.001 0.000 to +99999.999
inch/sec2
IS-B 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999.9999
- 783 -
B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
B PROGRAM CODE LIST

ISO code EIA code Custom macro
Character name Code Code without
Character Character with custom
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom
macro
macro
Number 0 0 30 0 20
Number 1 1 B1 1 01
Number 2 2 B2 2 02
Number 3 3 33 3 13
Number 4 4 B4 4 04
Number 5 5 35 5 15
Number 6 6 36 6 16
Number 7 7 B7 7 07
Number 8 8 B8 8 08
Number 9 9 39 9 19
Address A A 41 a 61
Address B B 42 b 62
Address C C C3 c 73
Address D D 44 d 64
Address E E C5 e 75
Address F F C6 f 76
Address G G 47 g 67
Address H H 48 h 68
Address I I C9 i 79
Address J J CA j 51
Address K K 4B k 52
Address L L CC l 43
Address M M 4D m 54
Address N N 4E n 45
Address O O CF o 46
Address P P 50 p 57
Address Q Q D1 q 58
Address R R D2 r 49
Address S S 53 s 32
Address T T D4 t 23
Address U U 55 u 34
Address V V 56 v 25
Address W W D7 w 26
Address X X D8 x 37
Address Y Y 59 y 38
Address Z Z 5A z 29
Delete DEL FF Del 7F
Back space BS 88 BS 2A
Tabulator HT 09 Tab 2E
End of block LF or NL 0A CR or EOB 80
Carriage return CR 8D
Space SP A0 SP 10
Absolute rewind stop % A5 ER 0B
Control out (start of comment) ( 28 (2-4-5) 1A
Control in (end of comment) ) A9 (2-4-7) 4A
Plus sign + 2B + 70
Minus sign - 2D - 40
- 784 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST
ISO code EIA code Custom macro
Character name Code Code without
Character Character with custom
(hexadecimal) (hexadecimal) custom
macro
macro
Colon (address O) : 3A
Optional block skip / AF / 31
Period (decimal point) . 2E . 6B
Sharp # A3 Parameter (No.6012)
Dollar sign $ 24
Ampersand & A6 & 0E
Apostrophe ’ 27
Asterisk * AA Parameter (No.6010)
Comma , AC , 3B
Semicolon ; FB
Left angle bracket < 2C
Equal sign = BD Parameter (No.6011)
Right angle bracket > BE
Question mark ? 3F
Commercial at mark @ C0
Quotation mark “ 22
Left square bracket [ DB Parameter (No.6013)
Right square bracket ] DD Parameter (No.6014)
Underscore _ 6F Parameter (No.6018)
NOTE
1 The symbols used in the "Custom macro" column have the following meanings.
(Space) : The character will be registered in memory and has a specific meaning.
It is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm
occurs.
: The character will not be registered in memory and will be ignored.
: The character will be registered in memory, but will be ignored during
program execution.
: The character will be registered in memory. If it is used in a statement
other than a comment, an alarm occurs.
: If it is used in a statement other than a comment, the character will not
be registered in memory. If it is used in a comment, it will be
registered in memory.
2 Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
3 Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they are ignored without
generating the TH alarm when they are in the comment section.
- 785 -
C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND
PROGRAM FORMAT APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
C LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM

FORMAT
Some functions cannot be used depending on the machine.
For details of command formats, see the relevant sections or subsections.
In the list, the following symbols are used:

x : 1st basic axis (X),
y : 2nd basic axis (Y),
coded using G code system A

• IP_ : presents a combination of arbitrary axis addresses (such as X_ Y_ Z_).
Functions Illustration Program format

Positioning IP G00 IP_ ;
(G00)
Start point
Linear interpolation IP G01 IP_ F_;
(G01)
Start point
Circular interpolation G02 R_
(G02, G03) Start point G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
R G02 G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
J G03 I_ K_
I
(x, y) G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 G03 J_ K_
(x, y)
R
J
I
Start point
Helical interpolation z G02 R_
(G02, G03) G17 X_ Y_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
Start
point (xyz)
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ α_ F_ ;
(x, y) G03 J_ K_
In case of G03 on X-Y plane α: Arbitrary address except the circular

interpolation axis
Dwell X_
G04 ;
(G04) P_
AI contour control G05.1 Q1 ; AI advanced preview control mode
(G05.1) on
G05.1 Q0 ; AI advanced preview control mode
off
- 786 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM FORMAT

High-speed HRV current G05.4 Q1 ; High-speed HRV current control
control mode on
(G05.1) G05.4 Q0 ; High-speed HRV current control
mode off
Exact stop Speed
(G09)
G01
G09 G02 IP_ ;
Time
G03
In-position check
Programmable data input Tool compensation memory A

(G10, G11) G10 L01 P_ R_ ;
Tool data input

N_P_R_ ; Tool data entry
G11 ; : Tool data entry mode cancel
Plane selection G17 ; Xp Yp-plane selection
(G17, G18, G19) G18 ; Zp Xp-plane selection
G19 ; Yp Zp-plane selection
Inch/metric conversion Inch input G20 ;
(G20, G21) Metric input G21 ;
Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
(G22, 23) G23 ; Cancel
(IJK)
Reference position return Reference position(G28) G28 ; :
(G28) Return to the reference position without passing
Intermediate point through the intermediate point
IP G28 IP_ ; :
Start point
Return to the reference position via the
intermediate point
Automatic setting of the safety Please refer to the chapter Workpiece holder detection command:
zone "Automatic Setting of the Safety G32 X_ F_ P_ Q_ ;
(G32) Zone".
Skip function IP G33 IP_ F_ ;
(G33)
Start point Skip signal
Bending compensation Please refer to the chapter G38 I_ J_ K_ P_ Q_ R_ ; :
(G38,G39) "BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, Bending compensation for X axis direction：
G39)". G39 I_ J_ K_ P_ Q_ R_ ; :
Bending compensation for Y axis direction
Tool radius compensation G41 G17
G18 G41 D_ ;
(G40 to G42) G42
G19
D : Tool compensation number
G42 G40 : Cancel
G40
Normal direction control G41.1(G151); Normal direction control on: left
(G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) G42.1(G152); Normal direction control on: right
(G150, G151, G152) G40.1(G150); Normal direction control cancel
Linear punching command Please refer to the chapter "LINEAR G45 X_ Y_ P_ Q_ R_ D_ ;
(G45) PUNCHING COMMAND (G45) ".
- 787 -

Circular punching commands Please refer to the chapter G46 X_ Y_ R_ P_ Q_ ;
(G46,47) "CIRCULAR PUNCHING G47 X_ Y_ R_ P_ Q_ ;
COMMANDS (G46, G47)".
Scaling P4 P3 G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_
(G50, G51) I_ J_ K_ ;
P4' P3'
IP
P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z : Control position of scaling
P1' P2' G50 : Cancel
P1 P2
Local coordinate system Local coordinate G52 IP_ ;
setting system
x
(G52)
IP Workpiece
y coordinate system
Command in machine G53 IP_ ;

coordinate system
(G53)
Selection of workpiece G54
IP :
coordinate system Workpiece : IP_ ;
origin G59
(G54 to G59) offset
Workpiece coordinate system
Machine coordinate system
Cutting mode (G64) G64_ ; Cutting mode

v
Exact stop mode (G61) G61_ ; Exact stop mode
G64
t
Automatic corner override G62_ ; Automatic corner override
v
(G62)
G61
t
Custom macro • One-shot call
(G65, G66, G67) G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Macro
P : Program number
O_ ; L : Number of repetition
G65 P_L_ ;
M99 ; • Modal call
G66 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Call after the move command
G67 ; Cancel
Circular nibbling #n G68 I r J θ K Δθ P d Q p ;
(G68) d
#2
r
p #1
Δθ
θ
Linear nibbling d G69 I l J θ P d Q p ;

(G69) l
#n
p
θ
#1 #2
- 788 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM FORMAT

Nibbling by M function M## ←M code of nibbling mode
‥‥‥‥‥ The route and the pitch are
‥‥‥‥‥ specified according to these
‥‥‥‥‥ command
M$$ ←M code of nibbling mode cancel
## : Set value of parameter No.16183

$$ : Set value of parameter No.16184
Positioning and no press start G70 X_ Y_ C_ ;
signal
(G70) (X,Y)
Start point
Base point command G72 X_ Y_ ;

(G72)
(X,Y)
Multiple-piece machining Please refer to the chapter G73

(G73, G74, G98) “MULTIPLE-PIECE MACHINING” W_ Q_ ;
G74
W : Macro number
G98 X_ Y_ I_ P_ J_ K_ ;
Automatic repositioning G75 X_ ;
(G75)
Pattern function Please refer to the chapter G26_ ;

(G26, G76, G77, G78, G79, “PATTERN FUNCTION” G76_ ;
G86, G87, G88, G89) G77_ ;
G78_ ;
G79_ ;
G86_ ;
G87_ ;
G88_ ;
G89_ ;
Coordinate system rotation Y G17 X_ Y_
(G84, G85) G84 G18 Z_ X_ R α ;
α G19 Y_ Z_
(x y) G85；: cancel
X
In case of X-Y plane
Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute programming
programming G91_ ; Incremental programming
(G90/G91) :
G90_ G91_ ; Programming in both modes
- 789 -

Maximum incremental command G91.1 IP_ ;
value check (G91.1) IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
Set 0 to cancel maximum incremental value
check.
Change of workpiece G92 IP_ ; Change of workpiece coordinate
coordinate system (G92) IP system
Maximum spindle speed clamp
(G92)
Workpiece coordinate system G92.1 IP 0 ;

preset (G92.1)
Feed per minute, mm/min inch/min F_ ; Feed per minute
mm/rev inch/rev
- 790 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE
D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Linear axis
- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter
Increment system
IS-A IS-B
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001
Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0.001
Max. programmable dimension (mm) ±999,999.99 ±999,999.999
Max. rapid traverse (mm/min)*1 999,000 999,000
Feedrate range (mm/min)*1 0.01 to 999,000 0.01 to 999,000
0.01 0.001
0.1 0.01
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1
10.0 1.0
Tool compensation amount (mm)*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999
Backlash compensation amount (pulses)*3 0 to ±9,999 0 to ±9,999
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999
- In case of inch input, feed screw is millimeter

Increment system
IS-A IS-B
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001
Least command increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001
Max. programmable dimension (inch) ±39,370.078 ±39,370.0787
Max. rapid traverse (mm/min)*1 999,000 999,000
Feedrate range (inch/min)*1 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600
0.001 0.0001
0.01 0.001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01
1.0 0.1
Tool compensation amount (inch)*2 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999
- In case of inch input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
IS-A IS-B
Least input increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001
Least command increment (inch) 0.001 0.0001
Max. programmable dimension (inch) ±99,999.999 ±99,999.9999
Max. rapid traverse (inch/min)*1 96,000 9,600
Feedrate range (inch/min)*1 0.001 to 96,000 0.0001 to 9,600
0.001 0.0001
0.01 0.001
Incremental feed (inch/step)
0.1 0.01
1.0 0.1
Tool compensation amount (inch)*4 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999
- 791 -
D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
- In case of millimeter input, feed screw is inch

Increment system
IS-A IS-B
Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001
Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0.001
Max. programmable dimension (mm) ±999,999.99 ±999,999.999
Max. rapid traverse (inch/min)*1 96,000 9,600
Feedrate range (mm/min)*1 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000
0.01 0.001
0.1 0.01
Incremental feed (mm/step)
1.0 0.1
10.0 1.0
Tool compensation amount (mm)*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999
- Rotary axis
Increment system
IS-A IS-B
Least input increment (deg) 0.01 0.001
Least command increment (deg) 0.01 0.001
Max. programmable dimension (deg) ±999,999.99 ±999,999.999
Max. rapid traverse (deg/min)*1 999,000 999,000
Feedrate range (deg/min)*1 0.01 to 999,000 0.001 to 999,000
0.01 0.001
0.1 0.01
Incremental feed (deg/step)
1.0 0.1
10.0 1.0
Tool compensation amount (deg)*2 0 to ±9,999.99 0 to ±9,999.999
Dwell (sec)*4 0 to 999,999.99 0 to 999,999.999
NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC interpolation
capacity. As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system must also
be considered.
*2 If the mode of input is switched between inch input and metric input, the
maximum compensation value that can be set at inch input time is (maximum
compensation value) × 1/25.4. If a value exceeding this value is specified at inch
input time, the compensation value is not converted to a metric value correctly
when the mode of input is switched to metric input.
*3 The unit is the detection unit.
*4 Depends on the increment system of the axis at in address X.
- 792 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS
E NOMOGRAPHS
Appendix E, "NOMOGRAPHS", consists of the following sections:
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER .............................................................................................................793

E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING ...............................................................796
E.1 TOOL PATH AT CORNER

When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the
positioning system when a servo motor is used) is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is
produced between the tool path (tool center path) and the programmed path as shown in Fig. E.1 (a).
Time constant T1 of the exponential acceleration/deceleration is fixed to 0.
θ
V2
Programmed path
Tool path
V1
Fig. E.1 (a) Slight deviation between the tool path and the programmed path
This tool path is determined by the following parameters:

• Feedrate (V1, V2)
• Corner angle (θ)
• Exponential acceleration / deceleration time constant (T1) at cutting (T1 = 0)
• Presence or absence of buffer register.
The above parameters are used to theoretically analyze the tool path and above tool path is drawn with the
parameter which is set as an example.
When actually programming, the above items must be considered and programming must be performed
carefully so that the shape of the workpiece is within the desired precision.
In other words, when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision, the commands of
the next block must not be read until the specified feedrate becomes zero. The dwell function is then used
to stop the machine for the appropriate period.
Explanation
- Analysis
The tool path shown in Fig. E.1 (b) is analyzed based on the following conditions:
• Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering.
• The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader,
number of characters of the next block, etc.)
- 793 -
E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
V
VY2 φ2
VX2
θ
V
Z
VY1
φ2
VX1 0 X
Fig. E.1 (b) Example of tool path
- Description of conditions and symbols

VX1 = Vcos φ1
VY1 = Vsin φ1
VX2 = Vcos φ2
VY2 = Vsin φ2
V : Feedrate at both blocks before and after cornering

VX1 : X-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
VY1 : Y-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
VX2 : X-axis component of feedrate of following block
VY2 : Y-axis component of feedrate of following block
θ : Corner angle
φ1 : Angle formed by specified path direction of preceding block and X-axis
φ2 : Angle formed by specified path direction of following block and X-axis
- Initial value calculation
Y0
V
X0
Fig. E.1 (c) Initial value
The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command
distribution by the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of
the servo motor.
- 794 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS
X 0 = VX1( T1 + T2 )
Y0 = VY1( T1 + T2 )
T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant. (T=0)

T2 : Time constant of positioning system (Inverse of position loop gain)
- Analysis of corner tool path

The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner section in X-axis direction and Y-axis direction.
(t) VX1 t t
VX = ( VX 2 − VX1 )[1 − { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} + VX1 ]
T1 − T2 T1 T2
VX1 t t
= VX 2 [1 − { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )}]
T1 − T2 T1 T2
(t) VY 1 − VY 2 t t
VY = { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} + VY 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
Therefore, the coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated from the following equations:
X( t ) = ∫ VX ( t )dt − X 0
1
VX 2 − VX1 t t
= { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} − VX 2 ( T1 + T2 − t )
2 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
∫
1
Y( t ) = VY ( t )dt − Y0
0
V Y 2 − V Y1 t t
= { T1 exp( − ) − T2 exp( − )} − VY 2 ( T1 + T2 − t )
2 2
T1 − T2 T1 T2
- 795 -
E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
E.2 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING

When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output
results. Since the tool advances along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear
interpolation. In circular interpolation, however, radial errors may be produced, sepecially for circular
cutting at high speeds.
This error can be obtained as follows:
Y Δr
Command path
Actual path
1 2 V2
Δr = (T1 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 )) . . . . . (1)
2 r
Δr : Maximum radius error (mm)
v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circle radius (mm)
T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constantat cutting (sec) (T=0)
T2 : Time constant of positoning system (sec)
(Inverse of positon loop gain)
α: Feed forward coefficient (%)
In the case of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration and linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
interpolation, an approximation of this radius error can be obtained with the following expression:
Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation

1 1 V2
Δr = ( T12 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 ))
24 2 r
Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation
1 1 V2
Δr = ( T12 + T2 2 (1 - α 2 ))
48 2 r
Thus, the radius error in the case of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration and linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is smaller than in case of exponential acceleration/deceleration by a factor of 12, excluding any error
caused by a servo loop time constant.
Since the machining radius r (mm) and allowable error Δr (mm) of the workpiece is given in actual
machining, the allowable limit feedrate v (mm /sec) is determined by equation (1).
Since the acceleration/deceleration time constant at cutting which is set by this equipment varies with the
machine tool, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
- 796 -
F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN
THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX RESET STATE
F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR

STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE
Either the clear state or reset state is entered during a reset is set by bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 (0:
reset state/1: clear state).
The symbols in the figure below have the following meanings.
○ : The setting remains unchanged or the operation continues.
× : The setting is deleted or the operation stops.
Item Power-on Clear state Reset state

Settings Offset ○ ○ ○
Set data ○ ○ ○
Parameter ○ ○ ○
Various Program in memory ○ ○ ○
data items Information of the block
read in advance during × × ×
automatic operation
N (sequence number) × (Note 6) × (Notes 1, 2, 6) ○ (Note 1, 2)
One-shot G code × × ×
Initial value (Note 3)
Initial value (Note 3)
G20 and G21 are set to
Modal G code G20 and G21 are not ○ (Note 2)
the state at the previous
changed (Note 2).
power-off.
F 0 0 ○ (Note 2)
S, T, M × ○ (Note 2) ○ (Note 2)
K (count specification) × × ×
Coordinate Workpiece coordinates 0 (Note 4) ○ ○
Operation Movement × × ×
during Dwell × × ×
execution M, S, T code output × × ×
Tool radius × × ×
compensation
Storing a called × × (Note 5) ×
subprogram
Output "0” “0” “0”
signals CNC alarm signal AL (when no alarm cause is (when no alarm cause is (when no alarm cause is
present) present) present)
Reference position
○ (or × for emergency ○ (or × for emergency
return completion signal ×
stop) stop)
ZPx
S, T, B codes × ○ ○
M code × × ×
M, S, T, B strobe × × ×
signals
CNC ready signal MA “1” ○ ○
“1” “1” “1”
Servo ready signal SA (when a servo alarm does (when a servo alarm does (when a servo alarm does
not occur) not occur) not occur)
Cycle start signal STL × × ×
Feed hold signal SPL × × ×
- 797 -
F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON,
IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR
IN THE RESET STATE APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
NOTE
1 When the beginning position is found, the main program number is displayed.
2 If a reset is made during execution of a block, the states of the modal G code
and modal address (such as N, F, S, T, or M) specified in the block are not
reflected. The modal information specified in the previous and preceding blocks
is kept.
3 The initial value of the modal G code depends on the following parameters. For
details, refer to the parameter manual (B-64310EN, B-64560EN).
- Bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402
- Parameters No. 3406 to 3409
4 For detection of an absolute position, the value is generated from machine
coordinates and a workpiece origin offset.
5 When a reset is made during execution of a subprogram, a return to the main
program is performed. Execution at a midpoint in the subprogram is
impossible.
6 When bit 0 (SEK) of parameter No. 11353 is set to 1, sequence number N can
be held even at power-on or in the clear state.
- 798 -
G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
G CHARACTER-TO-CODES
CORRESPONDENCE TABLE
Appendix G, "CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE", consists of the following
sections:
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE ..........................................................799

G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE..............................................................800
G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 “ 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Sharp
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 ‘ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Plus sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Minus sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 @ 064 At mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ] 093 Right square bracket
3 051 ^ 094
4 052 _ 095 Underscore
5 053
- 799 -
CORRESPONDENCE APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
G.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE
- 800 -
- 801 -
- 802 -
- 803 -
- 804 -
- 805 -
H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
H ALARM LIST
Appendix H, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following items:
(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm) .....................................................................................806

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm) ....................................................................................................806
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm) .....................................................................................................806
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm)...................................................................................................819
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)......................................................................................................................819
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)..............................................................................................................824
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)............................................................................................................824
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)..........................................................................824
(9) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)................................................................................................................825
(10) Other alarms (DS alarm)....................................................................................................................825
(11) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm) ..........................................................................830
(1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)

(2) Background edit alarms (BG alarm)
(3) Communication alarms (SR alarm)
Alarm numbers are common to all these alarm types.

Depending on the state, an alarm is displayed as in the following examples:
PS"alarm number" Example: PS0003
BG"alarm number" Example: BG0085
SR"alarm number" Example: SR0001

0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of
parameter No. 0000 to “0”.
0003 TOO MANY DIGIT Data entered with more digits than permitted in the NC
instruction word.
The number of permissible digits varies according to the
function and the word.
0004 INVALID BREAK POINT OF WORDS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format.
This alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not
contain a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS NC word(s) address + numerical value not in word format.
This alarm is also generated when a custom macro does not
contain a reserved word, or does not conform to the syntax.
0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
0009 IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was specified, or parameter 1020 is not set.
0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to
0.
- 806 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST

0015 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A move command was specified for more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Divide the number of programmed move axes into two blocks.
0020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS An arc was specified for which the difference in the radius at
the start and end points exceeds the value set in parameter
No. 3410. Check arc center codes I, J and K in the program.
The tool path when parameter No. 3410 is set to a large value
is spiral.
0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not
specified simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation or involute interpolation.
0022 R OR I,J,K COMMAND NOT FOUND The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or
coordinate I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to
the center of the arc.
0028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The plane selection instructions G17 to G19 are in error.
Reprogram so that same 3 basic parallel axes are not
specified simultaneously.
This alarm is also generated when an axis that should not be
specified for plane machining is specified, for example, for
circular interpolation.
0029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE Illegal offset No.
0030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER An illegal offset No. was specified.
0031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 Data input for the L No. of G10 or the corresponding function
is not enabled.
No data setting address such as P or R was specified.
An address command not concerned with data setting was
specified. An address varies with the L No.
The sign or decimal point of the specified address is in error,
or the specified address is out of range.
0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset
amount by system variables, the offset amount was
excessive.
0033 NO INTERSECTION AT G41/G42 The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
calculation in tool radius compensation. Modify the program.
0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT In tool radius compensation, a startup or cancellation is
BLK performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the program.
0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - Skip function(G33) cannot be specified. This alarm is
generated when a G code (such as for tool radius
compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G33P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip
in the PMC window or the like.
0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter radius compensation. Modify the program.
0038 INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in tool radius/tool nose radius
BLOCK compensation because the arc start point or end point
coincides with the arc center. Modify the program.
0041 INTERFERENCE IN G41/G42 In tool radius compensation, excessive cutting may occur.
Modify the program.
0043 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND On a system with a DRILL-MATE ATC installed, M06 is not
specified in a block that specifies a T code. Alternatively, a T
code beyond the allowable range is specified.
- 807 -

0060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The specified number could not be found for program number
and sequence number searches.
[External workpiece number search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
number could not be found.
0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
0071 DATA NOT FOUND - The address to be searched was not found.
- The program with specified program number was not
found in program number search.
Check the data.
0072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 400. Delete
unnecessary programs and execute program registration
again.
0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs
and execute program registration again.
0074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999. Modify the
program number.
0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number
was protected.
In program matching, the password for the encoded program
was not correct.
An attempt was made to select a program being edited in the
background as the main program.
An attempt was made to call a program being edited in the
background as a subprogram.
0076 PROGRAM NOT FOUND The specified program is not found in the subprogram call or
macro call.
Not only a P instruction in M98, G65, G66 or interrupt type
custom macro, but also the M/G/T codes or a specific code
call the subprogram or macro program.
This alarm is also generated when a program is not found by
these calls.
0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
0078 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The specified sequence No. was not found during sequence
number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in
GOTO–– and M99P–– was not found.
0079 PROGRAM NOT MATCH The program in memory does not match the program stored
on tape.
Multiple programs cannot be matched continuously when bit
6(NPE) of parameter No. 3201 is set to “1”.
Set bit 6(NPE) of parameter No. 3201 to “0” before executing
a match.
0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to Reader/Puncher interface 1 before it could read
a previously received character.
0086 DR OFF During I/O process by Reader/Puncher interface 1, the data
set ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.
Possible causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable,
and a defective printed circuit board.
- 808 -

0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by Reader/Puncher interface 1, although a read
stop command was issued, more than 10 characters were
input. The I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
0090 REFERENCE RETURN 1. The reference position return cannot be performed
INCOMPLETE normally because the reference position return start point
is too close to the reference position or the speed is too
slow. Separate the start point far enough from the
reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for
reference position return.
2. An attempt was made to set the zero position for the
absolute position detector by return to the reference
position when it was impossible to set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the
zero position of the absolute position detector after
turning the CNC and servo amplifier off and then on
again.
0091 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION Manual return to the reference position cannot be performed
RETURN IS NOT PERFORMED IN when automatic operation is halted. Perform the manual
FEED HOLD return to the reference position when automatic operation is
stopped or reset.
0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out
of range during arithmetic calculations.
0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
0113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is
commanded. Modify the program.
0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro
statement is in error. The parameter tape format is in error.
0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE A number that cannot be used for a local variable, common
variable, or system variable in a custom macro is specified.
0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
right side of an expression.
0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
RANGE range.
0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the
GOTO/WHILE/DO main program in the MDI or DNC mode.
0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed
the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
0128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The specified sequence No. could not be found for sequence
NUMBER number search.
The sequence No. specified as the jump destination in
GOTO-- and M99P-- could not be found.
0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call. G cannot
be specified as an argument.
0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
- 809 -

0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC
AXIS axis is being controlled.
0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete
USE the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the
correct operation for the background edition.
0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ … or
G51I_J_K_ … or parameter No. 5411 or 5421)
0143 COMMAND DATA OVERFLOW An overflow occurred in the storage length of the CNC internal
data. This alarm is also generated when the result of internal
calculation of scaling and coordinate rotation overflows the
data storage. It also is generated during input of the manual
intervention amount.
0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose
radius compensation plane must be the same. Modify the
program.
0148 SETTING ERROR Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the
settable range of judgment angle. Modify the parameters
(No.1710 to No.1714).
0199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 1 The execution of an M198 or M99 command was
attempted during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the
execution of an M198 command was attempted during
DNC operation. Modify the program.
2 The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an
interrupt macro during pocket machining in a multiple
repetitive canned cycle.
0213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In feed axis synchronization control, the following errors
SYNCHRO-MODE occurred during the synchronous operation.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual operation (jog feed or
incremental feed) to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position
return command without specifying the manual reference
position return after the power was turned on.
0222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN Input and output are executed at a time in the background
BG-EDIT edition. Execute a correct operation.
0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED A reference return has not been performed before the start of
automatic operation.
(Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0)
Perform a reference position return.
0231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 L52 Errors occurred in the specified format at the
programmable-parameter input.
0232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS Three or more axes were specified as helical axes in the
COMMAND helical interpolation mode.
0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using
it.
0247 THE MISTAKE IS FOUND IN THE When an encrypted program is output, EIA is set for the
OUTPUT CODE OF DATA. output code. Specify ISO.
0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the
program.
0301 RESETTING OF REFERENCE Although bit 0 (IDGx) of parameter No. 1012 was set to 1 to
RETURN IS INHIBITED inhibit the reference position from being set again for a return
to the reference position without a dog, an attempt was made
to perform a manual return to the reference position.
- 810 -

0302 SETTING THE REFERENCE The reference position could not be set for a return to the
POSITION WITHOUT DOG IS NOT reference position without a dog. Possible causes are:
PERFORMED - The axis was not moved in the direction of a return to the
reference position for jog feeding.
- The axis was moved in the direction opposite to the
direction of a manual return to the reference position.
- Since the one-rotation signal sent from the position
detector is not detected, the grid for manual reference
position return is not established. (Bit 6 of diagnostic data
No. 0201 must be 1.)
0304 G28 IS COMMANDED WITHOUT Although a reference position was not set, an automatic return
ZERO RETURN to the reference position (G28) was commanded.
0307 CAN NOT START REFERENCE An attempt was made to set a butt-type reference position for
RETURN WITH MECHANICAL an axis for which to use the function to set a reference
STOPPER SETTING position without a dog.
0334 OFFSET IS OUT OF EFFECTIVE An offset data which was out of the effective range was
RANGE specified. (malfunction prevention function)
0337 EXCESS MAXIMUM INCREMENTAL The command value exceeded the maximum amount of
VALUE incremental. (malfunction prevention function)
0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS The maximum control axis number which could be used within
NUMBER PER PATH a path was exceeded.
Check parameter No. 0981 and No. 0982. If this alarm is
generated, the emergency stop state cannot be released.
0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR - No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in
the torque limit switch instruction (G33P98/P99).
- The high-speed continuous skip function (G33P90) is not
present.
0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for skip instruction (G33) is
out of range. The address P range is 1 to 4 in a
multistage skip function.
2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range.
The address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip
function.
3) P1-4 for G33, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
0376 SERIAL DCL: ILLEGAL 1. When bit 1 of parameter No. 1815 is set to “1”, parameter
PARAMETER No.2002#3 is set to “0”
2. The absolute-position detection function is enabled. (Bit 5
of parameter No. 1815 is set to “1”. )
0518 CODE OF CONTROL-IN IS NOT The code of a control-in does not exist in comment of the
EXIST program. It is necessary to end the comment by the code of a
control-in ")", when the comment is started by the code of a
control-out "(".
1001 AXIS CONTROL MODE ILLEGAL Axis control mode is illegal.
1013 ILLEGAL POS. OF PROGRAM NO. Address O or N is specified in an illegal location (e.g. after a
macro statement).
1014 ILLEGAL FORMAT OF PROGRAM Address O or N is not followed by a number.
NO.
1016 EOB NOT FOUND EOB (End of Block) code is missing at the end of a program
input in the MDI mode.
1077 PROGRAM IN USE An attempt was made in the foreground to execute a program
being edited in the background.
The currently edited program cannot be executed, so end
editing and restart program execution.
1079 PROGRAM FILE NOT FOUND The program of the specified file No. is not registered in an
external device. (external device subprogram call)
- 811 -

1080 DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB Another external device subprogram call was made from a
PROGRAM CALL subprogram after the subprogram called by the external
device subprogram call.
1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM CALL The external device subprogram call is not possible in this
MODE ERROR mode.
1090 PROGRAM FORMAT ERROR A lowercase alphabetic character is found in other than an NC
program statement comment section, program name, or folder
name.
1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in
the same block.
1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the
same block.
1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.
1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in
the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom
macros.
1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified.
1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro
interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.
1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
left side of an expression.
1120 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT FORMAT The specified argument in the argument function (ATAN,
POW) is in error.
1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1
to 99999999).
1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets (]) in a custom macro statement.
1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([) in a custom macro statement.
1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement.
1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro
ERROR is in error.
1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a
NAME character that cannot be used in a variable name.
- 812 -

1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters.
1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT
FORMAT ERROR statement is in error.
1144 G10 FORMAT ERROR The G10 L No. contains no relevant data input or
corresponding option.
Data setting address P or R is not specified.
An address not relating to the data setting is specified. Which
address to specify varies according to the L No.
The sign, decimal point or range of the specified address are
in error.
1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
1300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS The axis No. address was specified even though the
parameter is not an axis–type while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the
G10 parameter.
Axis No. cannot be specified in pitch error compensation data.
1301 MISSING ADDRESS The axis No. was not specified even though the parameter is
an axis–type while loading parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape or by entry of the G10
parameter.
Or, data No. address N, or setting data address P or R are not
specified.
1302 ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER A non–existent data No. was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape or by entry of the
G10 parameter.
This alarm is also generated when illegal word values are
found.
1303 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER An axis No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled axes was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1304 TOO MANY DIGIT Data with too many digits was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape.
1305 DATA OUT OF RANGE Out–of–range data was found while loading parameters or
pitch error compensation data from a tape.
The values of the data setting addresses corresponding to L
Nos. during data input by G10 was out of range.
This alarm is also generated when NC programming words
contain out–of–range values.
1306 MISSING AXIS NUMBER A parameter which requires an axis to be specified was found
without an axis No. (address A) while loading parameters from
a tape.
1307 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN Data with an illegal sign was found while loading parameters
or pitch error compensation data from a tape, or by entry of
the G10 parameter. A sign was specified to an address that
does not support the use of signs.
1308 MISSING DATA An address not followed by a numeric value was found while
loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a
tape.
1329 ILLEGAL MACHINE GROUP An machine group No. address exceeding the maximum
NUMBER number of controlled machine groups was found while loading
parameters from a tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
1331 ILLEGAL PATH NUMBER An path No. address exceeding the maximum number of
controlled path was found while loading parameters from a
tape or by entry of the G10 parameter.
- 813 -

1332 DATA WRITE LOCK ERROR Could not load data while loading parameters, pitch error
compensation data and work coordinate data from tape.
1333 DATA WRITE ERROR Could not write data while loading data from tape.
1470 G40.1 –G42.1 PARAMETER MISS A parameter setting related to normal direction control is
illegal.
The axis number of a normal direction controlled axis is set in
parameter No. 5480, but that axis number is in the range of
the number of controlled axes.
The axis set as a normal direction controlled axis is not set as
a rotation axis (bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006) = 1 and
No.1022=0).
1471 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G40.1 An invalid G code was specified in the normal direction control
–G42.1 mode.
1590 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
1591 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting bit 0 (TVC) of
parameter No. 0000 to “0”.
1592 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block.
This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the end
of the NC program is read.
1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND [I/O Device]
An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during
I/O processing on an I/O device.
1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed
even though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An illegal I/O interface is specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being
accessed.
1820 ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE 1. An each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was turned “1” in the state in which all axes were not
stopped or in which a command was in execution.
2. When an M code for performing preset with an each axis
workpiece coordinate system preset signal was specified,
the each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signal
was not turned “1”.
3. The auxiliary function lock is enabled.
1823 FRAMING ERROR(1) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to Reader/Puncher interface 1 was not detected.
1830 DR OFF(2) The data set ready input signal DR of the I/O device
connected to Reader/Puncher interface 2 turned OFF.
1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to Reader/Puncher interface 2 before it could read
a previously received character.
1833 FRAMING ERROR(2) The stop bit of the character received from the I/O device
connected to Reader/Puncher interface 2 was not detected.
1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data from the I/O
device connected to Reader/Puncher interface 2 even though
the NC sent a stop code (DC3) during data reception.
- 814 -

1912 V-DEVICE DRIVER ERROR (OPEN) An error occurred during device driver control.
1960 ACCESS ERROR (MEMORY CARD) Illegal memory card accessing
This alarm is also generated during reading when reading is
executed up to the end of the file without detection of the EOR
code.
1961 NOT READY (MEMORY CARD) The memory card is not ready.
1962 CARD FULL (MEMORY CARD) The memory card has run out of space.
1963 CARD PROTECTED (MEMORY The memory card is write–protected.
CARD)
1964 NOT MOUNTED (MEMORY CARD) The memory card could not be mounted.
1965 DIRECTORY FULL (MEMORY The file could not be generated in the root directory for the
CARD) memory card.
1966 FILE NOT FOUND (MEMORY The specified file could not be found on the memory card.
CARD)
1967 FILE PROTECTED (MEMORY The memory card is write–protected.
CARD)
1968 ILLEGAL FILE NAME (MEMORY Illegal memory card file name
CARD)
1969 ILLEGAL FORMAT (MEMORY Check the file name.
CARD)
1970 ILLEGAL CARD (MEMORY CARD) This memory card cannot be handled.
1971 ERASE ERROR (MEMORY CARD) An error occurred during memory card erase.
1972 BATTERY LOW (MEMORY CARD) The memory card battery is low.
1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory
card.
2032 EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA An error was returned in the built-in Ethernet/data server
SERVER ERROR function.
For details, see the error message screen of the built-in
Ethernet or data server.
2051 #200-#499ILLEGAL P-CODE An attempt was made to enter a custom macro common
MACRO COMMON INPUT(NO variable not existing in the system.
OPTION)
2052 #500-#549P-CODE MACRO The variable name cannot be entered.
COMMON SELECT(CANNOT USE The SETVN command cannot be used with the P-CODE
SETVN) macro common variables #500 to #549.
2053 P-CODE VARIABLE NUMBER IS An attempt was made to enter a P-CODE-only variable not
OUTSIDE OF RANGE existing in the system.
2054 EXTENDED P-CODE VARIABLE An attempt was made to enter an extended P-CODE-only
NUMBER IS OUTSIDE OF RANGE variable not existing in the system.
4500 REPOSITIONING COMMAND (1) M code for clamping a workpiece or M code for releasing
ERROR the workpiece is not set.
(2) A repositioning command(G75) and M/T code is
commanded in the same block.
(3) A repositioning command(direct command of M code for
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the circular
interpolation(G02, G03) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the coordinate
system rotation(G84) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the offset(G41,
G42) mode.
4502 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN BOLT HOLE The bolt hole circle (G26) was executed in the following state,
・I, J or K was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・K = 0
- 815 -

4503 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE AT The line at angle (G76) was executed in the following state,
ANGLE ・I, J or K was not specified.
・K ≦ 0
4504 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN ARC The arc (G77) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or K was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・K ≦ 0
4505 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRID The grid (G78, G79) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or K was not specified.
・P ≦ 0
・K ≦ 0
4506 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SHARE The shear proof (G86) was executed in the following state,
PROOFS ・I, J or P was not specified.
・In case of parameter AIP (No.16202#0) = 0
| I |＜ 1.5×| P |
・In case of parameter AIP (No.16202#0) = 1
| I |＜ | P |
・P = 0
4507 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SQUARE The square (G87) was executed in the following state,
・I, J or P was not specified.
・P ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
・| I | ＜ 3×| P |
・| J | ＜ 3×| Q |
4508 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN RADIUS The radius (G88) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, K, P or Q was not specified.
・I ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
・In case of specifying negative value for P
| P | ＞ 2.0 × I
・Commanded arc length ＜ Q
4509 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN CUT AT The cut at angle (G89) was executed in the following state,
ANGLE ・I, J, P or Q was not specified.
・Q ≦ 0
・I ＜ Q
4510 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The linear punching (G45) was executed in the following state,
LINE-PUNCH ・X, Y or P was not specified.
・Line length ＜ 1.5 × P
・P ≦ 0
・Q ≦ 0
4511 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The circular punching (G46,G47) was executed in the
CIRCLE-PUNCH following state,
・R or Q was not specified.
・R = 0
・Q ≦ 0
・Start point = End point
・Arc length ＜ Q
4520 INHIBITED IN NIBBLING-MODE T code, M code, G04, G05.1, G28, G70 or G75 was specified
in the nibbling mode.
4521 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the nibbling mode, the X-axis or Y-axis traveling distance
(X,Y) was larger than or equal to the limit ( No.16188 to 16192 )
4522 EXCESS NIBBLING MOVEMENT In the nibbling mode, the C-axis traveling distance was larger
(C) than or equal to the limit (No.16194)
- 816 -

4523 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN The circular nibbling (G68) was executed in the following
CIRCLE-NIBBL state,
・I, J, K, P or Q was not specified.
・I, J, K, P or Q was out of range.
・In case of specifying negative value for P
|P| ≧ 2I
・Q ＞ Maximum pitch (parameter No.16186)
4524 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LINE-NIBBL The linear nibbling (G69) was executed in the following state,
・I, J, P or Q was not specified.
・I, J, P or Q was out of range.
・Q ＞ Maximum pitch (parameter No.16186)
4530 A/B MACRO COMMAND ERROR (1) M code for clamping a workpiece or M code for releasing
the workpiece is not set.
(2) A repositioning command(G75) and M/T code is
commanded in the same block.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the circular
interpolation(G02, G03) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the coordinate
system rotation(G68) mode.
clamping a workpiece) was specified in the offset(G41,
G42) mode.
4531 U/V MACRO FORMAT ERROR An attempt was made to store a macro while storing another
macro using a U or V macro.
A V macro was specified although the processing to store a
macro was not in progress.
A U macro number and V macro number do not correspond
with each other.
4532 IMPROPER U/V MACRO NUMBER The number of an inhibited macro was specified in a U or V
macro command.
4533 U/V MACRO MEMORY OVERFLOW An attempt was made to store too many macros with a U or V
macro command.
4534 W MACRO NUMBER NOT FOUND Macro number W specified in a U or V macro command is not
stored.
4536 NO W,Q COMMAND IN W or Q was not specified in the command for taking multiple
MULTI-PIECE workpieces.
4537 ILLEGAL Q VALUE IN MULTI-PIECE In the command for taking multiple workpieces, Q is set to a
value beyond the range from 1 to 4.
4538 W NO. NOT FOUND IN Macro number W specified in the command for taking multiple
MULTI-PIECE workpieces is not stored.
4539 MULTI-PIECE SETTING IS ZERO The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
although zero is specified for the function to take multiple
workpieces (No. 15649 or signals MLP1 and MLP2 (PMC
address G231, #0 and #1)).
4540 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND WITHIN The command for taking multiple workpieces was specified
MACRO when a U or V macro was being stored.
4542 MULTI-PIECE COMMAND ERROR Although G98 P0 was specified, the G73 command was
issued.
Although G98 K0 was specified, the G74 command was
issued.
4543 MULTI-PIECE Q COMMAND Although G98 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G74
ERROR command was not 1 or 3.
Although G98 P0 was specified, the Q value for the G73
command was not 1 or 2.
- 817 -

4544 MULTI-PIECE P/R COMMAND (1) In the command for resuming taking multiple workpieces,
ERROR the resume position (P) is set to a value beyond the range
from 1 to total number of workpieces to be machined.
(2) In the command for end position of taking multiple
workpieces, the end position (R) is set to a value beyond
the range from 1 to total number of workpieces to be
machined.
(3) In the command for end position of taking multiple
workpieces, the end position (R) is set to a smaller value
than the resume position (P).
4600 T,C COMMAND IN INTERPOLATION In the linear interpolation(G01) mode or circular interpolation
(G02,G03) mode, a T command or C-axis command was
specified.
4601 INHIBITED T,M COMMAND In the block of G10, G22, G23, G52, G53, G72, G73, G74,
G75, G92, G98 a T or M command was specified.
4602 ILLEGAL T-CODE The specified T command in not cataloged on the tool register
screen.
4604 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION A C-axis command was specified in the block containing a T
command for multiple tools.
4606 INHIBITED T COMMAND A T command was specified during normal line control.
4610 RAM AXIS POSITION IS WRONG Ram-axis is not located on the press start position.
4630 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN LASER In the laser mode, a nibbling command or pattern command
MODE was specified.
In gap control mode, an attempt was made to make a switch
to the punch mode.
4650 IMPROPER G-CODE IN OFFSET In the cutter compensation mode, an inhibited G code was
MODE specified.
4751 CAN NOT COMMAND C AXIS The C axis was commanded at the C axis command invalid
block.
4872 AUTO SETTING COMMAND M code, S code, T code is specified with safety zone auto
ERROR setting command(G32).
G32 is specified in the nibbling mode, in the cutter
compensation, in the rotation mode or the scaling mode.
5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words in a block exceeds the maximum. The
maximum is 26 words. However, this figure varies according
to NC system. Divide the instruction word into two blocks.
5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that
exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation
amounts.
5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The dry run feedrate parameter No. 1410 or maximum cutting
feedrate parameter No. 1422 for each axis has been set to 0.
The parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
is No. 1432 if acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
enabled and No. 1430 otherwise.
5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at
the end of the NC program is read.
5011 PARAMETER ZERO (CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate parameter No. 1430 has been
set to 0.
The parameter is No. 1432 if acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is enabled and No. 1430 otherwise.
5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting
of axes having different increment systems.
- 818 -

5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC Axes having different increment systems have been specified
AXIS) in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the
setting of parameter No. 8010.
5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring
a decimal point.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a
single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same
group have been specified in a single block.
5110 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code was specified in the AI advanced preview
control mode.
5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the reference point
MODE auto setting bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 is set to "1". Move the
machine to reference position by manual operation and
execute manual reference return.
5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI Tool radius compensation was specified in MDI mode.
MODE (Depending on the setting of the bit 4 (MCR) of parameter No.
5008)
5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch panel
cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. Correct the
cause then turn on the power again.
5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other
than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric conversion
after returning to the reference position.
5379 WRITE PROTECTED TO SLAVE A parameter cannot be set directly for a slave axis of axis
AXIS synchronous control.
5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference avoidance vector, the
interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool nose
radius compensation does not work.
5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation operation will lead to danger.
5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check avoidance function of tool radius/tool
G41/G42 nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an
already created interference avoidance vector.
(4) Parameter writing alarm (SW alarm)

SW0100 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON The parameter setting is enabled (bit (PWE) of parameter No.
8000 is set to “1”).
To set the parameter, turn this parameter ON. Otherwise, set
to OFF.
(5) Servo alarms (SV alarm)

SV0001 SYNC ALIGNMENT ERROR In feed axis synchronization control, the amount of
compensation for synchronization exceeded the parameter
No. 8325 setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip
(G33P98, G33P99) command operation exceeded the limit
value of the parameter No.6287.
SV0005 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN) In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of the machine coordinate between a master
and slave axes exceeded the parameter No. 8314 setting
value.
This alarm occurs for a master or slave axis.
- 819 -

SV0006 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS For the slave axis under tandem control, absolute position
detection is set (parameter bit 5 (APC) of parameter No. 1815
= 1).
SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION Since the absolute-position detector caused a communication
ERROR error, the correct machine position could not be obtained.
(data transfer error)
The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo interface
module is thought to be defective.
SV0302 APC ALARM: OVER TIME ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused an overtime error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0303 APC ALARM: FRAMING ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a framing error,
the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data
transfer error)
SV0304 APC ALARM: PARITY ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a parity error, the
correct machine position could not be obtained. (data transfer
error)
SV0305 APC ALARM: PULSE ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a pulse error, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
The absolute-position detector, or cable is thought to be
defective.
SV0306 APC ALARM: OVER FLOW ERROR Since the amount of positional deviation overflowed, the
correct machine position could not be obtained.
Check to see the parameter No. 2084 or No. 2085.
SV0307 APC ALARM: MOVEMENT EXCESS Since the machine moved excessively, the correct machine
ERROR position could not be obtained.
SV0360 ABNORMAL CHECKSUM(INT) The checksum alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0361 ABNORMAL PHASE DATA(INT) The phase data abnormal alarm occurred on the built–in
Pulsecoder.
SV0362 ABNORMAL REV. DATA(INT) The speed count abnormal alarm occurred on the built-in
Pulsecoder.
SV0363 ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT) The clock alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT) A digital servo soft detected an abnormality on the built in
Pulsecoder.
SV0365 BROKEN LED(INT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0366 PULSE MISS(INT) A pulse error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0367 COUNT MISS(INT) A count error occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0368 SERIAL DATA ERROR(INT) The communications data could not be received from the
built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0369 DATA TRANS. ERROR(INT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0380 BROKEN LED(EXT) Separate detector error
SV0381 ABNORMAL PHASE (EXT) An abnormal alarm in the position data occurred on the
separate detector.
SV0382 COUNT MISS(EXT) A count error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0383 PULSE MISS(EXT) A pulse error occurred on the separate detector.
SV0384 SOFT PHASE ALARM(EXT) The digital servo software detected abnormal data on the
separate detector.
- 820 -

SV0385 SERIAL DATA ERROR(EXT) The communications data could not be received from the
separate detector.
SV0386 DATA TRANS. ERROR(EXT) A CRC error or stop bit error occurred in the communications
data from the standalone detector.
SV0387 ABNORMAL ENCODER(EXT) An abnormality occurred on a separate detector. For more
information, contact the scale manufacturer.
SV0401 IMPROPER V_READY OFF Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
ON, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was OFF.
SV0403 CARD/SOFT MISMATCH The combination of the axis control card and the servo
software is incorrect.
Probable causes are given below.
- The correct axis control card is not attached.
- The correct servo software is not installed in flash
memory.
SV0404 IMPROPER V_READY ON Although the ready signal (PRDY) of the position control was
OFF, the ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control was ON.
SV0409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE An abnormal load was detected on the servo motor, or during
Cs axis or spindle positioning.
The alarm can be canceled by RESET.
SV0410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) The amount of positional deviation during stopping exceeded
the parameter No. 1829 setting value.
SV0411 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) The amount of positional deviation during traveling became
excessive than the parameter No. 1828 setting value.
SV0413 LSI OVERFLOW The counter for the amount of positional deviation overflowed
SV0415 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW The velocity exceeding the travel velocity limit was
commanded.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
When bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 is 1, an illegal parameter

was detected by the servo software. Identify the cause with
reference to diagnosis data No. 352.
When bit 4 of diagnosis data No. 203 is 0, the CNC software

detected an illegal parameter. Probable causes are given
below (see diagnosis data No. 280).
1) The value specified in parameter No. 2020 as the motor
model falls outside the specified range.
2) The motor rotation direction in parameter No. 2022 is not
set to a correct value (111 or -111).
3) The speed feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
parameter No. 2023 is set to a negative or other incorrect
value.
4) The position feedback pulse count per motor rotation in
parameter No. 2024 is set to a negative or other incorrect
value.
SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the
difference value of torque between a master and slave axes
exceeded the parameter No. 2031 setting value.
This alarm occurs for a master axis.
SV0421 EXCESS ERROR(SEMI-FULL) The difference between the feedback from the semi and full
sides exceeded the setting of parameter No. 2118.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified
as a parameter was exceeded.
SV0430 SV MOTOR OVERHEAT The servo motor has overheated.
- 821 -

SV0431 CNV. OVERLOAD Power Supply (PS) : Overheat
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Overheat
SV0432 CNV. LOW VOLT. CONTROL Power Supply (PS) : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
Servo Amplifier (SV) : The control power supply voltage has
dropped.
SV0433 CNV. LOW VOLT. DC LINK Power Supply (PS) : Low DC link voltage
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Low DC link voltage
SV0434 INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL Servo Amplifier (SV) : Low control power voltage
SV0435 INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK Servo Amplifier (SV) : Low DC link voltage
SV0436 SOFTTHERMAL(OVC) The digital servo software detected a software thermal (OVC).
SV0437 CNV. OVERCURRENT Power Supply (PS) : Overcurrent on input circuit section.
SV0438 INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT Servo Amplifier (SV) : Motor overcurrent
SV0439 CNV. OVER VOLT. DC LINK Power Supply (PS) : The DC link voltage is too high.
Servo Amplifier (SV) : The DC link voltage is too high.
SV0440 CNV. EXCESS-REGENERATION2 Power Supply (PS) : Excessive generative discharge
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Excessive generative discharge, or
abnormal error in generative power
circuit
SV0441 ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the
motor current detection circuit.
SV0442 CNV. PRE-CHARGE FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : The spare charge circuit for the DC link
is abnormal.
SV0443 CNV. INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : Internal cooling fan failure.
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0444 INV. INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Servo Amplifier (SV) : Internal cooling fan failure.
SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected
Pulsecoder.
SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a disconnected built–in Pulsecoder.
SV0447 HARD DISCONNECT(EXT) The hardware detected a disconnected separate detector.
SV0448 UNMATCHED FEEDBACK ALARM The sign of the feedback signal from the standalone detector
is opposite to that from the feedback signal from the built–on
Pulsecoder.
SV0449 INV. IPM ALARM Servo Amplifier (SV) : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module)
detected an alarm.
SV0453 SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM Software disconnection alarm of the built-in Pulsecoder.
Turn off the power to the CNC, then remove and insert the
Pulsecoder cable. If this alarm is issued again, replace the
Pulsecoder.
SV0454 ILLEGAL ROTOR POS DETECT The magnetic pole detection function terminated abnormally.
The magnetic pole could not be detected because the motor
did not run.
SV0456 ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP An attempt was made to set the current loop that could not be
set.
The amplifier pulse module in use does not comply with HIGH
SPEED HRV. Or, requirements to control are not satisfied in
the system.
SV0458 CURRENT LOOP ERROR The specified current loop differs from the actual current loop.
SV0459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR For two axes whose servo axis numbers (parameter No.
1023) are consecutively even and odd numbers, HIGH
SPEED HRV control is possible for one axis and impossible
for the other.
- 822 -

SV0460 FSSB DISCONNECT The FSSB connection was discontinued.
Probable causes are:
1. The FSSB connection cable was disconnected or broken.
2. The amplifier was turned off .
3. In the amplifier, the low-voltage alarm occurred.
SV0462 SEND CNC DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received on a slave side
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0463 SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED The correct data could not be received in the servo software
because of the FSSB communication error.
SV0465 READ ID DATA FAILED A read of the ID information for the amplifier has failed at
power-on.
SV0466 MOTOR/AMP. COMBINATION The maximum current of an amplifier is different to that of a
motor.
Probable causes are:
1. The connection command for an amplifier is incorrect.
2. The parameter No.2165 setting is incorrect
SV0468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) An attempt was made to set up HIGH SPEED HRV control for
use when the controlled axis of an amplifier for which HIGH
SPEED HRV control could not be used.
SV0600 INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT Servo Amplifier (SV) : DC link overcurrent.
SV0601 INV. EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE Servo Amplifier (SV) : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0602 INV. OVERHEAT Servo Amplifier (SV) : The servo motor has overheated.
SV0603 INV. IPM ALARM(OH) Servo Amplifier (SV) : The IPM (Intelligent Power Module)
detected an overheat alarm.
SV0604 AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR Servo Amplifier (SV) : The communication between Servo
amplifier (SV) and Power Supply (PS)
is in error.
SV0605 CNV. EXCESS-REGENERATION1 Power Supply (PS) : The motor regenerative power is too
much.
SV0606 CNV. EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : External radiator cooling fan failure.
SV0607 CNV. IMPROPER INPUT POWER Power Supply (PS) : The input power supply has a missing
phase.
SV0646 ABNORMAL ANALOG SIGNAL(EXT) An error occurred in the analog 1Vp-p output of the separate
detector. The separate detector, cable, or separate detector
interface unit may be failed.
SV1025 V_READY ON (INITIALIZING ) The ready signal (VRDY) of the velocity control which should
be OFF is ON while the servo control is ON.
SV1026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE The parameter for servo axis arrange is not set correctly.
- Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number of each axis) is
set to a negative value or a duplicate value.
- The settings for parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number
of each axis) were made with a certain setting skipped
among 1 to 6, 9 to 14, or 17 to 22.
- A setting of a multiple of 8 or a multiple of 8 minus 1 was
made.
SV1055 ILLEGAL TANDEM AXIS In tandem control, the setting of the parameter No. 1023 is
incorrect.
SV1067 FSSB:CONFIGURATION An FSSB configuration error occurred (detected by software).
ERROR(SOFT) The connected amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV5134 FSSB:OPEN READY TIME OUT In the initialization, the FSSB could not be in an open ready
sate. The axis card is thought to be defective.
SV5136 FSSB:NUMBER OF AMP. IS The number of amplifier identified by the FSSB is insufficient
INSUFFICIENT than the number of control axes. Or, the setting of the number
of axes or the amplifier connection is in error.
- 823 -

SV5137 FSSB:CONFIGURATION ERROR An FSSB configuration error occurred.
The connecting amplifier type is incompatible with the FSSB
setting value.
SV5139 FSSB:ERROR Servo initialization has not completed successfully. It is
probable that an optical cable failed or a connection between
the amplifier and another module failed.
SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT The FSSB could not be opened although the CNC permitted
the opening of the FSSB.
Check the connection between the CNC and the amplifier.
(6) Overtravel alarms (OT alarm)

OT0500 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the positive side stored stroke check 1.
OT0501 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) Exceeded the negative side stored stroke check 1.
OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke
end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0507 - OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the negative direction was triggered.
This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke
end.
When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped
During manual operation, only the feed of the axis on which
the alarm occurred is stopped.
OT0510 + OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the negative direction during the
stroke check before movement.
OT0511 - OVERTRAVEL ( PRE-CHECK ) The tool exceeded the limit in the positive direction during the
stroke check before movement.
(7) Memory file alarms (IO alarm)

IO1001 FILE ACCESS ERROR The resident–type file system could not be accessed as an
error occurred in the resident–type file system.
IO1002 FILE SYSTEM ERROR The file could not be accessed as an error occurred in the
CNC file system.
IO1030 CHECK SUM ERROR The checksum of the CNC part program storage memory is
incorrect.
IO1032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE Accessing of data occurred outside the CNC part program
storage memory range.
(8) Alarms requiring power to be turned off (PW alarm)

PW0000 POWER MUST BE OFF A parameter was set for which the power must be turned OFF
then ON again.
- 824 -

PW0001 X-ADDRESS(*DEC) IS NOT The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly.
ASSIGNED. This alarm may occur in the following case:
- During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address
could not be assigned correctly for the deceleration dog
(*DEC) for a return to the reference position.
PW0002 PMC address is not correct(AXIS). The address to assign the axis signal is incorrect.
This alarm may occur in the following case:
- The parameter No.3021 setting is incorrect.
PW0006 POWER MUST BE OFF The malfunction prevention function detected an alarm to
(ILL-EXEC-CHK) require the power off.
PW0007 X-ADDRESS(SKIP) IS NOT The X address of PMC could not be assigned correctly.
ASSIGNED Possible causes are:
- During the set of parameter No. 3012, the skip signal of
the X address was not assigned correctly.
- During the set of parameter No. 3019, the address other
than the skip signal of the X address was not assigned
correctly.
PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect.
This alarm occurs in the following cases:
- When the number of pitch error compensation points on
the axis on which slope compensation is executed
exceeds 128 between the most negative side and most
positive side
- When the size relationship between the slope
compensation point Nos. is incorrect
- When the slope compensation point is not located
between the most negative side and most positive side of
pitch error compensation
- When the compensation per compensation point is too
small or too great.
PW4549 ILLEGAL TOOL DATA FORMAT The size of the registered tool data patterns has exceeded the
upper limit of 32KB.
(9) Overheat alarms (OH alarm)

OH0700 LOCKER OVERHEAT CNC cabinet overheat
OH0701 FAN MOTOR STOP PCB cooling fan motor abnormality
(10) Other alarms (DS alarm)

DS0001 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (POS DEV) In feed axis synchronization control, the difference in the
amount of positional deviation between the master and slave
axes exceeded the parameter No. 8323 setting value.
This alarm occurs for the master or slave axis.
DS0003 SYNCHRONIZE ADJUST MODE The system is in the synchronize adjust mode.
DS0004 EXCESS MAXIMUM FEEDRATE The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
which a value exceeding the maximum speed was specified.
DS0005 EXCESS MAXIMUM The malfunction prevention function detected the command in
ACCELERATION which a value exceeding the maximum acceleration was
specified.
DS0006 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal
execution sequence.
execution sequence.
- 825 -

execution sequence.
execution sequence.
DS0010 ILLEGAL REFERENCE AREA The malfunction prevention function detected an invalid
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
reference area.
DS0016 SERIAL DCL:FOLLOW-UP ERROR (1) The settings of parameters Nos.1883 and 1884 fall
outside the range.
(2) The current position at establishment of the origin
subtracted by the distance between the reference
positions (detection unit) exceeded ±2147483647.
Change the current position or reference position to
prevent this situation.
DS0017 SERIAL DCL:REF-POS ESTABLISH The travel amount at the FL speed at establishment of the
ERR origin exceeded the setting of parameter No. 14010.
DS0018 SERIAL DCL:MISMATCH(SSYNC Of the master and slave axes for feed axis synchronous
CTRL) control, one axis is a linear scale with the origin and the other
is not a linear scale with the origin. In such a configuration, the
feed axis synchronous control selection signal
(SYNC<Gn138> or SYNCJ <Gn140>) needs to be set to 0 to
establish the origin.
DS0023 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP The setting of the inclination compensation parameter is
VAL) incorrect.
The compensation per compensation point is too large or too
small.
DS0027 MISMATCH OF SYNCHRONOUS Master/slave axes of axis synchronous control, one of them is
AXIS(D.C.S) the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks, and the
other of them is not the linear scale with distance-coded
reference marks.
Please establish reference position with the input signal
SYNCn<G138>, SYNCJn<G140> or parameter setting to 0.
DS0050 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS AXES A movement was performed along more axes than can be
controlled by simultaneous axis control.
Check whether a command in the program is specified for
more axes than can be controlled by simultaneous axis
control.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND [External data I/O]
The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No.
search could not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset
(tool data), but either no tool numbers have been input
since power ON or there is no data for the entered tool
No.
[External workpiece No. search]
The program corresponding to the specified workpiece
No. could not be found.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator
message or external alarm message, but five or more displays
were required simultaneously.
- 826 -

DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND An attempt to cancel an external operator message or
external alarm message failed because the specified message
number was not found.
DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS0300 APC ALARM: NEED REF RETURN A setting to zero position for the absolute position detector
(association with reference position and the counter value of
the absolute position detector) is required. Perform the return
to the reference position.
This alarm may occur with other alarms simultaneously.
In this case, other alarms must be handled first.
DS0306 APC ALARM: BATTERY VOLTAGE 0 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which data can no longer be held. Or, the
power was supplied to the Pulsecoder for the first time.
The battery or cable is thought to be defective. Replace the
battery with the machine turned on.
DS0307 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 1 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector has
dropped to a level at which a replacement is required.
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0308 APC ALARM: BATTERY LOW 2 The battery voltage of the absolute position detector dropped
to a level at which a replacement was required in the past.
(including during power off)
Replace the battery with the machine turned on.
DS0309 APC ALARM: REF RETURN An attempt was made to set the zero point for the absolute
IMPOSSIBLE position detector by MDI operation when it was impossible to
set the zero point.
Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, and set the zero
position of the absolute position detector after turning the
CNC and servo amplifier off and then on again.
DS0405 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON REF The axis specified in automatic zero return was not at the
correct zero point when positioning was completed.
Perform zero return from a point whose distance from the zero
return start position to the zero point is 2 or more revolutions
of the motor.
Other probable causes are:
- The positional deviation after triggering the deceleration
dog is less than 128.
- Insufficient voltage or malfunctioning Pulsecoder.
DS0608 INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE Servo Amplifier (SV) : Internal agitating fan failure.
DS0609 INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE Servo Amplifier (SV) : Radiator cooling fan failure.
DS0610 CNV. INTERNAL FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : Internal agitating fan failure.
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Internal agitating fan failure.
DS0611 CNV. EXTERNAL FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : External radiator cooling fan failure.
DS0612 CNV. OVERLOAD Power Supply (PS) : Overheat
Servo Amplifier (SV) : Overheat
DS0613 CNV. IMPROPER INPUT POWER Power Supply (PS) : Input power supply fault
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (HIGH) The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (high
bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS (LOW) The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O
interface address signal are set to an undefined address (low
bits).
DS1124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR An output request was issued
during external data output, or an output request was issued
for an address that has no output data.
- 827 -

DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0
to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a
ACCEPTED sequence No. search as the system is not in the memory
mode or the reset state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a
tool No. during loading by the G10 code.
DS1150 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter malfunction
DS1184 PARAMETER ERROR IN TORQUE An invalid parameter was set for torque control.
The torque constant parameter is set to “0”.
DS1448 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (D.C.S.) The setting value of parameter for reference marks is satisfied
the following any conditions.
- The absolute-position detection function is enabled.
- Either parameter 1821 (mark-1 interval) or parameter
1882 (mark-2 interval) is set to 0.
- Parameters 1821 and 1882 have identical settings.
- The difference between the settings made for parameters
1821 and 1882 is greater than or equal to twice either
setting.
- The setting value of parameters 1883 and 1884 are over
the valid data range.
DS1449 REFERENCE MARK ARE In case of distance coded linear scale I/F, the actual interval
DIFFERENT FROM PARAMETER of reference marks is different from parameters Nos.1821 and
1882 setting value.
DS1450 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1st reference position return (CDxX7 to CDxX0: 17h (Hex))
was specified when the manual reference position return was
not executed with the reference position return function
enabled (bit 0 (ZRN) of parameter No. 1005 set to “0”).
DS1451 IMPROPER PMC AXIS COMMAND The PMC axes cannot be controlled in this state.
DS4603 C AXIS SYNCHRONOUS ERROR The difference between the position deviation value of C1
axis and C2 axis exceeds the parameter value (No. 16364,
16365) with the C axis synchronous control function.
DS4605 NEED C AXIS REFERENCE The C axis synchronization is not done normally.
RETURN
DS4750 TOOL OFFSET CANNOT BE The state of mirror image is different between the time when
EXECUTED look-ahead of a block for tool offset was performed and the
time when execution of the block was started, so tool offset
cannot be executed.
DS4752 C AXIS OFFSET CANNOT BE The state of mirror image is different between the time when
EXECUTED look-ahead of a block for C axis offset was performed and the
time when execution of the block was started, so C axis offset
cannot be executed.
DS4800 ZONE : PUNCHING INHIBITED 1 When a safety zone check was executed, a punch command
was specified in area 1 where punching is inhibited.
DS4810 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the positive X direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
- 828 -

DS4811 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -X When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the negative X direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
DS4830 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 +Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the positive Y direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
DS4831 ZONE : ENTERING INHIBITED 1 -Y When a safety zone check was executed, the machine moving
in the negative Y direction entered area 1 into which entry is
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
inhibited.
DS4870 AUTO SETTING FEED ERROR The feed rate of safety zone auto setting is other than the
parameter value (No. 16538, No. 16539).
DS4871 AUTO SETTING PIECES ERROR In safety zone auto setting, the safety zone pieces are not
correct. Or the position detector has gone wrong, please tell
your machine tool builder.
DS5340 PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR Since a parameter was changed, the parameter checksum did
not match the reference checksum.
Set the original value to the parameter or set the reference
checksum again.
- 829 -
(11) Malfunction prevention function alarms (IE alarm)

IE0001 + OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored
stroke check 1 on the positive side was exceeded.
IE0002 - OVERTRAVEL ( SOFT 1 ) The malfunction prevention function detected that stored
stroke check 1 on the negative side was exceeded.
IE0008 ILLEGAL ACC/DEC The malfunction prevention function detected the
acceleration/deceleration error.
- 830 -
I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING
I PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM

OPERATION/EDITING
Appendix I, "PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING", consists of the
following sections:
I.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING .....................................831

I.2 NAMING RULES.............................................................................................................................840
I.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE .........................................................................841
I.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE.....................................................................................................843
I.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM

OPERATION/EDITING
Overview
By using this PC tool, you can make the memory card program file ("FANUCPRG.BIN") which is
needed for the function "Memory Card Program Operation/Editing".
The maximum size of the memory card program file is 2048 Mbytes (2 Gbytes). The "Memory Card
Program Operation/Editing" function needs the memory card which has the memory card program file on
the FAT formatted memory card.
This PC tool can be operated on a PC in the marketplace and with following OS :
• Windows(R)NT4.0 Workstation (SP5 or later)
• Windows(R)2000 Professional (SP4 or later)
• Windows(R)XP Professional (SP2 or later)
• Windows(R)Vista Ultimate
And acceptable specification is as followings :
• Memory : 32Mbytes or more
• Hard disk : 10Mbytes or more free space and additional space for the memory card program file
I.1.1 Usage Notes

Before using this PC tool, please make sure there is no [temp] folder on the same place of this PC tool.
[temp] folder is created and used by this PC tool as work folder.
If [temp] folder is created, please do not access this folder.
[temp] folder and the files located in this folder will be deleted by this PC tool.
I.1.2 List of Functions of PC Tool

• Browsing the folders of the memory card program file
• Adding a program file
Drag a program file from the Explorer or any other similar tool to this PC tool.
(This operation is referred to below as "drag-in".)
• Saving, in text format for the Windows file system, a program file in the memory card program file
Drag a program file from this PC tool to the Explorer or any other similar tool.
(This operation is referred to below as "drag-out".)
• Renaming a program in the memory card program file
• Deleting a program in the memory card program file
• Creating a new folder into the memory card program file
• Renaming a folder in the memory card program file
- 831 -
I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD
PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
• Deleting a folder in the memory card program file

• Display of free space on the memory card program file
• Sorting list view of the memory card program file
I.1.3 Explanation of Operations

- Outline of screen
<1>
<3>
<2>
<4>
<5>
<1> Menu bar : The menu of this PC tool is displayed.

<2> Tree view : Browsing the folders of the memory card program file.
<3> Column : Attributes of each file or folder in the memory card program file.
<4> List view : Contents of selected folder are displayed.
<5> Status bar : Used and Unused space in the memory card program file are displayed.
- Initial Option dialogue window
When this PC tool starts up, the Option dialogue window is displayed. Please select "Open an existing
file" or "Create a new file".
- 832 -
• When "Open an existing file" is selected

After OK button pushed, "Open" dialogue window is displayed.
Please select the existing memory card program file.
• When "Create a new file" is selected

After OK button pushed, "Save As" dialogue window is displayed.
Please create a new memory card program file on the selected folder.
When the new the memory card program file is created, the following items need to be selected:
• Folder/Program Numbers
• Program Size
"Folder/Program Numbers" can be selected among 63 / 500 / 1000. The default value is 63.
To create the file for the Series 0i-PD, select 63.
"Program Size" can be selected among 2Mbyte, 4Mbyte, 8Mbyte, and Customize. The default value is
2Mbyte.
NOTE
1 When "Customize" size is selected, it is available to cover the range from
2Mbyte to 2048Mbyte.
2 Though the maximum size is 2048Mbyte, a slight loss exists by system use.
3 The number of "Folders" in the status bar includes number of program file and
folder.
- 833 -
During creating of the memory card program file, the progress bar is being displayed. The progress bar is
also displayed during drag-in or drag-out.
If you push [Cancel] button, the execution is stopped.
- Menu
File menu
[New]
Create a new memory card program file.
[Open...]
Open the existing memory card program file.
[Exit]
Terminate this PC tool.
Edit menu
[New Folder]
Create new folder. It is available during Tree view selected.
Up to seven hierarchical levels starting from the user root folder (/USER) are permitted.
/USER/PATH1/Aaa/Bbb/Ccc/Ddd/O123
1 2 3 4 5 6 7(not folder)
[Delete]
Delete program files or folders.
If you delete a folder, all folders and program files in the folder will be deleted.
- 834 -
[Rename]
Rename a folder or file.
NOTE
For naming folder and program file, characters which can be used are limited.
See "NAMING RULES" below.
Option menu
[Hide Confirm Message]

When the following operations are executed, the following Confirm Message is popped up
before the memory card program file is modified.
1. Delete folder or program file

2. Rename folder or program file
3. Drag in program file
4. Add folder
If the [OK] button is pushed, the operation advances.

If the [Cancel] button is pushed, the operation is abandoned.
When the [Hide Confirm Message] in menu bar is checked, the Confirm Message is not
displayed and the operation advances at once. The default setting is the Confirm Message
displayed.
[Ignore Error Code]

When you check [Ignore Error Code] in the menu bar and perform drag-in, unusable characters
are skipped, without causing an error. The unusable characters in the program file will be
ignored and will not be written into the memory card program file.
- 835 -
[Change Work Folder]
When you select this option, you can set a work folder. By default, the [temp] folder is created
in the folder that contains the executable file (FANUCPRG.exe), and [temp] is used as the work
folder.
During drag-out, a program file is moved from the memory card program file to the specified
destination via the work folder. If there is not enough free space on the hard disk that contains
the work folder, drag-out cannot be performed successfully.
To work around this problem, you can specify another work folder.
When you start this PC tool, and then try to specify a new work folder for the first time, the
work folder provided by the system has been set. The text box in the dialogue is therefore blank.
When you change the work folder, the following warning message is popped up.

If the work folder has been changed before, the following warning message is popped up.

WARNING
1 At this PC tool terminated, all files in the work folder are deleted.
2 During this PC tool executing, do not access the files in the work folder. If the
access is done, there is no assurance of normal operation.
Help menu
- 836 -
[About...]
Version number of this PC tool is displayed.
- Mouse Operation
[Drag-in and Drag-out]
• Drag-in from the Explorer
You can add NC programs by dragging in files.
The NC program names and update time are generated based on the files that have been dragged in.
If "Oxxxxxxxx" or "<xxxx>" exists at the top of files, These "Oxxxxxxxx" and "<xxxx>" become
NC program name. If not exist, each file name becomes NC program name.
Examples
Name of external file Top of external file Name of internal file Program number
O1234 N10G00 O1234 1234
O123N10G00 N10G00 O123N10G00 Not an O number program
test.txt O1234N10G00 O1234 1234
test.txt <O1234> O1234 1234
test.txt <O1234N10> O1234N10 Not an O number program
O1234 <O1234N10> O1234N10 Not an O number program
O001234 N10G00 O1234 1234
O001234N10G00 N10G00 O001234N10G00 Not an O number program
test.txt O001234 O1234 1234
test.txt <O001234> O1234 1234
test.txt <O001234N10G00> O001234N10G00 Not an O number program
NOTE
1 For an explanation of program file names, see "Naming Rules of Program File "
below.
2 For an explanation of characters that can be used in program files, see "RULES
OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE" below.
3 The updating time of program file is available from 1997 to 2037.
4 The program numbers allowed in the Series 0i-PD are 1 to 9999. The Series
0i-PD cannot therefore handle a file having a program number that is out of the
range of 1 to 9999.
- 837 -
Based on the description in "RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE" below, this PC tool
checks the characters in a file that has been dragged in. However, this PC tool does not check
grammar of NC program.
The program file can only have one NC program. Therefore, the NC program output from CNC
cannot be dragged in directly.
Example of Program
Available for Drag-in Unavailable for Drag-in
O1 <O1> % O1
G91 X10. Y10. G91 X10. Y10. O1 G91 X10. Y10.
M30 M30 G91 X10. Y10. M30
M30
% O10
G91 X10. Y10.
M30
NOTE
1 If another program having the same name already exists, drag-in cannot be
performed.
2 If the memory card program file does not have enough free space, drag-in
cannot be performed.
3 If an NC program name does not conform to the rules described in "Naming
Rules of Program File" below, drag-in cannot be performed.
If the File name acts as Program number, "O" is displayed on the first row of list view.
• Drag-out from this PC tool

You can drag out program files from this PC tool to the Explorer or other folders.
CAUTION
Do not drag out a file from the work folder. If you do this, there is no guarantee of
proper operation.
- Pop-up menu
Pop-up menu is displayed by clicking the right mouse button.
• Focus on Tree view
- 838 -
Clicking "New Folder", a new folder is created on selected folder.

Clicking "Delete", the selected folder is deleted.
Clicking "Rename", the selected folder is renamed.
If clicking on root folder, "Delete" and "Rename" are not activated.
• Focus on List view
• Clicking "Delete", the selected folder or program file is deleted.

• Clicking "Rename", the selected folder or program file is renamed.
- Display of free space on the memory card program file ("FANUCPRG.BIN")

Number of used folder, size of used space, number of unused folder, and size of free space are displayed
on status bar in the lower portion of the screen.
When a new memory card program file is created, two reserved folder are also created. Therefore, the
number of used folder is two. However it does not show that number of unused folder is reduced.
The status bar display is updated as you create a new folder, delete a folder, drag in a program file from
the Explorer or any other similar tool to this PC tool, or delete a program file.
- Sorting list view of the memory card program file

When a column is being clicked, the list view of the memory card program file is being sorted by the
column key in ascending or descending order.
The initial display is sorted by NAME key in ascending order.
- 839 -
Click
I.2 NAMING RULES

Overview
Naming rules of folder and program file are described as follows.
I.2.1 Naming Rules of Program File

Here are Naming rules of Program file:
• Program file name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
• Program file name can have following characters.
Alphabet(Upper and lower case letter), numeric character,
"-"(minus), "+"(plus), "_"(under bar), "."(dot)
"." and ".." can not be used since these are reserved for system use.
- The File name acts as Program number

When a program has a file name consisting of "O" and 1 to 9999, the file name can also be used as the
program number to handle the program.
To use a file name including "O" and numeric characters, you must ensure that the following conditions
are satisfied.
1. Only numeric characters are used after "O".
2. Up to 4 digits are used after "O".
Example)
File name that can be used as a program number
"O123" Program number 123
File name that does not prevent drag-in but is invalid
(The program numbers allowed in the Series 0i-PD are 1 to 9999.)
File name that does not prevent drag-in but cannot be used as a program number
"ABC" Top of character is not upper case letter of "O".
"o123" Top of character is not upper case letter of "O".
"O0123XY" Characters following the "O" contains alphabet.
File name that prevents drag-in
"O123456789" Numeric characters exceed 8 digits.
- 840 -
NOTE
1 Program file name cannot be repeated in a Folder.
2 If program file name starts with "O" and the next eight characters are all numeric
characters, the "0" (zero) after the "O" will be deleted.
I.2.2 Naming Rules of Folder

Here are Naming rules of Folder:
• Folder name can have a maximum of 32 characters.
• Folder name can have following characters.
Alphabet(Upper and lower case letter), numeric character,
"-"(minus), "+"(plus), "_"(under bar), "." (dot)
"." and ".." can not be used since these are reserved for system use.
NOTE
Folder name cannot be repeated in a Folder.
I.3 RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE

Overview
Words in parentheses "( )" in Program file are treated as comments.
The mark of comment start "(" is named "Control-out".
The mark of comment end ")" is named "Control-in".
"Control-out" and "Control-in" must make a pair. The order is 1st - "Control-out" and 2nd -"Control-in".
And nested parentheses is not available.
NOTE
1 When a program file is dragged in, space code (0x20 SPC) , tab code (0x09
HT) , carriage return code(0x0d CR) and percent code(0x25 %) is deleted. If "%"
is found in Control-in, characters between "%" and next "LF" (0x0a) is deleted.
2 The front of program number ":" is changed to "O"(O as in Oscar) while the
program file dragged in.
3 The program file can only have one NC program.
I.3.1 Usable Characters in Program File

- Usable characters in Control-in
List of ANSI(ASCII) codes of usable characters(hexadecimal form)

Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Character
0a LF 3f ? 58 X 74 t
23 # 40 @ 59 Y 75 u
26 & 41 A 5a Z 76 v
28 ( 42 B 5b [ 77 w
29 ) 43 C 5d ] 78 x
2a * 44 D 5f _ 79 y
2b + 45 E 61 a 7a z
2c , 46 F 62 b
2d - 47 G 63 c
2e . 48 H 64 d
- 841 -

2f / 49 I 65 e
30 0 4a J 66 f
31 1 4b K 67 g
32 2 4c L 68 h
33 3 4d M 69 i
34 4 4e N 6a j
35 5 4f O 6b k
36 6 50 P 6c l
37 7 51 Q 6d m
38 8 52 R 6e n
39 9 53 S 6f o
3a : 54 T 70 p
3c < 55 U 71 q
3d = 56 V 72 r
3e > 57 W 73 s
NOTE
In the Control-in, "O", ":", and "<" can not be used at top of the line except for the
1st line.
- Usable characters in Control-out(characters in parentheses)
List of ANSI(ASCII) codes of usable characters(hexadecimal form)

0a LF 3c < 55 U 71 q
20 SPC 3d = 56 V 72 r
22 “ 3e > 57 W 73 s
23 # 3f ? 58 X 74 t
24 $ 40 @ 59 Y 75 u
26 & 41 A 5a Z 76 v
27 ‘ 42 B 5b [ 77 w
2a * 43 C 5d ] 78 x
2b + 44 D 5f _ 79 y
2c , 45 E 61 a 7a z
2d - 46 F 62 b
2e . 47 G 63 c
2f / 48 H 64 d
30 0 49 I 65 e
31 1 4a J 66 f
32 2 4b K 67 g
33 3 4c L 68 h
34 4 4d M 69 i
35 5 4e N 6a j
36 6 4f O 6b k
37 7 50 P 6c l
38 8 51 Q 6d m
39 9 52 R 6e n
3a : 53 S 6f o
3b ; 54 T 70 p
- 842 -
I.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE

Error may occur when using this application, hereafter explains the error messages and gives relative
instructions.
I.4.1 List of Error Message

When an error occurred, the error message box is displayed as follows.
Message Remarks
Failed to open the file you specified. The memory card program file cannot be opened. When you retry
and the failure recurs, the file may be corrupt.
Failed to read or write to the specified file. An attempt to read from or write to the memory card program file has
failed.
There is insufficient disk space. There is not enough disk space for the work folder to create a
memory card program file or drag out a program file. Allocate
sufficient disk space, and then create a file.
See an explanation of [Change Work Folder] in "Explanation of
Operations".
File name is not correct. The name cannot be used as a program file name. See "NAMING
RULES".
Input name is already exists. The entered name is already used. Enter another name.
File name is already exists. The added program file name already exists. Change the name.
Input name is not correct. The entered name cannot be used. See "NAMING RULES".
Please input an integer between 2 and A memory card program file cannot be created with the specified
2048 size. Enter a numeric value in the range of 2 to 2048.
An illegal character is included in the An invalid character is included in the program file. See "RULES OF
specified file. CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE".
Last update time of the specified file is The update time of the program file is beyond the range of years
unsupported. (1997 to 2037) that can be supported by this PC tool. Create a new
file or change the update time.
The memory card program file you The format of the memory card program file is not the format
specified cannot be identified. supported by this PC tool. The file may be rewritten with some other
tool.
There is insufficient free folder. A folder cannot be added. Delete unnecessary folders and program
files.
There is insufficient free program space. A program file cannot be added. Delete unnecessary program files.
Folder deeper than 7 cannot be created. An attempt was made to create a folder deeper than the 7th level.
Folders cannot be created deeper than the 7th level.
Root folder cannot be deleted. An attempt was made to delete the root folder.
Root folder cannot be renamed. An attempt was made to rename the root folder.
Failed to create work folder. An attempt to create [temp] to be used as the work folder has failed.
Drag-out cannot be performed. Check whether the [temp] folder can
be created in the folder that contains the executable file
(FANUCPRG.exe).
Process has been cancelled. Processing has been discontinued.
The specified work folder is not found. The folder specified in the path is not found. Drag-out cannot be
performed. Exit this PC tool, and set the work folder again.
Only one instance of this application can be More than one instance of this PC tool cannot be run.
executed.
- 843 -
I.4.2 Note
- Folder and Program Numbers
This PC tool allows you to select the number of folders or programs that can be stored in a memory card
program file; you can select 63, 500, or 1000. The number of folders or programs that can be used with
the Series 0i-PD is 63, however.
If you select 500 or 1000 as the number of folders or programs when you create a memory card program
file, the Series 0i-PD cannot use that memory card program file.
- 844 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIXJ.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL
J ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL

Overview
FANUC ISO Converter is a tool that converts a file created or externally output with ASCII code to ISO
code format.
This tool runs on Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista.
This tool can be used in two modes, CUI and GUI.
CUI
Start the executable file from the command prompt.
Specify the following arguments when starting the tool.
/c : Specify that the tool runs in command line mode.

When /c is omitted, the tool runs in GUI mode.
/i= : Specify the name of an input file to be converted.
/o= :Specify the name of the converted file.
Example
C:¥>ISO_CONV.EXE /c /i=ALL-PROG.TXT /o=ALL-PROG.ISO
Multiple files can be converted at a time by listing them in a batch file.
- 845 -
J.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOLAPPENDIX B-64554EN/01
GUI
When you double-click the icon, the following screen appears, allowing you to select and convert a file.
Conversion procedure
1. Step 1
In [Target File], specify a file you want to convert.
When you click the [Select...▼] button, a file selection dialogue appears, allowing you to select a
file.
2. Step 2
After you specify the file name in step 1, you can determine the code of the specified file by clicking
the [File Check] button. When you select the file by clicking the [Select...▼] button, the code is
automatically determined.
The file is determined as an ASCII file, ISO file, or ASCII/ISO-mixed file, or is indeterminable. In
[Message], an additional message appears depending on the determination result.
If the file is determined as an ASCII/ISO-mixed file, it cannot be converted, so you cannot proceed
to the next step. The [File Convert] button is disabled and you cannot click it. If file contains only
characters represented by the code values common to ASCII and ISO, the code of the file is
indeterminable. This file need not be converted, so the [File Convert] button is disabled and you
cannot click it.
- 846 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIXJ.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL
3. Step 3
When you specify the name of a converted file and click the [File Convert] button, the converted file
is created. When the original file is an ASCII file, an ISO file is created; when the original is an ISO
file, an ASCII file is created.
You can also click the [Select...▼] button and specify the name of the converted file from a file
selection dialogue.
Other
When you click the [Version] button, the software version information is displayed as shown below.
- 847 -
K. DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC APPENDIX B-64554EN/01
K DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC

Appendix K, "DIFFERRENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC", consists of the following sections:
K.1 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION....................................................................................................849

K.2 HELICAL INTERPOLATION .......................................................................................................850
K.3 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................851
K.4 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...........................................................................853
K.5 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM......................................................................................855
K.6 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM................................................................................................856
K.7 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY...........................................................................................857
K.8 CUSTOM MACRO ........................................................................................................................858
K.9 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO ...............................................................................860
K.10 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10).......................................................................860
K.11 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL.......................................................................................861
K.12 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................................................................................862
K.13 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................................................867
K.14 MANUAL HANDLE FEED...........................................................................................................867
K.15 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................868
K.16 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)...............................................................................872
K.17 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .................................................................................................873
K.18 STORED STROKE CHECK ..........................................................................................................874
K.19 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..............................................................................876
K.20 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ......877
K.21 RESET AND REWIND..................................................................................................................878
K.22 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON...........................................................................................................878
K.23 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................879
K.24 DATA SERVER FUNCTION ........................................................................................................881
K.25 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ................................................................................................882
K.26 CUTTER COMPENSATION.........................................................................................................882
K.27 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ..................................................................................................887
K.28 POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATIONS ...................................................................887
K.29 CONSTANT CONTROL OF POSITIONING TIME.....................................................................888
- 848 -
B-64554EN/01 APPENDIX K. DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC
K.1 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
K.1.1 Differences in Specifications

Function Series 0i-PC Series 0i-PD
Interpolation method If the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point of an arc is
when the arc end greater than the value set in parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is issued. If the
point is not on the arc difference is smaller (the end point is not on the arc), circular interpolation is performed as
follows.
- Circular interpolation is performed - Helical interpolation is performed as
using the radius value of the start point shown in the figure below.
End point
and, when an axis reaches the end
point, it is moved linearly. γe
γ(t) ( γ e − γ s) θ(t )
γ (t) = γ s +
Start θ θ
θ(t)
Parameter No. 3410 point
γs 中心
In a circular interpolation command, set the Radius
limit allowed for the difference between the Start point

γs
radius values of the start point and end γe End point
point.
Center θ
θ
In other words, the radius of the arc moves

linearly according to the center angle θ(t).
Specifying an arc where the arc radius of
the start point differs from that of the end
point enables helical interpolation. When
performing helical interpolation, set a large
value in parameter No. 3410 that specifies
the limit for the arc radius difference.
K.1.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.
- 849 -
K.2 HELICAL INTERPOLATION

Specification of the - Specify the feedrate along a circular - Make a selection using bit 5 (HTG) of
feedrate arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the parameter No. 1403.
linear axis is as follows: 0: Same as left.
1: Specify a feedrate along the tool path
Length of linear axis including the linear axis. Therefore, the
F × tangential velocity of the arc is expressed
Length of circular arc as follows:
Length of arc
F×
(Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2
The velocity along the linear axis is expressed

as follows:

F×
(Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2
For details, refer to "HELICAL

INTERPOLATION" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).
Helical cutting - Make a selection using bit 0 (HFC) - Bit 0 (HFC) of parameter No. 1404 is not
feedrate clamp of parameter No. 1404. available.
0: The feedrate of the arc and The feedrate of the arc and linear axes is
linear axes is clamped by clamped by parameter No. 1430.
parameter No. 1422 or
No.1430.
1: The combined feedrate along
the tool path including the
linear axis is clamped by
parameter No. 1422.

None.
- 850 -
K.3 SKIP FUNCTION

Setting to enable the - Set 1 in bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. - Set 1 in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No.
high-speed skip signal 6200. 6200.
for normal skip (G33)
when the multi-stage
Multi-stage Parameter to decide on use
skip function is enabled
skip Command of the high-speed skip signal
function FS0i-PC FS0i-PD
Disabled G33 (normal skip) HSS HSS
G33 (normal skip) SLS HSS
Enabled
G33P1 to G33P4 (multi-stage skip) SLS SLS
Target of acceleration / - Compensation is performed for the - Compensation is performed for the
deceleration and servo skip coordinates obtained when the skip coordinates obtained when the
system delay high-speed skip signal is set to "1". skip or high-speed skip signal is set
compensation to "1".
Method of acceleration / - There are two ways to perform - Bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. 6201 is
deceleration and servo compensation, as follows. not available.
system delay [Compensating the value calculated There is only one way to perform
compensation from the cutting constant and servo compensation, as follows.
constant] [Compensating the accumulated
Set 1 in bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. pulses and positional deviation due to
6201. acceleration/deceleration]
[Compensating the accumulated Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
pulses and positional deviation due to 6201.
acceleration/deceleration]
Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
6201.
Skip cutting feedrate - Feedrate specified by the F code in - Depends on bit 1 (SFP) of parameter
(normal skip) the program No. 6207. When 0 is set, the
processing is the same as Series
0i-PC.
Bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

The feedrate during the skip function
(G33) is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter No.
6281.
- 851 -

Skip cutting feedrate - Feedrate specified by the F code in - Depends on bit 2 (SFN) of parameter
(skip using the the program No. 6207. When 0 is set, the
high-speed skip signal or processing is the same as Series
multi-step skip) 0i-PC.
Bit 2 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

When the skip function using the
high-speed skip signal (1 is set in bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200) or the
multi-step skip function is executed, the
feedrate is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter Nos.
6282 to 6285.
Axis to monitor to check - Depends on bit 3 (TSA) of parameter - Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 is
whether the torque limit No. 6201. not available.
has been reached Only the axis specified in the same
(torque limit skip) Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 block as G33 P99/98 is monitored.
To check whether the torque limit has
been reached, the torque limit skip
function (G33 P99/98) monitors:
0: All axes.
1: Only the axis specified in the same
block as G33 P99/98.
High-speed skip signal As the skip signal for the G33 P99 command, the high-speed skip signal:
input for the G33 P99 - Cannot be input. - Can be input.
command
(torque limit skip)
Setting of a positional - No parameter is available dedicated - The value can be set in parameter
deviation limit in the to setting a positional deviation limit No. 6287.
torque limit skip for the torque limit skip function.
command Parameter No. 6287
(torque limit skip) Set a positional deviation limit in the
torque limit skip command for each axis.
When G33 P99/98 is - The G33 P99/98 command is - Alarm PS0035 is issued.
specified without a executed as is.
torque limit being (No alarm is issued.)
specified in advance
(torque limit skip)

None.
- 852 -
K.4 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Conditions for Manual reference position return is performed when automatic operation is halted (feed
performing manual hold) and when any of the following conditions is met:
reference position <Conditions>
return during feed (1) Travel distance is remaining.
hold (2) An auxiliary function (M, S, T, or B function) is being executed.
(3) A dwell, canned cycle, or other cycle is in progress.
- Depends on bit 2 (OZR) of parameter - Bit 2 (OZR) of parameter No. 1800 is
No. 1800. not available.
[When OZR = 0] Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual
Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual reference position return is not
reference position return is not performed.
performed.
[When OZR = 1]
Manual reference position return is
performed without issuing an alarm.
When inch/metric - The reference position is lost. - The reference position is not lost.
switch is done (The reference position is not (The reference position remains
established.) established.)
Reference position - Set 1 in bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. - Bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1002 is
setting without dogs 1002. not available.
for all axes Reference position setting without
dogs (bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.
1005) is set for all axes.
Function that performs - Not available. - Depends on bit 4 (GRD) of parameter
reference position No. 1007.
setting without dogs
two or more times Bit 4 (GRD) of parameter No. 1007
when the reference For the axis on which absolute values are
position is not detected, when correspondence between
established in the machine position and the position by
absolute position the absolute position detector is not
detection completed, the reference position setting
without dogs is:
0: Not performed two or more times.
1: Performed two or more times.
- 853 -

Behavior when - Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of - [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0
manual reference parameter No. 1007. (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 0]
position return is Movement is made at the reference Movement is made at the reference
started on a rotation position return feedrate FL even if the position return feedrate FL even if the
axis with the grid is not established. grid is not established.
deceleration dog Releasing the deceleration dog before Releasing the deceleration dog before
pressed before a the grid is established causes alarm the grid is established causes alarm
reference position is PS0090. PS0090.
established [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0
(RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 1]
Movement is made at the rapid
traverse feedrate until the grid is
established.
If the deceleration dog is released
before the grid is established, one
revolution is made at the rapid traverse
feedrate, thus establishing the grid.
Pressing the deceleration dog again
establishes the reference position.
[Rotation axis type = B]
Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of
parameter No. 1007.
Movement is made at the reference
position return feedrate FL even if the
grid is not established.
Releasing the deceleration dog before
the grid is established causes alarm
PS0090.
Reference position - The function is enabled for all axes by - Bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No. 1002 is
shift function setting setting 1 in bit 2 (SFD) of parameter not available.
No. 1002. Set bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No.
1008 for each axis.
Setting of whether to - Not available. - Depends on bit 1 (HZP) of parameter
preset the coordinate The coordinate system is not preset. No. 1206.
system upon
high-speed manual Bit 1 (HZP) of parameter No.1206
reference position Upon high-speed manual reference
return position return, the coordinate system is:
0: Preset.
1: Not preset (FS0i-PC compatible
specification).
- 854 -

G28/G30 command in - Not available. - The command can be executed only
the coordinate system Cancel the mode before executing the when all of the conditions described
rotation, scaling, or command. below are met.
programmable mirror Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.
image mode
<Conditions>
[Conditions required before specifying the
command]
(1) An absolute command is specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image.
(2) Tool length compensation has not
been performed for the target axis of
coordinate system rotation, scaling, or
programmable mirror image when it is
moved by reference position return.
[Conditions required when specifying the
command]
(3) In an incremental command, the travel
distance of the middle point is 0.
[Conditions required after specifying the
command]
(4) The first move command specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image is an absolute command.

None.
K.5 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

Change in absolute - Make a selection using bit 5 (AWK) of parameter - Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter
position display when No. 1201. No. 1201 is not available.
the workpiece zero The tool always behaves
point offset value is Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 as when AWK is set to 1.
changed When the workpiece zero point offset value is changed:
0: Changes the absolute position display when the
program executes the block that is buffered next.
1: Changes the absolute position display immediately.
In either case, the changed value does not take effect
until the block that is buffered next.

None.
- 855 -
K.6 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

Clearing of the local - The processing is - The processing is determined by the settings of bit
coordinate system determined by the settings 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201, bit 3 (RLC) of
after servo alarm of bit 5 (SNC) and bit 3 parameter No. 1202, bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
cancellation (RLC) of parameter No. 3402, and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407.
1202. Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1202 is not available.
Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. Bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201

1202 If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
Upon reset, the local external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
coordinate system is: emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
0: Not canceled. No. 3402 is set to 0, the G code of group number 14
1: Canceled. (workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the reset state.
Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1: Not placed in the reset state.
1202 NOTE
After servo alarm cancellation, When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, the
the local coordinate system is: processing depends on the setting of bit 6 (C14) of
0: Cleared. parameter No. 3407.
1: Not cleared.
NOTE Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202
When the RLC bit of the Upon reset, the local coordinate system is:
parameter is set to 1, the local 0: Not canceled.
coordinate system is cleared, 1: Canceled.
even if the SNC bit of the NOTE
parameter is set to 1. - When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0
and bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
- When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1
and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407 is set to 0,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402

The reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal,
reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal
places the local coordinate system in:
0: Reset state.
1: Clear state.
Bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407

If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
No. 3402 is set to 1, the G code of group number 14
(workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the clear state.
1: Not placed in the clear state.
- 856 -
Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D

Operation with the - Make a selection using bit 4 (G52) of - Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is
local coordinate parameter No. 1202. not available.
system setting (G52) The tool always behaves as when G52
Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is set to 1.
1) If there are two or more blocks that are
not moved before G52 is specified
during cutter compensation, or if G52 is
specified after the cutter compensation
mode is turned off, with the offset
vector maintained, the local coordinate
system setting is performed:
0: Without considering the cutter
compensation vector.
1: Considering the cutter
compensation vector.
2) When G52 is specified, the local
coordinate system setting is performed
for:
0: All axes.
1: Only those axes whose command
addresses are found in the
G52-specified block.

None.
K.7 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY

Unit and range of tool - The unit and range of tool - Set the unit and range using bit 0 (OFA) of
compensation values compensation values are parameter No. 5042.
determined by the setting unit.
Bit 0 (OFA) of parameter No. 5042
Select the setting unit and range of tool offset
values.
Metric input
OFA Unit Range
1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
Inch input
OFA Unit Range
1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
- 857 -

Automatic conversion - Make a selection using bit 0 - Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 is not
of tool compensation (OIM) of parameter No. 5006. available.
values upon Tool compensation values are always
inch/metric switch Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 converted automatically.
Upon inch/metric switch, automatic
conversion of tool compensation
values is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the setting of this parameter is
changed, set the tool compensation
data again.

None.
K.8 CUSTOM MACRO

Keep-type common - The default value is <null>. - The default value is 0.
variable
- The Series 0i-PD function (described - The range specified by parameter Nos.
(#500 to #999)
at right) is not available. 6031 and 6032 can be made
write-protected (read-only).
System variable to - Machine coordinates are always read - Machine coordinates are always read
read machine in machine units (output units). in input units.
coordinates Example) When the setting unit is
#5021 to #502n IS-B, the input unit is the inch, the
(n: number of axes) machine unit is the millimeter, and the
coordinate value of the X axis (first
axis) is as follows:
Machine coordinate = 30.000 (mm)
Since the value of #5021 is read in
input units (inches), #5021 is 1.1811.
Logical operations in - Logical operations can be used by - Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006 is
an if statement setting 1 in bit 0 (MLG) of parameter not available.
No. 6006. Logical operations can always be
used.
Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006
In an if statement in a custom macro,
logical operations:
0: Cannot be used. (P/S alarm No. 114
is issued.)
1: Can be used.
- 858 -

Behavior of the GOTO - The command after the sequence -If a move command is specified before
statement when a number of the block (to the right of the the sequence number (left side), alarm
sequence number is sequence number) is executed. PS0128 is issued.
not found at the start of If no move command is specified
the block before the sequence number (left
side), a block containing a sequence
number is executed from the
beginning.
* Use a sequence number at the start of a block.
Behavior of "GOTO 0" - The program jumps to the block - No jump occurs.
when there is a containing the sequence number. Alarm PS1128 is issued.
sequence number * Do not use a sequence number.
When another NC - In a program like the one shown in the - A program like the one shown in the
command is found in a example, G01 changes the G code example cannot be executed. Alarm
G65 block or in an M group to 01, while the move command PS0127 is issued.
code block where a X100. is not executed. X100. is A G65 code or an M code that calls a
macro is called by an regarded as an argument of G65. macro must be specified at the
M code beginning of a block (before all other
Example) G01 X100. arguments).
G65 P9001 ;
Behavior when - When the machine is run under the conditions and program described below:
subprogram call using [Conditions]
an M code and ・ Subprogram call by T code is enabled (bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 is set
subprogram call using to 1).
an T code are done ・ The M code that calls subprogram No. 9001 is M06 (parameter No. 6071 is set
to 6).
[Program]
O0001;
T100; (1)
M06 T200; (2)
T300 M06; (3)
M30;
%
In FS0i-PC, blocks (1) to (3) of the In FS0i-PD, blocks (1) to (3) of the
program causes the machine to behave as program causes the machine to behave as
follows: follows:
1) Calls and executes O9000. 1) Calls and executes O9000.
2) Outputs T200 and waits for FIN. 2) Issues alarm PS1091.
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the 3) Issues alarm PS1091 (when the
machine calls and executes O9001. program is run with block (2) deleted).
3) Outputs T300 and waits for FIN.
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the
machine calls and executes O9001.
Block containing "M98 - Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is - Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is
Pxxxx" or "M99" not available. The block is always not available. The block is always
without any addresses treated as a macro statement. treated as a macro statement.
other than O, N, P, and (Single block stop is not performed.) (Single block stop is not performed.)
L * For details about macro and NC statements, refer to Section 17.5, "MACRO
STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64554EN).
- 859 -

Subprogram and - The call nesting level differs as follows.
macro calls
Model Series 0i-PC Series 0i-PD
Independent Independent
Total Total
Call method nesting level nesting level
Macro call
4 in all 5 in all
(G65/G66) (G65/G66/M98) (G65/G66/M98)
Subprogram 8 in all 15 in all
4 10
call (M98)
Local variable clear - Make a selection using bit 7 (CLV) of - Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 is
operation by reset parameter No. 6001. not available.
Local variables are always cleared to
Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 <null> when reset.
When reset, the local variables in the
custom macro are:
0: Cleared to <null>.
1: Not cleared.

None.
K.8.3 Miscellaneous
Series 0i-PD allows you to customize the specifications related to the maximum and minimum variable
values and accuracy by using bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008. When 1 is set in bit 0 (F0C) of
parameter No. 6008, the specifications are the same as Series 0i-PC. For details, refer to Chapter II-17,
"CUSTOM MACRO", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64554EN).
K.9 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

Interruption type - Not available. - Available.
custom macro in DNC
operation

None.
K.10 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)

Parameter input mode - Specify G10 L50. - Specify G10 L52.
setting
- 860 -

None.
K.11 AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL

Differences regarding AI advanced preview control
Function name Some function names have been changed as follows.
- Automatic corner deceleration - Speed control based on the feedrate
difference on each axis
- Arc radius-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with acceleration in
- Acceleration-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with the acceleration
on each axis
Setting to enable - Setting 1 in bit 6 (RBL) of parameter - Bit 6 (RBL) of parameter No. 1603 is
bell-shaped No. 1603 enables bell-shaped not available.
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration in rapid Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse traverse. in rapid traverse is enabled by setting
the time constant of bell-shaped
interpolation in rapid traverse in
parameter No. 1621 or the
acceleration change time of
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation in rapid traverse
in parameter No. 1672.
Selection of - The combination of bit 1 (AIR) of - Bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 7054 is
acceleration/deceleration parameter No. 7054 and bit 1 (LRP) not available.
before interpolation in of parameter No. 1401 determines The combination of bit 5 (FRP) of
rapid traverse or acceleration/deceleration before parameter No. 19501 and bit 1 (LRP)
acceleration/deceleration interpolation or of parameter No. 1401 determines
after interpolation in acceleration/deceleration after acceleration/deceleration before
rapid traverse interpolation. interpolation or
interpolation. For details, refer to
"PARAMETER MANUAL"
(B-64310EN).
Setting of acceleration - Set acceleration by specifying the - Parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771 are
for look-ahead linear maximum cutting feedrate for linear not available.
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration before In parameter No. 1660, set the
before interpolation interpolation in parameter No. 1770 maximum permissible cutting
and the time to elapse before feedrate for acceleration/deceleration
reaching the maximum cutting before interpolation for each axis.
feedrate for linear
acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation in parameter No. 1771.
- 861 -

Time constant setting of - Set the value in parameter No. 1768. - Parameter No. 1768 is not available.
linear/bell-shaped Set the time constant for each axis in
acceleration/deceleration parameter No. 1769.
after interpolation in
cutting feed common to
all axes
Time constant setting of - Set the value in parameter No. 1762. - Parameter No. 1762 is not available.
exponential (To set the value for linear or Set the value in parameter No. 1769.
acceleration/deceleration bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, (Use parameter No. 1769 for any
after interpolation in use parameter No. 1769.) acceleration/deceleration type -
cutting feed for each axis linear, bell-shaped, or exponential.)
Automatic corner - Setting 0 in bit 4 (CSD) of parameter - Automatic corner deceleration based
deceleration based on No. 1602 enables the function. on angle difference is not available.
angle difference Set the lower limit speed in parameter Therefore, bit 4 (CSD) of parameter
No. 1777 and the critical angle No. 1602 and parameter Nos. 1777
between the two blocks in parameter and 1779 are not available.
No. 1779.
Permissible speed - Set the value in parameter No. 1780. - Parameter No. 1780 is not available.
difference common to all Set the permissible speed difference
axes for automatic for each axis in parameter No. 1783.
corner deceleration
based on angle
difference (speed control
based on the feedrate
difference on each axis)
Setting of arc - Set the upper limit of the feedrate and - Parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731 are
radius-based feedrate the corresponding arc radius value in not available.
clamp (speed control parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731, Set the permissible acceleration for
with acceleration in respectively. each axis in parameter No. 1735.
circular interpolation)
Setting of the maximum - Set the value in parameter No. 1431. - Parameter No. 1431 is not available.
cutting feedrate common Set the maximum cutting feedrate for
to all axes each axis in parameter No. 1432.
Rapid traverse block - Disabled in the AI advanced preview - Enabled only when
overlap control mode. acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation is used in the AI
advanced preview control mode.
Setting of - Set the permissible acceleration by - Parameter No. 1785 is not available.
acceleration-based specifying the time to elapse before Set the permissible acceleration for
feedrate clamp (speed reaching the maximum cutting each axis in parameter No. 1737.
control with the feedrate in parameter No. 1785.
acceleration on each The maximum cutting feedrate set in
axis) parameter No. 1432 is used.

None.
K.12 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Function name - Quick synchronous control - Axis synchronous control
- 862 -

Setting to perform - Not available. - Depends on bit 5 (SCA) of parameter
synchronous No. 8304 for the slave axis. When 0
operation all the time is set, the processing is the same as
Series 0i-PC.
Bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304

In axis synchronous control:
0: Synchronous operation is performed
when the axis synchronous control
selection signal SYNCx or axis
synchronous control manual feed
selection signal Synch for the slave
axis is set to "1".
1: Synchronous operation is performed all
the time.
Synchronous operation is performed
regardless of the setting of the SYNCx
or SYNCJx signal.
Setting to move - Not available. - Available.
multiple slave axes in This is possible by setting the same
synchronism with the master axis number in parameter No.
master axis 8311 for the multiple slave axes.
Setting of the same - The same name cannot be set for the - The same name can be set for the
name for the master master and slave axes. master and slave axes. In that case,
and slave axes however, automatic operation cannot
be performed in normal operation; only
manual operation is allowed.
(No alarm is caused even if an attempt
to perform automatic operation is
made.)
Setting of axes for - The master axis number set in - The master axis number set in
which to perform parameter No. 8311 must be smaller parameter No. 8311 may or may not
simple synchronous than the slave axis number. be smaller than the slave axis number.
control (axis
synchronous control)
Synchronization error - The servo positional difference - The servo positional difference
check based on between the master and slave axes is between the master and slave axes is
positional difference monitored, and alarm PS0213 is issued monitored, and alarm DS0001 is
if the difference exceeds the limit value issued if the difference exceeds the
set in parameter No. 8313 when the limit value set in parameter No. 8323
number of synchronized axis pairs is for the slave axis. At the same time,
one or the limit value set in parameter the signal for indicating a positional
No. 8323 for the master axis when the difference error alarm for axis
number of synchronized axis pairs is synchronous control SYNER<F403.0>
two. is output.
Parameter No. 8313 is not available.
- The data range of parameter No. 8323 Regardless of the number of pairs, set
is as follows: the limit value in parameter No. 8323.
[Data range]
0 to 32767 - The data range of parameter No. 8323
is as follows:
[Data range]
0 to 999999999
- 863 -

Synchronization error - The machine coordinates of the master - The machine coordinates of the master
check based on and slave axes are compared and, if and slave axes are compared and, if
machine coordinates the difference is greater than the value the difference is greater than the value
set in parameter No. 8314 for the set in parameter No. 8314 for the slave
master axis, alarm SV0407 is issued axis, alarm SV0005 is issued and the
and the motor is stopped immediately. motor is stopped immediately.
- The data range of parameter No. 8314 - The data range of parameter No. 8314
is as follows: is as follows:
[Data range] [Data range]
0 to 32767 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
+999999.999)
Setting of - Synchronization establishment is - Synchronization establishment is
synchronization enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
establishment parameter No. 8301 when the number parameter No. 8303 for the slave axis.
of synchronized axis pairs is one or by (Bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8301 is
setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter not available. Regardless of the
No. 8303 for the master axis when the number of pairs, set 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
number of synchronized axis pairs is parameter No. 8303.)
two.
Timing of - Synchronization establishment is - Synchronization establishment is
synchronization performed when: performed when:
establishment 1. Power is turned on when the absolute 1. Power is turned on when the absolute
position detector is used. position detector is used.
2. Emergency stop is canceled. 2. Manual reference position return
operation is performed.
3. The state of servo position control is
changed from off to on.
(This occurs when emergency stop, servo
alarm, servo off, etc. is canceled. Note,
however, that synchronization
establishment is not performed at the time
of axis removal cancellation.)
Maximum - Set the value in parameter No. 8315 - Set the value in parameter No. 8325
compensation for when the number of synchronized axis for the slave axis.
synchronization pairs is one or in parameter No. 8325 If the compensation amount exceeds
for the master axis when the number of the values set in this parameter, alarm
synchronized axis pairs is two. SV0001 occurs.
If the compensation amount exceeds (Parameter No. 8315 is not available.
the values set in the relevant Regardless of the number of pairs, set
parameter, alarm SV0410 occurs. the value in parameter No. 8325.)
- The data unit and data range of - The data unit and data range of
parameter Nos. 8315 and 8325 are as parameter No. 8325 are as follows:
follows: [Data unit]
[Data unit] Machine unit
Detection unit [Data range]
[Data range] 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
0 to 32767 unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
+999999.999)
- 864 -

Automatic setting for - Enable automatic setting for grid - Set 1 in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No.
grid position matching position matching by setting 1 in bit 0 8303 for the slave axis to enable
(ATE) of parameter No. 8302 when the automatic setting for grid position
number of synchronized axis pairs is matching.
one or in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. (Bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 is
8303 when the number of synchronized not available. Regardless of the
axis pairs is two. number of pairs, set the value in bit 0
(ATE) of parameter No. 8303.)
- Start automatic setting for grid position
matching by setting 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of - Set 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.
parameter No. 8302 when the number 8303 for the slave axis to start
of synchronized axis pairs is one or in automatic setting for grid position
bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 matching.
when the number of synchronized axis (Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 is
pairs is two. not available. Regardless of the
number of pairs, set the value in bit 1
(ATS) of parameter No. 8303.)
Difference between - Set the value in parameter No. 8316 - Set the value in parameter No. 8326
the master axis when the number of synchronized axis for the slave axis.
reference counter and pairs is one or in parameter No. 8326 (Parameter No. 8316 is not available.
slave axis reference for the master axis. Regardless of the number of pairs, set
counter obtained the value in parameter No. 8326.)
through automatic
setting for grid
positioning
Time from the servo - Set the value in parameter No. 8317 - Set the value in parameter No. 8327
preparation when the number of synchronized axis for the slave axis.
completion signal SA pairs is one or in parameter No. 8327 (Parameter No. 8317 is not available.
<F000.6> being set to for the master axis when the number of Regardless of the number of pairs, set
1 until torque synchronized axis pairs is two. the value in parameter No. 8327.)
difference alarm
detection is started
Setting to use the - When 1 is set in bit 3 (SSE) of - Bit 3 (SSE) of parameter No. 8302 is
external machine parameter No. 8302, setting an not available.
coordinate system external machine coordinate system By setting 1 in bit 7 (SYE) of parameter
shift function for the shift for the master axis causes the No. 8304 for the slave axis, the slave
slave axis slave axis to shift as well. axis is shifted as well when an external
This parameter is used for all the pairs. machine coordinate system shift is set
for the corresponding master axis.
This parameter is used individually for
each slave axis.
Setting to prevent - Setting 1 in bit 7 (SMF) of parameter - Bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No. 3105 is
slave axis movement No. 3105 prevents slave axis not available.
from being added to movement from being added to the Setting 0 in bit 2 (SAF) of parameter
the actual feedrate actual feedrate display. No. 8303 prevents slave axis
display This parameter is used for all the pairs. movement from being added to the
actual feedrate display. (Note that the
meaning of the value is the opposite
from bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No.
3105.)
This parameter is used individually for
each slave axis.
- 865 -

Change of the - Specify an M code that is not to be - Specify an M code that changes the
synchronization state buffered. synchronization state (parameter No.
during a program Using this M code, change the input 8337 or 8338).
command signal - SYNCx<G138> or By changing the input signal -
SYNCJx<G140> - from the PMC side. SYNCx<G138> or SYNCJx<G140> -
from the PMC side using this M code,
it is possible to change the
synchronization state during a program
command.
Parameter No. 8337

Specify an M code that changes
synchronous operation to normal operation.
Parameter No. 8338

Specify an M code that changes normal
operation to synchronous operation.
Automatic slave axis - This function is enabled by setting 1 in - Bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 is
parameter setting bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for not available.
the master axis. This function is enabled by setting 1 in
bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for
the master and slave axes.
Mirror image for the - A mirror image cannot be applied to a - By setting parameter No. 8312 for the
slave axis slave axis during simple synchronous slave axis, a mirror image can be
control. It can be applied only to the T applied to a slave axis during simple
series. synchronous control.
Parameter No. 8312

This parameter sets mirror image for the
slave axis. When 100 or a more value is
set with this parameter, the mirror image
function is applied to synchronous control.
Setting to cancel the - Depends on bit 5 (SYE) of parameter - Not available.
check of positional No. 8301. Therefore, bit 5 (SYE) of parameter
difference between No. 8301 is not available.
the master and slave Bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301 Since the positional difference is
axes during During synchronization establishment, the always checked, parameter No. 8318
synchronization positional difference limit is: is not available, either.
establishment 0: Checked.
1: Not checked. Parameter No. 8318
Set the time from the synchronization
establishment function outputting a
compensation pulse to the slave axis until
the check of the positional difference limit
between the master and slave axes starts.

Item Series 0i-PC Series 0i-PD
Positional difference - This item is displayed in diagnosis No. - This item is displayed in diagnosis No.
between the master 540 for the master axis when the 3500 for the slave axis.
and slave axes number of synchronized axis pairs is (Regardless of the number of pairs, the
one or in diagnosis No. 541 for the item is displayed in diagnosis No.
master axis when the number of 3500.)
synchronized axis pairs is two.
- 866 -
K.13 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY

Data range of the M Parameter No. 6710
code that counts the The data range of the M code that counts the number of machined parts is as follows.
number of machined
parts - 0 to 255 - 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
Data range of the Parameter No. 6713
number of parts The data range of the number of parts required is as follows.
required
- 0 to 9999 - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
Data range of the Parameter No. 6711 Parameter No. 6712
number and total Number of parts machined Total number of parts machined
number of parts
machined The data range is as follows.
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
Data range of the Parameter No. 6750 Parameter No. 6752 Parameter No. 6754
power-on period, time Integrated value of Integrated value of time during Integrated value of cutting
during automatic power-on period automatic operation time
operation, cutting Parameter No. 6756 Parameter No. 6758
time, input signal Integrated value of time when input signal TMRON (G053.0) Integrated value of one
TMRON on time, and is on automatic operation time
one automatic
operation time The data range is as follows.
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)

None.
K.14 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

Handle pulses If manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified, whether to ignore or
exceeding the rapid accumulate handle pulses exceeding the rapid traverse feedrate can be set as follows.
traverse rate - Depends on bit 4 (HPF) of parameter - Bit 4 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 is
No. 7100. The amount of pulses to be not available. Whether to ignore or
accumulated is set in parameter No. accumulate excess handle pulses is
7117. determined by the amount to be
accumulated that is set in parameter
No. 7117.
[When parameter No. 7117 = 0]
Ignored.
[When parameter No. 7117 > 0]
Accumulated in the CNC without being
ignored.
Permissible amount of - The value range of parameter No. 7117 - The value range of parameter No.
pulses for manual is 0 to 99999999 (8 digits). 7117 is 0 to 999999999 (9 digits).
handle feed
- 867 -

Value range of the - For parameter Nos. 7113, 7131, 7133, - For parameter No. 7113, 7114, 7131,
magnification and 12350, magnification ranges from 7132, 7133, 7134, 12350, and 12351,
parameter for manual 1 to 127. magnification ranges from 1 to 2000.
handle feed For parameter Nos. 7114, 7132, 7134,
and 12351, magnification ranges from
1 to 1000.
Parameter No. 7113 Parameter No. 7114
Magnification when manual handle feed Magnification when manual handle feed
amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and MP2 amount selection signals MP1 = 1 and MP2
=1 =1
[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 0]
Magnification common to all the generators in the path
[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 1]
Magnification used by the first generator in the path
amount selection signals MP21 = 0 and amount selection signals MP21 = 1 and
MP22 = 1 MP22 = 1
When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the second
generator in the path applies.
amount selection signals MP31 = 0 and amount selection signals MP31 = 1 and
MP32 = 1 MP32 = 1
When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the third
generator in the path applies.
Magnification when per-axis manual handle Magnification when per-axis manual handle
feed amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and feed amount selection signals MP1 = 1 and
MP2 = 1 MP2 = 1
Number of manual - Set the value in parameter No. 7110. - Parameter No. 7110 is not available.
pulse generators used Up to three generators can be used
without setting the parameter.

None.
K.15 PMC AXIS CONTROL

Relationship with the - Enable or disable the functions by using - Neither the feed-forward nor
feed-forward and bit 7 (NAH) of parameter No. 1819, bit 3 advanced preview feed-forward
advanced preview (G8C) of parameter No. 8004, and bit 4 function is available for an axis
feed-forward functions (G8R) of parameter No. 8004 in under PMC axis control.
combination. Bit 3 (G8C) and bit 4 (G8R) of
parameter No. 8004 are not
available.
- 868 -

Data range of rapid - The data range is as follows. - 1 to 65535
Valid data range Unit of
traverse rate for rapid IS-A, IS-B IS-C data The data unit is as follows.
Data unit
Millimeter Unit
traverse (00h), 1st to 4th Linear axis machine
30 to 15000 30 to 12000 mm/min
Linear Metric machine
IS-A to IS-C
1 mm/min
Inch machine 30 to 6000 30 to 4800 inch/min axis
reference position return Rotation axis 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 deg/min Rotation
Inch machine 0.1
1
inch/min
deg/min
axis
(07h to 0Ah), and
machine coordinate
system selection (20h)
Data range of total - The data range is as follows. - The data range is as follows.
moving distance for rapid Input increment IS-B IS-C Unit IS-A IS-B,IS-C
mm unit input mm -99999999 to 99999999 (8 digits) -999999999 to 999999999 (9 digits)

traverse (00h), cutting ±99999.999 ±9999.9999
deg unit input deg
feed - feed per minute inch unit input ±9999.9999 ±999.99999 inch The data unit is the minimum setting
(01h), cutting feed - feed unit for the corresponding axis. (See
per revolution (02h), and the table below.)
S e t t in g M i n im u m
u n it d a ta u n it
skip - feed per minute IS - A
IS - B
0 .0 1
0 .0 0 1
IS - C 0 .0 0 0 1
(03h)
Data range of cutting - 1 to 65535 - 1 to 65535
feedrate for rapid The specified feedrate must be within
traverse (01h) and skip - the range shown in the table below.
Valid data range Unit of
feed per minute (03h) Millimeter
IS-B IS-C data
1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min
Linear axis machine
Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.01 to 480.000 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 deg/min
Function to increase the - Not available. - By setting 1 in bit 2 (JFM) of

specification unit by a parameter No. 8004, it is possible
factor of 200 for to increase the specification unit by
continuous feed (06h) a factor of 200.
Bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004

Set the specification unit of feedrate
data for specifying the continuous feed
command for PMC axis control.
Millimeter Rotation
Increment Bit 2 (JFM) Inch input
input axis
system of No. 8004 (inch/min) -1
(mm/min) (min )
0 1 0.01 0.00023
IS-B
1 200 2.00 0.046
0 0.1 0.001 0.000023
IS-C
1 20 0.200 0.0046
Maximum feedrate for - When an override of 254% is applied - When an override of 254% is
IS-B IS-C
continuous feed (06h) Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input applied
166458 1664.58 16645 166.45 IS-B IS-C
1 time
mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
1664589 16645.89 166458 1664.58 Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
10 times
mm/min inch/min 0mm/min inch/min
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
- When override is canceled 1 time 166458 1664.58 16645 166.46
IS-B IS-C 10 times 999000 16645.89 99900 1664.58

Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
65535 655.35 6553 65.53 200 times 999000 39330.0 99900 3933.0
1 time
mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
10 times
655350
mm/min
6553.50
inch/min
65535
mm/min
655.35
inch/min - When override is canceled
IS-B IS-C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 time 65535 655.35 6553 65.53
10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35
200 times 999000 39330.0 999000 3933.0
Minimum unit of feedrate The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expressions shown below. The value
for the speed command must be specified as an integer. No finer value may be specified.
(10h) A calculation is made according to IS-B.
Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- Fmin = P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
Speed specification in A speed is specified according to the expressions shown below.
the speed command A calculation is made according to IS-B.
(10h) F: Speed command (integer)
N: Servo motor speed (min-1)
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- 869 -

- F = N × P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
Setting range of torque - The setting range is as follows. - The setting range is as follows.
Valid data range Unit Valid data range Unit
data for torque control -999999999 to +999999999 (9 digits) 0.0000 1 Nm
-99999999 to +99999999 0.0000 1 Nm
(11h)
Note on executing an - [For Series 0i-PD]
absolute command from When you switch to PMC axis control to execute a move command during
the program for an axis automatic operation and then switch back to NC axis control to execute an
subject to PMC axis absolute command from the program for the moved axis, that PMC command
control during automatic needs to be executed using a non-buffering M code.
operation
For example, when an absolute command is executed in a N40 block after PMC
control is applied to Y axis, as in the example below, PMC axis control needs to be
executed in a non-buffering M code (N20 block).
O0001 ;
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; → Executes PMC axis control for the Y axis.
N30 X70. ;
N40 Y50. ;
N50 M30 ;
Execute PMC axis control as follows.

1. After the output of the auxiliary function strobe signal MF for M55, start PMC
axis control.
2. Upon completion of PMC axis control, input the completion signal FIN for M55.
- [For Series 0i-PC]

Control does not need to be executed using a non-buffering M code.
Acceleration/deceleration - Depends on bit 2 (SUE) of parameter - Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002
control for an axis No. 8002. is not available.
synchronized with The acceleration/deceleration of
external pulses using Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002 the axis synchronized with external
external pulse With the external pulse synchronization pulses is controlled (exponential
synchronization (0Bh, command for PMC axis control, the acceleration/deceleration).
0Dh to 0Fh) acceleration/deceleration of the axis
synchronized with external pulses is:
0: Controlled (exponential
acceleration/deceleration).
1: Not controlled.
Inch/metric conversion - Depends on bit 0 (PIM) of parameter - Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003
for a linear axis No. 8003. is not available. Parameter No.
controlled only by PMC 1010 is not available, either.
axis control Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 For a linear axis controlled only by
When the axis controlled only by PMC axis PMC axis control, set rotation axis
control (see parameter No. 1010) is a linear type B (set 1 in both bit 1 and bit 0
axis, inch/metric input: of parameter No. 1006) to avoid
0: Influences the axis. the influence of inch/metric input.
1: Does not influence the axis.
- 870 -

Setting to change all - Depends on bit 1 (PAX) of parameter - Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003
axes to CNC axes or No. 8003. is not available. Parameter No.
PMC axes 1010 is not available, either.
Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003 There is no parameter to change
When 0 is set as the number of CNC control all axes to PMC axes.
axes (parameter No. 1010), all axes are
changed to:
0: CNC axes.
1: PMC axes.
If the PMC issues an - Depends on bit 0 (CMV) of parameter - Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004
axis control command for No. 8004. is not available.
an axis when the tool is The axis control command from the
waiting for the auxiliary Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004 PMC side is executed.
function completion If the PMC issues an axis control command
signal after moving that for an axis when the tool is waiting for the
axis according to a move auxiliary function completion signal after
command and an moving that axis according to a move
auxiliary function command and an auxiliary function specified
specified from the CNC from the CNC side:
side 0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: The axis control command from the
PMC side is executed.
If the CNC issues a - Depends on bit 1 (NMT) of parameter - Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004
command for an axis No. 8004. is not available.
when that axis is being A command that does not involve
moved by the axis Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004 moving the axis is executed without
control command from If the CNC issues a command for an axis an alarm.
the PMC side when that axis is being moved by the axis (If the command involves moving
control command from the PMC side: the axis, alarm PS0130 is issued.)
0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: A command that does not involve
moving the axis is executed without an
alarm.
Individual output of the - Depends on bit 7 (MFD) of parameter - Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005
auxiliary function No. 8005. is not available.
The individual output of the
Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 auxiliary function for PMC axis
The individual output of the auxiliary function control function is enabled.
for PMC axis control function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Function to exert position - Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter - Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of
control for the speed No. 8005. parameter No. 8005. Note that,
command (10h) for the EVP=1 setting to take
Bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 effect, 1 must be set in bit 2 (VCP)
The speed of PMC axis control is specified of parameter No. 8007.
by:
0: Speed command. Bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007
1: Position command. The speed command in PMC axis
control is:
0: FS10/11 type.
1: FS0 type.
- 871 -

In-position check for an - Depends on bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. - Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006
axis controlled only by 8006. is not available. Parameter No.
PMC axis control 1010 is not available, either.
Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006 The check is performed when no
In the case of an axis controlled only by move command is specified for the
PMC axis control (see parameter No. 1010), PMC axis. Otherwise, the
in-position check is: processing is determined by bit 6
0: Performed when no move command is (NCI) of parameter No. 8004.
specified for the PMC axis.
1: Always not performed. Bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004
When the PMC-controlled axis is
decelerated, in-position check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
No in-position check - Depends on bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. - Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007
signal for a 8007. is not available.
PMC-controlled axis and The no in-position check signal
no in-position check Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007 NOINPS<G023.5> and no
signals for individual For in-position check for a PMC axis, the no in-position check signals for
axes in-position check signal NOINPS<G023.5> individual axes NOINP1<G359> to
and no in-position check signals for NOINP5<G359> are disabled for
individual axes NOINP1<G359> to in-position check for a PMC axis.
NOINP5<G359> are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Minimum speed for rapid - Set the value in parameter No. 8021. - Parameter No. 8021 is not
traverse override in PMC available.
axis control The minimum speed for rapid
traverse override cannot be set.
Operation when - Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of parameter - Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of
instructing in machine No. 1008. parameter No. 1008 and bit 4
coordinate system (R20) of parameter No. 8013.
selection (20h) to the Bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008
axis to which roll-over is In the absolute commands, the axis rotates Bit 4 (R20) of parameter No.8013
effective in the direction: 0 1
0: In which the distance to the target is 0

Direction of Direction of
the shortest path the shortest path

shorter. Bit 1 (RAB) of
Direction of sign of
(Specified by the shortest path) parameter No.1008
1 the amount of the
Direction of sign of
command value
1: Specified by the sign of command value. movement to be made

None.
K.16 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)

Address P format - Depends on bit 2 (SBP) of parameter - To call a subprogram, the program
when calling a No. 3404. number must always be specified in
subprogram on the address P.
memory card (file Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 When calling a subprogram on the
number In the external device subprogram call memory card, the processing is not
- 872 -

specification/program M198, address P is specified using: dependent on the setting of bit 2 (SBP)
number specification) 0: File number. of parameter No. 3404.
1: Program number.
Multiple call alarm If a subprogram called by an external subprogram call specifies a further external
subprogram call, the following alarms are issued, respectively:
- Alarm PS0210 - Alarm PS1080
External subprogram - Enabled. - Depends on bit 1 (MDE) of parameter
call in MDI mode No. 11630.
Bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630

In MDI mode, an external device
subprogram call (M198 command) is:
0: Disabled. (Alarm PS1081 is issued.)
1: Enabled.

None.
K.17 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

Return from a - The calling program is searched from - The calling program is searched in a
subprogram to the the beginning, and control is returned forward direction from the block that
calling program's to the first block found to have called the subprogram, and control is
block that has a sequence number Nxxxxx. returned to the first block found to have
specified sequence sequence number Nxxxxx.
number If the specified sequence number is
Sequence number not found, the calling program is
search when (M99 searched from the beginning, and
Pxxxxx) is executed control is returned to the first block
found to have sequence number
Nxxxxx.
Example) Main program Sub program
O0001 ; O9001 ;
N100 ; (1) M99 P100 ;
N100 ; (2)
M98 P9001 ;
N100 ; (3)
N100 ; (4)
M30 ;
- [For Series 0i-PC] - [For Series 0i-PD]
Control is returned to block (1). Control is returned to block (3).
WARNING
Be sure to avoid writing two or more identical sequence numbers in a program.
Doing so may cause the search to find unintended blocks.

None.
- 873 -
K.18 STORED STROKE CHECK

Stored stroke check - This function is always enabled for all - It is possible to select whether to
immediately following axes. enable or disable the function on an
powering on axis-by-axis basis using bit 0 (DOT) of
parameter No. 1311.
Bit 0 (DOT) of parameter No. 1311

The stored stroke limit check immediately
following powering on is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This function stores machine coordinates
using software and therefore imposes a
burden on the system. Disable the
function for those axes that do not require
it. Movements made while the power is
off are not reflected on the machine
coordinate system immediately after
powering on.
- Machine coordinates are set upon - Machine coordinates are set upon
powering on. powering on.
Absolute and relative coordinates are not Absolute and relative coordinates are
set. set based on these machine
(They are set when the absolute position coordinates.
detector is provided.)
Overtravel alarm - Stored stoke check 2 does not support - Stored stoke check 2 also supports bit
bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300. 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300.
Therefore, if an interference alarm Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop
occurs, the tool stops after entering the before entering the prohibited area,
prohibited area. thus eliminating the need to make the
This makes it necessary to make the prohibited area slightly larger than
prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.
actually necessary.
Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300
If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm
occurs, the tool stops:
0: After entering the prohibited area.
1: Before entering the prohibited area.
Operation - When the operation is resumed, the - When the operation is resumed, the
continuation after tool moves the remaining travel tool moves toward the end point of the
automatic alarm distance of the block that caused the block that caused the soft OT, causing
cancellation when a soft OT. Therefore, the program can another soft OT and making it
soft OT1 alarm is be continued if the tool is moved impossible to continue the program.
issued during the through manual intervention beyond For details, refer to "STORED
execution of an the remaining travel distance. STROKE CHECK 1" in
absolute command in "CONNECTION MANUAL
automatic operation (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).
- 874 -

Block that judges the - A selection can be made using bit 5 - Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 is
distance to the stored (ODA) of parameter No. 7055. not available.
stroke limit in AI The distance is always judged with respect
advanced preview Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 to the axes specified in the current block.
control The distance to the stored stroke limit in AI
advanced preview control mode is judged
with respect to:
0: Axes specified in the current and next
blocks.
1: Axes specified in the current block.
The method of stored - If the end point of rapid traverse - For stroke check before movement,
stroke check positioning is in the forbidden area, the Either valid (1) or invalid (0) is selected
alarm is output without moving axes. by following parameter.
(Stroke check before movement is Parameter PLC (No.1301#7)
performed regardless of parameter
setting.)
Alarms for stroke - Following alarms are output for X and Y - Following alarms are output for each
check before axis. axis.
movement Alarm PS4700 : X axis +side Alarm OT510 : +side
Alarm PS4701 : X axis –side Alarm OT511 : -side
Alarm PS4702 : Y axis +side
Alarm PS4703 : Y axis -side

None.
- 875 -
K.19 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

Function Explanation
Value of parameter Reference position
No. 3621 for the 0.0
setting of a rotary axis
(type A) 45.0 315.0
(61) (68)
(60)
(62) (67)
(+)
90.0 270.0
(63) (66)
(64) (65)
135.0 225.0
Compensation values are output at
180.0 the positions indicated by ○.
- Amount of movement per rotation: 360°

- Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45°
- Number of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
In the above case, the values of the parameters are as follows.
Parameter Series 0i-PC Series 0i-PD
No. 3620: Number of the compensation position of
60 60
the reference position
No. 3621: Smallest compensation position number 60 61
No. 3622: Largest compensation position number 68 68
No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1 1
No. 3624: Interval between compensation positions 45000 45000
No. 3625: Amount of movement per rotation 360000 360000
The value of parameter No. 3621 is as follows.
Series 0i-PC
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620)
Series 0i-PD
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620) +
1

None.
- 876 -
K.20 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION

Behavior of the - When an alarm is issued (including one - When an alarm is issued (including
manual screen associated with the other path), the one associated with the other path),
erasure function manual screen erasure function is the manual screen erasure function is
("<CAN> + function enabled. disabled.
key") when an alarm is ("<CAN> + function key" erases the ("<CAN> + function key" does not
issued screen.) erase the screen.)
Redisplay of the - When the operation mode is switched while the screen is erased:
screen upon mode
The screen is not redisplayed. The screen is redisplayed.
switching
(The screen remains erased.)
Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation
signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the
screen when operation mode is switched.
Function key input - Select the behavior using bit 2 (NFU) of - Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 is
when the screen is parameter No. 3209. not available.
erased or displayed The tool always behaves as when 1 is
Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 set in bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No.
When a function key is pressed to erase or 3209.
display the screen for the screen erasure or
automatic screen erasure function, the
screen change using a function key is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
Time before the - Set the value in parameter No.3123.
automatic screen
The value range is 1 to 255 (minutes). The value range is 1 to 127 (minutes).
erasure function starts
Redisplay of the - When the external message is input while the screen is erased:
screen upon external
The screen is redisplayed. The screen is not redisplayed.
message
(The screen remains erased.)
Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation
signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the
screen when external message is input.

None.
- 877 -
K.21 RESET AND REWIND

Modal data when - If reset occurs during the execution of a block, the states of the modal G codes and
reset during the modal addresses (N, F, S, T, M, etc.) specified in that block are handled as follows.
execution of a block Maintained. Not maintained. The states return to
those of the modal data specified in the
preceding blocks.
(The modal data is updated after the
specified block is fully executed.)
Example) If reset occurs before

positioning is completed in the N2 block in
the program shown below, the T code and
offset return to the data of the preceding
tool (T0101) data.
N1 G00 X120. Z0. T0101 ;

;
N2 G00 X180. Z20. T0202 ;
;
Information in a block - The information in the block may or - The information in the block is not held
that is pre-read when may not be held depending on whether regardless whether MDI mode is in
a reset is made during MDI mode is in progress. progress.
an automatic In MDI mode
operation (contents of The information in the block is
the buffer) held.
In modes other than MDI mode
The information in the block is not
held.

None.
K.22 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON

Operation at - When the block intervened manually - In case of incremental command and
manual absolute on ends, the tool is at the position which bit 1 (ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is
shifts by manual intervention. (Fig.1) set to 0, when the block intervened
(Even incremental command and manually ends, the tool is at the
absolute command, the result is the position which shifts by manual
same) intervention. (Fig.1)
- In case of absolute command or bit 1
(ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is set to
1, when the block intervened manually
ends, the tool is at the programmed
position. (Fig.2)
- 878 -
After restarting operation, the tool moves the block of

the remainder in parallel to programmed path.
The tool returns to the end

restart point of next block by
operating the next block.
manual intervention
feed hold manual intervention amount
block intervened manually next block
programmed path Fig. 1
After restarting operation, the tool moves to the

end point of the block intervened manually.
restart
manual intervention The tool moves
the programmed path.
feed hold
block intervened manually next block
programmed path
Fig. 2

None.
K.23 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

Number of external - [Number of messages that can be set - [Number of messages that can be set
alarm messages and at a time] at a time]
message length Up to 4 messages Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
[Length of a message] No. 11931. When 0 is set, the
Up to 32 characters processing is the same as Series
0i-PC.
Bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931

The maximum number of external alarm
messages or external operator messages
that can be displayed in connection with
external data input or external messages
is:
0: 4.
1: 16.
[Length of a message]
Up to 32 characters
- 879 -

Display format of - [Alarm numbers that can be sent] - Depends on bit 0 (EXA) of parameter
external alarm 0 to 999 No. 6301.
messages [How to distinguish these numbers
from general alarm numbers] Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301
Add 1000 to the number sent Select the external alarm message
specification.
0: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 999. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with 1000
added to the number following the
character string "EX".
1: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 4095. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with the
character string "EX" added in front of
it.
Number of external - Depends on bit 0 (OM4) of parameter - Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 is
operator messages No. 3207. not available.
and message length [Number of messages that can be set
Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 at a time]
The external operator message screen can Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
display: No. 11931. Select either up to 4 or 16
0: Up to 256 characters in up to 1 messages.
message. [Length of a message]
1: Up to 64 characters in up to 4 256 characters or less
messages.
Display format of - [Message numbers that can be sent] - Depends on bit 1 (EXM) of parameter
external operator 0 to 999 No. 6301. When 0 is set, the
messages [How to distinguish these numbers processing is the same as Series
from alarm and other numbers] 0i-PC.
Messages from 0 to 99
The message is displayed on the Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301
screen along with the number. The Select the external operator message
CNC adds 2000 to this number for specification.
distinction. 0: The message numbers that can be
Messages from 100 to 999 sent range from 0 to 999.
Only the message is displayed on the A message from 0 to 99 is displayed
screen without the number. on the screen along with the number.
The CNC adds 2000 to this number for
distinction.
As for the messages from 100 to 999,
only the message is displayed on the
screen without the number.
1: The message numbers that can be
sent range from 0 to 4095.
A message from 0 to 99 is displayed
on the screen along with the number.
The CNC adds the character string
"EX" in front of the number.
As for the messages from 100 to 4095,
only the message is displayed on the
screen without the number.
Data range of external Parameter No. 6310
operator message The data range of external operator message numbers is as follows.
numbers
- 0 to 1000 - 0 to 4096
- 880 -

When an external - An alarm is not issued; the search is - Alarm DS0059 is issued.
program number not done, either.
search is done with 0
set as the program
number
Input of an external - The input is ignored without issuing an - Alarm DS1121 is issued.
tool offset for an alarm.
invalid function
compensation value

None.
K.24 DATA SERVER FUNCTION

Memory operation - The memory operation mode is not - In the memory operation mode, the
mode supported. following operations can be performed
for a program registered with the data
server:
1. Select the program on the data

server as the main program and
run it in the memory mode.
2. Call a subprogram or custom
macro in the same directory as the
main program on the data server.
3. Edit the program, including
inserting, deleting, and replacing
words.

None.
- 881 -
K.25 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER

4-slave display - By setting 1 in bit 0 (SLV) of parameter - Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 is
function No. 0960, it is possible to split the not available.
screen into four windows, enabling up One slave is always displayed.
to four slaves to be displayed. When there is more than one slave,
you switch the active slave by using
Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 the relevant soft key.
When Power Mate CNC Manager is
selected, the screen:
0: Displays one slave.
1: Is split into four windows, enabling up
to four slaves to be displayed.

None.
K.26 CUTTER COMPENSATION

Cutter compensation - In Series 0i-PD, the cutter compensation C functions of Series 0i-PC are collectively
referred to as cutter compensation.
Corner circular - Enabled by setting 1 in bit 2 (G39) of - Available.
interpolation (G39) parameter No. 5008. It is included in cutter compensation.
Since corner circular interpolation (G39)
is always enabled, bit 2 (G39) of
parameter No. 5008 is not available.
Cutter compensation - Cutter compensation C is not available - Cutter compensation is also available in
in MDI operation in MDI operation. MDI operation.
Single block stop - The single block stop position differs as shown below.
position during the
cutter compensation
mode L
Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r
L Tool center path
L L
Series 0i-PD single block stop
Series 0i-PC single block stop
- 882 -

Function to change - Not available. - At the start of or during the cutter
the compensation compensation mode, specify I, J, or K in
direction intentionally a G00 or G01 block. This makes the
(IJ type vector, KI compensation vector at the end point of
type vector, and JK the block perpendicular to the direction
type vector) specified by I, J, or K. This way, you
can change the compensation direction
intentionally.
Stop position upon - If the specified radius value for circular interpolation is smaller than that for cutter
an overcutting alarm compensation, as in the example below, performing compensation inwardly through
cutter compensation causes overcutting, generating an alarm and stopping the tool.
The stop position differs.
N1
Tool center path
P1
P2
Programmed path
Workpiece N2
P3
N3
Cutting as
programmed causes
overcutting.
[When single block stop occurs in the preceding block in Series 0i-PC]
Since the tool moves until it reaches the end point of the block (P3 in the figure),
overcutting may result.
[When single block stop does not occur in the preceding block in Series 0i-PC]
The tool stops immediately after executing the block (P2 in the figure).
[In the case of Series 0i-PD]
Since the tool stops at the start point of the block (P1 in the figure), regardless of the
single block state, overcutting can be prevented.
Single block stop in a - Not available. - Depends on bit 0 (SBK) of parameter
block created No. 5000.
internally for cutter
compensation Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000
In a block created internally for cutter
compensation, single block stop is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
This parameter is used to check a program
including cutter compensation.
- 883 -

Setting to disable - Set 1 in bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. - Not available.
interference checking 5008. (Bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. 5008 is
and to delete In the example below, an interference not available.)
interfering vectors check is made on the vectors inside V1 To prevent overcutting, the interference
and V4, and the interfering vectors are check avoidance function (bit 5 (CAV) of
deleted. As a result, the tool center parameter No. 19607) is used.
path is from V1 to V4. In the example below, interference
occurs between V1 and V4 and between
V2 and V3. Therefore, vectors VA and
VB are created. The tool center path is
from VA to VB.
[In the case of Series 0i-PC]
Tool center path
Programmed path
V4 V1
V3 V2
[In the case of Series 0i-PD]
Tool center path
Programmed path
VA VB
V4 V1
V3 V2
Number of blocks to - Always 3 blocks - The number can be set in parameter

be read in the cutter No. 19625. The specifiable range is 3
compensation mode to 8 blocks.
If the parameter is not set (0 is set), the
same number as Series 0i-PC (3
blocks) is assumed.
- 884 -

When circular - Alarm PS0038 is issued, and the tool - Alarm PS0041 is issued, and the tool
interpolation is stops at the end point of the block stops at the start point of the block
specified that causes preceding the circular interpolation preceding the circular interpolation
the center to coincide block. block.
with the start or end
point during the
cutter compensation
mode
Behavior when - Depends on bit 2 (CCN) of parameter - Bit 2 (CCN) of parameter No. 5003 is
automatic reference No. 5003. not available. The tool always behaves
position return is as when CCN is set to 1.
specified during the [When CCN = 0]
cutter compensation The offset vector is canceled when the tool moves to the middle point.
mode Also, the start-up operation is performed from the reference position.
Intermediate
point
S G28 S S G01
G00 r
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
[When CCN = 1 or for Series 0i-PD]

The offset vector is not canceled when the tool moves to the middle point; it is
canceled when the tool moves to the reference position.
Also, the tool moves from the reference position to the next intersection point.
Intermediate
point
S G28 S S G01
r
G00
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
- 885 -

Travel distance - Depends on bit 5 (QCR) of parameter - Bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008 is
judgment method for No. 5008. not available. The tool always behaves
circular interpolation as when QCR is set to 1.
in cutter [When QCR = 0] [When QCR = 1 or for Series 0i-D]
compensation B
C B L
Start point
Start point
D A
End End A
point point
Center Center
If the end point is on side A when viewed If the end point is on side A of line L
from the start point, the travel distance is connecting the start point and center, the
small. If it is on side B, C, or D, the tool travel distance is small. If it is on side B,
has traveled almost one round. the tool has traveled almost one round.
Compensation vector - Connected by linear interpolation. - Depends on bit 2 (CCC) of parameter
connection method No. 19607.
when the tool travels [When CCC = 0 or for Series 0i-C] [When CCC = 1]
around an external Connect vectors by linear Connect vectors by circular
corner during the interpolation interpolation
cutter compensation
mode

None.
- 886 -
K.27 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE

The parameter to Either invalid (1) or valid (0) is selected by Either invalid (1) or valid (0) is selected for
validate rapid traverse following parameter. each axis by following parameter.
override function for T Parameter TCO (No.16052#1) Parameter OVEx (No.16844#1)
or C axis

None.
K.28 POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATIONS

The function of "changing rapid traverse rate, time constant and servo loop gain according to the
positioning distance" for Series 0i-PC is integrated into the function of "positioning by optimum
accelerations" in Series 0i-PD.
Parameters to validate Either valid (1) or invalid (0) is selected for For Changing rapid traverse rate and time
this function each axis kind by following parameters. constant (7 levels), either valid (1) or invalid
(For X or Y axis) (0) is selected for each axis by following
Parameter KLV (No.16050#7) parameter.
: Changing rapid traverse rate and time Parameter OADx (No.6131#0)
constant (7 levels) For Changing servo loop gain (7 levels),
Parameter LPG (No.16051#4) either valid (1) or invalid (0) is selected by
: Changing servo loop gain (7 levels) following parameter. (All axes in same path
(For T axis) are affected by this parameter.)
Parameter KLT (No.16051#3) Parameter ILG (No.6132#0)
: Changing time constant and servo loop
gain (3 levels)
(For C axis)
Parameter KLC (No.16050#4)
: Changing rapid traverse rate and time
constant (3 levels)
Parameters to set Following parameters are used for each Following parameters are used for each
distance for changing axis kind. axis.
(For X or Y axis) Parameter No.6136 to 6138
Parameter No.16055 to 16060 Parameter No.11230 to 11232
: mm
Parameter No.16061 to 16066
: inch
(For T axis)
(For C axis)
- 887 -

rapid traverse rate for axis kind. axis.
each level (For X axis) Parameter No.6161 to 6167
(For Y axis)
(For C axis)
time constant for each axis kind. axis.
level (For X axis) Parameter No.6171 to 6177
(For Y axis)
(For T axis)
(For C axis)
servo loop gain for axis kind. axis.
each level (For X axis) Parameter No.6181 to 6187
Parameter No.16103 to 16109 If changing servo loop gain is valid and 0 is
(For Y axis) set to these parameters for an axis, servo
Parameter No.16110 to 16116 loop gain of this axis is not changed.
(For T axis)
Parameters to set None. Following parameters are used for each
time constant of axis.
bell-shaped Parameter No.6191 to 6197
acceleration /
deceleration for each
level
time during which PF axis kind. axis.
is set to 1 prior to end (For X axis) Parameter No.16857 to 16863
of positioning for each Parameter No.16013 to 16019
level (For Y axis)
(For C axis)

None.
K.29 CONSTANT CONTROL OF POSITIONING TIME

The parameter to Either valid (1) or invalid (0) is selected by Either valid (1) or invalid (0) is selected for
validate this function following parameter. each axis by following parameter.
Parameter PCT (No.16050#6) Parameter PT2x (No.16844#6)
- 888 -

Parameters to set Following parameters are used for each Following parameter is used for each axis.
positioning time of axis kind. Parameter No.16878
level 1 (For override of (For X axis)
100% or 75%) Parameter No.16095
(For Y axis)
Parameter No.16099
(For Y axis)
Parameter No.16101
(For Y axis)
Parameter No.16100
(For Y axis)
Parameter No.16102
The parameter to Either double (1) or not (0) is selected by Positioning time becomes double by
double setting value following parameter. doubling value of parameter No.16878 to
for positioning time Parameter CT2 (No.16050#5) 16881.

None.
- 889 -
B-64554EN/01 INDEX
INDEX
C–axis Command in Nibbling Mode............................325
<Number> CHANGING PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES...................513
10.4" LCD ....................................................................346 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System ......................60
8.4" LCD/MDI .............................................................345 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE
TABLE.....................................................................799
<A> Check by Running the Machine...................................334
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY................437
PROGRAMMING (G90, G91)...................................66 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION .................................849
ACTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN A PROBLEM CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)................28
OCCURRED ............................................................658 Circular Nibbling (G68).................................................75
Actual Feedrate Display ...............................................531 Circular Punch Commands (G46 and G47)..................157
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL ....................861 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN
AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (G05.1).......300 CUSTOM MACROS................................................283
ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS......434 Color Setting Screen ....................................................591
Alarm Display .......................................................341,434 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS -
ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY ...................................436 AUXILIARY FUNCTION.........................................16
ALARM LIST..............................................................806 Command for Restarting Machining Multiple Products150
Altering a Word ...........................................................485 COMPACT-TYPE MDI KEY INPUT.........................505
Arc (G77) .....................................................................121 Compensating Backlash Along the C–axis for Each
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION ...............256 Tool Group ...............................................................326
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..........................322 Compensating the Position of the C–axis.....................326
Automatic Coordinate System Setting ...........................63 COMPENSATION FUNCTION .................................160
Automatic Corner Override............................................45 Conditional Branch (IF Statement) ..............................265
AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE Confirmation of a data update during the data setting
NUMBERS...............................................................474 process......................................................................418
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ...............................333,380 Confirmation of incremental input...............................416
Automatic override for inner corners (G62)...................45 Confirmation of the deletion of all data .......................418
AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ....................135 Confirmation of the deletion of the program................417
Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching.............315 Confirmation of the start from a middle block.............420
Automatic Setting of the Safety Zone ..........................431 CONSTANT CONTROL OF POSITIONING TIME ..888
AUXILIARY FUNCTION.............................................95 CONTROLLED AXES..................................................20
AUXILIARY FUNCTION (M FUNCTION).................95 Controlling the C–axis .................................................158
Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control ......311 CONTROLLING THE TURRET-AXIS (T-AXIS) .......90
Axis Control by PMC...................................................375 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH
AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS .................................311 GRAPHIC FUNCTION ...........................................475
Axis status display .......................................................420 COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................56
Axis Synchronization Control ......................................374 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ...................311,862 System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System ........13
Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..318 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G84, G85)...224
COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION...............66
<B> Copy Specifying a Program Number ...........................501
Background Editing .....................................................543 Copying a Part of a Program........................................491
BACKING UP VARIOUS DATA ITEMS ..................659 Copying an Entire Program..........................................497
Base Point Command (G72).........................................117 COPYING/MOVING PROGRAMS............................491
Base Point Command of Multi-Piece Machining (G98)145 Copying/Moving to the Key-in Buffer.........................502
Battery in the PANEL i (3 VDC) .................................664 CREATING PROGRAMS...........................................473
BENDING COMPENSATION (G38, G39).................152 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI
Block in which Punching is Made..................................71 PANEL.....................................................................473
Blocks Where C–axis Command is Possible................323 Current Block Display Screen (Only for the 8.4-Inch
Bolt Hole Circle (G26).................................................118 Display Unit)............................................................541
BRANCH AND REPETITION....................................264 Current Position Display ..............................................340
CUSTOM MACRO .............................................. 231,858
<C> Cut at Angle (G89).......................................................130
C AXIS CONTROL (DIE ANGLE INDEXING) ........321
CUTTER COMPENSATION ......................................882
C–axis Command and its Operation.............................323
CUTTING FEED ...........................................................42
i-1
INDEX B-64554EN/01
CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL .............................43 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting
screen .......................................................................597
<D> Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen....598
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT .............................................440 Displaying and setting the high-precision setting
Data range check..........................................................421 screen .......................................................................611
DATA SERVER FUNCTION .....................................881 Displaying and setting the miscellaneous setting
DATA TYPE................................................................781 screen .......................................................................613
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING..........................69 Displaying and setting the servo gain tuning screen ....601
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND Displaying and setting the servo setting screen............599
NOTE ........................................................................s-1 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen ............613
Deleting a Block...........................................................486 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator’s Panel 558
DELETING A PROGRAM..........................................513 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Deleting a Word ...........................................................485 Value ........................................................................555
Deleting All Programs..................................................490 Displaying and Switching the Display Language ........561
DELETING BLOCKS .................................................486 Displaying the Floppy Cassette Screen........................469
Deleting Multiple Blocks .............................................486 Displaying the Memory Card Screen ...........................461
Deleting One Program..................................................490 Displaying the menu screen and selecting a menu item593
DELETING PROGRAMS ...........................................490 Displaying the Program Number, and Sequence Number
Deletion of Stored Macros ...........................................145 ..................................................................................633
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS...........................671 DISPLAYING THE PROGRAM NUMBER,
Details of Functions .....................................................290 SEQUENCE NUMBER, AND STATUS, AND
DETAILS OF TOOL RADIUS COMPENSATION....175 WARNING MESSAGES FOR DATA SETTING OR
DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-PC.......................848 INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION ..............................633
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Displaying the Safety Zones and Tool Zone ................432
Measured ..................................................................555 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or
DISPLAY.....................................................................339 Input/Output Operation ............................................634
Display of Run Time and Parts Count..........................533 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE372
Display of updated modal information.........................419 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder ..................................374
Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..........................549 DNC OPERATION......................................................385
Displaying and Operating the File List .................462,469 DRY RUN....................................................................404
Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common DWELL .........................................................................50
Variables...................................................................557
DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA.......................336 <E>
Displaying and setting items on the initial tool EDIT DISABLE ATTRIBUTE....................................480
registration screen.....................................................567 EDITING A PROGRAM ...................................... 336,536
Displaying and Setting Items on the Safety Zone Setting EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS ............................503
Screen .......................................................................578 EDITING PROGRAMS...............................................480
Displaying and setting items on the screen for the EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS ................465
number of press operations.......................................570 EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................408
Displaying and setting items on the tool figure ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE................................843
registration screen (for drawing figures) ..................572 Exact Stop (G09, G61), Cutting Mode (G64) ................44
Displaying and setting items on the tool figure EXAMPLE...................................................................647
registration screen for multiple tools (for drawing Explanation of Operations............................................832
figures) .....................................................................575 EXPLANATION OF THE MDI UNIT........................349
Displaying and setting items on the tool number EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................879
registration screen.....................................................569 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICES.........................................360
Displaying and setting items on the tool number EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION.............................86
registration screen for multiple tools ........................574 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS........................284
Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ..... 391,872
Screen for Multiple Tools.........................................574
Displaying and Setting Items on the Tool Registration <F>
Screens .....................................................................567 F1-digit (Programmable Rapid Traverse Override) .......42
Displaying and Setting Parameters...............................582 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE
Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation TABLE.....................................................................800
Data ..........................................................................584 FEED FUNCTIONS ......................................................40
Displaying and Setting Run Time, Parts Count, and FEED-FEED FUNCTION .............................................12
Time .........................................................................553 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY
Displaying and setting the axis setting screen..............596 CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXIS..............................47
i-2
B-64554EN/01 INDEX
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ............................................402 Inputting pitch error compensation data.......................447
File Format...................................................................461 Inputting tool data ........................................................453
FLOPPY CASSETTE SCREEN ..................................469 Inputting workpiece coordinate system data ................451
FTP File Transfer Function ..........................................465 Inputting/Outputting a File.................................... 463,470
Function Keys ..............................................................351 Inputting/Outputting a Program ...................................455
FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS.......................350 Inputting/Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables
Functions that are Used When Data is Set ...................415 ..................................................................................459
Functions that are Used when the Program is Executed418 Inputting/Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Data..458
FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING .......116 Inserting a Word ..........................................................484
INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A
<G> WORD......................................................................481
G CODE LIST ...............................................................23 Interference Check .......................................................211
G00 Command in Nibbling Mode..................................82 Interference check alarm function................................215
G01, G02, and G03 Commands in Nibbling Mode ........83 Interference check avoidance function.........................216
GENERAL .............................................................3,9,331 Internal circular cutting feedrate change........................47
General Screen Operations...........................................350 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS.................................25
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............s-2 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO...... 288,860
GOTO Statement Using Stored Sequence Numbers ....264 ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL..................845
GRAPHIC DISPLAY SCREEN AND DRAWING.....644
GRAPHIC FUNCTION ...............................................638 <J>
Graphical Conversational Programming Screen ..........541 JOG FEED (JOG) ........................................................363
Grid (G78, G79) ...........................................................122
<K>
<H> Key Input and Input Buffer ..........................................359
Heading a Program.......................................................483
HELICAL INTERPOLATION ....................................850 <L>
HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ...................32 Limitations ...................................................................653
HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS.....................300 Line at Angle (G76) .....................................................120
HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G33).............................36 LINEAR AND CIRCULAR PUNCH COMMAND ....154
How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) ..............................26
Tool (Absolute and Incremental Programming) .........15 Linear Nibbling (G69) ...................................................79
How to View the Position Display Change without Linear Punch Command (G45) ....................................154
Running the Machine ...............................................336 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED
REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL)...........................376
<I> List of Error Message...................................................843
INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) ................66 LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT 786
INCREMENT SYSTEM.........................................20,322 List of Functions of PC Tool........................................831
Incremental Command Just After Pattern Function .....130 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ........................63,856
INCREMENTAL FEED ..............................................364
Input data range check .................................................415 <M>
Input/output format of pitch error compensation data..448 M COMMAND FOR SWITCHING THE PUNCH
INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN.......................443 AND LASER MODE ...............................................100
INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN............454 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM..........................56
Inputting a program......................................................443 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION
Inputting and Outputting a Program.............................443 LOCK.......................................................................401
Inputting and Outputting Custom Macro Common Macro Call ............................................................ 142,268
Variables...................................................................449 Macro Call Using a G Code .........................................273
Inputting and Outputting Offset Data....................446,457 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple
Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data.452,460 Definitions) ..............................................................275
Inputting and Outputting Parameters.....................445,456 Macro Call Using an M Code ......................................275
Inputting and Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple
Data ..........................................................................447 Definitions) ..............................................................276
Inputting and Outputting Workpiece Coordinates MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS..263
System Data.......................................................451,460 Macro Storage Capacity...............................................144
Inputting custom macro common variables..................449 MAKING A PROGRAM COMPACT.........................514
Inputting offset data .....................................................446 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON................................. 368,878
Inputting Outputting Tool Data....................................453 Manual Continuous Feed, Incremental Feed, Manual
Inputting parameters.....................................................445 Reference Point Return ............................................322
i-3
INDEX B-64554EN/01
MANUAL HANDLE FEED .................................365,867 Outputting a program ...................................................444

MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION .....................393 Outputting all history data............................................630
MANUAL OPERATION......................................331,362 Outputting custom macro common variables...............450
MANUAL PUNCH......................................................407 Outputting offset data...................................................447
MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN..362,853 Outputting operation history data.................................452
Maximum incremental value check .............................421 Outputting parameters..................................................445
Maximum Programmable Dimension ..........................322 Outputting pitch error compensation data ....................448
MAXIMUM STROKE...................................................21 Outputting tool data .....................................................453
MDI OPERATION ......................................................382 Outputting workpiece coordinate system data .............452
MEMORY AND CALL BY A/B MACRO .................134 Overall Position Display ..............................................529
MEMORY CARD SCREEN........................................461 OVERTRAVEL ...........................................................408
MEMORY OPERATION ............................................380 OVERVIEW .................................................... 40,175,665
METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY ....................660 Overview of the History Function................................624
Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error OVERVIEW OF TOOL COMPENSATION (G40-G42)
Check........................................................................317 ..................................................................................170
MIRROR IMAGE ........................................................399 OVERWRITING FILES ON A MEMORY CARD.....441
Miscellaneous...............................................................860
Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)......272 <P>
Moving a Part of a Program .........................................494 Parameter Setting Support Screen................................593
Moving an Entire Program...........................................499 PARAMETERS ...........................................................671
Multi–Piece Machining Commands (G73, G74)..........148 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT ............12
MULTI–PIECE MACHINING FUNCTION ...............145 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.97 REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS..............................102
MULTIPLE TOOL CONTROL.....................................90 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display ......................341
MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) ............................................35 PASSWORD FUNCTION ...........................................504
Password modification .................................................564
<N> PATTERN FUNCTION...............................................116
NAMES OF AXES ........................................................20 Pattern Function, Nibbling Function and C–axis
NAMING RULES........................................................840 Command .................................................................324
Naming Rules of Folder ...............................................841 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM
Naming Rules of Program File.....................................840 OPERATION/EDITING ..........................................831
Nesting Call of Macros ................................................143 Periodic Maintenance Screen.......................................615
Next Block Display Screen ..........................................539 PLANE SELECTION ....................................................65
NIBBLING BY M FUNCTION.....................................82 PMC AXIS CONTROL ...............................................868
NIBBLING FUNCTION................................................73 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System....527
NOMOGRAPHS..........................................................793 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System526
NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL POSITIONING & PRESSING OFF (G70) ....................73
(G40.1,G41.1,G42.1, or G150,G151, G152) ............166 POSITIONING (G00) ....................................................25
Note.......................................................................375,844 POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATIONS.887
Notes on Circular Nibbling (G68) and Linear Nibbling Positioning in Smaller Angle Rotating Direction.........323
(G69) ..........................................................................80 Power Disconnection ...................................................344
Notes on Nibbling by M Function..................................86 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER .............................882
Notes on Pattern Functions ..........................................133 POWER ON/OFF ........................................................343
NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL .......................5 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) ..........22
NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA.....................5 PRESS FUNCTION.......................................................71
NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES..........................20 Press Motion by RAM-axis Control.............................327
Prevention of Overcutting Due to Tool Radius
<O> Compensation...........................................................208
Operating Monitor Display ..........................................534 Procedure for Reference Position Establishment .........372
OPERATION ...............................................................639 PROCESSING MACRO STATEMENTS ...................281
Operation confirmation function setting screen ...........423 PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES.........................................101
Operation history..........................................................624 Program Check Screen.................................................540
Operation level setting .................................................562 PROGRAM CODE LIST.............................................784
Operation to be performed if an interference is judged to PROGRAM COMPONENTS OTHER THAN
occur .........................................................................214 PROGRAM SECTIONS ..........................................104
OPERATIONAL DEVICES ........................................343 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ...........................17,103
Operational Notes...........................................................93 Program Contents Display ...........................................535
Output format of tool data............................................454 Program Display ..........................................................339
i-4
B-64554EN/01 INDEX
Program List Screen .....................................................538 SAFETY ZONE CHECK ............................................427
PROGRAM MANAGEMENT .............................101,508 SCALING (G50, G51) .................................................160
Program Screen for MDI Operation .............................538 SCHEDULE OPERATION .........................................387
PROGRAM SEARCH .................................................487 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND
PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION...............106 AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT...............296 FUNCTION....................................................... 636,877
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)296,860 SCREEN HARD COPY FUNCTION..........................471
Prohibition of the absolute input by the soft key..........417 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 526
Protection level setting.................................................565
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 535
Protection of Data at Eight Levels ...............................562
PUNCH ........................................................................406 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 547
Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 582
(Type A) ...................................................................428
Punch Forbidden Area and Approach Forbidden Area SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY 633
(Type B) ...................................................................429 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) .....98
PUNCH FUNCTION (1-CYCLE PRESSING)..............71 SELECTING A DEVICE ............................................508
Selecting a From Cassette as a Device.........................512
<R> SELECTING A MAIN PROGRAM ............................514
Radius (G88) ................................................................129 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device...........509
RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE Selecting a Workpiece Coordinate System ....................59
CUTTING ................................................................796 Selecting operation history signals...............................629
RAM-AXIS CONTROL ..............................................326 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS
RAM-axis Up Motion ..................................................327 MACHINING - TOOL FUNCTION..........................16
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE .............................791 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop .....................551
RAPID TRAVERSE ......................................................41 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ....................... 488,873
RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ........................403,887 Servo Setting................................................................587
Rapid Traverse Rate by F Command .............................41 Servo Tuning................................................................590
READING PARAMETERS.........................................262 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System........................58
REFERENCE POSITION..............................................52 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS .............................344
Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) ............12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA.......................516
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ......................52,373 Setting and Displaying the Tool Compensation Value 547
Register and Change of Tool Life Management Data ....93 Setting of Machining Method for Multi–Piece
REGISTERING CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMS ....283 Machining ................................................................149
REGISTERING THE TOOL FIGURE ........................639 Setting RAM-axis Motion Pattern................................326
RELATED PARAMETERS ........................................101 Setting Screen ..............................................................422
Relationship between the Multiple–Tool System and the Setting the Safety Zone ................................................430
C Axis.........................................................................92 Setting the Tool Shape Area ........................................430
Relationship with Absolute/Incremental Command SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE,
(G90/G91) ................................................................323 OR IN THE RESET STATE....................................797
Repetition (WHILE Statement)....................................266 Share Proofs (G86).......................................................125
REPLACING ...............................................................503 Simple Call (G65) ........................................................269
Replacing batteries .......................................................666 Simultaneously Controlled Axes..................................322
Replacing Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders................665 SINGLE BLOCK.........................................................405
Replacing Battery for CNC Control Unit.....................660 SKIP FUNCTION........................................................851
Replacing the batteries in a separate battery case ........666 SKIP FUNCTION (G33) ...............................................33
Replacing the battery built into the servo amplifier .....667 SKIP POSITION MACRO VARIABLE
RESET AND REWIND ...............................................878 IMPROVEMENT.......................................................36
RESTRICTIONS..........................................................287 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)........................................347
RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN .................438 Soft Keys......................................................................352
ROTARY AXIS ROLL-OVER....................................320 Specification Method ...................................................289
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ......................................657 SPECIFYING DRAWING PARAMETERS ...............640
RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE.....841 SPECIFYING THE S CODE WITH A BINARY CODE
RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ..........867 ....................................................................................87
Square (G87)................................................................127
<S> Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)...................................347
S FUNCTION ................................................................87 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES......783
SAFETY FUNCTIONS ...............................................408 Start check signal .........................................................419
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1
i-5
INDEX B-64554EN/01
Storage and Call of Multiple Macros (Macro Numbers <V>

90 to 99) ...................................................................144 VARIABLES ...............................................................231
Storage of Macros ........................................................141 VIRTUAL MDI KEY ..................................................650
STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION............876 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION .............................650
STORED STROKE CHECK ................................409,874
STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE ...............412 <W>
SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)......................................112 Warning display during a reset in program operation ..422
Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .................279 Warning Messages .......................................................360
Subprogram Call Using an M Code .............................277 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of HANDLING.............................................................. s-4
Multiple Definitions) ................................................278 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
Subprogram Calls Using a T Code...............................278 PROGRAMMING..................................................... s-3
Synchronous Error Check ............................................316 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY
Synchronous Establishment .........................................314 MAINTENANCE...................................................... s-6
System Configuration Screen.......................................622 Word Search.................................................................482
SYSTEM VARIABLES...............................................236 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM ..............58,855
Workpiece Coordinate System Preset ..........................530
<T> Workpiece Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)...............61
T COMMAND NEGLECT ............................................89 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen ...............426
TANDEM CONTROL .................................................321 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION
T–axis Command Ignore Signal TNG and C–axis FUNCTIONS ...........................................................414
Command .................................................................325
TEST OPERATION.....................................................401 <Y>
TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................334 Y–AXIS CRACK CANCEL........................................159
Tool Compensation ........................................................92
TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY ........................857
TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER OF
COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ENTERING
VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) ..............223
TOOL DATA INPUT ..................................................298
TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) .............................88
Tool Life ........................................................................94
Tool Life Management Data ..........................................93
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................93
TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS
FIGURE-INTERPOLATION.....................................10
TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING -
AUTOMATIC OPERATION...................................332
Tool Movement in Offset Mode...................................184
Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel.......................202
Tool Movement in Start-up ..........................................179
TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE....................19
Tool Number ..................................................................91
TOOL OFFSET..............................................................90
Tool offset range setting screen ...................................424
TOOL PATH AT CORNER ........................................793
Tool Radius Compensation for Input from MDI..........222
TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................88
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP..................................................36
Turning on the Power...................................................343
<U>
U/V/W MACRO FUNCTION .....................................141
Unconditional Branch (GOTO Statement) ...................264
Usable Characters in Program File...............................841
Usage Notes .................................................................831
i-6
B-64554EN/01 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
01 Feb., 2011
r-1

8 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

8 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 0+-PD

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

4.6 MULTI-STEP SKIP (G33) ............................................................................ 35

9.5 EXTERNAL MOTION FUNCTION ............................................................... 86

12 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................................ 95

15.3 AUTOMATIC REPOSITIONING (G75) ...................................................... 135

17.7 MACRO CALL ........................................................................................... 268

18 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)................................ 296

20.5 RAM-AXIS CONTROL............................................................................... 326

2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES .................................................................. 343

6.6.4 Setting the Tool Shape Area.................................................................................430

7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS.................................. 434

12.1.3 Overall Position Display ......................................................................................529

A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES......................................... 783

J ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL............................................. 845

K.22 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON ......................................................................... 878

About this manual

Model name Abbreviation

Related manuals of Series 0i-PD

Table 1 Related manuals

Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi/βi series

Table 2 Related manuals

1.1 NOTES ON READING THIS MANUAL

1.2 NOTES ON VARIOUS KINDS OF DATA

1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION .....................10

(1) Punching is performed after positioning

Punching Punching Program command

Tool T01 Tool T02

#1 to #n：The order of punching operation

1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-

- Tool movement along a straight line

Fig. 1.1 (a) Tool movement along a straight line

- Tool movement along an arc

Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc

Fig. 1.1 (c) Interpolation function

1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION

Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function

1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT

1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position)

Distance between reference point

The distance between the

Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Reference position

1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System

Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system

230 Present tool position

300 Distance to the zero point of a coor-

Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC

Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same position

End locator Face A

1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool

Command specifying movement G90 X10.0 Y30.0 ;

Command specifying movement G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 ;

Distance and direction for movement

1.4 SELECTION OF TOOL USED FOR VARIOUS MACHINING -

<When No.01 is assigned to a punching tool>

1.5 COMMAND FOR MACHINE OPERATIONS - AUXILIARY

1.6 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION